90 001 en

EDKVS93−01
.MñP
Ä.MñPä
Information for the operator of the machine
9300 0.37 ... 11 kW
EVS9321−xx ... EVS9326−xx
Servo controller

9300std078
Key for overview
Position Description
Controller
Fixing rails for standard mounting
Cover for the motor connection
Shield connection support with fixing screws (2 items)
1 support for the shield sheet for the supply connections
1 support for the shield sheet for the motor cable
EMC shield sheet with fixing screws (2 items)
1 shield sheet for the supply connections
1 shield sheet for the motor cable and the feed cable for the motor temperature monitoring with PTC ther-
mistor or thermal contact (NC contact)
EMC shield sheet with fixing screws for shielded control cables
Cover for the supply connections
Connections and interfaces

L1, L2, L3, PE Mains connection
+UG, −UG DC supply
U, V, W, PE Motor connection
T1, T2 Connection of PTC thermistor or thermal contact (NC contact) of the motor
X1 AIF interface (automation interface)
Slot for communication module (e. g. XT EMZ9371BC keypad)
X3 Jumper for setting analog input signal at X6/1, X6/2
X4 System bus (CAN) connection
X5 Connection of digital inputs and outputs
X6 Connection of analog inputs and outputs
X7 Connection of resolver and KTY temperature sensor of the motor
X8 Connection of incremental encoder with TTL level or SinCos encoder and KTY temperature sensor of the motor
X9 Connection of digital frequency input signal
X10 Connection of digital frequency output signal
X11 Connection of KSR relay output for "safe standstill" (for variants V004 and V104 only)
Status displays
Position LED red LED green Operating status
Off On Controller enabled
On On Mains is switched on and automatic start is inhibited
Off Blinking slowly Controller inhibited
Blinking quickly Off Undervoltage or overvoltage
Blinking slowly Off Active fault
0Fig. 0Tab. 0
i Contents
1 About this documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

1.1 Document history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.2 Target group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3 Validity information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.4 Conventions used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.5 Notes used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.1 General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2 Thermal motor monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.2.1 Forced ventilated or naturally ventilated motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.2.2 Self−ventilated motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.3 Residual hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.4 Safety instructions for the installation according to UL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.1 Parameter setting with the XT EMZ9371BC keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.1.1 General data and operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.1.2 Installation and commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.1.3 Display elements and function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.1.4 Changing and saving parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.1.5 Loading a parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.1.6 Transferring parameters to other standard devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.1.7 Activating password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.1.8 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.1.9 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4 Troubleshooting and fault elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

4.1 Display of operating data, diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.2.1 Status display via controller LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.2.2 Fault analysis with the history buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.2.3 Fault analysis via LECOM status words (C0150/C0155) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4.3 System error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.3.1 General error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.3.2 Resetting system error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0
About this documentation 1
Document history
1 About this documentation
Note!
This documentation contains all necessary information for the machine
operator to be able to operate the servo controllers of the 9300 series installed
in your machine/plant.
You can make further use of all information in this documentation without
consulting Lenze if you do not make any changes to the contents.
1.1 Document history
What is new / what has changed?

Material number Version Description
.MñP 3.0 07/2013 TD06 Error corrections
13330541 2.1 03/2010 TD23 Change of the company’s address
13330541 2.0 03/2010 TD14 New edition due to reorganisation of the company
UL−warnings updated
Revision for software version 8x
13231631 1.0 11/2007 TD34 First edition
Tip!
Information and auxiliary devices related to the Lenze products can be found
in the download area at
http://www.Lenze.com
1.2 Target group
This documentation is directed at qualified skilled personnel according to IEC 60364.

Qualified skilled personnel are persons who have the required qualifications to carry out
all activities involved in installing, mounting, commissioning, and operating the product.
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 5
Validity information
1.3 Validity information
... 9300 servo controllers as of nameplate data:

Nameplate
EVS 93xx ˘ x x Vxxx 1x 8x
Product series
EVS = Servo controller
Type no. / rated power
400 V 480 V
9321 = 0.37 kW 0.37 kW
9322 = 0.75 kW 0.75 kW
9323 = 1.5 kW 1.5 kW
9324 = 3.0 kW 3.0 kW
9325 = 5.5 kW 5.5 kW
9326 = 11 kW 11 kW
Type
E= Panel−mounted unit
9300vec112
C= Built−in unit in "cold plate" technique
Design
I= Servo PLC
K= Servo cam
P= Servo position controller
R= Register controller
S= Servo inverter
T= Servo PLC technology
Variant
˘ Standard
V003 = In "cold plate" technique
V004 = With "safe standstill" function
V100 = For IT mains
V104 = With "safe standstill" function and for IT mains
Hardware version
Software version
6 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0
Conventions used
1.4 Conventions used
This documentation uses the following conventions to distinguish between different

types of information:
Type of information Identification Examples/notes
Spelling of numbers
Decimal separator language−dependen In each case, the signs typical for the target
t language are used as decimal separators.
For example: 1234.56 or 1234,56
Warnings
UL warnings
Are only given in English.
UR warnings
Text
Program name »« PC software
For example: »Engineer«, »Global Drive
Control« (GDC)
Icons
Page reference Reference to another page with additional
information
For instance: 16 = see page 16
Documentation reference Reference to another documentation with
additional information
For example: EDKxxx = see
documentation EDKxxx
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 7
Notes used
1.5 Notes used
The following pictographs and signal words are used in this documentation to indicate
dangers and important information:
Safety instructions
Structure of safety instructions:
Danger!
(characterises the type and severity of danger)
Note
(describes the danger and gives information about how to prevent dangerous
situations)
Pictograph and signal word Meaning

Danger of personal injury through dangerous electrical voltage.
Danger!
Reference to an imminent danger that may result in death or
serious personal injury if the corresponding measures are not
taken.
Danger of personal injury through a general source of danger.
Danger!
taken.

Danger of property damage.
Stop! Reference to a possible danger that may result in property
damage if the corresponding measures are not taken.
Application notes
Note! Important note to ensure troublefree operation
Tip! Useful tip for simple handling
Reference to another documentation
Special safety instructions and application notes for UL and UR

Safety or application note for the operation of a UL−approved
device in UL−approved systems.
Warnings! Possibly the drive system is not operated in compliance with UL
if the corresponding measures are not taken.
Safety or application note for the operation of a UR−approved
8 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0
Safety instructions 2
General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers
2 Safety instructions
2.1 General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers
(in accordance with Low−Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC)
For your personal safety

Disregarding the following safety measures can lead to severe injury to persons and
damage to material assets:
ƒ Only use the product as directed.
ƒ Never commission the product in the event of visible damage.
ƒ Never commission the product before assembly has been completed.
ƒ Do not carry out any technical changes on the product.
ƒ Only use the accessories approved for the product.
ƒ Only use original spare parts from Lenze.
ƒ Observe all regulations for the prevention of accidents, directives and laws
applicable on site.
ƒ Transport, installation, commissioning and maintenance work must only be carried
out by qualified personnel.
– Observe IEC 364 and CENELEC HD 384 or DIN VDE 0100 and IEC report 664 or
DIN VDE 0110 and all national regulations for the prevention of accidents.
– According to this basic safety information, qualified, skilled personnel are persons
who are familiar with the assembly, installation, commissioning, and operation of
the product and who have the qualifications necessary for their occupation.
ƒ Observe all specifications in this documentation.
– This is the condition for safe and trouble−free operation and the achievement of
the specified product features.
– The procedural notes and circuit details described in this documentation are only
proposals. It is up to the user to check whether they can be transferred to the
particular applications. Lenze Automation GmbH does not accept any liability for
the suitability of the procedures and circuit proposals described.
ƒ Depending on their degree of protection, some parts of the Lenze controllers
(frequency inverters, servo inverters, DC speed controllers) and their accessory
components can be live, moving and rotating during operation. Surfaces can be hot.
– Non−authorised removal of the required cover, inappropriate use, incorrect
installation or operation, creates the risk of severe injury to persons or damage to
material assets.
– For more information, please see the documentation.
ƒ High amounts of energy are produced in the controller. Therefore it is required to
wear personal protective equipment (body protection, headgear, eye protection, ear
protection, hand guard).
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 9
Application as directed
Controllers are components which are designed for installation in electrical systems or
machines. They are not to be used as domestic appliances, but only for industrial purposes
according to EN 61000−3−2.
When controllers are installed into machines, commissioning (i.e. starting of the operation
as directed) is prohibited until it is proven that the machine complies with the regulations
of the EC Directive 2006/42/EC (Machinery Directive); EN 60204 must be observed.
Commissioning (i.e. starting of the operation as directed) is only allowed when there is
compliance with the EMC Directive (2004/108/EC).
The controllers meet the requirements of the Low−Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC. The
harmonised standard EN 61800−5−1 applies to the controllers.
The technical data and supply conditions can be obtained from the nameplate and the
documentation. They must be strictly observed.
Warning: Controllers are products which can be installed in drive systems of category C2
according to EN 61800−3. These products can cause radio interferences in residential areas.
In this case, special measures can be necessary.
Transport, storage
Please observe the notes on transport, storage, and appropriate handling.
Observe the climatic conditions according to the technical data.
Installation
The controllers must be installed and cooled according to the instructions given in the
corresponding documentation.
The ambient air must not exceed degree of pollution 2 according to EN 61800−5−1.
Ensure proper handling and avoid excessive mechanical stress. Do not bend any
components and do not change any insulation distances during transport or handling. Do
not touch any electronic components and contacts.
Controllers contain electrostatic sensitive devices which can easily be damaged by
inappropriate handling. Do not damage or destroy any electrical components since this
might endanger your health!
10 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0
Electrical connection
When working on live controllers, observe the applicable national regulations for the
prevention of accidents (e.g. VBG 4).
The electrical installation must be carried out according to the appropriate regulations
(e.g. cable cross−sections, fuses, PE connection). Additional information can be obtained
from the documentation.
This documentation contains information on installation in compliance with EMC
(shielding, earthing, filter, and cables). These notes must also be observed for CE−marked
controllers. The manufacturer of the system is responsible for compliance with the limit
values demanded by EMC legislation. The controllers must be installed in housings (e.g.
control cabinets) to meet the limit values for radio interferences valid at the site of
installation. The housings must enable an EMC−compliant installation. Observe in
particular that e.g. the control cabinet doors have a circumferential metal connection to
the housing. Reduce housing openings and cutouts to a minimum.
Lenze controllers may cause a DC current in the PE conductor. If a residual current device
(RCD) is used for protection against direct or indirect contact for a controller with
three−phase supply, only a residual current device (RCD) of type B is permissible on the
supply side of the controller. If the controller has a single−phase supply, a residual current
device (RCD) of type A is also permissible. Apart from using a residual current device (RCD),
other protective measures can be taken as well, e.g. electrical isolation by double or
reinforced insulation or isolation from the supply system by means of a transformer.
Operation
If necessary, systems including controllers must be equipped with additional monitoring
and protection devices according to the valid safety regulations (e.g. law on technical
equipment, regulations for the prevention of accidents). The controllers can be adapted to
your application. Please observe the corresponding information given in the
documentation.
After the controller has been disconnected from the supply voltage, all live components
and power terminals must not be touched immediately because capacitors can still be
charged. Please observe the corresponding stickers on the controller.
All protection covers and doors must be shut during operation.
Notes for UL−approved systems with integrated controllers: UL warnings are notes that
only apply to UL systems. The documentation contains special UL notes.
Safety functions
Certain controller versions support safety functions (e.g. "Safe torque off", formerly "Safe
standstill") according to the requirements of the EC Directive 2006/42/EC (Machinery
Directive). The notes on the integrated safety system provided in this documentation must
be observed.
Maintenance and servicing

The controllers do not require any maintenance if the prescribed operating conditions are
observed.
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 11
Disposal
Recycle metal and plastic materials. Ensure professional disposal of assembled PCBs.
The product−specific safety and application notes given in these instructions must be
observed!
12 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0
Thermal motor monitoring
2.2 Thermal motor monitoring
From software version 8.0 onwards, the 9300 controllers are provided with an I2xt function
for sensorless thermal monitoring of the connected motor.
Note!
ƒ I2 x t monitoring is based on a mathematical model which calculates a
thermal motor load from the detected motor currents.
ƒ The calculated motor load is saved when the mains is switched.
ƒ The function is UL−certified, i.e. no additional protective measures are
required for the motor in UL−approved systems.
ƒ However, I2 x t monitoring is no full motor protection as other influences on
the motor load could not be detected as for instance changed cooling
conditions (e.g. interrupted or too warm cooling air flow).
Die I2 x t load of the motor is displayed in C0066.
The thermal loading capacity of the motor is expressed by the thermal motor time
constant (t, C0128). Find the value in the rated motor data or contact the manufacturer of
the motor.
The I2 x t monitoring has been designed such that it will be activated after 179 s in the
event of a motor with a thermal motor time constant of 5 minutes (Lenze setting C0128),
a motor current of 1.5 x IN and a trigger threshold of 100 %.
Two adjustable trigger thresholds provide for different responses.
ƒ Adjustable response OC8 (TRIP, warning, off).
– The trigger threshold is set in C0127.
– The response is set in C0606.
– The response OC8, for instance, can be used for an advance warning.
ƒ Fixed response OC6−TRIP.
Behaviour of the I2 x t monitoring Condition
The I2 x t monitoring is deactivated. When C0120 = 0 % and C0127 = 0 %, set controller
C0066 is set = 0 % and inhibit.
MCTRL−LOAD−I2XT is set = 0.00 %.
I2 x t monitoring is stopped. When C0120 = 0 % and C0127 = 0 %, set controller
The current value in C0066 and at the enable.
MCTRL−LOAD−I2XT output is frozen.
I2 x t monitoring is deactivated. Set C0606 = 3 (off) and C0127 > 0 %.
The motor load is displayed in C0066.
Note!
An error message OC6 or OC8 can only be reset if the I2 x t load falls below the
set trigger threshold by 5 %.
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 13
Forced ventilated or naturally ventilated motors
2.2.1 Forced ventilated or naturally ventilated motors
Parameter setting
The following codes can be set for I2 x t monitoring:
Code Meaning Value range Lenze setting
C0066 Display of the I2 x t load of the motor 0 ... 250 % −
C0120 Threshold: Triggering of error "OC6" 0 ... 120 % 0%
C0128 Thermal motor time constant 0.1 ... 50.0 min 5.0 min
C0606 Response to error "OC8" TRIP, warning, off Warning
Calculate release time and I2 x t load

Formula for release time Information
ȡ ȣ IMot Actual motor current (C0054)
lnȧ1 * ȧ
z ) 1 Ir Rated motor current (C0088)
t + * (t)
ǒ Ǔ
2
t Thermal motor time constant (C0128)
Ȣ Ȥ
I Mot
100
IN
z Threshold value in C0120 (OC6) or C0127 (OC8)
Formulae for I2 x t load Information

L(t) Chronological sequence of the I2 x t load of the motor
(Display: C0066)
ǒI I Ǔ ǒ1 * e Ǔ
2
Mot *t IMot Actual motor current (C0054)
L(t) + 100% t
N Ir Rated motor current (C0088)
If the controller is inhibited, the I2 x t load is reduced:
LStart I2 x t load before controller inhibit
L(t) + L Start
Ǹ e*tt If an error is triggered, the value corresponds to the
threshold value set in C0120 (OC6) or C0127 (OC8).
Read release time in the diagram

Diagram for detecting the release times for a motor with a thermal motor time constant
of 5 minutes (Lenze setting C0128):
L [%] IMot = 3 × IN IMot = 2 × IN IMot = 1.5 × IN IMot = 1 × IN
120
100
50
0 t [s]
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
9300STD105
Fig. 2−1 I2 × t−monitoring: Release times for different motor currents and trigger thresholds
IMot Actual motor current (C0054)
Ir Rated motor current (C0088)
L I2 x t load of the motor (display: C0066)
T Time
14 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0
Self−ventilated motors
2.2.2 Self−ventilated motors
Due to the construction, self−ventilated standard motors are exposed to an increased heat
generation in the lower speed range compared to forced ventilated motors.
Warnings!
For complying with the UL 508C standard, you have to set the
speed−dependent evaluation of the permissible torque via code C0129/x.
Parameter setting
C0129/1 S1 torque characteristic I1/Irated 10 ... 200 % 100 %
C0129/2 S1 torque characteristics n2/nrated 10 ... 200 % 40 %
Effect of code C0129/x

I / IN
1.1
1.0
1 C0129/2
0.9
3
0.8
2
0.7
0.6
0 C0129/1
0 n / nN
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
0.132
9300STD350
Fig. 2−2 Working point in the range of characteristic lowering
The lowered speed / torque characteristic (Fig. 2−2) reduces the permissible thermal load
of self−ventilated standard motors. The characteristic is a line the definition of which
requires two points:
ƒ Point : Definition with C0129/1
This value also enables an increase of the maximally permissible load.
With increasing speeds, the maximally permissible load remains unchanged
(IMot = Irated).
In Fig. 2−2, the motor speed and the corresponding permissible motor torque () can be
read for each working point (on the characteristic () ... ). can also be calculated
using the values in C0129/1and C0129/2 (evaluation coefficient "y", 16).
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 15

Calculate the release time and the I2 x t load of the motor considering the values in
C0129/1 and C0129/2(evaluation coefficient "y").
Formulae for release time Information
T Release time of the I2 x t monitoring
ȡ ȣ t Thermal motor time constant (C0128)
T + * (t) lnȧ1 * z ) 1
ȧ In Function: Natural logarithm
ǒ Ǔ
2
Ȣ Ȥ
I Mot
100 IMot Actual motor current (C0054)
y IN
100% * C0129ń1 n y Evaluation coefficient
y+ n N ) C0129ń1
C0129ń2
nrated Rated speed (C0087)

(Display: C0066)
ǒy I I Ǔ
y Evaluation coefficient
ǒ1 * e Ǔ
2
Mot *t
L(t) + 100% t IMot Actual motor current (C0054)
N
L(t) + L Start
16 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0
Residual hazards
2.3 Residual hazards
Protection of persons
ƒ Before working on the controller, check whether all power terminals are
deenergised:
– The power terminals U, V, W, +UG and −UG remain live for at least three minutes
after disconnection from the mains.
– The power terminals L1, L2, L3; U, V, W, +UG and −UG remain live when the motor is
stopped.
ƒ The leakage current to earth (PE) is > 3.5 mA. According to EN 61800−5−1
– a fixed installation is required.
– a double PE connection is required or, if in single design, it must have a cable
cross−section of at least 10 mm2.
ƒ The heatsink of the controller has an operating temperature of > 80 °C:
– Contact with the heatsink results in burns.
ƒ During parameter set transfer the control terminals of the controller can have
undefined states.
– Therefore the connectors X5 and X6 must be disconnected from the controller
before the transfer takes place. This ensures that the controller is inhibited and all
control terminals have the defined state "LOW".
Device protection
ƒ Frequent mains switching (e.g. inching mode via mains contactor) can overload and
destroy the input current limitation of the drive controller:
– At least 3 minutes must pass between switching off and restarting the devices
EVS9321−xx and EVS9322−xx.
– At least 3 minutes must pass between two starting procedures of the devices
EVS9323−xx ... EVS9332−xx.
– Use the "safe torque off" safety function (STO) if safety−related mains
disconnections occur frequently. The drive variants Vxx4 are equipped with this
function.
Protection of the machine/system

ƒ Drives can reach dangerous overspeeds (e. g. setting of high output frequencies in
connection with motors and machines not suitable for this purpose):
– The drive controllers do not provide protection against such operating conditions.
For this purpose, use additional components.
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 17
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL
2.4 Safety instructions for the installation according to UL
Warnings!
ƒ Motor Overload Protection
– For information on the protection level of the internal overload protection
for a motor load, see the corresponding manuals or software helps.
– If the integral solid state motor overload protection is not used, external or
remote overload protection must be provided.
ƒ Branch Circuit Protection
– The integral solid state protection does not provide branch circuit
protection.
– Branch circuit protection has to be provided externally in accordance with
corresponding instructions, the National Electrical Code and any
additional codes.
ƒ Please observe the specifications for fuses and screw−tightening torques in
these instructions.
ƒ EVS9321 EVS9326:
– Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 5000 rms
symmetrical amperes, 480 V maximum, when protected by fuses.
symmetrical amperes, 480 V maximum, when protected by CC, J, T or R
class fuses.
– Maximum surrounding air temperature: 0 ... +55 °C
– > +40 °C: reduce the rated output current by 2.5 %/°C
– Use 75 °C copper wire only.
18 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3
Parameter setting with the XT EMZ9371BC keypad
General data and operating conditions
3 Parameter setting
3.1 Parameter setting with the XT EMZ9371BC keypad
Description
The keypad is available as an accessory. A full description of the keypad can be obtained
from the Instructions included in the keypad delivery.
Plugging in the keypad

It is possible to plug the keypad into the AIF interface or remove it during operation.
As soon as the keypad is supplied with voltage, it carries out a self−test. The keypad is ready
for operation if it is in display mode.
3.1.1 General data and operating conditions
dcbBA
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
0050 00
50.00_Hz
MCTRL-NOUT
b0
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
a c
9371BC011
Feature Values
Dimensions
Width a 60 mm
Height b 73.5 mm
Depth c 15 mm
Environmental conditions
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2K3 (−25 ... +70 °C)
Operation IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (−10 ... +60 °C)
Enclosure IP 20
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 19
3 Parameter setting
Installation and commissioning
3.1.2 Installation and commissioning
Lx
xx
W
2Z
A
E8
B 00
b 50
c 00 Hz
Menu
0_
d p
Code
Para .0 dcbBA
RG
50
UT
SHP
SHPRG p Menu
NO 0050 00
UV
Code
L-
Para
TR 50.00_Hz
ST
MC
MCTRL-NOUT
zZ
S T
U V
Yy z
Y Z
y
EMZ9371BC
dcbBA
SHPRG p
Code
Para
Menu
0050 00
GLOBAL DRIVE
E82ZBBXC
Init
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
d
0050 00 0 BA
dcb
50.00 Hz
20 %
1
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y 2 3
d
0050 00
50.00 Hz
20 %
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
9371BC018
Fig. 3−1 Installation and commissioning of XT EMZ9371BC keypad or E82ZBBXC diagnosis terminal
Connect keypad to the AIF interface on the front of the standard device.
The keypad can be connected/disconnected during operation.
As soon as the keypad is supplied with voltage, it carries out a short self−test.
The operation level indicates when the keypad is ready for operation:
Current state of the standard device
Memory location 1 of the user menu (C0517):
Code number, subcode number, and current value
Active fault message or additional status message
Actual value in % of the status display defined in C0004
must be pressed to leave the operation level
20 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3
Display elements and function keys
3.1.3 Display elements and function keys
0 4
1 dcbBA 5
6
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
0050 00
2 50.00_Hz
3 MCTRL-NOUT 7
S T
U V
z 8
Y Z
y
9371BC002
Fig. 3−2 Display elements and function keys of the XT EMZ9371BC keypad
Displays
Status displays of standard device
Display Meaning Explanation
Ready for operation
Pulse inhibit is active Power outputs are inhibited
The set current limit is exceeded in motor or
generator mode
Speed controller 1 in the limitation Drive is torque−controlled
(Only active for operation with standard
devices of the 9300 series)
Active fault
Acceptance of the parameters
Parameter is accepted immediately Standard device operates immediately with
the new parameter value
SHPRG Parameter must be acknowledged with Standard device operates with the new
parameter value after being acknowledged
SHPRG Parameter must be acknowledged in case of Standard device operates with the new
controller inhibit parameter value after the controller is
enabled again
None Display parameter Change is not possible
Active level
Menu Menu level is active Select main menu and submenus
Code Code level is active Select codes and subcodes
Para Parameter level is active Change parameters in the codes or
subcodes
None Operating level is active Display operating parameters
Short text
alphanumeric Contents of the menus, meaning of the codes
al and parameters
In the operating level display of C0004 in % and
the active fault
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 21
3 Parameter setting
Number
Active level Meaning Explanation
Menu level Menu number Display is only active for operation with
standard devices of the 8200 vector or 8200
motec series
Code level Four−digit code number
Number
Menu level Submenu number Display is only active for operation with
motec series
Code level Two−digit subcode number
Parameter value
Parameter value with unit
Cursor
In the parameter level, the digit above the cursor can be directly changed
Function keys
For description see the following table
Function keys
Note!
Shortcuts with :
Press and hold , then press the second key in addition.
Key Function
Menu level Code level Parameter level Operating level
Change to the Change to the operating Change to the code

parameter level level level
Go to the "Short setup"
Accept parameters
menu and load
when SHPRG or
predefined
SHPRG is displayed
configurations 1)
Change between menu Change of digit via
!
Change of code number
items cursor
Quick change between Quick change of code Quick change of digit
! menu items number via cursor
" Change between main menu, submenu and code Cursor to the right
# level Cursor to the left
$ Deactivate the function of the key %, the LED in the key goes off
% Inhibit the controller, the LED in the key is lit.
Reset fault (TRIP−Reset): 1. Remove the cause of malfunction
2. Press %
3. Press $
1) Only active for operation with standard devices of the 8200 vector or 8200 motec series
22 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3
Changing and saving parameters
3.1.4 Changing and saving parameters
Note!
Your settings have an effect on the current parameters in the main memory.
You must save your settings in a parameter set so that they are not lost when
the mains are connected.
If you only need one parameter set, save your settings as parameter set 1,
since parameter set 1 is loaded automatically after mains connection.
Step Key Action

sequence
1. Select the menu !"# Use the arrow keys to select the desired menu
2. Change to the code level " Display of the first code in the menu
3. Select code or subcode ! Display of the current parameter value
4. Change to the parameter level
5. When SHPRG is displayed, inhibit the % 1) The drive coasts
controller
6. Change parameter
A "# Move cursor below the digit to be changed
B ! Change of digit
! Quick change of digit

7. Accept the changed parameter
Display of SHPRG or SHPRG Confirm change to accept the parameter
Display "OK"
Display − The parameter has been accepted immediately
8. Enable the controller, if required $ 1) The drive runs again
9. Change to the code level
A Display of the operating level
B Display of the code with changed parameter
10. Change further parameters Restart the "loop" with step 1. or 3.
11. Save changed parameters
A !"# Select the code C0003 "PAR SAVE" in the menu
"Load/Store"
B Change to the parameter level
Display "0" and "READY"
Select the parameter set in which C Save as parameter set 1:
the parameters are to be saved ð Set "1" "Save PS1"
permanently Save as parameter set 2:
ð Set "2" "Save PS2"
Save as parameter set 3:
D When "OK" is displayed, the settings are permanently
saved in the selected parameter set.
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 23
3 Parameter setting
Step Key Action

sequence
B Display of C0003 "PAR SAVE"
13. Set parameters for another parameter Restart the "loop" with step 1. or 3.
set
1) The function of the % key can be programmed:
C0469 = 1: Controller inhibit
C0469 = 2: Quick stop (Lenze setting)
24 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3
Loading a parameter set
3.1.5 Loading a parameter set
The keypad serves to load a saved parameter set into the main memory when the controller
is inhibited. After the controller is enabled, it operates with the new parameters.
Danger!
ƒ When a new parameter set is loaded, the controller is reinitialised and acts
as if it had been connected to the mains:
– System configurations and terminal assignments can be changed. Make
sure that your wiring and drive configuration comply with the settings of
the parameter set.
ƒ Only use terminal X5/28 as source for the controller inhibit! Otherwise the
drive may start in an uncontrolled way when switching over to another
parameter set.
Note!
ƒ After switching on the supply voltage, the controller always loads parameter
set 1 into the main memory.
ƒ It is also possible to load other parameter sets into the main memory via the
digital inputs or bus commands.
Step Key Action

sequence
1. Inhibit controller Terminal X5/28 = LOW
2. Load the saved parameter set into the
main memory
A !"# Select the code C0002 "PAR LOAD" in the menu
"Load/Store"
The active parameter set is displayed, e. g. display "0"
and "Load Default"
If you want to restore the delivery status, proceed with
D
Select the parameter set to be C Load parameter set 1:
loaded ð Set "1" "Load PS1"
Load parameter set 2:
ð Set "2" "Load PS2"
D "RDY" goes off. The parameter set is loaded completely
into the main memory if "RDY" is displayed again.
B Display of C0002 "PAR LOAD"
4. Enable controller Terminal X5/28 = HIGH
The drive is running with the settings of the loaded
parameter set
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 25
3 Parameter setting
Transferring parameters to other standard devices
3.1.6 Transferring parameters to other standard devices
Parameter settings can be easily copied from one standard device to another by using the
keypad.
For this purpose use the "Load/Store" menu
Danger!
During the parameter transfer from the keypad to the standard device the
control terminals can adopt undefined states!
Therefore the plugs X5 and X6 must be disconnected from the standard device
before the transfer takes place. This ensures that the controller is inhibited and
all control terminals have the defined state "LOW".
Copying parameter sets from the standard device into the keypad
Note!
After copying the parameter sets into the XT keypad (C0003 = 11), always the
parameter set that was loaded last via C0002 is activated.
Like this the current parameters also remain active after copying:
ƒ Save the current parameters in the parameter set before copying and load
this parameter set in the controller via C0002.
Step Key Action

sequence
1. Connect the keypad to standard
device 1
The drive coasts.
3. Select C0003 in the "Load/Store" !"# Select code C0003 "PAR SAVE" in the "Load/Store"
menu menu using the arrow keys.
4. Change to the parameter level Display "0" and "READY"
5. Copy all parameter set into the The settings saved in the keypad are overwritten.
keypad Set "11" "Save extern"
6. Start copying The "RDY" status display goes off. As parameter value
"BUSY" is displayed.
If "BUSY" goes off after approx. one minute, all
parameter sets were copied into the keypad. The
"RDY" status display is lit.
B Display C0003 and "PAR SAVE"
9. Remove keypad from standard device
1
26 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3
Copying parameter sets fom keypad into the standard device

Step Key Action
sequence
device 2
The "IMP" status display is it.
The drive coasts
3. Pull the plugs X5 and X6 All control terminals have the defined "LOW" status.
4. Select C0002 in the "Load/Store" !"# Select code C0002 "PAR LOAD" in the "Load/Store"
5. Change to the parameter level The active parameter set is shown, e. g. display "0" and
"Load Default"
6. Select the correct copy function The settings saved in the standard device are
overwritten.
l Copy all parameter sets available into the l The parameter set that was active before copying is
EEPROM of the standard device and save them overwritten.
permanently. l The parameters are not yet active after copying.
Select parameter set and load it in the main
memory. 25
Set "20" "ext −> EEPROM"
l Copy individual parameter sets into the main
memory of the standard device.
Copy parameter set 1 into the main memory:
Set ð "11" "Load ext PS1"
If "BUSY" goes off, the parameter sets selected were
copied into the standard device. The "RDY" status
display is lit.
B Display C0002 and "PAR LOAD"
9. l If the function "Copy all parameter !"# Select code C0003 "PAR SAVE" in the "Load/Store"
sets into the EEPROM" menu using the arrow keys and store the contents of
(C0002 = 20) is selected, they the main memory permanently.
might have to be loaded in the
main memory manually.
l If the function "Copy individual
parameter sets into the main
memory" (C0002 = 1x) is selected,
they might have to be saved
permanently in the EEPROM
manually.
10. Plug in plugs X5 and X6
The drive is running with the new settings.
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 27
3 Parameter setting
Activating password protection
3.1.7 Activating password protection
Note!
ƒ If the password protection is activated (C0094 = 1 ... 9999), you only have
free access to the user menu.
ƒ To access the other menus, you must enter the password. By this, the
password protection is annulled until you enter a new password.
ƒ Please observe that the password−protected parameters can be overwritten
as well when transferring the parameter sets to other standard devices. The
password is not transferred.
ƒ Do not forget your password! If you have forgotten your password, it can
only be reset via a PC or a bus system!
Activate password protection

Step Key Action
sequence
1. Select the "USER menu" !"# Change to the user menu using the arrow keys
2. Change to the code level " Display of code C0051 "MCTRL−NACT"
3. Select C0094 Display of code C0094 "Password"
4. Change to the parameter level Display "0" = no password protection
5. Set password
A Select password (1 ... 9999)
B Confirm password
B Display of C0094 and "Password"
7. Change to the "USER menu" ##!
The password protection is active now.
You can only quit the user menu if you re−enter the password and confirm it with .
Remove password protection

Step Key Action
sequence
1. Change to the code level in the user "
menu
3. Change to the parameter level Display "9999" = password protection is active
4. Enter password
A ! Set valid password
B Confirm
The password protection is deactivated by entering the
password once again.
The password protection is deactivated now. All menus can be freely accessed again.
28 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3
Diagnostics
3.1.8 Diagnostics
In the "Diagnostic" menu the two submenus "Actual info" and "History" contain all codes
for
ƒ monitoring the drive
ƒ fault/error diagnosis
In the operating level, more status messages are displayed. If several status messages are
active, the message with the highest priority is displayed.
Priority Display Meaning
1 GLOBAL DRIVE INIT Initialisation or communication error between
keypad and controller
2 XXX − TRIP Active TRIP (contents of C0168/1)
3 XXX − MESSAGE Active message (contents of C0168/1)
4 Special device states:
Switch−on inhibit
5 Source for controller inhibit (the value of C0004 is displayed simultaneously):
STP1 9300 servo: Terminal X5/28
ECSxS/P/M/A: Terminal X6/SI1
STP3 Operating module or LECOM A/B/LI
STP4 INTERBUS or PROFIBUS−DP
STP5 9300 servo, ECSxA/E: System bus (CAN)
ECSxS/P/M: MotionBus (CAN)
STP6 C0040
6 Source for quick stop (QSP):
QSP−term−Ext The MCTRL−QSP input of the MCTRL function block is on HIGH signal.
QSP−C0135 Operating module or LECOM A/B/LI
QSP−AIF INTERBUS or PROFIBUS−DP
QSP−CAN 9300 servo, ECSxA: System bus (CAN)
7 XXX − WARNING Active warning (contents of C0168/1)
8 xxxx Value below C0004
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 29
3 Parameter setting
Menu structure
3.1.9 Menu structure
For simple, user−friendly operation, the codes are clearly arranged in function−related
menus:
Main menu Submenus Description
Display Display
User−Menu Codes defined in C0517
Code list All available codes
ALL All available codes listed in ascending order (C0001 ... C7999)
PS 1 Codes in parameter set 1 (C0001 ... C1999)
Load/Store Parameter set management
Parameter set transfer, restore delivery status
Diagnostic Diagnostic
Actual info Display codes to monitor the drive
History Fault analysis with history buffer
Short setup Quick configuration of predefined applications
Configuration of the user menu
The predefined applications depend on the type of the standard device (frequency
inverter, servo inverter, position controller, ...)
Main FB Configuration of the main function blocks
NSET Setpoint processing
NSET−JOG Fixed setpoints
NSET−RAMP1 Ramp function generator
MCTRL Motor control
DFSET Digital frequency processing
DCTRL Internal control
Terminal I/O Connection of inputs and outputs with internal signals
AIN1 X6.1/2 Analog input 1
AOUT1 X6.62 Analog output 1
DIGIN Digital inputs
DIGOUT Digital outputs
DFIN Digital frequency input
DFOUT Digital frequency output
State bus State bus (not with 9300 frequency inverter)
Controller Configuration of internal control parameters
Speed Speed controller
Current Current controller or torque controller
Phase Phase controller (not with 9300 frequency inverter)
Motor/Feedb. Input of motor data, configuration of speed feedback
Motor adj Motor data
Feedback Configuration of feedback systems
Monitoring Configuration of monitoring functions
30 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3
Menu structure

Display Display
LECOM/AIF Configuration of operation with communication modules
LECOM A/B Serial interface
AIF interface Process data
Status word Display of status words
System bus Configuration of system bus (CAN)
Management CAN communication parameters
CAN−IN1 CAN object 1
CAN−OUT1
CAN−OUT2
CAN−OUT3
FDO Free digital outputs
Diagnostic CAN diagnostic
FB config Configuration of function blocks
Func blocks Parameterisation of function blocks
The submenus contain all available function blocks
FCODE Configuration of free codes
Identify Identification
Drive Software version of standard device
Op Keypad Software version of keypad
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 31
4 Troubleshooting and fault elimination
Display of operating data, diagnostics
4.1 Display of operating data, diagnostics
The dialog box displays important operating parameters and supports you in diagnosing
the drive controller.
ƒ Open the Diagnostics dialog box in the parameter menu.
9300std230
Fig. 4−1 "Diagnostics" dialog box
ƒ You can recognise immediately that a fault has occurred from the display elements
or status information.
ƒ An error can be analysed with
– the history buffer in Global Drive Control (GDC) ( 34) or
– the XT keypad
– and with the "General error messages" table in the "System error messages"
chapter.
ƒ The "General error messages" table provides tips on how to eliminate an error.
32 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0
Troubleshooting and fault elimination 4
Troubleshooting
Status display via controller LEDs
4.2 Troubleshooting
Detecting breakdowns
A breakdown can be detected quickly via the LEDs at the controller or via the status
information at the keypad.
Analysing errors
Analyse the error using the history buffer. The list of fault messages gives you advice how
to remove the fault. ( 36)
4.2.1 Status display via controller LEDs
During operation the operating status of the controller is shown by 2 LEDs.

LED Operating status
Red Green
On On Mains switched on and automatic start inhibited
Blinking slowly Off Fault active
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 33
Troubleshooting
Fault analysis with the history buffer
4.2.2 Fault analysis with the history buffer
The history buffer can be used to trace faults. The fault messages are stored in the 8
memory locations in the order of their occurrence.

9300std230
History buffer
Field Entry Note
location
1 Active fault If the fault is no longer pending or has been
2 Last fault acknowledged:
l The content of memory units 1 ... 7 is shifted
3 Next to last fault "upwards" by one memory unit.
4 Third to last fault l The content of memory unit 8 is removed from
the history buffer and can no longer be retrieved.
5 Fourth to last fault
l Memory unit 1 is deleted (= no active fault).
6 Fifth to last fault
7 Sixth to last fault
8 Seventh to last fault
Explanations
, Fault indication and fault response (C0168)
l The entry is effected as LECOM error number.
l If several faults with a different response occur at the same time:
– Only the fault the response of which has the highest priority is entered (1. TRIP, 2. message,
3. warning).
l If faults with the same response occur (e. g. 2 messages) at the same time:
– Only the fault that was triggered first is entered.
– The OH7 and OH3 warnings are exceptions. If an OH7 warning is pending and the OH3 motor
temperature threshold is reached, the OH7 warning is overwritten by the OH3 warning. If the
motor temperature decreases again, the OH7 warning reappears.
, Time of the fault (C0169)
l Reference time is the content of the power−on time meter .
l If a fault is immediately followed by another fault for several times, only the time of the last
occurrence is stored.
, Frequency of occurrence of the fault (C0170)
l The time of the last occurrence is stored.
Click on Fault memory reset to clear the history buffer.
The history buffer can only be cleared if no fault is active.
Click on TRIP reset to reset the fault.
34 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0
Troubleshooting
Fault analysis via LECOM status words (C0150/C0155)
4.2.3 Fault analysis via LECOM status words (C0150/C0155)
The LECOM status words (C0150/C0155) are coded as follows:

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Designation Lenze/ Selection
{Appl.}
C0150 Status word 0 Device status word for networking
via automation interface (AIF)
Read only
0 {1} 65535 Controller evaluates information as
16 bits (binary−coded)
Bit 0 Not assigned
Bit 1 Pulse inhibit (IMP)
Bit2 Not assigned
Bit3 Not assigned
Bit4 Not assigned
Bit5 Not assigned
Bit 6 n=0
Bit 7 Controller inhibit (CINH)
Bit 8 Device status bit 1
Bit10 Device status bit 3
Bit12 Warning
Bit13 Message
Bit14 Not assigned
Bit15 Not assigned
C0155 Status word 2 0 Status word 2 (advanced status
word)
Display only
0 {1} 65535 Controller interprets information as
16 bit (binary coded)
Bit 0 Active fault
Bit 1 Mmax reached
Bit 2 Imax reached
Bit 3 Pulse inhibit(IMP)
Bit 4 Ready for operation (RDY)
Bit 6 TRIP active
Bit 7 Initialisation
Bit 8 Motor direction of rotation (Cw/CCw)
Bit 9 Not assigned
Bit 10 Not assigned
Bit 11 Not assigned
Bit 12 Not assigned
Bit 13 Not assigned
Bit 14 Not assigned
Bit 15 Not assigned
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 35
System error messages
General error messages
4.3 System error messages
4.3.1 General error messages
Note!
In the case of a query via system bus (CAN), the fault messages are
represented as numbers (see first column of the table).
Fault message Description Cause Remedy

No. Display
−−− −−− No fault − −
0011 OC1 Short circuit of motor cable Short circuit l Search for cause of short
circuit.
l Check motor cable.
Excessive capacitive charging Use motor cable which is shorter
current in the motor cable. or of lower capacitance.
0012 OC2 Motor cable earth fault One of the motor phases has l Search for cause of short
earth contact. circuit.
0015 OC5 I x t overload l Frequent and too long Check drive dimensioning.
acceleration with overcurrent
l Continuous overload with
Imotor > 1.05 x Irx.
0016 OC6 I2xt overload l Frequent and too long Check drive dimensioning.
acceleration processes with
motor overcurrent.
l Permanent motor overload
with Imotor>Irmotor
x018 OC8 I2xt overload advance warning l Frequent and too long Check drive dimensioning.
motor overcurrent.
with Imotor>Irmotor
1020 OU Overvoltage in DC bus Braking energy is too high. l Use braking unit or
(DC−bus voltage is higher than set regenerative module.
in C0173.) l Check dimensioning of the
brake resistance.
1030 LU Undervoltage in the DC bus DC bus voltage is lower than l Check mains voltage
specified in C0173. l Check supply cable
x032 LP1 Motor phase failure A current−carrying motor phase l Check motor.
has failed. l Check motor cable.
l Switch off monitoring
(C0597 = 3).
The current limit value is set too l Set higher current limit value
low. via C0599.
0050 OH Heatsink temperature > +90 C Ambient temperature l Allow module to cool and
Tu > +40 C or > +50 C ensure better ventilation.
l Check ambient temperature in
the control cabinet.
Heatsink is very dirty. Clean heatsink.
Wrong mounting position Change mounting position.
36 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0

No. Display
x053 OH3 Motor temperature Motor is thermally overloaded l Check drive dimensioning.
> +150 C threshold due to: l Switch off monitoring
(temperature detection via l Impermissible continuous (C0583 = 3).
resolver or incremental value current
encoder) l Frequent or too long
acceleration processes
No PTC/temperature contact Correct wiring.
connected.
x054 OH4 Heatsink temperature > C0122 Ambient temperature Tu > +40 C l Allow module to cool and
or > +50 C ensure better ventilation.
(C0582 = 3).
Heatsink is very dirty. Clean heatsink
The value specified under C0122 Enter a higher value under C0122.
is set too low.
x057 OH7 Motor temperature > C0121 Motor is thermally overloaded l Check drive dimensioning.
(temperature detection via due to: l Switch off monitoring
resolver or incremental value l Impermissible continuous (C0584 = 3).
encoder) current
l Frequent or too long
connected.
The value specified under C0121 Enter a higher value in C0121.
is set too low.
x058 OH8 Motor temperature via inputs T1 Motor is thermally overloaded l Check drive dimensioning.
and T2 is too high. due to: l Switch off monitoring
l Impermissible continuous (C0585 = 3).
current
Terminals T1 and T2 are not Connect PTC/temperature
connected contact.
x061 CE0 Automation interface (AIF) Faulty transfer of control l Plug in the communication
communication error commands via AIF. module/keypad XT firmly,
screw down, if necessary.
(C0126 = 3).
x062 CE1 Communication error on the CAN1_IN object receives faulty l Check wiring at X4.
process data input object data or communication is l Check sender.
CAN1_IN interrupted. l Increase monitoring time
under C0357/1, if necessary.
(C0591 = 3).
(C0592 = 3).
(C0593 = 3).
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 37

No. Display
x065 CE4 BUS−OFF state of system bus The controller has received too l Check wiring at X4: Is the bus
(CAN) many faulty telegrams via the correctly terminated?
system bus (CAN) and has l Check shield connection of the
disconnected from the bus. cables.
l Check PE connection.
l Check bus load, reduce the
baud rate if necessary.
(Observe the cable length!)
l Switch off the monitoring
(C0595 = 3).
x066 CE5 Time−out of system bus (CAN) For remote parameterisation l Check wiring of system bus
(communication error of gateway (C0370, C0371) via system bus (CAN).
function) (CAN): l Check CAN bus configuration.
l Slave does not respond.
l Communication monitoring
time has been exceeded.
0070 U15 Undervoltage of internal 15 V Check voltage supply.
voltage supply
0071 CCr System failure Strong interference injection on Screen control cables
the control cables
Ground or earth loops in the l Check wiring
wiring l Check PE connection
After troubleshooting: Deenergise
the device completely (disconnect
24 V supply, discharge DC bus)!
0072 PR1 Checksum error in parameter l Fault when loading a l Set the required parameters
set 1 parameter set. and store them under C0003 =
CAUTION: The Lenze setting is l Interruption while 1.
loaded automatically! transmitting the parameter set l As to PLC devices, check the
via keypad. use of pointers.
The stored parameters are Store the parameter set under
incompatible with the loaded C0003 = 1 first to allow for a
software version. faults reset.
0073 PR2 Checksum error in parameter l Fault while loading a l Set the required parameters
set 2 parameter set. and save them with C0003 = 2.
PLEASE NOTE: The Lenze setting is l Interruption during the
loaded automatically! transfer of the parameter set
via keypad.
The parameters saved do not In order to be able to
comply with the software version acknowledge the error, first save
loaded. the parameter set with C0003 = 2.
0074 PEr Program error Error in the program flow Send the parameter set (on floppy
disk/CD−ROM) with a detailed
description of the problem to
Lenze.
0075 PR0 Error in parameter set. The operating system software Storage of the Lenze setting
has been updated. C0003 = 1.
via keypad.
38 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0

No. Display
via keypad.
0079 PI Fault during parameter l An error has been detected l Correct parameter set.
initialisation during the parameter set l Send parameter set (on floppy
transfer between two devices. disk/CD−ROM) and a detailed
l The parameter set does not description of the problem to
match the controller, e.g. if Lenze.
data has been transferred from
a higher−power controller to a
lower−power controller.
0080 PR6 Too many user codes Reduce the number of user codes.
x082 Sd2 Resolver error at X7 Resolver cable interrupted. l Check cable for open circuit.
l Check resolver.
(C0586 = 3).
x083 Sd3 Encoder error at X9 Cable interrupted. Check cable for open circuit.
Pin X9/8 not connected. Apply 5 V to pin X9/8 or switch off
monitoring (C0587 = 3).
x085 Sd5 Encoder error at X6/1 and X6/2 Current signal at X6/1 X6/2 < l Check cable for open circuit.
(C0034 = 1) 2mA. l Check current signal encoder.
(C0598 = 3).
x086 Sd6 Motor temperature sensor error Encoder for detecting the motor l Check cable for firm
(X7 or X8) temperature at X7 or X8 indicates connection.
undefined values. l Switch off the monitoring
(C0594 = 3).
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 39

No. Display
x087 Sd7 Selection of the feedback in The absolute value encoder must Save parameter set, then
C0025 as absolute value encoder be initialised. completely deenergise the device,
or alteration of the encoder and afterwards switch it on again.
constant in C0420 for setting
C0025 ³ 309
Initialisation error of absolute l Defect of the encoder l Make sure that the cable at X8
value encoder at X8 electronics is tightened properly, and
l Absolute value encoder at X8 check it with regard to open
does not send data. circuit.
l Check absolute value encoder
Tip: The encoder must not rotate with regard to correct function.
during mains switching. l Set voltage supply via C0421 to
8.0 V.
l No Stegmann encoder
connected.
l Replace defective encoder.
Communication error of absolute A rotor position adjustment via Repeat rotor position adjustment.
value encoder at X8 during rotor C0095 = 1 could not be completed
position adjustment successfully. Note: After an Sd7 fault it is
absolutely required to carry out
another rotor position
adjustment. Otherwise the drive
may carry out uncontrolled
movements after controller
enable. The drive must not be
commissioned without a
successfully executed rotor
position adjustment!
After fault elimination:
Completely deenergise device
(switch off 24 V supply, discharge
DC bus)!
x088 Sd8 SinCos encoder at X8 sends The tracks in the SinCos encoder Replace SinCos encoder.
inconsistent data. are damaged.
Interference level on the encoder l Check correct shield
cable is too high. connection of encoder cable.
l Where required, decelerate the
actuation of the fault message
via the filter time constant.
Setting:
– for ECSxS/P/M/A in C0559.
– for 9300 servo cam in C0575.
SinCos encoder at X8 does not Open circuit. Check cable for wire breakage.
send any data. Incorrect encoder connected. Connect SinCos encoder of the
Stegmann company.
SinCos encoder is defective. Replace SinCos encoder.
Supply voltage set incorrectly. Set voltage supply in C0421.
After fault correction: completely
deenergise the device (switch off
x089 PL Error during rotor position l The rotor position adjustment Repeat rotor position adjustment.
adjustment (the error is saved was cancelled.
with mains failure protection) l During rotor position Note: After an Sd7 fault it is
adjustment with an absolute absolutely required to carry out
value encoder the error Sd7 or another rotor position
SD8 occurred. adjustment. Otherwise the drive
40 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0

No. Display
x091 EEr External monitoring has been A digital signal assigned to the l Check external encoder.
triggered via DCTRL. TRIP−SET function has been l Switch off the monitoring
activated. (C0581 = 3).
0105 H05 Internal fault (memory) Contact Lenze.
0107 H07 Internal fault (power stage) During initialisation of the Contact Lenze.
controller, an incorrect power
stage was detected.
x110 H10 Heatsink temperature sensor Sensor for detecting the heatsink l Contact Lenze.
error temperature indicates undefined l Switch off the monitoring
values. (C0588 = 3).
x111 H11 Temperature sensor error: Sensor for detecting the internal l Contact Lenze.
Temperature inside the controller temperature indicates undefined l Switch off the monitoring
values. (C0588 = 3).
x151 P01 Error "negative limit switch". Negative limit switch was l Control drive in positive
reached. direction
l Check wiring at X5/E2.
x152 P02 Error "positive limit switch". Positive limit switch was reached. l Control drive in negative
direction
x153 P03 Following error The angle difference between set l Increase following error limit
and actual position is larger than under C0255.
the following error limit set under l Switch off the monitoring
C0255. (C0589 = 3).
Drive cannot follow the digital Check drive dimensioning.
frequency (Imax limit).
x154 P04 Error "negative position limit". Negative position limit (C1224) Find out why the value was not
was not reached. reached (e.g. "incorrect" position
targets, set function position
value) and adjust the position
limit in C1224 if necessary.
x155 P05 Error "positive position limit". Positive position limit (C1223) Find out why the value was
was exceeded. exceeded (e.g. "incorrect" position
x156 P06 No reference. The reference point is not known. Perform one of the following
In the case of absolute functions and restart:
positioning, no homing was l Manual homing.
performed before the first l Start homing in the program.
positioning. l Set reference.
x157 P07 Parameter set mode is absolute An absolute parameter set Perform one of the following
instead of relative. (C1311) was performed during functions and restart:
relative positioning (position l Change the parameter set
mode C1210). from absolute to relative.
l Change position mode.
x158 P08 Error "actual reference dimension Actual reference dimension offset If necessary, adapt the position
offset". (C1226) outside the position limit values or check whether the
limits. Error of the program program function "set position
function "set position value". value" is to be applied.
x159 P09 Error in positioning program. Impermissible programming Check position program:
l A parameter set with final
speed must be followed by a
parameter set with
positioning; it is not
permissible to wait for input.
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 41

No. Display
x162 P12 Error in the range of the encoder. The range of the absolute encoder l Return drive by manual
was exceeded. positioning.
l Check position limits and
adjustment of the encoder.
l Design and mount the
absolute encoder in a way that
does not exceed the traversing
range.
x163 P13 Angle overrun. l Phase controller limit reached l Enable drive
l Drive cannot follow the digital l Check drive dimensioning.
x164 P14 1. Following error. The drive cannot follow the l Increase current limit under
setpoint. The following error is C0022 (observe max. motor
greater than the limit value in current).
C1218/1. l Reduce acceleration.
l Check drive dimensioning.
l Increase limit value under
C1218/1
x165 P15 2. Following error. The drive cannot follow the l Increase current limit C0022
setpoint. The following error is (observe max. motor current).
greater than the limit value in l Reduce acceleration.
C1218/2. l Check drive dimensioning.
C1218/2
x166 P16 Faulty transfer of system bus The sync telegram from the l Set the "sync cycle" to the
(CAN) sync telegram. master (PLC) is out of sync cycle. transmission cycle of the
master (PLC) under C1121.
l Note:
– C0362 displays the time
interval between 2 sync
telegrams.
– C0362 = 0: communication
interrupted.
The sync telegram of the master l Check communication channel.
(PLC) is not received. l Check baud rate, controller
address.
l Note:
telegrams.
interrupted.
The controller is enabled too fast. Delay the controller enable.
The time delay required depends
on the time interval between the
sync telegrams.
x167 P17 Error "touch probe control". Various function blocks use the l Configure another touch probe
touch probe input at the same input for FB POS (not possible
time (e.g. FB DFSET and POS). A for FB DFSET).
conflict arises. l Switch off monitoring
(C1289/1).
42 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0

No. Display
x168 P18 Internal limitation. Arithmetic operation generated
data cannot be varied arbitrarily.
Wrongly specified values were
automatically limited internally.
C1298 = 1: Check the values in C1202/4,
The negative position limit in C1207/1, C1207/2. Read out the
C1223 is outside the possible limited value in C1220/10 and
display range of enter it in C1223 if necessary.
1 £ (C1223 × C1205) £ 1.07E9 inc
The positive position limit in C1207/1, C1207/2. Read out the
1 £ (C1224 × C1205) £ 1.07E9 inc
C1298 = 3: Check the values in C0011,
The maximum speed vmax in C1202/4, C1207/1, C1207/2. Read
C1240 is outside the possible out the limited value in C1220/12
display range of and enter it in C1240 or adjust the
1 £ (C1240 × C1205 × value in C1240 to C0011 if
16.384) £ 2.14E9 inc or vmax not necessary.
C1240 / C1204 × 60 £ 1.5 × nmax
The maximum acceleration amax C1207/1, C1207/2. Read out the
in C1250 is outside the possible limited value in C1220/13 and
1 £ (C1250 × C1205 × 16.384 / 10
00) £ 2.8634E7 inc
An internal value range has been C1207/1, C1207/2 and correct
exceeded for a speed them.
standardisation. Valid range:
1£ (C0011× C1207/1 / C1207/2
65536 / 60000) £ 32767
x169 P19 The input values at X9 are limited. The function block DFIN limits the l Reduce the frequency on the
input values. This causes the loss digital frequency connection.
of increments. l Check the settings for the slave
(C0425) and for the master
(C0030). These settings must
be identical.
x171 P21 Following error. The phase difference between set l Extend the following error
and actual position is larger than limit under C1328.
the following error limit set under l Switch off monitoring
C1328. (C1329=3).
x190 nErr Speed control error l Active load (e.g. for hoists) is Check drive dimensioning.
(Speed out of tolerance margin too high.
(C0576)) l Mechanical blockades on the
load side
x200 NMAX Maximum system speed (C0596) l Active load (e.g. for hoists) is l Check drive dimensioning.
has been exceeded. too high. l Increase torque limit, if
l Drive is not speed−controlled, necessary.
torque is excessively limited. l Switch off monitoring
(C0607 = 3).
0201 overrun Time−out in task 1 (ID 2) Task processing takes longer than l Adjust the length of the task
Task1 the monitoring time set. runtime.
l Adjust monitoring time.
... ... ... l Determine the cause of
time−out by checking the task
0208 overrun Time−out in task 8 (ID 9) runtime at the task monitor.
Task8 l Swap out time−critical program
parts in a slower task.
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 43

No. Display
0209 float Float error in system task (ID 0) Error in real calculation Check calculations (program
Sys−T (e. g. division by 0) code).
0210 float Float error in cyclic task (PLC_PRG
Cycl.−T ID 1)
0211 float Task1 Float error in task 1 (ID 2)
... ... ...
0219 overrun Time−out in cyclic task (PLC_PRG Task processing takes longer than l Adjust the length of the task
Cyc.−T ID 1) the monitoring time set. runtime.
l Determine the cause of
runtime at the task monitor.
l Swap out time−critical program
0220 noT−Fkt Not enough technology units A program with technology l Use technology variant of the
Credit available. functions has been tried to be controller.
loaded to a controller not l Contact Lenze, if necessary.
providing the corresponding
units.
x220 CDA Data error Attempt to transmit faulty profile Repeat profile data transfer.
data
x221 CDA−LOAD Faulty checksum The checksum of the transferred Repeat profile data transfer and
profile data is not correct. check for correctness.
0230 No Missing PLC program No PLC program loaded. Load PLC program.
Program
0231 Unallowed PLC program calls invalid library In the PLC program a library l Remove library function or
Lib function. function has been called which is ensure that the corresponding
not supported by the controller hardware is available.
(e.g. because the corresponding l Contact Lenze, if necessary.
hardware is missing).
0232 NoCam Motion profiles (cam data) are not When calling functions of the l Ensure that the valid cam data
Data available. function library has been attached to the
LenzeCamControl.lib it was project via the DDS CAM
detected that there are no motion support.
profiles (CAM data) loaded in the l Reload the PLC program into
memory of the controller. the controller. (Possibly the
command Online&Reset
(origin) has been executed in
DDS.)
x240 ovrTrans "Free CAN objects" error Overflow of the transmit request l Reduce the number of
Queue memory transmit requests.
l Prolong the cycle time.
x241 ovr Receive Too many receive telegrams Reduce the number of telegrams
on the system bus (CAN).
x250 2.Flash Err Error when the FLASH memory is The PLC program tries to access Make sure that the PLC has the
accessed non−available or defect FLASH corresponding FLASH memory. If
memory not, please contact Lenze.
x251 AddData Error during FLASH memory Check sum error occurred when Check the checksum of the file to
CsErr access loading data into the FLASH be loaded and repeat the data
memory transfer.
44 EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0
Resetting system error messages

No. Display
x252 AddData Error during FLASH memory An error occurred when Check/repeat data transfer.
DlErr access downloading the data into the
FLASH memory (e.g. time−out,
transmission error, mains failure
during transmission)
x260 Err Node "Life guarding event" The controller configured as a l Check wiring at X4.
Guard CAN slave does not receive a l Check CAN configuration.
"Node Guarding" telegram from l Ensure that "node guarding"
the CAN master within the "Node has been activated in the CAN
Life Time". master
l Adapt the "node life time"
(C0383) to CAN master setting.
Explanation of the error numbers:
x 0 = TRIP, 1 = message, 2 = warning, 3 = FAIL−QSP
e.g. "2091": An external monitoring has triggered the warning EEr
4.3.2 Resetting system error messages
Reaction Measures to reset the fault message

TRIP/ FAIL−QSP Note!
If a TRIP/FAIL QSP source is still active, the pending TRIP/FAIL QSP cannot be reset.
The TRIP/FAIL QSP can be reset by:
l pressing ð % on keypad XT EMZ9371 BC. Then, press $ to re−enable the controller.
l Set code C0043 = 0.
l Control word C0135, bit 11
l Control word AIF
l Control word system bus (CAN) / MotionBus (CAN) at ECSxS/P/M
After the reset of the TRIP/FAIL QSP, the drive remains at standstill.
Message Danger!
The fault message is reset automatically after the fault has been eliminated, and the drive
restarts automatically.
Warning After the fault has been eliminated, the fault message is reset automatically.
EDKVS93−01 EN 3.0 45
'(
© 07/2013
F Lenze Automation GmbH Service Lenze Service GmbH
Hans−Lenze−Str. 1 Breslauer Straße 3
D−31855 Aerzen D−32699 Extertal
Germany Germany
( +49(0)51 54 /82−0 ( 008000/ 2446877 (24 h helpline)
Ê +49(0)51 54 /82 − 28 00 Ê +49(0)5154/ 82−11 12
Lenze@Lenze.de Service@Lenze.de
ü www.Lenze.com
EDKVS93−01 § .MñP § EN § 3.0 § TD06

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
EDKVS93−02
.MñT
Ä.MñTä
9300 15 ... 30 kW
Servo controller

9300std079
Key for overview
Controller
Fixing bracket for standard mounting
Cover with fixing screws
EMC shield sheet for the motor cable and the feed cable for the motor temperature monitoring with PTC ther-
mistor or thermal contact (NC contact)

Status displays
0Fig. 0Tab. 0
i Contents

1.2 Target group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.5 Notes used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.1.8 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.1.9 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

4 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0
Document history
Note!

.MñT 3.0 07/2013 TD06 Error corrections
13256371 1.0 06/2008 TD23 First edition
Tip!
1.2 Target group

EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 5

Nameplate
Product series
400 V 480 V
9327 = 15 kW 18.5 kW
9328 = 22 kW 30 kW
9329 = 30 kW 37 kW
Type
Design
I= Servo PLC 9300vec112
K= Servo cam
S= Servo inverter
Variant
˘ Standard
V100 = For IT mains
Hardware version
Software version
6 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0
Conventions used

Spelling of numbers
For example: 1234.56 or 1234,56
Warnings
UL warnings
UR warnings
Text
Control« (GDC)
Icons
information
EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 7
Notes used
1.5 Notes used
Safety instructions
Danger!
Note
situations)

Danger!
taken.
Danger!
taken.

Application notes

8 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0

applicable on site.
material assets.
EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 9
Transport, storage
Installation
10 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0
Operation
documentation.
Safety functions
be observed.

observed.
EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 11
Disposal
observed!
12 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0
Note!
the motor.
Note!
EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 13
Parameter setting

lnȧ1 * ȧ
t + * (t)
ǒ Ǔ
2
Ȣ Ȥ
I Mot
100
IN

(Display: C0066)
ǒI I Ǔ ǒ1 * e Ǔ
2
L(t) + 100% t
L(t) + L Start

120
100
50
0 t [s]
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
9300STD105
T Time
14 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0
Warnings!
Parameter setting

I / IN
1.1
1.0
1 C0129/2
0.9
3
0.8
2
0.7
0.6
0 C0129/1
0 n / nN
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
0.132
9300STD350
(IMot = Irated).
EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 15

T + * (t) lnȧ1 * z ) 1
ǒ Ǔ
2
Ȣ Ȥ
I Mot
y IN
y+ n N ) C0129ń1
C0129ń2

(Display: C0066)
ǒy I I Ǔ
ǒ1 * e Ǔ
2
Mot *t
N
L(t) + L Start
16 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0
Residual hazards
deenergised:
stopped.
undefined states.
Device protection
EVS9323−xx ... EVS9332−xx.
function.

EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 17
Warnings!
protection.
additional codes.
these instructions.
ƒ EVS9327 EVS9329:
symmetrical amperes, 480 V maximum, when protected by J, T or R class
fuses.
– Use 60/75 °C or 75 °C copper wire only.
18 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3
3 Parameter setting
Description

dcbBA
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
0050 00
50.00_Hz
MCTRL-NOUT
b0
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
a c
9371BC011
Feature Values
Dimensions
Width a 60 mm
Height b 73.5 mm
Depth c 15 mm
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Enclosure IP 20
EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 19
3 Parameter setting
Lx
xx
W
2Z
A
E8
B 00
b 50
c 00 Hz
Menu
0_
d p
Code
Para .0 dcbBA
RG
50
UT
SHP
SHPRG p Menu
NO 0050 00
UV
Code
L-
Para
TR 50.00_Hz
ST
MC
MCTRL-NOUT
zZ
S T
U V
Yy z
Y Z
y
EMZ9371BC
dcbBA
SHPRG p
Code
Para
Menu
0050 00
GLOBAL DRIVE
E82ZBBXC
Init
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
d
0050 00 0 BA
dcb
50.00 Hz
20 %
1
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y 2 3
d
0050 00
50.00 Hz
20 %
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
9371BC018
20 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3
0 4
1 dcbBA 5
6
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
0050 00
2 50.00_Hz
3 MCTRL-NOUT 7
S T
U V
z 8
Y Z
y
9371BC002
Displays
Ready for operation
generator mode
Active fault
enabled again
Active level
subcodes
Short text
al and parameters
the active fault
EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 21
3 Parameter setting
Number
motec series
Number
motec series
Parameter value
Cursor
Function keys
Function keys
Note!
Shortcuts with :
Key Function

Accept parameters
menu and load
when SHPRG or
predefined
SHPRG is displayed
configurations 1)
!
items cursor
2. Press %
3. Press $
22 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3
Note!
Step Key Action

sequence
controller
6. Change parameter
B ! Change of digit

Display "OK"
"Load/Store"
EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 23
3 Parameter setting
Step Key Action

sequence
set
24 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3
Danger!
the parameter set.
parameter set.
Note!
Step Key Action

sequence
main memory
"Load/Store"
and "Load Default"
D
parameter set
EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 25
3 Parameter setting
keypad.
Danger!
Note!
Step Key Action

sequence
device 1
The drive coasts.
1
26 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3

Step Key Action
sequence
device 2
The drive coasts
"Load Default"
overwritten.
memory. 25
display is lit.
manually.
EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 27
3 Parameter setting
Note!

Step Key Action
sequence
5. Set password
B Confirm password

Step Key Action
sequence
menu
4. Enter password
B Confirm
28 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3
Diagnostics
3.1.8 Diagnostics
for
Switch−on inhibit
STP6 C0040
EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 29
3 Parameter setting
Menu structure
menus:
Display Display


MCTRL Motor control
30 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3
Menu structure

Display Display
CAN−IN1
CAN object 1
CAN−OUT1
CAN−IN2
CAN object 2
CAN−OUT2
CAN−IN3
CAN object 3
CAN−OUT3

EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 31
9300std230
– the XT keypad
chapter.
32 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0
Troubleshooting
4.2 Troubleshooting
Analysing errors

Red Green
EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 33
Troubleshooting

9300std230
History buffer
Field Entry Note
location
Explanations
3. warning).
34 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0
Troubleshooting

{Appl.}
Read only
Bit 0 Not assigned
Bit2 Not assigned
Bit3 Not assigned
Bit4 Not assigned
Bit5 Not assigned
Bit 6 n=0
Bit12 Warning
Bit13 Message
Bit14 Not assigned
Bit15 Not assigned
word)
Display only
Bit 0 Active fault
Bit 1 Mmax reached
Bit 2 Imax reached
Bit 6 TRIP active
Bit 9 Not assigned
Bit 10 Not assigned
Bit 11 Not assigned
Bit 12 Not assigned
Bit 13 Not assigned
Bit 14 Not assigned
Bit 15 Not assigned
EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 35
Note!

No. Display
−−− −−− No fault − −
circuit.
motor overcurrent.
with Imotor>Irmotor
motor overcurrent.
with Imotor>Irmotor
brake resistance.
(C0597 = 3).
low. via C0599.
36 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0

No. Display
connected.
(C0582 = 3).
is set too low.
encoder) current
connected.
is set too low.
current
connected contact.
(C0126 = 3).
(C0591 = 3).
(C0592 = 3).
(C0593 = 3).
EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 37

No. Display
(C0595 = 3).
voltage supply
the control cables
via keypad.
Lenze.
via keypad.
38 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0

No. Display
via keypad.
l Check resolver.
(C0586 = 3).
(C0598 = 3).
(C0594 = 3).
EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 39

No. Display
C0025 ³ 309
8.0 V.
connected.
DC bus)!
Setting:
Stegmann company.
40 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0

No. Display
stage was detected.
values. (C0588 = 3).
values. (C0588 = 3).
reached. direction
direction
C0255. (C0589 = 3).
parameter set with
EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 41

No. Display
range.
C1218/1
C1218/2
l Note:
telegrams.
interrupted.
address.
l Note:
telegrams.
interrupted.
sync telegrams.
(C1289/1).
42 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0

No. Display
1 £ (C1223 × C1205) £ 1.07E9 inc
1 £ (C1224 × C1205) £ 1.07E9 inc
C1240 / C1204 × 60 £ 1.5 × nmax
1 £ (C1250 × C1205 × 16.384 / 10
00) £ 2.8634E7 inc
1£ (C0011× C1207/1 / C1207/2
65536 / 60000) £ 32767
be identical.
C1328. (C1329=3).
load side
(C0607 = 3).
EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 43

No. Display
Cycl.−T ID 1)
... ... ...
units.
data
Program
DDS.)
memory transfer.
44 EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0

No. Display
Life Time". master

l Control word AIF
Message Danger!
EDKVS93−02 EN 3.0 45
'(
© 07/2013
Germany Germany
( +49(0)51 54 /82−0 ( 008000/ 2446877 (24 h helpline)
Ê +49(0)51 54 /82 − 28 00 Ê +49(0)5154/ 82−11 12
ü www.Lenze.com
EDKVS93−02 § .MñT § EN § 3.0 § TD06

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
EDKVS93−03
.M)&
Ä.M)&ä
9300 45 ... 75 kW
Servo controller

EVS9330
9300std080
EVS9331, EVS9332
9300std081
Key for overview
Controller
Fixing bracket for standard mounting
Cover with fixing screws
Shield clamp and strain relief for the motor cable
Strain relief for the PE motor cable and the feed cable for the motor temperature monitoring with PTC thermi-
stor or thermal contact (NC contact)

Status displays
0Fig. 0Tab. 0
i Contents

1.2 Target group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.5 Notes used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.1.8 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.1.9 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

4 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0
Document history
Note!

.M)& 3.0 07/2013 TD06 Error corrections
13256367 1.0 06/2008 TD23 First edition
Tip!
1.2 Target group

EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 5

Nameplate
Product series
400 V 480 V
9330 = 45 kW 45 kW
9331 = 55 kW 55 kW
9332 = 75 kW 90 kW
Type
Design
I= Servo PLC 9300vec112
K= Servo cam
S= Servo inverter
Variant
˘ Standard
V100 = For IT mains
Hardware version
Software version
6 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0
Conventions used

Spelling of numbers
For example: 1234.56 or 1234,56
Warnings
UL warnings
UR warnings
Text
Control« (GDC)
Icons
information
EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 7
Notes used
1.5 Notes used
Safety instructions
Danger!
Note
situations)

Danger!
taken.
Danger!
taken.

Application notes

8 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0

applicable on site.
material assets.
EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 9
Transport, storage
Installation
10 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0
Operation
documentation.
Safety functions
be observed.

observed.
EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 11
Disposal
observed!
12 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0
Note!
the motor.
Note!
EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 13
Parameter setting

lnȧ1 * ȧ
t + * (t)
ǒ Ǔ
2
Ȣ Ȥ
I Mot
100
IN

(Display: C0066)
ǒI I Ǔ ǒ1 * e Ǔ
2
L(t) + 100% t
L(t) + L Start

120
100
50
0 t [s]
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
9300STD105
T Time
14 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0
Warnings!
Parameter setting

I / IN
1.1
1.0
1 C0129/2
0.9
3
0.8
2
0.7
0.6
0 C0129/1
0 n / nN
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
0.132
9300STD350
(IMot = Irated).
EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 15

T + * (t) lnȧ1 * z ) 1
ǒ Ǔ
2
Ȣ Ȥ
I Mot
y IN
y+ n N ) C0129ń1
C0129ń2

(Display: C0066)
ǒy I I Ǔ
ǒ1 * e Ǔ
2
Mot *t
N
L(t) + L Start
16 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0
Residual hazards
deenergised:
stopped.
undefined states.
Device protection
EVS9323−xx ... EVS9332−xx.
function.

EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 17
Warnings!
protection.
additional codes.
these instructions.
ƒ EVS9330 EVS9332:
symmetrical amperes, 480 V maximum, when protected by J, T or R class
fuses.
18 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3
3 Parameter setting
Description

dcbBA
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
0050 00
50.00_Hz
MCTRL-NOUT
b0
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
a c
9371BC011
Feature Values
Dimensions
Width a 60 mm
Height b 73.5 mm
Depth c 15 mm
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Enclosure IP 20
EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 19
3 Parameter setting
Lx
xx
W
2Z
A
E8
B 00
b 50
c 00 Hz
Menu
0_
d p
Code
Para .0 dcbBA
RG
50
UT
SHP
SHPRG p Menu
NO 0050 00
UV
Code
L-
Para
TR 50.00_Hz
ST
MC
MCTRL-NOUT
zZ
S T
U V
Yy z
Y Z
y
EMZ9371BC
dcbBA
SHPRG p
Code
Para
Menu
0050 00
GLOBAL DRIVE
E82ZBBXC
Init
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
d
0050 00 0 BA
dcb
50.00 Hz
20 %
1
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y 2 3
d
0050 00
50.00 Hz
20 %
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
9371BC018
20 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3
0 4
1 dcbBA 5
6
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
0050 00
2 50.00_Hz
3 MCTRL-NOUT 7
S T
U V
z 8
Y Z
y
9371BC002
Displays
Ready for operation
generator mode
Active fault
enabled again
Active level
subcodes
Short text
al and parameters
the active fault
EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 21
3 Parameter setting
Number
motec series
Number
motec series
Parameter value
Cursor
Function keys
Function keys
Note!
Shortcuts with :
Key Function

Accept parameters
menu and load
when SHPRG or
predefined
SHPRG is displayed
configurations 1)
!
items cursor
2. Press %
3. Press $
22 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3
Note!
EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 23
3 Parameter setting
Step Key Action

sequence
controller
6. Change parameter
B ! Change of digit

Display "OK"
"Load/Store"
set
24 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3
Danger!
the parameter set.
parameter set.
Note!
Step Key Action

sequence
main memory
"Load/Store"
and "Load Default"
D
parameter set
EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 25
3 Parameter setting
keypad.
Danger!
Note!
Step Key Action

sequence
device 1
The drive coasts.
1
26 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3

Step Key Action
sequence
device 2
The drive coasts
"Load Default"
overwritten.
memory. 25
display is lit.
manually.
EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 27
3 Parameter setting
Note!

Step Key Action
sequence
5. Set password
B Confirm password

Step Key Action
sequence
menu
4. Enter password
B Confirm
28 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3
Diagnostics
3.1.8 Diagnostics
for
Switch−on inhibit
STP6 C0040
EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 29
3 Parameter setting
Menu structure
menus:
Display Display


MCTRL Motor control
30 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0
Parameter setting 3
Menu structure

Display Display
CAN−IN1
CAN object 1
CAN−OUT1
CAN−IN2
CAN object 2
CAN−OUT2
CAN−IN3
CAN object 3
CAN−OUT3

EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 31
9300std230
– the XT keypad
chapter.
32 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0
Troubleshooting
4.2 Troubleshooting
Analysing errors

Red Green
EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 33
Troubleshooting

9300std230
History buffer
Field Entry Note
location
Explanations
3. warning).
34 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0
Troubleshooting

{Appl.}
Read only
Bit 0 Not assigned
Bit2 Not assigned
Bit3 Not assigned
Bit4 Not assigned
Bit5 Not assigned
Bit 6 n=0
Bit12 Warning
Bit13 Message
Bit14 Not assigned
Bit15 Not assigned
word)
Display only
Bit 0 Active fault
Bit 1 Mmax reached
Bit 2 Imax reached
Bit 6 TRIP active
Bit 9 Not assigned
Bit 10 Not assigned
Bit 11 Not assigned
Bit 12 Not assigned
Bit 13 Not assigned
Bit 14 Not assigned
Bit 15 Not assigned
EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 35
Note!

No. Display
−−− −−− No fault − −
circuit.
motor overcurrent.
with Imotor>Irmotor
motor overcurrent.
with Imotor>Irmotor
brake resistance.
(C0597 = 3).
low. via C0599.
36 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0

No. Display
connected.
(C0582 = 3).
is set too low.
encoder) current
connected.
is set too low.
current
connected contact.
(C0126 = 3).
(C0591 = 3).
(C0592 = 3).
(C0593 = 3).
EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 37

No. Display
(C0595 = 3).
voltage supply
the control cables
via keypad.
Lenze.
via keypad.
38 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0

No. Display
via keypad.
l Check resolver.
(C0586 = 3).
(C0598 = 3).
(C0594 = 3).
EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 39

No. Display
C0025 ³ 309
8.0 V.
connected.
DC bus)!
Setting:
Stegmann company.
40 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0

No. Display
stage was detected.
values. (C0588 = 3).
values. (C0588 = 3).
reached. direction
direction
C0255. (C0589 = 3).
parameter set with
EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 41

No. Display
range.
C1218/1
C1218/2
l Note:
telegrams.
interrupted.
address.
l Note:
telegrams.
interrupted.
sync telegrams.
(C1289/1).
42 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0

No. Display
1 £ (C1223 × C1205) £ 1.07E9 inc
1 £ (C1224 × C1205) £ 1.07E9 inc
C1240 / C1204 × 60 £ 1.5 × nmax
1 £ (C1250 × C1205 × 16.384 / 10
00) £ 2.8634E7 inc
1£ (C0011× C1207/1 / C1207/2
65536 / 60000) £ 32767
be identical.
C1328. (C1329=3).
load side
(C0607 = 3).
EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 43

No. Display
Cycl.−T ID 1)
... ... ...
units.
data
Program
DDS.)
memory transfer.
44 EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0

No. Display
Life Time". master

l Control word AIF
Message Danger!
EDKVS93−03 EN 3.0 45
'(
© 07/2013
Germany Germany
( +49(0)51 54 /82−0 ( 008000/ 2446877 (24 h helpline)
Ê +49(0)51 54 /82 − 28 00 Ê +49(0)5154/ 82−11 12
ü www.Lenze.com
EDKVS93−03 § .M)& § EN § 3.0 § TD06

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
EDSVS9332S
.M)*
Global Drive
Ä.M)*ä
System Manual
9300 0.37 ... 75 kW
EVS9321xS ... EVS9332xS
Servo inverters

Contents i
1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.1 How to use this System Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1−1
1.1.1 Information provided by the System Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1−1
1.1.2 Products to which the System Manual applies . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1−3
1.1.3 Document history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1−4
1.2 Legal regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2−1
1.3 Conventions used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3−1
1.4 Notes used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4−1
2 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−1

2.1 General safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1−1
2.2 Thermal motor monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2−1
2.2.1 Forced ventilated or naturally ventilated motors . . . . . . . . . . 2.2−2
2.2.2 Self−ventilated motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2−3
2.3 Residual hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3−1
2.4 Safety instructions for the installation according to UL . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4−3
3 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−1

3.1 General data and operating conditions ........................ 3.1−1
3.2 Open and closed loop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2−1
3.3 Rated data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3−1
3.3.1 Operation at 400 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3−1
3.3.2 Operation at 480 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3−2
3.3.3 Overcurrent operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3−4
3.4 Current characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4−1
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 i
i Contents
4 Installation of the standard device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−1

4.1 Standard devices in the power range 0.37 ... 11 kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1−1
4.1.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1−1
4.1.2 Mounting with fixing rails (standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1−2
4.1.3 Thermally separated mounting (push−through technique) . 4.1−3
4.1.4 Mounting in "cold plate" technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1−4
4.2 Standard devices in the power range 15 ... 30 kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2−1
4.2.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2−1
4.2.2 Mounting with fixing brackets (standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2−2
4.3 Standard devices with a power of 45 kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3−1
4.3.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3−1
4.3.4 Modification of the fan module for push−through technique 4.3−4
4.4.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4−1
ii EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013
Contents i
5 Wiring of the standard device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−1

5.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−1
5.1.1 Protection of persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−1
5.1.2 Device protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−3
5.1.3 Motor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−3
5.2 Notes on project planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−1
5.2.1 Supply forms / electrical supply conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−1
5.2.2 Operation on public supply systems (compliance with EN 61000−3−2) . .
5.2−1
5.2.3 Controllers in the IT system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−2
5.2.4 Operation at earth−leakage circuit breaker (e.l.c.b.) . . . . . . . . 5.2−3
5.2.5 Interaction with compensation equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−3
5.2.6 Discharge current for mobile systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−4
5.2.7 Optimisation of the controller and mains load . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−5
5.2.8 Reduction of noise emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−6
5.2.9 Mains choke/mains filter assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−7
5.2.10 Motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−8
5.3 Basics for wiring according to EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−1
5.3.1 Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−1
5.3.2 Mains connection, DC supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−1
5.3.3 Motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−1
5.3.4 Control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−3
5.3.5 Installation in the control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−4
5.3.6 Wiring outside of the control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−5
5.3.7 Detecting and eliminating EMC interferences . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−6
5.4.1 Wiring according to EMC (CE−typical drive system) . . . . . . . . 5.4−1
5.4.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4−3
5.4.4 Mains connection: Fuses and cable cross−sections . . . . . . . . 5.4−6
5.4.6 Motor connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4−8
5.5.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5−3
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 iii

i Contents

5.6.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6−3
5.7.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7−3
5.8 Control terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8−1
5.8.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8−1
5.8.2 Connection terminal of the control card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8−3
5.8.3 Device variant without "Safe torque off" function . . . . . . . . 5.8−4
5.8.4 Device variant with "Safe torque off" function . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8−5
5.8.5 State bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8−8
5.8.6 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8−9
5.8.7 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8−10
5.9 Wiring of the system bus (CAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9−1
5.10 Wiring of the feedback system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10−1
5.10.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10−1
5.10.2 Resolver at X7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10−2
5.10.3 Incremental encoder with TTL level at X8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10−3
5.10.4 SinCos encoder at X8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10−4
5.11 Wiring of digital frequency input / digital frequency output . . . . . . . 5.11−1
5.12 Communication modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12−1
iv EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013
Contents i
6 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−1
6.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1−1
6.2 Before switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2−1
6.3 Switch−on sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3−1
6.4 Controller inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4−1
6.5 Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−1
6.5.1 Changing the basic configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−1
6.5.2 Adapting the controller to the mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−2
6.5.3 Entry of motor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−3
6.5.4 Motor selection list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−6
6.5.5 Motor temperature monitoring with PTC or thermal contact 6.5−14
6.5.6 Motor temperature monitoring with KTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−15
6.6 Setting the speed feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6−1
6.6.1 Resolver at X7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6−1
6.7 Current controller adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7−1
6.8 Adjusting the rotor position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8−1
6.9 Changing the assignment of the control terminals X5 and X6 . . . . . . 6.9−1
6.9.1 Free configuration of digital input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9−1
6.9.2 Free configuration of digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9−2
6.9.3 Free configuration of analog input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9−3
6.9.4 Free configuration of analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9−4
7 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7−1

7.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1−1
7.2 Parameter setting with the XT EMZ9371BC keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−1
7.2.1 General data and operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−1
7.2.2 Installation and commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−2
7.2.3 Display elements and function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−3
7.2.4 Changing and saving parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−5
7.2.5 Loading a parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−7
7.2.6 Transferring parameters to other standard devices . . . . . . . 7.2−8
7.2.7 Activating password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−10
7.2.8 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−11
7.2.9 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−12
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 v
i Contents
8 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8−1
8.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1−1
8.2 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−1
8.2.1 Fault responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−1
8.2.2 Setting of responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−2
8.2.3 Monitoring times for process data input objects . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−3
8.2.4 Maximum speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−4
8.2.5 Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−4
8.2.6 Controller current load (I x t monitoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−5
8.2.7 Motor temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−6
8.2.8 Current load of motor (I2 x t monitoring: OC6, OC8) . . . . . . . 8.2−7
8.2.9 Heatsink temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−10
8.2.10 DC−bus voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−11
8.2.11 External error (EEr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−11
8.3 Overview of monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.31
8.4 Code table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4−1
8.5 Selection lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5−1
8.5.1 Selection list 1: Analog output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5−1
8.5.2 Selection list 2: Digital output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5−3
8.5.3 Selection list 3: Angle signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5−7
8.5.4 Selection list 4: Speed signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5−7
8.5.5 Selection list 5: Function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5−8
8.5.6 Selection list 10: Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5−10
8.6 Table of attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6−1
9 Troubleshooting and fault elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9−1

9.1 Display of operating data, diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1−1
9.2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2−1
9.2.1 Status display via controller LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2−1
9.2.2 Fault analysis with the history buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2−1
9.2.3 Fault analysis via LECOM status words (C0150/C0155) . . . . 9.2−3
9.3 System error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3−1
9.3.1 General error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3−1
9.3.2 Resetting system error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3−6
10 DC−bus operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10−1

10.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1−1
10.2 Conditions for trouble−free DC−bus operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2−1
10.3 Fuses and cable cross−sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3−1
10.4 Distributed supply (several supply points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4−1
10.5 Central supply (one supply point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5−1
vi EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013
Contents i
11 Safety engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11−1

11.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1−1
11.2 Operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2−1
11.3 Safety relay KSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3−1
11.4 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4−1
11.5 Functional test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5−1
11.5.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5−1
11.5.2 Manual safety function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5−2
11.5.3 Monitoring the safety function with a PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5−3
12 Accessories (overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12−1

12.1 General accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1−1
12.2 Type−specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2−1
13 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13−1
13.1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1−1
13.1.1 Terminology and abbreviations used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1−1
13.2 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2−1
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 vii

Preface and general information 1
Contents
1 Preface
Contents

1.1.1 Information provided by the System Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1−1
1.1.2 Products to which the System Manual applies . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1−3
1.4 Notes used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4−1
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 1−1

How to use this System Manual 1.1
Information provided by the System Manual 1.1.1
1.1 How to use this System Manual
1.1.1 Information provided by the System Manual
Target group This System Manual addresses to all persons who dimension, install,
commission, and set 9300 servo inverters.
Together with the System Manual (supplement), document number
EDSVS9332S−EXT, and the catalogue, it provides the basis for project
planning for the mechanical engineer and the plant constructor.
Contents The System Manual provides the basis for the description of the 9300 servo
inverter. Together with the System Manual (supplement), document
number EDSVS9332S−EXT, a complete System Manual is available:
ƒ The features and functions are described in detail.
ƒ The parameterisation for typical applications is pointed up by the use
of examples.
ƒ In case of doubt always the mounting instructions supplied with
the 9300 servo inverter are valid.
Contents of System Manual Contents of System Manual (supplement)
1 Preface 1 Preface
2 Safety −
3 Technical data −
4 Mounting the standard device −
5 Wiring the standard device −
6 Commissioning −
7 Parameter setting −
8 Configuration 2 Configuration
8.1 Monitoring 2.1 Configuration with Global Drive Control
8.2 Monitoring functions 2.2 Basic configurations
8.3 Code table 2.3 Modes of operation
8.4 Selection lists
8.5 Table of attributes
− 3 Function library
− 4 Application examples
9 Troubleshooting and fault −
elimination
10 DC−bus operation −
11 Safety engineering −
12 Accessories −
13 Appendix 5 Appendix
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 1.1−1

1 Preface and general information
How to find information Use the System Manual as the basis. It contains references to the
corresponding chapters in the System Manual Supplement:
ƒ Each chapter is a complete unit and comprehensively informs about a
subject.
ƒ The Table of Contents and Index help you to find all information about
a certain topic.
ƒ Descriptions and data of other Lenze products (Drive PLC, Lenze geared
motors, Lenze motors, ...) can be found in the corresponding catalogs,
Operating Instructions and manuals. The required documentation can
be ordered at your Lenze sales partner or downloaded as PDF file from
the Internet.
Tip!
Information and auxiliary devices related to the Lenze products
can be found in the download area at
1.1−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Products to which the System Manual applies 1.1.2
1.1.2 Products to which the System Manual applies
This documentation is valid for 9300 servo inverters as of nameplate data:

Nameplate
EVS 93xx ˘ x x Vxx 6x 8x
Product range
EVS = servo controller
400V 480 V
9321 = 0.37 kW 0.37 kW
9322 = 0.75 kW 0.75 kW
9323 = 1.5 kW 1.5 kW
9324 = 3.0 kW 3.0 kW
9325 = 5.5 kW 5.5 kW
9326 = 11 kW 11 kW
9327 = 15 kW 18.5 kW
3928 = 22 kW 30 kW
9329 = 30 kW 37 kW 9300vec112
9330 = 45 kW 45 kW
9331 = 55 kW 55 kW
9332 = 75 kW 90 kW
Design
E= built−in unit
C= built−in unit in "cold plate" technology
Version
S= servo inverter
Variant
˘ standard
V003 = in "cold plate" technology
V004 = with "safe torque off" function
V100 = for IT mains
V104 = with "safe torque off" function and for IT mains
Hardware version (as of 6x)
Software version (as of 8.0)
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 1.1−3

1.1.3 Document history
What is new / what has Material number Version Description

changed?
.M)* 6.0 09/2013 TD06 Error corrections
13375723 5.3 08/2012 TD23 Error corrections
13375723 5.1 04/2011 TD23 Chapter "DC−bus operation" updated due to
changes of DC fuses
Error corrections
13270788 4.1 07/2010 TD23 New edition due to reorganisation of the
company
13270788 4.0 05/2010 TD23 Extended by functions for software version
8.0
Complete editorial revision and error
correction
Division of the System Manual into 2 parts
(EDSVS9332S and EDSVS9332S−EXT)
00481343 3.0 02/2004 TD23 Extended by functions for software version
6.2
Error correction
00465483 2.0 09/2003 TD23 Chapter "Technical data" supplemented by
information on circuit breakers for the types
9321 and 9322
Error correction
1.1−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Legal regulations 1.2
1.2 Legal regulations
Identification Lenze controllers are unambiguously identified by the contents of the

nameplate.
Manufacturer Lenze Automation GmbH, Hans−Lenze−Str. 1, D−31855 Aerzen, Germany
CE conformity In conformity with EC "Low Voltage" Directive
Application as directed 9300 servo controllers and accessories

ƒ may only be operated under the conditions specified in this System
Manual.
ƒ are components
– for open and closed loop control of variable speed drives with PM
synchronous motors, asynchronous standard motors or asynchronous
servo motors.
– for installation in a machine.
– for assembly with other components to form a machine.
ƒ comply with the protection requirements of the EC "Low Voltage"
Directive.
ƒ are not machines for the purpose of the EC "Machinery" Directive.
ƒ are not to be used as domestic appliances, but only for industrial
purposes.
Drive systems with 9300 servo controllers
ƒ comply with the EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" Directive if they
are installed according to the guidelines of CE−typical drive systems.
ƒ can be used
– for operation on public and non−public mains supplies.
– for operation in industrial premises and residential and commercial
areas.
ƒ The user is responsible for the compliance of the machine application
with the EC Directives.
Any other use shall be deemed inappropriate!
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 1.2−1

Liability The information, data and notes given in this System Manual met the state
of the art at the time of printing. Claims on modifications referring to
controllers and components which have already been supplied cannot be
derived from the information, illustrations and descriptions contained in
this manual.
The procedural notes and circuit details given in this System Manual are
suggestions and their transferability to the respective application has to be
checked. Lenze does not take any responsibility for the suitability of the
given procedures and circuit suggestions.
The specifications given in this System Manual describe the product features
without guaranteeing them.
Lenze does not accept any liability for damage and malfunctioning caused
by:
ƒ Disregarding the System Manual
ƒ Unauthorised modifications to the controller
ƒ Operating faults
ƒ Improper working on and with the controller
Warranty See terms of sales and delivery of Lenze Automation GmbH.
Warranty claims must be made to Lenze immediately after detecting the
deficiency or fault.
The warranty is void in all cases where liability claims cannot be made.
1.2−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Conventions used 1.3
This documentation uses the following conventions to distinguish between

different types of information:
Spelling of numbers
Decimal separator language−depen In each case, the signs typical for
dent the target language are used as
decimal separators.
For example: 1234.56 or 1234,56
Warnings
UL warnings
UR warnings
Text
For example: »Engineer«, »Global
Drive Control« (GDC)
Icons
Page reference Reference to another page with
Documentation reference Reference to another
documentation with additional
information
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 1.3−1

Notes used 1.4
1.4 Notes used
The following pictographs and signal words are used in this documentation
to indicate dangers and important information:
Safety instructions Structure of safety instructions:
Danger!
Note
(describes the danger and gives information about how to
prevent dangerous situations)

Danger of personal injury through dangerous
electrical voltage.
Danger! Reference to an imminent danger that may result in
death or serious personal injury if the corresponding
measures are not taken.
Danger of personal injury through a general source of

danger.
Reference to a possible danger that may result in
Stop! property damage if the corresponding measures are
not taken.
Application notes Pictograph and signal word Meaning
Special safety instructions Pictograph and signal word Meaning

and application notes for UL
and UR Safety or application note for the operation of a

UL−approved device in UL−approved systems.
Warnings! Possibly the drive system is not operated in
compliance with UL if the corresponding measures are
not taken.
Safety or application note for the operation of a

UR−approved device in UL−approved systems.
not taken.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 1.4−1

Contents
Contents

2.2.1 Forced ventilated or naturally ventilated motors . . . . . . . . . 2.2−2
2.2.2 Self−ventilated motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2−3
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 2−1

General safety information 2.1
2.1 General safety information
Scope The following general safety instructions apply to all Lenze drive and
automation components.
The product−specific safety and application notes given in this
documentation must be observed!
Note for UL−approved systems: UL warnings are notes which only apply to
UL systems. The documentation contains specific notes with regard to UL.
For your own safety
Danger!
Disregarding the following basic safety measures may lead to
severe personal injury and damage to material assets!
ƒ Lenze drive and automation components ...
... must only be used for the intended purpose.
... must never be operated if damaged.
... must never be subjected to technical modifications.
... must never be operated unless completely assembled.
... must never be operated without the covers/guards.
... can − depending on their degree of protection − have live, movable or
rotating parts during or after operation. Surfaces can be hot.
ƒ All specifications of the corresponding enclosed documentation must
be observed.
This is vital for a safe and trouble−free operation and for achieving the
specified product features.
The procedural notes and circuit details provided in this document are
proposals which the user must check for suitability for his application.
The manufacturer does not accept any liability for the suitability of the
specified procedures and circuit proposals.
ƒ Only qualified skilled personnel are permitted to work with or on Lenze
drive and automation components.
According to IEC 60364 or CENELEC HD 384, these are persons ...
... who are familiar with the installation, assembly, commissioning and
operation of the product,
... possess the appropriate qualifications for their work,
... and are acquainted with and can apply all the accident prevent
regulations, directives and laws applicable at the place of use.
Transport, storage ƒ Transport and storage in a dry, low−vibration environment without
aggressive atmosphere; preferably in the packaging provided by the
manufacturer.
– Protect against dust and shocks.
– Comply with climatic conditions according to the technical data.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 2.1−1

Mechanical installation ƒ Install the product according to the regulations of the corresponding
documentation. In particular observe the section "Operating
conditions" in the chapter "Technical data".
ƒ Provide for a careful handling and avoid mechanical overload. During
handling neither bend components, nor change the insulation
distances.
ƒ The product contains electrostatic sensitive devices which can easily be
damaged by short circuit or static discharge (ESD). Thus, electronic
components and contacts must not be touched unless ESD measures
are taken beforehand.
Electrical installation ƒ Carry out the electrical installation according to the relevant
regulations (e. g. cable cross−sections, fusing, connection to the PE
conductor). Additional notes are included in the documentation.
ƒ When working on live products, observe the applicable national
regulations for the prevention of accidents (e.g. BGV 3).
ƒ The documentation contains information about EMC−compliant
installation (shielding, earthing, arrangement of filters and laying
cables). The system or machine manufacturer is responsible for
compliance with the limit values required by EMC legislation.
Warning: The controllers are products which can be used in category C2
drive systems as per EN 61800−3. These products may cause radio
interference in residential areas. If this happens, the operator may need
to take appropriate action.
ƒ For compliance with the limit values for radio interference emission at
the site of installation, the components − if specified in the technical
data − have to be mounted in housings (e. g. control cabinets). The
housings have to enable an EMC−compliant installation. In particular
observe that for example control cabinet doors preferably have a
circumferential metallic connection to the housing. Reduce openings or
cutouts through the housing to a minimum.
ƒ Only plug in or remove pluggable terminals in the deenergised state!
Commissioning ƒ If required, you have to equip the system with additional monitoring
and protective devices in accordance with the respective valid safety
regulations (e. g. law on technical equipment, regulations for the
prevention of accidents).
ƒ Before commissioning remove transport locking devices and keep them
for later transports.
Operation ƒ Keep all protective covers and doors closed during operation.
Safety functions ƒ Without a higher−level safety system, the described product must
neither be used for the protection of machines nor persons.
ƒ Certain controller versions support safety functions (e.g. "Safe torque
off", formerly "Safe standstill").
The notes on the safety functions provided in the documentation of the
versions must be observed.
2.1−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Maintenance and servicing ƒ The components are maintenance−free if the required operating
conditions are observed.
ƒ If the cooling air is polluted, the cooling surfaces may be contaminated
or the air vents may be blocked. Under these operating conditions, the
cooling surfaces and air vents must be cleaned at regular intervals.
Never use sharp objects for this purpose!
ƒ Only replace defective fuses in the deenergised state to the type
specified.
ƒ After the system has been disconnected from the supply voltage, live
components and power connections must not be touched immediately
because capacitors may be charged. Please observe the corresponding
notes on the device.
Disposal ƒ Recycle metals and plastic materials. Ensure professional disposal of

assembled PCBs.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 2.1−3

Thermal motor monitoring 2.2
From software version 8.0 onwards, the 9300 controllers are provided with
an I2xt function for sensorless thermal monitoring of the connected motor.
Note!
ƒ I2 x t monitoring is based on a mathematical model which
calculates a thermal motor load from the detected motor
currents.
ƒ The calculated motor load is saved when the mains is
switched.
ƒ The function is UL−certified, i.e. no additional protective
measures are required for the motor in UL−approved systems.
ƒ However, I2 x t monitoring is no full motor protection as other
influences on the motor load could not be detected as for
instance changed cooling conditions (e.g. interrupted or too
warm cooling air flow).
The thermal loading capacity of the motor is expressed by the thermal motor
time constant (t, C0128). Find the value in the rated motor data or contact
the manufacturer of the motor.
The I2 x t monitoring has been designed such that it will be activated after
179 s in the event of a motor with a thermal motor time constant of
5 minutes (Lenze setting C0128), a motor current of 1.5 x IN and a trigger
threshold of 100 %.
The I2 x t monitoring is deactivated. When C0120 = 0 % and C0127 = 0 %, set
C0066 is set = 0 % and controller inhibit.
I2 x t monitoring is stopped. When C0120 = 0 % and C0127 = 0 %, set
The current value in C0066 and at the controller enable.
Note!
An error message OC6 or OC8 can only be reset if the I2 x t load
falls below the set trigger threshold by 5 %.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 2.2−1

Parameter setting The following codes can be set for I2 x t monitoring:

Calculate release time and Formula for release time Information

I2xt load
ȡ ȣ IMot
Ir
Actual motor current (C0054)
Rated motor current (C0088)
t + * (t) lnȧ1 * z)1
ȧ t
ǒ Ǔ
2 Thermal motor time constant (C0128)
Ȣ Ȥ
I Mot
100
IN z Threshold value in C0120 (OC6) or
C0127 (OC8)

L(t) Chronological sequence of the I2 x t
load of the motor
(Display: C0066)
ǒI I Ǔ ǒ1 * e Ǔ
2
Mot *t
N
L(t) + L Start
Ǹ e*tt If an error is triggered, the value
corresponds to the threshold value set
in C0120 (OC6) or C0127 (OC8).
Read release time in the Diagram for detecting the release times for a motor with a thermal motor
diagram
time constant of 5 minutes (Lenze setting C0128):
120
100
50
0 t [s]
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
9300STD105
Fig. 2.2−1 I2 × t−monitoring: Release times for different motor currents and trigger
thresholds
T Time
2.2−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Self−ventilated motors 2.2.2
Due to the construction, self−ventilated standard motors are exposed to an

increased heat generation in the lower speed range compared to forced
ventilated motors.
Warnings!
speed−dependent evaluation of the permissible torque via code
C0129/x.

Effect of code C0129/x I / IN
1.1
1.0
1 C0129/2
0.9
3
0.8
2
0.7
0.6
0 C0129/1
0 n / nN
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
0.132
9300STD350
Fig. 2.2−2 Working point in the range of characteristic lowering
The lowered speed / torque characteristic (Fig. 2.2−2) reduces the

permissible thermal load of self−ventilated standard motors. The
characteristic is a line the definition of which requires two points:
With increasing speeds, the maximally permissible load remains
unchanged (IMot = Irated).
In Fig. 2.2−2, the motor speed and the corresponding permissible motor
torque () can be read for each working point (on the
characteristic ( ) ... ). can also be calculated using the values in
C0129/1and C0129/2 (evaluation coefficient "y", 2.2−4).
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 2.2−3

Calculate release time and Calculate the release time and the I2 x t load of the motor considering the
I2xt load
values in C0129/1 and C0129/2(evaluation coefficient "y").
lnȧ1 * ȧ
z)1 In Function: Natural logarithm
T + * (t)
ǒ Ǔ
2
Ȣ Ȥ
I Mot
100
y IN Ir Rated motor current (C0088)
z Threshold value in C0120 (OC6) or
C0127 (OC8)
100% * C0129ń1 n
y+ n N ) C0129ń1 y Evaluation coefficient
C0129ń2

load of the motor
(Display: C0066)
ǒy I I Ǔ ǒ1 * e Ǔ
2
Mot *t y Evaluation coefficient
L(t) + 100% t
N IMot Actual motor current (C0054)
L(t) + L Start
Ǹ
t
e *t
If an error is triggered, the value
in C0120 (OC6) or C0127 (OC8).
2.2−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Residual hazards 2.3
Protection of persons ƒ According to their enclosure, Lenze controllers (frequency inverters,

servo inverters, DC speed controllers) and their components can carry a
voltage, or parts of the controllers can move or rotate during operation.
Surfaces can be hot.
– If the required cover is removed, the controllers are used
inappropriately or installed or operated incorrectly, severe damage to
persons or material assets can occur.
– For more detailed information please see the documentation.
ƒ There is a high amount of energy within the controller. Therefore
always wear personal protective equipment (body protection,
headgear, eye protection, ear protection, hand guard) when working on
the controller when it is live.
ƒ Before working on the controller, check if no voltage is applied to the
power terminals.
– the power terminals U, V, W, +UG and −UG still carry dangerous
voltage for at least 3 minutes after power−off.
– the power terminals L1, L2, L3; U, V, W, +UG and −UG carry dangerous
voltage when the motor is stopped.
ƒ Before power−off during DC−bus operation, all controllers must be
inhibited and disconnected from the mains.
ƒ The discharge current to PE potential is > 3.5 mA. In accordance with
EN 61800−5−1
– the design of the PE conductor has to be double or, in the case of a
single design, must have a cable cross−section of at least 10 mm2.
ƒ The controller can only be safely disconnected from the mains via a
contactor on the input side.
ƒ During parameter set transfer the control terminals of the controller
can have undefined states.
– Therefore the connectors X5 and X6 must be disconnected from the
controller before the transfer takes place. This ensures that the
controller is inhibited and all control terminals have the defined state
"LOW".
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 2.3−1

ƒ Controllers can cause a DC current in the PE conductor. If a residual

current device (RCD) or a fault current monitoring unit (RCM) is used
for protection in the case of direct or indirect contact, only one
RCD/RCM of the following type can be used on the current supply side:
– Type B for the connection to a three−phase system
– Type A or type B for the connection to a single phase system
Alternatively another protective measure can be used, like for instance
isolation from the environment by means of double or reinforced
insulation, or isolation from the supply system by using a transformer.
Device protection ƒ Frequent mains switching (e.g. inching mode via mains contactor) can
overload and destroy the input current limitation of the drive
controller:
– At least 3 minutes must pass between switching off and restarting
the devices EVS9321−xS and EVS9322−xS.
– At least 3 minutes must pass between two starting procedures of the
devices EVS9323−xS ... EVS9332−xS.
disconnections occur frequently. The drive variants Vxx4 are
equipped with this function.
Motor protection ƒ For some controller settings, the connected motor may overheat (e.g.
when operating the DC injection brake or a self−ventilated motor at
low speed for longer periods).
– Using an overcurrent relay or a temperature monitoring device
provides a large degree of protection against overload.
– We recommend to use PTC thermistors or thermal contacts for motor
temperature monitoring. (Lenze three−phase AC motors are equipped
with thermal contacts (NC contacts) as standard)
– PTC thermistors or thermal contacts can be connected to the
controller.
ƒ Drives can attain dangerous overspeeds (e.g. setting of high output
frequencies with motors and machines not qualified for this purpose).
2.3−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Safety instructions for the installation according to UL 2.4
Warnings!
– For information on the protection level of the internal
overload protection for a motor load, see the corresponding
manuals or software helps.
– If the integral solid state motor overload protection is not
used, external or remote overload protection must be
provided.
– The integral solid state protection does not provide branch
circuit protection.
– Branch circuit protection has to be provided externally in
accordance with corresponding instructions, the National
Electrical Code and any additional codes.
ƒ Please observe the specifications for fuses and
screw−tightening torques in these instructions.
ƒ EVS9321 EVS9326:
– Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more
than 5000 rms symmetrical amperes, 480 V maximum,
when protected by fuses.
when protected by CC, J, T or R class fuses.
ƒ EVS9327 EVS9329:
when protected by J, T or R class fuses.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 2.4−3

ƒ EVS9330 EVS9332:
2.4−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Technical data 3
Contents
3 Technical data
Contents

3.3 Rated data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3−1
3.3.1 Operation at 400 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3−1
3.3.2 Operation at 480 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3−2
3.3.3 Overcurrent operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3−4
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 3−1

Technical data 3
General data and operating conditions 3.1
3.1 General data and operating conditions
General data Conformity and approval

Conformity
CE 2006/95/EC Low−Voltage Directive
2004/108/EG EMC Directive
Approval
UL cULus Power Conversion Equipment (File No. E132659)
Protection of persons and equipment

Type of protection EN 60529 IP20
IP41 in case of thermally separated installation
(push−through technique) between the control
cabinet (inside) and the environment.
NEMA 250 Protection against accidental contact in accordance
with type 1
Earth leakage current IEC/EN 61800−5−1 > 3.5 mA Observe regulations and
safety instructions!
Insulation of control EN 61800−5−1 Safe mains isolation by double (reinforced)
circuits insulation for terminals X1 and X5.
Basic insulation (single isolating distance) for
terminals X3, X4, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10 and X11.
Insulation resistance IEC/EN 61800−5−1 < 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category III
> 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category II
Protective measures Against short circuit, earth fault (earth−fault
protected during mains connection, limited
earth−fault protection during operation),
overvoltage, motor overtemperature (input for PTC
or thermal contact)
EMC
Noise emission IEC/EN 61800−3 Cable−guided, up to 10 m motor cable length with
mains filter A: category C2.
Radiation, with mains filter A and installation in
control cabinet: category C2
Interference IEC/EN 61800−3 Category C3
immunity
Operating conditions Ambient conditions

Climatic
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +55 °C) < 6 months
1K3 (−25 ... +40 °C) > 6 months
> 2 years: anodise DC bus
capacitors
Operation
EVS9321 ... IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (0 ... +55 °C)
EVS9326 > +40 °C: reduce the rated output current by
2.5 %/°C.
EVS9327 ... 3K3 (0 ... +50 °C)
2.5 %/°C.
Pollution EN 61800−5−1 Degree of pollution 2
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 3.1−1

3 Technical data
Ambient conditions
Site altitude < 4000 m amsl
> 1000 m amsl: reduce the rated output current by
5 %/ 1000 m
Mechanical
Vibration resistance EN 50178 Tested according to "General Vibration Stress
EN 61800−5−1 Characteristic 1"
Germanischer
Lloyd, general
conditions
Electrical
AC−mains
connection
Max. mains 320 V − 0 % ... 528 V + 0 %
voltage range
Mains frequency 45 Hz − 0 % ... 65 Hz + 0 %
Power system TT, Operation permitted without restrictions with
TN earthed neutral.
Power system IT Operation only permitted with the device variants
V024 or V100.
Operation permitted without restrictions with
insulated neutral.
Observe instructions on specific measures!
Operation on EN 61000−3−2 Limitation of harmonic currents
public supply Total output at the Compliance with the
systems mains requirements 1)
< 1 kW With mains choke.
> 1 kW Without additional
measures.
1) The additional measures mentioned have the effect that solely
the controllers meet the requirements of EN 61000−3−2. The
machine/system manufacturer is responsible for the compliance
with the requirements for the machine/system!
DC−mains
connection
Max. mains 450 V − 0 % ... 740 V + 0 %
voltage range
Operating DC voltage must be symmetrical to PE.
conditions The controller will be destroyed when +UG or −UG
are earthed.
Motor connection
Length of the < 50 m
motor cable No additional output filters are required at a rated
mains voltage and a switching frequency of 8 kHz.
If EMC requirements have to be met, the
permissible cable length may be affected.
Mounting conditions
Mounting place In the control cabinet
Mounting position Vertical
Free spaces 4−1
Dimensions
Weights
3.1−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Technical data 3
Open and closed loop control 3.2
3.2 Open and closed loop control
Open and closed loopcontrol

Switching frequency 8 kHz or 16 kHz
Digital setpoint
selection
Accuracy ± 0.005 Hz (= ± 100 ppm)
Analog setpoint
selection
Linearity ± 0.15 % Signal level: 5 V or 10 V
Temperature ± 0.1 % 0 ... 50 °C
sensitivity
Offset ± 0.1 %
Analog inputs l 2 inputs (bipolar)
Analog outputs l 2 outputs (bipolar)
Digital inputs l 5 inputs (freely assignable)
Digital outputs l 1 input for controller inhibit
l 4 outputs (freely assignable)
l 1 resolver input; design: 9−pole Sub−D socket
l 1 incremental encoder input (500 kHz, TTL level); design: 9−pole Sub−D socket (pin)
l 1 digital frequency input (500 kHz, TTL level); design: 9−pole Sub−D socket (pin); can be optionally
used as incremental encoder input (500 kHz, TTL level)
l 1 digital frequency output (500 kHz, TTL level); design: 9−pole Sub−D socket
Cycle times
Digital inputs 1 ms
Digital outputs 1 ms
Analog inputs 1 ms
Analog outputs 1 ms (smoothing time: t= 2 ms)
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 3.2−1

Technical data 3
Rated data 3.3
Operation at 400 V 3.3.1
3.3 Rated data
Note!
The controllers EVS9324, EVS9326 and EVS9328 EVS9332 may
only be operated with the prescribed mains chokes and mains
filters.
3.3.1 Operation at 400 V
Basis of the data

Voltage Frequency
AC mains connection [Vrate 3/PE AC 320 V − 0 % ... 440 V + 0 % 45 Hz − 0 % ... 65 Hz + 0 %
d]
DC−mains connection [UDC] DC 450 V − 0 % ... 620 V + 0 % ˘
(alternatively)
Output voltage
With mains choke 3 ~ 0 approx. 94 % Vrated ˘
Without mains choke 3 ~ 0 ... UN ˘
9300 Mains current 1) Typical motor power Output power Power loss
With Without ASM 8 kHz 2)
mains choke mains choke (4−pole)
U, V, W +UG, −UG 3)
Type Ir [A] Ir [A] Pr [kW] Pr [hp] S r8 [kVA] PDC [kW] PV [W]
EVS9321−xS 1.5 2.1 0.37 0.5 1.0 2.0 100
EVS9322−xS 2.5 3.5 0.75 1.0 1.7 0.75 110
EVS9323−xS 3.9 5.5 1.5 2.0 2.7 2.2 140
EVS9324−xS 7.0 ˘ 3.0 4.0 4.8 0.75 200
EVS9325−xS 12.0 16.8 5.5 7.5 9.0 0 260
EVS9326−xS 20.5 ˘ 11.0 15.0 16.3 0 390
EVS9327−xS 27.0 43.5 15.0 20.0 22.2 10 430
EVS9328−xS 44.0 ˘ 22.0 30.0 32.6 4 640
EVS9329−xS 53.0 ˘ 30.0 40.0 40.9 0 810
EVS9330−xS 78.0 ˘ 45.0 60.0 61.6 5 1100
EVS9331−xS 100 ˘ 55.0 75.0 76.2 0 1470
EVS9332−xS 135 ˘ 75.0 100 100.5 0 1960
Bold print = Lenze setting
1) Mains currents at 8 kHz switching frequency
2) Switching frequency of the inverter
3) Power which can additionally be drawn from the DC bus at operation with power−adapted motor
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 3.3−1

3 Technical data
3.3 Rated data
9300 Output currents

8 kHz 1) 16 kHz 1)
Rated current Maximum Standstill current Rated current Maximum Standstill current
current 2) current 2)
Type Ir8 [A] IM8 [A] I08 [A] Ir16 [A] IM16 [A] I016 [A]
EVS9321−xS 1.5 2.25 2.3 1.1 1.65 1.7
EVS9322−xS 2.5 3.75 3.8 1.8 2.7 2.7
EVS9323−xS 3.9 5.85 5.9 2.9 4.35 4.4
EVS9324−xS 7.0 10.5 10.5 5.2 7.8 7.8
EVS9325−xS 13.0 19.5 19.5 9.7 14.6 14.6
EVS9326−xS 23.5 35.3 23.5 15.3 23.0 15.3
EVS9327−xS 32.0 48.0 32.0 20.8 31.2 20.8
EVS9328−xS 47.0 70.5 47.0 30.6 45.9 30.6
EVS9329−xS 59.0 88.5 52.0 38.0 57.0 33.0
EVS9330−xS 89.0 133.5 80.0 58.0 87.0 45.0
EVS9331−xS 110 165 110 70.0 105 70.0
EVS9332−xS 145 21.5 126 90.0 135 72.0
2) The currents apply to a periodic load change cycle with max. 1 minute overcurrent duration and 2
minutes base load duration at max. 75 % Ir
Basis of the data

Voltage Frequency
Supply
3/PE 480 V AC [Ur] 320 V − 0 % ... 528 V + 0 % 45 Hz − 0 % ... 65 Hz + 0 %
DC 678 V (alternatively) [UDC] 460 V − 0 % ... 740 V + 0 % ˘
Output voltage
With mains choke 3 ~ 0 ... approx. 94 % Ur ˘
Without mains choke 3 ~ 0 ... Ur ˘
3.3−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Technical data 3
Rated data 3.3
U, V, W +UG, −UG 3)
EVS9321−xS 1.5 2.1 0.37 0.5 1.2 2.0 100
EVS9322−xS 2.5 3.5 0.75 1.0 2.1 0.75 110
EVS9323−xS 3.9 5.5 1.5 2.0 3.2 2.2 140
EVS9324−xS 7.0 ˘ 3.0 4.0 5.8 0.75 200
EVS9325−xS 12.0 16.8 5.5 7.5 10.8 0 260
EVS9326−xS 20.5 ˘ 11.0 15.0 18.5 0 390
EVS9327−xS 27.0 43.5 18.5 25.0 25.0 12 430
EVS9328−xS 44.0 ˘ 30.0 40.0 37.0 4.8 640
EVS9329−xS 53.0 ˘ 37.0 50.0 46.6 0 810
EVS9330−xS 78.0 ˘ 45.0 60.0 69.8 6 1100
EVS9331−xS 100 ˘ 55.0 75.0 87.3 0 1470
EVS9332−xS 135 ˘ 90.0 125 104 6 1960

8 kHz 1) 16 kHz 1)
EVS9321−xS 1.5 2.25 2.3 1.1 1.65 1.7
EVS9322−xS 2.5 3.75 3.8 1.8 2.7 2.7
EVS9323−xS 3.9 5.85 5.9 2.9 4.35 4.4
EVS9324−xS 7.0 10.5 10.5 5.2 7.8 7.8
EVS9325−xS 13.0 19.5 19.5 9.7 14.6 14.6
EVS9326−xS 22.3 33.5 22.3 14.5 21.8 14.5
EVS9327−xS 30.4 45.6 30.4 19.2 28.8 19.2
EVS9328−xS 44.7 67.1 44.7 28.2 42.3 28.2
EVS9329−xS 56.0 84.0 49.0 35.0 52.5 25.0
EVS9330−xS 84.0 126 72.0 55.0 82.5 36.0
EVS9331−xS 105 157.5 105 65.0 97.5 58.0
EVS9332−xS 125 187.5 111 80.0 120 58.0
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 3.3−3

3 Technical data
3.3 Rated data
3.3.3 Overcurrent operation
Under the operating conditions described here, the

EVS9321−xS ... EVS9324−xS controllers can supply a rated output current
which is up to twice as high.
Note!
If you enter values > 1.5 × rated output current under C0022, the
controller switches to overcurrent operation.
ƒ Switching between overcurrent operation and standard
operation is only possible if the controller is inhibited
(X5/28 = LOW).
ƒ The continuous current is automatically reduced to 70 % of
the rated output current.
3.3.3.1 Operation at 400 V

Basis of the data
Voltage Frequency
d]
(alternatively)
Output voltage
U, V, W +UG, −UG 3)
EVS9321−xS 1.5 2.1 0.37 0.5 1.0 2.0 100
EVS9322−xS 2.5 3.5 0.75 1.0 1.7 0.75 110
EVS9323−xS 3.9 5.5 1.5 2.0 2.7 2.2 140
EVS9324−xS 7.0 ˘ 3.0 4.0 4.8 0.75 200
3.3−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Technical data 3
Rated data 3.3
Overcurrent operation 3.3.3

8 kHz 1) 16 kHz 1)
Rated current Continuous Maximum Standstill Rated current Continuous Maximum Standstill
thermal current 2) current thermal current 2) current
Type Ir8 [A] Ir8 [A] IM8 [A] I08 [A] Ir16 [A] Ir16 [A] IM16 [A] I016 [A]
EVS9321−xS 1.5 1.05 3.0 3.0 1.1 0.77 2.2 2.2
EVS9322−xS 2.5 1.75 5.0 5.0 1.8 1.26 3.6 3.6
EVS9323−xS 3.9 2.73 7.8 7.8 2.9 2.03 5.8 5.8
EVS9324−xS 7.0 4.9 14.0 14.0 5.2 3.64 10.4 10.4
2) The currents apply to a periodic load change cycle with max. 10 seconds overcurrent duration and
50 seconds base load duration at max. 44 % of the rated current
3) 70 % of the rated current

Basis of the data
Voltage Frequency
Supply
3/PE 480 V AC [Ur] 320 V − 0 % ... 528 V + 0 % 45 Hz − 0 % ... 65 Hz + 0 %
Output voltage
U, V, W +UG, −UG 3)
EVS9321−xS 1.5 2.1 0.37 0.5 1.2 2.0 100
EVS9322−xS 2.5 3.5 0.75 1.0 2.1 0.75 110
EVS9323−xS 3.9 5.5 1.5 2.0 3.2 2.2 140
EVS9324−xS 7.0 ˘ 3.0 4.0 5.8 0.75 200

8 kHz 1) 16 kHz 1)
EVS9321−xS 1.5 1.05 3.0 3.0 1.1 0.77 2.2 2.2
EVS9322−xS 2.5 1.75 5.0 5.0 1.8 1.26 3.6 3.6
EVS9323−xS 3.9 2.73 7.8 7.8 2.9 2.03 5.8 5.8
EVS9324−xS 7.0 4.9 14.0 14.0 5.2 3.64 10.4 10.4
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 3.3−5

Technical data 3
Current characteristics 3.4
3.4 Current characteristics
The maximum output current of the EVS9326 ... EVS9332 devices is limited
under certain operating conditions:
ƒ At output frequencies fout < |5 Hz| and heatsink temperatures
JK > 40° C.
ƒ The current limitation depends on the switching frequency.
0 1
IOUT K < 40 °C
IOUT
Imax Imax
K = 80 °C
I0max I0max
0 0
0 5 fout [Hz] 0 5 fout [Hz]
9300vec132
Fig. 3.4−1 Current derating characteristics

Operation at switching frequency fchop = 8 kHz (C0018 = 1)
The current limitation follows the characteristic curve
At output frequencies fout < |5 Hz| and heatsink temperatures
JK = 40 ... 80 °C, the current limit is steplessly adjusted in the range
The current limitation follows the characteristic curve and is independent of
the heatsink temperature
At automatic change−over of the switching frequency (C0018 = 0), the controller
operates at fchop = 16 kHz. The current limitation follows the characteristic
curve .
If an increased torque is required (e.g. acceleration processes), the controller
automatically switches over to fchop = 8 kHz. The current limitation follows the
characteristic curve .
9300 I0max [A] 1) I0max [A] 2)

fchop = 8 kHz fchop = 16 kHz
Umains Umains
400 V 480 V 400 V 480 V
EVS9326−xS 23.5 22.3 15.3 14.5
EVS9327−xS 32.0 30.4 20.8 19.2
EVS9328−xS 47.0 44.7 30.6 28.2
EVS9329−xS 52.0 49.0 33.0 25.0
EVS9330−xS 80.0 72.0 45.0 36.0
EVS9331−xS 110 105 70.0 58.0
EVS9332−xS 126 111 72.0 58.0
1) Maximum available output current at an output frequency fout = |0 Hz| and heatsink temperature
JK = 80 °C
2) Maximum available output current at an output frequency fout = |0 Hz|
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 3.4−1

Installing of the standard device 4
Contents
4 Installation of the standard device
Contents

4.1.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1−1
4.2 Standard devices in the power range 15 ... 30 kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2−1
4.2.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2−1
4.3.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3−1
4.4.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4−1
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 4−1

Standard devices in the power range 0.37 ... 11 kW 4.1
Important notes 4.1.1
4.1 Standard devices in the power range 0.37 ... 11 kW
4.1.1 Important notes
Mass of the devices 9300 Standard device "Cold plate" device

Type EVS93xx−ES EVS93xx−CS
[kg] [kg]
EVS9321−xS 4.0 3.1
EVS9322−xS 4.0 3.1
EVS9323−xS 5.5 3.9
EVS9324−xS 5.5 3.9
EVS9325−xS 7.4 5.2
EVS9326−xS 7.4 5.2
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 4.1−1

4 Installing of the standard device
4.1.2 Mounting with fixing rails (standard)
Mounting material required from the scope of supply:

Description Use Quantity
EVS9321−ES ... EVS9325−ES
EVS9324−ES EVS9326−ES
Fixing rails Drive controller fixing 2 4
Dimensions
0 1 2
L L ³ 100mm
b1 d b b1 d b
³ 100mm
c c1 c
g
a a e
9300std062
Fig. 4.1−1 Standard mounting with fixing rails 0.37 ... 11 kW

Drive controllers can be mounted side by side without spacing
9300 Dimensions [mm]

Type a b b1 c c1 d d1 e 1) g k
EVS9321−ES
78 384 350 39 − 365 ˘ 250 6.5 30
EVS9322−ES
EVS9323−ES
97 384 350 48.5 − 365 ˘ 250 6.5 30
EVS9324−ES
EVS9325−ES
135 384 350 21.5 92 365 ˘ 250 6.5 30
EVS9326−ES
1) For a fieldbus module plugged onto X1, consider mounting space for connecting cables
Mounting ƒ Attach the fixing rails to the housing of the drive controller.
4.1−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Thermally separated mounting (push−through technique) 4.1.3
4.1.3 Thermally separated mounting (push−through technique)
For mounting in push−through technique you have to use the controller type
EVS93xx−ES. Additionally you will require the mounting set for
push−through technique:
Type Mounting set
EVS9321−ES, EVS9322−ES EJ0036
Dimensions
0 1
L L
d1 d1
d b1 b d b1 b
g g
d1 d1
c c f
a1 a1 e
c1 c1
a a
9300std063
Fig. 4.1−2 Dimensions for thermally separated mounting 0.37 ... 11 kW

Type a a1 b b1 c c1 d d1 e 1) f g
EVS9321−ES
112.5 78 385.5 350 60 95.5 365.5 105.5 250 92 6.5
EVS9322−ES
EVS9323−ES
131.5 97 385.5 350 79 114.5 365.5 105.5 250 92 6.5
EVS9324−ES
EVS9325−ES
169.5 135 385.5 350 117 152.5 365.5 105.5 250 92 6.5
EVS9326−ES
Mounting cutout in control 9300 Dimensions [mm]

cabinet
Type Width Height
EVS9321−ES
82 350
EVS9322−ES
EVS9323−ES
101 350
EVS9324−ES
EVS9325−ES
139 350
EVS9326−ES
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 4.1−3

4.1.4 Mounting in "cold plate" technique
The drive controllers can be mounted in ˜cold plate˜ technique, e.g. on

collective coolers. For this purpose, the drive controllers of type EVS93xx−CSx
must be used.
EVS9321−CS EVS9323−CS EVS9325−CS
EVS9322−CS EVS9324−CS EVS9326−CS
Fixing bracket Controller fixing 2 2 2
Sheet metal screw Mounting the fixing 6 6 6
3.5 × 13 mm (DIN 7981) bracket to the controller
Requirements for collective The following points are important for safe and reliable operation of the
coolers controller:
ƒ Good thermal connection to the cooler
– The contact surface between the collective cooler and the controller
must be at least as large as the cooling plate of the controller.
– Plane contact surface, max. deviation 0.05 mm.
– When attaching the collective cooler to the controller, make sure to
use all specified screw connections.
ƒ Observe the thermal resistance Rth given in the table. The values are
valid for controller operation under rated conditions.
9300 Cooling path
Power to be dissipated Heatsink − environment
Type Pv [W] Rth [K/W]
EVS9321−CS 24 1.45
EVS9322−CS 42 0.85
EVS9323−CS 61 0.57
EVS9324−CS 105 0.33
EVS9325−CS 180 0.19
EVS9326−CS 360 0.10
Ambient conditions ƒ The rated data and the derating factors at increased temperature also
apply to the ambient temperature of the drive controllers.
ƒ Temperature at the cooling plate of the drive controller: max. 75 °C.
4.1−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Mounting in "cold plate" technique 4.1.4
Dimensions
0 1 2 3
L L L
b1 d b b1 d b b1 d b
< 75 °C
g g c1 g
c c c e
a a a
9300std064
Fig. 4.1−3 Dimensions for mounting in "cold plate" technique 0.37 ... 11 kW

Type a b b1 c c1 d e 1) g
EVS9321−CS
78 381 350 48 ˘ 367 168 6.5
EVS9322−CS
EVS9323−CS
97 381 350 67 ˘ 367 168 6.5
EVS9324−CS
EVS9325−CS
135 381 350 105 38 367 168 6.5
EVS9326−CS
Mounting Apply heat conducting paste before screwing together the cooler and
cooling plate of the drive controller so that the heat transfer resistance is as
low as possible.
1. Fasten the fixing bracket with sheet metal screws 3.5 × 13 mm at the
top and bottom of the drive controller .
2. Clean the contact surface of cooler and cooling plate with spirit.
3. Apply a thin coat of heat conducting paste with a filling knife or brush.
– The heat conducting paste in the accessory kit is sufficient for an area
of approx. 1000 cm2.
4. Mount the drive controller on the cooler.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 4.1−5

Standard devices in the power range 15 ... 30 kW 4.2
4.2 Standard devices in the power range 15 ... 30 kW
The accessory kit is located inside the controller.

Remove the cover of the drive controller
1. Remove the screws
2. Lift cover up and detach it
9300vec113

[kg] [kg]
EVS9327−xS 13.5 9.5
EVS9328−xS 15.0 9.5
EVS9329−xS 15.0 ˘
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 4.2−1

4.2.2 Mounting with fixing brackets (standard)

Fixing bracket Drive controller fixing 4
Raised countersunk head screw Mounting of fixing bracket to the drive 4
M5 × 10 mm (DIN 966) controller
Dimensions
0 ³ 100mm
L
d b1 b
³ 100mm
k
g
c1 c
d1 a e m
9300std065
Fig. 4.2−1 Standard mounting with fixing brackets 15 ... 30 kW


Type a b b1 c c1 d d1 e 1) g k m
EVS9327−ES
EVS9328−ES 250 402 350 22 206 370 24 250 6.5 24 11
EVS9329−ES
Mounting ƒ Attach the fixing brackets to the heatsink plate of the drive controller.
4.2−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

For mounting in push−through technique, the drive controller of type

EVS93xx−ESx must be used. In addition, the mounting set EJ0011 for the
push−through technique is required.
Dimensions a
a1
L
d2
b1
d3
d
b
d2
d1
c1 g e1
h
h c2 e
c3
9300std066
Fig. 4.2−2 Dimensions for thermally separated mounting 15 ... 30 kW

Type a a1 b b1 c1 c2 c3 d d1 d2 d3 e 1) e1 g h
EVS9327−ES
EVS9328−ES 279.5 250 379.5 350 19 131 243 361.5 32 100 97 250 159.5 6 9
EVS9329−ES

cabinet
Type Width Height
EVS9327−ES
EVS9328−ES 236 336
EVS9329−ES
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 4.2−3


collective coolers. For this purpose, the drive controllers of type EVS93xx−CSx
must be used.
coolers controller:
9300 Cooling path
EVS9327−CS 410 0.085
EVS9328−CS 610 0.057
4.2−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Dimensions
L
b1
d
b
< 75 °C
g e
c
c1
a
a1
9300std067
Fig. 4.2−3 Dimensions for mounting in "cold plate" technique 15 ... 22 kW

Type a a1 b b1 c c1 d e 1) g
EVS9327−CS
234 250 381 350 110 220 367 171 6.5
EVS9328−CS
low as possible.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 4.2−5

Standard devices with a power of 45 kW 4.3
4.3 Standard devices with a power of 45 kW

9300vec113

[kg] [kg]
EVS9330−xS 38.0 ˘
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 4.3−1


Hexagon head cap screw Mounting of fixing bracket to the drive 4
Washer Æ 8.4 mm (DIN 125) For hexagon head cap screw 4
Spring washer Æ 8 mm (DIN 127) For hexagon head cap screw 4
Dimensions
0
³ 100 mm
³ 50 mm ³ 50 mm
l
d
b1
³ 100mm
b
k
g
m
d1
e
c c1
a
9300std068
Fig. 4.3−1 Standard mounting with fixing brackets 45 kW

Arrange drive controllers in a row with spacing to be able to remove eye
bolts

EVS9330−ES 340 580 591 28.5 283 615 38 285 11 28 18
4.3−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013


Dimensions a e2
a1
d3
e3
L
d2
b1
d2
d
b
d2
d1
c1 g
e1
h
h c2
e
c3
c4
9300std069
Fig. 4.3−2 Dimensions for thermally separated mounting 45 kW

Type a a1 b b1 c1 c2 c3 c4 d d d2 d e e1 e2 e g h
1 3 1) 3
37 34 54 59 4 137. 217. 31 52 4 14 8 28 163. 18 6
EVS9330−ES 7 9
3 0 3 1 5 5 5 0 5 5 5 1 5 5 5 6

cabinet
Type Width Height
EVS9330−ES 320 515
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 4.3−3

4.3.4 Modification of the fan module for push−through technique
For thermally separated mounting the fan module has to be rotated by 180°
so that the controller fits into the mounting cutout.
Removing the fan module
9300vec170
Fig. 4.3−3 Removing the fan module from the controller
1. Remove both screws.

The screws connect the fans to the supply voltage.
2. Remove the 4 screws for fixing the fan module on each side.
3. Pull back the fan module and carefully remove it to the top.
Make sure that the threaded sleeves do not touch the housing edge. They
may break off.
Modifying the threaded
sleeves on the fan module
9300vec171
Fig. 4.3−4 Modifying the threaded sleeves for the voltage supply of the fans
1. Remove the threaded sleeves.

2. Screw−in the threaded sleeves on the opposite side and fasten them.
4.3−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Modification of the fan module for push−through technique 4.3.4
Plugging the fan connecting

cable to another terminal on
the fan module
9300vec173
Fig. 4.3−5 Plugging the fan connecting cable for the voltage supply to another terminal
1. Remove the cable lugs of the two red connecting cables and plug them
in again on the diagonally arranged side.
2. Remove the cable lugs of the two blue connecting cables and plug
them in again on the diagonally arranged side.
Mounting the fan module in a
manner rotated by 180°
9300vec172
Fig. 4.3−6 Mounting the fan module on the controller
1. Place the fan module onto the controller. Insert the lugs at the back
into the base plate .
may break off.
2. Push the fan module to the front.
3. Screw−in and fasten the 4 screws for fixing the fan module on each
side.
4. Screw−in and fasten the two screws for the supply voltage.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 4.3−5


9300vec113

[kg] [kg]
EVS9331−xS 59.0 ˘
EVS9332−xS 59.0 ˘
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 4.4−1


Hexagon head cap screw For fixing bracket 8
M8 × 16 mm (DIN 933)
Dimensions
0
³ 100mm
³ 50mm ³ 50mm
³ 100mm
d
b1
k
g
m
d1
c c1 e
a
9300std070

bolts

EVS9331−ES
450 750 680 28.5 393 702 38 285 11 28 18
EVS9332−ES
4.4−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013


Dimensions a
a1
d2
b1
d2
d
b
d2
d1
c1 g e1
h
h c2 e
c3
c4
9300std071

Typ a a1 b b1 c1 c2 c3 c4 d d1 d2 e 1) e1 g h
EVS9331−ES
488 450 718 680 49 172.5 295.5 419 698 49 200 285 164 9 10
EVS9332−ES

cabinet
Type a1 b1
EVS9331−ES
428.5 660
EVS9332−ES
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 4.4−3

Wiring of the standard device 5
Contents
5 Wiring of the standard device
Contents
5.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−1

5.1.2 Device protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−3
5.2.2 Operation on public supply systems (EN 61000−3−2) . . . . . . 5.2−1
5.2.4 Operation at earth−leakage circuit breaker (e.l.c.b.) . . . . . . . 5.2−3
5.2.6 Discharge current for mobile systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−4
5.2.9 Mains choke/mains filter assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−7
5.2.10 Motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−8
5.3.1 Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−1
5.3.3 Motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−1
5.3.4 Control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−3
5.4.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4−3
5.5.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5−3
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5−1

Contents

5.6.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6−3
5.7.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7−3
5.8.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8−1
5.8.5 State bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8−8
5.8.6 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8−9
5.8.7 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8−10
5.10.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10−1
5.10.2 Resolver at X7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10−2
5.11 Wiring of digital frequency input / digital frequency output ...... 5.11−1
5.12 Communication modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12−1
5−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Important notes 5.1
Protection of persons 5.1.1
5.1 Important notes
Stop!
The drive controller contains electrostatically sensitive
components.
The personnel must be free of electrostatic charge when carrying
out assembly and service operations.
5.1.1 Protection of persons
Danger!
Before working on the controller, check that all power terminals
are deenergised:
ƒ The power terminals U, V, W, +UG and −UG remain live for at
least 3 minutes after disconnection from the mains.
ƒ The power terminals L1, L2, L3, U, V, W, +UG and −UG remain
live when the motor is stopped.
Pluggable terminal strips Connect or disconnect all pluggable terminals only in the deenergised state!
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.1−1

5.1 Important notes
Electrical isolation The terminals X1 and X5 have double (reinforced) insulation according to
EN50178. The protection against accidental contact is ensured without
additional measured being taken.
Danger!
ƒ The terminals X3, X4, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10, X11 have basic
insulation (single isolating distance).
ƒ In the event of a defective isolating distance, protection
against accidental contact can only be guaranteed by taking
external measures such as double insulation.
ƒ If an external DC 24 V voltage source is used, the insulation
degree of the controller depends on the insulation degree of
the voltage source.
24 VDC
L1
N
59 39 A1 A2 A3 A4 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 ST1 ST2 28 X5 X1
L1
L2
L3
+UG
-UG
PE
PE X3 X4 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 X11
9300std084
Fig. 5.1−1 Electrical isolation between power terminals, control terminals and housing
Double (reinforced) insulation
Basic insulation
Replacing defective fuses Only replace defective fuses in the deenergised state to the type specified.
Disconnecting the controller Only carry out the safety−related disconnection of the controller from the
from the mains mains via a contactor on the input side or a manually operated toggle switch.
5.1−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Important notes 5.1
Device protection 5.1.2
5.1.2 Device protection
ƒ In the event of condensation, only connect the controller to the mains

voltage after the humidity has evaporated.
ƒ The controller is protected by external fuses.
ƒ Drive controllers EVS9324−xS, EVS9326−xS and
EVS9328−xS ... EVS9332−xS must only be operated with assigned mains
choke / mains filter.
ƒ Length of the screws for connecting the shield sheet for the control
cables: 12 mm.
ƒ Provide unused control inputs and outputs with terminal strips. Cover
unused Sub−D sockets with protective covers included in the scope of
supply.
ƒ Switching on the motor side of the controller is only permissible for
safety shutdown (emergency−off).
ƒ Frequent mains switching (e.g. inching mode via mains contactor) can
controller:
the devices EVS9321−xS and EVS9322−xS.
devices EVS9323−xS ... EVS9332−xS.
5.1.3 Motor protection
ƒ Extensive protection against overload:

– By overcurrent relays or temperature monitoring.
– We recommend the use of PTC thermistors or thermostats to monitor
the motor temperature.
– PTC thermistors or thermostats can be connected to the controller.
– For monitoring the motor, we recommend the use of the I2xt
monitoring.
ƒ Only use motors with an insulation suitable for the inverter operation:
– Insulation resistance: min. û = 1.5 kV, min. du/dt = 5 kV/ms
– When using motors with an unknown insulation resistance, please
contact your motor supplier.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.1−3

Notes on project planning 5.2
Supply forms / electrical supply conditions 5.2.1
5.2 Notes on project planning
5.2.1 Supply forms / electrical supply conditions
Observe the restrictions for the different supply forms!

Supply system Operation of controller Notes
Supply system: TT, Permitted without restrictions. l Observe the rated data of the
TN controller
(with earthed l RMS mains current: see chapter
neutral) "Technical data".
Supply system: IT Possible if the controller is l Safe operation in the event of an
(with isolated protected in the event of an earth earth fault at the inverter output
neutral) fault in the supply system cannot be guaranteed.
l by means of suitable devices l The variants V024 / V104 and
which detect the earth fault and V100 enable operation of the
l immediately separate the controller on IT systems.
controller from the supply
system.
DC supply via Permitted if the DC voltage is Earthing of the +UG or −UG
+UG/−UG symmetrical to PE. conductor will destroy the
controller.
5.2.2 Operation on public supply systems (compliance with EN 61000−3−2)
European standard EN 61000−3−2 defines limit values for the limitation of

harmonic currents in the supply system. Non−linear consumers (e.g.
frequency inverters) generate harmonic currents which "pollute" the
supplying mains and may therefore interfere with other consumers. The
standard aims at assuring the quality of public supply systems and reducing
the mains load.
Note!
The standard only applies to public systems. Mains which are
provided with a transformer substation of their own as in
industrial plants are not public and not included in the
application range of the standard.
If a device or machine consists of several components, the limit
values of the standard apply to the entire unit.
Measures for compliance with With the measures described, the controllers comply with the limit values
the standard according to EN 61000−3−2.
Operation on public EN 61000−3−2 Limitation of harmonic currents
supply systems Total power on the Compliance with the requirements 1)
mains
< 1 kW With mains choke
> 1 kW No measures required
1) The additional measures mentioned have the effect that solely the controllers meet the
requirements of EN 61000−3−2. The machine/system manufacturer is responsible for the
compliance with the requirements for the machine/system!
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.2−1

5.2.3 Controllers in the IT system
Controllers in the V024, V104 or V100 variants are suitable for operation on
insulated supply systems (IT systems). The controllers also have an insulated
design. This avoids the activation of the insulation monitoring, even if
several controllers are installed.
The electric strength of the controllers is increased so that damage to the
controller are avoided if insulation or earth faults in the supply system occur.
The operational reliability of the system remains intact.
Stop!
Only operate the controllers with the mains chokes assigned.
Operation with mains filters or RFI filters by Lenze is not
permitted, as these modules contain components that are
interconnected against PE. By this the protective design of the IT
system would be cancelled out. The components are destroyed
in the case of an earth fault.
Protect the IT system against earth fault at the controller.
Due to physical conditions, an earth fault on the motor side at
the controller can interfere with or damage other devices on the
same IT system. Therefore appropriate measures have to be
implemented, by means of which the earth fault is detected and
which disconnect the controller from the mains.
Permissible supply forms and Mains Operation of the controllers Notes

electrical supply conditions
With isolated star Possible, if the controller is Safe operation in the event of an
point (IT systems) protected in the event of an earth earth fault at the inverter output
fault in the supplying mains. cannot be guaranteed.
l Possible, if appropriate earth
fault detections are available
and
l the controller is immediately
disconnected from the mains.
DC−bus operation of several Central supply with 9340 regenerative power supply module is not possible.
drives
Installation of the CE−typical For the installation of drives on IT systems, the same conditions apply as for
drive system
the installation on systems with an earthed neutral point.
According to the binding EMC product standard EN61800−3, no limit values
are defined for IT systems for noise emission in the high−frequency range.
5.2−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Operation at earth−leakage circuit breaker (e.l.c.b.) 5.2.4
5.2.4 Operation at earth−leakage circuit breaker (e.l.c.b.)
Danger!
The controllers are internally fitted with a mains rectifier. In case
of a short circuit to frame a pulsating DC residual current can
prevent the AC sensitive or pulse current sensitive earth−leakage
circuit breakers from being activated, thus cancelling the
protective function for the entire equipment being operated on
this earth−leakage circuit breaker.
ƒ For the protection of persons and farm animals (DIN VDE 0100), we
recommend
– pulse current sensitive earth−leakage circuit breakers for plants
including controllers with a single−phase mains connection (L1/N).
– universal−current sensitive earth−leakage circuit breakers for plants
including controllers with a three−phase mains connection (L1/L2/L3).
ƒ Only install the earth−leakage circuit breaker between supplying mains
and drive controller.
ƒ Earth−leakage circuit breakers may trigger a false alarm due to
– capacitive compensation currents flowing in the cable shields during
operation (particularly with long, shielded motor cables),
– simultaneous connection of several inverters to the mains
– the use of additional interference filters.
5.2.5 Interaction with compensation equipment
ƒ Controllers only consume very little reactive power of the fundamental

wave from the AC supply mains. Therefore, a compensation is not
required.
ƒ If the controllers are connected to a supply system with compensation
equipment, this equipment must comprise chokes.
– For this, contact the supplier of the compensation equipment.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.2−3

5.2.6 Discharge current for mobile systems
Frequency inverters with internal or external RFI filters usually have a

discharge current to PE potential that is higher than 3.5 mA AC or 10 mA DC.
Therefore, fixed installation as protection is required (see EN 61800−5−1).
This must be indicated in the operational documents.
If a fixed installation is not possible for a mobile consumer although the
discharge current to PE potential is higher than 3.5 mA AC or 10 mA DC, an
additional two−winding transformer (isolating transformer) can be included
in the current supply as a suitable countermeasure. Here, the PE conductor
is connected to the PEs of the drive (filter, inverter, motor, shieldings) and
also to one of the poles of the secondary winding of the isolating
transformer.
Devices with a three−phase supply must have a corresponding isolating
transformer with a secondary star connection, the star point being
connected to the PE conductor.
filter inverter
L1
L1 L2 L
U
prim.
sec.
M
V 3~
W
N1 N2 N
N
PE
8200vec017
Fig. 5.2−1 Installation of a two−winding transformer (isolating transformer)
5.2−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Optimisation of the controller and mains load 5.2.7
5.2.7 Optimisation of the controller and mains load
A mains choke is an inductance which can be included in the mains cable of

the frequency inverter. As a result, the load of the supplying mains and the
controller is optimised:
ƒ Reduced system perturbation: The curved shape of the mains current
approaches a sinusoidal shape.
ƒ Reduced mains current: The effective mains current is reduced, i.e. the
mains, cable, and fuse loads are reduced.
ƒ Increased service life of the controller: The electrolytic capacitors in the
DC bus have a considerably increased service life due to the reduced AC
current load.
There are no restrictions for the combinations of mains chokes and RFI filters
and/or motor filters. Alternatively, a mains filter can be used (combination
of mains choke and RFI filter in a common housing).
Note!
ƒ Some controllers must generally be operated with a mains
choke or a mains filter.
ƒ If a mains choke or a mains filter is used, the maximum
possible output voltage does not reach the value of the mains
voltage (typical voltage drop at the rated point 4 ... 6 %).
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.2−5

5.2.8 Reduction of noise emissions
Due to internal switching operations, every controller causes noise

emissions which may interfere with the functions of other consumers.
Depending on the site of the frequency inverter, European standard
EN 61800−3 defines limit values for these noise emissions:
Limit class C2: Limit class C2 is often required for industrial mains which are
isolated from the mains of residential areas.
Limit class C1: If the controller is operated in a residential area, it may
interfere with other devices such as radio and television receivers. Here,
interference suppression measures according to limit class C1 are often
required.
Limit class C1 is much more strict than limit class C2. Limit class C1 includes
limit class C2.
For compliance with limit class C1 / C2, corresponding measures for the
limitation of noise emissions are required, e.g. the use of RFI filters.
There are no restrictions for the combinations of RFI filters and mains chokes
The selection of the frequency inverter and the corresponding filters, if
applicable, always depends on the application in question and is determined
by e.g. the switching frequency of the controller, the motor cable length, or
the protective circuit (e.g. earth−leakage circuit breakers).
Note!
The graphics below illustrates the maximum possible motor cable length
based on the type of filter and the resulting interference voltage category
according to EN 61800−3. Depending on the used motor cable, the used
controller, and its switching frequency, the mentioned maximum motor
cable lengths may vary.
5.2−6 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Mains choke/mains filter assignment 5.2.9
C2
E82ZZxxxxxB230 1)
E82ZNxxxxxB230 1)
EZN3A... (³ 15 kW)
EZN3A... (£ 11 kW)
5 10 20 30 40 50 lmot [m]
C1
EZN3B...
E82ZNxxxxxB230 1)
10 20 30 40 50 lmot [m]
9300vec060
Fig. 5.2−2 Maximum motor cable lengths lmot based on the type of filter for compliance with
limit class C2 / C1
1) Use low−capacitance cables
5.2.9 Mains choke/mains filter assignment
9300 Mains choke Interference voltage category according to EN 61800−3 and motor cable length
Component Component
Type C2 max. [m] C1 max. [m]
EVS9321−xS EZN3A2400H002 EZN3A2400H002 5 EZN3B2400H002 50
EVS9326−xS ELN3−0150H024−001 EZN3A0150H024 5 EZN3B0150H024 50
EVS9327−xS ELN3−0088H035−001 EZN3A0110H030 25 E82ZN22334B230 10
E82ZZ15334B230 1) 10
E82ZN22334B230 50 EZN3B0110H030U 2) 50
E82ZZ15334B230 1) 50
EVS9328−xS ELN3−0075H045 EZN3A0080H042 25 E82ZN22334B230 10
E82ZN22334B230 50 EZN3B0080H042 50
E82ZN30334B230 50 EZN3B0055H060 50
EVS9330−xS ELN3−0038H085 EZN3A0030H110 25 EZN3B0030H110 50
EZN3A0030H110N001 3) 25
E82ZN55334B230 50
E82ZN75334B230 50 EZN3B0022H150 50
E82ZN75334B230 50 EZN3B0022H150 50
1) RFI filter
2) Footprint filter
3) For controllers with thermal separation
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.2−7

5.2.10 Motor cable
5.2.10 Motor cable
Specification ƒ The used motor cables must

– meet the requirements on site (e.g. EN 60204−1, UL),
– comply with the following voltage data: EN 0.6/1 kV, UL 600 V.
ƒ For shielded motor cables, only use cables with braid made of tinned or
nickel−plated copper. Shields made of steel braid are not suitable.
– The overlap rate of the braid must be at least 70 % with an overlap
angle of 90°.
ƒ Use low−capacitance motor cables:
Power class Capacitance per unit length
Core/core Core/shield
3 ... 11 kW from 2.5 mm2 £100 pF/m £ 150 pF/m
15 ... 30 kW £ 140 pF/m £ 230 pF/m
45 ... 55 kW £ 190 pF/m £ 320 pF/m
75 ... 90 kW £ 250 pF/m £ 410 pF/m
Cable length 9300 Maximum permissible motor cable length

Ur = 400 V Ur = 480 V
Type fchop = 8 kHz fchop = 16 kHz fchop = 8 kHz fchop = 16 kHz
EVS9321−xS, 50 m 45 m 50 m 25 m
EVS9322−xS
EVS9323−xS ... 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m
EVS9332−xS
Note!
ƒ The motor cable must be as short as possible for having a
positive effect on the drive behaviour.
ƒ If EMC requirements must be met, the permissible cable
length may be affected.
ƒ EVS9321−xSand EVS9322−xS: At a mains voltage of 480 V and
a switching frequency fchop = 16 kHz, the maximum
permissible cable length is reduced if the motor cable has
more than a single core:
– The following holds true for two parallel single cores:
lmax = 17 m
– The following holds true for three parallel single cores:
lmax = 9 m
5.2−8 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Motor cable 5.2.10
Cable cross−section
Note!
The cable cross−sections have been assigned to the permissible
current loading of the motor cables under the following
conditions:
ƒ Compliance with IEC/EN 60204−1 for fixed cable installation
ƒ Compliance with IEC 60354−2−52, table A.52−5 when using the
cable in a trailing cable
ƒ Laying system C
ƒ Ambient temperature 45 °C
ƒ Continuous motor operation at a
– standstill current I0 for servo motors or a
– rated current IR for three−phase asynchronous motors
The user is responsible for selecting a motor cable which
complies with the requirements of the current conditions if
different situations arise. Different situations may arise due to:
ƒ Laws, standards, national and regional regulations
ƒ Type of application
ƒ Motor utilisation
ƒ Ambient and operating conditions
ƒ Laying system and bundling of cables
ƒ Cable type
Motor cable
permanently installed for trailing cable Cable cross−section
IM [A] IM [A] [mm2] [AWG]
10.0 11.8 1.0 18
13.8 17.3 1.5 16
19.1 23.7 2.5 14
25.5 30.9 4.0 12
32.8 41.0 6.0 10
45.5 55.5 10 8
60.1 75.5 16 6
76.4 92.8 25 4
94.6 115 35 2
114 140 50 1
146 179 70 00
177 217 95 000
205 252 120 0000
Note!
Information on the design of the motor cable is provided in the
"System cables and system connectors" manual.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.2−9

Basics for wiring according to EMC 5.3
Shielding 5.3.1
5.3 Basics for wiring according to EMC
5.3.1 Shielding
The quality of shielding is determined by a good shield connection:

ƒ Connect the shield with a large surface.
ƒ Connect the shield directly to the intended shield sheet of the device.
ƒ In addition, connect the shield to the conductive and earthed mounting
plate with a large contact surface by using a conductive clamp.
ƒ Unshielded cable ends must be as short as possible.
5.3.2 Mains connection, DC supply
ƒ Controllers, mains chokes, or mains filters may only be connected to

the mains via unshielded single cores or unshielded cables.
ƒ When a mains filter or RFI filter is used, shield the cable between mains
filter or RFI filter and controller if its length exceeds 300 mm.
Unshielded cores must be twisted.
ƒ In DC−bus operation or DC supply, use shielded cables.
ƒ The cable cross−section must be dimensioned for the assigned fusing
(observe national and regional regulations).
5.3.3 Motor cable
ƒ Only use shielded motor cables with braids made of tinned or

nickel−plated copper. Shields made of steel braids are not suitable.
angle of 90 °.
ƒ The cables used must correspond to the requirements at the location
(e.g. EN 60204−1).
ƒ Shield the cable for motor temperature monitoring (PTC or thermal
contact) and install it separately from the motor cable.
– In Lenze system cables, the cable for brake control is integrated into
the motor cable. If this cable is not required for brake control, it can
also be used to connect the motor temperature monitoring up to a
length of 50 m.
ƒ Connect the shield with a large surface and fix it with metal cable
binders or a conductive clamp.
ƒ Connect the shield directly to the corresponding device shield sheet.
– If required, additionally connect the shield to the conductive and
earthed mounting plate in the control cabinet.
ƒ The motor cable is optimally installed if
– it is separated from mains cables and control cables,
– it only crosses mains cables and control cables at right angles,
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.3−1

5.3.3 Motor cable
– it is not interrupted.
ƒ If the motor cable must be opened all the same (e.g. due to chokes,
contactors, or terminals):
– The unshielded cable ends may not be longer than 100 mm
(depending on the cable cross−section).
– Install chokes, contactors, terminals etc. spatially separated from
other components (with a min. distance of 100 mm).
– Install the shield of the motor cable directly before and behind the
point of separation to the mounting plate with a large surface.
ƒ Connect the shield with a large surface to PE in the terminal box of the
motor at the motor housing.
– Metal EMC cable glands at the motor terminal box ensure a large
surface connection of the shield with the motor housing.
Motor supply cable Cable gland
Motor supply cable
max. 500mm Cable gland
Braid
Heat-shrinkable tube
Large-surface Cable gland acc. to EMC with
contact of high degree of protection
cable shield
8200EMV023 8200EMV024
Fig. 5.3−1 Shielding of the motor cable
5.3−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Control cables 5.3.4
5.3.4 Control cables
ƒ Control cables must be shielded to minimise interference injections.

ƒ For lengths of 200 mm and more, use only shielded cables for analog
and digital inputs and outputs. Under 200 mm, unshielded but twisted
cables may be used.
ƒ Connect the shield correctly:
– The shield connections of the control cables must be at a distance of
at least 50 mm from the shield connections of the motor cables and
DC cables.
– Connect the shield of digital input and output cables at both ends.
– Connect the shield of analog input and output cables at one end (at
the drive controller).
ƒ To achieve an optimum shielding effect (in case of very long cables,
with high interference) one shield end of analog input and output
cables can be connected to PE potential via a capacitor (e.g.
10 nF/250 V) (see sketch).
9300vec043
Fig. 5.3−2 Shielding of long, analog control cables
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.3−3

5.3.5 Installation in the control cabinet
Mounting plate requirements ƒ Only use mounting plates with conductive surfaces (zinc−coated or
V2A−steel).
ƒ Painted mounting plates are not suitable even if the paint is removed
from the contact surfaces.
ƒ If several mounting plates are used, ensure a large−surface connection
between the mounting plates (e.g. by using earthing strips).
Mounting of the components ƒ Connect controllers, filters, and chokes to the earthed mounting plate
with a surface as large as possible.
Optimum cable routing ƒ The motor cable is optimally installed if
– it crosses mains cables and control cables at right angles.
ƒ Always install cables close to the mounting plate (reference potential),
as freely suspended cables act like aerials.
ƒ Lead the cables to the terminals in a straight line (avoid tangles of
cables).
ƒ Use separated cable channels for motor cables and control cables. Do
not mix up different cable types in one cable channel.
ƒ Minimise coupling capacities and coupling inductances by avoiding
unnecessary cable lengths and reserve loops.
ƒ Short−circuit unused cores to the reference potential.
ƒ Install the positive and negative wires for DC 24 V close to each other
over the entire length to avoid loops.
Earth connections ƒ Connect all components (drive controllers, chokes, filters) to a central
earthing point (PE rail).
ƒ Set up a star−shape earthing system.
ƒ Comply with the corresponding minimum cable cross−sections.
5.3−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Wiring outside of the control cabinet 5.3.6
5.3.6 Wiring outside of the control cabinet
Notes for cable routing outside the control cabinet:

ƒ The longer the cables the greater the space between the cables must
be.
ƒ If cables for different signal types are routed in parallel, the
interferences can be minimized by means of a metal barrier or
separated cable ducts.
Cover
Barrier without
opening
Signal cables Power cables

EMVallg001
Fig. 5.3−3 Cable routing in the cable duct with barrier
Cover
Communication cables
Cable duct
Measuring cables
Analog cables
Control cables
Power cables
EMVallg002
Fig. 5.3−4 Cable routing in separated cable ducts
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.3−5

5.3.7 Detecting and eliminating EMC interferences
Fault Cause Remedy

Interferences of Unshielded motor cable Use shielded motor cable
analog setpoints of Shield contact is not extensive Carry out optimal shielding as
your own or other enough specified
devices and
measuring systems Shield of the motor cable is l Separate components from
interrupted by terminal strips, other component part with a
switched, etc. minimum distance of 100 mm
l Use motor choke/motor filter
Install additional unshielded Install and shield additional cables
cables inside the motor cable (e.g. separately
for motor temperature
monitoring)
Too long and unshielded cable Shorten unshielded cable ends to
ends of the motor cable maximally 40 mm
Conducted Terminal strips for the motor Spatially separate the terminal
interference level is cable are directly located next to strips for the motor cable from
exceeded on the the mains terminals main terminals and other control
supply side terminals with a minimum
distance of 100 mm
Mounting plate varnished Optimise PE connection:
l Remove varnish
l Use zinc−coated mounting
plate
HF short circuit Check cable routing
5.3−6 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Wiring according to EMC (CE−typical drive system) 5.4.1
5.4.1 Wiring according to EMC (CE−typical drive system)
The drives comply with the EC Directive on "Electromagnetic Compatibility"

if they are installed in accordance with the specifications for the CE−typical
drive system. The user is responsible for the compliance of the machine
application with the EC Directive.
Note!
Observe the notes given in the chapter "Basics for wiring
according to EMC"!
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.4−1

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 … F3
K10
PE S2
Z2 S1 K10
PE L1 L2 L3
IN1 PES PES X11 X4

IN2 K31 HI
Z1
IN3 K32 LO
IN4 33 GND
34 X6 PES
63
PES PES X5 7
28 62
E1 7
E2 4
E3
3
EVS9321 …
E4 2
E5
EVS9332 1
+ ST1 PES
DC 24 V
ST2
– X7
PES
39
A1 X8
A2
A3 X9
A4
PES PES 59 X10
K10
T1 T2 PE U V W -UG +UG
PE
PES X7/8 PES PES
X7/9
PES PES PES
PES PE PE -UG +UG T1 T2

KTY
RB
J>
PES PES PES PES JRB
PE M PE M
3~ 3~ 9351
Z3
9300std072
Fig. 5.4−1 Example for wiring in accordance with EMC regulations

F1 ... F3 Fuses
K10 Mains contactor
Z1 Programmable logic controller (PLC)
Z2 Mains choke or mains filter
Z3 EMB9351−E brake module
S1 Mains contactor on
S2 Mains contactor off
+UG, −UG DC−bus connection
PES HF shield termination through large−surface connection to PE
5.4−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

To gain access to the power connections, remove the covers:

ƒ Release the cover for the mains connection with slight pressure on the
front and pull it off to the top.
ƒ Release the cover for the motor connection with slight pressure on the
front and pull it off to the bottom.
Installation material required from the scope of supply:
Shield connection support Support of the shield sheets for the supply 2
cable and motor cable
Hexagon nut M5 Fastening of shield connection supports 4
Spring washer Æ 5 mm (DIN 127) 2
Serrated lock washer Æ 5.3 mm 2
(DIN 125)
Shield sheet Shield connections for supply cables, motor 2
cable
Screw and washer assembly Fastening of shield sheets 4
M4 × 10 mm (DIN 6900)
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.4−3

Note!
ƒ If a mains filter or RFI filter is used and the cable length
between mains/RFI filter and drive controller exceeds
300 mm, install a shielded cable.
ƒ For DC−bus operation or DC supply, we recommend using
shielded DC cables.
Shield sheet installation
Stop!
ƒ To avoid damaging the PE stud, always install the shield sheet
and the PE connection in the order displayed. The required
parts are included in the accessory kit.
ƒ Do not use lugs as strain relief.
0
1 8
2
3 7
4
5
6 a 4
7
M6 2
M5 0
a 1.7 Nm
}+
15 lb-in L1 L2 L3 +UG -UG
PE
PE
M5
PE 3.4 Nm
30 lb-in
9300vec130
Fig. 5.4−2 Installation of shield sheet for drive controllers 0.37 ... 11 kW
PE stud
Screw on M5 nut and tighten hand−tight
Slide on fixing bracket for shield sheet
Slide on serrated lock washer
Slide on PE cable with ring cable lug
Slide on washer
Slide on spring washer
Screw on M5 nut and tighten it
Screw shield sheet on fixing bracket with two M4 screws (a)
5.4−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Mains connection, DC supply 5.4.3
Mains connection, DC supply 0

1
2
L1 L2 L3 +UG -UG
PE
L1, L2, L3 0.5...0.6 Nm

+UG, -UG 4.4...5.3 lb-in
9300std033
Fig. 5.4−3 Mains connection, DC supply for drive controllers 0.37 ... 11 kW
Mains cable
Shield sheet
Securely clamp mains cable with the lugs
Mains and DC bus connection
L1, L2, L3: Connection of mains cable
+UG, −UG: Connection of DC−bus components or connection of the controller
in the DC−bus system (see system manual)
Cable cross−sections up to 4 mm2: Use wire end ferrules for flexible cables
Cable cross−sections > 4 mm2: Use pin−end connectors
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.4−5

5.4.4 Mains connection: Fuses and cable cross−sections
Installation in accordance Supply conditions

with EN 60204−1
Range Description
Fuses l Utilisation category: only gG/gL or gRL
Cables Laying systems B2 and C: Use of PVC−insulated copper cables, conductor
temperature < 70 °C, ambient temperature < 40 °C, no bundling of the cables or
cores, three loaded cores. The data are recommendations. Other
dimensionings/laying systems are possible (e.g. in accordance with VDE 0298−4).
RCCB l Controllers can cause a DC current in the PE conductor. If a residual current
device (RCD) or a fault current monitoring unit (RCM) is used for protection in
the case of direct or indirect contact, only one RCD/RCM of the following type
can be used on the current supply side:
– Type B (universal−current sensitive) for connection to a three−phase system
– Type A (pulse−current sensitive) or type B (universal−current sensitive) for
connection to a 1−phase system
isolation from the environment by means of double or reinforced insulation,
or isolation from the supply system by using a transformer.
l Earth−leakage circuit breakers must only be installed between mains supply
and controller.
Observe all national and regional regulations!
9300 Rated fuse current Cable cross−section FI 1)

Fuse Circuit−breaker Laying system L1, L2, L3, PE
B2 C
Type [A] [A] [mm2] [mm2] [mA]
Operation without mains choke/mains filter
EVS9321−xS 6 C6, B6 2) 1 1
EVS9322−xS 6 C6, B6 2) 1 1
300
EVS9323−xS 10 B10 1.5 1
EVS9325−xS 25 B20 4 2.5
Operation with mains choke/mains filter
EVS9321−xS 6 C6, B6 2) 1 1
EVS9322−xS 6 C6, B6 2) 1 1
EVS9323−xS 10 B10 1.5 1
300
EVS9324−xS 10 B10 1.5 1
EVS9325−xS 20 B16 2.5 2.5
EVS9326−xS 32 B25 ˘ 4
1) Universal current−sensitive earth−leakage circuit breaker
2) For short−time mains interruptions, use circuit breakers with tripping characteristic "C"
5.4−6 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Installation to UL Supply conditions

Range Description
Fuses l Only in accordance with UL 248
l System short−circuit current up to 5000 Arms : All classes are permissible
l System short−circuit current up to 50000 Arms : Only classes "CC", "J", "T" or
"R" permissible
Cables l Only in accordance with UL
l The cable cross−sections specified in the following apply under the following
conditions:
– Conductor temperature < 60 °C
– Ambient temperature < 40 °C
9300 Rated fuse current Cable cross−section

Fuse L1, L2, L3, PE
Type [A] [AWG]
EVS9321−xS 6 18
EVS9322−xS 6 18
EVS9323−xS 10 16
EVS9325−xS 25 10
EVS9321−xS 6 18
EVS9322−xS 6 18
EVS9323−xS 10 16
EVS9324−xS 10 16
EVS9325−xS 25 10
EVS9326−xS 25 10
Max. connection cross−section of the terminal strip: AWG 12, with pin−end connector AWG 10
Component Component
EVS9326−xS ELN3−0150H024−001 EZN3A0150H024 5 EZN3B0150H024 50
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.4−7

5.4.6 Motor connection
Note!
ƒ Fusing the motor cable is not required.
ƒ The drive controller features 2 connections for motor
temperature monitoring:
– Terminals T1, T2 for connecting a PTC thermistor or thermal
contact (NC contact).
– Pins X8/5 and X8/8 of the incremental encoder input (X8) for
connecting a KTY thermal sensor.
Stop!
0 M5
1 PE 3.4 Nm
2
3 30 lb-in
4
5
6
7
a
1.7 Nm
T1T2
PE
}+ PE
M6 15 lb-in U V W
M5 0
a 2
4
7
8
9300vec128
PE stud
Slide on washer
5.4−8 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Motor connection 5.4.6
Motor with PTC thermistor or Wire T1, T2 only if the motor is equipped with a PTC thermistor or thermal
thermal contact (NC contact) contact (NC contact).
ƒ An "open" cable acts like an antenna and can cause faults on the drive
controller.
Danger!
ƒ All control terminals only have basic insulation (single
isolating distance) after connecting a PTC thermistor or a
thermal contact.
ƒ Protection against accidental contact in case of a defective
isolating distance is only guaranteed through external
measures, e.g. double insulation.
15 V
2.7 k
7.4 k
3.3 k
MONIT-OH8
T1 T2 PE U V W +UG -UG
PES PES
PES PES
J>
PES
PE M
3~
9300vec139
Fig. 5.4−5 Circuit diagram of motor connection with PTC thermistor or thermal contact (NC
contact) at T1, T2
Characteristics of the connection for motor temperature monitoring:

Terminals T1, T2
Connection l PTC thermistor
– PTC thermistor with defined tripping temperature (acc. to
DIN 44081 and DIN 44082)
l Thermal contact (NC contact)
– Thermostat as NC contact
Tripping point l Fixed (depending on the PTC/thermal contact)
l PTC: RJ> 1600 W
l Configurable as warning or error (TRIP)
Notes l Monitoring is not active in the Lenze setting.
l If you do not use a Lenze motor, we recommend the use of a PTC
thermistor up to 150°C.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.4−9


2 3 2 3
U, V, W PE U, V, W PE
0.5...0.6 Nm T1 T2 0.5...0.6 Nm T1 T2
T1, T2 4.4...5.3 lb-in T1, T2 4.4...5.3 lb-in
U V W U V W
1 1
0 0
9300std011
Fig. 5.4−6 Motor connection with PTC thermistor or thermal contact (NC contact)
Motor connection with Lenze system cable with integrated control
cable for the motor temperature monitoring
Shield sheet
Clamp entire shield and shield of the control cable for the motor
temperature monitoring with the straps. If required, fix by means of
cable tie.
Motor cable connection and separate control cable for the motor
temperature monitoring
Shield sheet
Clamp shield of the motor cable and shield of the cable for the motor
cable tie.
U, V, W
Motor cable connection
Check the correct polarity. Observe maximum length of the motor cable. Use
wire end ferrules for flexible cables.
Max. connectable cable cross−section: 4 mm2, with pin−end connector
> 4 mm2
T1, T2 for motor temperature monitoring
Cable connection for PTC thermistors or thermal contacts (NC contacts)
Motor with KTY thermal

sensor
Note!
ƒ We recommend to use Lenze system cables for wiring.
ƒ For self−made cables only use cables with shielded cores
twisted in pairs.
5.4−10 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

X7 X7/8
X7/9
X8 X8/8
X8/5
X9
PES
X10
PES
PES
PES
KTY
PES
PE M
3~
9300std073
Fig. 5.4−7 Circuit diagram for the motor connection with KTY temperature sensor at X7 or X8
Features of the connection for motor temperature monitoring:

Pins X7/8, X7/9 of resolver input (X7), or
pins X8/8, X8/5 of incremental encoder input (X8)
Connection Linear KTY temperature sensor
Tripping point l Warning: adjustable
l Error (TRIP): fixed at 150 °C
l The KTY temperature sensor is monitored with regard to
interruption and short circuit.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.4−11

U, V, W PE
0.5...0.6 Nm T1T2
T1, T2 4.4...5.3 lb-in
U V W
1
0
9300vec122
Fig. 5.4−8 Motor connection with KTY thermal sensor

Motor cable
Shield sheet
Clamp the motor cable shield with the straps. If required, fix by means of
cable tie.
U, V, W
> 4 mm2
5.4−12 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013


Note!
according to EMC"!
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.5−1

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 … F3
K10
PE S2
Z2 S1 K10
PE L1 L2 L3
IN1 PES PES X11 X4

IN2 K31 HI
Z1
IN3 K32 LO
IN4 33 GND
34 X6 PES
63
PES PES X5 7
28 62
E1 7
E2 4
E3
3
EVS9321 …
E4 2
E5
EVS9332 1
+ ST1 PES
DC 24 V
ST2
– X7
PES
39
A1 X8
A2
A3 X9
A4
PES PES 59 X10
K10
PE
PES X7/8 PES PES
X7/9
PES PES PES

KTY
RB
J>
PES PES PES PES JRB
PE M PE M
3~ 3~ 9351
Z3
9300std072

F1 ... F3 Fuses
K10 Mains contactor
5.5−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

To gain access to the power connections, remove the cover:

9300vec113

Hexagon nut M6 (DIN 934) Connection of supply cables (mains, +UG, −UG) 10
and motor cable to the stud bolts
Washer Æ 6 mm (DIN 125) For hexagon nut M6 10
Spring washer Æ 6 mm (DIN 127) For hexagon nut M6 10
Grommet Motor cable 1
Shield connection support Support of the shield sheet for motor cable 1
Self−tapping screw Æ 4 × 14 mm Fastening of shield connection support 2
Shield sheet Shield connection for motor cable 1
Note!
shielded DC cables.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.5−3

0 1 2
}+ PE L1, L2, L3
+UG, -UG
PE
M6
5 Nm
44 lb-in
PE +UG L1 L2 L3 -UG
3
9300std034
Fig. 5.5−2 Mains connection, DC supply for drive controllers 15 ... 30 kW

PE stud
Connect PE cable with ring cable lug
Conductive surface
Shield clamp
Place shield with large surface on control cabinet mounting plate and fasten
with shield clamp (shield clamp is not part of the scope of supply)
To improve the shield connection, also place the shield on the PE stud
L1, L2, L3: Connection of mains cable with ring cable lugs
5.5−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Mains connection: Fuses and cable cross−sections 5.5.4

with EN 60204−1
Range Description
and controller.

B2 C
EVS9327−xS 63 — 16 16 300
EVS9327−xS 40 — 10 10
EVS9328−xS 63 — 25 16 300
EVS9329−xS 80 — — 25
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.5−5


Range Description
Fuses l Only according to UL 248
l Mains short−circuit current up to 5000 Arms: All classes permissible
l Mains short−circuit current up to 50000 Arms: Only classes "J", "T" or "R"
permissible
conditions:

Fuse L1, L2, L3, PE
Type [A] [AWG]
EVS9327−xS 35 8
EVS9328−xS 60 4
EVS9329−xS 80 4
Component Component
EVS9327−xS ELN3−0088H035−001 EZN3A0110H030 25 E82ZN22334B230 10
E82ZZ15334B230 1) 10
E82ZN22334B230 50 EZN3B0110H030U 2) 50
E82ZZ15334B230 1) 50
E82ZN22334B230 50 EZN3B0080H042 50
E82ZN30334B230 50 EZN3B0055H060 50
1) RFI filter
2) Footprint filter
5.5−6 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Note!
Stop!
Do not use lugs as strain relief.
PE
T1 U V W
T2
3.4 Nm
a a 30 lb-in
0
9300vec131
Fig. 5.5−3 Installation of shield sheet for drive controllers 15 ... 30 kW

Fasten the shield sheet with two self−tapping screws Æ 4 × 14 mm (a)
controller.
Danger!
thermal contact.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.5−7

15 V
2.7 k
7.4 k
3.3 k
MONIT-OH8
PES PES
PES PES
J>
PES
PE M
3~
9300vec139
contact) at T1, T2

Terminals T1, T2
DIN 44081 and DIN 44082)
l PTC: RJ> 1600 W
5.5−8 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013


2 2
T1
T2
2.5 Nm
22,1 lb-in
}+ PE
3 T1
T2
2.5 Nm
22,1 lb-in
PE PE
4 T1 U V W
4 T1
}+ PE
T2 T2
1 1
0 M6 0
U, V, W,
5 Nm
PE
44 lb-in
9300std030
Shield sheet
cable tie.
Shield sheet
cable tie.
PE stud
PE cable connection with ring cable lug
U, V, W
Check the correct polarity. Observe maximum length of the motor cable.
Max. connectable cable cross−section: 50 mm2 with ring cable lug

sensor
Note!
twisted in pairs.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.5−9

X7 X7/8
X7/9
X8 X8/8
X8/5
X9
PES
X10
PES
PES
PES
KTY
PES
PE M
3~
9300std073

5.5−10 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

}+ PE
3
PE
T1 U V W
1 T2
M6
0 U, V, W,
5 Nm
PE
44 lb-in
9300vec123

Motor cable
Shield connection
cable tie.
PE stud
U, V, W
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.5−11


Note!
according to EMC"!
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.6−1

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 … F3
K10
PE S2
Z2 S1 K10
PE L1 L2 L3
IN1 PES PES X11 X4

IN2 K31 HI
Z1
IN3 K32 LO
IN4 33 GND
34 X6 PES
63
PES PES X5 7
28 62
E1 7
E2 4
E3
3
EVS9321 …
E4 2
E5
EVS9332 1
+ ST1 PES
DC 24 V
ST2
– X7
PES
39
A1 X8
A2
A3 X9
A4
PES PES 59 X10
K10
PE
PES X7/8 PES PES
X7/9
PES PES PES

KTY
RB
J>
PES PES PES PES JRB
PE M PE M
3~ 3~ 9351
Z3
9300std072

F1 ... F3 Fuses
K10 Mains contactor
5.6−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013


9300vec113

Cable ties 3.5 × 150 mm Strain relief/shield connection for motor cable 4
Note!
shielded DC cables.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.6−3

0 1 2
}+ PE L1, L2, L3
+UG, -UG
PE
M8
15 Nm
132 lb-in
PE +UG L1 L2 L3 -UG
3
9300vec126
Fig. 5.6−2 Mains connection, DC supply for 45 kW controller

PE stud
Conductive surface
Shield clamp
5.6−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013


with EN 60204−1
Range Description
and controller.

B2 C
EVS9330−xS 100 — — 35 300
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.6−5


Range Description
permissible
conditions:

Fuse L1, L2, L3, PE
Type [A] [AWG]
EVS9330−xS 100 1
Component Component
EVS9330−xS ELN3−0038H085 EZN3A0030H110 25 EZN3B0030H110 50
EZN3A0030H110N001 3) 25
E82ZN55334B230 50
5.6−6 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Note!
controller.
Danger!
thermal contact.
15 V
2.7 k
7.4 k
3.3 k
MONIT-OH8
PES PES
PES PES
J>
PES
PE M
3~
9300vec139
contact) at T1, T2
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.6−7


Terminals T1, T2
DIN 44081 and DIN 44082)
l PTC: RJ> 1600 W
}+
M8
PE U, V, W,
15 Nm 1
PE
132 lb-in
0
PE U V W
4
T1
T2
T1 2.5 Nm
T2 22.1 lb-in 2
3
M5 x 12
3 Nm (26.5 lb-in)
9300std031
PE stud
U, V, W
Shield clamps
Place shields of motor cable with large surface on the shield sheet and
fasten with shield clamps and M5 × 12 mm screws
Cable ties
Strain relief of motor cable
Place shield with large surface on PE stud

sensor
Note!
twisted in pairs.
5.6−8 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

X7 X7/8
X7/9
X8 X8/8
X8/5
X9
PES
X10
PES
PES
PES
KTY
PES
PE M
3~
9300std073

EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.6−9

}+ 1
M8
PE U, V, W,
PE 15 Nm
132 lb-in
0
PE U V W
T1
T2
2
3
M5 x 12
3 Nm (26.5 lb-in)
9300vec124

PE stud
U, V, W
Shield clamps
Cable ties
5.6−10 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013


Note!
according to EMC"!
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.7−1

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 … F3
K10
PE S2
Z2 S1 K10
PE L1 L2 L3
IN1 PES PES X11 X4

IN2 K31 HI
Z1
IN3 K32 LO
IN4 33 GND
34 X6 PES
63
PES PES X5 7
28 62
E1 7
E2 4
E3
3
EVS9321 …
E4 2
E5
EVS9332 1
+ ST1 PES
DC 24 V
ST2
– X7
PES
39
A1 X8
A2
A3 X9
A4
PES PES 59 X10
K10
PE
PES X7/8 PES PES
X7/9
PES PES PES

KTY
RB
J>
PES PES PES PES JRB
PE M PE M
3~ 3~ 9351
Z3
9300std072

F1 ... F3 Fuses
K10 Mains contactor
5.7−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013


9300vec113

Note!
shielded DC cables.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.7−3

0 1 2
}+ PE L1, L2, L3
+UG, -UG
PE
M10
30 Nm
264 lb-in
PE +UG L1 L2 L3 -UG
3
9300vec127
Fig. 5.7−2 Mains connection, DC supply for 55 ... 75 kW drive controller

PE stud
Conductive surface
Shield clamp
5.7−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013


with EN 60204−1
Range Description
and controller.

B2 C
EVS9331−xS 125 — — 35
300
EVS9332−xS 160 — — 70
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.7−5


Range Description
permissible
conditions:

Fuse L1, L2, L3, PE
Type [A] [AWG]
EVS9331−xS 125 1/0
EVS9332−xS 175 2/0
Component Component
E82ZN75334B230 50 EZN3B0022H150 50
E82ZN75334B230 50 EZN3B0022H150 50
5.7−6 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Note!
controller.
Danger!
thermal contact.
15 V
2.7 k
7.4 k
3.3 k
MONIT-OH8
PES PES
PES PES
J>
PES
PE M
3~
9300vec139
contact) at T1, T2
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.7−7


Terminals T1, T2
DIN 44081 and DIN 44082)
l PTC: RJ> 1600 W
0 1
}+
U, V, W, M10
PE 30 Nm
PE
264 lb-in
PE U V W
5
T1
T2 2
T1 2.5 Nm 3
T2 22.1 lb-in
4
M4 x 12: 2.5 Nm (22.1 lb-in)

M5 x 12: 3 Nm (26.5 lb-in)
9300std032
PE stud
U, V, W
Cable clamps for strain relief of motor cable
Fasten cable clamps with M4 × 12 mm screws
Shield clamps
Cable ties for additional strain relief of motor cable

sensor
Note!
twisted in pairs.
5.7−8 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

X7 X7/8
X7/9
X8 X8/8
X8/5
X9
PES
X10
PES
PES
PES
KTY
PES
PE M
3~
9300std073

EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.7−9

}+ 1
M8
PE U, V, W,
PE 15 Nm
132 lb-in
0
PE U V W
T1
T2
2
3
M5 x 12
3 Nm (26.5 lb-in)
9300vec124

PE stud
U, V, W
Shield clamps
Cable ties
5.7−10 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Control terminals 5.8
5.8 Control terminals
Stop!
The control card will be damaged if
ƒ the voltage between X5/39 and PE or X6/7 and PE is greater
than 50 V,
ƒ the voltage between voltage source and X6/7 exceeds 10 V
(common mode) in case of supply via external voltage source.
Limit the voltage before switching on the drive controller:
ƒ Connect X5/39, X6/2, X6/4 and X6/7 directly to PE or
ƒ use voltage−limiting components.
ƒ For trouble−free operation, the control cables must be shielded:

– For lengths of 200 mm and more, use only shielded cables for analog
and digital inputs and outputs. Under 200 mm, unshielded but
twisted cables may be used.
Shield sheet Shield connection for control cables 1
Screw M4 × 10 mm (DIN 7985) Shield sheet fastening 1
Terminal strip, 4−pole Connection of safety relay KSR at X11 1
(only for variants V004 and V024)
Terminal strip, 7−pole Connection of digital inputs and outputs at 2
X5
Terminal strip, 4−pole Connection of analog inputs and outputs 2
at X6
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.8−1

How to connect the shield
0
2
9300vec129
Fig. 5.8−1 Connection of cable shield to shield sheet

Shield sheet
Fasten shield sheet with M4 × 10 mm screw at the bottom of the control
card
Securely clamp cable shield with lugs
Terminal data
Stop!
ƒ Connect or disconnect the terminal strips only if the controller
is disconnected from the mains!
ƒ Wire the terminal strips before connecting them!
ƒ Unused terminal strips must also be plugged on to protect the
contacts.
Cable type Wire end ferrule Maximum cable Tightening Stripping

cross−section torque length
Rigid — 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
Without wire end
Flexible 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
ferrule
Wire end ferrule 0.5 ... 0.6 Nm
5 mm
Flexible without plastic 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14) (4.4 ... 5.3 lb−in)
sleeve
Wire end ferrule
with plastic sleeve
5.8−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Connection terminal of the control card 5.8.2
5.8.2 Connection terminal of the control card
X1
X3
59 ST2 ST1 A4 A3 A2 A1 GND LO HI

X4
39 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 28
1 X5
3 X6
2
4
62 7
63 7
X7
K31 K32 33 34
X11
X8
X9
X10
9300std085
Fig. 5.8−2 Connection terminal of the control card

2 light−emitting diodes (red, green) for status display
X1 Automation interface (AIF)
Slot for communication modules (e.g. keypad XT)
X3 Jumper for the preselection of the signal type for the input signal at X6/1,
X6/2
X4 System bus (CAN) connection, terminal strip
X5 Connection of digital inputs and outputs, terminal strips
X6 Connection of analog inputs and outputs, terminal strips
X7 Resolver connection
Plug−in connector: Socket, 9−pole, Sub−D
X8 Incremental encoder connection
Plug−in connector: Pin, 9−pole, Sub−D
X11 Connection of safety relay KSR, terminal strip
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.8−3

5.8.3 Device variant without "Safe torque off" function
Internal voltage supply
ƒ For the supply of the digital inputs (X5/E1 ... X5/E5) you have to set a
freely assignable digital output (e. g. X5/A1) permanently to HIGH
level.
ƒ For the supply of the analog inputs (X6/1, X6/2 and X6/3, X6/4) you
have to set a freely assignable analog output (e. g. X6/63) permanently
to HIGH level.
GND2 +24V
1
2
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
100k
100k
100k
100k
3
X3 4
5 GND1 GND1
47k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
6 242R
3.3nF
X5 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 39 A1 A2 A3 A4 ST1ST2 59 X6 1 2 3 4 7 62 63 7
AOUT2
AIN1 AIN2 AOUT1
S1
1 2 3 4 7 AOUTx
10k 10k
9300vec201
Fig. 5.8−3 Wiring of digital and analog inputs/outputs for internal voltage source
S1 Controller enable
NO contact or NC contact
Z Load
Minimum wiring required for operation
Terminal assignment in the Lenze setting: 5.8−9
Supply via external voltage source
GND2 +24V
1
2
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
100k
100k
100k
100k
3
X3 4
5 GND1 GND1
47k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
6 242R
3.3nF
AOUT2
AIN1 AIN2 AOUT1
S1
1 2 3 4 7 AOUTx
– + 10k 10k
DC 24 V
(+18 V … +30 V)
9300std077
Fig. 5.8−4 Wiring of digital and analog inputs/outputs for external voltage source
Z Load
5.8−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Device variant with "Safe torque off" function 5.8.4
5.8.4 Device variant with "Safe torque off" function
Safety instructions for the ƒ The installation and commissioning of the Safe torque off" function
installation of the "Safe
torque off" function
must be carried out by skilled personnel only.
ƒ All safety−relevant cables (e.g. control cable for the safety relay,
feedback contact) outside the control cabinet must be protected, for
instance by a cable duct. Short circuits between the single cables must
be ruled out!
ƒ Wiring of the safety relay KSR with insulated wire end ferrules or rigid
cables is absolutely vital.
ƒ The electrical reference point for the coil of the safety relay KSR must be
connected with the protective conductor system (DIN EN 60204−1
paragraph 9.4.3). Only this measure guarantees that the operation is
protected against earth faults.
Tip!
A complete description can be found in the chapter "Safe torque
off".
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.8−5

ƒ If a freely assignable digital output (e. g. X5/A1) is fixedly applied to

HIGH level, it serves as an internal voltage source. An output can be
loaded with a maximum of 50 mA.
– Via a digital output you can supply the relay KSR and two digital
inputs (X5/28, and for instance X5/E1) with voltage.
– For the maximum connection (relay KSR and X5/E1 ... X5/E5) you have
to connect two digital outputs in parallel and fixedly apply them to
HIGH level.
to HIGH level.
+5 V GND2 +24V
1
2
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
+
100k
100k
100k
100k
3
X3 4
K SR 5 GND1 GND1
47k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
6 242R
3.3nF
X11 K31 K32 33 34 X5 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 39 A1 A2 A3 A4 ST1ST2 59 X6 1 2 3 4 7 62 63 7
AOUT2
DIGOUT4
AIN1 AIN2 AOUT1

S1 S2
1 2 3 4 7 AOUTx
10k 10k
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

Z1
9300vec135
Fig. 5.8−5 Wiring of digital and analog inputs/outputs with active "Safe torque off" function
and internal voltage source
S1 Deactivate pulse inhibit (1st disconnecting path)
S2 Enable controller (2nd disconnecting path)
The PLC monitors the ˜Safe torque off˜ function
X5/A4 Feedback via a digital output (e. g. DIGOUT4)
ZLoad
Note!
If you load a basic configuration C0005 = xx1x (e.g. 1010 for
speed control with control via terminals), the following terminals
are switched to a fixed signal level:
ƒ Terminal X5/A1 to FIXED1 (corresponds to DC 24 V).
ƒ Terminal X6/63 to FIXED100% (corresponds to 10 V).
5.8−6 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

+5 V GND2 +24V
1
2
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
+
100k
100k
100k
100k
3
X3 4
K SR 5 GND1 GND1
47k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
6 242R
3.3nF
AOUT2
Z Z AIN1 AIN2 AOUT1
S1 S2 Z
1 2 3 4 7 AOUTx
– + 10k 10k
DC 24 V
(+18 V … +30 V)
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

Z1
9300std075
and external voltage source
ZLoad
Note!
Supplying the digital inputs via an external voltage source
enables a backup operation in the case of mains failure. After
switching off the mains voltage, all actual values are continued
to be detected and processed.
ƒ Connect the positive pole of the external voltage source with
X5/59 to establish the backup operation in the event of mains
failure.
ƒ The external voltage source must be able to supply a current
³ 1 A.
ƒ The starting current of the external voltage source is not
limited by the controller. Lenze recommends the use of
voltage sources with current limitation or with an internal
impedance of Z > 1 W.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.8−7

5.8.5 State bus
5.8.5 State bus
Stop!
Destruction of the control card!
External voltage at X5/ST1, X5/ST2 destroys the control card.
Protective measure:
Do not connect an external voltage to X5/ST1, X5/ST2.
GND2 +24V GND2 +24V GND2 +24V

50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
47k
47k
47k
X5 39 A1 A2 A3 A4 ST1 ST2 59 X5 39 A1 A2 A3 A4 ST1 ST2 59 X5 39 A1 A2 A3 A4 ST1 ST2 59
PES PES PES PES PES
9300std222
Fig. 5.8−7 Example for wiring a drive system to the STATE BUS
PES HF shield termination by large−surface connection to PE
5.8−8 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Terminal assignment 5.8.6
5.8.6 Terminal assignment
Analog input configuration Terminal Jumper strip Jumper setting Possible levels
X3
X6/1, 6 5 1−2 1) −10 V ... +10 V 1)
X6/2 4 3 3−4 −10 V ... +10 V
2 1 5−6 −20 mA ... +20 mA
1) Lenze setting (delivery state)
Non−configurable control Terminal Description Function Level / state

terminals
X11/K32 Safety relay KSR Pulse inhibit feedback Open contact: pulse
X11/K31 1st inhibit is inactive
disconnecting (operation)
path Closed contact:
pulse inhibit is active
X11/33 – coil of safety relay KSR Coil is not carrying
any current: pulse
inhibit is active
X11/34 + coil of safety relay KSR Coil is carrying
current: pulse inhibit
is inactive
(operation)
X5/28 Controller Controller enable/inhibit LOW: Controller
inhibit inhibited
(DCTRL−CINH) HIGH: Controller
2nd enabled
disconnecting
path
X5/ST1 STATE−BUS
X5/ST2
Configurable control Terminal Description Function Level

terminals (Lenze setting)
X5/E1 Digital inputs Deactivate quick stop/ CW rotation HIGH
X5/E2 Deactivate quick stop/ CCW rotation HIGH
X5/E3 Activate fixed frequency 1 HIGH
X5/E4 Set error message (TRIP set) LOW
X5/E5 Reset error message (TRIP reset) LOW−HIGH edge
X5/A1 Digital outputs Error message available LOW
X5/A2 Switching threshold QMIN: actual speed LOW
< setpoint speed in C0017
X5/A3 Ready for operation (DCTRL−RDY) HIGH
X5/A4 Maximum current reached (DCTRL−IMAX) HIGH
X6/1, Analog inputs Main speed setpoint −10 V ... +10 V
X6/2
X6/3, Additional speed setpoint −10 V ... +10 V
X6/4
X6/62 Analog outputs Actual speed value −10 V ... +10 V
X6/63 Torque setpoint −10 V ... +10 V
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.8−9

5.8.7 Technical data
Safety relay KSR
Terminal Description Field Values

X11/K32 Safety relay KSR Coil voltage at +20 °C DC 24 V (20 ... 30 V)
X11/K31 1st disconnecting path Coil resistance at +20 °C 823 W ±10 %
X11/33
X11/34 Rated coil power Approx. 700 mW
Max. switching voltage AC 250 V, DC 250 V (0.45 A)
Max. AC switching capacity 1500 VA
Max. switching current (ohmic load) AC 6 A (250 V), DC 6 A (50 V)
Recommended minimum load > 50 mW
Max. switching rate 6 switchings per minute
Mechanical service life 107 switching cycles
Electrical service life
at 250 V AC 105 switching cycles at 6 A
(ohmic load) 106 switching cycles at 1 A
107 switching cycles at 0.25 A
at 24 V DC 6 × 103 switching cycles at 6 A
1.5 × 106 switching cycles at 1 A
Digital inputs, digital outputs

X5/28 Controller inhibit PLC level, HTL LOW: 0 ... +3 V
(DCTRL−CINH) HIGH: +12 ... +30 V
2nd disconnecting path
X5/E1 Digital inputs PLC level, HTL LOW: 0 ... +3 V
X5/E2 HIGH: +12 ... +30 V
X5/E3 Input current per input 8 mA for +24 V
X5/E4
X5/E5 Cycle time 1 ms
X5/A1 Digital outputs PLC level, HTL LOW: 0 ... +3 V
X5/A2 HIGH: +12 ... +30 V
X5/A3 Load capacity per output Maximally 50 mA
X5/A4
Load resistance For +24 V at least 480 W
Cycle time 1 ms
X5/39 GND2 Reference potential for digital signals
Isolated to X6/7 (GND1)
X5/59 Connection of external Input voltage DC 24 V (+18 ... +30 V)
voltage source for backup
operation of the drive
controller in the case of Current consumption Maximally 1 A for 24 V
mains failure
X5/ST1 STATE−BUS Maximum number of nodes 20
X5/ST2 Maximum length of the bus cable 5m
5.8−10 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Technical data 5.8.7
Analog inputs, analog outputs

X6/1 Analog input 1 Voltage range
X6/2 Level −10 V ... +10 V
Resolution 5 mV (11 Bit + sign)
Current range
Level −20 mA ... +20 mA
Resolution 20 mA (10 Bit + sign)
X6/4 Level −10 V ... +10 V
X6/62 Analog output 1 Level −10 V ... +10 V
Load capacity Maximum 2 mA
Resolution 20 mV (9 bits + sign)
Cycle time 1 ms (smoothing time t = 2 ms)
X6/7 GND1 Reference potential for analog signals
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.8−11

Wiring of the system bus (CAN) 5.9
5.9 Wiring of the system bus (CAN)
Wiring
A1 A2 A3 An
93XX 93XX 93XX
X4 HI LO GND PE X4 HI LO GND PE X4 HI LO GND PE HI LO GND PE
120 120
9300VEC054
Fig. 5.9−1 System bus (CAN) wiring

A1 Bus device 1 (controller)
An Bus device n (e. g. PLC), n = max. 63
X4/GND CAN−GND: System bus reference potential
X4/LO CAN−LOW: System bus LOW (data line)
X4/HI CAN−HIGH: System bus HIGH (data line)
Stop!
Connect a 120 W terminating resistor to the first and last bus
device.
We recommend the use of CAN cables in accordance with ISO 11898−2:
CAN cable in accordance with ISO 11898−2
Cable type Paired with shielding
Impedance 120 W (95 ... 140 W)
Cable resistance/cross−section
Cable length £ 300 m £ 70 mW/m / 0.25 0.34 mm2 (AWG22)
Cable length 301 1000 m £ 40 mW/m / 0.5 mm2 (AWG20)
Signal propagation delay £ 5 ns/m
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.9−1

Wiring of the feedback system 5.10
5.10 Wiring of the feedback system
The feedback signal can either be supplied via input X7 or via input X8.
ƒ At X7 a resolver can be connected.
ƒ At X8 an encoder can be connected.
– Incremental encoder TTL
– SinCos encoder
– SinCos encoder with serial communication (single−turn or multi−turn)
The resolver or encoder signal for slave drives can be output at the digital
frequency output X10.
Note!
twisted in pairs.
Protective cover Protection for unused Sub−D connections 4
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.10−1

5.10.2 Resolver at X7
Technical data Field Values

Connection at drive controller Connector: Socket, 9−pole, Sub−D
Resolver type recommended Receiver
Number of pole pairs of the 1
resolver
Transmission ratio 0.3
Evaluation method Voltage impression in the sine and cosine winding
Max. output voltage ± 10 V
Max. current consumption 50 mA per winding
Max. impedance [Z] 500 W per winding
Output frequency 4 kHz
Monitoring Monitoring for open circuit of the resolver and the resolver
cable (configurable)
Wiring
< 50 m
X7
+REF
1
-REF
2
3
+COS
4
-COS
5
+SIN
6
-SIN
7
+KTY
8
KTY -KTY
9
9300STD331
Fig. 5.10−1 Resolver connection

Cores twisted in pairs
X7 − Resolver
Connector: Socket, 9−pole, Sub−D
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal +REF −REF GND +COS −COS +SIN −SIN +KTY −KTY
0.5 mm2 ˘ 0.14 mm2 (AWG 26)
(AWG 20)
5.10−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Incremental encoder with TTL level at X8 5.10.3
5.10.3 Incremental encoder with TTL level at X8

Connection at drive controller Connector: Pin, 9−pole, Sub−D
Connectable incremental encoder Incremental encoder with TTL level
l Encoder with two 5V complementary signals electrically offset by 90°
l Connection of zero track is possible (optional)
Input frequency 0 ... 500 kHz
Current consumption 6 mA per channel
Internal voltage source 5 V DC / max. 200 mA
(X8/4, X8/5)
Wiring
< 50 m
B X8
B
1
A
2
A
3
VCC
4
GND
5 A
Z A
6
Z B
KTY 7 B
+KTY
8 Z
-KTY
9 Z
9300VEC018
Fig. 5.10−2 Connection of incremental encoder with TTL level (RS−422)

Signals for CW rotation
X8 − Incremental encoder with TTL level

Connector: Pin, 9−pole, Sub−D
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal B A A VCC GND Z Z +KTY B
(−KTY)
0.14 mm2 (AWG 26) 1 mm2 (AWG 18) 0.14 mm2 (AWG 26)
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.10−3

5.10.4 SinCos encoder at X8

Connectable SinCos encoders l SinCos encoders with a rated voltage from 5 V... 8 V.
l SinCos encoder of the company Stegmann with Hiperface®
interface, Stegmann type SCS/SCM (prolongs the
initialisation time of the controller to approx. 2 seconds)
Sine and cosine track voltage 1 Vss ±0.2 V
Voltage RefSIN and RefCOS +2.5 V
Internal resistance Ri 221 W
(X8/4, X8/5)
Wiring
l < 50 m
RefSIN X8
SIN
1
RefCOS
2
COS
3
VCC SIN
4
GND
5 RefSIN
0.5V
= 2.5 V
Z
6
Z COS
KTY 7
+KTY RefCOS = 2.5 V
8 0.5 V
-KTY
9
9300STD330
Fig. 5.10−3 SinCos encoder connection

X8 − SinCos encoder
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal SIN RefCOS COS VCC GND Z or Z or +KTY RefSIN
(−KTY) −RS485 +RS485
Note!
ƒ For encoders with tracks SIN, SIN, COS, COS:
– Assign RefSIN with SIN.
– Assign RefCOS with COS.
5.10−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Wiring of digital frequency input / digital frequency output 5.11
5.11 Wiring of digital frequency input / digital frequency output

Technical data Field Digital frequency output X10

Pin assignment Dependent on the selected basic configuration
Output frequency 0 ... 500 kHz
Signal Two−track with inverse 5 V signals (RS422) and zero track
Load capacity Max. 20 mA per channel
(up to 3 slave drives can be connected)
Special features The "Enable" output signal at X10/8 switches to LOW if the
drive controller is not ready for operation (e.g. disconnected
from mains). This can trip SD3 monitoring on the slave drive.
Internal voltage source DC 5 V / max. 50 mA
(X10/4, X10/5) Total current at X9/4, X9/5 and X10/4, X10/5: max. 200 mA
Field Digital frequency input X9

Input frequency 0 ... 500 kHz (TTL level)
Signal evaluation Via code C0427
Current consumption Max. 5 mA
Special features With activated SD3 monitoring, TRIP or warning is tripped if
the "Lamp Control" input signal at X9/8 switches to LOW.
Due to this the drive controller can respond if the master drive
is not ready for operation.
Wiring
Note!
twisted in pairs.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.11−1

< 50 m
X10 X9
B
B
1 1
A
2 2
A
3 3
4 4
5
GND
5
Z A
6 6 A
Z
7 7
B
Lamp
Enable (EN) 8 8 control (LC) B
9 9 Z
Z
9300VEC019
Fig. 5.11−1 Connection of digital frequency input (X9) / digital frequency output (X10)
X9 Slave drive Signals for CW rotation
X10 Master drive Cores twisted in pairs
X9 − Digital frequency input

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal B A A +5 V GND Z Z LC B
0.14 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.14 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.14 mm2
(AWG 26) (AWG 20) (AWG 26) (AWG 20) (AWG 26)
X10 − Digital frequency output

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal B A A +5 V GND Z Z EN B
0.14 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.14 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.14 mm2
Adjustment Evaluation of the input signals at X9

Code Function
CW rotation Track A leads track B by 90 ° (positive value at DFIN−OUT)

C0427 = 0
CCW rotation Track A lags track B by 90 ° (negative value at DFIN−OUT)
CW rotation Track A transmits the speed
Track B = LOW (positive value at DFIN−OUT)
C0427 = 1
CCW rotation Track A transmits the speed
Track B = HIGH (negative value at DFIN−OUT)
CW rotation Track A transmits the speed and direction of rotation (positive
value at DFIN−OUT)
Track B = LOW
C0427 = 2
CCW rotation Track B transmits the speed and direction of rotation (negative
Track A = LOW
5.11−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Communication modules 5.12
5.12 Communication modules
Communication manuals for the communication modules

Here you will find detailed information on how to wire and use
the communication modules.
Possible communication Communication module Type/order number

modules
Keypad XT EMZ9371BC
LECOM−A/B (RS232/485) EMF2102IBV001
LECOM−B (RS485) EMF2102IBV002
LECOM−LI (optical fibre) EMF2102IBV003
LON EMF2141IB
INTERBUS EMF2113IB
INTERBUS Loop EMF2112IB
PROFIBUS−DP EMF2133IB
DeviceNet/CANopen EMF2175IB
Handling Plug the communication module onto the AIF interface (X1) or pull it off from
the interface. The communication module can also be
connected/disconnected during operation.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 5.12−1

Commissioning 6
Contents
6 Commissioning
Contents
6.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1−1

6.5 Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−1
6.5.6 Motor temperature monitoring with KTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−13
6.6.1 Resolver at X7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6−1
6.7 Current controller adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7−1
6.8 Adjusting the rotor position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8−1
6.9.4 Free configuration of analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9−4
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6−1

Commissioning 6
Important notes 6.1
6.1 Important notes
Active loads
Stop!
For applications with active loads (e.g. hoists), you must set
C0172 = 0 (OV reduce: threshold for activation of brake torque
reduction before OV message) so that an overvoltage message
(OV) can be generated.
ƒ As long as the overvoltage message (OV) is active, pulse inhibit
is set and the drive operates in zero−torque mode.
ƒ The controller inhibit is also evaluated by the holding brake
(BRK)" function block.
»Global Drive Control« (GDC) Use a PC with the »Global Drive Control« (GDC) PC software for
commissioning. The full functionality of the servo cam profiler can only be
obtained through GDC.
ƒ Possible communication paths between GDC and controller including
adapters and connection cables required:
Controller Connection PC
Interface PC adapter Interface
Integrated system System bus cable System bus adapter Parallel (printer
bus or (supplied with the EMF2173IB interface)
CANopen system bus
communication adapters) System bus adapter USB
module EMF2177IB
EMF2175IB
Communication Serial cable A standard RS232 / RS485 Serial (RS232)
module LECOM−A/B EWL0020 converter and an RS485
EMF2102IBCV001 EWL0021 connection cable are required
for LECOM−B.
Communication Optical fibre Optical fibre adapter
module LECOM−LI EWZ0006 EMF2125IB
EMF2102IBCV003 EWZ0007 EMF2126IB
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.1−1

Commissioning 6
Before switching on 6.2
6.2 Before switching on
Stop!
Special commissioning procedure after long−term storage
If controllers are stored for more than two years, the insulation
resistance of the electrolyte may have changed.
Possible consequences:
ƒ During initial switch−on, the DC−bus capacitors and hence the
controller are damaged.
Protective measures:
ƒ Form the DC−bus capacitors prior to commissioning.
Instructions can be found on the Internet (www.Lenze.com).
Note!
ƒ Keep to the switch−on sequence described.
ƒ The chapter "Troubleshooting and fault elimination" helps
you to eliminate faults during commissioning.
To avoid injury to persons or damage to material assets ...
... before the mains supply is connected, check:
ƒ The wiring for completeness, short circuit and earth fault.
ƒ The "EMERGENCY STOP" function of the entire system.
ƒ The in−phase connection of the motor.
ƒ The correct connection of the resolver or incremental encoder to
prevent the motor from rotating in the wrong direction.
... check the setting of the most important drive parameters before enabling
the controller:
ƒ Is the U/f rated frequency adapted to the motor circuit configuration?
ƒ Are the drive parameters relevant for your application set correctly?
ƒ Is the configuration of the analog and digital inputs and outputs
adapted to the wiring?
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.2−1

Commissioning 6
Switch−on sequence 6.3
6.3 Switch−on sequence
Switch−on sequence Note

1. Ensure that controller inhibit is active after mains
connection. } 59
X5
28
Terminal X5/28 = LOW
misc008
2. Ensure that no external error is pending. Terminal X5/E4 = HIGH

3. Switch on controller.
A The control card is operated via an external voltage
supply: ON
Switch on the external DC 24 V supply voltage.
misc002
B The control card is operated via an internal voltage
supply:
Switch on the mains. The controller provides the DC
24 V supply.
4. After approx. 2 s the controller has initialised.
5. Switch on the PC and start GDC. GDC starts in the online mode if the PC
and the controller are connected.
Information on the connection
establishment can be found in the
"Global Drive Control (GDC) − Getting
started" manual.
6. Enter the machine parameters in GDC.
A Select the basic configuration. 6.5−2
Lenze setting: C0005 = 1000 (basic configuration
˜speed control˜).
B Adapt the controller to the mains. 6.5−2
C Enter motor data. 6.5−3
D Set temperature monitoring of the motor. Motor with PTC or thermal contact:
6.5−14
Motor with KTY: 6.5−15
E Select feedback system. 6.6−1
7. If required, carry out a current controller 6.7−1
adjustment.
8. If required, carry out a rotor position adjustment. 6.8−1
9. Configure the function of the control terminals to If an internal voltage supply is used,
adapt them to your application. assign X5/x with "FIXED1" and X6/x
with "FIXED100%".
6.9−1
10. Save the settings with mains failure protection in After connecting the DC 24 V supply or
one of the 4 parameter sets (C0003). after mains connection, parameter set
With C0003 = 1 the settings are saved in parameter 1 is activated automatically.
set 1. (See chapter "Parameterisation")
11. Switch on the mains if previously only the external
DC 24 V supply voltage was switched on.
}
12. Enable controller. X5 Terminal X5/28 = HIGH
59 28 (see chapter "Commissioning"
misc009 ®"Controller inhibit")
13. Define setpoint. Analog setpoint
selection:
−10 ... +10 V via
potentiometer at X6/1
and X6/2
Fixed speed: JOG 1 is parameterised in C0039/1.
Activate JOG 1 with
X5/E3 = HIGH
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.3−1

6 Commissioning

14. The drive is now running. CW rotation:
X5/E1 = HIGH and X5/E2 = LOW
CCW rotation:
X5/E1 = LOW and X5/E2 = HIGH
Note!
In the "Diagnostics" menu, the most important drive parameters
can be monitored.
6.3−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Controller inhibit 6.4
6.4 Controller inhibit
Description If the controller inhibit is active, the power outputs are inhibited.
ƒ The drive coasts in zero−torque mode.
ƒ Status display of keypad: Pulse inhibit
ƒ Status display at the controller: The green LED is blinking.
Danger!
Do not use the "controller inhibit" function (DCTRL1−CINH) for
emergency−off. The controller inhibit only inhibits the power
outputs and does not disconnect the controller from the mains!
The drive could start again any time.
Activation Via terminal X5/28:

ƒ A LOW level at the terminal inhibits the controller (cannot be inverted)
ƒ A HIGH level re−enables the controller
Via the keys of the keypad (if C0469 = 1):
ƒ inhibits the controller
ƒ re−enables the controller
Via code C0040:
ƒ C0040 = 0 inhibits the controller
ƒ C0040 = 1 re−enables the controller
Note!
ƒ The sources for controller inhibit are ANDed, i.e. the drive only
restarts if the controller inhibit signals of all signal sources
have been eliminated.
ƒ The restart starts with zero speed. If centrifugal masses are
still rotating, this can lead to an overcurrent.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.4−1

Commissioning 6
Basic settings 6.5
Changing the basic configuration 6.5.1
6.5 Basic settings
6.5.1 Changing the basic configuration
9300kur006
Fig. 6.5−1 "Basic settings" dialog box
Procedure
1. Open the "Basic settings" dialog box.
2. Click on field (1) and select a basic configuration suitable for your application, e.g.10000"
(Cam profiler)
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.5−1

6 Commissioning
6.5 Basic settings
6.5.2 Adapting the controller to the mains
9300kur006
Procedure
2. Click on field (1) and select the mains voltage and the supplementary component (if used).
6.5−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Basic settings 6.5
Entry of motor data 6.5.3
6.5.3 Entry of motor data
For Lenze motors:
1
2
3
4
9300kur006
Procedure
2. Click into the field (1) and select the motor connected.
Just select the number specified on the nameplate of the motor from the open field.
Note!
A list of the motors available can be found in the chapter "Motor selection list". 6.5−6
3. Click into the field (2) and select the feedback system used.
4. Click into the field (3) and, if required, set the voltage supply for the encoder at X8.
Important!
For C0025 = 309, 310, 311, 409, 410 or 411 you have to adapt the voltage to 8 V.
5. Click into the field (4) and adapt the constant of the digital frequency input to the output
signal of the encoder connected.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.5−3

6 Commissioning
6.5 Basic settings
Enter the 8−digit resolver designation of the nameplate to achieve the

highest accuracy.
9300std088
Fig. 6.5−4 "Feedback" menu of the parameter menu
Procedure
1. Open the "Parameter menu ® Motor/Feedback ® Feedback" menu.
2. Click on C0416.
3. Enter the 8−digit designation of the motor nameplate in the dialog box.
4. Confirm with "OK".
5. Save the setting with C0003 = 1.
6.5−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Basic settings 6.5
For non−Lenze motors or

Lenze motors not listed under
C0086
9300std089
Fig. 6.5−5 "Motor adj" menu of the parameter menu
Procedure
1. Open the "Parameter menu ® Motor/Feedback ® Motor adj" menu.
2. Click on C0086 and select the motor whose data corresponds best with the connected
motor.
Note!
The available motors are listed in chapter "Motor selection list". 6.5−6
3. Click on C0006 and select the motor control operating mode.
4. Enter the data of the connected motor in the following codes. The data can be found on
the nameplate or the data sheet of the motor.
C0022 Maximum current Imax of the motor
C0081 Rated motor power
C0084 Stator resistance of the motor
(The setting is only required if the demands on the control characteristics are
very high)
C0085 Leakage inductance of the motor
very high)
C0087 Rated motor speed
C0088 Rated motor current
C0089 Rated motor frequency
C0090 Rated motor voltage
C0091 Cos j.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.5−5

6 Commissioning
6.5 Basic settings
6.5.4 Motor selection list
Servo motors The following table lists all servo motor which can be selected under C0086.
In the "Servo motor reference list" you can find the servo motors for which
the motor data must be entered manually. ( 6.5−8)
0 1
9300VEC058
Fig. 6.5−6 Nameplate of a Lenze motor
Lenze type C0081 C0087 C0088 C0089 C0090 Motor type Temperature sensor
Pr nr Ir [A] fr [Hz] Ur [V]
[kW] [rpm]
10 MDSKA56−140 MDSKAXX056−22 0.80 3950 2.4 140
11 MDFKA71−120 MDFKAXX071−22 2.20 3410 6.0 120
12 MDSKA71−140 MDSKAXX071−22 1.70 4050 4.4 140
13 MDFKA80−60 MDFKAXX080−22 2.10 1635 4.8 60
14 MDSKA80−70 MDSKAXX080−22 1.40 2000 3.3 70
390
15 MDFKA80−120 MDFKAXX080−22 3.90 3455 9.1 120
16 MDSKA80−140 MDSKAXX080−22 2.30 4100 5.8 140
17 MDFKA90−60 MDFKAXX090−22 3.80 1680 8.5 60
18 MDSKA90−80 MDSKAXX090−22 2.60 2300 5.5 80
19 MDFKA90−120 MDFKAXX090−22 6.90 3480 15.8 120
20 MDSKA90−140 MDSKAXX090−22 4.10 4110 10.2 140 350
21 MDFKA100−60 MDFKAXX100−22 6.40 1700 13.9 60
22 MDSKA100−80 MDSKAXX100−22 4.00 2340 8.2 80 390
23 MDFKA100−120 MDFKAXX100−22 13.20 3510 28.7 120
24 MDSKA100−140 MDSKAXX100−22 5.20 4150 14.0 140 330 Asynchronous servo
KTY
motor
25 MDFKA112−60 MDFKAXX112−22 11.00 1710 22.5 60
26 MDSKA112−85 MDSKAXX112−22 6.40 2490 13.5 85 390
27 MDFKA112−120 MDFKAXX112−22 20.30 3520 42.5 120
28 MDSKA112−140 MDSKAXX112−22 7.40 4160 19.8 140 320
30 DFQA100−50 MDFQAXX100−22 10.60 1420 26.5 50
31 DFQA100−100 MDFQAXX100−22 20.30 2930 46.9 100
32 DFQA112−28 MDFQAXX112−22 11.50 760 27.2 28
33 DFQA112−58 MDFQAXX112−22 22.70 1670 49.1 58
34 DFQA132−20 MDFQAXX132−32 17.00 555 45.2 20 360
35 DFQA132−42 MDFQAXX132−32 35.40 1200 88.8 42
40 DFQA112−50 MDFQAXX112−22 20.10 1425 43.7 50
41 DFQA112−100 MDFQAXX112−22 38.40 2935 81.9 100
42 DFQA132−36 MDFQAXX132−32 31.10 1035 77.4 36
43 DFQA132−76 MDFQAXX132−32 60.10 2235 144.8 76 340
6.5−6 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Basic settings 6.5
Motor selection list 6.5.4
[kW] [rpm]
50 DSVA56−140 DSVAXX056−22 0.80 3950 2.4 140
51 DFVA71−120 DFVAXX071−22 2.20 3410 6.0 120
52 DSVA71−140 DSVAXX071−22 1.70 4050 4.4 140
53 DFVA80−60 DFVAXX080−22 2.10 1635 4.8 60
54 DSVA80−70 DSVAXX080−22 1.40 2000 3.3 70
390
55 DFVA80−120 DFVAXX080−22 3.90 3455 9.1 120
56 DSVA80−140 DSVAXX080−22 2.30 4100 5.8 140
57 DFVA90−60 DFVAXX090−22 3.80 1680 8.5 60
58 DSVA90−80 DSVAXX090−22 2.60 2300 5.5 80
59 DFVA90−120 DFVAXX090−22 6.90 3480 15.8 120 Asynchronous servo
Thermal contact
motor
60 DSVA90−140 DSVAXX090−22 4.10 4110 10.2 140 350
61 DFVA100−60 DFVAXX100−22 6.40 1700 13.9 60
62 DSVA100−80 DSVAXX100−22 4.00 2340 8.2 80 390
63 DFVA100−120 DFVAXX100−22 13.20 3510 28.7 120
64 DSVA100−140 DSVAXX100−22 5.20 4150 14.0 140 330
65 DFVA112−60 DFVAXX112−22 11.00 1710 22.5 60
66 DSVA112−85 DSVAXX112−22 6.40 2490 13.5 85 390
67 DFVA112−120 DFVAXX112−22 20.30 3520 42.5 120
68 DSVA112−140 DSVAXX112−22 7.40 4160 19.8 140 320
108 DSKS36−13−200 MDSKSXX036−13 0.25 4000 0.9 200 245
109 DSKS36−23−200 MDSKSXX036−23 0.54 4000 1.1 200 345
110 MDSKS56−23−150 MDSKSXX056−23 0.60 3000 1.25 150 350
111 MDSKS56−33−150 MDSKSXX056−33 0.91 3000 2.0 150 340
112 MDSKS71−13−150 MDSKSXX071−13 1.57 3000 3.1 150 360
113 MDFKS71−13−150 MDFKSXX071−13 2.29 3000 4.35 150 385
114 MDSKS71−23−150 MDSKSXX071−23 2.33 3000 4.85 150 360
115 MDFKS71−23−150 MDFKSXX071−23 3.14 3000 6.25 150 375
116 MDSKS71−33−150 MDSKSXX071−33 3.11 3000 6.7 150 330 Synchronous
KTY
117 MDFKS71−33−150 MDFKSXX071−33 4.24 3000 9.1 150 345 servo motor
160 DSKS56−23−190 MDSKSXX056−23 1.1 3800 2.3 190 330
161 DSKS56−33−200 MDSKSXX056−33 1.8 4000 3.6 200 325
162 DSKS71−03−170 MDSKSXX071−03 2.0 3400 4.2 170 330
163 DFKS71−03−165 MDFKSXX071−03 2.6 3300 5.6 165 330
164 DSKS71−13−185 MDSKSXX071−13 3.2 3700 7.0 185 325
165 DFKS71−13−180 MDFKSXX071−13 4.1 3600 9.2 180 325
166 DSKS71−33−180 MDSKSXX071−33 4.6 3600 10.0 180 325
167 DFKS71−33−175 MDFKSXX071−33 5.9 3500 13.1 175 325
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.5−7

6 Commissioning
6.5 Basic settings
Servo motor reference list The motors listed in the Motor nameplate data" table column are not
included in Global Drive Control (GDC) and in the controller software.
1. Enter the corresponding value of column "C86" in C0086.
2. Compare the motor data codes with the table values.
– If necessary, adapt the values in the controller to the table values.
3. Optimise the dynamic performance of your machine via codes C0070
and C0071 if necessary.
Motor nameplate data Motor data
Field C0086 C0022 C0081 C0084 C0085 C0087 C0088 C0089 C0090 C0091 C0070 C0071 C0075 C0076
C86 Type Imax Pr Rs Ls nr Ir fr Ur cos j Vpn Tnn Vpi Tni
[A] [kW] [W] [mH] [rpm] [A] [Hz] [V]
1000 MDSKA−71−22 54 3.75 0.88 8.4 34.98 1950 2.50 70 390 0.82 2 100 1.5 1.5
1001 MDFQA−112−12 33 42.60 12.90 0.45 4.3 1660 28.40 58 360 0.85 20 21 2 1
1002 MDFQA−112−12 41 70.50 21.80 0.45 4.3 2930 47.00 100 360 0.83 14 21 1.3 1
1003 MDSKA−56−22 50 6.75 1.57 2.25 6.5 6000 4.50 202 280 0.72 3 50 1.3 1.5
1004 MDSKS071−33−39 112 5.10 0.95 7.2 34.5 780 3.40 39 325 1.00 3 20 2.5 1.5
1005 MDSKS071−33−41 112 2.25 0.45 16.3 68 820 1.50 41 330 1.00 2 20 2.5 1.5
1076 MDSKS071−33−90 112 5.85 1.60 3.67 17.7 1800 3.90 90 310 1.00 10 20 0.7 1.7
1077 MDSKA−71−22 51 2.18 0.33 35.7 131.8 725 1.45 30 360 0.78 10 70 1.5 2
1103 SDSGA056−22 50 1.20 0.24 29.3 123 2790 0.80 100 390 0.71 14 150 0.35 1.8
1104 SDSGA056−22 40 2.55 0.24 29.3 123 2790 1.70 100 230 0.71 14 150 0.35 1.8
1105 SDSGA063−22 50 1.80 0.40 29.3 123 2800 1.20 100 390 0.70 14 150 0.35 1.8
1106 SDSGA063−22 40 3.15 0.40 29.3 123 2800 2.10 100 230 0.70 14 150 0.35 1.8
1107 SDSGA063−32 50 2.55 0.60 29.3 123 2800 1.70 100 390 0.70 14 150 0.35 1.8
1108 SDSGA063−32 40 4.50 0.6 29.3 123 2800 3 100 230 0.70 14 150 0.35 1.8
1109 MDSKS056−23−280 114 8.00 1.10 6.72 8.34 5600 2.30 280 320 1.00 10 20 1.3 1.5
1110 MDSKS056−23−310 114 9.00 1.10 5.42 6.78 6200 2.30 310 320 1.00 10 20 1.3 1.5
1111 MDSKS056−33−300 114 10.00 1.75 3.31 4.62 6000 3.60 300 320 1.00 10 20 1.3 1.5
1112 MDSKS056−33−265 114 8.00 1.72 4.1 5.73 5300 3.60 265 320 1.00 10 20 1.3 1.5
1113 MDSKS071−13−265 114 23.00 3.20 0.54 2.56 5300 7.00 265 320 1.00 10 20 1.3 1.5
1116 MDSKS071−33−270 114 25.00 5.70 0.38 1.91 5400 12.50 270 320 1.00 10 20 1.3 1.5
6.5−8 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Basic settings 6.5
Three−phase asynchronous The following table lists all asynchronous motors which can be selected
motors
under C0086.
In the "Asynchronous motor reference list" you can find the asynchronous
motors for which the motor data must be entered manually. ( 6.5−11)
0 1
9300VEC058
[kW] [rpm]
210 DXRAXX071−12−50 DXRAXX071−12 0.25 1410 0.9
211 DXRAXX071−22−50 DXRAXX071−22 0.37 1398 1.2
212 DXRAXX080−12−50 DXRAXX080−12 0.55 1400 1.7
213 DXRAXX080−22−50 DXRAXX080−22 0.75 1410 2.3
214 DXRAXX090−12−50 DXRAXX090−12 1.10 1420 2.7
215 DXRAXX090−32−50 DXRAXX090−32 1.50 1415 3.6
216 DXRAXX100−22−50 DXRAXX100−22 2.20 1425 4.8
Asynchronous
217 DXRAXX100−32−50 DXRAXX100−32 3.00 1415 6.6 50 400 inverter motor Thermal contact
218 DXRAXX112−12−50 DXRAXX112−12 4.00 1435 8.3 (star connection)
219 DXRAXX132−12−50 DXRAXX132−12 5.50 1450 11.0

220 DXRAXX132−22−50 DXRAXX132−22 7.50 1450 14.6
221 DXRAXX160−12−50 DXRAXX160−12 11.00 1460 21.0
222 DXRAXX160−22−50 DXRAXX160−22 15.00 1460 27.8
223 DXRAXX180−12−50 DXRAXX180−12 18.50 1470 32.8
224 DXRAXX180−22−50 DXRAXX180−22 22.00 1456 38.8
225 30kW−ASM−50 ˘ 30.00 1470 52.0
226 37kW−ASM−50 ˘ 37.00 1470 66.0
Asynchronous
227 45kW−ASM−50 ˘ 45.00 1480 82.0 50 400 inverter motor ˘
228 55kW−ASM−50 ˘ 55.00 1480 93.0 (star connection)
229 75kW−ASM−50 ˘ 75.00 1480 132.0

250 DXRAXX071−12−87 DXRAXX071−12 0.43 2525 1.5
251 DXRAXX071−22−87 DXRAXX071−22 0.64 2515 2.0
252 DXRAXX080−12−87 DXRAXX080−12 0.95 2515 2.9
253 DXRAXX080−22−87 DXRAXX080−22 1.3 2525 4.0
254 DXRAXX090−12−87 DXRAXX090−12 2.0 2535 4.7
255 DXRAXX090−32−87 DXRAXX090−32 2.7 2530 6.2
256 DXRAXX100−22−87 DXRAXX100−22 3.9 2535 8.3
Asynchronous
258 DXRAXX112−12−87 DXRAXX112−12 7.10 2545 14.3 (delta connection)
259 DXRAXX132−12−87 DXRAXX132−12 9.7 2555 19.1

260 DXRAXX132−22−87 DXRAXX132−22 13.2 2555 25.4
261 DXRAXX160−12−87 DXRAXX160−12 19.3 2565 36.5
262 DXRAXX160−22−87 DXRAXX160−22 26.4 2565 48.4
263 DXRAXX180−12−87 DXRAXX180−12 32.4 2575 57.8
264 DXRAXX180−22−87 DXRAXX180−22 38.7 2560 67.4
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.5−9

6 Commissioning
6.5 Basic settings
[kW] [rpm]
265 30kW−ASM−87 ˘ 52.00 2546 90.0
266 37kW−ASM−87 ˘ 64.00 2546 114.0
Asynchronous
268 55kW−ASM−87 ˘ 95.00 2563 161.0 (delta connection)
269 75kW−ASM−87 ˘ 130.00 2563 228.0
6.5−10 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Basic settings 6.5
Asynchronous motor The motors listed in the Motor nameplate data" table column are not
reference list
[A] [kW] [W] [mH] [rpm] [A] [Hz] [V]
410 MDXMAXM−071−12 210 1.23 0.25 35.80 116.80 1400 0.82 50 400 0.70 6 300 1.5 10
411 MDXMAXM−071−32 211 1.80 0.37 27.00 112.70 1400 1.20 50 400 0.71 6 300 1.5 10
412 MDXMAXM−080−12 212 2.40 0.55 16.30 78.60 1400 1.60 50 400 0.72 6 300 1.5 10
413 MDXMAXM−080−32 213 3.00 0.75 11.20 59.30 1380 2.00 50 400 0.76 6 300 1.5 10
414 MDXMAXM−090−12 214 3.90 1.10 9.14 41.80 1410 2.60 50 400 0.80 6 300 1.5 10
415 MDXMAXM−090−32 215 5.25 1.50 5.10 27.70 1420 3.50 50 400 0.80 6 300 1.5 10
416 MDXMAXM−100−12 216 8.40 2.20 2.96 18.20 1400 5.60 50 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
417 MDXMAXM−100−32 217 10.95 3.00 2.20 13.40 1400 7.30 50 400 0.81 6 300 1.5 10
418 MDXMAXM−112−22 218 12.75 4.00 1.50 10.80 1430 8.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
440 MDXMAXM−071−12 250 2.10 0.43 35.8 116.80 2510 1.40 87 400 0.70 6 300 1.5 10
441 MDXMAXM−071−32 251 3.15 0.64 27.0 112.70 2510 2.10 87 400 0.71 6 300 1.5 10
442 MDXMAXM−080−12 252 4.20 0.95 16.3 78.60 2510 2.80 87 400 0.72 6 300 1.5 10
443 MDXMAXM−080−32 253 5.25 1.30 11.2 59.30 2490 3.50 87 400 0.76 6 300 1.5 10
444 MDXMAXM−090−12 254 6.75 2.00 9.14 41.80 2520 4.50 87 400 0.80 6 300 1.5 10
445 MDXMAXM−090−32 255 9.15 2.70 5.1 27.70 2530 6.10 87 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
446 MDXMAXM−100−12 256 14.55 3.90 2.96 18.20 2510 9.70 87 400 0.81 6 300 1.5 10
447 MDXMAXM−100−32 257 19.05 5.40 2.2 13.40 2510 12.70 87 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
448 MDXMAXM−112−22 258 22.20 7.10 1.5 10.80 2540 14.80 87 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
449 MDXMAXM−112−32 259 18.75 5.50 2.45 21.40 1440 12.50 50 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
450 MDXMAXM−132−22 259 25.20 7.50 1.42 15.00 1460 16.80 50 400 0.77 6 300 1.5 10
451 MDXMAXM−132−32 259 29.25 9.20 1.34 14.00 1450 19.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1006 MDXMAxx−071−12 210 1.28 0.25 39.90 157.20 1355 0.85 50 400 0.70 6 300 3.6 2
1007 MDXMAxx−071−12 250 2.25 0.47 39.90 157.20 2475 1.50 87 400 0.66 6 300 2 2
1008 MDXMAxx−071−32 211 1.73 0.37 25.03 122.60 1345 1.15 50 400 0.74 6 300 3.4 2
1009 MDXMAxx−071−32 251 3.00 0.67 25.03 122.60 2470 2.00 87 400 0.70 6 300 2.5 2
1010 MDXMAxx−080−12 212 2.40 0.55 20.69 89.00 1370 1.60 50 400 0.78 6 300 3.2 2
1011 MDXMAxx−080−12 252 3.90 1.00 20.69 89.00 2480 2.60 87 400 0.73 6 300 1.6 2
1012 MDXMAxx−080−32 213 2.85 0.75 11.69 65.20 1390 1.90 50 400 0.80 6 300 3.5 2
1013 MDXMAxx−080−32 253 4.95 1.35 11.69 65.20 2510 3.30 87 400 0.77 6 300 1.9 3
1014 MDXMAxx−090−12 214 3.90 1.10 10.01 40.20 1405 2.60 50 400 0.80 6 300 2.5 2
1015 MDXMAxx−090−12 254 6.75 2.00 10.01 40.20 2520 4.50 87 400 0.77 6 300 2 2
1016 MDXMAxx−090−32 215 5.25 1.50 5.85 28.80 1410 3.50 50 400 0.78 6 300 2 2
1017 MDXMAxx−090−32 255 9.15 2.70 5.85 28.80 2525 6.10 87 400 0.76 6 300 1 2
1018 MDXMAxx−100−12 216 7.20 2.20 2.90 20.00 1425 4.80 50 400 0.80 6 300 1 1.5
1019 MDXMAxx−100−12 256 12.45 3.90 2.90 20.00 2535 8.30 87 400 0.76 6 300 0.8 1.5
1020 MDXMAxx−100−32 217 9.75 3.00 2.10 17.00 1415 6.50 50 400 0.81 6 300 2.5 1.5
1021 MDXMAxx−100−32 257 17.10 5.40 2.10 17.00 2530 11.40 87 400 0.78 6 300 1.4 1.8
1022 MDXMAxx−112−22 218 12.45 4.00 1.50 11.00 1435 8.30 50 400 0.82 6 300 2 2
1023 MDXMAxx−112−22 258 21.45 7.10 1.50 11.00 2545 14.30 87 400 0.83 6 300 1 2
1024 MDXMAxx−132−12 219 16.50 5.50 0.86 13.00 1450 11.00 50 400 0.84 6 300 1.5 2
1025 MDXMAxx−132−12 259 28.65 9.70 0.86 13.00 2555 19.10 87 400 0.83 6 300 1.3 2
1026 MDXMAxx−132−22 220 21.90 7.50 0.80 11.00 1450 14.60 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 2
1027 MDXMAxx−132−22 260 38.10 13.20 0.80 11.00 2555 25.40 87 400 0.84 6 300 0.95 1.8
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.5−11

6 Commissioning
6.5 Basic settings

[A] [kW] [W] [mH] [rpm] [A] [Hz] [V]
1028 MDXMAxx−160−22 221 31.50 11.00 0.50 7.00 1460 21.00 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.9 2.2
1029 MDXMAxx−160−22 261 54.75 19.30 0.50 7.00 2565 36.50 87 400 0.85 6 300 1 2
1030 MDXMAxx−160−32 222 41.70 15.00 0.40 5.50 1460 27.80 50 400 0.87 6 300 1.7 2.5
1031 MDXMAxx−160−32 262 72.60 26.40 0.40 5.50 2565 48.40 87 400 0.86 6 300 1 1.8
1032 MDXMAxx−180−12 223 49.20 18.50 0.40 4.00 1470 32.80 50 400 0.90 6 300 1.4 1.7
1033 MDXMAxx−180−12 263 86.70 32.40 0.40 4.00 2575 57.80 87 400 0.89 6 300 1 1.7
1034 MDXMAxx−180−22 224 58.20 22.00 0.20 3.80 1456 38.80 50 400 0.90 6 300 1 1.5
1035 MDXMAxx−180−22 264 101.1 38.70 0.20 3.80 2560 67.40 87 400 0.89 6 300 1 1.5
1036 MDXMAXM−63−12 210 0.68 0.12 87.58 610.53 1390 0.45 50 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1037 MDXMAXM−63−12 250 1.17 0.21 87.58 610.53 2500 0.78 87 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1038 MDXMAXM−63−32 210 0.98 0.18 56.90 342.11 1400 0.65 50 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1039 MDXMAXM−63−32 250 1.70 0.31 56.90 342.11 2510 1.13 87 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1040 MDXMAXM−112−32 219 18.75 5.50 0.86 7.20 1440 12.50 50 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
1041 MDXMAXM−112−32 259 32.55 9.60 0.86 7.20 2550 21.70 87 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
1042 MDXMAXM−132−22 220 25.20 7.50 0.54 4.80 1460 16.80 50 400 0.77 6 300 1.5 10
1043 MDXMAXM−132−22 260 43.80 13.10 0.54 4.80 2570 29.20 87 400 0.77 6 300 1.5 10
1044 MDXMAXM−132−32 221 29.25 9.20 0.46 4.70 1450 19.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1045 MDXMAXM−132−32 261 50.70 16.00 0.46 4.70 2560 33.80 87 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1046 MDXMAXM−160−22 260 31.50 11.00 1.27 18.97 1466 21.00 50 400 0.86 6 300 1.5 10
1047 MDXMAXM−160−32 260 42.30 15.00 0.87 14.28 1466 28.20 50 400 0.87 6 300 1.5 10
1048 MDXMAXM−180−22 260 54.60 18.50 0.40 4.00 1440 36.40 50 400 0.87 6 300 1.5 10
1049 MDXMAXM−180−32 260 66.15 22.00 0.20 3.80 1465 44.10 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1050 MDXMAXM−200−32 260 90.00 30.00 0.17 3.50 1455 60.00 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1051 MDXMAXM−225−12 260 108.0 37.00 0.15 2.00 1460 72.00 50 400 0.86 6 300 1.5 10
1052 MDXMAXM−225−22 260 128.25 45.00 0.15 2.00 1475 85.50 50 400 0.84 6 300 1.5 10
1053 MDXMAXM−063−11 210 1.43 0.18 51.00 273.7 2760 0.95 50 400 0.80 6 300 1.5 10
1054 MDXMAXM−063−31 210 1.65 0.25 33.00 93.4 2760 1.10 50 400 0.83 6 300 1.5 10
1055 MDXMAXM−071−11 211 1.50 0.37 22.50 90.2 2840 1.00 50 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
1056 MDXMAXM−071−31 212 2.25 0.55 16.90 62.9 2840 1.50 50 400 0.82 6 300 1.5 10
1057 MDXMAXM−080−11 213 2.85 0.75 11.36 47.4 2850 1.90 50 400 0.80 6 300 1.5 10
1058 MDXMAXM−080−31 214 4.20 1.10 6.86 33.4 2810 2.80 50 400 0.82 6 300 1.5 10
1059 MDXMAXM−090−11 215 4.80 1.50 5.10 22.2 2840 3.20 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1060 MDXMAXM−090−31 216 7.20 2.20 3.20 14.5 2840 4.80 50 400 0.86 6 300 1.5 10
1061 MDXMAXM−100−31 217 9.30 3.00 1.81 10.7 2850 6.20 50 400 0.88 6 300 1.5 10
1062 MDXMAXM−100−41 218 12.75 4.00 1.45 8.6 2830 8.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1063 MDXMAXM−112−31 250 18.30 5.50 3.10 17 2890 12.20 50 400 0.83 6 300 1.5 10
1064 MDXMAXM−112−41 250 23.25 7.50 1.96 12 2900 15.50 50 400 0.87 6 300 1.5 10
1065 MDXMAXM−132−21 250 28.05 9.00 1.41 11.292 2925 18.70 50 400 0.89 6 300 1.5 10
1066 MDXMAXM−071−13 210 1.13 0.18 58.93 342 870 0.75 50 400 0.71 6 300 1.5 10
1067 MDXMAXM−071−13 250 1.95 0.31 58.93 342 1610 1.30 87 400 0.71 6 300 1.5 10
1068 MDXMAXM−071−33 210 1.50 0.25 37.90 116.8 920 1.00 50 400 0.63 6 300 1.5 10
1069 MDXMAXM−071−33 250 2.55 0.43 37.90 116.8 1660 1.70 87 400 0.63 6 300 1.5 10
1070 MDXMAXM−080−13 211 2.10 0.37 28.00 112.7 900 1.40 50 400 0.67 6 300 1.5 10
1071 MDXMAXM−080−13 251 3.60 0.64 28.00 112.7 1640 2.40 87 400 0.67 6 300 1.5 10
1072 MDXMAXM−080−33 212 2.85 0.55 16.60 78.6 900 1.90 50 400 0.68 6 300 1.5 10
1073 MDXMAXM−080−33 252 4.95 0.95 16.60 78.6 1640 3.30 87 400 0.68 6 300 1.5 10
1078 MDFMAxx−250−22 224 147.75 55.00 0.04 1.92 1475 98.50 50 400 0.86 6 300 1 2
1079 MDFMAxx−250−22 264 255.90 95.00 0.04 1.92 2585 170.60 87 400 0.86 6 300 1 2
1080 MDEBAXM−063−12 210 0.68 0.12 87.58 610.53 1390 0.45 50 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1081 MDEBAXM−063−12 250 1.17 0.21 87.58 610.53 2500 0.78 87 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1082 MDEBAXM−063−32 210 0.98 0.18 56.90 342.11 1400 0.65 50 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1083 MDEBAXM−063−32 250 1.70 0.31 56.90 342.11 2510 1.13 87 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1084 MDEBAXM−071−12 210 1.35 0.25 39.90 157.20 1390 0.90 50 400 0.64 6 300 3.6 2
6.5−12 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Basic settings 6.5

[A] [kW] [W] [mH] [rpm] [A] [Hz] [V]
1085 MDEBAXM−071−12 250 2.34 0.43 39.90 157.20 2500 1.56 87 400 0.64 6 300 2 2
1086 MDEBAXM−071−32 211 1.95 0.37 25.03 122.60 1380 1.30 50 400 0.64 6 300 3.4 2
1087 MDEBAXM−071−32 251 3.38 0.64 25.03 122.60 2490 2.25 87 400 0.64 6 300 2.5 2
1088 MDEBAXM−080−12 212 2.40 0.55 20.69 89.00 1400 1.60 50 400 0.68 6 300 3.2 2
1089 MDEBAXM−080−12 252 4.16 0.95 20.69 89.00 2510 2.77 87 400 0.68 6 300 1.6 2
1090 MDEBAXM−080−32 213 3.00 0.75 11.69 65.20 1400 2.00 50 400 0.72 6 300 3.5 2
1091 MDEBAXM−080−32 253 5.20 1.30 11.69 65.20 2510 3.46 87 400 0.72 6 300 1.9 3
1092 MDEBAXM−090−12 214 4.05 1.10 6.40 37.00 1420 2.70 50 400 0.77 6 300 2.5 2
1093 MDEBAXM−090−12 254 7.05 2.00 6.40 37.00 2535 4.70 87 400 0.77 6 300 2 2
1094 MDEBAXM−090−32 215 5.40 1.50 4.80 26.00 1415 3.60 50 400 0.77 6 300 2 2
1095 MDEBAXM−090−32 255 9.30 2.70 4.80 26.00 2530 6.20 87 400 0.77 6 300 1 2
1096 MDEBAXM−100−12 216 7.20 2.20 2.90 20.00 1425 4.80 50 400 0.80 6 300 1 1.5
1097 MDEBAXM−100−12 256 12.45 3.90 2.90 20.00 2535 8.30 87 400 0.80 6 300 0.8 1.5
1098 MDEBAXM−100−32 217 9.90 3.00 2.10 17.00 1415 6.60 50 400 0.81 6 300 2.5 1.5
1099 MDEBAXM−100−32 257 17.10 5.35 2.10 17.00 2530 11.40 87 400 0.81 6 300 1.4 1.8
1100 MDEBAXM−112−22 218 12.45 4.00 1.50 11.00 1435 8.30 50 400 0.82 6 300 2 2
1101 MDEBAXM−112−22 258 21.45 7.10 1.50 11.00 2545 14.30 87 400 0.82 6 300 1 2
1102 MDEBAXM−112−32 219 17.85 5.50 2.71 21.40 1425 11.90 50 400 0.84 6 300 1.5 10
1114 MDFMAxx−200−32 224 83.25 30.00 1465 55.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1 2
1115 MDFMAxx−200−32 264 145.50 52.00 2575 97.00 87 400 0.85 6 300 1 2
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.5−13

6 Commissioning
6.5 Basic settings
6.5.5 Motor temperature monitoring with PTC or thermal contact
Description PTC resistors according to DIN 44081 and DIN 44082 can be connected via
the terminal inputs T1 and T2. The motor temperature is measured and
integrated into the drive monitoring.
A thermal contact (NC contact) can also be connected to T1 and T2. Lenze
three−phase AC motors provide thermal contacts as default.
When using motors equipped with PTC resistors or thermostats, we
recommend to always activate the PTC input. This prevents the motor from
being destroyed by overheating.
Stop!
ƒ The motor temperature monitoring may only be connected to
T1, T2 if the cable is terminated with a PTC or thermal contact
(NC contact) on the motor side.
– An "open" cable acts like an antenna and can cause faults on
– Input signals at T1, T2 are processed with a delay of 2 s.
ƒ The drive controller can only evaluate one PTC resistor! Do not
connect several PTC resistors in series or in parallel:
– The motor temperature would be measured incorrectly.
– The motors could be destroyed by overheating.
ƒ If you operate several motors on a drive controller, use
thermal contacts (NC contacts) for motor temperature
monitoring and connect these in series.
ƒ To achieve full motor protection, an additional temperature
monitoring with separate evaluation must be installed.
Activation
Note!
ƒ In the Lenze setting the motor temperature monitoring is
switched off!
ƒ If you work with several parameter sets, the monitoring must
be activated separately in each parameter set!
1. Connect the monitoring circuit of the motor to T1 and T2.
– With 1.6kW < R < 4kW, the monitoring responds.
2. Set the controller reaction:
– C0585 = 3: Temperature monitoring of the motor is switched off.
– C0585 = 0: TRIP error message (display of keypad: OH8 )
– C0585 = 2: Warning signal (display of keypad: OH8 )
Function test Connect the PTC input with a fixed resistor:
ƒ R>4kW: The fault message OH8 must be activated.
ƒ R<1kW: Fault message must not be activated.
6.5−14 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Basic settings 6.5
Motor temperature monitoring with KTY 6.5.6
6.5.6 Motor temperature monitoring with KTY
Description ƒ There are two possibilities to connect a KTY resistor:

– At the incremental encoder connection X8 (pins X8/5 and X8/8)
– At the resolver connection X7 (pins X7/8 and X7/9)
ƒ The motor temperature is measured and integrated into the drive
monitoring.
ƒ The KTY resistor is monitored for open and short circuit.
ƒ When using motors equipped with KTY resistors, we recommend
always to activate the KTY input. This prevents the motor from being
destroyed by overheating.
Stop!
ƒ The controller can only evaluate one KTY resistor! Do not use
several KTY resistors connected in series or in parallel:
– This would result in an incorrect measurement of the motor
temperature.
ƒ If several motors are operated on a controller, use thermal
contacts (NC contacts) for monitoring the motor temperature
and connect theses contacts in series.
ƒ To ensure full motor protection, an additional temperature
monitoring with separate evaluation has to be installed.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.5−15

6 Commissioning
6.5 Basic settings
Activation
Stop!
Overheating of the motor!
In the Lenze setting, temperature monitoring of the motor is
deactivated (C0583 = 3). The motor temperature in C0063 shows
0 °C even if C0584 = 2 is set.
ƒ The motor can be damaged by a too high motor temperature.
ƒ Activate the monitoring of the motor temperature via X7 or
X8 with C0583 = 2 or C0584 = 2.
ƒ Set C0594 = 2 or 3. Then the connection is additionally
monitored with regard to short circuit and interruption.
ƒ If you work with several parameter sets, you have to activate
the monitoring separately in each parameter set.
1. Connect monitoring circuit of the motor to X7/8, X7/9 or X8/5, X8/8.
2. Set response of the controller for short circuit or interruption on the
connection (monitoring of the motor temperature has to be activated):
– C0594 = 3: monitoring is switched off.
– C0594 = 0: TRIP error message (keypad display: Sd6 )
– C0594 = 2: warning signal (keypad display: Sd6 )
Adjustment Monitoring with a fixed operating temperature (150 °C)
1. Set response of the controller:
– C0583 = 3: temperature monitoring of the motor switched off.
– C0583 = 0: TRIP error message (keypad display: OH3 )
– C0583 = 2: warning signal (keypad display: OH3 )
Monitoring with a variable operating temperature (45...150 °C)
1. Set the operating temperature in C0121.
6.5−16 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Basic settings 6.5
Adjustment of KTY operating The temperature and resistance range can be adapted to the KTY used.
range
ƒ C1190 = 0: Fixed operating range for KTY in Lenze motors (Lenze
setting)
ƒ C1190 = 1: Adjustable operating range
R [O h m ]
a
R 2
(C 1 1 9 2 /2 )
R 1
(C 1 1 9 2 /1 )
T 1 T 2 T [° C ]
(C 1 1 9 1 /1 ) (C 1 1 9 1 /2 )
Fig. 6.5−8 Setting of the operating range for the KTY (C1190 = 1)
The operating range is specified by means of limit values and is in the almost
linear section of the graph (a). The operating values are determined by
interpolation.
C1191/1 Setting of the lower and upper temperature value (T1, T2)
C1191/2 corresponding to the KTY used.
C1192/1 Setting of the lower and upper resistance value corresponding to
C1192/2 the KTY used.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.5−17

Commissioning 6
Setting the speed feedback 6.6
Resolver at X7 6.6.1
6.6 Setting the speed feedback
Description The feedback signal can either be supplied via input X7 or via input X8.
– SinCos encoder
Note!
ƒ Use a SinCos encoder with serial communication (multi−turn)
if homing of the drive is not possible. Please specify the
motor/encoder combination in your order.
ƒ You can only use 2 of the 3 interfaces X8, X9, X10
simultaneously. Due to this it may be possible that the
incremental encoder input cannot be activated or the digital
frequency input / digital frequency output does not work.
– This dependency does not apply if the digital frequency
output X10 is set to reproduction of the input signals at X8
or X9 (C0540 = 4 or 5).
– To deactivate the digital frequency input, it may be
necessary to delete the internal signal link from function
block DFIN to the following function block. Remove the
function block DFIN from the processing table.
Resolvers can be operated at X7. For the wiring diagram and the pin
assignment of X7, please refer to chapter "Wiring of the standard device"
® "Wiring of the feedback system".
Activation ƒ C0025 = 10 (Lenze setting)

ƒ Monitoring (SD2) of the resolver and the resolver cable for open circuit:
C0586 = 0 (TRIP, Lenze setting)
C0586 = 2 (warning)
C0586 = 3 (off)
Incremental encoders with TTL level can be operated at X8. For the wiring
diagram and the pin assignment of X8, please refer to chapter "Wiring of the
standard device" ® "Wiring of the feedback system".
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.6−1

6 Commissioning
Activation ƒ C0025 = 110, 111, 112 or 113. The number of increments (512, 1024,
2048 or 4096) is set automatically.
Adjustment The incremental encoder is supplied with voltage by the drive controller.
Stop!
If the supply voltage is too high, it may destroy the incremental
encoder.
Under C0421 you can adjust the supply voltage VCC (5 V) of the incremental
encoder in order to compensate for the voltage drop along the incremental
encoder cable (if required).
Calculation of the voltage drop
R[W] l Length of the incremental encoder cable
DU [ l[m] @ @ I Inc[A]
[m]
R Resistance of the incremental encoder cable
IInc Current consumption of the incremental
encoder
SinCos encoders can be operated at X8. For the wiring diagram and the pin
Activation
Stop!
Uncontrolled acceleration of the motor!
ƒ If the SinCos encoder fails, the motor may accelerate in an
uncontrolled manner.
ƒ Activate the monitoring for the SinCos encoder with
C0580 = 0.
ƒ SinCos encoder with 5 V supply voltage:
C0025 = 210, 211, 212, or 213. The number of increments (512, 1024,
ƒ Single−turn SinCos encoder with 8 V supply voltage:
C0025 = 309, 310, or 311. The number of increments (128, 512 or 1024)
is set automatically.
ƒ Multi−turn SinCos encoder with 8 V supply voltage:
ƒ Monitoring (SD8) of the SinCos encoder:
C0580 = 3 (off)
6.6−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
SinCos encoder at X8 6.6.3
Adjustment The SinCos encoder is supplied with voltage by the controller.
Stop!
If the supply voltage is too high, the SinCos encoder may be
damaged.
Under C0421 you can adjust the supply voltage VCC (5 ... 8 V) of the SinCos
encoder in order to compensate for the voltage drop along the cable (if
required).
R[W] l Length of the SinCos encoder cable
DU [ l[m] @ @ I SINCOS[A]
[m]
R Resistance of the SinCos encoder cable
ISINCOS Current consumption of the SinCos
encoder
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.6−3

Commissioning 6
Current controller adjustment 6.7
6.7 Current controller adjustment
When is a current controller adjustment required?

ƒ The motor data of the motor used is not contained in GDC (e.g. motors
from other manufacturers).
ƒ The application makes high demands on the dynamic performance of
the drive controller (e.g. dynamic positioning, cross cutter).
ƒ The motor/drive controller combination does conform to the standard
power−based assignment. The basic current controller settings only
match for a power−based assignment of the drive controller.
Preparations Measure Setting Explanation
Reduce maximum Reduce the value in With the motor at standstill, the motor
current C0022 current of the motor phase U is measured
(field frequency 0). This increases the
motor current in the motor phase to
141% and the motor temperature rises
significantly.
Generate maximum Connect MCTRL−M−ADD For speed control or position control
torque setpoint with FIXED100% (MCTRL−N/M−SWT = 0)
l Connect For torque control (MCTRL−N/M−SWT = 1)
MCTRL−M−ADD with
FIXED100%
l Connect
MCTRL−N−SET with
FIXED100%
Deactivate integral Set C0076 = 2000 ms The integral action component of the
action component of current controller is deactivated by
current controller setting the reset time Tn (C0076) to the
longest time. The gain (C0075) remains
unchanged (Lenze setting still valid).
Deactivate quick stop Set X5/E1 = HIGH or By preselecting a direction of rotation the
X5/E2 = HIGH quick stop is deactivated.
Change the operation of Set C0006 = 3 Even if an asynchronous motor is
the motor control connected, set the motor control to
’synchronous motor’.
Set the rotor position Set C0058 = −90° Set the rotor displacement angle to −90°.
setpoint
Set the actual value 1. Select a TTL encoder After mains connection C0060 = 0° is
display of the rotor under C0025 displayed.
position to 0° under 2. Save settings with
C0060 C0003 = 1
3. If required,
disconnect the
encoder cable at X8
4. Switch off the mains
supply and the
external 24V supply
(if required) and then
on again.
Connect the storage Put the clamp−on Oscilloscope settings:
oscilloscope ammeter around the l Time base: 400 ms/DIV
motor phase U and l Auto−triggering
connect it to the
oscilloscope
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.7−1

6 Commissioning
Adjustment
Stop!
Thermal destruction of the motor!
ƒ If the controller is enabled for too long and the motor current
is too high, the motor may be destroyed by overtemperature.
ƒ Reduce motor current under C0022 and enable the controller
only for some seconds.
1. Inhibit the controller (X5/28 = LOW)
2. Deactivate quick stop (X5/E1 =HIGH or X5/E2 =HIGH)
3. Enable the controller for some seconds and then inhibit it again.
4. Record the current flowing in motor phase U with the controller being
enabled.
5. Set the gain Vp (C0075) in such a way that the current rises rapidly.
6. Reduce the reset time Tn (C0076) so much that the transient response
shows almost no overshoot and an optimum rise is achieved.
7. After each change of C0075 and C0076, the time course of the motor
current must be recorded and checked again.
9300std090
Fig. 6.7−1 Current characteristic for optimum controller adjustment

Time base 200 ms/DIV
6.7−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
9300std091 9300std092
Fig. 6.7−2 Current characteristic for non−optimum controller adjustment

Current rise of motor current too slow
Reset time Tn (C0076) too long and/or gain Vp (C0075) too small
Measured at time base 200 ms/DIV
High−frequency oscillations of motor current, motor noises may occur
Reset time Tn (C0076) too short and/or gain Vp (C0075) too large
8. Check the transient response over a longer period of time (e.g. with
time base 4000 ms/DIV). The motor current must reach the final
steady−state value within the shortest possible time.
9300std093
Fig. 6.7−3 Transient response of motor current over longer period of time
Optimum transient response
Final steady−state value is reached too slowly
9. When the current controller adjustment is completed, reset the

temporary settings:
– Set the initial values again in C0006, C0022 and C0025. If necessary,
reconnect the encoder cable to X8.
– Connect the inputs MCTRL−M−ADD and MCTRL−N−SET with the initial
signals.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.7−3

Commissioning 6
Adjusting the rotor position 6.8
6.8 Adjusting the rotor position
When is a rotor position adjustment required?

ƒ A synchronous non−Lenze motor is used. The motor used is not
included in GDC.
ƒ Another encoder was mounted to the motor later on.
ƒ A defective encoder was replaced.
Note!
Only use single−pole resolvers or SinCos encoders (single−turn or
multi−turn).
Preparatory work ƒ Inhibit the controller.

ƒ Unload the motor mechanically.
– Disconnect the motor from the gearbox/machine.
– If necessary, remove toothed lock washers, gears, etc. from the motor
shaft.
– If necessary, support the holding torques provided by mounted motor
brakes by means of locking devices.
ƒ Deactivate the "safe torque off" function so that the motor can be
energised for the motor pole angle adjustment.
ƒ Release the holding brake (if available).
ƒ Adjust the current controller (see chapter "Current controller
adjustment").
ƒ Check resolver polarity.
ƒ Set C0006 = 3.
– For carrying out a rotor position adjustment, a synchronous motor
must be selected.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.8−1

6 Commissioning
Resolver polarity check
9300std200
Procedure
1. Inhibit the controller (X5/28 = LOW).
2. Disconnect the motor from the gearbox/machine.
4. Turn the rotor to the right (when looking at the front end of the motor shaft). The value in
C0060 must increase.
l In C0060 the angle of rotation is displayed as a numerical value between 0and2047.
Note!
The actual value is only displayed if the selection cursor is placed on the code and [F6] is
pressed.
5. If the value decreases, swap the signals at X7/6 and X7/7 (+SIN and −SIN).
Rotor position adjustment
9300std203
Procedure
1. Inhibit controller (X5/28 = LOW).
2. Open the "Parameter menu ® Motor/feedback system ® Motor setting" menu.
3. Select C0006 = 3.
l A synchronous motor with feedback must be selected for pole position adjustment.
4. Click C0095 and activate the adjustment process by selecting C0095 = 1.
5. Enable controller (X5/28 = HIGH).
6. The position adjustment program of the controller is started.
l The rotor rotates a full revolution in several steps.
l Then C0095 is automatically set to 0.
7. C0058 displays the current rotor displacement angle.
Note!
l The current value will not be displayed until the bar cursor is on the code and [F6] is
pressed.
l For sin/cos encoders, C0058 always displays a value of 0 because the value is saved to
the encoder.
6.8−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Procedure
9. Reset C0006 to default setting if necessary.
10. Click C0003 and save the setting by selecting C0003 = 1.
11. Disconnect the mains and reconnect the motor to the machine.
Danger!
Uncontrolled movements of the drive after an "Sd7" error in
conjunction with absolute value encoders or in the case of a
"PL−TRIP" error.
If the rotor position adjustment was completed with an "Sd7" or
"PL−TRIP" error ( 9.3−1) it was not possible to assign the rotor
position to the feedback system. In this case the drive may carry
out uncontrolled movements after the controller has been
enabled.
ƒ Death or severe injuries.
ƒ Destruction or damage to the machine.
ƒ Repeat rotor position adjustment (start with step 1).
ƒ Check the wiring and the interference immunity of the
encoder at X8.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.8−3

Commissioning 6
Changing the assignment of the control terminals X5 and X6 6.9
Free configuration of digital input signals 6.9.1
6.9 Changing the assignment of the control terminals X5 and X6
Danger!
If you select a configuration in C0005, the signal assignment of
the inputs and outputs will be overwritten with the
corresponding basic assignment!
ƒ Adapt the signal assignment to your wiring!
6.9.1 Free configuration of digital input signals
Description ƒ Internal digital signals can be freely linked with external digital signal
sources. This serves to establish a freely configurable control of the
drive controller.
– Digital inputs X5/E1 ... X5/E5
ƒ A signal source can be linked with several targets. Ensure reasonable
linkages for not activating functions that are mutually exclusive (e. g.
linking a digital input with quick stop and DC injection braking at the
same time).
Linking signals The internal digital signal can be linked with an external signal source by
entering the selection figure of the external signal into the configuration
code of the internal digital signal.
Example
ƒ C0787/2 =53 ð signal source for JOG2 is terminal X5/E3
NSET
DIGIN DCTRL -X5/28 NSET-N
X5 C0780
DIGIN-CINH
28 1 C0046
DIGIN1
E1 DMUX
C0114/1...6 DIGIN2 NSET-JOG*1 0
C0787/1
E2 NSET-JOG *2 JOG1...15
0 DIGIN3 C0787/2 0
NSET-JOG *4
C0787/3
E3 1 DIGIN4 NSET-JOG *8 3 15
1 C0787/4
E4 DIGIN5
DIGIN6
E5
C0443
ST
9300vec105
Fig. 6.9−1 Connecting digital signal JOG2 with terminal X5/E3
Tip!
ƒ A list with all selection figures is included in the chapter
"Configuration" ® "Selection lists".
ƒ For signal linkage we recommend the function block editor in
GDC (ESP−GDC2).
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.9−1

6 Commissioning
6.9.2 Free configuration of digital outputs
Signal level ƒ Terminals (X5/E1 ... X5/E5):

– HIGH = +12 V ... +30 V
– LOW = 0 V ... +3 V
ƒ Response times: 1 ms
Inverting the signal level In C0114 you can define the active signal level (HIGH level active or LOW level
active) for the terminals X5/E1 ... X5/E5.
Example
ƒ C0114/3 =1 ð LOW level at X5/E3 activates JOG2
Description ƒ The digital outputs X5/A1 ... X5/A4 can be freely linked with internal
digital signals.
ƒ One signal source can be linked with several targets.
Linking signals The digital outputs can be linked with internal digital signals by entering the
selection figure of the internal signal into corresponding subcode of C0117.
Example
ƒ C0117/2 = 505 ð signal source for X5/A2 is the status message
"direction of rotation" (DCTRL−CW/CCW)
Signal level ƒ Terminals (X5/A1 ... X5/A4):
– HIGH = +12 V ... +30 V
– LOW = 0 V ... +3 V
active) for the terminals X5/A1 ... X5/A4.
Example
ƒ C0118/2 =1 ð With LOW level at X5/A2 the motor rotates in CW
direction (with in−phase motor connection)
6.9−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Free configuration of analog input signals 6.9.3
6.9.3 Free configuration of analog input signals
Description ƒ Internal analog signals can be freely linked with external analog signal
sources:
– Analog inputs X3/1, X3/2 and X3/3, X3/4
Linking signals The internal analog signals can be linked with an external signal source by
code of the internal analog signal.
Example
ƒ C0780 = 50 ð signal source for the main setpoint (NSET−N) is terminal
X6/1, X6/2
C0034 AIN1
X6 NSET
1 + + AIN1-OUT NSET-N
C0780
2 + +
AIN1-OFFSET C0046
C0402 C0400
C0010 DMUX
C0404/1 NSET-JOG*1 0
C0787/1
AIN1-GAIN NSET-JOG *2
C0787/2 0
C0403 NSET-JOG *4
C0787/3
NSET-JOG *8 3 15
C0404/2 C0787/4
9300vec106
Fig. 6.9−2 Linking analog signal NSET−N with terminal X6/1, X6/2
Tip!
GDC (ESP−GDC2).
Adjustment Gain and offset

Set gain (C0027) and offset (C0026) to adapt the input signal to the
application.
Input range of X6/1, X6/2
Input range C0034 Position of jumper at X3
−10 V ... +10 V C0034 = 0 6 5
4 3
2 1
+4 mA ... +20 mA C0034 = 1 6 5
4 3
−20 mA ... +20 mA C0034 = 2 2 1
Note!
Different settings in C0034 and of X3 result in a wrong input
signal.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 6.9−3

6 Commissioning
6.9.4 Free configuration of analog outputs
Description ƒ The analog outputs (X6/62, X6/63) can be freely linked with internal
analog process or monitoring signals. The controller outputs a voltage
proportional to the internal signal at the analog outputs.
Linking signals Analog outputs can be linked with internal analog signals by entering the
selection figure of the internal signal into the code of C0431 (AOUT1, X6/62)
or C0436 (AOUT2, X6/63).
Example
ƒ C0436 = 5006 ð signal source for X6/63 is the actual motor voltage
Tip!
GDC (ESP−GDC2).
Adjustment Set gain (C0108) and offset (C0109) to adapt the output signal to the
application.
With an internal signal of 100 % and a gain of 1, a voltage of 10 V is output
at the terminal.
6.9−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Parameter setting 7
Contents
7 Parameter setting
Contents
7.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1−1

7.2.8 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−10
7.2.9 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−11
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 7−1

Parameter setting 7
Important notes 7.1
7.1 Important notes
Adapting the controller The controller functions can be adapted to your applications by means of
functions to the application parameterisation. You can either parameterise via keypad, PC or via the
parameter channel of a bus system.
The function library contains a detailed description of the functions, the
signal flow diagrams contain all configurable signals.
Parameters and codes The parameters for the functions are stored in numbered codes:
ƒ Codes are marked in the text with a "C" (e.g. C0002).
ƒ The code table provides a quick overview of all codes. The codes are
sorted according to their numbers and can be used as reference.
( 8.4−1)
Parameter setting via keypad A quick parameter setting is provided by the keypad XT. Moreover, it serves
as status display, error diagnosis and transfer of parameters to other drive
controllers.
Keypad XT
EMZ9371BC
Can be used with 8200 vector, 8200 motec, starttec, Drive PLC,
9300 vector, 9300 servo
Operator buttons 8
Plain text display yes
Menu structure yes
Configurable menu (user menu") yes
Predefined basic configurations yes
Non−volatile memory for parameter transfer yes
Password protection yes
Diagnosis terminal Keypad XT in handheld design, IP 20
(E82ZBBXC)
Installation in control cabinet no
Type of protection IP 20
Detailed description 7.2−1
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 7.1−1

7 Parameter setting
7.1 Important notes
Parameter setting via PC You need the parameter setting / operating software »Global Drive Control«
(GDC) or »Global Drive Control easy« (GDC easy) and an interface for
communication:
ƒ Interface for system bus (CAN) (preset in GDC):
– PC system bus adapter
ƒ Serial interface for LECOM:
– Communication module LECOM−A/B (RS232/RS485)
EMF2102IB−V001
The parameter setting /operating software of the Global Drive Control
family are easy−to−understand and tools for the operation, parameter
setting and diagnostics or Lenze drive controllers.
GDC easy GDC
ESP−GDC2−E ESP−GDC2
Supply Free download from the Program package must be
internet at charged for
www.lenze.com
Operation in interactive mode yes yes
Comprehensive help functions yes yes
Menu "Short setup" yes yes
Monitor windows for displaying yes yes
operating parameters and for
diagnostic purposes
Saving and printing of parameter yes yes
settings as code list
Loading of parameter files from the yes yes
controller to the PC
Storing of parameter files from the PC yes yes
in the controller
Function block editor no yes
Technology functions for 9300 Servo no yes
Oscilloscope function for 9300 Servo no yes
and 9300 vector
Detailed description Online help of the Online help of the
program program
Parameter setting via bus Detailed information can be found in the documentation of the
system corresponding bus system.
7.1−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Parameter setting 7
Parameter setting with the XT EMZ9371BC keypad 7.2
General data and operating conditions 7.2.1
dcbBA
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
0050 00
50.00_Hz
MCTRL-NOUT
b0
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
a c
9371BC011
Feature Values
Dimensions
Width a 60 mm
Height b 73.5 mm
Depth c 15 mm
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Enclosure IP 20
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 7.2−1

7 Parameter setting
Lx
xx
W
2Z
A
E8
B 00
b 50
c 00 Hz
Menu
0_
d p
Code
Para .0 dcbBA
RG
SHP 50 T
U SHPRG p Menu
NO 0050 00
UV
Code
L-
Para
TR 50.00_Hz
ST
MC
MCTRL-NOUT
zZ
S T
U V
Yy z
Y Z
y
EMZ9371BC
dcbBA
SHPRG p
Code
Para
Menu
0050 00
GLOBAL DRIVE
E82ZBBXC
Init
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
d
0050 00 0 BA
dcb
50.00 Hz
20 %
1
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y 2 3
d
0050 00
50.00 Hz
20 %
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
9371BC018
Fig. 7.2−1 Installation and commissioning of XT EMZ9371BC keypad or E82ZBBXC diagnosis

terminal
7.2−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Parameter setting 7
Display elements and function keys 7.2.3
0 4
1 dcbBA 5
6
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
0050 00
2 50.00_Hz
3 MCTRL-NOUT 7
S T
U V
z 8
Y Z
y
9371BC002
Fig. 7.2−2 Display elements and function keys of the XT EMZ9371BC keypad
Displays Status displays of standard device

Ready for operation
The set current limit is exceeded in
motor or generator mode
(Only active for operation with
standard devices of the 9300
series)
Active fault
! Parameter is accepted immediately Standard device operates
immediately with the new
parameter value
SHPRG ! Parameter must be acknowledged Standard device operates with the
with "# new parameter value after being
acknowledged
SHPRG Parameter must be acknowledged in Standard device operates with the
case of controller inhibit "# new parameter value after the
controller is enabled again
Active level
subcodes
Short text
alphanumeric Contents of the menus, meaning of
al the codes and parameters
In the operating level display of
C0004 in % and the active fault
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 7.2−3

7 Parameter setting
Number
Menu level Menu number Display is only active for operation
with standard devices of the 8200
vector or 8200 motec series
Number
Menu level Submenu number Display is only active for operation
Parameter value
Cursor
Function keys
Function keys
Note!
Shortcuts with ":
Press and hold ", then press the second key in addition.
Key Function
Change to the Change to the Change to the code

parameter level operating level level
Go to the
"Short setup" Accept parameters
"# menu and load when SHPRG ! or
predefined SHPRG is displayed
configurations 1)
$ Change between Change of code Change of digit via
% menu items number cursor
Quick change
"#$ Quick change of Quick change of
"%
between menu
code number digit via cursor
items
& Change between main menu, submenu Cursor to the right
' and code level Cursor to the left
( Deactivate the function of the key ), the LED in the key goes off
) Inhibit the controller, the LED in the key is lit.
Reset fault 1. Remove the cause of malfunction
(TRIP−Reset): 2. Press )
3. Press (
7.2−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Parameter setting 7
Changing and saving parameters 7.2.4
Note!
Your settings have an effect on the current parameters in the
main memory. You must save your settings in a parameter set so
that they are not lost when the mains are connected.
If you only need one parameter set, save your settings as
parameter set 1, since parameter set 1 is loaded automatically
after mains connection.
Step Key Action

sequence
1. Select the menu $%&' Use the arrow keys to select the desired
menu
2. Change to the code level & Display of the first code in the menu
3. Select code or subcode %$ Display of the current parameter value
5. When SHPRG is displayed, ) 1) The drive coasts
inhibit the controller
6. Change parameter
A &' Move cursor below the digit to be changed
B %$ Change of digit
"% Quick change of digit
"$
Display of SHPRG or SHPRG ! " Confirm change to accept the parameter
Display "OK"
Display ! − The parameter has been accepted
immediately
8. Enable the controller, if ( 1) The drive runs again
required
B Display of the code with changed
parameter
A $%&' Select the code C0003 "PAR SAVE" in the
menu "Load/Store"
Select the parameter set C $ Save as parameter set 1:
in which the parameters ð Set "1" "Save PS1"
are to be saved
permanently
D " When "OK" is displayed, the settings are
permanently saved in the selected
parameter set.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 7.2−5

7 Parameter setting
Step Key Action

sequence
13. Set parameters for another Restart the "loop" with step 1. or 3.
parameter set
1) The function of the ) key can be programmed:
7.2−6 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Parameter setting 7
Loading a parameter set 7.2.5
The keypad serves to load a saved parameter set into the main memory
when the controller is inhibited. After the controller is enabled, it operates
with the new parameters.
Danger!
ƒ When a new parameter set is loaded, the controller is
reinitialised and acts as if it had been connected to the mains:
– System configurations and terminal assignments can be
changed. Make sure that your wiring and drive configuration
comply with the settings of the parameter set.
ƒ Only use terminal X5/28 as source for the controller inhibit!
Otherwise the drive may start in an uncontrolled way when
switching over to another parameter set.
Note!
ƒ After switching on the supply voltage, the controller always
loads parameter set 1 into the main memory.
ƒ It is also possible to load other parameter sets into the main
memory via the digital inputs or bus commands.
Step Key Action

sequence
2. Load the saved parameter set
into the main memory
A $%&' Select the code C0002 "PAR LOAD" in the
menu "Load/Store"
The active parameter set is displayed, e. g.
display "0" and "Load Default"
If you want to restore the delivery status,
proceed with D
Select the parameter set C $ Load parameter set 1:
to be loaded ð Set "1" "Load PS1"
D " "RDY" goes off. The parameter set is loaded
completely into the main memory if "RDY"
is displayed again.
The drive is running with the settings of
the loaded parameter set
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 7.2−7

7 Parameter setting
Parameter settings can be easily copied from one standard device to another
by using the keypad.
Danger!
During the parameter transfer from the keypad to the standard
device the control terminals can adopt undefined states!
Therefore the plugs X5 and X6 must be disconnected from the
standard device before the transfer takes place. This ensures that
the controller is inhibited and all control terminals have the
defined state "LOW".
Copying parameter sets from

the standard device into the
keypad Note!
After copying the parameter sets into the XT keypad
(C0003 = 11), always the parameter set that was loaded last via
C0002 is activated.
ƒ Save the current parameters in the parameter set before
copying and load this parameter set in the controller via
C0002.
Step Key Action

sequence
1. Connect the keypad to
standard device 1
The drive coasts.
3. Select C0003 in the $#%#&#' Select code C0003 "PAR SAVE" in the
"Load/Store" menu "Load/Store" menu using the arrow keys.
5. Copy all parameter set into the The settings saved in the keypad are
keypad overwritten.
$ Set "11" "Save extern"
6. Start copying "# The "RDY" status display goes off. As
parameter value "BUSY" is displayed.
If "BUSY" goes off after approx. one
minute, all parameter sets were copied into
the keypad. The "RDY" status display is lit.
9. Remove keypad from standard
device 1
7.2−8 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Parameter setting 7
Transferring parameters to other standard devices 7.2.6
Copying parameter sets fom Step Key Action

keypad into the standard sequence
device
standard device 2
The drive coasts
3. Pull the plugs X5 and X6 All control terminals have the defined
"LOW" status.
4. Select C0002 in the $#%#&#' Select code C0002 "PAR LOAD" in the
5. Change to the parameter level The active parameter set is shown, e. g.
6. Select the correct copy The settings saved in the standard device
function are overwritten.
l Copy all parameter sets available into the l The parameter set that was active
EEPROM of the standard device and save before copying is overwritten.
them permanently. l The parameters are not yet active after
copying. Select parameter set and load
it in the main memory. 7.2−7
$ Set "20" "ext −> EEPROM"
l Copy individual parameter sets into the
main memory of the standard device.
$ Copy parameter set 1 into the main
memory:
Copy parameter set 2 into the main
memory:
memory:
memory:
7. Start copying "# The "RDY" status display goes off. As
If "BUSY" goes off, the parameter sets
selected were copied into the standard
device. The "RDY" status display is lit.
9. l If the function "Copy all $#%#&#' Select code C0003 "PAR SAVE" in the
parameter sets into the "Load/Store" menu using the arrow keys
EEPROM" (C0002 = 20) is and store the contents of the main
selected, they might have memory permanently.
to be loaded in the main
memory manually.
l If the function "Copy
individual parameter sets
into the main memory"
(C0002 = 1x) is selected,
they might have to be
saved permanently in the
EEPROM manually.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 7.2−9

7 Parameter setting
Note!
ƒ If the password protection is activated (C0094 = 1 ... 9999), you
only have free access to the user menu.
ƒ To access the other menus, you must enter the password. By
this, the password protection is annulled until you enter a new
password.
ƒ Please observe that the password−protected parameters can
be overwritten as well when transferring the parameter sets
to other standard devices. The password is not transferred.
ƒ Do not forget your password! If you have forgotten your
password, it can only be reset via a PC or a bus system!
Activate password protection Step Key Action

sequence
1. Select the "USER menu" $%&' Change to the user menu using the arrow
keys
2. Change to the code level & Display of code C0051 "MCTRL−NACT"
3. Select C0094 $ Display of code C0094 "Password"
5. Set password
A $ Select password (1 ... 9999)
B " Confirm password
7. Change to the "USER menu" ''%
You can only quit the user menu if you re−enter the password and confirm it with "#.
Remove password protection Step Key Action

sequence
1. Change to the code level in the &
user menu
2. Select C0094 $ Display of code C0094 "Password"
3. Change to the parameter level Display "9999" = password protection is
active
4. Enter password
A % Set valid password
B " Confirm
The password protection is deactivated by
entering the password once again.
7.2−10 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Parameter setting 7
Diagnostics 7.2.8
7.2.8 Diagnostics
In the "Diagnostic" menu the two submenus "Actual info" and "History"
contain all codes for
In the operating level, more status messages are displayed. If several status
messages are active, the message with the highest priority is displayed.
Switch−on inhibit
STP5 9300 servo, System bus (CAN)
ECSxA/E:
STP6 C0040
QSP−term−Ext The MCTRL−QSP input of the MCTRL function block is on
HIGH signal.
QSP−CAN 9300 servo, System bus (CAN)
ECSxA:
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 7.2−11

7 Parameter setting
For simple, user−friendly operation, the codes are clearly arranged in

function−related menus:
Display Display

The predefined applications depend on the type of the standard
device (frequency inverter, servo inverter, position controller, ...)

MCTRL Motor control
7.2−12 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Parameter setting 7
Menu structure 7.2.9

Display Display
CAN−IN1
CAN object 1
CAN−OUT1
CAN−IN2
CAN object 2
CAN−OUT2
CAN−IN3
CAN object 3
CAN−OUT3

EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 7.2−13

Configuration 8
Contents
8 Configuration
Contents
8.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1−1

8.2 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−1
8.2.1 Fault responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−1
8.2.4 Maximum speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−4
8.2.5 Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−4
8.2.8 Current load of motor (I2 x t monitoring: OC6, OC8) . . . . . . 8.2−7
8.2.10 DC−bus voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−11
8.2.11 External error (EEr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−11
8.3 Overview of monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.31
8.4 Code table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4−1
8.5 Selection lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5−1
8.5.4 Selection list 4: Speed signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5−7
8.6 Table of attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6−1
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8−1

Configuration 8
Important notes 8.1
8.1 Important notes
The chapter "Configuration" consists of two parts.
System Manual Contents of the chapter "Configuration" in the System Manual:

ƒ Monitoring
ƒ Monitoring functions
ƒ Code table
ƒ Selection lists
ƒ Table of attributes
System Manual (Extension) Contents of the chapter "Configuration" in the System Manual (Extension):
ƒ Configuring with Global Drive Control (GDC)
ƒ Basic configurations
ƒ Operating modes
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.1−1

Configuration 8
Monitoring 8.2
Fault responses 8.2.1
8.2 Monitoring
Different monitoring functions ( 8.31) protect the drive system from

impermissible operating conditions.
If a monitoring function responds,
ƒ the set fault response is triggered to protect the drive and
ƒ the fault message is entered position 1 in the fault history buffer
(C0168/x, in case of ECSxP: C4168/x) ( 9.2−1).
8.2.1 Fault responses
Depending on the failure, one or more of the following responses are

possible:
Response Effects on the drive and controller Danger warnings
TRIP l Switches the power outputs U, V, W to a high
(highest resistance until TRIP is reset
priority) l The drive coasts (no control!).
l After TRIP reset, the drive accelerates to its
setpoint on the ramps set.
Message Switches the power outputs U, V, W to a high
resistance as long as the message is active. Danger!
l Short− The drive coasts (no control) as long as The drive restarts
time the message is active. automatically if the message
messa If the message is no longer available, is no longer available.
ge the drive accelerates to its setpoint
£ 0.5 s with maximum torque.
l Longer The drive coasts (due to internal
messa controller inhibit) as long as the
ge message is active.
> 0.5 s If required, restart the drive.
Warning l Only display of the failure.
l The drive operates in a controlled manner. Stop!
Off l No response on failures! Monitoring is As these responses have no
deactivated. effect on the drive behaviour,
the drive can be destroyed.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.2−1

8 Configuration
8.2 Monitoring
8.2.2 Setting of responses
9300std230
Fig. 8.2−1 "Diagnostics" dialog box
ƒ Click on the "Monitorings" button.
9300std233
Fig. 8.2−2 "Monitorings" dialog box
1. Click on a monitoring option. The configuration dialog box opens.

2. Select the desired response and confirm with ÕK˜.
8.2−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Monitoring 8.2
Monitoring times for process data input objects 8.2.3
8.2.3 Monitoring times for process data input objects
Each process data input object can monitor whether a telegram has been
received within a time set. As soon as a telegram arrives, the corresponding
monitoring time (C0357) is restarted ("retriggerable monoflop" function).
The following assignments are valid:
Setting the response to the monitoring:
ƒ C0591 for CAN1_IN ("CE1")
The following can be set:
ƒ 0 = error (TRIP) − controller sets controller inhibit (CINH)
ƒ 2 = warning
ƒ 3 = monitoring is switched off
You can also use the signals as binary output signals, e. g. for the assignment
of the output terminal.
Bus off If the controller disconnects from the CAN bus due to faulty telegrams, the
"BusOffState" (CE4) signal is set.
"BusOffState" can trigger an error (TRIP) or warning (like CE1, CE2, CE3). You
can also switch the signal off. The response is set via C0595. You can also
assign the terminal output.
Reset node Changes with regard to the baud rates, the CAN node addresses, or the
addresses of process data objects are only valid after a reset node.
The reset node can be effected by:
ƒ A reconnection of the low−voltage supply
ƒ Reset node via the bus system
ƒ Reset node via C0358
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.2−3

8 Configuration
8.2 Monitoring
8.2.4 Maximum speed
8.2.4 Maximum speed
Stop!
Destruction of the drive!
ƒ If the fault is triggered, the drive is without torque.
ƒ In the event of an actual speed value encoder failure it is not
guaranteed that the monitoring responds.
ƒ Use a mechanical brake if necessary.
ƒ Special, system−specific measures are to be taken.
The NMAX fault is triggered if the system speed (MCTRL−NACT)

ƒ exceeds the value set under C0596 or
ƒ exceeds the maximum speed nmax (C0011) by twice the max. speed
value.
A fault initiates TRIP NMAX. Other responses cannot be set.
8.2.5 Motor
Overcurrent in the motor Fault OC1 is triggered if the motor current exceeds the 2.25−fold rated
cable (OC1)
controller current.
If a fault occurs, TRIP OC1 is triggered. Other responses cannot be set.
Earth fault in the motor cable The OC2 fault is triggered if

(OC2)
ƒ the motor has a short circuit to the frame,
ƒ one of the phases has a short circuit to the shield,
ƒ one of the phases has a short circuit to PE,
ƒ the capacitive charging current of the motor cable is too high.
A fault initiates TRIP OC2. Other responses cannot be set.
Failure of a motor phase (LP1) If a current−carrying motor phase fails, a motor winding is broken or the
current limit value set in C0599 is too high, the LP1 fault is triggered.
The monitoring is not appropriate for field frequencies > 480 Hz and when
synchronous servo motors are used. Deactivate the monitoring at these
conditions.
The response to exceeding the thresholds can be set under C0597.
Note!
The monitoring can only be activated if the function block MLP1
is entered in the processing table (C0465).
8.2−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Monitoring 8.2
Controller current load (I x t monitoring) 8.2.6
8.2.6 Controller current load (I x t monitoring)
Ir
200 %
150 %
100 %
70 %
10 60 120 180 t [s]

9300std228
Fig. 8.2−3 I × t diagram

Ir Device output current
100 % continuous thermal current at C0022 £ 1.5 Ir
70 % continuous thermal current at C0022 > 1.5 Ir
The I × t monitoring monitors the current load of the controller. The current
load is calculated from the mean value of the motor current over the
acquisition period of 180 s.
The monitoring is set in such a way that the following operation modes are
possible:
ƒ Continuously with device output current = Ir.
ƒ £ 60 s with device output current £ 1.5 x Ir.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.2−5

8 Configuration
8.2 Monitoring
8.2.7 Motor temperature
KTY at X7 or X8 The motor temperature is monitored by means of a KTY. Connect the

thermal sensor to the resolver cable at X7 or the encoder cable at X8.
ƒ Warning threshold (OH7) can be set via C0121
– The switch−on point is 5 °C below the threshold set.
ƒ Fixed warning threshold (OH3) = 150 °C
– The switch−on point is 135 °C.
The response for the case when the thresholds are exceeded can be defined
in:
ƒ C0584 (adjustable threshold)
ƒ C0583 (fixed threshold)
Stop!
With the setting C0583 = 3, monitoring is deactivated. The
motor temperature in C0063 shows 0 °C, even if C0584 = 2
(warning) is set.
Monitoring of the KTY at X7 The SD6 fault is triggered if there is a short or open circuit between X7/8 and
or X8
X7/9 or X8/5 and X8/8.
The response can be set under C0594.
PTC thermistor or thermal The motor temperature is monitored with a PTC thermistor or thermal
contact (NC contact) at T1, T2
contact. Wire the temperature sensor to T1, T2.
ƒ Fixed warning threshold (OH8)
– The switch−off threshold and the hysteresis depend on the
temperature sensor (DIN 44081).
The response to exceeding the threshold can be set under C0585.
Stop!
Motor could be destroyed!
ƒ If the responses "Warning" or "Off" are set, the motor could be
destroyed by overload.
Protective measure:
ƒ Set the response "TRIP".
8.2−6 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Monitoring 8.2
Current load of motor (I2 x t monitoring: OC6, OC8) 8.2.8
8.2.8 Current load of motor (I2 x t monitoring: OC6, OC8)
Note!
currents.
switched.
threshold of 100 %.
Note!
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.2−7

8 Configuration
8.2 Monitoring
8.2.8.1 Forced ventilated or naturally ventilated motors


I2xt load
ȡ ȣ IMot
Ir
t + * (t) lnȧ1 * z ) 1
ȧ t
ǒ Ǔ
Ȣ Ȥ
I Mot
100
C0127 (OC8)

load of the motor
(Display: C0066)
ǒI I Ǔ ǒ1 * e Ǔ
2
Mot *t
N
L(t) + L Start
in C0120 (OC6) or C0127 (OC8).
diagram
120
100
50
0 t [s]
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
9300STD105
thresholds
T Time
8.2−8 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Monitoring 8.2
8.2.8.2 Self−ventilated motors

ventilated motors.
Warnings!
C0129/x.

1.1
1.0
1 C0129/2
0.9
3
0.8
2
0.7
0.6
0 C0129/1
0 n / nN
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
0.132
9300STD350

EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.2−9

8 Configuration
8.2 Monitoring
8.2.9 Heatsink temperature
I2xt load
lnȧ1 * ȧ
T + * (t)
ǒ Ǔ
2
Ȣ Ȥ
I Mot
100
C0127 (OC8)
100% * C0129ń1 n
C0129ń2

load of the motor
(Display: C0066)
2
L(t) + 100% t
L(t) + L Start
Ǹ
t
e *t
in C0120 (OC6) or C0127 (OC8).
Via a temperature threshold, the heatsink temperature of the controller can

be monitored:
ƒ Adjustable threshold (OH4) under C0122
– The reset point is 5° C below the adjusted threshold.
ƒ Fixed threshold (OH) = 85° C
– The reset point is at 80° C.
The response for exceeding the adjustable threshold can be set under C0582.
8.2−10 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Monitoring 8.2
DC−bus voltage 8.2.10
8.2.10 DC−bus voltage
In C0173 the mains voltage and the DC−bus voltage are set. The switching
thresholds for overvoltage and undervoltage are based on these settings.
Selection Mains Braking Message LU Message OU
voltage unit (undervoltage) (overvoltage)
C0173 Set Reset Set Reset
[V AC] [V DC] [V DC] [V DC] [V DC]
0 < 400 Yes / no 285 430 770 755
1 400 Yes / no 285 430 770 755
2 400 ... 460 Yes / no 328 473 770 755
3 480 No 342 487 770 755
4 480 Yes 342 487 800 785
C0173 = 1: Lenze setting
Overvoltage If the DC−bus voltage exceeds the upper switch−off threshold set in C0173,
the OU message is triggered.
Undervoltage If the DC−bus voltage falls below the lower switch−off threshold set in C0173,
the LU message is triggered.
ƒ An undervoltage message > 3 seconds is interpreted as an operating
state (e.g. mains switched off) and entered in the history buffer. The
entry is, however, deleted as soon as the cause has been eliminated
(e.g. mains switched on again).
This operating state can occur if the control module is already supplied
externally via terminals X5/39 and X5/59, but the mains voltage is not yet
switched on.
ƒ An undervoltage message < 3 seconds is interpreted as a fault
(e.g.mains fault), entered in the history buffer and saved.
8.2.11 External error (EEr)
A HIGH signal at DCTRL−TRIP−SET triggers the EEr fault.

You can, for example, connect the digital input DCTRL−TRIP−SET with an
input terminal (X5/Ex). In this way an external encoder can trigger the EEr
fault.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.2−11

EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013
8.3 Overview of monitoring functions
The responses of monitoring functions can be partly parameterised via codes ˘ in GDC in the parameter
menu under Monitoring ˘.
Monitoring Possible responses

l Lenze setting
ü Setting possible
Error message Description Source CoDe TRIP Message Warning Off
0071 CCr System fault Internal l

x091 EEr External monitoring (activated via DCTRL) FWM C0581 l ü ü ü
Voltage supply
1020 OU Overvoltage in the DC bus (C0173) MCTRL l
1030 LU Undervoltage in the DC bus (C0173) MCTRL l
0107 H07 Internal fault (power section) Internal l
Communication
x061 CE0 Communication error on the automation interface (AIF) AIF C0126 ü ü l
x062 CE1 Communication error at process data input object CAN1_IN (monitoring CAN1_IN C0591 ü ü l
time can be set with C0357/1)
Overview of monitoring functions

x065 CE4 BUS−OFF state of the system bus (CAN) CAN C0595 ü ü l
(too many faulty telegrams)
x166 P16 Incorrect transmission of the sync telegram (CAN system bus) Internal C1290 ü ü l
Configuration
Temperatures / sensors
0050 OH Heatsink temperature > 85° C MCTRL l
x053 OH3 Motor temperature > 150° C MCTRL C0583 ü ü l
x054 OH4 Heatsink temperature > C0122 MCTRL C0582 l ü
x057 OH7 Motor temperature > C0121 MCTRL C0584 l ü
x058 OH8 Motor temperature across inputs T1 and T2 is too high. MCTRL C0585 ü ü l
Please note: In the case of "Warning" (C0585 = 2) or "Off" (C0585 = 3), the
drive can be destroyed if the fault is not eliminated in time!
x086 Sd6 Thermal sensor error at motor (X7 or X8) MCTRL C0594 ü ü l
x110 H10 Thermal sensor error at heatsink FWM C0588 l 1) 1)
l 1) 1)
8.31
x111 H11 Thermal sensor error in the device interior FWM C0588
8.3
8
Motor / feedback system
0011 OC1 Motor cable overcurrent MCTRL l
0012 OC2 Motor cable earth fault MCTRL l
Monitoring Possible responses
l Lenze setting
ü Setting possible
8.3
8
8.32
Error message Description Source CoDe TRIP Message Warning Off
0015 OC5 I x t overload MCTRL l

0016 OC6 I2 x t overload MCTRL l
0018 OC8 I2 x t overload advance warning MCTRL C0606 ü l ü
x032 LP1 Motor phase failure MCTRL C0597 ü ü l
Overview of monitoring functions

Configuration
(current limit can be set in C0599)
Please note: Can only be used for asynchronous motors. The function block
MLP1 has to be entered in C0465.
x082 Sd2 Resolver error at X7 MCTRL C0586 l ü ü
Please note: If "Warning" (C0586 = 2) is displayed, the drive can be
destroyed if the fault is not eliminated in time!
x083 Sd3 Interruption of the digital frequency coupling. The input signal ˜Lamp MCTRL C0587 l ü ü
Control˜ at X9/8 is LOW
Please note: In the case of "Warning" (C0587 = 2), the drive can be
destroyed if the fault is not eliminated in time!
x085 Sd5 At analog input X6/1, X6/2, the input current is < 2 mA MCTRL C0598 ü ü l
Monitoring only possible if C0034 = 1
x087 Sd7 Absolute value encoder error at X8 MCTRL l
x088 Sd8 SinCos encoder error at X8 MCTRL C0580 ü l
(filter setting in C0575)

Speed
x190 nErr Speed control error MCTRL C0579 ü l
(speed window can be set in C0576)
0200 NMAX Maximum speed (C0596) has been exceeded. MCTRL l
Time−out / overflow
0105 H05 Intern fault (memory) Internal l
x153 P03 Following error (digital frequency > C0255) Internal C0589 ü l ü
x163 P13 Overflow of the angle controller Internal C0590 l ü ü
x169 P19 Input signal at X9 is limited Internal C1292 ü l ü
Parameter setting
0072 PR1 Checksum error in parameter set 1 Internal l
0074 PEr Program error Internal l
0075 PR0 Error in the parameter sets Internal l
0079 PI Fault during the parameter initialisation Internal l
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013
x089 PL Error during rotor position adjustment Internal l

Representation of the error number:
x 0 = TRIP, 1 = message, 2 = warning
E. g. "2091": An external monitoring has triggered EEr warning
1) Setting only permitted by Lenze service
Configuration 8
Code table 8.4
8.4 Code table
How to read the code table
Column Abbreviation Meaning

Code Cxxxx Code Cxxxx l Parameter value of the code can be defined
1 Subcode 1 of Cxxxx differently for each parameter set
l Parameter value is accepted immediately (ONLINE)
2 Subcode 2 of Cxxxx
* Changed parameter of code or subcode is accepted after pressing "
Changed parameter of code or subcode is accepted after pressing " when
the controller is inhibited
Designation Designation of the code
Lenze Lenze setting (value at delivery or after restoring the delivery status with C0002)
à The column "IMPORTANT" contains additional information
+ The code only displays a value. It cannot be configured.
Selection 1 {%} 99 Min. value {unit} max. value
IMPORTANT − Short, important explanation

No. Designation Lenze Selection
C0002 PAR LOAD 0 Load parameter set
0 Default setting Restore delivery status
1 Load parameter set 1 Load and activate parameter set saved in the
2 Load parameter set 2 controller
3 Load parameter set 3 l Parameter set 1 is loaded automatically
4 Load parameter set 4 after every mains connection.
11 Load parameter set 1externally Load parameter set from the keypad in the
12 Load parameter set 2 externally controllerand activate it
13 Load parameter set 3 externally
14 Load parameter set 4externally
20 Load all parameter sets from the keypad in
the EEPROM of the controller.
l The current parameter set in the RAM of
the controller is overwritten. Save the
parameter set.
C0003 PAR SAVE 0 Save parameter set
0 Executed Saving completed
1 Save parameter set 1 Save the parameters loaded in the controller
2 Save parameter set 2 in the parameter set selected
3 Save parameter set 3
4 Save parameter set 4
11 Save all parameter sets into keypad Copying parameter sets from the standard
device into the keypad XT
C0004 OP DISPLAY 56 0 {1} 1999 Status display
Keypad shows selected code in the operating
level if no other status messages from C0183
are active
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−1

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0005 SIGNAL CFG 1000 Signal configuration
(predefined basic configurations)
0 COMMON Modified basic configuration
1 86xx −1− Compatible to 86xx frequency inverter
2 86xx −2−
11 86xx −11−
20 922x −20− Compatible to 922xx frequency inverter
21 922x −21−
C0005 SIGNAL CFG 1000 100 empty All internal links are deleted
1000 Speed control The first digit indicates the predefined basic
function, e. g.:
l 1xxx: Speed control
l 4xxx: Torque control with speed limitation
4000 Torque control with speed limitation The second digit indicates additional
functions
x0xx: No additional function
x1xx: Brake control
x9xx: In the case of quick stop, the complete
5000 Master for digital frequency coupling drive system is brought to zero speed in a
phase−controlled manner
The third digit indicates the predefined

voltage source for the control terminals:
6000 Slave to digital frequency bus l xx0x: External supply voltage
l xx1x: Internal supply voltage
The fourth digit indicates the predefined

device control:
7000 Slave to digital frequency cascade l xxx0: Terminal control
l xxx1: RS232, RS485 or optical fibre
l xxx3: INTERBUS or PROFIBUS−DP
l xxx5: System bus (CAN)
C0006 OP MODE à Motor control operation

1 SSC norm Y sensorless star standard à Depending on C0086
motor l Change of C0086 resets value to the
2 Servo async. Y asynchronous motor, assigned default setting
star l Change of C0006 sets C0086 = 0!
3 Servo PM−SM Y PM synchronous motor,

star
11 SSC standard motor sensorless
standard motor, delta
22 Servo asyn asychronous motor, delta
C0009 LECOM 1 1 {1} 99 LECOM device address

ADDRESS Bus device number when operated via
interface
l 10, 20, ..., 90 reserved for broadcast to
device groups for RS232, RS485, fibre
optics.
C0011 NMAX 3000 500 {1 rpm} 16000 Max speed Nmax
Reference value for the absolute and relative
setpoint selection for the acceleration and
deceleration times.
l Parameter setting via interface:
– Greater changes in one step should only
be made when the controller is
inhibited.
8.4−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0012 TIR (ACC) 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 NSET
Acceleration time Tir for the main setpoint of
NSET (related to the speed variation 0 ... nmax)
C0013 TIF (DEC) 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 NSET
Deceleration time Tif for the main setpoint of
NSET (related to the speed variation nmax ... 0)
C0017 FCODE (QMIN) 50 −16000 {1 rpm} 16000 FCODE (Qmin)
Switching threshold nact. < nx
nact < C0017 activates the comparator output
CMP1−OUT
C0018 FCHOP 1 Chopper frequency fchop
0 16/8 kHz Noise optimised operation with automatic
changeover to 8 kHz
1 8 kHz sine Noise optimised operation
2 16 kHz sine
C0019 THRESH 0 0 {1 rpm} 16000 Threshold nact =0
NACT=0 Threshold is recognised at nact = 0
C0021 SLIPCOMP 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 20.00 Slip compensation
l Only active with sensorless control below
the value of C0291
C0022 IMAX CURRENT à 0 {0.01 A} 1.50 IN Imax limit current
à Depending on C0086
l Change of C0086 resets value to the
assigned factory setting (1.5×Imotor)
C0025 FEEDBACK 10 Feedback
TYPE Input of the encoder specified on the
nameplate of the Lenze motor:
C0025 automatically changes C0420, C0490,
C0495
0 COMMON C0420, C0490 or C0495 was changed
subsequently
1 Without feedback Control without feedback system (sensorless
control, SSC)
10 RSx (Resolver) The resolver is designated with RSxxxxxxxx.
If a resolver is selected, the rotor
displacement angle in C0058 is set to −90°.
110 IT−512−5V Incremental encoder with TTL level
111 IT−1024−5V
112 IT−2048−5V
113 IT−4096−5V
210 IS−512−5V Sin/cos encoder
211 IS−1024−5V
212 IS−2048−5V
213 IS−4096−5V
309 AS−128−8V SKS Single−turn SinCos encoder with RS485
interface Co. Stegmann (absolute value
310 AS−512−8V SCS
encoder)
311 AS−1024−8V SRS l Enter the supply voltage in C0421.
409 AM−128−8V SKM Multi−turn SinCos encoder with RS485

interface Co. Stegmann (absolute value
410 AM−512−8V SCM
encoder)
411 AM−1024−8V SRM l Enter the supply voltage in C0421.
If an absolute value encoder is selected, an

SD7 trip is triggered.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−3

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0026 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 FCODE (AIN offset)
Freely configurable code for relative analog
1 FCODE 0.00
signals
(OFFSET)
l Used for:
2 FCODE 0.00 – Offset for terminal X6/1,2
(OFFSET) – Offset for terminal X6/3,4
C0027 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 FCODE (AIN gain)
Freely configurable code for relative analog
1 FCODE (GAIN) 100.0
signals
0
l Used for:
2 FCODE (GAIN) 100.0 – Gain X6/1,2
0 – Gain X6/3,4
C0030 DFOUT CONST 3 0 256 inc/revolution DFOUT constant
1 512 inc/revolution Constant for the digital frequency output in
2 1024 inc/revolution increments per revolution
3 2048 inc/revolution
C0032 FCODE 1 −32767 {1} 32767 FCODE (gearbox factor numerator)
GEARBOX Freely configurable code
C0033 GEARBOX 1 1 {1} 32767 Gearbox factor denominator
DENOM
C0034 MST CURRENT 0 0 −10 V ... + 10 V AIN input signal
1 +4 mA ... +20 mA Selection of the input signal for X6/1, X6/2
2 −20 mA ... +20 mA
C0037 SET−VALUE 0 −16000 {1 rpm} 16000 Setpoint selection (rpm)
RPM
C0039 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 NSET JOG setpoints
1 JOG SET−VALUE 100.0 Fixed speeds (JOG setpoints) can be selected
0 for NSET using digital inputs.
2 JOG SET−VALUE 75.00

... ... ...
C0040 CTRL ENABLE 1 0 Controller inhibited RFR controller enable
1 Controller enabled
C0042 QSP + 1 QSP: Not active Quick stop
2 QSP: Active
C0043 TRIP RESET 0 0 TRIP RESET Reset fault
1 Active fault Reset of an active trip:
l Set C0043 = 0
C0045 ACT JOG + 0 Nset is active NSET
1 JOG 1 JOG selection
2 JOG 2
... ...
15 JOG 15
C0046 NSET−N + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 NSET
Main setpoint
C0049 NSET−NADD + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 NSET
Additional setpoint
C0050 MCTRL−NSET2 + −100.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 MCTRL
nset at speed controller input
8.4−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0051 MCTRL−NACT + −30000 {1 rpm} 30000 Actual speed
C0052 MCTRL−UMOT + 0 {1 V} 800 Motor voltage
C0053 UG−VOLTAGE + 0 {1 V} 900 DC−bus voltage
C0054 IMOT + 0.0 {0.1 A} 300.0 Current motor current Imot
MCTRLfunction block
l Read only
l MCTRL−IACT = 100 % = C0022
C0056 MCTRL−MSET2 + −100.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 MCTRL−MSET2 (Mset)
Torque setpoint (n−controller output)
C0057 MAX TORQUE + 0 {1 Nm} 500 Maximum torque
Maximum possible torque of the drive
configuration
l Depending on C0022, C0086
C0058 ROTOR DIFF −90.0 −180.0 {0.1 °} 179.9 Rotor displacement angle of motor (offset
angle)
Zero phase of the rotor for synchronous
motors (C0095).
If a resolver is selected in C0025 or C0490,
C0058 is set to −90°.
l Lenze motor with resolver: C0058 = −90°
l Lenze motor with absolute value encoder:
C0058 = 0°
C0059 MOT POLE NO. + 1 {1} 50 Number of motor pole pairs
C0060 ROTOR POS + 0 {1} 2048 Motor rotor position
l 1 revolution = 2048 inc
C0061 HEATSINK + 0 {1 °C} 100 Heatsink temperature
TEMP
C0063 MOT TEMP + 0 {1 °C} 200 Motor temperature
C0064 UTILIZATION + 0 {1 %} 150 Device utilisation I × t of the last 180 s
l C0064 >100 % releases trip OC5
l Trip reset is only possible if C0064 < 95 %
C0066 MOTOR LOAD + 0 {1 %} 250 I2 × t utilisation of the motor
C0067 ACT TRIP + All fault à Selection list 10 Trip error message
messages Current fault message
C0070 VP SPEED CTRL à 0.0 {0.5} 255.0 Vpn speed controller
assigned Lenze setting
C0071 TN SPEED CTRL à 1.0 {0.5 ms} 600.0 Tnn speed controller
At >512 ms the function is deactivated
C0072 TD SPEED CTRL 0.0 0.0 {0.1 ms} 32.0 Tdn speed controller
C0075 VP CURR CTRL 0.35 0.00 {0.01} 15.99 Vpi current controller
l Depending on C0086
C0076 TN CURR CTRL 1.8 0.5 {0.1 ms} 2000.0 Tni current controller
At 2000 ms the function is deactivated
C0077 VP FIELD CTRL 0.25 0.00 {0.01} 15.99 VpF field controller
C0078 TN FIELD CTRL 15.0 1.0 {0.5 ms} 8000.0 TnF field controller
At 8000 ms the function is deactivated
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−5

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0081 MOT POWER à 0.01 {0.01 kW} 150.00 Rated motor power acc. to nameplate
l Change of C0081 sets C0086 = 0
C0084 MOT RS à 0.00 {0.01 W} 150.00 Motor stator resistance
C0085 MOT LS à 0.00 {0.01 mH} 655.35 Motor leakage inductance
C0086 MOT TYPE à See motor selection list Motor type selection
à Depending on the controller used
l Change of C0086 resets C0006, C0022,
C0070, C0071, C0075, C0076, C0081,
C0084, C0085, C0087, C0088, C0089,
C0090, C0091 to the assigned Lenze
setting
Controller Lenze Motor type Lenze motor type
setting assigned
EVS9321 110 MDSKS56−23−150 MDSKSXX056−23, fr: 150 Hz
EVS9322 111 MDSKS56−33−150 MDSKSXX056−33, fr: 150Hz
EVS9323 112 MDSKS71−13−150 MDSKSXX071−13, fr: 150 Hz
EVS9325 15 MDFKA80−120 MDFKAXX080−22, fr: 120Hz
EVS9329 225 30kW−ASM−50 —
EVS9330 227 45kW−ASM−50 —
EVS9331 228 55kW−ASM−50 —
EVS9332 229 75kW−ASM−50 —
C0087 MOT SPEED à 300 {1 rpm} 16000 Rated motor speed
C0088 MOT CURRENT à 0.2 {0.1 A} 500.0 Rated motor current
C0089 MOT à 10 {1 Hz} 1000 Rated motor frequency
FREQUENCY
C0090 MOT VOLTAGE à 50 {1 V} 500 Rated motor voltage
C0091 MOT COS PHI à 0.50 {0.01} 1.00 Motor cos j
C0093 DRIVE IDENT + 0 Defective power section Controller identification
1 No power section 93xx: type of servo inverter
93xx 93xx
8.4−6 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0094 PASSWORD 0 0 {1} 9999 Password
l Parameter access protection for the
keypad. When the password is activated,
only codes of the user menu can be
accessed. For further possible selections
see C0096
C0095 ROTOR POS 0 0 Inactive Rotor position adjustment of a synchronous
ADJ 1 Active motor
l C0058 displays the zero angle of the rotor
l C0095 = 1 starts position adjustment
C0096 0 No access protection Extended password protection for bus
1 Read protection systems with activated password (C0094).
2 Write protection l All codes in the user menu can be
3 Read/write protection accessed.
1 AIF PROTECT. 0 AIF access protection
2 CAN PROTECT. 0 CAN access protection
C0099 S/W VERSION + x.xx Software version
C0101 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 NSET
1 NSET−TIR 0.000 Additional acceleration for the main setpoint
(ACCELERATIO (based on speed variation 0...nmax.)
N)
2 NSET TIR 0.000
... ... ...
15 NSET−TIR 0.000
C0103 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 NSET
1 NSET−TIF 0.000 Additional deceleration times for the main
setpoint
2 NSET−TIF 0.000 (based on speed variation 0...nmax.)
... ... ...
15 NSET−TIF 0.000
C0105 QSP TIF 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 QSP deceleration time
Deceleration time for quick stop (QSP)
(based on speed variation 0...nmax.)
C0108 100.0 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 FCODE (AOUT gain)
0
1 FCODE (GAIN
AOUT)
2 FCODE (GAIN
AOUT)
C0109 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 FCODE (offset AOUT)
1 FCODE (OFFSET 0.00
AOUT)
2 FCODE (OFFSET 0.00
AOUT)
C0114 0 HIGH active DIGINterminal polarity
1 LOW active
1 DIGIN1 POL 0 X5/E1
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−7

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0116 ® Selection list 2 Signal configuration of the free digital
outputs
1 FDO−00 1000 FIXED0 Free digital outputs can only be evaluated
when they are linked to automation
... ... ... ... interfaces.
32 FDO −31 1000 FIXED0
C0117 ® ® Selection list 2 Signal configuration DIGOUT
1 DIGOUT1 15000 DCTRL−TRIP X5/A1
2 DIGOUT2 10650 CMP1−OUT X5/A2
3 DIGOUT3 500 DCTRL−RDY X5/A3
4 DIGOUT4 5003 MCTRL−MMAX X5/A4
C0118 0 HIGH active Terminal polarity DIGOUT
1 LOW active
1 DIGOUT1 POL 1 X5/A1
C0120 OC6 LIMIT 0 00 {1 %} 120 Threshold for the I2 × t monitoring (motor).
l 0 = I2 × t monitoring switched off
l I2 × t > C0120 ð trip OC6
C0121 OH7 LIMIT 150 45 {1 °C} 150 Temperature for OH7
Threshold for motor temperature warning
Warning threshold − heatsink temperature
C0125 BAUD RATE 0 0 9600 baud LECOM baud rate
1 4800 baud LECOM baud rate for 2102 accessory module
2 2400 baud
3 1200 baud
4 19200 baud
C0126 MONIT CE0 3 0 TRIP CE0monitoring
2 Warning Configuration of communication error
3 Off monitoring with CE0 automation interface
C0127 OC8 LIMIT 0 0 {1 %} 120 Threshold for the I2 × t advance warning
(motor).
l 0 = I2 × t warning switched off
l I2 × t > C0127 ð OC8 fault message
(response set in C606)
C0128 TAU MOTOR 5.0 0.1 {0.1 min} 50.0 Thermal time constant of the motor
The time constant is required for calculating
the I2 × t disconnection.
C0130 ACT TI + NSET
Active Ti times of NSET
C0134 RFG CHARAC 0 0 Linear NSET
1 S−shaped Ramp function generator characteristic for
main setpoint
C0135 CONTROL 0 0 {1} 65535 Control word
WORD Device control word for LECOM−A/B/LI or
keypad.
C0136 +
1 CTRLWORD Control word C135
C135
2 CTRLWORD Control word CAN
CAN
3 CTRLWORD AIF Control word AIF
8.4−8 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0141 FCODE 0.0 −199.9 {0.1 %} 199.9 Main setpoint
(SETVAL)
C0142 START 1 Start option
OPTIONS 0 Start lock l Automatic start inhibited after
– Mains connection
– Reset of a message (t > 0.5 s)
– TRIP RESET
l Start after HIGH−LOW−HIGH level change
at X5/28
1 Auto start Automatic start if X5/28 = HIGH
C0150 STATUS WORD + 0 {1} 65535 Status word when linked to automation
interfaces
l Binary interpretation indicates the bit
states
C0151 FDO (DW) + Hexadecimal display of the free digital
output signals configured in C0116
states
C0155 STATUS WORD + Bit00 Fail Bit08 R/L Status word 2
2 Bit01 Mmax Bit09 — Extended decimal status word
Bit02 Imax Bit10 — states
Bit03 IMP Bit11 —
Bit04 RDY Bit12 —
Bit05 RSP Bit13 —
Bit06 Trip Bit14 —
Bit07 Init Bit15 —
C0156 ® Selection list 2 Configuration of the free bits of the status
word
1 STAT.B0 2000 DCTRL−PAR*1−O
2 STAT.B2 5002 MCTRL−IMAX
3 STAT.B3 5003 MCTRL−MMAX
4 STAT.B4 5050 NSET−RFG I=O
5 STAT.B5 10650 CMP1−OUT
6 STAT.B14 505 DCTRL−CW/CCW
7 STAT.B15 500 DCTRL−RDY
C0157 + Display of the freely definable bits of the
1 (C0156/1) status word
... ...
7 (C0156/7)
C0161 ACT TRIP + All fault messages Trip error message
Current fault message (as in C0168/1)
C0167 RESET 0 0 No reset Reseterror message
FAILMEM 1 Reset C0167 = 1 deletes the history buffer
C0168 + All fault messages List of faults occurred
1 FAIL NO. ACT Currently active fault
2 FAIL NO. OLD1 Last fault
... ... ...
8 FAIL NO. OLD7 Last but six fault
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−9

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0169 + corresponding mains switch−on time List of the times when the faults occurred
under C0168 (based on C0179)
1 FAILTIME ACT Currently active fault
2 FAILTIME OLD1 Last fault
... ... ...
8 FAILTIME OLD7 Last but six fault
C0170 + corresponding mains switch−on time List of how often the faults have occurred
consecutively under C0168
History buffer
1 COUNTER ACT Currently active fault
2 COUNTER Last fault
OLD1
... .. ...
8 COUNTER Last but six fault
OLD7
C0172 OV REDUCE 0 0 {10 V} 100 OV reduce
Threshold for activating the brake torque
reduction before OU message
C0173 UG LIMIT 1 DC−bus voltage thresholds
Check during commissioning and adapt if
necessary!
All drive components in the interconnection
must have the same thresholds!
0 Mains<400V +−brake LU=285V, Operation on mains <400 V with or without
OU=770V−755V braking unit
1 Mains=400V +−brake LU=285V, Operation on 400 V mains with or without
3 Mains=480V −brake LU=342V, Operation on 480 V mains without braking
OU=770V−755V unit
4 Mains=480V +−brake LU=342V, Operation on 480 V mains with braking unit
OU=800V−785V
C0178 OP TIMER + 0 {1 s} 4294967295 Elapsed−time meter
l Time when the controller was enabled
C0179 MAINS TIMER + 0 {1 s} 4294967295 Power−on time meter
l Time during which the mains was
switched on
C0182 TI S−SHAPED 20.00 0.01 {0.01 s} 50.00 NSET
Ti time of the S−shaped ramp function
generator
(determines the shape of the S curve)
l Low values Þsmall S rounding
l High values Þlarge S rounding
8.4−10 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0183 DIAGNOSTICS + Drive diagnostics
l Indicates fault or status information
l If several items of fault or status
information are to be shown, the
information with the smallest number is
displayed
0 OK No fault
101 Initialisation Initialisation phase
102 TRIP/fault TRIP active
103 Emergency stop Emergency stop was carried out
104 IMP message Message active
105 Power OFF Function is not supported
111 BSP C135 operation inhibit
112 BSP AIF operation inhibit Operation inhibited
113 BSP CAN operation inhibit
121 CINH terminal 28 controller inhibit Controller inhibited via X5/28
122 CINH internal 1 controller inhibit DCTRL−CINH1
123 CINH internal 2 controller inhibit DCTRL−CINH2
124 CINH C135/STOP controller inhibit STOP key at the keypad
125 CINH AIF controller inhibit Controller inhibited via AIF
126 CINH CAN controller inhibit Controller inhibited via system bus
141 Switch−on inhibit Restart protection active
142 IMP inhibit Pulse inhibit High−resistance power outputs
151 QSP terminal ext. quick stop Quick stop via MCTRL−QSP
152 QSP−C135 quick stop Quick stop via STOP key on the keypad
153 QSP−AIF quick stop Quick stop via AIF
154 QSP−CAN quick stop Quick stop via system bus
250 Warning C168 Warning active
C0190 NSET ARIT 0 0 OUT = C46 NSET
1 C46 + C49 Arithmetic block in NSET function block.
2 C46 − C49 Connects main setpoint C0046 and additional
3 C46 * C49 setpoint C0040.
4 C46 / C49
5 C46/(100 − C49)
C0195 BRK1 T ACT 99.9 0.0 {0.1 s} 99.9 BRK1
Brake closing time. Engagement time of the
mechanical holding brake.
l After the time under C0195 has elapsed,
the "mechanical brake closed" status is
reached.
C0196 BRK T RELEASE 0.0 0.0 {0.1 s} 60.0 BRK1
Brake opening time. Disengagement time of
the mechanical holding brake (see technical
data of the brake).
l After time has elapsed under C0195, the
status "mechanical brake opened" is
reached.
C0200 S/W ID + Software manufacturer’s product code
Software identification
C0201 S/W DATE + Software generation
Creation date
C0203 COMM. NO. + x / xxxx / xxxxx Commission number
C0204 SERIAL−NO. + 0 {1} 65535 Serial number
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−11

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0206 PROD. DATE + Production date
C0207 DL INFO 1 + Download−Info 1
C0208 DL INFO 2 + Download info 2
C0209 DL INFO 3 + Download info 3
C0220 NSET TIR ADD 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 NSET
Acceleration time Tir of the additional
setpoint for NSET
C0221 NSET TIF ADD 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 NSET
Deceleration time Tif of the additional
setpoint for NSET
C0222 PCTRL VP 1.0 0.1 {0.1} 500.0 PCTRL
Vp gain
C0223 PCTRL TN 400 20 {1 ms} 99999 PCTRL
Tn I component
99999 ms: Switched off
C0224 PCTRL KD 0.0 0.0 {0.1} 5.0 PCTRL
Kd differential component
C0241 CMP RFG−I = O 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 NSET
Threshold ramp function generator for main
setpoint Input = output, (100 % = nmax)
C0244 BRK M SET 0 −100 {1 %} 100 BRK1
Holding torque of the DC injection brake
100 % = value of C0057
C0250 FCODE 1BIT 0 0 Lower limit FCODE 1 bit digital
1 Upper limit
C0252 ANGLE OFFSET 0 −245760000 {1 inc} 245760000 DFSET
Anglular offset, fixed angular offset for
digital frequency configurations
l 1 rev. = 65536 inc
C0253 ANGLE N−TRIM ® −32767 {1 inc} 32767 DFSET
Speed−dependent phase trimming
à Depending on C0005, C0025, C0490
l Change of C0005, C0025, or C0490 resets
C0253 to the Lenze settingassigned
l 1 rev. = 65536 inc
l C0253 is reached at 15000 rpm
C0254 VP ANGLE CTRL 0.400 0.0000 {0.0001} 3.9999 MCTRL
0 Vp angle controller
C0255 THRESHOLD 32768 10 {1 inc} 1800000000 Following error limit P03
P03 0 l 1 rev. = 65536 inc
l Following error > C0255 triggers fault
"P03"
C0260 MPOT1 HIGH 100.0 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 MPOT1
0 Upper limit (condition: C0260 > C0261)
C0261 MPOT1 LOW −100.0 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 MPOT1
Lower limit (condition: C0261 < C0260)
C0262 MPOT1 TIR 10.0 0.1 {0.1 s} 6000.0 MPOT1
Acceleration time
(relating to change 0...100 %)
C0263 MPOT1 TIF 10.0 0.1 {0.1 s} 6000.0 MPOT1
Deceleration time
(based on change 0...100 %)
8.4−12 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0264 MPOT1 0 0 No change MPOT1
ON/OFF 1 Deceleration with Tif to 0% Executable functions if motor potentiometer
2 Deceleration with Tif to C0261 is deactivated via input MPOT1−INACTIVE.
3 Skip with Tif = 0 to 0%
4 Skip with Tif = 0 to C0261
5 Acceleration with Tir to C0260
C0265 MPOT1 INIT 0 0 Value during mains failure MPOT1
1 Lower limit value from C0261 Initialisation
2 0% Value which is accepted during mains
switching and activated motor pot.
C0267 ® Selection list 2 MPOT1
Configuration of digital input signals
1 UP 1000 FIXED0
2 DOWN 1000 FIXED0
C0268 MPOT1−INACT 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 MPOT1
Configuraton of digital input signal
C0269 +
1 (C0267/1)
2 (C0267/2)
3 (C0268)
C0291 SSC OVERRIDE 0 0 {1 rpm} 16000 SSC cutout frequency
Cutout frequency for the transition from
sensorless control to controlled operation
C0292 SSC IM SET 0.00 0.00 {0.01 A} 500.00 SSC Im setpoint
Motor current setpoint.
For sensorless control, set 1.0 ... 1.1−fold rated
motor current.
C0293 SSC DYNAMIC 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.00 SSC dynamic constant
C0294 VP FRQ CTRL ® 0.0 {0.1} 99.9 Vp frequency controller
Proportional gain of frequency controller
C0295 TN FRQ CTRL ® 2 {1 ms} 20000 Tn frequency controller
Adjustment time frequency controller
C0296 DYNAMIC 100 0 {0.1} 32767 Dynamic constant
CONST
C0325 VP2 ADAPT 1.0 0.1 {0.1} 500.0 PCTRL Adpation Vp2
Process controller adaptation gain (Vp2)
C0326 VP3 ADAPT 1.0 0.1 {0.1} 500.0 PCTRL adaptation Vp3
C0327 SET2 ADAPT 100.0 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 PCTRL adaptation nset2
0 Set speed threshold of the process controller
adaptation (condition: C0327 > C0328)
C0328 SET1 ADAPT 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 PCTRL adaptation nset1
Set speed threshold of the process controller
adaptation (condition: C0328 < C0327)
C0329 ADAPT ON/OFF 0 0 No process controller adaptation PCTRL Adaptation on/off
1 External via input Activate process controller adaptation
2 Adaptation via setpoint
3 Adaptation via control difference
C0332 PCTRL TIR 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 PCTRL
Acceleration time Tir
(relating to setpoint change 0...100 %)
C0333 PCTRL TIF 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 PCTRL
Deceleration time Tif
(based on setpoint change 0...100 %)
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−13

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0336 ACT VP + 0.0 {0.1} 500.0 PCTRL
Current Vp
C0337 BI/UNIPOLAR 0 0 Bipolar PCTRL
1 Unipolar Bipolar/unipolar range
C0338 ARIT1 FUNCT 1 0 OUT = IN1 ARIT1
1 OUT = IN1 + IN2 Function selection
2 OUT = IN1 − IN2
3 OUT = IN1 × IN2
4 OUT = IN1 / IN2
5 OUT = IN1/(100% − IN2)
C0339 ® Selection list 1 ARIT1
Configuration − analog input signals
1 ARIT1−IN1 1000 FIXED0%
C0340 + ARIT1
1 (C0339/1) Display of analog input signals
2 (C0339/2)
C0350 CAN ADDRESS 1 1 {1} 63 CAN
System bus node address
l Change becomes effective after ˜reset
node˜ command
C0351 CAN BAUD 0 0 500 kbps CAN
RATE 1 250 kbps System bus baud rate
2 125 kbps l Change becomes effective after ˜reset
3 50 kbps node˜ command
4 1000 kbits/s
C0352 CAN MST 0 0 Slave CAN
1 Master Configuration of system bus nodes
node˜ command
C0353 0 C0350 CAN
1 C0354 CAN−IN / CAN−OUT selection of the system
bus address
1 IN/OUT1 ADR 0 CAN−IN1, CAN−OUT1
C0354 1 {1} 513 CAN
CAN−IN / CAN−OUT node address 2
l Individual addressing of the system bus
process data objects
1 IN1 ADR2 1 CAN−IN1
2 OUT2 ADR2 129 CAN−OUT1
C0355 + 0 {1} 2047 CAN
1 IN1 ID System bus identifiers
2 OUT1 ID
3 IN2 ID
4 OUT2 ID
5 IN3 ID
6 OUT3 ID
8.4−14 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0356 0 {1 ms} 65000 CAN
System bus time settings
1 CAN BOOT UP 3000 Required for CAN interconnection without
master
2 OUT2 CYCLE 0 0 = event−controlled process data transfer
3 OUT3 CYCLE 0 >0 = cyclic process data transfer
4 CAN DELAY 20 When the "Operational" NMT status is
reached (after "Pre−operational" or
"Stopped"), the ˜CANdelay˜ delay time is
started. After the delay time has elapsed, the
PDO´s CAN−OUT2 and CAN−OUT3 are
transmitted for the first time.
C0357 0 {1 ms} 65000 CAN
System bus monitoring times
l After a fault message, the CAN objects
remain in receive position
1 CE1 MONIT 3000 CAN−IN1
TIME
TIME
TIME
C0358 RESET NODE 0 0 No function CAN
1 CAN reset Establish nodal reset pointfor system bus
C0359 CAN STATE + 0 Operational CAN
1 Pre−Operational System bus status
2 Warning
3 Bus off
C0360 + 0 65535 CAN
Telegram counter (number of telegrams)
Count values > 65535: Restart with 0
1 MESSAGE OUT All telegrams sent
2 MESSAGE IN All telegrams received
3 MESSAGE Telegrams sent on CAN−OUT1
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
6 MESSAGE Telegrams sent via parameter channel 1
OUT1
7 MESSAGE Telegrams sent on parameter channel 2
OUT2
8 MESSAGE IN1 Telegrams received from CAN−IN1
11 MESSAGE IN1 Telegrams received from parameter
channel 1
12 MESSAGE IN2 Telegrams received via parameter channel 2
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−15

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0361 + 0.00 {1.00 %} 100.00 CAN
Bus load of system bus
To ensure a perfect operation, the total bus
load (all connected devices) should be less
than 80%
1 LOAD OUT All telegrams sent
2 LOAD IN All telegrams received
3 LOAD OUT1 Telegrams sent on CAN−OUT1
6 LOAD OUT1 Telegrams sent via parameter channel 1
7 LOAD OUT2 Telegrams sent on parameter channel 2
8 LOAD IN1 Telegrams received from CAN−IN1
11 LOAD IN1 Telegrams received from parameter
channel 1
12 LOAD IN2 Telegrams received via parameter channel 2
C0362 SYNC CYCLE 1.000 −32.000 {0.100 32.000 CAN
ms} Time between two sync telegrams on the
system bus
C0363 SYNC CORR 1 1 0.8 ms CAN
2 1.6 ms Correction value for C0362
3 2.4 ms
4 3.2 ms
5 4.0 ms
C0364 CAN ACTIVE 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 CAN
l Switches system bus from
"Pre−operational" to "Operational" via
external signal
C0365 (C0364) + CAN
System bus status
C0366 SYNC 1 0 No sync response CAN
RESPONSE 1 Sync response Response to sync telegram by master
C0367 SYNC RX ID 128 1 {1} 256 CAN
Receive identifier (Rx)
l Sync identifier for grouping for accepting
the data in CAN−IN1
C0368 SYNC TX ID 128 1 {1} 256 CAN
Transmit identifier (Tx)
l Identifier for the generation of a sync
telegram
C0369 SYNC TX TIME 0 0 {1} 65000 CAN
Sync transmission time (Tx)
l Transmission interval of the object set
under C0368
C0400 AIN1−OUT + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 AIN1
Display of the output signal
C0402 OFFSET 19502 FCODE−26/1 ® Selection list 1 AIN1
Offset configuration
C0403 GAIN FCODE−27/1 ® Selection list 1 AIN1
19504 Gain configuration
8.4−16 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0404 + −199.99 199.99 AIN1
1 (C0402) Display of analog input signals
2 (C0403)
C0405 OUT + −199.99 199.99 AIN2
Display of the output signal
C0407 AIN2−OFFSET FCODE−26/2 ® Selection list 1 AIN2
19503 Offset configuration
C0408 AIN2−GAIN FCODE−27/2 ® Selection list 1 AIN2
C0409 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 AIN2
2 (C0408)
C0416 RESOLVER ADJ 0 0 {1} 99999999 Correction of resolver fault
For Lenze motors read out resolver errors
from nameplate
C0420 ENCODER 512 1 {1 8192 l Encoder constant for encoder input X8 in
CONST inc/rev} increments per revolution
l If an absolute value encoder is selected in
C0025, an SD7 trip is triggered when the
encoder constant is changed.
C0421 ENC VOLTAGE 5.00 5.00 {0.1 V} 8.00 Encoder voltage
Set size of voltage for encoder
l PLEASE NOTE: incorrect entry can destroy
encoder
C0425 DFIN CONST 3 0 256 inc/rev DFIN
1 512 inc/rev Number of Increments of the digital
2 1024 inc/rev frequency input
3 2048 inc/rev
4 4096 inc/rev
5 8192 inc/rev
6 16384 inc/rev
C0426 DFIN−OUT + −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 Output signal of DFIN
C0427 DFIN 0 0 2 phases DFIN
FUNCTION 1 A pulse / B direction of rotation (right) Selection of the digital frequency signal
2 Pulse A or B
C0429 TP5 DELAY 0 −32767 {1 inc} 32767 DFSET, DFRFG
Dead time compensation for the touch probe
function
C0431 IN 5001 MCTRL−NACT ® Selection list 1 AOUT1
Configuration of analog input signal
C0432 OFFSET 19512 FCODE−109/1 ® Selection list 1 AOUT1
C0433 GAIN 19510 FCODE−108/1 ® Selection list 1 AOUT1
Gain configuration
C0434 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 AOUT1
2 (C0432)
3 (C0433)
C0436 IN 5002 MCTRL−MSET2 ® Selection list 1 AOUT2
Gain configuration
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−17

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0439 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 AOUT2
2 (C0437)
3 (C0438)
C0440 STATE−BUS 1000 ® Selection list 2 Configuration of state bus X5/ST

C0441 (C0440) +
C0443 DIGIN−OUT + 0 {1} 255 Signals at X5/E1 to X5/E5, decimal value
l Binary interpretation indicates terminal
signals
C0444 (C0118) + 0 1
C0450 NX 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 BRK1
C0451 SET 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 BRK1
C0452 SIGN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 BRK1
C0458 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 BRK1
2 (C0452)
C0459 (C0451) + BRK1
Display of digital input signal
C0464 CUSTOMER I/F + 0 original Customer interface
1 changed Status of selected basic configuration
l Reassignment of terminals in a basic
configuration from C0005 does not
change C0005 and sets C0464 = 1.
l Adding or removing of function blocks or
changing the signal flow among the
function blocks in a basic configuration of
C0005 sets C0005 = 0 and C0464= 1
8.4−18 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0465 FB LIST ® ® Selection list 5 FB processing list
Includes the program for signal processing
1 200 (sequence in which the function blocks are
processed)
2 0 à Depending on C0005. Change of C0005
3 50 loads assigned processing list
à Valid for C0005 = 1000
4 0
l After changing the signal flow the
5 0 processing list must be adapted.
6 55 Otherwise the device may work with
wrong signals!
7 0 l The function blocks DIGIN, DIGOUT,
8 0 AIF−IN, CAN−IN, and MCTRL are always
9 10250 processed and do not have to be entered
in the list.
10 0
11 0
12 0
13 5650
14 0
15 0
16 5050
... 0
19 5700
... 0
22 10650
... 0
25 70
.. 0
28 75
... 0
31 250
... 0
41 25000
42 20000
... 0
49 0
50 0
C0466 CPU T REMAIN + Remaining process time
For processing function blocks
C0469 KEY 2 0 switched off set function of the STOP key on the keypad
STOPFUNCTIO 1 set controller inhibit
N 2 set quick stop
C0470 0 {1} 255 Freely configurable code for digital signals
0 FCODE 8BIT 0 l Data words C0470 and C0471 are in
DIGITAL parallel and identical
1 FCODE BIT 0−7 0
2 FCODE BIT8−15 0
3 FCODE 0
BIT16−23
4 FCODE 0
BIT24−31
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−19

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0471 FCODE 32 BIT 0 0 {1} 4294967296 FCODE 32 bits digital
Freely configurable code for digital signals
l Data words C0470 and C0471 are in
parallel and identical
C0472 FCODE −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Freely configurable code for relative analog
ANALOG signals
1 0.00
2 0.00
3 100.0
0
6 100.0
0
... ...
19 0.00
20 0.00
C0473 FCODE ABS −32767 {1} 32767 FCODE
1 1 Freely configurable code for absolute analog
signals
2 1
3 0
... ...
9 0
10 0
C0474 FCODE PH −2147483648 {1} 2147483647 FCODE
1 0 Freely configurable code for angle singals
1 rev. = 65536 inc
... ...
5 0
C0475 FCODE DF −16000 {1 rpm} 16000 FCODE
Freely configurable code for angular
1 0
difference singals
2 0 1 rev. = 65536 inc
C0490 FEEDBACK POS 0 Position feedback system
Feedback system for the position controller
0 Resolver at X7 The feedback system can be combined with
the settings C0495 = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4.
1 Encoder TTL at X8 The selection also sets C0495 to the same
2 Sin/cos encoder at X8 value.
3 Hiperface absolute value encoder

singleturn at X8
4 Hiperface absolute value encoder
multiturn at X8
C0495 FEEDBACK N 0 Speed feedback system
Feedback system for the speed controller
0 Resolver at X7 The feedback system can be combined with
the settings C0490 = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4.
l The rotor displacement angle in C0058 is
set to −90°.
2 Encoder sin at X8 value.
3 Absolute ST at X8
4 Absolute MT at X8
8.4−20 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0497 NACT−FILTER 2.0 0.0 {0.1 ms} 50.0 Nact filter time constant
Time constant for actual speed
C0497 = 0 ms: Switched off
C0517 0.00 {0.01} 1999.00 User menu
1 USER MENU 51.00 C0051/0 MCTRL−NACT Up to 32 entries
l Under the subcodes the numbers of the
2 USER MENU 54.00 C0054/0 Imot desired code are entered.
3 USER MENU 56.00 C0056/0 MCTRL−MSET2 l The input is effected in the format xxx.yy
4 USER MENU 46.00 C0046/0 N – xxx: Code number
– yy: Subcode number
5 USER MENU 49.00 C0049/0 NADD l It is not checked whether the code entered
6 USER MENU 183.0 C0183/0 Diagnostics exists.
0
7 USER MENU 168.0 C0168/1 Fail no. act
1
8 USER MENU 86.00 C0086/0 Mot type
9 USER MENU 22.00 C0022/0 Imax current
10 USER MENU 5.00 C005/0 signal cfg
11 USER MENU 11.00 C0011/0 Nmax
12 USER MENU 12.00 C0012/0 Tir
13 USER MENU 13.00 C0013/0 Tif
14 USER MENU 105.0 C0105/0 QSP Tif
0
15 USER MENU 39.01 C0039/1 JOG setpoint
16 USER MENU 70.00 C0070/0 Vp speed CTRL
17 USER MENU 71.00 C0071/0 Tn speed CTRL
18 USER MENU 0 not assigned
... ... 0 not assigned
31 USER MENU 94.00 C0094/0 Password
32 USER MENU 3.00 C0003/0 Par save
C0520 IN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 DFSET
Input signal configuration
C0521 VP−DIV 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 DFSET
Configuration of gain factor − numerator
C0522 RAT−DIV 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 DFSET
Configuration of gearbox factor − numerator
C0523 A−TRIM 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 DFSET
Configuration of phase trimming
C0524 N−TRIM 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 DFSET
Speed trimming of DFSET
C0525 0−PULSE 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 DFSET
Configuration of one−time zero pulse
activation
C0526 RESET 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 DFSET
Reset integrators
C0527 SET 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 DFSET
Configuration − set integrators
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−21

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0528 + −2.109 {1} 2.109 DFSET
1 0−PULSE A Angular difference between 2 zero pulses
2 OFFSET Offset results from C0523 × C0529 + C0252
3 PULSE DIST SET Number of increments between two set
pulses at X5/E5.
Code is available from software version 6.2.
4 PULSE DIST ACT Number of increments between two actual
pulses at X5/E4.
C0529 MULTIP OFFSET 1 −20000 {1} 20000 Offset multiplier
C0530 DF 0 0 With gearbox factor DFSET
EVALUATION 1 Without gearbox factor Evaluation of the digital frequency
C0531 ACT 0 DIV 1 1 {1} 16384 DFSET actual zero pulse scaler
C0532 0−PULSE/TP 1 1 0−pulse DFSET zero pulse/touch probe
2 Touch probe Selection of zero pulse, touch probe, or zero
3 0 pulse and touch probe pulse and touch probe
C0533 VP DENOM 1 1 {1} 32767 DFSET Vp denominator
Gain factor denominator
C0534 SYNC MODE 0 0 Inactive DFSET
1 Continuous Mode for synchronising the zero pulse and/or
2 Continuously switchable touch probe
10 Once, fast way
11 Once, + direction
12 Once, − direction
13 Once, 2 × zero pulse
C0535 SET 0 DIV 1 1 {1} 16384 DFSET
Setpoint zero pulse divider
C0536 + −32767 {1} 32767 DFSET
2 (C0522)
3 (C0523)
C0537 (C0524) + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 DFSET
Display of analog input signal
C0538 + DFSET
1 (C0525) Display of digital input signals
2 (C0526)
3 (C0527)
C0539 (C0520) + −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 DFSET
Input signal display
C0540 FUNCTION 2 0 Analog input DFOUT
1 Phase difference input Function of the encoder outputs
2 Resolver simulation + zero pulse
3 Resolver simulation without zero pulse
4 X10 = X9
5 X10 = X8
C0541 AN−IN 5001 MCTRL−NACT ® Selection list 1 DFOUT
Configuration of analog input
C0542 DF−IN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 DFOUT
Configuration of the dig. frequency input
C0544 SYN−RDY 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 DFOUT
Synchronisation signal for the zero pulse
C0545 PH OFFSET 0 0 {1 inc} 65535 DFOUT
Angular offset
8.4−22 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0546 PULSE MIN SET 1000 1 {1 inc} 2147483647 DFSET
Masking (suppressing) interference pulses at
X5/E5 (set pulse of touch probe signal).
The size of the masking window between
two set pulses is set.
C0547 (C0541) + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 DFOUT
C0548 (C0544) + 0 1 DFOUT
C0549 (C0542) + −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 DFOUT
C0551 PULSE MIN ACT 1000 1 {1 inc} 2147483647 DFSET
Masking (suppressing) interference pulses at
X5/E4 (actual pulse of touch probe signal).
The size of the masking window between
two actual pulses is set.
C0560 FIX SET−VALUE −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Fixed setpoints
1 100
2 75
3 50
4 25
5 0
... ...
15 0
C0561 AIN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 FIXSET1
C0562 ® Selection list 2 FIXSET1
1 IN1 1000 FIXED0
2 IN2 1000 FIXED0
3 IN3 1000 FIXED0
4 IN4 1000 FIXED0
C0563 (C0561) + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 FIXSET1
C0564 + FIXSET1
1 (C0562/1) Display of digital input signals
... ...
4 (C0562/4)
C0570 IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 S&H1
C0571 LOAD 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 S&H1 LOAD
C0572 (C0570) + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 S&H1
C0573 (C0571) + S&H1 LOAD
C0575 SD8 FILTER 1 0 {1 ms} 200 SD8 monitoring
Tripping delay of error message SD8
C0576 100.0 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 nErr monitoringspeed window
0 Setting of the system deviation between
actual speed value and speed setpoint
C0577 VP FLD WEAK 3.00 0.00 {0.01} 15.99 Field weakening controller
Vpgain
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−23

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0578 TN FLD WEAK 50.0 2.0 {0.5 ms} 8192.0 Field weakening controller
Reset time Tn
C0579 MONIT NERR 3 0 Trip NEERmonitoring
1 Message Configuration of "system deviation between
2 Warning actual speed value and speed setpoint"
3 Off monitoring
C0580 MONIT SD8 3 0 Trip SD8 monitoring
3 Off Configuration of "Encoder error at X8"
monitoring
C0581 MONIT EER 0 0 Trip EEr monitoring
1 Message Configuration of "external fault" monitoring
2 Warning
3 Off
C0582 MONIT OH4 2 2 Warning OH4monitoring
3 Off Configuration of heatsink temperature
monitoring
C0583 MONIT OH3 ® 0 Trip OH3 monitoring
2 Warning Configuration of "fixed motor temperature"
3 Off monitoring
C0584 MONIT OH7 ® 2 Warning OH7monitoring
3 Off Configuration of "adjustable motor
temperature"monitoring
Temperature monitoring via resolver input
C0585 MONIT OH8 3 0 Trip OH8 monitoring
2 Warning Configuration of "adjustable motor
3 Off temperature" monitoring
Temperature monitoring via PTC input
2 Warning Configuration of resolver monitoring
3 Off
2 Warning Configuration of "encoder at X9" monitoring
3 Off
C0588 MONIT 0 0 Trip H10 / H11 monitoring
H10/H11 2 Warning Setting C0588 = 2 or C0588 = 3 only allowed
3 Off for Lenze service
C0589 MONIT P03 2 0 Trip P03monitoring
2 Warning Configuration of following error monitoring
3 Off l The following error is monitored by the
DFSET function block. The monitoring is
only active if DFSET is used.
C0590 MONIT P13 0 0 Trip P13 monitoring
2 Warning Configuration of angle error monitoring
3 Off l The following error is monitored by the
DFSET function block. The monitoring is
only active if DFSET is used.
C0591 MONIT CE1 3 0 Trip CE1 monitoring
2 Warning Configuration of "CAN−IN1 fault" monitoring
3 Off
C0592 MONIT CE2 3 0 Trip CE2monitoring
2 Warning Configuration of "CAN−IN2 error" monitoring
3 Off
3 Off
8.4−24 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0594 MONIT SD6 ® 0 Trip SD6monitoring
2 Warning Configuration of "motor temperature sensor"
3 Off monitoring
C0595 MONIT CE4 3 0 Trip CE4monitoring
2 Warning Configuration of "CAN bus off" monitoring
3 Off
C0596 NMAX LIMIT 5500 0 {1 rpm} 16000 System speed monitoring
C0597 MONIT LP1 3 0 Trip LP1monitoring
2 Warning Configuration of motor phase failure
3 Off monitoring
C0598 MONIT SD5 3 0 Trip SD5monitoring
2 Warning Configuration monitoring master current at
3 Off X5/1.2 < 2mA
C0599 LIMIT LP 1 5.0 1.0 {0.1 %} 10.0 LP1monitoring
Current limit value for motor phase
monitoring
C0600 FUNCTION 1 0 OUT = IN1 ARIT2
2 OUT = IN1 − IN2
3 OUT = IN1 × IN2
4 OUT = IN1 / IN2
5 OUT = IN1/(100% − IN2)
C0601 IN ® Selection list 1 ARIT2
1 1000 FIXED0% ARIT2−IN1
C0602 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 ARIT2
2 (C0601/2)
C0606 MONIT OC8 2 0 Trip Configuration of the I2 × t advance warning
2 Warning The threshold is set in C0127.
3 Off
C0610 IN ® Selection list ADD
1 Configuration − analog input signals
1 1000 FIXED0% ADD1−IN1
C0611 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 ADD
2 (C0610/2)
3 (C0610/3)
C0620 DB1 GAIN 1.00 −10.00 {0.01} 10.00 DB1 gain
Gain of dead band component DB1
C0621 DB1 VALUE 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 DB1 dead band
Dead band of DB1
C0622 DB1−IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 DB1
C0623 (C0622) + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 DB1
C0630 MAX LIMIT 100.0 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 LIM upper limit
0 Upper limit of limiter LIM1
C0631 MIN LIMIT −100.0 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 LIM lower limit
Lower limit of limiter LIM1
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−25

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0632 LIM−IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 LIM1
C0633 (C0632) + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 LIM1
C0640 DELAY T 20.00 0.01 {0.01 s} 50.00 PT1−1
Setting of the time constant
C0641 PT1−1−IN 1000 FIXED0% à Selection list 1 PT1−1
C0642 (C0641) + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 PT1−1
C0650 DT1−1 GAIN 1.000 −320.00 {0.01} 320.00 DT1−1
Gain
C0651 DELAY T 1.000 0.005 {0.001 s} 5.000 DT1−1
Time constant
C0652 IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 DT1−1
C0653 SENSIBILITY 1 1 15−bit DT1−1
2 14−bit Sensitivity
3 13−bit
4 12−bit
5 11−bit
6 10−bit
7 9−bit
C0654 (C0652) + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99
C0655 NUMERATOR 1 −32767 {1} 32767 CONV5
Numerator
C0656 DENOMINATO 1 1 {1} 32767 CONV5
R Denominator
C0657 IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 CONV5
C0658 (C0657) + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 CONV5
C0661 IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 ABS1
Input for absolute value generators
C0662 (C0661) + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 ABS1
C0671 RFG1 TIR 0.000 0.000 {0.01 s} 999.900 RFG1
C0672 RFG1 TIF 0.000 0.000 {0.01 s} 999.900 RFG1
C0673 IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 RFG1
C0674 SET 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 RFG1
C0675 LOAD 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 RFG1
C0676 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 RFG1
2 (C0674)
C0677 (C0675) + RFG1
8.4−26 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0680 FUNCTION 6 1 IN1 = IN 2 CMP1
2 IN 1 > IN2 Selection of the function on how the inputs
3 IN 1 < IN2 IN1 and IN2 are to be compared
4 |IN1| = |IN2|
5 |IN1| > |IN2|
6 |IN1| < |IN2|
C0681 HYSTERESIS 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 CMP1
Hysteresis
C0682 WINDOW 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 CMP1
Window
C0683 ® Selection list 1 CMP1
1 CMP1−IN1 5001 MCTRL−NACT
2 CMP1−IN2 19500 FCODE−17
C0684 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 CMP1
2 (C0683/1)
C0685 FUNCTION 1 1 IN1 = IN2 CMP2
4 |IN1| = |IN2|
5 |IN1| > |IN2|
6 |IN1| < |IN2|
C0686 HYSTERESIS 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 CMP2
Hysteresis
C0687 WINDOW 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 CMP2
Window
1 CMP2−IN1 1000 FIXED0%
C0689 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 CMP2
2 (C0688/2)
4 |IN1| = |IN2|
5 |IN1| > |IN2|
6 |IN1| < |IN2|
C0691 HYSTERESIS 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 CMP3
Hysteresis
C0692 WINDOW 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 CMP3
Window
C0694 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 CMP3
2 (C0693/2)
C0695 FUNCTION 2 1 IN 1 < IN2 PHCMP1
2 |IN1| < |IN2| Selection of the function on how the inputs
IN1 and IN2 are to be compared
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−27

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0697 ® Selection list 3 PHCMP1
1 IN 1000 FIXED0INC
2 IN 1000 FIXED0INC
C0698 + −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 PHCMP1
1 (C0697/1) Display of input signals
2 (C0697/2)
C0700 IN 19523 FCODE−472/3 ® Selection list 1 ANEG1
C0701 (C0700) + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99
C0703 IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 ANEG2
C0704 (C0703) + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99
C0710 FUNCTION 0 0 Rising edge TRANS1
1 Falling edge Signal evaluation
2 Both edges In the case of a corresponding signal edge at
IN, OUT switches to HIGH
C0711 PULSE T 0.001 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 TRANS1
Pulse time of TRANS1
C0713 IN 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 TRANS1−IN
C0714 (C0713) + TRANS1−IN
1 Falling edge Signal evaluation
2 Both edges In the case of a corresponding signal edge at
IN, OUT switches to HIGH
C0716 PULSE T 0.001 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 TRANS2
Pulse duration
C0718 IN 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 TRANS2
C0719 (C0718) + TRANS2
C0720 FUNCTION 2 0 On delay DIGDEL1
1 Off delay Function selection
2 On/off delay
C0721 DELAY T 1.000 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 DIGDEL1
Setting of the delay time
C0723 IN 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 DIGDEL1
C0724 (C0723) + DIGDEL1
2 On/off delay
C0726 DELAY T 1.000 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 DIGDEL2
C0729 (C0728) + DIGDEL2
C0730 OSZ MODUS 0 0 Start measurement OSZ
1 Stop measurement Start / stop of the measured value recording
8.4−28 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0731 OSZ STATUS 0 0 Measurement completed OSZ
1 Measurement active Current operating status
2 Trigger detected
3 Abort
4 Abort after trigger
5 Read memory
C0732 ® Selection list 1 OSZ
1 CHANNEL1 1000 FIXED0%
1 TRIG INP 1000 FIXED0 Trigger input
C0734 TRIG−SOURCE 1 0 Digital trigger input OSZ
1 Measuring channel 1 Selection of trigger source
2 Measuring channel 2
C0735 TRIGGER−LEVEL 0 −32767 {1} 32767 OSZ
Set trigger level for channels 1 ... 4
C0736 TRIGGER−SLOPE 0 0 LOW−HIGH edge OSZ
1 HIGH−LOW edge Selection of the trigger edge
C0737 TRIGGER DELAY 0.0 −100.0 {0.1 %} 999.9 OSZ
Setting of pretriggering and posttriggering
C0738 PROBE PERIOD 3 3 1 ms OSZ
4 2 ms Selection of the sampling period
5 5 ms
6 10 ms
7 20 ms
8 50 ms
9 100 ms
10 200 ms
11 500 ms
12 1s
13 2s
14 5s
15 10 s
16 20 s
17 50 s
18 1 min
19 2 min
20 5 min
21 10 min
C0739 NUMBER OF 4 1 {1} 4 OSZ
CHANNELS Number of channels to be measured
C0740 DATA READ 0 OSZ
1 0 0 {1} 65535 Define the starting point for reading the data
memory. This enables a selective access to a
memory block
2 0 0 Inhibit "Read data" Inhibit "Read memory"
1 Enable "Read data"
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−29

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0741 OSZ
1 VERSION OSZ + Version
2 LENGTH Memory size
MEMORY
3 DATA WIDTH Data width
4 NO. CHANNELS Number of channels
C0742 LENGTH OF DB + OSZ
Show data block length
C0743 READ DB + OSZ
Reading an 8 byte data block
C0744 MEM: DEPTH 2048 0 512 measured values OSZ
1 1024 measured values Adapt memory depth to the measuring task
2 1536 measured values
C0749 + OSZ
1 BRK:OFF INDEX Information on the storage of the measured
values
2 TRIGGER INDEX
3 END INDEX
C0750 VP DENOM 16 1 Vp = 1 DFRFG1
2 Vp = 1/2 Denominator of the position controller gain
4 Vp = 1/4
8 Vp = 1/8
16 Vp = 1/16
34 Vp = 1/32
64 Vp = 1/64
128 Vp = 1/128
256 Vp = 1/256
512 Vp = 1/512
1024 Vp = 1/1024
2048 Vp = 1/2048
4096 Vp = 1/4096
8192 Vp = 1/8192
16384 Vp = 1/16384
C0751 DFRFG1 TIR 1.000 0.001 {0.001 s} 999.900 DFRFG1
Tir (acceleration time)
C0752 MAX SPEED 3000 1 {1 rpm} 16000 DFRFG1
Maximum speed (here: maximum
compensation speed)
C0753 DFRFG1 QSP 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 DFRFG1
Deceleration time Tif for activation of the
deceleration ramp
C0754 PH ERROR 2.109 10 {1 inc} 2.109 DFRFG1
Following error
C0755 SYN WINDOW 100 0 {1 inc} 65535 DFRFG1
Synchronisation window
C0756 OFFSET 0 −1.109 {1 inc} 1.109 DFRFG1
Offset
C0757 FUNCTION 0 0 TP start inactive DFRFG1
1 TP start active Function
C0758 IN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 DFRFG1
C0759 QSP 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 DFRFG1
8.4−30 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0760 STOP 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 DFRFG1−STOP
"Ramp function generator stop"
C0761 RESET 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 DFRFG1
Reset integrators
C0764 + DFRFG1
2 (C0760)
3 (C0761)
C0765 (C0758) + −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 DFRFG1
C0766 SPEED DIR 1 1 both directions (cw/ccw) DFRFG1
2 positive direction only (cw) Define direction of rotation
3 negative direction only (ccw)
C0770 D 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 FLIP1
Data input
C0771 CLK 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 FLIP1
Configuration of clock input signal
C0772 CLR 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 FLIP1
Configuration of reset input signal
C0773 + FLIP1
2 (C0771)
3 (C0772)
Data input
C0778 + FLIP1
2 (C0776)
3 (C0777)
C0780 N 50 AIN1−OUT ® Selection list 1 NSET
Configuration of input signal for main
setpoint
C0781 N−INV 10251 R/L/Q−R/L ® Selection list 2 NSET
setpoint inversion
C0782 NADD 5650 ASW1−OUT ® Selection list 1 NSET
Configuration of input signal for additional
setpoint
C0783 NADD−INV 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 NSET
Configuration of inversion of additional
setpoint
C0784 CINH−VAL 5001 MCTRL−NACT ® Selection list 1 NSET
Configuration of output signal with inhibited
controller
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−31

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0785 SET 5000 MCTRL−NSET2 ® Selection list 1 NSET
Configuration of input signal for ramp
function generator
C0786 LOAD 5001 MCTRL−QSP−OUT ® Selection list 2 NSET
Load configuration of digital input signal for
ramp function generator
C0787 ® Selection list 2 NSET
Configuration of JOG selection and JOG
1 JOG*1 53 DIGIN3 activation
Binary interpretation
2 JOG*2 1000 FIXED0
3 JOG*4 1000 FIXED0
4 JOG*8 1000 FIXED0
Configuration of Ti selection and Ti activation
1 TI*1 1000 FIXED0 l Binary interpretation
l Tir and Tif are identical
2 TI*2 1000 FIXED0
3 TI*4 1000 FIXED0
4 TI*8 1000 FIXED0
C0789 RFG−0 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 NSET
Configuration of digital input signal (ramp
function generator 0)
C0790 RFG−STOP 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 NSET
function generator stop)
C0798 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 NSET
1 CINH−VAL Display of analog input signals
2 SET
C0799 + NSET
1 (781) Display of digital input signals
2 (783)
3 (786)
4 (787/1)
5 (787/2)
6 (787/3)
7 (787/4)
8 (788/1)
9 (788/2)
10 (788/3)
11 (788/4)
12 (789)
13 (790)
C0800 SET 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 PCTRL1
Configuration − setpoint input signal
C0801 ACT 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 PCTRL1
Configuration of actual value input signal
C0802 INFLU 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 PCTRL1
Configuration of evaluation input signal
C0803 ADAPT 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 PCTRL1
Configuration − adaptation input signal
C0804 INACT 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 PCTRL1
Configuration − inactivation input signal
8.4−32 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0805 I−OFF 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 PCTRL1
Configuration of digital input signal
(switch−off I component)
C0808 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 PCTRL1
2 (C0801)
3 (C0802)
4 (C0803)
C0809 + PCTRL1
2 (C0805)
C0810 ® Selection list 1 ASW1
1 IN 55 AIN2−OUT
2 IN 1000 FIXED0%
C0811 SET 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 ASW1
C0812 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 ASW1
2 (C0810/2)
C0813 (C0811) + ASW1
1 IN 1000 FIXED0%
2 IN 1000 FIXED0%
C0817 + −199.99 {0.01%} 199.99 ASW2
2 (C0815/2)
C0818 (C0816) + ASW2
C0820 ® Selection list 2 AND1
1 IN 1000 FIXED0
2 IN 1000 FIXED0
3 IN 1000 FIXED0
C0821 + AND1
2 (C0820/2)
3 (C0820/3)
C0822 1000 ® Selection list 2 AND2
Configuration of digital inputs
1 IN 1000 FIXED0
2 IN 1000 FIXED0
3 IN 1000 FIXED0
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−33

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0823 + AND2
2 (C0822/2)
3 (C0822/3)
1 IN 1000 FIXED0
2 IN 1000 FIXED0
3 IN 1000 FIXED0
C0825 + AND3
2 (C0824/2)
3 (C0824/3)
1 IN 1000 FIXED0
2 IN 1000 FIXED0
3 IN 1000 FIXED0
C0827 + AND4
2 (C0826/2)
3 (C0826/3)
1 IN 1000 FIXED0
2 IN 1000 FIXED0
3 IN 1000 FIXED0
C0829 + AND5
2 (C0828/2)
3 (C0828/3)
C0830 ® Selection list 2 OR1
1 IN 1000 FIXED0
2 IN 1000 FIXED0
3 IN 1000 FIXED0
C0831 + OR1
2 (C083021)
3 (C0830/3)
1 IN 1000 FIXED0
2 IN 1000 FIXED0
3 IN 1000 FIXED0
C0833 + OR2
2 (C0832/2)
3 (C0832/3)
8.4−34 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

1 IN 1000 FIXED0
2 IN 1000 FIXED0
3 IN 1000 FIXED0
C0835 + OR3
2 (C0834/2)
3 (C0834/3)
1 IN 1000 FIXED0
2 IN 1000 FIXED0
3 IN 1000 FIXED0
C0837 + OR4
2 (C0836/2)
3 (C0836/3)
1 IN 1000 FIXED0 OR5−IN1
C0839 + OR5
2 (C0838/2)
3 (C0838/3)
C0840 IN 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 NOT1
C0841 (C0840) + NOT1
C0843 (C0842) + NOT2
C0845 (C0844) + NOT3
C0847 (C0846) + NOT4
C0849 (C0848) + NOT5
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−35

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0850 ® Selection list 1 AIF−OUT
Configuration process output words for
1 OUT.W1 1000 FIXED0% automation interface AIF (X1)
2 OUT.W2 1000 FIXED0%

C0851 OUT.D1 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 AIF−OUT
Configuration of 32−bit angle information
C0852 TYPE OUT.W2 0 0 Analog signal AIF−OUT
1 Digital 0−15 Configuration of process output word 2 for
2 D1: LOW angle automation interface AIF (X1)
3 D2: HIGH angle
1 Digital 16−31 Configuration − process output word 3 for
2 High phase automation interface AIF (X1)
3 D2: LOW phase Configuration process output word 1 for
automation interface AIF (X1)
C0855 + AIF
1 IN (0−15) Bit 00 {1} Bit15 Process input words hexadecimal for
automation interface X1
2 IN (16−31) 16 bit {1} Bit 31
C0856 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 AIF−IN
1 IN.W1 Decimal process input words
Display: 100.00 % = 16384
2 IN.W2
3 IN.W3
C0857 IN.D1 + −2147483648 {1} 2147483647 AIF−IN
32−bit phase information
C0858 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 AIF−OUT
1 OUT.W1 Process output words
Display: 100 % = 16384
2 OUT.W2
3 OUT.W3
C0859 OUT.D1 + −2147483648 {1} 2147483647 AIF−OUT
C0860 ® Selection list 1 AIF

1 OUT1.W1 5001
2 OUT1.W2 1000 FIXED0%
10 OUT3.W3 1000 FIXED0%
11 OUT3.W4 1000 FIXED0%

1 OUT1.D1 1000 FIXED0INC
8.4−36 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0863 + 0 1 AIF
1 IN1 (0−15)
2 IN1 (16−31)
3 IN2 (0−15)
4 IN2 (16−31)
5 IN3 (0−15)
6 IN3 (16−31)
C0864 0 Analog signal CAN
1 TYPEOUT1.W2 0 1 Digital 0−15 Configuration of process output words for
2 LOW angle system bus (CAN)
2 TYPEOUT2.W1 0
3 TYPEOUT3.W1 0
2 High phase system bus (CAN)
2 TYPEOUT2.W2 0
3 TYPEOUT3.W2 0
C0866 + −32768.00 {0.01%} 32767.00 CAN
1 IN1.W1
2 IN1.W2
3 IN1.W3
4 IN2.W1
5 IN2.W2
6 IN2.W3
7 IN2.W4
8 IN3.W1
9 IN3.W2
10 IN3.W3
11 IN3.W4
C0867 + CAN
1 IN1.D1
2 IN2.D1
3 IN3.D1
C0868 + −199.99 {0.01%} 199.99 CAN
1 OUT1.W1
2 OUT1.W2
3 OUT1.W3
4 OUT2.W1
5 OUT2.W2
6 OUT2.W3
7 OUT2.W4
8 OUT3.W1
9 OUT3.W2
10 OUT3.W3
11 OUT3.W4
C0869 + −2147483648 {1} 2147483647 CAN
1 OUT1.D1
2 OUT2.D1
3 OUT3.D1
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−37

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0870 ® Selection list 2 DCTRL
Configuration of digital input signals (inhibit
1 CINH1 1000 FIXED0 controller)
2 CINH2 1000 FIXED0

C0871 TRIP−SET 54 DIGIN4 ® Selection list 2 DCTRL
C0876 TRIP−RES 55 DIGIN5 ® Selection list 2 DCTRL
C0878 + DCTRL
2 (C0870/2)
3 (C0871)
4 (C0876)
C0879 0 No reset DCTRL
1 RESET C135 0 1 Reset Reset control words
2 RESET AIF 0
3 RESET CAN 0
1 PAR*1 1000 FIXED0 Configuration of digital input signals
2 PAR*2 1000 FIXED0
C0881 PAR−LOAD 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 DCTRL
C0884 + DCTRL
1 PAR*1 Display of digital input signals
2 PAR*2
3 PAR−LOAD
C0885 R 51 DIGIN1 ® Selection list 2 R/L/Q
Configuraton of digital input signal(CW
rotation)
C0886 L 52 DIGIN2 ® Selection list 2 R/L/Q
Configuraton of digital input signal(CCW
rotation)
C0889 + R/L/Q
2 (C0886)
C0890 N−SET 5050 NSET−NOUT ® Selection list 1 MCTRL
Configuration of input signal for speed
setpoint
C0891 M−ADD 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MCTRL
Configuration of input signal for torque
setpoint
C0892 LO−M−LIM 5700 ANEG1−OUT ® Selection list 1 MCTRL
Configuration of input signal for lower torque
limit
C0893 HI−M−LIM 19523 FCODE−472/3 ® Selection list 1 MCTRL
Configuration of input signal for upper
torque limit
C0894 PHI−SET 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 MCTRL
Configuration of input signal for rotor
position setpoint
C0895 PHI−LIM 1006 FIXED100% ® Selection list 1 MCTRL
Configuration of input signal for angle
controller limit
8.4−38 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0896 N2−LIM 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MCTRL
Configuration of input signal for 2. speed
limitation value
C0897 PHI−ON 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 MCTRL
Configuration of switch−on signal for angle
controller
C0898 FLD−WEAK 1006 FIXED100% ® Selection list 1 MCTRL
Configuration of input signal for field
weakening
C0899 N/M−SWT 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 MCTRL
Configuration of input signal for change−over
between n and M control
C0900 QSP 10250 R/L/Q−QSP ® Selection list 2 MCTRL
Configuration of control signal for activation
C0901 I−SET 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MCTRL
Configuration of input signal for loading the I
component for the speed controller
C0902 I−LOAD 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 MCTRL
Configuration of tripping signal for loading
the I component for the speed controller
C0903 P−ADAPT 1006 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MCTRL
Configuration of input signal for adaptation
of the angle controller
C0906 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 MCTRL
2 (C0891)
3 (C0892)
4 (C0893)
5 (C0895)
6 (C0896)
7 (C0898)
8 (C0901)
9 (C0903)
C0907 + MCTRL
2 (C0899)
3 (C0900)
4 (C0902)
C0908 (C0894) + −2147483647 {1 inc} 2147483647 Set phase signal
l 1 rev. = 65536 inc
C0909 SPEED LIMIT 1 1 +/− 175 % Limitation of direction of rotation for the
2 0 ... +175 % speed setpoint
3 −175 ... 0 %
C0920 REF−ON 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 REF
Activation of homing function
C0921 REF−MARK 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 REF
Digital reference switch
C0922 REF−PHI−IN 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 REF
Configuration of angle input signal
C0923 REF−N−IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 REF
Configuration of speed input signal
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−39

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0924 REF−POS−LOAD 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 REF
Control "set position"
C0925 REF−ACTPOS−IN 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 REF
Configuration of input signal for "Set
position"
C0926 + −2147483647 {1 inc} 2147483647 REF
1 REF−ACTPOS−IN Display of input signals
2 REF−PHI−IN
3 REF−ACTPOS Actual position
4 REF−TARGET Target position
C0927 + REF
1 REF−ON Display of digital input signals
2 REF−MARK
3 REF−POS−LOAD
C0928 REF−PHI−IN + −2147483647 {1 inc} 2147483647 REF
Angle signal (following error)
l 1 rev. = 65536 inc
C0929 REF−N−IN + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 REF
C0930 REF−GEARBOX 1 1 {1} 65535 REF
MOT Encoder/gearbox factor − numerator (on the
motor side)
C0931 REF−GEARBOX 1 1 {1} 65535 REF
ENC Encoder/gearbox factor − denominator (on
the encoder side)
C0932 REF MODE 0 REF
Homing function mode
0 Mode 0 Positive direction, reference switch, zero
pulse
1 Mode 1 Negative direction, reference switch, zero
pulse
6 Mode 6 Positive direction, reference switch, touch
probe
7 Mode 7 Negative direction, reference switch, touch
probe
8 Mode 8 Positive direction, touch probe
9 Mode 9 Negative direction, touch probe
20 Mode 20 Direct homing
21 Mode 21 Direct homing, save actual value
C0933 REF TRANS 0 0 Rising edge REF
1 Falling edge Reference signal edge
C0934 REF OFFSET 0 −2140000000 {1 inc} 2140000000 REF
Home position offset
C0935 REF SPEED 2.000 0.0001 {0.0001 100.0000 REF
0 %} Homing speed
Homing speed
The value set is the percentage value of Nmax
C0936 REF TI 1.00 0.01 {0.01 s} 990.00 REF
Homing acceleration/deceleration time
Tir and Tif are identical
C0940 NUMERATOR 1 −32767 {1} 32767 CONV1
Numerator
8.4−40 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

R Denominator
C0942 CONV1−IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 CONV1
C0943 (C0942) + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 CONV1
C0945 NUMERATOR 1 −32767 {1} 32767 CONV2
Numerator
R Denominator
C0948 (C0947) + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 CONV2
C0950 NUMERATOR 1 −32767 {1} 32767 CONV3
Numerator
R Denominator
C0952 IN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 CONV3
C0953 (C0952) + −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 CONV3
C0955 NUMERATOR 1 −32767 {1} 32767 CONV4
Numerator
R Denominator
C0958 (C0957) + −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 CONV4
C0960 FUNCTION 1 1 Characteristic 1 CURVE
2 Characteristic 2 Selection of the characteristic function
3 Characteristic 3
C0961 Y0 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99 CURVE
Configuration of grid point
C0962 Y1 50.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99 CURVE
C0963 Y2 75.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99 CURVE
C0964 Y100 100.0 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99 CURVE
0 Configuration of grid point
C0965 X1 50.00 0.01 {0.01 %} 99.00 CURVE
C0966 X2 75.00 0.01 {0.01 %} 99.00 CURVE
C0967 IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 CURVE
C0968 (C0967) + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 CURVE
C0970 N−SET 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MFAIL
Configuration of speed input signal (setpoint
path)
C0971 FAULT 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 MFAIL
(activation of the mains failure control)
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−41

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0972 RESET 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 MFAIL
Configuration of digital input signal (reset of
the mains failure control)
C0973 ADAPT 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MFAIL
of the voltage controllerP gain
C0974 CONST 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MFAIL
of the voltage controllerP gain
C0975 THRESHLD 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MFAIL
Configuration of input signal for restart
protection for when speed threshold is
under−run
C0976 NACT 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MFAIL
Configuration of input signal for comparison
value for threshold function
l Start for V2 controller
C0977 SET 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MFAIL
starting value
C0978 DC−SET 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MFAIL
Configuration of input signal for DC−bus
voltage setpoint
C0980 MFAIL VP 0.500 0.001 {0.001} 31.000 MFAIL
Setting of gain Vp
C0981 MFAIL TN 100 20 {1 ms} 2000 MFAIL
Setting of reset time Tn
C0982 MFAIL TIR 2.000 0.001 {0.001 s} 16.000 MFAIL
Setting of acceleration time Tir
C0983 RETRIGGER T 1.000 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 MFAIL
Retrigger time
C0988 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 MFAIL
2 (C0973)
3 (C0974)
4 (C0975)
5 (C0976)
6 (C0977)
7 (C0978)
C0989 + MFAIL
2 (C0972)
C0990 IN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 PHINT1
C0991 RESET 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 PHINT1
Configuration − reset signal
C0992 (C0990) + −32767 {1} 32767 PHINT1
C0993 (C0991) + PHINT1
C0995 DIVISION 0 −31 {1} 31 PHDIV
Divisor in the power−of−two−format (2C0995)
C0996 IN 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 PHDIV
8.4−42 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0997 (C0996) + −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 PHDIV
C1000 DIVISION 1 0 {1} 31 CONVPHA1
Divisor in the power−of−two−format (2C0995)
C1001 IN 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 Configuration input of CONVPHA1

C1002 (C1001) + −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 CONVPHA1
C1010 ARITPH1 1 0 OUT = IN1 ARITPH1
FUNCT 1 OUT = IN1 + IN2 Arithmetic function selection
2 OUT = IN1 − IN2
3 OUT = IN1 × IN2
14 OUT = IN1 / IN2
21 OUT = IN1 + IN2 (no limit)
22 OUT = IN1 − IN2 (no limit)
C1011 ® Selection list 3 ARITPH1
1 IN 1000 FIXED0INC
2 IN 1000 FIXED0INC
C1012 + −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 ARITPH1
2 (C1011/2)
Reset input
C1032 (C1030) + −32767 {1} 32767 PHINT2
Display of input signals
C1033 (C1031) + PHINT2
C1040 ACCELARATION 100.0 0.001 {0.001} 5000.000 SRFG1
0 Setting of acceleration
C1041 JERK 0.200 0.001 {0.001 s} 999.999 SRFG1
Setting of jerk
C1042 IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 SRFG1
C1043 SET 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 SRFG1
C1044 LOAD 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 SRFG1
C1045 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 SRFG1
1 (C1042) Display of analog input signal
2 (C1043)
C1046 (C1044) + SRFG1
C1090 OUTPUT + −2147483648 {1} 2147483647 FEVAN1
SIGNAL Signal output
C1091 CODE 141 2 {1} 2000 FEVAN1
Selection of the target code
C1092 SUBCODE 0 0 {1} 255 FEVAN1
Selection of the target subcode
C1093 NUMERATOR 1.000 0.0001 {0.0001} 100000.0000 FEVAN1
0 Numerator
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−43

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C1094 DENOMINATO 0.000 0.0001 {0.0001} 100000.0000 FEVAN1
R 1 Denominator
C1095 OFFSET 0 0 {1} 1000000000 FEVAN1
Offset setting
C1096 IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 FEVAN1
C1097 FEVAN1−LOAD 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 FEVAN1
C1098 (C1096) + −32768 {1} 32767 FEVAN1
C1099 (C1097) + FEVAN1
C1100 FUNCTION 1 FCNT1
Function selection
1 Return If |counter content| ³ |FCNT1−CMP−Val|,
FCNT1−EQUAL is set to HIGH for 1 ms
2 Hold if >= If |counter content| ³ |FCNT1−CMP−Val|, the
counter stops
3 Hold if = If |counter content| = |FCNT1−CMP−Val|, the
counter stops
C1101 ® Selection list 1 FCNT1
1 LD−VAL 1000 FIXED0%
2 CMP−VAL 1000 FIXED0%
1 CLKUP 1000 FIXED0
2 CLKDWN 1000 FIXED0
3 LOAD 1000 FIXED0
C1103 + −32768 {1} 32768 FCNT1
2 (C1101/2)
C1104 + FCNT1
2 (C1102/2)
3 (C1102/3)
C1120 SYNC MODE 2 0 Sync switched off SYNC1
1 CAN sync activated Function
2 Terminal sync activated
C1121 2 0 {1 ms} 13 SYNC1
The interpolation is restarted with every sync
signal.
1 SYNC CYCLE 2 SYNC1
Definition of the cycle time of the sync
signals (in the slave); only for system bus
2 INTERPOL. CYCL 2 SYNC1
Definition of the interpolation time between
the sync signals (in the slave), only for
terminal
C1122 SYNC TIME 0.460 0.000 {0.001 10.000 SYNC1
ms} Phase shift between CAN sync and internal
control program cycle
l For system bus only
l Depends on baud rate and bus load
8.4−44 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C1123 −0.450 {0.001 ms} 0.450 SYNC1
1 PHASESHIFT 0.000 Phase shift between terminal synch and
internal program cycle, for terminal sync only.
2 SYNC 0.200 Synchronisation window for the
WINDOW synchronisation edge of the terminal sync
(LOW−HIGH edge). Only for terminal sync. If
the sync signal transmitted is within the
window, SYNCx−STAT switches to HIGH
C1124 IN1 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 SYNC1
C1125 IN2 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 SYNC1
C1127 (C1124) + −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 SYNC1
C1128 (C1125) + −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 SYNC1
C1129 (C1126) + −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 SYNC1
1 Falling edge Selection of the edge evaluation
2 Both edges
C1141 PULSE T 0.001 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 TRANS3
Setting of the pulse period
C1144 (C1143) + TRANS3
1 Falling edge Selection of the edge evaluation
2 Both edges
C1146 PULSE T 0.001 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 TRANS4
Setting of the pulse period
C1149 (C1148) + TRANS4
C1150 FUNCTION 0 0 Load permanent PHINT3
1 Load edge Function selection
2 Compare & subtract
C1151 CMP. VALUE 2×109 0 {1} 2000000000 PHINT3
Setting of a comparison value
Configuration − speed input signal
C1154 LOAD 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 PHINT3
C1155 SET 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 PHINT3
Configuration − phase input signal
C1157 (C1153) + −32767 {1} 32767 PHINT3
C1158 (C1154) + PHINT3
C1159 (C1155) + −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 PHINT3
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−45

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

1 IN1 1000 FIXED0%
2 IN2 1000 FIXED0%
C1162 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 ASW3
2 (C1160/2)
C1163 (C1161) + ASW3
1 IN1 1000 FIXED0%
2 IN2 1000 FIXED0%
C1167 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 ASW3
2 (C1165/2)
C1168 (C1166) + ASW4
C1170 NUMERATOR 1 −32767 32767 CONV6
Numerator
R Denominator
C1173 (C1172) + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 CONV6
1 IN1 1000 FIXED0
2 IN2 1000 FIXED0
3 IN3 1000 FIXED0
C1176 + AND6
2 (C1175/2)
3 (C1175/3)
1 IN1 1000 FIXED0 AND7−IN1
C1179 + AND7
1 AND7−IN1 Display of digital input signals
2 AND7−IN1
3 AND7−IN1
8.4−46 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C1190 0 Temperature characteristic for PTC
thermistors
Selection of the characteristic for PTC
thermistors at X7 or X8 for detecting the
motor temperature
0 Standard Characteristic for PTC thermistors in Lenze
motors
1 Characteristic Characteristic for application−specific PTC
thermistors
C1191 0 {1 °C} 255 Temperature range for PTC thermistors
Define temperature points on the
characteristic for PTC thermistors
1 100 Lower temperature T1
2 150 Upper temperature T2
C1192 0 {1 W} 3000 Resistance range for PTC thermistors
Define resistance points on the characteristic
for PTC thermistors
1 1670 Resistance R1 at T1
2 2225 Resistance R2 at T2
C1195 OUT.D2 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 AIF−OUT
1000 Configuration of angle input signal
C1196 (C1195) + −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 AIF−OUT
C1197 IN.D2 + AIF−IN
C1200 ® Selection list 3 PHADD1
Configuration − phase input signals
1 IN1 1000 FIXED0INC
C1201 + −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 PHADD1
1 IN1 Display of input signals
2 IN2
3 IN3
C1206 + −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 PHCMP2
1 IN1 Display of input signals
2 IN2
C1207 FUNCTION 2 1 IN1 < IN2 PHCMP2
2 |IN1| < |IN2| Selection of the comparison operation
C1210 ® Selection list 2 STORE1
1 STORE1−RESET 1000 FIXED0
2 STORE1−ENTP 1000 FIXED0
3 STORE1−ENWI 1000 FIXED0
N
4 STORE1−LOAD0 1000 FIXED0
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−47

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

1 STORE1−IN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0
2 STORE1−MASKI 1000 FIXEDPHI−0
C1212 MASKV 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 STORE1
C1215 + STORE1
... ...
5 (C1210/5)
C1216 + −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 STORE1
2 (C1211/2)
C1217 (C1212) + −2147483647 2147483647 STORE1
C1223 + STORE2
2 (C1220/2)
C1230 ® Selection list 2 PHDIFF1
1 PHDIFF1−EN 1000 FIXED0
2 PHDIFF1−RES 1000 FIXED0
C1231 IN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 PHDIFF1
1 PHDIFF1−SET 1000 FIXED0INC
2 PHDIFF1−ADD 1000 FIXED0INC
C1235 + PHDIFF1
2 (C1230/2)
C1236 (C1231) + −32767 {1 rpm} 32767
C1237 + −2147483647 2147483647 PHDIFF1
2 (C1232/2)
C1240 ® Selection list 1 CONVPHPH1
1 CONVPHPH1−N 1000 FIXED0%
UM
2 CONVPHPH1−D 1000 FIXED0%
EN
C1241 CONVPHPH1−A 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 CONVPHPH1
CT Input signal configuration
C1242 CONVPHPH1−I 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 CONVPHPH1
N Input signal configuration
8.4−48 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C1245 + −199.99 {0.01 %} 1999.99 CONVPHPH1
2 (C1240/2)
C1246 (C1241) + CONVPHPH1
C1247 (C1242) + −2147483647 2147483647 CONVPHPH1
C1250 IN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 CONVPP1
C1251 1000 ® Selection list 3 CONVPP1
1 CONVPP1−NU FIXED0INC
M
2 CONVPP1−DEN FIXED0INC
C1253 (C1250) + −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 CONVPP1
C1254 + −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 CONVPP1
1 CONVPP1−NU Display of input signals
M
2 CONVPP1−DEN
C1255 N−TRIM2 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 DFSET
C1258 (C1255) + −32767 {1 rpm} 32767
C1260 OFFSET 0 −16383 {1} 16383 GEARCOMP
Offset
C1261 NUM 1 −32767 {1} 32767 GEARCOMP
Numerator
C1262 DENUM 1 1 {1} 32767 GEARCOMP
Denominator
C1265 TORQUE 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 GEARCOMP
Configuration of input signal correction
C1266 PHI−IN 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 GEARCOMP
C1268 (C1265) + −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 GEARCOMP
C1269 (C1266) + −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 GEARCOMP
1 PHCMP3−IN1 1000 FIXED0INC
C1271 + −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 PHCMP3
2 (C1270/2)
2 Warning Configuration of monitoring in the case of a
3 Off sync error
C1292 MONIT P19 2 0 Trip P19monitoring
2 Warning Configuration of monitoring a limitation of
the input value at DFIN
3 Off
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.4−49

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C1500 OUTPUT + −2147483648 {1} 2147483647 FEVAN2
C1501 CODE 141 2 {1} 2000 FEVAN2
Target code of FEVAN2
Target subcode FEVAN2
0 Numerator
R 1 Denominator
C1505 OFFSET 0 0 1000000000 FEVAN2
Offset
C1506 FEVAN2−IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 FEVAN2
C1507 LOAD 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 FEVAN2
C1508 (C1506) + −32768 {1} 32767 FEVAN2
C1509 (C1507) + FEVAN2
C1799 1250 20 {1} 1250 DFOUT fmax (kHz)
1250 corresponds to 500 kHz
C1810 + SW−EKZ LECOM
C1811 + SW generation
8.4−50 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Selection lists 8.5
Selection list 1: Analog output signals 8.5.1
8.5 Selection lists
8.5.1 Selection list 1: Analog output signals
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Parameter Analog output signal (,)
000050 AIN1−OUT
006350 CURVE1−OUT
000055 AIN2−OUT
006400 FCNT1−OUT
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
000100 DFSET−NOUT 006600 SYNC1−OUT3
001000 FIXED0% 010000 BRK−M−SET
001006 FIXED100% 015028 UTILIZATION
001007 FIXED−100% 015030 MCTRL−LOAD−I2XT
005000 MCTRL−NSET2 019500 FCODE−17
005001 MCTRL−NACT
019502 FCODE−26/1
005002 MCTRL−MSET2
019503 FCODE−26/2
005003 MCTRL−MACT
019504 FCODE−27/1
005004 MCTRL−IACT 019505 FCODE−27/2
005005 MCTRL−DCVOLT 019506 FCODE−32
005009 MCTRL−PHI−ACT 019507 FCODE−37
005050 NSET−NOUT 019510 FCODE−108/1
005051 NSET−RFG−I 019511 FCODE−108/2
005100 MPOT1−OUT
019512 FCODE−109/1
005150 PCTRL1−OUT
019513 FCODE−109/2
005200 REF−N−SET
019515 FCODE−141
005500 ARIT1−OUT
019521 FCODE−472/1
005505 ARIT2−OUT 019522 FCODE−472/2
005550 ADD1−OUT 019523 FCODE−472/3
005600 RFG1−OUT 019524 FCODE−472/4
005610 SRFG1−OUT 019525 FCODE−472/5
005611 SRFG1−DIFF 019526 FCODE−472/6
005650 ASW1−OUT
019527 FCODE−472/7
005655 ASW2−OUT
019528 FCODE−472/8
005660 ASW3−OUT
019529 FCODE−472/9
005665 ASW4−OUT 019530 FCODE−472/10
005700 ANEG1−OUT 019531 FCODE−472/11
005705 ANEG2−OUT 019532 FCODE−472/12
005750 FIXSET1−OUT 019533 FCODE−472/13
005800 LIM1−OUT 019534 FCODE−472/14
005850 ABS1−OUT
019535 FCODE−472/15
005900 PT1−1−OUT
019536 FCODE−472/16
005950 DT1−1−OUT
019537 FCODE−472/17
006100 MFAIL−NOUT 019538 FCODE−472/18
006150 DB1−OUT 019539 FCODE−472/19
006200 CONV1−OUT 019540 FCODE−472/20
006205 CONV2−OUT 019551 FCODE−473/1
006210 CONV3−OUT 019552 FCODE−473/2
006215 CONV4−OUT
019553 FCODE−473/3
006230 CONVPHA1−OUT
019554 FCODE−473/4
006300 S&H1−OUT
019555 FCODE−473/5
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.5−1

8 Configuration
8.5 Selection lists
019556 FCODE−473/6
019557 FCODE−473/7
019558 FCODE−473/8
019559 FCODE−473/9
019560 FCODE−473/10
020101 CAN−IN1.W1
020102 CAN−IN1.W2
020103 CAN−IN1.W3
020201 CAN−IN2.W1
020202 CAN−IN2.W2
020203 CAN−IN2.W3
020204 CAN−IN2.W4
020301 CAN−IN3.W1
020302 CAN−IN3.W2
020303 CAN−IN3.W3
020304 CAN−IN3.W4
025101 AIF−IN.W1
025102 AIF−IN.W2
025103 AIF−IN.W3
8.5−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Selection lists 8.5
Selection list 2: Digital output signals 8.5.2
8.5.2 Selection list 2: Digital output signals
Parameter Digital output signal (-)
000051 DIGIN1
010550 OR1−OUT
000052 DIGIN2
010555 OR2−OUT
000053 DIGIN3 010560 OR3−OUT
000054 DIGIN4 010565 OR4−OUT
000055 DIGIN5 010570 OR5−OUT
000060 STATE−BUS−O 010600 NOT1−OUT
000065 DIGIN−CINH 010605 NOT2−OUT
000100 DFSET−ACK
010610 NOT3−OUT
000500 DCTRL−RDY
010615 NOT4−OUT
000501 DCTRL−CINH
010620 NOT5−OUT
000502 DCTRL−INIT 010650 CMP1−OUT
000503 DCTRL−IMP 010655 CMP2−OUT
000504 DCTRL−NACT=0 010660 CMP3−OUT
000505 DCTRL−CW/CCW 010680 PHCMP1−OUT
001000 FIXED0 010685 PHCMP2−OUT
001001 FIXED1
010690 PHCMP3−OUT
002000 DCTRL−PAR*1−O
010700 DIGDEL1−OUT
002001 DCTRL−PAR*2−O
010705 DIGDEL2−OUT
002002 DCTRL−PARBUSY
010750 TRANS1−OUT
005001 MCTRL−QSP−OUT 010755 TRANS2−OUT
005002 MCTRL−IMAX 010760 TRANS3−OUT
005003 MCTRL−MMAX 010765 TRANS4−OUT
005050 NSET−RFG−I=0 010900 FLIP1−OUT
005200 REF−OK 010905 FLIP2−OUT
005201 REF−BUSY
012000 PHINT1−FAIL
006000 DFRFG1−FAIL
012005 PHINT2−FAIL
006001 DFRFG1−SYNC
012010 PHINT3−STAT
006100 MFAIL−STATUS 013000 FEVAN1−BUSY
006101 MFAIL−I−RESET 013001 FEVAN1−FAIL
006400 FCNT1−EQUAL 013005 FEVAN2−BUSY
006600 SYNC1−STAT 013006 FEVAN2−FAIL
010000 BRK1−OUT 014050 STORE1−TP−INH
010001 BRK1−CINH
014055 STORE2−TP−INH
010002 BRK1−QSP
015000 DCTRL−TRIP
010003 BRK1−M−STORE
015001 DCTRL−MESS
010250 R/L/Q−QSP 015002 DCTRL−WARN
010251 R/L/Q−R/L 015003 DCTRL−FAIL
010500 AND1−OUT 015010 MONIT−LU
010505 AND2−OUT 015011 MONIT−OU
010510 AND3−OUT 015012 MONIT−EEr
010515 AND4−OUT
015013 MONIT−OC1
010520 AND5−OUT
015014 MONIT−OC2
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
010525
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
010530
AND6−OUT
AND7−OUT ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
015015
015016
MONIT−LP1
MONIT−OH
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.5−3

8 Configuration
8.5 Selection lists
Parameter Digital output signal (-) Parameter Digital output signal (-)
015017 MONIT−OH3 019541 FCODE−471.B20
015018 MONIT−OH4 019542 FCODE−471.B21
015019 MONIT−OH7 019543 FCODE−471.B22
015020 MONIT−OH8 019544 FCODE−471.B23
015021 MONIT−Sd2
019545 FCODE−471.B24
015022 MONIT−Sd3
019546 FCODE−471.B25
015023 MONIT−P03
019547 FCODE−471.B26
015024 MONIT−P13 019548 FCODE−471.B27
015026 MONIT−CE0 019549 FCODE−471.B28
015027 MONIT−NMAX 019550 FCODE−471.B29
015028 MONIT−OC5 019551 FCODE−471.B30
015029 MONIT−SD5 019552 FCODE−471.B31
015030 MONIT−SD6 019751 FCODE−135.B0
015031 MONIT−SD7
019752 FCODE−135.B1
015032 MONIT−H07
019753 FCODE−135.B2
015033 MONIT−H10
019755 FCODE−135.B4
015034 MONIT−H11 019756 FCODE−135.B5
015040 MONIT−CE1 019757 FCODE−135.B6
015041 MONIT−CE2 019758 FCODE−135.B7
015042 MONIT−CE3 019763 FCODE−135.B12
015043 MONIT−CE4 019764 FCODE−135.B13
015044 MONIT−PL
019765 FCODE−135.B14
015045 MONIT−P19
019766 FCODE−135.B15
015047 MONIT−OC6
020001 CAN−CTRL.B0
015048 MONIT−OC8 020002 CAN−CTRL.B1
015320 MONIT−SD8 020003 CAN−CTRL.B2
015321 MONIT−nErr 020005 CAN−CTRL.B4
019500 FCODE−250 020006 CAN−CTRL.B5
019521 FCODE−471.B0 020007 CAN−CTRL.B6
019522 FCODE−471.B1
019523 FCODE−471.B2
019524 FCODE−471.B3
019525 FCODE−471.B4 020015 CAN−CTRL.B14
019526 FCODE−471.B5 020016 CAN−CTRL.B15
019527 FCODE−471.B6 020101 CAN−IN1.B0
019528 FCODE−471.B7 020102 CAN−IN1.B1
019529 FCODE−471.B8 020103 CAN−IN1.B2
019530 FCODE−471.B9
020104 CAN−IN1.B3
019531 FCODE−471.B10
020105 CAN−IN1.B4
019532 FCODE−471.B11
020106 CAN−IN1.B5
019533 FCODE−471.B12
020107 CAN−IN1.B6
019534 FCODE−471.B13 020108 CAN−IN1.B7
019535 FCODE−471.B14 020109 CAN−IN1.B8
019536 FCODE−471.B15 020110 CAN−IN1.B9
019537 FCODE−471.B16 020111 CAN−IN1.B10
019538 FCODE−471.B17 020112 CAN−IN1.B11
019539 FCODE−471.B18
020113 CAN−IN1.B12
019540 FCODE−471.B19
020114 CAN−IN1.B13
8.5−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Selection lists 8.5
Parameter Digital output signal (-) Parameter Digital output signal (-)
020115 CAN−IN1.B14 020231 CAN−IN2.B30
020116 CAN−IN1.B15 020232 CAN−IN2.B31
020117 CAN−IN1.B16 020301 CAN−IN3.B0
020118 CAN−IN1.B17 020302 CAN−IN3.B1
020119 CAN−IN1.B18
020303 CAN−IN3.B2
020120 CAN−IN1.B19
020304 CAN−IN3.B3
020121 CAN−IN1.B20
020305 CAN−IN3.B4
020122 CAN−IN1.B21 020306 CAN−IN3.B5
020123 CAN−IN1.B22 020307 CAN−IN3.B6
020124 CAN−IN1.B23 020308 CAN−IN3.B7
020125 CAN−IN1.B24 020309 CAN−IN3.B8
020126 CAN−IN1.B25 020310 CAN−IN3.B9
020127 CAN−IN1.B26 020311 CAN−IN3.B10
020128 CAN−IN1.B27
020312 CAN−IN3.B11
020129 CAN−IN1.B28
020313 CAN−IN3.B12
020130 CAN−IN1.B29
020314 CAN−IN3.B13
020131 CAN−IN1.B30 020315 CAN−IN3.B14
020132 CAN−IN1.B31 020316 CAN−IN3.B15
020201 CAN−IN2.B0 020317 CAN−IN3.B16
020202 CAN−IN2.B1 020318 CAN−IN3.B17
020203 CAN−IN2.B2 020319 CAN−IN3.B18
020204 CAN−IN2.B3
020320 CAN−IN3.B19
020205 CAN−IN2.B4
020321 CAN−IN3.B20
020206 CAN−IN2.B5
020322 CAN−IN3.B21
020207 CAN−IN2.B6 020323 CAN−IN3.B22
020208 CAN−IN2.B7 020324 CAN−IN3.B23
020209 CAN−IN2.B8 020325 CAN−IN3.B24
020210 CAN−IN2.B9 020326 CAN−IN3.B25
020211 CAN−IN2.B10 020327 CAN−IN3.B26
020212 CAN.IN2.B11
020328 CAN−IN3.B27
020213 CAN−IN2.B12
020329 CAN−IN3.B28
020214 CAN−IN2.B13
020330 CAN−IN3.B29
020215 CAN−IN2.B14 020331 CAN−IN3.B30
020216 CAN−IN2.B15 020332 CAN−IN3.B31
020217 CAN−IN2.B16 025001 AIF−CTRL.B0
020218 CAN−IN2.B17 025002 AIF−CTRL.B1
020219 CAN−IN2.B18 025003 AIF−CTRL.B2
020220 CAN−IN2.B19
025005 AIF−CTRL.B4
020221 CAN−IN2.B20
020222 CAN−IN2.B21
020223 CAN−IN2.B22
020224 CAN−IN2.B23 025013 AIF−CTRL.B12
020225 CAN−IN2.B24 025014 AIF−CTRL.B13
020226 CAN−IN2.B25 025015 AIF−CTRL.B14
020227 CAN−IN2.B26 025016 AIF−CTRL.B15
020228 CAN−IN2.B27 025101 AIF−IN.B0
020229 CAN−IN2.B28
025102 AIF−IN.B1
020230 CAN−IN2.B29
025103 AIF−IN.B2
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.5−5

8 Configuration
8.5 Selection lists
025104 AIF−IN.B3
025105 AIF−IN.B4
025106 AIF−IN.B5
025107 AIF−IN.B6
025108 AIF−IN.B7
025109 AIF−IN.B8
025110 AIF−IN.B9
025111 AIF−IN.B10
025112 AIF−IN.B11
025113 AIF−IN.B12
025114 AIF−IN.B13
025115 AIF−IN.B14
025116 AIF−IN.B15
025117 AIF−IN.B16
025118 AIF−IN.B17
025119 AIF−IN.B18
025120 AIF−IN.B19
025121 AIF−IN.B20
025122 AIF−IN.B21
025123 AIF−IN.B22
025124 AIF−IN.B23
025125 AIF−IN.B24
025126 AIF−IN.B25
025127 AIF−IN.B26
025128 AIF−IN.B27
025129 AIF−IN.B28
025130 AIF−IN.B29
025131 AIF−IN.B30
025132 AIF−IN.B31
8.5−6 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Selection lists 8.5
Selection list 3: Angle signals 8.5.3
8.5.3 Selection list 3: Angle signals
Parameter Angle signal (.)
Parameter Angle signal (.)
000100 DFSET−PSET
014051 STORE1−PH1
000101 DFSET−PSET2
014052 STORE1−PH2
001000 FIXED0INC 014053 STORE1−PHDIFF
005000 MCTRL−PHI−ANG 014055 STORE2−PHACT
005200 REF−PSET 014056 STORE2−PH1
005520 ARITPH1−OUT 014057 STORE1−PH2
005580 PHADD1−OUT 014100 GEARCOMP−OUT
005581 PHADD1−OUT2
019521 FCODE−474/1
006235 CONVPHPH1−OUT
019522 FCODE−474/2
006600 SYNC1−OUT2
019523 FCODE−474/3
012000 PHINT1−OUT 019524 FCODE−474/4
012005 PHINT2−OUT 019525 FCODE−474/5
012010 PHINT3−OUT 020103 CAN−IN1.D1
012050 PHDIV1−OUT 020201 CAN−IN2.D1
014000 PHDIFF1−OUT 020301 CAN−IN3.D1
014050 STORE1−PHACT
025103 AIF−IN.D1
025104 AIF−IN.D2
8.5.4 Selection list 4: Speed signals
Parameter Speed signal (/)
000050 DFIN−OUT
000100 DFSET−POUT
000250 DFOUT−OUT
001000 FIXEDPHI−0
005000 MCTRL−PHI−ACT
006000 DFRFG−OUT
006220 CONV5−OUT
006225 CONV6−OUT
006230 CONVPHA1−OUT2
006240 CONVPP1−OUT
006600 SYNC1−OUT1
019521 FCODE−475/1
019522 FCODE−475/2
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.5−7

8 Configuration
8.5 Selection lists
8.5.5 Selection list 5: Function blocks
Parameter Function block
000000 empty
006200 CONV1
000050 AIN1
006205 CONV2
000055 AIN2 006210 CONV3
000070 AOUT1 006215 CONV4
000075 AOUT2 006220 CONV5
000100 DFSET 006225 CONV6
000200 DFIN 006230 CONVPHA1
000250 DFOUT
006235 CONVPHPH1
005050 NSET
006240 CONVPP1
005100 MPOT1
006300 S&H1
005150 PCTRL1 006350 CURVE1
005200 REF 006420 FCNT1
005500 ARIT1 006600 SYNC1
005505 ARIT2 010000 BRK1
005520 ARITPH1 010250 R/L/Q
005550 ADD1
010500 AND1
005580 PHADD1
010505 AND2
005600 RFG1
010510 AND3
005610 SRFG1
010515 AND4
005650 ASW1 010520 AND5
005655 ASW2 010525 AND6
005660 ASW3 010530 AND7
005665 ASW4 010550 OR1
005700 ANEG1 010555 OR2
005705 ANEG2
010560 OR3
005750 FIXSET1
010565 OR4
005800 LIM1
010570 OR5
005850 ABS1 010600 NOT1
005900 PT1−1 010605 NOT2
005950 DT1−1 010610 NOT3
006000 DFRFG1 010615 NOT4
006100 MFAIL 010620 NOT5
006150 DB1
010650 CMP1
8.5−8 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Selection lists 8.5
Selection list 5: Function blocks 8.5.5
010655 CMP2
010660 CMP3
010680 PHCMP1
010685 PHCMP2
010690 PHCMP3
010700 DIGDEL1
010705 DIGDEL2
010750 TRANS1
010755 TRANS2
010760 TRANS3
010765 TRANS4
010900 FLIP1
010905 FLIP2
012000 PHINT1
012005 PHINT2
012010 PHINT3
012050 PHDIV1
013000 FEVAN1
013005 FEVAN2
013100 OSZ
014000 PHDIFF1
014050 STORE1
014055 STORE2
014100 GEARCOMP
015100 MLP1
020000 CAN−OUT
025000 AIF−OUT
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.5−9

8 Configuration
8.5 Selection lists
8.5.6 Selection list 10: Error messages

Parameter Error message Parameter Error message
00000 No fail 01030 LU message
00011 OC1−TRIP 01091 EEr message
00012 OC2−TRIP 01190 nEEr message
00015 OC5−TRIP 02018 OC8 warning
00016 OC6−TRIP 02032 LP1 warning
00018 OC8−TRIP 02053 OH3 warning
00022 LUQ−TRIP 02054 OH4 warning
00032 LP1−TRIP 02057 OH7 warning
00050 OH−TRIP 02058 OH8 warning
00053 OH3−TRIP 02061 CEO warning
00057 OH7−TRIP 02062 CE1 warning
00058 OH8−TRIP 02063 CE2 warning
00061 CE0−TRIP 02064 CE3 warning
00062 CE1−TRIP 02065 CE4 warning
00063 CE2−TRIP 02082 Sd2 warning
00070 U15−TRIP 02086 Sd6 warning
00071 CCr−TRIP 02091 EER warning
00072 Pr1−TRIP 02153 P03 warning
00074 PEr−TRIP 02166 P16 warning
00077 Pr3−TRIP 02190 nEEr warning
00078 Pr4−TRIP
00079 PI−TRIP
00082 Sd2−TRIP
00083 Sd3−TRIP
00085 Sd5−TRIP
00086 Sd6−TRIP
00087 Sd7−TRIP
00088 Sd8−TRIP
00089 PL−TRIP
00091 EEr−TRIP
00105 H05−TRIP
00107 H07−TRIP
00110 H10−TRIP
00111 H11−TRIP
00153 P03−TRIP
00163 P13−TRIP
00166 P16−TRIP
00169 P19−TRIP
00190 nErr−TRIP
00200 NMAX−TRIP
01020 OU message
8.5−10 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Table of attributes 8.6
The attribute table describes the properties of the codes used. It enables you
to create your own communication programs for the controller.
How to read the table of attributes

Code Cxxxx Name of the Lenze code
Index dec 24575 − Lenze code Index under which the Is only required for control via INTERBUS,
number parameter is addressed PROFIBUS DP or system bus (CAN)
The subindex of array variables
hex 5FFFh − Lenze code corresponds to the Lenze
number subcode number
Data DS E Data structure Single variable
(only one parameter element)
A Array variable
(several parameter elements)
DA xx Number of array elements
(subcodes)
DT B8 Data type 1 byte bit−coded
B16 2 bytes bit−coded
FIX32 32−bit value with sign;
decimal with four decimal places
I32 4 bytes with sign
U32 4 bytes without sign
VS ASCII string
Format VD LECOM format ASCII decimal format
VH (see also Operating Instructions ASCII hexadecimal format
of the bus module)
VS String format
VO Octet string format for data blocks
DL Data length in byte The column "Important" contains further
information
Access LCM−R/W Ra Access authorisation for LECOM Reading is always permitted
Wa Writing is always permitted
W Writing is restricted
Condition CINH Condition for writing Writing permitted only when controller is
inhibited
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.6−1

8 Configuration
Code Index Data Access

dec hex DS DA DT Format DL LCM−R/W Condition
C0002 24573 5FFD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0003 24572 5FFC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0004 24571 5FFB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0005 24570 5FFA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0006 24569 5FF9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0009 24566 5FF6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0011 24564 5FF4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0012 24563 5FF3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0013 24562 5FF2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0017 24558 5FEE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0018 24557 5FED E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0019 24556 5FEC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0021 24554 5FEA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0022 24553 5FE9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0025 24550 5FE6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0026 24549 5FE5 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0027 24548 5FE4 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0030 24545 5FE1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0032 24543 5FDF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0033 24542 5FDE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0034 24541 5FDD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0037 24538 5FDA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0039 24536 5FD8 A 15 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0040 24535 5FD7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0042 24533 5FD5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0043 24532 5FD4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0045 24530 5FD2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0046 24529 5FD1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0049 24526 5FCE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0050 24525 5FCD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0051 24524 5FCC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0052 24523 5FCB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0053 24522 5FCA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0054 24521 5FC9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0056 24519 5FC7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0057 24518 5FC6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0058 24517 5FC5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0059 24516 5FC4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0060 24515 5FC3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0061 24514 5FC2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0063 24512 5FC0 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0064 24511 5FBF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0066 24509 5FBD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0067 24508 5FBC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0070 24505 5FB9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0071 24504 5FB8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
8.6−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8

C0072 24503 5FB7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0075 24500 5FB4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0076 24499 5FB3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0077 24498 5FB2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0078 24497 5FB1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0081 24494 5FAE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0084 24491 5FAB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0085 24490 5FAA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0086 24489 5FA9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0093 24482 5FA2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0094 24481 5FA1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0096 24479 5F9F A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0099 24476 5F9C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0101 24474 5F9A A 15 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0103 24472 5F98 A 15 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0105 24470 5F96 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0108 24467 5F93 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0109 24466 5F92 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0114 24461 5F8D A 5 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0116 24459 5F8B A 32 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0117 24458 5F8A A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0118 24457 5F89 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0120 24455 5F87 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0121 24454 5F86 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0122 24453 5F85 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0125 24450 5F82 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0126 24449 5F81 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0127 24448 5F80 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0128 24447 5F7F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0130 24445 5F7D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0134 24441 5F79 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0135 24440 5F78 E 1 B16 VH 2
C0136 24439 5F77 A 3 B16 VH 2 Ra
C0141 24434 5F72 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0142 24433 5F71 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0150 24425 5F69 E 1 B16 VH 2 Ra
C0151 24424 5F68 E 1 B32 VH 4 Ra
C0155 24420 5F64 E 1 B16 VH 2 Ra
C0156 24419 5F63 A 7 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0157 24418 5F62 A 7 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0161 24414 5F5E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.6−3

8 Configuration

C0167 24408 5F58 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0168 24407 5F57 A 8 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0169 24406 5F56 A 8 U32 VH 4 Ra
C0170 24405 5F55 A 8 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0172 24403 5F53 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0173 24402 5F52 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0178 24397 5F4D E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra
C0179 24396 5F4C E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra
C0182 24393 5F49 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0183 24392 5F48 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0190 24385 5F41 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0195 24380 5F3C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0196 24379 5F3B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0200 24375 5F37 E 1 VS VS 14 Ra
C0201 24374 5F36 E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C0202 24373 5F35 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0203 24372 5F34 E 1 VS VS 12 Ra
C0204 24371 5F33 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0206 24369 5F31 E 1 VS VS 13 Ra
C0207 24368 5F30 E 1 VS VS 14 Ra
C0208 24367 5F2F E 1 VS VS 14 Ra
C0209 24366 5F2E E 1 VS VS 14 Ra
C0220 24355 5F23 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0221 24354 5F22 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0222 24353 5F21 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0223 24352 5F20 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0224 24351 5F1F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0241 24334 5F0E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0244 24331 5F0B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0250 24325 5F05 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0252 24323 5F03 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0253 24322 5F02 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0254 24321 5F01 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0255 24320 5F00 E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0260 24315 5EFB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0261 24314 5EFA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0262 24313 5EF9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0263 24312 5EF8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0264 24311 5EF7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0265 24310 5EF6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0267 24308 5EF4 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0268 24307 5EF3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0269 24306 5EF2 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0291 24284 5EDC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0292 24283 5EDB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0293 24282 5EDA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0294 24281 5ED9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
8.6−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8

C0295 24280 5ED8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0296 24279 5ED7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0325 24250 5EBA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0326 24249 5EB9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0327 24248 5EB8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0328 24247 5EB7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0329 24246 5EB6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0332 24243 5EB3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0333 24242 5EB2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0336 24239 5EAF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0337 24238 5EAE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0338 24237 5EAD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0339 24236 5EAC A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0340 24235 5EAB A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0350 24225 5EA1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0351 24224 5EA0 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0352 24223 5E9F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0353 24222 5E9E A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0354 24221 5E9D A 6 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0355 24220 5E9C A 6 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0356 24219 5E9B A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0357 24218 5E9A A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0358 24217 5E99 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0359 24216 5E98 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0360 24215 5E97 A 12 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0361 24214 5E96 A 12 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0362 24213 5E95 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0363 24212 5E94 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0364 24211 5E93 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0365 24210 5E92 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0366 24209 5E91 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0367 24208 5E90 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0368 24207 5E8F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0369 24206 5E8E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0400 24175 5E6F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0402 24173 5E6D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0403 24172 5E6C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0404 24171 5E6B A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0405 24170 5E6A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0409 24166 5E66 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0416 24159 5E5F E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra/W CINH
C0420 24155 5E5B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0421 24154 5E5A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0425 24150 5E56 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0426 24149 5E55 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.6−5

8 Configuration

C0427 24148 5E54 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0429 24146 5E52 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0432 24143 5E4F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0433 24142 5E4E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0434 24141 5E4D A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0439 24136 5E48 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0441 24134 5E46 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0443 24132 5E44 E 1 B8 VH 1 Ra
C0444 24131 5E43 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0458 24117 5E35 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0459 24116 5E34 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0464 24111 5E2F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0465 24110 5E2E A 50 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0466 24109 5E2D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0470 24105 5E29 A 4 B8 VH 1 Ra/Wa
C0471 24104 5E28 E 1 B32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0472 24103 5E27 A 20 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0473 24102 5E26 A 10 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0474 24101 5E25 A 5 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0475 24100 5E24 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0497 24078 5E0E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0517 24058 5DFA A 32 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0520 24055 5DF7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0528 24047 5DEF A 4 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0529 24046 5DEE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0530 24045 5DED E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0531 24044 5DEC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0532 24043 5DEB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0533 24042 5DEA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
8.6−6 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8

C0534 24041 5DE9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0535 24040 5DE8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0536 24039 5DE7 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0537 24038 5DE6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0538 24037 5DE5 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0539 24036 5DE4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0540 24035 5DE3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0541 24034 5DE2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0544 24031 5DDF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0545 24030 5DDE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0546 24029 5DDD E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0547 24028 5DDC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0548 24027 5DDB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0549 24026 5DDA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0551 24024 5DD8 E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0560 24015 5DCF A 15 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0561 24014 5DCE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0562 24013 5DCD A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0563 24012 5DCC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0564 24011 5DCB A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0570 24005 5DC5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
C0572 24003 5DC3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
C0573 24002 5DC2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0575 24000 5DC0 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0577 23998 5DBE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0578 23997 5DBD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0581 23994 5DBA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0582 23993 5DB9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0583 23992 5DB8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0584 23991 5DB7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0585 23990 5DB6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0586 23989 5DB5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0587 23988 5DB4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0588 23987 5DB3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0589 23986 5DB2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0590 23985 5DB1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0591 23984 5DB0 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0592 23983 5DAF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0593 23982 5DAE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0594 23981 5DAD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0595 23980 5DAC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0596 23979 5DAB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0597 23978 5DAA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0598 23977 5DA9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0599 23976 5DA8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.6−7

8 Configuration

C0600 23975 5DA7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0601 23974 5DA6 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0602 23973 5DA5 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0606 23969 5DA1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0610 23965 5D9D A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0611 23964 5D9C A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0620 23955 5D93 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0621 23954 5D92 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0622 23953 5D91 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0623 23952 5D90 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0630 23945 5D89 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0631 23944 5D88 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0633 23942 5D86 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0640 23935 5D7F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0641 23934 5D7E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0642 23933 5D7D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0650 23925 5D75 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0651 23924 5D74 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0653 23922 5D72 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0654 23921 5D71 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0655 23920 5D70 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0656 23919 5D6F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0658 23917 5D6D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0661 23914 5D6A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0662 23913 5D69 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0671 23904 5D60 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0672 23903 5D5F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0674 23901 5D5D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0675 23900 5D5C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0676 23899 5D5B A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0677 23898 5D5A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0680 23895 5D57 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0681 23894 5D56 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0682 23893 5D55 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0683 23892 5D54 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0684 23891 5D53 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0685 23890 5D52 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0686 23889 5D51 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0687 23888 5D50 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0688 23887 5D4F A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0689 23886 5D4E A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0690 23885 5D4D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0691 23884 5D4C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
8.6−8 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8

C0692 23883 5D4B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0693 23882 5D4A A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0694 23881 5D49 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0695 23880 5D48 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0698 23877 5D45 A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0701 23874 5D42 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0704 23871 5D3F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0710 23865 5D39 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0711 23864 5D38 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0714 23861 5D35 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0715 23860 5D34 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0716 23859 5D33 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0719 23856 5D30 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0720 23855 5D2F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0721 23854 5D2E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0724 23851 5D2B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0725 23850 5D2A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0726 23849 5D29 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0729 23846 5D26 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0750 23825 5D11 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0751 23824 5D10 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0752 23823 5D0F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0753 23822 5D0E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0754 23821 5D0D E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0755 23820 5D0C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0756 23819 5D0B E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0757 23818 5D0A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0764 23811 5D03 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0765 23810 5D02 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0766 23809 5D01 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0770 23805 5CFD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0771 23804 5CFC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0772 23803 5CFB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0773 23802 5CFA A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0775 23800 5CF8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.6−9

8 Configuration

C0778 23797 5CF5 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0784 23791 5CEF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0785 23790 5CEE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0786 23789 5CED E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0787 23788 5CEC A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0788 23787 5CEB A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0789 23786 5CEA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0790 23785 5CE9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0798 23777 5CE1 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0799 23776 5CE0 A 13 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0800 23775 5CDF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0801 23774 5CDE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0802 23773 5CDD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0803 23772 5CDC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0804 23771 5CDB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0805 23770 5CDA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0808 23767 5CD7 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0809 23766 5CD6 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0810 23765 5CD5 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0811 23764 5CD4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0812 23763 5CD3 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0813 23762 5CD2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0816 23759 5CCF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0817 23758 5CCE A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0818 23757 5CCD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0820 23755 5CCB A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0821 23754 5CCA A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0822 23753 5CC9 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0823 23752 5CC8 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0825 23750 5CC6 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0827 23748 5CC4 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0829 23746 5CC2 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0831 23744 5CC0 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0832 23743 5CBF A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0833 23742 5CBE A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0834 23741 5CBD A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0835 23740 5CBC A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
8.6−10 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8

C0836 23739 5CBB A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0837 23738 5CBA A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0838 23737 5CB9 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0839 23736 5CB8 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0840 23735 5CB7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0841 23734 5CB6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0843 23732 5CB4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0845 23730 5CB2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0847 23728 5CB0 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0848 23727 5CAF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0849 23726 5CAE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0850 23725 5CAD A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0851 23724 5CAC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0852 23723 5CAB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0853 23722 5CAA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0854 23721 5CA9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0855 23720 5CA8 A 2 B16 VH 2 Ra
C0856 23719 5CA7 A 3 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0857 23718 5CA6 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0858 23717 5CA5 A 3 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0859 23716 5CA4 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0860 23715 5CA3 A 11 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0863 23712 5CA0 A 6 B16 VH 2 Ra
C0864 23711 5C9F A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0865 23710 5C9E A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0866 23709 5C9D A 11 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0867 23708 5C9C A 3 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0868 23707 5C9B A 11 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0869 23706 5C9A A 3 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0870 23705 5C99 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0871 23704 5C98 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0878 23697 5C91 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0879 23696 5C90 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0880 23695 5C8F A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0881 23694 5C8E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0884 23691 5C8B A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0885 23690 5C8A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0889 23686 5C86 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.6−11

8 Configuration

C0896 23679 5C7F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0898 23677 5C7D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0899 23676 5C7C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0900 23675 5C7B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0906 23669 5C75 A 9 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0907 23668 5C74 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0908 23667 5C73 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0909 23666 5C72 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0926 23649 5C61 A 4 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0927 23648 5C60 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0928 23647 5C5F E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0929 23646 5C5E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0932 23643 5C5B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0933 23642 5C5A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0934 23641 5C59 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0935 23640 5C58 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0936 23639 5C57 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0940 23635 5C53 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0941 23634 5C52 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0943 23632 5C50 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0945 23630 5C4E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0946 23629 5C4D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0948 23627 5C4B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0950 23625 5C49 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0951 23624 5C48 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0953 23622 5C46 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0955 23620 5C44 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0956 23619 5C43 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
8.6−12 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8

C0958 23617 5C41 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0960 23615 5C3F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0961 23614 5C3E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0962 23613 5C3D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0963 23612 5C3C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0964 23611 5C3B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0965 23610 5C3A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0966 23609 5C39 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0968 23607 5C37 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0980 23595 5C2B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0981 23594 5C2A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0982 23593 5C29 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0983 23592 5C28 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0988 23587 5C23 A 7 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0989 23586 5C22 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0992 23583 5C1F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0993 23582 5C1E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0995 23580 5C1C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0997 23578 5C1A E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1000 23575 5C17 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1002 23573 5C15 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1010 23565 5C0D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1011 23564 5C0C A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1012 23563 5C0B A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1030 23545 5BF9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1032 23543 5BF7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1033 23542 5BF6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1040 23535 5BEF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1041 23534 5BEE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1042 23533 5BED E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1043 23532 5BEC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1044 23531 5BEB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.6−13

8 Configuration

C1045 23530 5BEA A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1046 23529 5BE9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1090 23485 5BBD E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1091 23484 5BBC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1092 23483 5BBB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1093 23482 5BBA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1094 23481 5BB9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1095 23480 5BB8 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C1096 23479 5BB7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1098 23477 5BB5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1099 23476 5BB4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1100 23475 5BB3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1101 23474 5BB2 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1103 23472 5BB0 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1104 23471 5BAF A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1120 23455 5B9F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1121 23454 5B9E A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1122 23453 5B9D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1123 23452 5B9C A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1124 23451 5B9B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1125 23450 5B9A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1126 23449 5B99 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1127 23448 5B98 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1128 23447 5B97 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1129 23446 5B96 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1140 23435 5B8B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1141 23434 5B8A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1144 23431 5B87 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1145 23430 5B86 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1146 23429 5B85 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1149 23426 5B82 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1150 23425 5B81 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1151 23424 5B80 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C1153 23422 5B7E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1154 23421 5B7D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1155 23420 5B7C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1157 23418 5B7A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1158 23417 5B79 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1159 23416 5B78 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1160 23415 5B77 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1162 23413 5B75 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1163 23412 5B74 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
8.6−14 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Configuration 8

C1167 23408 5B70 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1168 23407 5B6F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1170 23405 5B6D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1171 23404 5B6C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1173 23402 5B6A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1176 23399 5B67 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1179 23396 5B64 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1190 23385 5B59 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1191 23384 5B58 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1192 23383 5B57 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1196 23379 5B53 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1197 23378 5B52 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1200 23375 5B4F A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1201 23374 5B4E A 3 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1205 23370 5B4A A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1206 23369 5B49 A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1207 23368 5B48 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1215 23360 5B40 A 5 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1216 23359 5B3F A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1217 23358 5B3E E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1220 23355 5B3B A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1223 23352 5B38 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1235 23340 5B2C A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1236 23339 5B2B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1237 23338 5B2A A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1245 23330 5B22 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1246 23329 5B21 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1247 23328 5B20 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1251 23324 5B1C A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1253 23322 5B1A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1254 23321 5B19 A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 8.6−15

8 Configuration

C1258 23317 5B15 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1268 23307 5B0B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1269 23306 5B0A E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1271 23304 5B08 A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1272 23303 5B07 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1290 23285 5AF5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1292 23283 5AF3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1500 23075 5A23 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1501 23074 5A22 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1502 23073 5A21 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1503 23072 5A20 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1504 23071 5A1F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1505 23070 5A1E E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C1506 23069 5A1D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1507 23068 5A1C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1508 23067 5A1B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1509 23066 5A1A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1799 22776 58F8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
8.6−16 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Contents
Contents

9.3.1 General error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3−1
9.3.2 Resetting system error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3−6
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 9−1

Display of operating data, diagnostics 9.1
The dialog box displays important operating parameters and supports you
in diagnosing the drive controller.
9300std230
ƒ You can recognise immediately that a fault has occurred from the
display elements or status information.
– the history buffer in Global Drive Control (GDC) ( 9.2−1) or
– the XT keypad
– and with the "General error messages" table in the "System error
messages" chapter.
ƒ The "General error messages" table provides tips on how to eliminate
an error.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 9.1−1

Troubleshooting 9.2
Status display via controller LEDs 9.2.1
9.2 Troubleshooting
Detecting breakdowns A breakdown can be detected quickly via the LEDs at the controller or via the
status information at the keypad.
Analysing errors Analyse the error using the history buffer. The list of fault messages gives
you advice how to remove the fault. ( 9.3−1)

Red Green
On On Mains switched on and automatic start
inhibited
Off Blinking Controller inhibited
slowly
Blinking Off Undervoltage or overvoltage
quickly
Blinking Off Fault active
slowly
The history buffer can be used to trace faults. The fault messages are stored
in the 8 memory locations in the order of their occurrence.

9300std230
History buffer
Field Entry Note
location
1 Active fault If the fault is no longer pending or has
2 Last fault been acknowledged:
l The content of memory units 1 7 is
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 9.2−1

9.2 Troubleshooting
History buffer
Field Entry Note
location
l The content of memory units 1 ... 7 is
3 Next to last fault shifted "upwards" by one memory unit.
4 Third to last fault l The content of memory unit 8 is
removed from the history buffer and
can no longer be retrieved.
6 Fifth to last fault l Memory unit 1 is deleted (= no active
7 Sixth to last fault fault).
Explanations
– Only the fault the response of which has the highest priority is entered
(1. TRIP, 2. message, 3. warning).
– The OH7 and OH3 warnings are exceptions. If an OH7 warning is pending and
the OH3 motor temperature threshold is reached, the OH7 warning is
overwritten by the OH3 warning. If the motor temperature decreases again,
the OH7 warning reappears.
l If a fault is immediately followed by another fault for several times, only the
time of the last occurrence is stored.
9.2−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Troubleshooting 9.2
Fault analysis via LECOM status words (C0150/C0155) 9.2.3

{Appl.}
Read only
Bit 0 Not assigned
Bit2 Not assigned
Bit3 Not assigned
Bit4 Not assigned
Bit5 Not assigned
Bit 6 n=0
Bit12 Warning
Bit13 Message
Bit14 Not assigned
Bit15 Not assigned
word)
Display only
Bit 0 Active fault
Bit 1 Mmax reached
Bit 2 Imax reached
Bit 6 TRIP active
Bit 9 Not assigned
Bit 10 Not assigned
Bit 11 Not assigned
Bit 12 Not assigned
Bit 13 Not assigned
Bit 14 Not assigned
Bit 15 Not assigned
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 9.2−3

System error messages 9.3
General error messages 9.3.1
Note!
In the case of a query via system bus (CAN), the fault messages
are represented as numbers (see first column of the table).

No. Display
−−− −−− No fault − −
circuit.
motor overcurrent.
with Imotor>Irmotor
motor overcurrent.
with Imotor>Irmotor
brake resistance.
(C0597 = 3).
low. via C0599.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 9.3−1


No. Display
connected.
(C0582 = 3).
is set too low.
encoder) current
connected.
is set too low.
current
connected contact.
(C0126 = 3).
(C0591 = 3).
(C0592 = 3).
(C0593 = 3).
9.3−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013


No. Display
(C0595 = 3).
the control cables
Lenze.
l Check resolver.
(C0586 = 3).
(C0598 = 3).
(C0594 = 3).
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 9.3−3


No. Display
C0025 ³ 309
8.0 V.
connected.
value encoder at X8 during rotor C0095 = 1 could not be completed 6.8−1
position adjustment successfully.
Note: After an Sd7 fault it is
DC bus)!
Setting:
– for 9300 servo cam in
C0575.
Stegmann company.
9.3−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013


No. Display
adjustment (the error is saved was cancelled. 6.8−1
with mains failure protection) l During rotor position
adjustment with an absolute Note: After an Sd7 fault it is
value encoder the error Sd7 or absolutely required to carry out
SD8 occurred. another rotor position
stage was detected.
values. (C0588 = 3).
values. (C0588 = 3).
C0255. (C0589 = 3).
l Note:
telegrams.
interrupted.
address.
l Note:
telegrams.
interrupted.
sync telegrams.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 9.3−5


No. Display
be identical.
load side
(C0607 = 3).
Representation of the error number:
x 0 = TRIP, 1 = message, 2 = warning
E. g. "2091": An external monitoring function has triggered EEr warning
Response Measures for resetting the fault message

TRIP Note!
If a TRIP source is still active, the pending TRIP cannot be reset.
Resetting the TRIP can be effected by:
l Pressing the keypad XT EMZ9371 BC ð ). Then press ( to re−enable the controller.
l Setting code C0043 = 0.
l Control word AIF
l Control word of system bus (CAN)
After resetting the TRIP, the drive remains at standstill.
Message Danger!
After elimination of the fault, the fault message is cancelled automatically and the drive restarts
automatically.
Warning After elimination of the fault, the fault message is cancelled automatically.
9.3−6 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

DC−bus operation 10
Contents
10 DC−bus operation
Contents
10.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1−1

EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 10−1

Function 10.1
10.1 Function
ƒ DC−bus connections of drive systems enable the exchange of energy

between connected controllers.
ƒ If one or more controllers operate in generator mode (braking
operation), the energy will be fed into the shared DC−voltage bus. The
energy will then be available to the controllers which operate in motor
mode.
ƒ The use of braking units and supply units can be reduced.
ƒ The energy consumption from the three−phase AC mains can be
reduced.
ƒ The number of mains supplies and the related expenses (e.g. wiring)
can be perfectly adapted to your application.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 10.1−1

Conditions for trouble−free DC−bus operation 10.2
10.2 Conditions for trouble−free DC−bus operation
ƒ Distributed supply (parallel mains supply):

– Always use the prescribed mains choke when connecting a controller
to the mains.
– Controllers of the EVx9321 ... EVx9333, 8200 and 8200 vector series
must not be connected to the mains if they are operated in a DC−bus
connection with EVx9335 ... EVx9338 and EVx9381 ... EVx9383
controllers.
ƒ Only controllers with identical mains voltage/DC bus voltage ranges
can be operated in a DC−bus connection:
– Set the mains voltage/DC−bus voltage under C0173.
ƒ 9340 regenerative power supply modules and 9360 DC input modules
cannot be used together in the DC−bus connection.
ƒ Read the documentation for the other controllers connected to the DC
bus with regard to "DC−bus operation".
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 10.2−1

Fuses and cable cross−sections 10.3
10.3 Fuses and cable cross−sections
Note!
ƒ All fuses specified here only have the purpose of
disconnection after a short circuit. For cable protection specific
fuses must be used.
ƒ In the following tables the rated currents of the Lenze fuses
are listed. If other fuses are used, other fuse currents and cable
cross−sections may result.
ƒ We recommend using fuse holders with a signalling contact.
Like this, the entire drive system can be switched off
(inhibited) when a fuse fails.
ƒ Always fuse DC cables using 2 poles (+UG, −UG).

with EN 60204−1
Range Description
Mains DC 460 ... 740 V
Fuses l Only semiconductor fuses.
l If you are using fuses other than those indicated, other fuse currents and
cable cross−sections may result.
Cables l DC cables (+UG, −UG) must always have two−pole insulation.
l Laying systems B2 and C: Use of PVC−insulated copper cables, conductor
temperature < 70 °C, ambient temperature < 40 °C, no bundling of cables or
cores, three loaded cores. The information is a recommendation. Other
designs/laying systems are possible (e.g. according to VDE 0298−4).
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 10.3−1

Inverter DC fuse 14 × 51 DC fuse 22 × 58 Installation in

(EFSGR0xx0AYHx) (EFSGR0xx0AYIx) accordance with
EN 60204−1
Type Mains Rated current of fuse Rated current of fuse +UG, −UG
Laying system
B2 C
[A] [A] [mm2] [mm2]
EVS9321 12 12 1.5 1.5
EVS9322 12 12 1.5 1.5
EVS9323 3/PE 12 12 1.5 1.5
EVS9324 400 V 20 20 1.5 1.5
EVS9325 40 40 4.0 4.0
EVS9326 50 50 6.0 1) 4.0
1) Pin−end connector required, since a maximum cable cross−section of 4 mm2 can be connected to
the inverter.
Inverter DC fuse NH1 DC fuse 22 × 58 Installation in

(EFSGRxxx0ANVx) (EFSGR0xx0AYIx) accordance with
EN 60204−1
Laying system
B2 C
[A] [A] [mm2] [mm2]
EVS9327 100 100 − 25
EVS9328 100 100 − 25
EVS9329 3/PE 200 − − 25
400 V
EVS9330 200 − − 50
EVS9331 200 − − 50

(EFSGRxxx0ANWx) (EFSGR0xx0AYIx) accordance with
EN 60204−1
Laying system
B2 C
[A] [A] [mm2] [mm2]
3/PE
EVS9332 250 − − 95
400 V
10.3−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Distributed supply (several supply points) 10.4
10.4 Distributed supply (several supply points)
Basic circuit diagram K10

L1
L2
L2
N
PE
S2
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
K10
S1
Z1 Z2
JRB
K10 Z3
F7 F8 F9 F10
RB1 RB2 PE +UG -UG L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG
9352 932x … 933x 932x … 933x

PE PE
Z4 U V W U V W
X1 X2
M M
PE 3~ PE 3~
9300vec151
Fig. 10.4−1 Basic circuit diagram of a distributed supply with brake chopper
F1 ... F10 Fusing
K10 Mains contactor
Z1, Z2 Mains choke / mains filter
Z3 Brake resistor
Z4 Brake chopper
S1 Mains supply on
S2 Mains supply off
ƒ Dimension the components according to the requirements of the

DC−bus operation.
Stop!
Set the DC−bus voltage thresholds of the controller (C0173) and
the brake chopper (see documentation of the brake chopper) to
the same values.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 10.4−1

Central supply (one supply point) 10.5
10.5 Central supply (one supply point)

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 F2 F3
Z1
F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9
L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG
9341 - 9343 932x … 933x 932x … 933x
PE
Z2 U V W PE U V W
X1 X2
M M
PE 3~ PE 3~
9300vec152
Fig. 10.5−1 Basic circuit diagram of a central supply with regenerative power supply module
F1 ... F9 Fusing
K10 Mains contactor
Z1 Mains choke / mains filter
Z2 Regenerative power supply module

DC−bus operation.
Note!
ƒ If the supply power of the regenerative power supply module
is not sufficient, the system can be additionally supplied via
the mains connection of further controllers.
ƒ Before connecting the supply module and the controllers read
the Operating Instructions of the regenerative power supply
module.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 10.5−1

Safety engineering 11
Contents
11 Safety engineering
Contents
11.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1−1

11.2 Operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2−1
11.3 Safety relay KSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3−1
11.4 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4−1
11.5 Functional test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5−1
11.5.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5−1
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 11−1

Important notes 11.1
11.1 Important notes
The controllers support the safety functions "Safe torque off" (former
designation "Safe standstill"), "Protection against unexpected start−up", in
accordance with the requirements of control category 3 of ISO 13849−1
(former EN 954−1). Depending on the external interconnection, a standard
up to "category 3" in accordance with ISO 13849−1 is achieved.
Note!
In order to comply with control category 3 in accordance with
ISO 13849−1 (former EN 954−1), the two methods "Pulse inhibit
via safety relay KSR" and "Controller inhibit", which are
independent of each other, have to be used.
ƒ Only qualified personnel may install and commission the Safe torque
off" function.
ƒ All control components (switches, relays, PLC, ...) and the control
cabinet must comply with the requirements of EN ISO 13849−1 and
EN ISO 13849−2. This includes among other things:
– Control cabinet, switches, relays in enclosure IP54!
– All other requirements can be found in EN ISO 13849−1 and
EN ISO 13849−2!
ƒ Wiring with insulated wire end ferrules or rigid cables is absolutely
required.
feedback contact) outside the control cabinet must be protected, e.g.
by a cable duct. It must be ensured that short circuits between the
individual cables cannot occur!
ƒ With the Safe torque off" function no emergency stop can be effected
without additional measures:
– There is neither an electrical isolation between motor and controller
nor a service or repair switch!
– An "Emergency stop" requires the electrical isolation of the conductor
to the motor, e.g. by means of a central mains contactor with
emergency stop wiring.
ƒ If in the case of the "Safe torque off" a force effect is to be expected
from outside, (e.g. sagging of hanging loads), additional measures are
required (e.g. mechanical brakes).
ƒ After the installation the operator has to check the function of the
"Safe torque off" circuit.
– The functional test must be repeated at regular intervals.
– Basically, the inspection intervals depend on the application, the
related risk analysis, and the overall system. The inspection intervals
must not be longer than 1 year.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 11.1−1

Operating mode 11.2
11.2 Operating mode
5V

X11/34
X11/33 K SR
X11/K32
X11/K31
-
~
V
X5/28 W
µC
DIGOUT
PWM
PWM
9300vec100
Fig. 11.2−1 Internal connection of the "Safe torque off" function with 3 electrically isolated
circuits
Area : Pulse inhibit via safety relay KSR; forcibly guided feedback for
monitoring the safety relay
Area : Controller inhibit (X5/28), optional feedback via a digital output
(DIGOUT)
Area : Power output stage
Activating "Safe torque off" The "Safe torque off" status is activated via two different disconnecting
paths which are independent of each other:
1. disconnecting path: Pulse inhibit via safety relay KSR (terminal X11/33,
X11/34)
ƒ In the case of LOW level at terminals X11/33, X11/34, the safety relay
KSR is deactivated.The driver supply of the power section drivers is
interrupted. The inverter no longer receives pulses.
ƒ The disconnection of the safety relay KSR has to be monitored
externally, so that a failure of this disconnecting path can be detected.
X11/K31, X11/K32 is a forcibly guided break contact, i. e. if the safety
relay KSR has been deactivated ("Safe torque off" activated), the
contact is closed.
2. disconnecting path: Controller inhibit by input signal at terminal X5/28
ƒ The input signal at X5/28 is fed to the microcontroller system and the
PWM unit. In the case of LOW level at terminal X5/28, the output of
pulses to the inverter is inhibited in the microcontroller system.
ƒ The disconnecting path "Controller inhibit" can be evaluated optionally
via a digital output. Further information can be gathered from the
chapter "Functional test" ( 11.5−1).
"Safe torque off" is activated if both disconnecting paths are on LOW level.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 11.2−1

11.2 Operating mode
Deactivating "Safe torque An AND operation of the disconnecting paths prevents the drive from
off" restarting if only one disconnecting path is enabled.
"Safe torque off" is deactivated if both disconnecting paths are on HIGH
level.
11.2−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Safety relay KSR 11.3
11.3 Safety relay KSR
Technical data

X11/33
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 11.3−1

Wiring 11.4
11.4 Wiring
Wiring
Danger!
Faulty operation in case of earth faults possible
The correct functioning of the safety function is not ensured if an
earth fault occurs.
ƒ A failure of the safety function can lead to death, severe
injuries or damage to material.
The electrical reference point for the coil of the safety relay KSR
must be connected to the PE conductor system (EN 60204−1,
paragraph 9.4.3)!
Terminal strip X11 Internal wiring / wiring of terminal strip X11

+5 V X11
3 4
3 4
K SR + 34 +
3 3
K 3 1 K 3 2 3 3
33 –
K 3 2 DC 24 V
K32
K 3 1
K31
9300vec103
Fig. 11.4−1 Safety relay KSR
Terminal Function Level / state Electrical data

X11/K32 Safety relay KSR Feedback − pulse inhibit Open contact: Pulse inhibit is See technical data of the
X11/K31 1st disconnecting inactive (operation) safety relay KSR
path Closed contact: Pulse inhibit is
active
X11/33 – coil of safety relay KSR Coil is not carrying any current:
X11/34 + coil of safety relay KSR Coil is carrying current: pulse
inhibit is inactive (operation)
X5/28 Controller inhibit Controller enable/inhibit LOW: Controller inhibited LOW: 0 ... +3 V
(DCTRL−CINH) HIGH: Controller enabled HIGH: +12 ... +30 V
2nd Input current at +24 V:
disconnecting 8 mA
path
Reading and processing
the input signals − 1/ms
(mean value)
Terminal data Wiring of the terminals X11/34, X11/33, X11/K32, X11/K31, X5/28:
Leitungstyp Wire end Cable cross−section Tightening Stripping
ferrule torque length
Rigid — 2,5 mm2 (AWG 14)
0,5 ... 0,6 Nm
With plastic 5 mm
Flexible 2,5 mm2 (AWG 14) (4.4 ... 5.3 lb−in)
sleeve
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 11.4−1

Functional test 11.5
11.5 Functional test
Danger!
Unexpected start−up of the machine possible
The "Safe torque off" safety function provides protection against
an unexpected start−up of the drive and therefore is an
important item within the safety concept for a machine. It has to
be ensured that this function works correctly.
ƒ Death, severe injury, or damage to material assets, when the
safety function fails.
After the installation and at regular intervals, the operator has to
check the function of the "Safe torque off" circuit.
ƒ When doing this, check both disconnecting paths separately
with regard to their disconnection capability.
ƒ The functional test can be carried out manually or
automatically via the PLC.
ƒ Basically the inspection interval depends on the application
and the corresponding risk analysis, as well as on the system
as a whole. It should not exceed 1 year.
ƒ If the functional test shows impermissible states,
– the drive or the machine has to be shut down immediately.
– commissioning is not permitted until the safety function
operates correctly.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 11.5−1

11.5.2 Manual safety function check
For the functional test, check both disconnecting paths separately.

1. disconnecting path: Pulse inhibit via safety relay KSR
How to proceed during the test:
1. Alternately apply LOW and HIGH level to input X11/34 and check the
states given in the table below.
Specification Correct status
Individual test Input relay activation (X11/34) Output feedback (X11/K31)
Pulse inhibit LOW HIGH
Pulse enable HIGH LOW
The individual tests are passed if the correct states given in the table result.
2. disconnecting path: Controller inihibit

Requirement for the test:
ƒ "Quickstop" (QSP) function deactivated
ƒ "Automatic DC injection brake" deactivated (C0019 = 0)
ƒ Pulses enabled by the safety relay KSR (X11/34 = HIGH)

1. Set controller inhibit (X5/28 = LOW).
2. Define a setpoint nset > 0.
3. Check that the motor is not rotating.
The individual test is passed if the motor does not rotate.
Functional test not passed

If an individual test results in an impermissible status, the functional test is
not passed.
ƒ The drive or machine has to be shut down immediately.
ƒ Commissioning is not permitted until the safety function operates
correctly.
11.5−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Monitoring the safety function with a PLC 11.5.3
11.5.3 Monitoring the safety function with a PLC
DC 24 V
9300
Z1 S2 S1
IN 1 X11/34
IN 2 X11/33 K SR
IN 3 X11/K32
IN 4 X11/K31
RFR
X5/28
µC
DIGOUT
PWM
PWM
9300vec104
Fig. 11.5−1 Circuit diagram for monitoring the safety function with a PLC
S1, S2 Separate disconnection options of the two disconnecting paths
KSR Safety relay
X11/34 Safety relay control
X11/33 Safety relay control (GND)
X11/K32 Forcibly guided feedback contact (24 V)
X11/K31 Forcibly guided feedback contact
DIGOUT Digital output for evaluating the motor current
X5/28 Controller inhibit
IN 1 − 4 Digital inputs
Requirements The following conditions must be met:

ƒ The PLC must be programmed such that the complete system is set to a
safe state immediately when the function check leads to an
impermissible state.
ƒ The parameter setting of a digital output must be such that you can
conclude to the output current Imotor of the drive (see parameterisation
example).
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 11.5−3

Example: Parameterising a In the following we will show you a possibility of parameterising a digital
digital output
output, so that a conclusion with regard to the motor current is provided.
Sequence Parameter Note
1. Configure function block CMP3
(comparator)
l Connect CMP3−IN1 to C0693/1 = 5004
MCTRL−IACT
FCODE−472/1
l Configure the function IN1 < IN2 C0690 = 3
2. Configure output signal of CMP3 C0117/4 = 10660
l Connect DIGOUT4 to CMP3−OUT
3. Enter function block CMP3 in the
processing table
l Select a free space in the C0465/2 = 10660
processing table
In the Lenze setting, for instance
space 2 of the processing table is
free
4. Set the current threshold C0472/1 = 2.00 IMotor = 0 ® DIGOUT4 = HIGH
l Set the current threshold for IMotor ¹ 0 ® DIGOUT4 = LOW
Irated_FI to 2 %
11.5−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Functional test within the For the functional test, check both disconnecting paths separately.
inspection interval

Individual test X5/28 Setpoint Output DIGOUT
Controller inhibit LOW nset > 0 HIGH
Controller enable HIGH LOW

not passed.
correctly.
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 11.5−5

Accessories (overview) 12
Contents
12 Accessories (overview)
Contents

EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 12−1

General accessories 12.1
12.1 General accessories
Accessories Designation Order number

Communication LECOM−LI (optical fibre) EMF2102IBCV003
modules LECOM−B (RS485) EMF2102IBCV002
LECOM−A/B (RS232/485) EMF2102IBCV001
LON EMF2141IB
INTERBUS EMF2113IB
INTERBUS−Loop EMF2112IB
Operating module keypad XT EMZ9371BC
Diagnosis terminal (keypad XT in handheld design, IP20) 1) E82ZBBXC
Other Connecting cable 2.5 m E82ZWL025
5m E82ZWL050
10 m E82ZWL100
Parameterisation/operating software »Global Drive Control« ESP−GDC2
(GDC)
PC system bus adapter EMF2173IB
(Voltage supply via DIN connection)
PC system bus adapter EMF2173IB−V002
(Voltage supply via PS2 connection)
(Voltage supply via PS2 connection, electrical isolation)
PC system bus adapter USB EMF2177IB
CAN repeater EMF2176IB
PC system cable RS232 5m EWL0020
10 m EWL0021
Optical fibre adapter (standard output power) EMF2125IB
Optical fibre adapter (increased output power) EMF2126IB
Power supply unit for optical fibre adapter EJ0013
Optical fibre, single−core, black PE sheath (basic protection), EWZ0007
sold by the meter
Optical fibre, single−core, red PUR sheath (reinforced EWZ0006
protection), sold by the meter
Setpoint potentiometer ERPD0010k0001W
Rotary knob for setpoint potentiometer ERZ0001
Scale for setpoint potentiometer ERZ0002
Digital display EPD203
Encoder cable 2.5 m EWLE002GX−T
5.0 m EWLE005GX−T
10.0 m EWLE010GX−T
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 12.1−1


Connecting cable for digital frequency coupling 2.5 m EWLD002GGBS93
1) Additional connecting cable required
Tip!
12.1−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Type−specific accessories 12.2
12.2 Type−specific accessories
9300 EVS9321 EVS9322 EVS9323 EVS9324

Accessories Order No.
Mains choke EZN3A2400H002 EZN3A1500H003 EZN3A0900H004 EZN3A0500H007
Mains filter
Category C2 EZN3A2400H002 EZN3A1500H003 EZN3A0900H004 EZN3A0500H007
EN 61800−3
Category C1 EZN3B2400H002 EZN3B1500H003 EZN3B0900H004 EZN3B0500H007
EN 61800−3
Brake chopper EMB9352−E EMB9352−E EMB9352−E EMB9352−E
Brake resistor ERBD180R300W ERBD180R300W ERBD082R600W ERBD068R800W
Shield mounting kit
Control cable EZZ0015 EZZ0015 EZZ0015 EZZ0015
Motor cable EZZ0016 EZZ0016 EZZ0016 EZZ0016
Mounting kit for EJ0036 EJ0036 EJ0037 EJ0037
push−through
technique
9300 EVS9325 EVS9326 EVS9327 EVS9328

Mains choke EZN3A0300H013 ELN3−0150H024−001 ELN3−0088H035−001 ELN3−0075H045
Mains filter
EN 61800−3 E82ZN22334B230 E82ZN22334B230
E82ZZ15334B230 1)
Category C1 EZN3B0300H013 EZN3B0150H024 E82ZN22334B230 E82ZN22334B230
EN 61800−3 E82ZZ15334B230 1) EZN3B0080H042
EZN3B0110H030U 2)
Brake resistor ERBD047R01k2 ERBD047R01k2 ERBD033R02k0 ERBD022R03k0
Shield mounting kit
push−through
technique
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 12.2−1

9300 EVS9329 EVS9330 EVS9331 EVS9332

Mains choke ELN3−0055H055 ELN3−0038H085 ELN3−0027H105 ELN3−0022H130
Mains filter
Category C2 E82ZN30334B230 E82ZN55334B230 E82ZN75334B230 E82ZN75334B230
EN 61800−3 EZN3A0055H060 EZN3A0030H110 EZN3A0022H150 EZN3A0022H150
EZN3A0030H110N001 3)
Category C1 E82ZN30334B230 EZN3B0030H110 E82ZN75334B230 E82ZN75334B230
EN 61800−3 EZN3B0055H060 EZN3B0022H150 EZN3B0022H150
Brake chopper EMB9352−E 2 × EMB9352−E 2 × EMB9352−E 3 × EMB9352−E
Brake resistor ERBD018R03k0 2 × ERBD022R03k0 2 × ERBD022R03k0 3 × ERBD022R03k0
Shield mounting kit
Motor cable EZZ0017 ˘ ˘ ˘
push−through
technique
12.2−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Appendix 13
Contents
13 Appendix
Contents
13.1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1−1

13.2 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2−1
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 13−1

Appendix 13
Glossary 13.1
Terminology and abbreviations used 13.1.1
13.1 Glossary
13.1.1 Terminology and abbreviations used
Cross−reference to a chapter with the corresponding

page number
AC AC current or AC voltage
AIF Automation interface

AIF interface, interface for communication modules
CE Communauté Européene
Controller Any frequency inverter, servo inverter, or DC speed

controller
Cxxxx/y Subcode y of code Cxxxx

(e. g. C0404/2 = subcode 2 of code C0404)
DC DC current or DC voltage
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung(German Institute

for Standardization)
Drive Lenze controller in combination with a geared

motor, a three−phase AC motor, and other Lenze
drive components
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EN European standard
fr [Hz] Rated motor frequency
Ia [A] Current output current
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
Imains [A] Mains current
Imax [A] Maximum output current
IP International Protection Code
IPC Industrial PC
IPE [mA] Discharge current
Ir [A] Rated output current
L [mH] Inductance
Mr [Nm] Rated motor torque
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
PDC [kW] Power that can be additionally taken from the DC

bus if a power−adapted motor is used for operation
PLC Programmable control system
Ploss [W] Power loss of inverter
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 13.1−1

13 Appendix
13.1 Glossary
Pr [kW] Rated motor power
R [W] Resistance
SN [kVA] Controller output power
UDC [V] DC supply voltage
UL Underwriters Laboratories
UM [V] Output voltage
Umains [V] Mains voltage
VDE Verband deutscher Elektrotechniker (Association of

German Electrical Engineers)
Xk/y Terminal y on terminal strip Xk (e. g. X5/28 =

terminal 28 on terminal strip X5)
13.1−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Appendix 13
Index 13.2
13.2 Index
A Code table, 8.4−1
Acceleration time, 8.4−3, 8.4−12 Commissioning, 6−1

− Before switching on, 6.2−1
Accessories, 12−1
− Entry of motor data, 6.5−3
− General, 12.1−1
− Switch on, 6.3−1
− Type−specific, 12.2−1
Communication modules, 5.12−1
Activating the incremental encoder, 6.6−1
Compensation equipment, Interaction with, 5.2−3
Actual motor current, 8.4−5
Configuration, 8−1
Actual motor voltage, 8.4−5
− Analog input signals, 6.9−3
Actual speed, 8.4−5 − Analog output signals, 6.9−4
Additional setpoint, 8.4−4 − Analog outputs, 6.9−4
− Code table, 8.4−1
Ambient conditions
− Controller inhibit (DCTRL1−CINH), 6.4−1
− Climatic, 3.1−1
− Digital input signals, 6.9−1
− electrical, 3.1−2
− Digital output signals, 6.9−2
− Mechanical, 3.1−2
− Digital outputs, 6.9−2
Analog inputs − Display functions, 9.1−1
− Configuration, 5.8−9 − Monitoring
− Signals, 6.9−3 Current load of controller (Ixt monitoring), 8.2−5
− Terminal assignment, 5.8−9 DC−bus voltage, 8.2−11
Heatsink temperature, 8.2−10
Analog outputs Monitoring times for process data input objects, 8.2−3
− Configuration, 6.9−4 − monitoring, 8.2−1
− Signals, 6.9−4 bus off, 8.2−3
current load of the motor (I2 x t monitoring), 2.2−1, 8.2−7
− Terminal assignment, 5.8−9
motor temperature, 8.2−6
Application as directed, 1.2−1 reset node, 8.2−3
− Monitoring functions, Motor temperature, 2.2−1
− monitoring functions
B overview, 8.31
Basic function, 8.4−2 responses, 8.2−1
Bus off, 8.2−3 − Relay output, 6.9−2
− Table of attributes, 8.6−1
− Thermal motor monitoring, 2.2−1
C
Conformity, 1.2−1
Cable
Control cable, 5.3−3
− For control connections, 5.3−3
− for the motor connection, 5.2−8, 5.3−1 Control connections, Analog inputs, configuration, 5.8−9
Cable cross−section, Motor cable, 5.2−9 Control terminals, 5.8−1
Cable cross−sections, 10.3−1 − Changing the assignment of X5, 6.9−1
− Changing the assignment of X6, 6.9−1
− mains connection, 5.4−6, 5.5−5, 5.6−5, 5.7−5
Controller
CAN bus identifiers, 8.4−14
− Adaptation to mains, 6.5−2
CE conformity, 1.2−1
− Application as directed, 1.2−1
CE−typical drive system, 5.4−1, 5.5−1, 5.6−1, 5.7−1 − Identification, 1.2−1
Central supply. Siehe DC−bus connection Controller inhibit
Changing parameters − Drive behaviour, 6.4−1
− EMZ9371BC keypad, 7.2−8, 7.2−9 − Terminal assignment, 5.8−9
− Keypad EMZ9371BC, 7.2−5, 7.2−7, 7.2−10 Current characteristics, current derating, 3.4−1
Code, 7.1−1 Current controller adjustment, 6.7−1
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 13.2−1

13 Appendix
13.2 Index
Current derating, 3.4−1 E

Current load of controller, Ixt monitoring, 8.2−5 E.l.c.b., 5.2−3
Current load of the motor, I2 x t monitoring, 2.2−1, 8.2−7 − operation at, 5.2−3
Earth fault in motor cable (OC2), 8.2−4
D Earth−leakage circuit breaker, 5.2−3
DC supply, 5.3−1, 5.4−4, 5.5−3, 5.6−3, 5.7−3 − operation at, 5.2−3
DC−bus connection Electrical installation, system bus (CAN), 5.9−1
− Central supply, 10.5−1 EMC, what to do in case of interferences, 5.3−6
− Distributed supply, 10.4−1 Emergency−off, Controller inhibit, 6.4−1
DC−bus operation, 10−1 EMZ9371BC keypad, changing parameters, 7.2−8, 7.2−9
− Conditions, 10.2−1
EN 61000−3−2, 3.1−2, 5.2−1
− Several drives, 10−1
− operation on public supply systems, 5.2−1
DC−bus voltage, 8.2−11, 8.4−5
Entry of motor data, 6.5−3
− Monitoring, 8.2−11
Error analysis
− Overvoltage, 8.2−11
− Via history buffer, 9.2−1
− Undervoltage, 8.2−11
− via LECOM status word, 9.2−3
Deceleration time, 8.4−3, 8.4−12
Error messages, 9.3−1
Definition of notes used, 1.4−1 − causes and remedies, 9.3−1
Definitions, Terms, 13.1−1 − configuration, 8.31
Device control, 8.4−2 − General, 9.3−1
− Resetting, 9.3−6
Device protection, 2.3−2
Exceeding of the maximum speed (NMAX), 8.2−4
Diagnostics, 7.2−11, 9.1−1
Explanations, Code table, 8.4−1
Digital frequency input, connection to X9, 5.11−1
External error (EEr), 8.2−11
Digital frequency output, connection to X10, 5.11−1
Digital input signals, 6.9−1 F
Digital inputs, Terminal assignment, 5.8−9 Failure of a motor phase, 8.2−4
Digital inputs/outputs, Terminal assignment, 11.4−1 Fault analysis
Digital output signals, 6.9−2 − Via history buffer, 9.2−1
− via LECOM status word, 9.2−3
Digital outputs
− Configuration, 6.9−2 Fault messages, causes and remedies, 9.3−1
− Terminal assignment, 5.8−9 Fault responses, 8.2−1
Dimensions, 3.1−2, 4.1−3, 4.1−5, 4.2−3, 4.2−5, 4.3−3, Feedback system, wiring, 5.10−1
4.4−3
field controller, 8.4−5
Discharge current, Mobile systems, 5.2−4 Free spaces, 3.1−2
Display, operating status, 9.2−1 Function keys, keypad XT EMZ9371BC, 7.2−4
Display functions, 9.1−1 Functional test, safety function, 11.5−2, 11.5−5
Disposal, 2.1−3 Fuses, 10.3−1
Distributed supply, 10.4−1 − mains connection, 5.4−6, 5.5−5, 5.6−5, 5.7−5
Drive behaviour
− Controller inhibit, 6.4−1 G
− Influence of the motor cable length, 5.2−8 General accessories, 12.1−1
13.2−2 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Appendix 13
Index 13.2
General data, 3.1−1, 7.2−1 K

Keypad EMZ9371BC, Changing parameters, 7.2−5, 7.2−7,
H 7.2−10
Harmonic currents Keypad XT EMZ9371BC
− Limitation according to EN 61000−3−2, 5.2−1 − function keys, 7.2−4
− limitation in accordance with EN 61000−3−2, 3.1−2 − status display, 7.2−3
Heatsink temperature, monitoring, 8.2−10 KSR safety relay, Terminal assignment, 5.8−9
History buffer, 9.2−1 KTY motor monitoring, 6.5−15
I L
Identification, Controller, 1.2−1 Leakage inductance, 8.4−6
Imax limit, 8.4−3 LECOM, status word (C0150/C0155), 9.2−3
Incremental encoder LED display, 9.2−1
− At X8, 5.10−3, 6.6−1
Legal regulations, 1.2−1
− With TTL level, 5.10−3, 6.6−1
Liability, 1.2−2
Input signals
Light−emitting diodes, 9.2−1
− Analog, Configuration, 6.9−3
− Digital, Configuration, 6.9−1 Limit class C1/C2, 5.2−6
Inputs
− Digital, Response times, 6.9−1 M
− KTY, 6.5−15 Mains, controller adaptation, 6.5−2
− PTC, 6.5−14
Mains choke, Assignment to standard device, 5.2−7,
Installation 5.4−7, 5.5−6, 5.6−6, 5.7−6
− Mechanical Mains connection, 5.3−1, 5.4−4, 5.5−3, 5.6−3, 5.7−3
Cold plate technique, 4.1−4, 4.2−4
Standard mounting 45 kW, 4.3−2 − AC mains, 3.1−2
Standard mounting 55 ... 75 kW, 4.4−2 − DC mains, 3.1−2
Thermally separated mounting (push−through technique) Mains filter, Assignment to standard device, 5.2−7, 5.4−7,
45 kW, 4.3−3
5.5−6, 5.6−6, 5.7−6
Thermally separated mounting (push−through technique)
55 ...75 kW, 4.4−3 Manufacturer, 1.2−1
− mechanical, thermally separated (push−through Max. mains voltage range, 3.1−2
technique) 15 ... 30 kW, 4.2−3
Maximum speed, 8.4−2
Interaction with compensation equipment, 5.2−3
Interferences, eliminating EMC interferences, 5.3−6
IT system, 5.2−2
J
JOG setpoint, 8.4−4
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 13.2−3

13 Appendix
13.2 Index
Mechanical installation Motor cable overcurrent (OC1), 8.2−4

− Cold plate technique, 4.1−4, 4.2−4 Motor connection, 3.1−2
− Standard mounting 45 kW, 4.3−2
Motor monitoring, 2.2−1
− Standard mounting 55 ... 75 kW, 4.4−2
− thermally separated (push−through technique) 15 ... 30 motor pot, 8.4−12
kW, 4.2−3 Motor protection, 2.3−2
− Thermally separated mounting (push−through technique)
45 kW, 4.3−3 Motor stator resistance, 8.4−6
− Thermally separated mounting (push−through technique) Motor temperature, monitoring, 8.2−6
55 ...75 kW, 4.4−3
Motor type selection, 8.4−6
Menu structure, XT EMZ9371BC keypad, 7.2−12
Mounting conditions
Message, 8.2−1
− Dimensions, 3.1−2
Mobile systems, 5.2−4 − Free spaces, 3.1−2
Monitoring, 8.2−1 − Mounting place, 3.1−2
− bus off, 8.2−3 − Mounting position, 3.1−2
− configuring, 8.31 − Weights, 3.1−2
− Current load of controller, Ixt monitoring, 8.2−5 Mounting place, 3.1−2
− current load of the motor, I2 x t monitoring, 2.2−1, 8.2−7 Mounting position, 3.1−2
− DC−bus voltage, 8.2−11
− Earth fault in motor cable (OC2), 8.2−4
− Exceeding of the maximum speed (NMAX), 8.2−4
N
− External error (EEr), 8.2−11 Nameplate, 1.1−3
− Failure of a motor phase (LP1), 8.2−4 Network of several drives, Function, 10.1−1
− Heatsink temperature, 8.2−10
Noise optimised operation, 8.4−3
− Monitoring times for process data input objects, 8.2−3
− motor cable overcurrent (OC1), 8.2−4 Notes, definition, 1.4−1
− motor temperature, 8.2−6
− possible responses, 8.31 O
− reset node, 8.2−3 Operating conditions, 3.1−1, 7.2−1
− responses, 8.2−1 − Ambient conditions
message, 8.2−1 Climatic, 3.1−1
TRIP, 8.2−1 Mechanical, 3.1−2
warning, 8.2−1
− ambient conditions, electrical, 3.1−2
Monitoring functions − Mounting conditions
− Motor temperature, 2.2−1 Dimensions, 3.1−2
− Overview, 8.31 Free space, 3.1−2
Mounting place, 3.1−2
− responses, 8.2−1 Mounting position, 3.1−2
Monitoring times for process data input objects, 8.2−3 Weight, 3.1−2
Motor, thermal monitoring, with PTC thermistor, 6.5−14, Operating mode of the motor control, 8.4−2
6.5−15 Operating status, display, 9.2−1
motor, Thermal monitoring, Sensorless, 2.2−1 Operation, at earth−leakage circuit breaker, 5.2−3
Motor cable, 5.2−8, 5.3−1 Operation on public supply systems, EN 61000−3−2, 5.2−1
− Cable cross−section, 5.2−9
Optimisation of the controller and mains load, 5.2−5
− for trailing cable, 5.2−9
− Influence of the length, 5.2−8 Output signals
− length, 3.1−2 − Analog, Configuration, 6.9−4
− max. length, 5.2−7 − Digital, Configuration, 6.9−2
− permanently installed, 5.2−9 Outputs
− permissible length, 5.2−8 − Analog, 6.9−4
− Specification, 5.2−8 − Digital, 6.9−2
13.2−4 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

Appendix 13
Index 13.2
Overview, Accessories, 12−1 Safe torque off, 11.1−1

Overvoltage threshold, DC−bus voltage, 8.2−11 − device variant with, 5.8−5
− device variant without, 5.8−4
− functional test, 11.5−2, 11.5−5
P
− operating mode, 11.2−1
Parameter setting, 7−1
− safety relay, 11.3−1
− code, 7.1−1
− with bus system, 7.1−2 Safety, safety engineering, 11−1
− With XT EMZ9371BC keypad, 7.2−1 Safety engineering, 11−1
Pollution, 3.1−1 Safety function
Power system, 3.1−2 − functional test, 11.5−2, 11.5−5
Process controller adaptation, 8.4−13 − Safe torque off, 11.1−1
Process input words, 8.4−36 Safety instructions, 2−1

− definition, 1.4−1
Process output words, 8.4−36
− layout, 1.4−1
Protection against unexpected start−up, 11.1−1
Safety relay, 11.3−1
− operating mode, 11.2−1
− Connector X11
− safety relay, 11.3−1
Terminal assignment, 11.4−1
Protection of persons, 2.3−1 Wiring, 11.4−1
− with earth−leakage circuit breaker, 5.2−3 Safety relay KSR, Terminal assignment, 11.4−1
PTC motor monitoring, 6.5−14 Selection of the feedback system, 8.4−3
Setting the feedback system, 6.6−1
Q
Setting the speed feedback, 6.6−1
QSP deceleration time, 8.4−7
Site altitude, 3.1−2
R Status display, keypad XT EMZ9371BC, 7.2−3

Rated motor power, 8.4−6 Status word, 8.4−9
Rated motor voltage, 8.4−6 − LECOM (C0150/C0155), 9.2−3
Reaction times of digital inputs, 6.9−1 Supply conditions, 5.4−6, 5.4−7, 5.5−5, 5.5−6, 5.6−5,
5.6−6, 5.7−5, 5.7−6, 10.3−1
Reduce noise emissions, 5.2−6
Supply forms, IT system, 5.2−2
Relay output, Configuration, 6.9−2
Supply forms / electrical supply conditions, 5.2−1
Residual hazards, 2.3−1
Switch on, 6.3−1
Resolver, Connecting, 5.10−2, 6.6−1
Switch−on, check before switching on, 6.2−1
Resolver polarity check, 6.8−2
System bus (CAN), wiring, 5.9−1
Responses, 8.2−1
− message, 8.2−1 System error messages, 9.3−1
− TRIP, 8.2−1 − configuration, 8.31
− warning, 8.2−1 − General, 9.3−1
Rotor position adjustment, 6.8−1, 6.8−2 − Resetting, 9.3−6
S T
Safe standstill, 11.1−1 Table of attributes, 8.6−1
EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013 13.2−5

13 Appendix
13.2 Index
Technical data, 3−1 Type−specific accessories, 12.2−1

− Current characteristics, device protection through
current derating, 3.4−1
U
− General data, 3.1−1
Undervoltage threshold, DC−bus voltage, 8.2−11
− Operating conditions, 3.1−1
Terminal assignment
− Analog inputs, 5.8−9
V
− Analog ouputs, 5.8−9 Vpi current controller, 8.4−5
− Controller inhibit, 5.8−9 Vpn speed controller, 8.4−5
− Digital inputs, 5.8−9
− Digital inputs/outputs, 11.4−1 W
Warning, 8.2−1
− KSR safety relay, 5.8−9
− Safety relay KSR, 11.4−1 Warranty, 1.2−2
Terminal data, 5.8−2, 11.4−1 Weights, 3.1−2
Terms Wiring
− controller, 13.1−1 − digital frequency input to X9, 5.11−1
− Definitions, 13.1−1 − digital frequency output to X10, 5.11−1
− drive, 13.1−1 − in the control cabinet, 5.3−4
− Mobile systems, 5.2−4
Thermal monitoring, motor
− outside of the control cabinet, 5.3−5
− Sensorless, 2.2−1
− system bus (CAN), 5.9−1
− with PTC thermistor, 6.5−14, 6.5−15
Wiring according to EMC, 5.4−1, 5.5−1, 5.6−1, 5.7−1
Tni current controller, 8.4−5
Tnn speed controller, 8.4−5
X
TRIP, 8.2−1
XT EMZ9371BC keypad, Menu structure, 7.2−12
Troubleshooting, 9.2−1
Troubleshooting and fault elimination, 9−1
− Monitoring, 8.2−1
Current load of controller (Ixt monitoring), 8.2−5
DC−bus voltage, 8.2−11
Monitoring times for process data input objects, 8.2−3
− monitoring
bus off, 8.2−3
reset node, 8.2−3
responses, 8.2−1
13.2−6 EDSVS9332S EN 6.0−07/2013

01
© 09/2013
Germany Germany
( +49(0)51 54 /82−0 ( 008000/ 2446877 (24 h helpline)
Ê +49(0)51 54 /82 − 28 00 Ê +49(0)5154/ 82−11 12
ü www.Lenze.com
EDSVS9332S § .M)* § EN § 6.0−07/2013 § TD06

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Global Drive
EDSVS9332S−EXT
.FZ9
Ä.FZ9ä
System Manual
(Extension)
9300 0.37 ... 75 kW
EVS9321xS ... EVS9332xS
Servo inverter

Contents
1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.1 How to use this System Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−3
1.1.1 Information provided by the System Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−3
1.1.2 Document history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−4
1.1.3 Products to which the System Manual applies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−5
1.2 Definition of notes used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−6
2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−1
2.1 Configuration with Global Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−3
2.2 Basic configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−4
2.2.1 Changing the basic configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−5
2.2.2 Speed control C0005 = 1XXX (1000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−6
2.2.3 Torque control with speed limitation 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−11
2.2.4 Master frequency coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−13
2.2.5 Speed synchronism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−25
2.2.6 Angular synchronism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−26
2.3 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−36
2.3.1 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−36
2.3.2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−36
2.4 Change of the terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−37
2.4.1 Freely assignable digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−37
2.4.2 Freely assignable digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−39
2.4.3 Freely assignable analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−39
2.4.4 Freely assignable monitor outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−40
3 Function library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−1

3.1 Working with function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−3
3.1.1 Signal types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−3
3.1.2 Elements of a function block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−4
3.1.3 Connecting function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−6
3.1.4 Entries into the processing table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−10
3.2 Function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−12
3.2.1 Table of function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−12
3.2.2 Table of free control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−14
3.2.3 Addition block (ADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−16
3.2.4 Automation interface (AIF−IN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−17
3.2.5 Automation interface (AIF−OUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−20
3.2.6 Analog inputs via terminal X6/1, X6/2 and X6/3, X6/4 (AIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−22
3.2.7 AND operation (AND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−24
3.2.8 Inverter (ANEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−28
3.2.9 Analog output via terminal 62/63 (AOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−29
3.2.10 Arithmetic block (ARIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−31
l EDSVS9332S−EXT EN 2.0 i
Contents
3.2.11 Arithmetic block (ARITPH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−32

3.2.12 Analog signal changeover switch (ASW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−33
3.2.13 Holding brake (BRK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−35
3.2.14 System bus (CAN−IN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−40
3.2.15 System bus (CAN−OUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−41
3.2.16 Comparator (CMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−42
3.2.17 Signal conversion (CONV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−47
3.2.18 Angle conversion (CONVPHA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−50
3.2.19 Angle conversion (CONVPHPH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−51
3.2.20 Speed conversion (CONVPP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−52
3.2.21 Characteristic function (CURVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−53
3.2.22 Dead band (DB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−56
3.2.23 Control of the drive controller (DCTRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−57
3.2.24 Master frequency input (DFIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−62
3.2.25 Digital frequency output (DFOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−65
3.2.26 Digital frequency ramp function generator (DFRFG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−69
3.2.27 Digital frequency processing (DFSET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−75
3.2.28 Delay elements (DIGDEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−81
3.2.29 Freely assignable digital inputs (DIGIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−84
3.2.30 Freely assignable digital outputs (DIGOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−85
3.2.31 First order derivative−action element (DT1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−86
3.2.32 Free piece counter (FCNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−87
3.2.33 Free digital outputs (FDO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−88
3.2.34 Freely assignable input variables (FEVAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−90
3.2.35 Fixed setpoints (FIXSET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−95
3.2.36 Flipflop element (FLIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−97
3.2.37 Gearbox compensation (GEARCOMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−100
3.2.38 Limiting element (LIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−101
3.2.39 Internal motor control (MCTRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−102
3.2.40 Mains failure control (MFAIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−111
3.2.41 Motor phase failure detection (MLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−122
3.2.42 Monitor outputs of monitoring system (MONIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−123
3.2.43 Motor potentiometer (MPOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−125
3.2.44 Logic NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−128
3.2.45 Speed setpoint conditioning (NSET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−130
3.2.46 OR operation (OR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−135
3.2.47 Oscilloscope function (OSZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−138
3.2.48 Process controller (PCTRL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−142
3.2.49 Angle addition block (PHADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−145
3.2.50 Angle comparator (PHCMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−146
3.2.51 Actual angle integrator (PHDIFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−148
3.2.52 Signal adaptation for angle signals (PHDIV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−149
3.2.53 Phase integrator (PHINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−150
ii EDSVS9332S−EXT EN 2.0 l
Contents
3.2.54 Delay element (PT1−1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−156

3.2.55 CW/CCW/QSP linking (R/L/Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−157
3.2.56 Homing function (REF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−158
3.2.57 Ramp function generator (RFG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−164
3.2.58 Sample and hold function (S&H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−166
3.2.59 S−shaped ramp function generator (SRFG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−167
3.2.60 Output of digital status signals (STAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−169
3.2.61 Control of a drive network (STATE−BUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−170
3.2.62 Storage block (STORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−171
3.2.63 Multi−axis synchronisation (SYNC1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−175
3.2.64 Edge evaluation (TRANS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−183
4 Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−1

4.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−3
4.2 Speed control (C0005 = 1000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−4
4.3 Torque control with speed limitation (C0005 = 4000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−7
4.4 Master frequency − Master − Drive (C0005 = 5000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−9
4.5 Master frequency bus − slave − drive (C0005 = 6000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−12
4.6 Master frequency cascade − slave − drive (C0005 = 7000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−14
5 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−1
5.1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−3
5.1.1 Terminology and abbreviations used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−3
5.2 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−5
l EDSVS9332S−EXT EN 2.0 iii

Contents
iv EDSVS9332S−EXT EN 2.0 l
Preface and general information
1 Preface
Contents
l EDSVS9332S−EXT EN 2.0 1−1

1−2 EDSVS9332S−EXT EN 2.0 l

How to use this System Manual
Target group
This System Manual addresses to all persons who dimension, install, commission, and set 9300
servo inverters.
Together with the System Manual, document no. EDSVS9332S, and the catalogue, it forms the basis
for project planning for the manufacturer of plants and machinery.
Contents
The System Manual (Extension) completes the System Manual, document no. EDSVS9332S:
l The features and functions are described in detail.
l It describes additional possible applications in detail.
l Examples describe how to set the parameters for typical applications.
l In case of doubt always the mounting instructions supplied with the 9300 servo inverter are
valid.
Contents of the System Manual Contents of the System Manual (Extension)
1 Preface 1 Preface
2 Safety −
4 Mounting the standard device −
5 Wiring the standard device −
6 Commissioning −
8.3 Code table 2.3 Modes of operation
8.4 Selection lists 2.4 Change of the terminal assignment
9 Troubleshooting and fault elimination −
11 Safe standstill −
12 Accessories −

How to find information

Use the System Manual as the basis. It contains references to the corresponding chapters in the
System Manual Supplement:
l Each chapter is a complete unit and comprehensively informs about a subject.
l The Table of Contents and Index help you to find all information about a certain topic.
l Descriptions and data of other Lenze products (Drive PLC, Lenze geared motors, Lenze
motors, ...) can be found in the corresponding catalogs, Operating Instructions and manuals.
The required documentation can be ordered at your Lenze sales partner or downloaded as
PDF file from the Internet.
) Note!
Information and tools concerning the Lenze products can be found in the download
area under
http://www.Lenze.com 1

.FZ9 2.0 03/2012 TD23 Error corrections
13296208 1.0 05/2010 TD23 Extended by functions for software version 8.0
Error correction
Division of the System Manual into 2 parts (EDSVS9332S and
EDSVS9332S−EXT)


This documentation is valid for 9300 servo inverters as of nameplate data:
Nameplate
EVS 93xx − x S Vxx 1x 8x
Product series

400V 480 V
9321 = 0.37 kW 0.37 kW
9322 = 0.75 kW 0.75 kW
9323 = 1.5 kW 1.5 kW
9324 = 3.0 kW 3.0 kW
9325 = 5.5 kW 5.5 kW
9326 = 11 kW 11 kW
9327 = 15 kW 18.5 kW
3928 = 22 kW 30 kW
9329 = 30 kW 37 kW
9330 = 45 kW 45 kW
9331 = 55 kW 55 kW
9300vec112
9332 = 75 kW 90 kW
Design
Model
S= Servo inverter
Variant
− Standard
V100 = For IT systems
V104 = With "safe standstill" function and for IT systems
Hardware version
Software version

Definition of the notes used
1.2 Definition of notes used
All safety information given in these instructions has the same layout:
Pictograph (indicates the type of danger)
} Signal word! (indicates the severity of danger)

Note (describes the danger and explains how to avoid it)
Pictograph Signal word Consequences if disregarded

Signal word Meaning

Danger! Impending danger for persons Death or severe injuries
Warning! Possible, very dangerous situation for Death or severe injuries

Dangerous electrical voltage persons

General danger
Caution! Possible, dangerous situation for
persons
Injuries

Stop! Possible damage to material Damage of the drive system or its
environment

Note! Useful tip
If you observe it, handling of the drive
system will be easier.

Configuration
2 Configuration
Contents
2.2.2 Speed control C0005 = 1XXX (1000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−6
2.2.3 Torque control with speed limitation 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−11
2.2.4 Master frequency coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−13
2.2.5 Speed synchronism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−25
2.2.6 Angular synchronism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−26
2.3 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−36
2.3.2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−36
2.4 Change of the terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−37
2.4.1 Freely assignable digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−37
2.4.2 Freely assignable digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−39
2.4.3 Freely assignable analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−39
2.4.4 Freely assignable monitor outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−40

Configuration

Configuration
Configuration with Global Drive Control
2.1 Configuration with Global Drive Control
With Global Drive Control (GDC), a program for the PC, Lenze offers an easy−to−understand,
clearly−laid−out and convenient tool for configuring your application−specific drive task.
Function block library

GDC provides a clear overview of the function blocks (FB) available in a library. GDC also lists the
complete assignment of a function block.
Signal configuration
Signals can be configured in a single dialog box. This is a convenient way
l to display every FB as a block diagram.
l to see the assignment of all signal inputs at a glance.
l to enter the FB in the processing table.
l to print your signal configuration.
Terminal assignment
Freely assignable terminals can be configured using two dialog boxes:
l Dialog box − to link digital inputs and outputs.
l Dialog box − to link analog inputs and outputs.

Configuration
Basic configurations
2.2 Basic configurations
( Stop!
It is possible to load predefined basic configurations via code C0005. If you load a
configuration via C0005, the assignment of all inputs and outputs will be overwritten
with the corresponding basic configuration.
Adapt the function assignment to the wiring.
The internal signal processing is adapted to the drive task by selecting a predefined basic
configuration. You can, for instance, use the Lenze setting for speed control.
l A detailed description of the basic configurations with terminal assignments, signal flow
diagrams, and application examples can be found in chapter "Application examples".
l Before loading a basic configuration via C0005, the controller must be inhibited.
Several predefined signal configurations can be loaded by using code C0005. The selection numbers
have the following meaning:
C0005 = X X X X
Control
0 − Terminal control
1 − Control via LECOM A/B/LI
3 − Control via AIF (INTERBUS,PROFIBUS)
5 − Control via system bus (CAN)
Voltage source for the control terminals

0 − External supply of control terminals
1 − Internal supply of control terminals
Additional function
0 − No additional function
1 − Brake control via digital output X5/A2
9 − At quick stop (QSP) deceleration of the complete drive system to zero speed in an angle−controlled
mode
Basic function
1 − Speed control
4 − Torque control with speed limitation
5 − Master for digital frequency coupling
6 − Slave on digital frequency bus
7 − Slave on digital frequency cascade

Configuration

If the basic configuration must be changed for a special application, proceed as follows:
1. Select a basic configuration via C0005 which largely meets the requirements.
2. Add functions by:
– Reconfiguring inputs and/or outputs.
– Setting parameters for function blocks. ( 3−4)
– Inserting or removing function blocks. ( 3−10)
) Note!
If you change the signal flow of the basic configuration, e. g. by adding function
blocks, C0005 is set to 0. The display indicates "COMMON".

Configuration
2.2.2 Speed control C0005 = 1XXX (1000)

For standard applications, with the default settings you can commission the drive immediately. In
order to adapt it to specific requirements, observe the notes in the following sections.
2.2.2.1 Setpoint selection
Main setpoint
Via the setpoint nset (display in C0046) the speed is defined, relating to the value nmax (C0011) which
can be set. The setpoint is specified in a bipolar analog manner via input X6/1,2. By the settings
carried out, the drive runs with the speed set in C0011 if a master voltage of 10 V is selected. If you
want to actuate the drive at master voltages with low voltages you can adapt the system via codes
C0026/1 (offset) and C0027/1 (gain).
Alternatively you can also specify the setpoints via
l Keyboard,
l Integrated system bus (CAN),
l Automation interface (LECOM, InterBus, Profibus DP, RS 232,
RS 485, optical fibre).
Which input is active as setpoint source depends on the configuration selected in C0005, or the
setpoint source can be set via configuration code C0780 in the NSET function block.
Current master value

If the analog main setpoint is to be specified as current master value via X6/1,2, you can select the
current setting range with code C0034:
l For −20 mA … +20 mA: C0034 = 2
l For 4 … 20 mA: C0034 = 1 (can only be used in unipolar mode)
If the range 4…20 mA has been selected, the error message Sd5 appears when the value is lower
than 2 mA.
The signal conditioning for this is effected in function block AIN1.
The change−over from the voltage master value to the current master value (current load 242R) has
to be effected via the jumper position at X3:
l Voltage master value/potentiometer:
– Jumper X3 in the lower position (default setting)
l Current master value:
– Jumper X3 in the upper position
JOG setpoints
If you require specific fixed settings as main setpoint, you can call parameterisable setpoints from
the memory via the JOG inputs. JOG setpoints replace the main setpoint. The JOG setpoints are
entered in a relative manner in % of nmax. If you set input E3 to HIGH signal, the main setpoint is
switched off and at the same time the first JOG setpoint is activated. A total of 15 JOG setpoints can
be selected.

Configuration
Inverting the main setpoint

Via terminals E1 and E2 the main setpoint can be inverted (i.e. the sign of the input value is changed).
The following applies:
E1 E2 Main setpoint
0 0 Drive executes QSP (quick stop)
1 0 Main setpoint not inverted
0 1 Main setpoint inverted
1 1 Drive maintains its previous state
Acceleration and deceleration times for the main setpoint path

The main setpoint is controlled via a ramp function generator. Like this, input steps can be converted
to a ramp.
The acceleration time and deceleration time refer to a change in speed from 0 to nmax (0% to 100%).
The calculation of the times Tir (C0012) and Tif (C0013) to be set is described in the NSET function
block description.
Additional acceleration and deceleration times

For the ramp function generator of the main setpoint (NSET−N/JOG setpoint) you can call additional
acceleration and deceleration times from the memory via the NSET−TI*x inputs, e.g. to change over
the acceleration speed of the drive from a specific speed. For this, these inputs have to be assigned
to a signal source. A maximum of 15 additional acceleration and deceleration times can be
programmed.
S−shaped ramp function generator characteristic

For the ramp function generator of the main setpoint you can select two different characteristics via
C0134:
l Linear characteristic for all acceleration processes requiring a constant acceleration
l S−shaped characteristic for all acceleration processes requiring a jerk−free acceleration
Code Parameter Meaning

C0134 0 Linear characteristic
1 S−shaped characteristic
C0182 0.01 … 50.0 s Ti −time for the S−shaped ramp function generator
C0012 0.00 … 999.9 s Tir −time for the acceleration
C0013 0.00 … 999.9 s Tif −time for the deceleration
Additional setpoint
Via input X6/3,4 (or also another signal source) an analog additional setpoint (bipolar) can be
connected. The additional setpoint (display in C0049) internally first goes to the NSET function block
via an analog switch. Here the additional setpoint first is lead across a facility for inversion. This facility
for inversion is deactivated. Furthermore there is a ramp function generator (acceleration and
deceleration times via C0220/C0221) before the additional setpoint is linked with the main setpoint
in the arithmetic block. The additional setpoint for instance can be used as a correcting signal for
grinding machines (for controlling a constant circumferential speed when the grinding wheel
diameter is decreased).
If you want to use the additional setpoint, set code C0190 to the desired arithmetic link. According
to the default setting, code C0190 is parameterised to 0. Thus the additional setpoint is switched off.

Configuration
Selection of direction of rotation

The selection of direction of rotation results from the sign of the speed setpoint at the input
MCTRL−N−SET of the MCTRL function block.
In turn, the sign of this speed setpoint results from
l the sign of the main and additional setpoint,
l the level position at terminals E1 and E2,
l the selected link of the main and additional setpoint via the arithmetic block in the NSET
function block

Configuration
Limitation of the speed setpoint

The speed setpoint is always limited to 100% nmax (C0011) in the MCTRL function block. This m
eans
that the maximum speed is always specified to the greatest speed possible in C0011.
Example:
With this configuration a speed of 4500 rpm is to be travelled. The speed is to be corrected in the
range from 0 to +10% using the additional setpoint. At inputs X6/1,2 and X6/3,4 a master voltage of
0 to +10 V is provided.
The following parameter setting results from this:
l C0011 = 5000 rpm, C0190 = 1 (addition)
l C0027/1 = 90%
l C0027/2 = 10%
Code C0909 presents another possibility of influencing the speed limit. Here the direction of rotation
can be specified:
l C0909 = 0 ³ clockwise and counter−clockwise rotating direction permitted
l C0909 = 1 ³ only clockwise rotating direction permitted
l C0909 = 2 ³ only counter−clockwise rotating direction permitted
For systems that only permit one rotating direction this serves to prevent the drive from rotating
backwards which would be caused by the setpoint.
Additional torque setpoint

For some applications it may be required to apply an additional torque setpoint.
Example: An acceleration connection for winding and positioning applications:
For this purpose, the input MCTRL−M−ADD is provided. This input is not active by default (is on
FIXED0%). To use this input, an analog signal source has to be assigned to it.
Torque limitation
The torque can be limited in the range from 0 to +100% via code C0472/3.
Every other signal source can be assigned as well.
Actual speed value feedback

In this configuration all specified actual value encoders can be used. The corresponding actual value
encoder can be selected via code C0025. An adjustment is not required.

Configuration
Quick stop (QSP)

When the quick stop function is activated, the drive runs to speed 0 via the ramp set in C0105 and
executes a holding torque with a drift−free standstill. The torque limitation and the additional torque
setpoint have no effect. This means that the drive outputs the maximum possible torque (observe
settings of motor data). When the QSP request is cancelled, the drive synchronises to the current
speed.
Controller inhibit (CINH)

By setting controller inhibit the drive becomes torqueless, the machine coasts. When the controller
inhibit request is cancelled, the drive synchronises to the current speed.
Shutting down the controller via TRIP (TRIP−SET)

With LOW signal at terminal X5/E4, the controller can be shut down via the monitoring function. This
input mainly serves to evaluate external binary encoders.
The response to this input signal can be programmed.
Resetting a fault (TRIP−RESET)

With a LOW−HIGH edge at terminal X5/E5 a pending TRIP can be reset if the cause of the fault has
been eliminated.

Configuration
2.2.3 Torque control with speed limitation 4000

The drive is set to torque control with the configuration C0005 = 4XXX "Torque control with speed
limitation". The torque can be provided in both directions.
The speed in the different operating cases is monitored using the n−controllers via a speed limitation.
2.2.3.1 Function
If the actual speed is within its limitation, the drive is torque−controlled. If one of the speed limits (CCW
or CW rotation) is reached, the drive becomes speed−controlled.
2.2.3.2 Setpoint input
Torque setpoint
The torque setpoint is entered via the analog terminal X6/3,4. When all motor data are entered
correctly, the drive provides 100 % of the possible torque (C0057) in the positive direction (CW) with
an input voltage of +10 V (corresponding to 100 % in negative direction (CCW) with −10 V).
If you want to operate the controller with a lower master voltage, you can adapt the system via the
codes C0026/2 (offset) and C0027/2 (gain).
Alternatively, you can also enter the setpoints via
l keypad,
l integrated system bus (CAN),
l automation interface (LECOM, InterBus, Profibus DP, RS 232, RS 485, fiber optics).
It depends on the selected configuration C0005, which of these inputs is active as a setpoint source.
The signal source can also be set under the configuration C0891 (MCTRL−M−ADD) in the MCTRL
function block.

Configuration
Speed setpoint (speed limits)

The speed limitation is carried out via the n−controllers in the MCTRL function block. The first speed
controller (main speed controller) is the upper speed limit and the second speed controller is the lower
speed limit.
Example:
The speed can be within a range of "5000 rpm.
+5000rpm (CW rotation) is the upper limit and −5000 rpm (CCW rotation) is the lower limit. The
parameter setting is explained below.
The upper speed limit is provided via the analog terminal X6/1,2. This input can be used as a speed
setpoint e.g. in the threading in winding systems, wire−drawing machines, etc.
Please observe:
l The torque cannot exceed the input at terminal X6/3,4.
The input voltage must be set to 10 V, if necessary.
l The value cannot fall below the lower speed limit (code C0472/4).
l The setpoint speed is conditioned in the same way as for speed control (C0005=1000).
Reference values:
l When a master voltage of +10 V is entered, the setting under C0011 is the upper speed limit
(CW rotation).
l If −10 V are provided, C0011 is the upper speed limit in CCW rotation.
The lower speed limit is entered under code C0472/4.
Reference values:
l If −100% are entered, the setting under C0011 is the lower speed limit in CCW rotation.
Quick stop (QSP) and controller inhibit (CINH)

See quick stop (QSP) and controller inhibit (CINH).
TRIP−SET and TRIP−RESET

See TRIP−SET and TRIP−RESET.

Configuration
2.2.4 Master frequency coupling

2.2.4.1 General system description
The master frequency coupling described here provides a digital setpoint transmission and
evaluation path between a setpoint source and one or several controllers. Here, the transmission
path can either be used as bus or cascade (see later explanation) for:
l phase−synchronous running
l speed−synchronous running
l speed−ratio synchronism
l Positioning control with driftfree standstill
In each controller the setpoint can be evaluated with a factor and, electrically buffered, be output at
the corresponding master frequency output.
The master frequency coupling is a purely digital setpoint transmission with all the advantages
involved:
l driftfree
l high−precision
l increased interference immunity
A drive system consists of a master and several slaves. For implementing a master frequency
coupling, three configurations are offered:
l master, C0005 = 5XXX (master integrator)
l slave for master frequency bus, C0005 = 6XXX (parallel connection)
l slave for master frequency cascade, C0005 = 7XXX (series connection)
Setpoint conditioning
In the setpoint arm the speed and phase setpoints are processed as absolute values.
Gearbox factors (C0032 and C0033)

The weighting factors C0032 and C0033 are in the setpoint channel of the corresponding drive
(slave). Here, a gearbox factor can be set.
Setting range of factors:
l C0032 from −32767 ... +32767
l C0033 from +1 ... +32767
The quotient is limited to a maximum of ±32767.

Configuration
2.2.4.2 Master configuration
Purpose
The master configuration serves to
l activate the phase control, which is upstream to the speed controller and
l configure the drive as master drive for the master frequency coupling for generating the
master frequency for the slave drives.
The phase control improves the control properties of the drive so that a driftfree standstill is achieved
for e. g. positioning tasks, hoists etc.
Features
The features describe the basic properties of this configuration. Some of them, however, can only
be used after reprogramming.
l Master with the option of signal conditioning as in the configurations C0005 = 1XXX, 4XXX
except the setpoint inversion via terminal X5/E1, X5/E2
l Master frequency output signal is setpoint for slave 0 (master drive) and other slaves
l Setpoint evaluation for slave 0 with a factor (numerator/denominator) and gearbox adaptation
(numerator/denominator). Can be set via
– automation interface or system bus
– motor potentiometer
– other signal source
l External torque limitation possible by means of reconfiguration
l Emergency stop function for the entire drive system possible by means of reconfiguration
(C0005 = 5900)
l Controller enable function causes a reloading of the setpoint integrator with the actual value of
slave 0 (setpoint = actual value)
l Possible interventions for phase trimming and speed correction via
– automation interface or system bus
– analog terminal
– one of the signal sources (function blocks)
l Message "following error limit reached" can be set via code
l TRIP when reaching the phase controller limit
l Speed limit of slave 0 = C0011
l Phase controller influence can be set and switched off via the digital input
l Homing function is possible via zero track or touch probe
l Synchronising to a setpoint is possible via zero track or touch probe
l Synchronising characteristic can be set via ramp−function generator

Configuration
Master integrator (setpoint generation)

The setpoint path is designed according to the configurations 1XXX and 4XXX, but without inverting
the main setpoint via the terminals X5/E1,E2. This means:
l Main setpoint is generated by analogy via terminal X6/1, X6/2
l Additional setpoint is generated by analogy via terminal X6/3, X6/4 (when used, the additional
setpoint must be enabled via C0190)
In this configuration, the setpoint selection refers to the frequency at the master frequency output
X10.
Tip!
The resulting speed setpoint is output at the master frequency output X10. It is the setpoint in terms
of amount and direction of rotation for the following slaves. At the same time it is considered to be
the setpoint for slave 0 (included in the master drive), i.e. for the entire drive system.
The master drive consists of the master integrator and the slave 0. Slave 0 is the first drive at the
master frequency.
Master frequency output X10

The master frequency output simulates an incremental encoder with two 5 V complementary signals
shifted by 90°. The encoder constant (inc/rev.) can be set and scaled in code C0030. Here, the
encoder type 2048 inc/rev. is set as standard.
The output frequency is determined by the speed set in C0011 (nmax) and the encoder constant.
Example:
C0011 = 5000 rpm, C0030 = 4 ³ 4096 inc/rev. setpoint = 100 %
The output frequency is 341.3 kHz (5000/60s × 4096).
With higher speeds, e. g. 8000 rpm in this setting, the output frequency is 564.1 kHz. In this case,
the maximum possible output frequency of 500 kHz would be exceeded. Hence, an encoder
constant with a smaller number of increments must be selected.
Tip!
In principle, the highest possible frequencies should be selected since the 400 kHz range provides
the best resolution.

Configuration
Setpoint conditioning
All settings that follow only refer to this drive, not to the entire drive system.
The setpoint is controlled via the function block DFSET. With this, essential adaptations to the drive
tasks can be done.
The setpoint is evaluated with a factor (numerator/denominator). With this, the ratio can be set with
which the drive is to run to its setpoint. For changing the direction of rotation of the drive, negative
values can be set here.
The denominator is preset via code C0533. The numerator in this setting is selected via the free
control code C0473/1, but can also be selected by every analog source by reprogramming
(reconfiguring).
Another possible adaptation can be done via the gearbox factor (numerator/denominator). With this,
the gearbox ratio of the drive can be set. The denominator is selected via C0033. The numerator is
selected in this configuration via the free control code C0032, but can be selected by every analog
source by reprogramming (reconfiguring).
Speed trimming (additional speed setpoint)

An additional setpoint can be added to the speed setpoint via the control code C0472/5. This serves
to accelerate or decelerate the drive. The input is done in % of nmax. Here, however, every analog
source can be used as signal source.
Purpose:
e. g. input for correction values
Phase trimming
Via the control code C0473/3 an additional setpoint can be added to the phase setpoint. This serves
to move the rotor position forwards or backwards compared to the setpoint (leading or lagging). The
input is done in increments. One revolution is split up into 65535 increments. The phase trimming can
take place in the range "32767 (i.e. "1/2 revolution). Via C0529 a multiplicator can be set, which
serves to expand the setting range.
Example: Phase trimming = DFSET_A_TRIM * C0529
Here, every analog source can also be used as signal source.
100 % correspond to 1/4 revolution = 16383 inc.
Purpose:
e. g. input for correction values

Configuration
Phase offset
Via C0252 a fixed phase offset can be added to the setpoint of the drive. This can be set in the range
±245760000 inc.
Reference:
see phase trimming
Phase adjustment
In some applications it is necessary that the phase leads or lags with increasing speed. For this, an
adjustment of ±1/2 revolution can be entered under C0253. The phase adjustment set is reached at
15000 rpm (linear connection).
QSP at the master

If QSP is set at the master drive, the setpoint (C0050) for all drives is decelerated along the QSP ramp.
The complete drive system can thus be stopped, led by the QSP integrator. If QSP is cancelled before
the drives come to a standstill, the drive system starts to decelerate or accelerate with the value in
C0050 to the speed setpoint at the setpoint integrator.
Unlike the configuration 5900, the phase synchronism between master and slave gets lost in the
configuration 5000.
QSP at the slave 0 (master drive)

If the deceleration ramp is very short and can only be reached with Imax , the phase synchronism gets
lost. A driftfree standstill is obtained. Switching QSP is a continuous operation for the downstream
slaves so that a reversal is possible if the deceleration ramp set at the master is too short for one of
the slave drives (e. g. to high centrifugal mass for the set deceleration ramp).
CINH at the master

If the master drive is inhibited, the actual value of slave 0 is used as setpoint for the other slaves. This
could bring the entire drive system to a standstill led by the coasting slave 0. If the master is
re−enabled before reaching the standstill, the drive system starts to accelerate with the actual speed.
When setting CINH, the phase difference is set to zero.

Configuration
2.2.4.3 Slave for master frequency bus
Purpose
The configuration C0005 = 6XXX for the setpoint bus serves to
l activate the phase control, which is upstream to the speed controller
l change the setpoint signal path to master frequency coupling for phase or speed−synchronous
operation
Master drive with

Master integrator and
Slave 0 Slave 1 Slave2
R R R
Resolver Encoder Resolver Encoder Resolver Encoder
X7 X8 X7 X8 X7 X8
Factor Factor
SWI ö,n − controller ö,n − controller
ö,n − controller
X6 X9 X10 X9 X10 X9 X10
Encoder Encoder Encoder

output output output
Fig. 2−1 Slave for master frequency bus

Configuration
Features
be used by reprogramming.
l Hardware connection of the master frequency input with the master frequency output (so that
any number of drives can be connected in series)
l Setpoint evaluation with a factor (numerator/denominator) for the corresponding slave
(gearbox adaptation). Can be set via an analog signal source:
– Terminal,
– code or
– function block.
l external torque limitation is possible
l QSP function for the individual drive. The setpoint is continued to be output.
l CINH function for the individual drive. The setpoint is continued to be output to the master
frequency output.
– LECOM
– analog terminal
– one of the signal sources (function blocks)

Configuration
Cascading factor (C0473/1 and C0533)

This function is valid only if the configuration is not changed.
The following constants for the master frequency input (X9) can be set under C0425:
l 16384 inc/rev.
l 8192 inc/rev.
l 4096 inc/rev.
l 2048 inc/rev.
l 1024 inc/rev.
l 512 inc/rev.
l 256 inc/rev.
Cascading factors which cannot be raised to the power of two can be assigned via C0473/1 and
C0533. The following connection applies:
C0425 C0473ń1
+
Encoderconstant C0533

l C0473/1: −32767 ... +32767
l C0533: +1 ... +32767
Setpoint conditioning of the slave

The value read by the input Dig.−Set (X9) is the setpoint (speed and phase) for the internal control.
Differences compared to the speed control:
l No setpoint integrator in the setpoint channel
l Change to the JOG value is not possible
l The additional setpoint is not active
l The CW/CCW changeover must be performed via the sign of the gearbox factor
QSP at the slave

If you set QSP at the slave drive, the setpoint (C0050) is decelerated along the QSP ramp. Home
positions get lost. A driftfree standstill is obtained since the set phase is led by the QSP integrator
when switching QSP.
CINH at the slave

If a slave drive is inhibited, the motor is coasting at the friction torque. The master frequency output,
however, continues to output the setpoint for the following slave. If the slave is enabled again, the
drive accelerates to its setpoint. (possibly at the current limit). When CINH is set, the phase
integrators are set to zero. Home positions get lost.
Exception:
If pulse inhibit (IMP) is released due to short−term mains undervoltage (< 500 ms), the phase
integrators are not reset. After mains recovery, the drive is able to follow its setpoint again. A phase
difference which emerged before is balanced.

Configuration
2.2.4.4 Slave for master frequency cascade
Purpose
The configuration C0005 = 7XXX for the setpoint cascade serves to
l activate the phase control, which is upstream to the speed controller
l change the setpoint signal path to master frequency coupling for speed ratio synchronism
Master drive with

Master integrator and
Slave 1 Slave2
Slave 0
R R R
Resolver Encoder Resolver Resolver
X7 X8 X7 X8 X7 X8
Factor Factor
SWI
ö,n − controller ö,n − controller
ö,n − controller
X6 X9 X10 X9 X10 X9 X10
Encoder Encoder Encoder

output output output
Fig. 2−2 Slave for master frequency cascade

Configuration
Features
be used by reprogramming.
l Resolver feedback is possible only
l Evaluation of the setpoint (cascading factor) is possible with a factor (numerator/denominator)
for the master frequency output (and thus for all following drives)
l Other evaluation of the setpoint is possible with a factor (numerator/denominator) for the
corresponding slave (gearbox adaptation). Can be set via an analog signal source (standard:
code C0032, C0033)
l External torque limitation is possible
l The QSP or CINH function in the individual drive do not influence the setpoint for the cascade.
– LECOM,
– analog terminal or
– one of the signal sources (function blocks).

Configuration
Cascading factor (C0473/1 and C0533)

This function is valid only if the configuration is not changed.
The following constants for the master frequency input (X9) can be set under C0425:
l 16384 inc/rev.
l 8192 inc/rev.
l 4096 inc/rev.
l 2048 inc/rev.
l 1024 inc/rev.
l 512 inc/rev.
l 256 inc/rev.
Cascading factors which cannot be raised to the power of two can be assigned via C0473/1 and
C0533. The following connection applies:
l C0473/1: −32767 ... +32767
l C0533: +1 ... +32767
Setpoint conditioning of the slave

The value read from X9, evaluated with C0425, C0473/1 and C0533, is the setpoint (speed and phase)
for the internal control and also the output value at the master frequency output X10.
The setpoint for the corresponding drive can be evaluated via the gearbox factor C0032 and C0033.
The direction of rotation of the corresponding slave can be set via the evaluation factors.
Differences compared to the speed control:
l As standard, there is no setpoint path in the setpoint integrator
l Change to the JOG value is not possible
l The additional setpoint is not active
Feedback system (X7)

Only the resolver can be selected as feedback system.
QSP at the slave

If you set QSP at the slave drive, the setpoint (C0050) is decelerated along the QSP ramp. Home
positions get lost. A driftfree standstill is obtained since the set phase is led by the QSP integrator
when switching QSP.
If the deceleration ramp is very short and can only be obtained with Imax , the phase synchronism gets
lost (e.g. too high centrifugal mass for the set deceleration ramp).
The setpoint for the following slave(s) is continued to be output at the master frequency output.
CINH at the slave

If a slave drive is inhibited, the motor is coasting at the friction torque. The master frequency output,
however, continues to output the setpoint for the following slave. If the slave is enabled again, the
drive accelerates to its setpoint (possibly at the current limit):
The phase difference is set to zero when switching CINH. Home positions get lost.

Configuration
Exception:
If controller inhibit is released due to short−term mains undervoltage (< 500 ms), the phase difference
is not reset. After mains recovery, the drive can follow again its set phase. A phase difference which
emerged before is balanced. The setpoint for the slave(s) is continued to be output at the master
frequency output.

Configuration
2.2.5 Speed synchronism
2.2.5 Speed synchronism

2.2.5.1 How to select the correct configuration
The following slave configurations can be selected for the speed synchronism with the master
configuration C0005 = 5XXX:
l Slave for setpoint bus C0005 = 6XXX;
for only two drives or fixed speed relationships which must be set only once (commissioning)
l Slave for setpoint cascade C0005 = 7XXX;
for more than two drives or simple change of the speed relationship with stretching factors in
the running process
A correction value for the speed synchronism can be changed and displayed via the input
DFSET−N−TRIM in the DFSET function block.
The input can be changed by reconfiguration via:
l analog terminal
l motor potentiometer
l keypad
l automation interface or system bus
The correction value is provided in % of C0011 (nmax).
Deactivate the phase controller for the speed synchronism. This means that the phase−synchronous
running becomes a speed−synchronous running, which results in adding phase errors between the
drives. The phase controller can be deactivated by setting code C0254 to zero.
2.2.5.2 Speed−synchronous running
Purpose
For material transports with very low stretching coefficients, such as paper, metal, etc., the tension
can be set via the gearbox factor C0032/C0033 by oversynchonism in the ‰ range. A specified
tension thus results from the stretching coefficient of the material. For a better operation and higher
accuracy in the digital frequency coupling, we recommend the digital frequency cascade C0005 =
7XXX.
2.2.5.3 Speed ratio synchronism
Purpose
l Stretching systems
l Wire−drawing plants
Example
Extruder system with stretching of plastic threads by a speed ratio synchronism. The stretching is
performed online during the process via a motor potentiometer function.

Configuration
2.2.6 Angular synchronism

Purpose
l Drive concept for positive movements (e.g. packing of bottles on conveyor belts)
l Electrical shaft (e.g. vertical shaft, printing machines with embossing or printing rolls
depending on the format).
Conditions
Configuration C0005 = 6XXX or 7XXX.
In the configurations C0005 = 5XXX the specifications only apply to the slave 0.
Angle−synchronous operation
When the angle controller is active, every controller can perform angle−synchronous, drift−free
angular synchronism with regard to its setpoint. Since in the master frequency cascade the setpoint
of the second slave is conditioned in the first slave and both systems are not synchronous, a fixed
angular offset develops between the motor shafts which, however, does not add up over time.
2.2.6.1 Angle controller
Angle controller adaptation

A value at MCTRL−P−ADAPT affects the gain set in C0254.
Special features
The difference between setpoint and actual angle is supplied to the angle controller. With reference
to the angle it is designed as P controller. Its influence can be set via C0254. C0254 = 0 means the
complete disconnection of the angle controller from the controlled system.
Setting range of C0254 = 0.0001 ... 3.9999, C0254=1.00 and 16384 INC system deviation
(1/4 revolution) correspond to a speed variation of nmax.
The output of the angle controller can be limited via C0472/6. The limitation can also be connected
with another analog signal source.
Angle controller limit

The angle controller limit is fixed to an angular difference of 65531 revolutions. If this angular
difference is exceeded, the angle controller cannot balance the setpoint angle anymore. When
reaching the angle controller limit, a TRIP P13 is generated. The error message can be evaluated
according to its priority.
Note!
When reaching the angle controller limit and monitoring is switched off, the sign at the angle
controller output may reverse.When setting CINH, the angular difference is set to zero.

Configuration
2.2.6.2 Angular trimming

The angular trimming can be changed via C0473/3. It is displayed via C0536/3. Angular trimming can
also be carried out via another analog signal source:
l Analog output of a function block
l Motor potentiometer
l Analog terminal
l Keyboard
l Automation interface or system bus
The input of the angle trimming can be multiplied in C0529.
This serves to change the rotor position by up to 20000 revolutions:
l Negative values = CCW offset
l Positive values = CW offset
Resolution: 65536 inc/rev. = 1 rev. × C0529
2.2.6.3 Following error limit

The absolute value of the following error limit can be set in increments via C0255. The setting range
is: 0 ... 1.8 × 109 increments.
When reaching the following error limit, a signal is generated which is evaluated via "Monitoring". This
signal can be evaluated with the priority (TRIP, MESSAGE or WARNING) required by the user.
When setting CINH, the angular difference is set to zero. Thus, neither the signal "following error limit"
is generated any longer.
2.2.6.4 Processing of the zero pulse (flying synchronising)

If the zero pulses are not used for the master frequency processing, an angular synchronism with a
constant phase offset is achieved.
Initial situation
Master Slave
Dö
F F
Dö = phase offset
n = Speed
Fig. 2−3 Initial situation for zero pulse processing (Döā0ā0)
If this phase offset is to be corrected to 0, either

l homing is required or
l the zero pulses of the master frequency input and the feedback system are to be processed.

Configuration
Target situation
Master Slave
Dö=0
F F
Dö = phase offset
n = Speed
Fig. 2−4 Target situation for zero pulse processing (Döā+ā0)
Conditions for reaching the target situation:

l The function must be activated via code C0534 (function block DFSET)
l The input DFSET−0−PULSE must be triggered with a HIGH signal when the zero pulse is
evaluated once (function block DFSET)
l The angle control must be activated (function block MCTRL)
l The zero pulses must be connected to the Sub−D connectors X9 and X8 (X8 when using an
encoder)
Zero pulse at the setpoint
The set rotor position is specified via the setpoint zero pulse (i.e. when the drive system is running).
It is only synchronised if one setpoint zero pulse and actual zero pulse have occurred before, i.e. not
before the second zero pulse.
Control mode:
The phase offset is compensated via acceleration or deceleration. The direction (acceleration or
deceleration) depends on the detected phase offset. If the rotor is leading in the range from 0 to 180 °,
the drive is synchronised by deceleration. If the rotor is lagging in the range from 0 to 180 °, the drive
is synchronised by acceleration.
Different synchronisation modes
In C0534 you can select between different synchronisation modes.
C0534 Synchronisation mode
1 Continuous synchronisation as described under "Zero pulse at the setpoint" (see page 2−28)
2 Same as selection 1, but DFSET−0−PULSE must be triggered with a LOW−HIGH edge
10 One−time synchronisation; control mode as described under "Zero pulse at the setpoint" (see page 2−28)
11 One−time synchronisation; the drive is always synchronised by clockwise rotation
12 One−time synchronisation; the drive is always synchronised by counter−clockwise rotation
13 One−time evaluation of the setpoint pulse and the actual pulse; the synchronisation direction results from the sign between
setpoint pulse and actual pulse

Configuration
Use of TOUCH−PROBE
Besides the zero pulses of the inputs X9 and the corresponding feedback system, the zero pulse
evaluation can also be derived from the digital inputs X5/E4 (actual value) and X5/E5 (setpoint). The
function is switched from zero pulse evaluation of the encoder (or resolver) to the evaluation of the
inputs X5/E4 and X5/E5 by C0532 = 2.
IMPORTANT:
The inputs X5/E4 and X5/E5 are assigned with TRIP−Set or TRIP−Reset as standard. In this case, the
input terminals must be removed from the function block DCTRL (drive control).
Use of zero pulse for the setpoint and TOUCH−PROBE for the actual value
The zero pulses can also be evaluated via a zero pulse at setpoint input X9 and a TOUCH−PROBE
input X5/E4 (actual value). The function is switched on with C0532 = 3.
Master Slave
Touch probe
1:5 1:5
M R M R
X7 X7
9300 Master 9300 slave
Vwithdrawal 2
− + X10 X9 X10
=
1 Stretch factor
Gearbox Gearbox
E4 E5 28 A1 A4 39 A2 E4 E5 28 A1 A4 39 A2
Ctrl. enable nact=0 Ctrl. enable nact=0
Fig. 2−5 Example for using TOUCH−PROBE

Configuration
2.2.6.5 Referencing
The homing function is available with the configurations 5XXX, 6XXX and 7XXX.. The drive shaft can
be positioned via the homing function. For this purpose, the drive is disconnected from the setpoint
path and follows the profile generator.
REF
C0933
C0932
C0930
C0931
C0934
C0935
C0936
Ref−mark REF−OK
C0921
CTRL REF−BUSY
C0927/2
Ref−on
C0920
C0927/1
REF−N−SET
REF−N−IN
C0923
C0929
REF−PSET
REF−PHI−IN
C0922
C0928
Fig. 2−6 Homing function block (REF)
Homing is started via a rising edge at the digital input "REF−ON" (default setting is assigned to
terminal X5/E3); this input must be applied until the end of the homing process.
After the negative edge has occurred at the input REF−MARK (default setting is assigned to terminal
X5/E2), it is positioned to the home position. This input is intended for a reference switch. The speed
travel profile is created via a profile generator which is integrated in the REF function block. Via this,
the acceleration and deceleration times as well as the speed during the homing process can also be
set.
The home position is defined as follows:
Next zero pulse after the negative edge of the reference switch plus the home position offset
(C09334).
For position feedback via resolver, the zero position (depending on the resolver attachment to the
motor) is used instead of the zero pulse. Accordingly, the touch probe angle is used for homing via
touch probe.
The output signal "REF−BUSY" indicates with HIGH signal, whether the homing function is active.
The output signal "REF−OK" indicates with HIGH signal that homing is completed successfully. This
signal can be scanned via the output terminal X5/A4.
The setpoint outputs for position and speed of the REF function block are connected with the
corresponding setpoint inputs of the function block MCTRL (see signal flow diagram for the
configurations 5XXX, 6XXX and 7XXX). If the homing function is active (input REF−ON = HIGH), the
drive is disconnected from the setpoint path. The drive then follows the profile generator.
During the homing process the input DFSET−SET of the master frequency processing is active. This
is done through the output REF−BUSY of the REF function block. After the homing process is
completed, REF−BUSY=LOW is switched back to master frequency without jerk.
A renewed homing process requires an edge at the input REF−ON.

Configuration
2.2.6.6 Homing modes
Mode 0
Homing with zero pulse/zero position.
Travel in clockwise rotation to the home position. The home position lies at the next zero pulse/zero
position after the negative edge of the reference switch REF−MARK plus the home position offset.
C0934
Zero pulse
Reference switch
REF−MARK
Travel path
Starting point Direction of travel Home position
Fig. 2−7 Homing with zero pulse/zero position; approaching the home position in CW rotation
Mode 1
Homing with zero pulse/zero position.
Travel in counter−clockwise rotation to the home position. The home position lies at the next zero
pulse/zero position after the negative edge of the reference switch REF−MARK plus the home
position offset (C0934).
C0934
Zero pulse
Reference switch
REF−MARK
Travel path
Home position Direction of travel Starting point
Fig. 2−8 Homing with zero pulse/zero position; approaching the home position in CCW rotation
Modes 2 ... 5
Modes 2 ... 5 are reserved.

Configuration
Mode 6
Homing with touch probe.
Travel in clockwise rotation to the home position. The home position lies at the touch probe signal
after the negative edge of the reference switch REF−MARK plus the home position offset (C0934).
C0934
Touch probe
Reference switch
REF−MARK
Travel path
Starting point Direction of travel Home position
Fig. 2−9 Homing with touch probe; approaching the home position in CW rotation
Mode 7
Travel in counter−clockwise rotation to the home position. The home position lies at the TP signal after
the negative edge of the reference switch plus the home position offset.
Mode 8
Travel in clockwise rotation to the home position. The home position lies at the next TP signal plus
the home position offset.
Mode 9
Travel in counter−clockwise rotation to the home position. The home position lies at the next touch
probe signal plus the home position offset.
Note concerning mode 6 to mode 9

In code C0933 you can select the edge of the zero pulse or touch probe signal (LOW → HIGH or
HIGH → LOW) determining the home position.

Configuration
2.2.6.7 Profile generator

The speed travel profile for homing is generated via a profile generator. During the homing process
the target can be changed.
The profile generator generates a speed travel profile with linear ramps.
The following parameters must be entered:
Code Meaning Input
C0930 Gearbox ratio − numerator 1 ... 65535
Numerator of the gearbox ratio between motor and position encoder (motor side)
C0931 Gearbox ratio − denominator 1 ... 65535
Denominator of the gearbox ratio between motor and position encoder (encoder
side)
C0934 Home position offset −2,140,000,000 ... +2,140,000,000 inc
Distance between zero pulse or touch probe and the home position during the
homing process
C0935 Homing speed 0.0001 ... 100.0000 % nmax
Motor speed during the homing process
C0936 Homing Ti time 0.01 ... 990.00 s
Acceleration and deceleration time during the homing process.
Reference: 0 ... nmax or nmax ... 0
The travel profile for homing is determined by entering a percentage speed and an integration time
(Ti) for the ramps. The home position offset is directly entered in increments of the encoder system.
(In this way, complex conversions and the entry of e. g. the feed constant can be avoided)
The home position can be approached in three ways:
l Case 1: High home position offset
l Case 2: Home position offset = 0; the zero pulse has not yet occurred during the homing
process
l Case 3: Home position offset = 0; the zero pulse has occurred once during the homing
process
High home position offset (case 1)

V
C0935 C0936
C0936
t
Reference Zero pulse Home position
switch
Fig. 2−10 Approaching the home position (case 1)

Configuration
Home position offset = 0 (case 2)

The zero pulse has not yet occurred during the homing process (e.g. in case of incremental encoders,
the position is only determined after one revolution):
Home position offset=0

V
C0935
t
Reference
switch Zero pulse= Home position
home position
If the parameter setting or the position of the reference switch have been selected unfavourably, the
drive is unable to directly approach the home position due to a too high moment of inertia. This means
that the drive travels beyond the home position and then back again.
Reversing during the homing process can be prevented by setting the home position offset so that
the path is long enough to decelerate into standstill. The reference switch and the subsequent zero
pulse must be brought forward accordingly.

Configuration
Home position offset = 0 (case 3)

The zero pulse has already occurred once during the homing process.
V
Home position offset=0
t
Zero pulse Reference Zero pulse = home position
switch
If the zero pulse has already occurred once during traversing or if an absolute value encoder (e.g.
ar esolver) is used as an actual value encoder, the drive traverses to its home position along the set
ramp as described in Fig. 2−12Approaching….
Acceleration and deceleration time
The deceleration and acceleration time refers to a change of the output value from 0 to 100%
(C0011). The time C0936 to be set can be calculated as follows:
C0011
C0936=t i @ wC0011
w2 2 * w1
w1
0
ti ti t
C0936 C0936
Fig. 2−13 Calculation of the acceleration and deceleration time
In this case the time desired for the change lies between w1 and w2.
The calculated time is to be entered into C0936.

Configuration
Operating modes
2.3.1 Parameter setting
2.3 Operating modes
By selecting the operating mode you can also select the interface you want to use for parameter
setting or control of the controller.
C0005 contains predefined configurations which allow a very easy change of the operating mode.
Parameters can be set with one of the following modules:

l Communication module
– 2102 (LECOM A/B/LI)
– 2111, 2113 (INTERBUS)
– 2131, 2133 (PROFIBUS)
– 2175 (CANopen/DeviceNet)
l PC system bus module (CAN)
– 2173
2.3.2 Control
The drive controller can be controlled via terminals (X5 and X6), via the fieldbus module at X1 or via
the system bus (X4). Mixed forms are also possible.
Example: C0005 = 1005

This configuration corresponds to a speed control with control via system bus (CAN).
If more inputs of the function blocks are to be controlled via an interface, proceed as follows:
l Assign the function block inputs to be controlled to "control objects" depending on the
interface used (see System Manual):
– Free control codes
in case of control via LECOM A/B/LI (RS232, RS485 or optical fibre interface) or operating
module.
– AIF objects
in case of control using InterBus S or Profibus DP.
– CAN objects
in case of control using system bus.
l Then the inputs can be controlled using these codes or input objects by accessing them via
the interface.
Example for a distribution of the control on terminals and RS232:

The main speed setpoint in the configuration C0005=1
000 is to be controlled via LECOM A/B/LI. All
other inputs remain on terminal control.
1. Select C0780 via LECOM:
– C0780 is the configuration code for the main setpoint NSET−N in the function block "Speed
setpoint conditioning" (NSET).
2. Assign a free control code via a selection number.
– e.g. 19515 (control code C0141)
The main speed setpoint is now controlled by C0141.

Configuration
Change of the terminal assignment
2.4.1 Freely assignable digital inputs
2.4 Change of the terminal assignment
(see also chapter 3.1 "Working with function blocks")

If the configuration is changed via C0005, the assignment of all inputs and outputs is overwritten with
the corresponding basic assignment. If necessary, the function assignment must be adapted to the
wiring.
Tip!
Use the menu "Terminal I/O" for the keypad 9371BB or the menu "Terminal I/O" for Global Drive
Control or LEMOC2.
Stop!
If you reassign an input, the signal source that has been assigned up to know will not be overwritten!
Those active connections that are not required must be removed (see chapter 3.1.3).

Five freely assignable digital inputs are available (X5/E1 … X5/E5). You can define a polarity for each
input which serves to determine the input to be HIGH active or LOW active.
Change assignment:
Tip!
Use the submenu "DIGIN" for the keypad 9371BB or the submenu "Digital inputs" for Global Drive
Control or LEMOC2.

Configuration
Example:
Menu "Terminal I/O; DIGIN" (terminal I/O; digital inputs)
Here are the most important aims for digital inputs
Valid for the basic configuration C0005 = 1000.
Code controlled by Note
CFG Subcode Signal name Signal (interface) Selection list 2
C0885 000 R/L/Q−R DIGIN1 (Term. X5/E1) 0051 HIGH = do not invert main setpoint (CW rotation)
C0886 000 R/L/Q−L DIGIN2 (Term. X5/E2) 0052 HIGH = Invert main setpoint (CCW rotation)
C0787 001 NSET−JOG*1 DIGIN3 (Term. X5/E3) 0053 HIGH = Main setpoint is substituted by the fixed speed from
002 NSET−JOG*2 FIXED0 − 1000 C0039/x
003 NSET−JOG*4 FIXED0 − 1000 The signals are binary coded.
004 NSET−JOG*8 FIXED0 − 1000
C0788 001 NSET−TI*1 FIXED0 − 1000 Additional acceleration and deceleration times from C0101/x
002 NSET−TI*2 FIXED0 − 1000 and C0103/x
003 NSET−TI*4 FIXED0 − 1000 The signals are binary coded.
004 NSET−TI*8 FIXED0 − 1000
C0880 001 DCTRL−PAR*1 FIXED0 − 1000 Parameter set selection:
002 DCTRL−PAR*2 FIXED0 − 1000 The signals are binary coded.
C0881 000 DCTRL−PAR−LOAD FIXED0 − 1000 Signal LOW−HIGH loads selected parameter set with
DCTRL−PAR*x
C0871 000 DCTRL−TRIP−SET DIGIN4 (Term. X5/E4) 0054 LOW = Controller sets TRIP (EEr)
C0876 − DCTRL−TRIP−RES DIGIN5 (Term. X5/E5) 0055 Signal LOW−HIGH = Resets active trip
C0920 000 REF−ON FIXED0 − 1000 HIGH = Start homing
C0921 000 REF−MARK FIXED0 − 1000 LOW−HIGH edge = Stop homing
1. Select the input of the function blocks which is to be assigned to a new source under the
configuration code CFG in the code level.
– Example:
C0787/2 (CFG/subcode) determines the source for the input "NSET−JOG*2" (signal name) in
the function block "Speed setpoint conditioning" (NSET).
2. Change to the parameter level with PRG. Select the source (signal) from the indicated list. Ask
yourself: Where does the signal for controlling this input is to come from?
– Example:
"NSET−JOG*2" is to be controlled by terminal X5/E5 (interface).
– For this, select DIGIN5 (signal) and confirm with SHIFT + PRG.
3. Change to the code level with 2 * .
4. Determine the polarity of the input terminals X5/E1 to X5/E5 (HIGH active or LOW active)
under code C0114 and subcode.
– In the code level the terminal is selected via subcode.
– Change to the parameter level using PRG and select the polarity.
– Change to the code level by 2 * PRG.
5. Repeat steps 1. to 4. until all inputs required are assigned.
6. Remove undesired connections (see chapter 3.1.3). The connection so far of the terminal
X5/E5 is not cancelled automatically. If the connection is to be cancelled:
– Select C0876 in the code level (previous target of terminal X5/E5)
– Change to the parameter level using PRG.
– Select FIXED0 (signal) and acknowledge with SHIFT+PRG.

Configuration
2.4.2 Freely assignable digital outputs
2.4.2 Freely assignable digital outputs

Four freely assignable digital outputs are available (X5/A1 … X5/A4). You can define a polarity for
each input which serves to determine the input to be HIGH active or LOW active.
The most important codes can be found in the submenu: DIGOUT (digital outputs).
Change assignment:
1. Select the output which is to be assigned to another function via the subcode under C0117.
2. Change to the parameter level with PRG. Select the signal from the indicated list, which is to
be output via the selected output terminal. Change to the code level with PRG.
3. Determine the polarity (HIGH active or LOW active) via the subcode of the output under
C0118.
4. Repeat step 1. to 3., until all outputs desired are assigned.
2.4.3 Freely assignable analog inputs

The most important codes can be found in the submenu: AIN1 X6.1/2 or AIN2 X6.3/4 (analog input 1
(X6.1/2) or analog input 2 (X6.3/4))
Change assignment:
1. Select the input of the function block to be assigned to a new source in the code level.
– Example
Determine the source for the input "Main setpoint" (NSET−N) in the function block "Speed
setpoint conditioning" (NSET) under C0780.
2. Change to the parameter level with PRG. Select the signal from the indicated list, which is to
be used for the selected input.
3. Repeat steps 1. and 2. until all inputs required are assigned.
4. Remove unwanted links (see Chapter 3.1.3).

Configuration
2.4.4 Freely assignable monitor outputs
2.4.4 Freely assignable monitor outputs

Use the monitor outputs X6/62 and X6/63 to output internal signals as voltage signals.
Under C0108 and C0109 the outputs can be adapted to e.g. a measuring device or a slave drive.
The most important codes can be found in the submenu: AOUT1 X6.62 or AIN2 X6.63 (analog output
1 (X6.62) or analog output 1 (X6.63))
Change assignment:
1. Select the output to be assigned to another signal (source) (e.g. C0431 for output X6/62) in the
code level.
2. Change to the parameter level with PRG. Select the signal from the indicated list which is to
be output via the monitor output.
3. If necessary, adjust an offset in the hardware under C0109
4. If necessary, the signal gain can be adapted to the hardware under C0108.
5. Repeat steps 1. to 4. to assign the second output.

Function library
3 Function library
Contents
3.1.1 Signal types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−3
3.1.3 Connecting function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−6
3.2 Function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−12
3.2.8 Inverter (ANEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−28
3.2.14 System bus (CAN−IN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−40
3.2.16 Comparator (CMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−42
3.2.22 Dead band (DB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−56
3.2.23 Control of the drive controller (DCTRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−57
3.2.24 Master frequency input (DFIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−62

Function library

3.2.44 Logic NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−128
3.2.46 OR operation (OR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−135
3.2.53 Phase integrator (PHINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−150
3.2.54 Delay element (PT1−1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−156
3.2.56 Homing function (REF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−158
3.2.62 Storage block (STORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−171
3.2.63 Multi−axis synchronisation (SYNC1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−175

Function library
Working with function blocks
3.1.1 Signal types
3.1 Working with function blocks
The signal flow of the controller can be configured by connecting function blocks. The controller can
thus be easily adapted to diverse applications.
3.1.1 Signal types

Each function block has a certain number of inputs and outputs, which can be interlinked.
Corresponding to their respective functions, only particular signal types occur at the inputs and
outputs:
l Quasi analog signals
– Symbol:
– Unit: %
– Designation: a
– Value range: ±16384 = ±100 %
– Resolution: 16 bits, scaling: ±16384 ¢ ±100 %
l Digital signals
– Symbol:
– Unit: binary, with HIGH or LOW level
– Designation: d
– Resolution: 1 bit
l Speed signals
– Symbol:
– Unit: rpm (for display, internal representation in [inc/ms])
– Designation: phd
– Value range: ±215 − 1
l Angle signals
– Symbol:
– Unit: inc
– Designation: ph
– Resolution: 32 bits, scaling: 1 revolution ¢ 65536 inc
Only the same signal types can be connected with each other. Thus, an analog output signal of one
function block can only be connected to the analog output of the other function block. If two different
signal types are connected, the connection will be rejected.

Function library
3.1.2 Elements of a function block
Parameterisation code
Input name FB name
C1100 FCNT1
FCNT1−CLKUP FCNT1−OUT
C1102/1
C1104/1
FCNT1−CLKDWN
C1102/2 Output symbol
C1104/2
CTRL FCNT1−EQUAL
Input symbol C1101/1 FCNT1−LD−VAL
C1103/1
FCNT1−LOAD
C1102/3
C1104/3
FCNT1−CMP−VAL
C1101/2
C1103/2
Configuration code Function
Display code Output name
Fig. 3−1 Structure of a function block (FB) using the example of FCNT1
FB name
Clearly identifies the FB. The FB name is followed by a number distinguishing the function of the FB.
Each FB is defined via its selection number. For calculating the FB the input of the selection number
into the processing table is always required. ( 3−10)
The selection numbers are listed in selection list 5.
Example:
(FCNT1, see Fig. 3−1)
l FCNT1 ¢ selection number 6400 (selection list 5).
Input symbol
Indicates the signal type which can be used as a signal source for this input. ( 3−3)
) Note!
Only inputs led through the FB can be configured.
Input name
Consists of the FB name and a designation. Inputs with the same function are distinguished by the
number that is added to the designation.

Function library
Configuration code
Configures the input with a signal source (e. g. terminal signal, control code, output of an FB, ...).
Inputs with identical codes are distinguished by the attached subcode (Cxxxx/1). These codes are
configured via the subcode.
It is not possible to connect an input with several signal sources.
Display code
Displays the current input value. Inputs with identical codes are distinguished by the attached
subcode (Cxxxx/1). These codes are displayed via the subcode.
Display codes cannot be processed.
Function
Represents the mathematical function as a block diagram (see Fig. 3−1).
Adaptation of the function or behaviour to the drive task. Possible settings are described in the text
editor and / or the line diagrams. ( 3−12)
Output symbol
Designates the signal type. Connections with inputs of the same signal type are possible. ( 3−3)
Each output is defined by a selection number. The selection numbers are divided into selection lists
(1 ... 4) according to the different signal types.
An output is linked to an input by the selection numbers.
Example:
l FCNT1−OUT ¢ selection number 6400 (analog signal, selection list 1).
l FCNT1−EQUAL ¢ selection number 6400 (digital signal, selection list 2).
) Note!
Only outputs brought out of the FB can be configured.
Output name
Consists of the FB name and a designation. Outputs with the same function are distinguished by the

Function library
3.1.3 Connecting function blocks

General rules
l Assign a signal source to an input.
l One input can have only one signal source.
l Inputs of different function blocks can have the same signal source.
l Only signals of the same type can be connected.
( Stop!
Existing connections which are not required must be removed by reconfiguration.
Otherwise the drive cannot perform the desired function.
AND1−IN1 AND1 NOT1

C0820/1 NOT1−IN 1 NOT1−OUT
C0840
C0821/1
AND1−IN2 & C0841
AND1−OUT
C0820/2
NOT2
C0821/2 1
AND1−IN3 NOT2−IN NOT2−OUT
C0820/3 C0842
C0821/3 C0843
C0830/1
OR1−IN1 OR1 X C0720
C0721
DIGDEL1
C0831/1
OR1−IN2 |1 DIGDEL1−IN
OR1−OUT DIGDEL1−OUT
C0830/2 C0723
C0724 0 t
C0831/2
OR1−IN3
C0830/3
C0831/3
Connection is possible
Connection not possible
Fig. 3−2 Correct connection of function blocks

Function library
Basic procedure
1. Select the configuration code of the function block input which is to be changed.
2. Determine the source of the input signal for the selected input
(e.g. from the output of another function block).
3. The function block input is assigned via a menu which contains only those signal sources
which are of the same type as the function block input to be assigned.
4. Select and confirm the signal source.
5. Remove undesired connections, if any.
– For this, select the corresponding signal assignment of the input via the configuration code
(e.g. FIXED0, FIXED1, FIXED0%, ...).
6. Repeat 1. to 5. until the desired configuration is set.
7. Save modified configuration in the desired parameter set.
Example
l Condition:
– Default setting
l Task:
– Square the analog signal of X6/3, X6/4 and output to X6/62.
l Solution:
– You need the function blocks AIN2, ARIT2 and AOUT2.
AIN2
3 AIN2−OUT ARIT2−IN1 C0600 ARIT2
+
C0601/1 "200% C434/1 AOUT1
4 + x
AIN2−OFFSET
C0026/2 C0407
C0602/1
y + − * ARIT2−OUT
C0431
AOUT1−IN +
62
C0409/1 ARIT2−IN2
/ x/(1−y) AOUT1−GAIN +
C0108/1 C0433
C0601/2
AIN2−GAIN
C0027/2 C0408 C0434/3
C0602/2
C0409/2 AOUT1−OFFSET
C0109/1 C0432
C0434/2
Fig. 3−3 Example of a simple configuration

Function library
Create connections
1. Determine the signal source for ARIT2−IN1:
– Change to the code level using the arrow keys
– Select C0601/1 using or .
– Select output AIN2−OUT (selection number 55) using or .
– Confirm using SH + PRG
– Change to the code level again using PRG.
2. Determine signal source for ARIT2−IN2:
– Select C0601/2 using .
3. Parameterise ARIT2:
– Select C0600 using .
– Select multiplication (selection number 3).
4. Determine signal source for AOUT1:
– Select output ARIT2−OUT (selection number 5505).
5. Enter function block ARIT2 in the processing table:
– Select C0465 and subcode 8 using .
– Enter function block ARIT2 (selection number 5505).
– The sequence of the FB processing is thus determined.

Function library
Remove connections
l Since a source can have several targets, there may be additional, unwanted signal
connections.
l Example:
– In the basic configuration C0005 = 1000, ASW1−IN1 and AIN2−OUT are connected.
– This connection is not automatically removed by the settings described above! If you do not
want this connection, remove it.
C0812/1 ASW1
ASW1−IN1 0
C0810/1 ASW1−OUT
ASW1−IN2 1 NSET−NADD
FIXED0% C0810/2
C0812/2
ASW1−SET
FIXED0 C0811
C0813
AIN2
+
C0601/1 "200% C434/1 AOUT1
4 + x
AIN2−OFFSET
C0026/2 C0407
C0602/1
C0431
AOUT1−IN +
62
C0409/1 ARIT2−IN2
C0108/1 C0433
C0601/2
AIN2−GAIN
C0027/2 C0408 C0434/3
C0602/2
C0109/1 C0432
C0434/2
Fig. 3−4 Removing connections in a configuration
1. Remove connection between ASW1−IN1 and AIN2−OUT:

– Select the constant FIXED0% (selection number 1000) using or .
Now, the connection is removed.
2. Save new configuration, if desired:
– If you do not want to lose the modifications after mains disconnection, save the new signal
configuration under C0003 in one of the parameter sets.

Function library
3.1.4 Entries into the processing table

The 93XX drive controller provides a certain computing time for processing function blocks. Since
the type and number of the function blocks used can vary considerably, not all function blocks
available are permanently calculated. Therefore the code C0465 provides a processing table, in
which only the FBs used are entered. This means that the drive system is perfectly adapted to the
task to be solved. If further FBs are used in an extant configuration, they must be entered into the
processing table.
The following aspects must be observed:
The number of FBs to be processed is limited

A maximum of 50 FBs can be integrated into a configuration. Each FB needs a certain processing
time (operating time). The code C0466 shows the time still remaining for processing the FBs. If this
time has elapsed, no further FBs can be integrated.
Sequence for entering FBs

Normally, the sequence of the entries into C0465 is discretionary, but it may be important for
applications with a highly dynamic response. In general the most favourable sequence is adapted
to the signal flow.
Example:
AND1-IN1 AND1
DIGIN DIGIN1 C0820/1
E1
E2 C0114/1...5 DIGIN2 C0821/1
& DIGOUT
E3 DIGIN3 AND1-IN2 AND1-OUT DIGOUT1
0 C0820/2 C0117/1
DIGOUT2 C0118/1...4 A1
E4 DIGIN4 C0117/2
1 C0821/2 DIGOUT3 A2
E5 DIGIN5 AND1-IN3 C0117/3 0
C0820/3 DIGOUT4 A3
C0117/4 1
C0443 C0821/3 A4
C0444/1
C0444/2
C0444/3
C0444/4
OR1-IN1 OR1
C0830/1
C0831/1
OR1-IN2 ≥1 OR1-OUT
C0830/2
C0831/2
OR1-IN3
FIXED0 C0830/3
C0831/3
AND2-IN1 AND2
C0822/1
C0823/1
AND2-IN2 & AND2-OUT
C0822/2
C0823/2
AND2-IN3
FIXED1 C0822/3
C0823/3
Fig. 3−5 Example of a configuration

Function library
Structure of the processing table for the configuration example Fig. 3−5:
1. DIGIN does not have to be entered into the processing table.
2. The first FB is AND1, since it receives its input signals from DIGIN and only has successors.
3. The second FB is OR1, since its signal source is the output of AND1 (predecessor). Hence, the
output signal in AND1 must be generated first, before being processed in OR1. At the same
time, OR1 has a successor. Hence, OR1 must be entered into the processing table before the
successor.
4. The third FB is AND2, since it has a predecessor (see 3.)
5. The entries under C0465 are as follows:
– Position 10: AND1 10500
– Position 11: OR1 10550
This example was started with position 10, since these positions are not assigned in the default
setting.
FBs do not have to be entered into the processing table directly one after the other. Empty positions
in the processing table are permissible.
) Note!
It is also possible that other FBs are entered between the FBs listed in the example.
FBs, which do not have to be entered into the processing table

The following signal sources are always executed and therefore do not need to be entered into the
processing table:
l AIF−IN
l CANx−IN
l DIGIN
l DIGOUT
l FCODE (all free codes)
l MCTRL
l fixed signal sources (FIXED0, FIXED0%, etc.)
Frequent errors
Malfunction Cause Remedy
FB does not supply an output signal FB was not entered into the processing table Enter FB
C0465
FB only supplies constant signals FB was deleted from or overwritten in the Enter FB again, possibly under a different
processing table C0465 subcode (list position)
The output signal does not arrive at the The connection between the FBs has not been Establish the connection (from the view of the
following FB established following FB) via the configuration code (CFG)
FB cannot be entered into the table C0465 Residual processing time is too short Delete unused FBs (e. g. inputs and outputs
(see C0466) not used)
In networked drives, functions may be
assigned to other controllers
The drive controller transmits internally The FBs are processed in an incorrect Adapt the processing table under C0465 to the
calculated signals with a delay to the outputs. sequence signal flow

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.1 Table of function blocks
3.2 Function blocks
Function block Description CPU time used in basic configuration C0005

[ms] 1000 4000 5000 6000 7000 20 21
ABS1 Absolute value generator 4 · ·
ADD1 Addition block 8 ·
AIF−IN Fieldbus — · · · · ·
AIF−OUT Fieldbus 56 · · · · ·
AIN1 Analog input X6/1, X6/2 10 · · · · · · ·
AIN2 Analog input X6/3, X6/4 28 · · · · · · ·
AND1 Logic AND, block1 6 · ·
AND2 Logic AND, block2 · ·
AND3 Logic AND, block3 · ·
AND4 Logic AND, block4 ·
AND5 Logic AND, block5
ANEG1 Analog inverter 1 3 · · · · · · ·
ANEG2 Analog inverter 2 ·
AOUT1 Analog output X6/62 12 · · · · · · ·
AOUT2 Analog output X6/63 · · · · · · ·
ARIT1 Arithmetic block 1 11 · ·
ARIT2 Arithmetic block 2
ARITPH1 32 Bit arithmetic block 15
ASW1 Analog changeover 1 4 · · · ·
ASW2 Analog changeover 2 · ·
ASW3 Analog changeover 3
BRK Trigger holding brake 15
CAN−IN1 System bus —
CAN−IN2 System bus
CAN−OUT1 System bus 56 · · · · ·
CAN−OUT2 System bus
CMP1 Comparator 1 15 · · · · · · ·
CMP2 Comparator 2 · ·
CMP3 Comparator 3 ·
CONV1 Conversion 8
CONV2 Conversion
CONV3 Conversion ·
CONV4 Conversion
CONV5 Conversion ·
CONV6 Conversion
CONVPHA1 32 bit conversion 6
CONVPHPH1 32 bit conversion 80
CONVPP1 32 bit / 16 bit conversion 55
CURVE1 Characteristic function 15
DB1 Dead band 7 ·
DCTRL Device control — · · · · · · ·
DFIN Digital frequency input 5 · · · · · ·
DFOUT Digital frequency output 35 · · · · · · ·
DFRFG1 Digital frequency ramp function generator 40
DFSET Digital frequency processing 85 · · · ·
DIGDEL1 Binary delay element 1 9
DIGDEL2 Binary delay element 2

Function library
Function blocks

[ms] 1000 4000 5000 6000 7000 20 21
DIGIN Input terminals X5/E1...X5/E5 — · · · · · · ·
DIGOUT Output terminals X5/A1...X5/A4 — · · · · · · ·
DT1−1 Differential element 12
FCNT1 Piece counter 11
FEVAN1 Free analog input variable 4
FEVAN2 Free analog input variable
FDO Free digital outputs —
FIXED Constant signals — · · · · · · ·
FIXSET1 Fixed setpoints 9
FLIP1 D−flipflop 1 6 · ·
FLIP2 D−flipflop 2
GEARCOMP Gearbox torsion 1
LIM1 Limiter 5 · ·
MCTRL Motor control — · · · · · · ·
MFAIL Mains failure detection 40 · ·
MLP1 Motor phase failure detection 30
MONIT Monitoring — · · · · · · ·
MPOT1 Motor potentiometer 20
NOT1 Logic NOT, block1 4 · · · ·
NOT2 Logic NOT, block2 · ·
NOT3 Logic NOT, block3 · ·
NOT4 Logic NOT, block4 ·
NOT5 Logic NOT, block5 ·
NSET Speed setpoint conditioning 70 · · · · ·
OR1 Logic OR, block1 6 · · · · ·
OR2 Logic OR, block2 · ·
OR3 Logic OR, block3 ·
OSZ Oscilloscope function 70
PCTRL1 Process controller 58
PHADD1 32 bit addition block 10
PHCMP1 Comparator 8 ·
PHCMP2 Comparator
PHCMP3 Comparator
PHDIFF 32 bit setpoint/act. value comparison 10
PHDIV1 Conversion 8
PHINT1 Phase integrator 7
PHINT2 Phase integrator
PHINT3 Phase integrator 10
PT1−1 1st order delay element 8
CW/CCW/Q QSP / setpoint inversion 8 · · · ·
REF Homing function 100 · · · · ·
RFG1 Ramp function generator 16 ·
S&H Sample and Hold 4
SRFG1 S−shape ramp function generator 15
STAT Digital status signals — · · · · · · ·
STATE−BUS State bus —
STORE1 Memory 1 35
STORE2 Memory 2 20
SYNC1 Multi−axis positioning 55
TRANS1 Binary edge evaluation 7
TRANS2 Binary edge evaluation

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.2 Table of free control codes

[ms] 1000 4000 5000 6000 7000 20 21
FCODE 17 Free control codes — · · · · · · ·
FCODE 26/1 · · · · · · ·
FCODE 26/2 · · · · · · ·
FCODE 27/1 · · · · · · ·
FCODE 27/2 · · · · · · ·
FCODE 32 · · · ·
FCODE 37 · ·
FCODE 108/1 · · · · · · ·
FCODE 108/2 · · · · · · ·
FCODE 109/1 · · · · · · ·
FCODE 109/2 · · · · · · ·
FCODE 135
FCODE 141 · ·
FCODE 250 · ·
FCODE 471 · ·
FCODE 472/1
FCODE 472/2
FCODE 472/3 · · · · ·
FCODE 472/4 ·
FCODE 472/5 · · ·
FCODE 472/6 · · ·
FCODE 472/7
FCODE 472/8
FCODE 472/9 · ·
FCODE 472/10 · ·
FCODE 472/11 · ·
FCODE 472/12
FCODE 472/13
FCODE 472/14
FCODE 472/15
FCODE 472/16
FCODE 472/17
FCODE 472/18
FCODE 472/19
FCODE 472/20
FCODE 473/1 · · · ·
FCODE 473/2 · · ·
FCODE 473/3 · · ·
FCODE 473/4
FCODE 473/5
FCODE 473/6
FCODE 473/7
FCODE 473/8
FCODE 473/9
FCODE 473/10
FCODE 474/1
FCODE 474/2
FCODE 474/3
FCODE 474/4
FCODE 474/5
FCODE 475/2

Function library
Function blocks
Description
This function block converts bipolar signals to unipolar signals.
The absolute value is generated by the input signal and is provided at the output.
ABS1
ABS1-IN ABS1-OUT
C0661
C0662
fb_abs
Fig. 3−6 Absolute value generator (ABS1)

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.3 Addition block (ADD)

Purpose
Adds or subtracts "analog" signal depending on the input used.
± 1 9 9 .9 9 % A D D 1
A D D 1 -IN 1 + A D D 1 -O U T
C 0 6 1 0 /1
C 0 6 1 1 /1 + -
A D D 1 -IN 2
C 0 6 1 0 /2
C 0 6 1 1 /2
A D D 1 -IN 3
C 0 6 1 0 /3
C 0 6 1 1 /3
9300POSADD1
Fig. 3−7 Addition block (ADD1)
Signal Source Note

Name Type DIS DIS format CFG List Lenze
ADD1−IN1 a C0611/1 dec [%] C0610/1 1 1000 Addition input
ADD1−IN3 a C0611/3 dec [%] C0610/3 1 1000 Subtraction input
ADD1−OUT a − − − − − Limited to ±199.99%
Function
l Input ADD1−IN1 is added to input ADD1−IN2.
l The input ADD−IN3 is subtracted from the calculated result.
l Then, the result of the subtraction is limited to ±199.99 %.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.4 Automation interface (AIF−IN)

Purpose
Interface for input signals of the plug−on fieldbus module (e.g. INTERBUS, PROFIBUS) for setpoints
and actual values as binary, analog, or angle information. Please observe the corresponding
Operating Instructions for the plug−on fieldbus module.
A IF -IN
A IF -C T R L .B 3 Q S P D C T R L
A IF -C T R L .B 8 D IS A B L E
A IF -C T R L .B 9 C IN H
A IF -C T R L .B 1 0 T R IP -S E T
A IF -C T R L .B 1 1 T R IP -R E S E T
B it 0 A IF -C T R L .B 0
A IF -C T R L .B 1
A IF -C T R L .B 2
A IF -C T R L .B 4
C o n tro l w o rd
A IF -C T R L .B 5
1 6 b its
A IF -C T R L .B 6
A IF -C T R L .B 7
A IF -C T R L .B 1 2
B it 1 5 A IF -C T R L .B 1 4
C 0 1 3 6 /3
A IF -IN .W 1
B y te 3 ,4
1 6 b its
C 0 8 5 6 /1
1 6 B it
L O W W o rd A IF -IN .D 2
1 6 B it
H IG H W o rd C 1 1 9 7
A u to m a tio n
in te r fa c e X 1 A IF -IN .W 2
1 6 b its
C 0 8 5 6 /2
A IF -IN .W 3
1 6 b its
C 0 8 5 6 /3
A IF -IN .B 0
C 0 8 5 5 /1 A IF -IN .B 2
B y te 5 ,6
1 6 b in a r y
...
s ig n a ls
A IF -IN .B 1 4
A IF -IN .B 1 5
A IF -IN .B 1 6
C 0 8 5 5 /2 A IF -IN .B 1 7
1 6 b in a r y
...
s ig n a ls
A IF -IN .B 3 0
A IF -IN .B 3 1
B y te 7 ,8
1 6 b its
L O W w o rd
A IF -IN .D 1
1 6 b its C 0 8 5 7
H IG H w o rd
AIF−IN1
Fig. 3−8 Automation interface (AIF−IN)

Function library
Function blocks
Signal Source Note

AIF−CTRL.B0 d C0136/3 bin − − −
AIF−IN.W1 a C0856/1 dec [%] − − − +16384 = +100 %
AIF−IN.W2 a C0856/2 dec [%] − − − +16384 = +100 %
AIF−IN.W3 a C0856/3 dec [%] − − − +16384 = +100 %
AIF−IN.D1 ph C0857 dec [inc] − − − 65536 = 1 rev.
AIF−IN.B0 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B1 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B2 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B3 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B4 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B5 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B6 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B7 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B8 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B9 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B10 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B11 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B12 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B13 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B14 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B15 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B16 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B17 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B18 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B19 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B20 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B21 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B22 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B23 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B24 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B25 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B26 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B27 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B28 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B29 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B30 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B31 d C0855/2 hex − − −

Function library
Function blocks
Function
The input signals of the 8−byte user data of the AIF object are converted into corresponding signal
types. The signals can be used via further function blocks.
Byte 1 and 2
Byte 1 and 2 form the control word for the controller. The bits 3, 8, 9, 10, and 11 of these bytes are
directly transferred into the function block DCTRL where they are linked with further signals. The
other 11 bits can be used to control further function blocks.
Byte 3 and 4
form the signal to AIF−IN.W1.
Byte 5, 6, 7, and 8
This user data can be interpreted as different signal types. According to the requirement this data can
be evaluated as up to two analog signals, 32 digital signals or one angle signal. Mixed forms are also
possible.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.5 Automation interface (AIF−OUT)

Purpose
Interface for output signals of the plug−on fieldbus modules (e.g. INTERBUS, PROFIBUS) for
setpoints and actual values as binary, analog or angle information. Please observe the corresponding
A IF -O U T
S T A T
B it 0
S T A T .B 0
C 0 1 5 6 /1
D C T R L -IM P
w o rd
...
1 6 b its
S T A T .B 1 4
C 0 1 5 6 /6
S ta tu s
S T A T .B 1 5
C 0 1 5 6 /7
1 6 b its B it 1 5
A IF -O U T .D 2 L O W w o rd
C 0 8 5 4 B it 0
C 1 1 9 5
1 6 b its
C 1 1 9 6 H IG H w o rd 0
A IF -O U T .W 1 B y te 3 ,4
C 0 8 5 0 /1
3
C 0 8 5 8 /1
A IF -O U T .W 2
C 0 8 5 0 /2
C 0 8 5 8 /2 B it 1 5 A u to m a tio n
A IF -O U T .W 3 in te r fa c e
C 0 8 5 0 /3 B it 0
C 0 8 5 2 X 1
C 0 8 5 8 /3
0
F D O
F D O -0
B y te 5 ,6
C 0 1 1 6 /1 1
1 6 b its
...
2
F D O -1 5 L O W w o rd
C 0 1 1 6 /1 6 3
F D O -1 6
C 0 1 1 6 /1 7 1 6 b its
...
H IG H w o rd
F D O -3 1
C 0 1 1 6 /3 2
C 0 8 5 3
1 6 b its
L O W w o rd 0
A IF -O U T .D 1
C 0 8 5 1
B y te 7 ,8
1
1 6 b its 2
C 0 8 5 9 H IG H w o rd
B it 3 1
AIF−OUT1
Fig. 3−9 Automation interface (AIF−OUT)
Signal Source Note

AIF−OUT.W1 a C0858/1 dec [%] C0850/1 1 1000 +100 % = +16384
AIF−OUT.W2 a C0858/2 dec [%] C0850/2 1 1000 +100 % = +16384
AIF−OUT.W3 a C0858/3 dec [%] C0850/3 1 1000 +100 % = +16384
AIF−OUT.D1 ph C0859 abs [inc] C0851 4 1000 1 rev. = 65536

Function library
Function blocks
Function
The input signals of this function block are copied into the 8−byte user data of the AIF object and
assigned to the plug−on fieldbus module. The meaning of the user data can be determined very easily
with C0852 and C0853 and the corresponding configuration code (CFG).
Byte 1 and 2
Here, the status word from the function block STAT is mapped. Some of the bits are freely assignable
(see description of the function block STAT in chapter 3.2.60)
Byte 3 and 4
l C0854 = 0
– The analog signal at AIF−OUT.W1 is output.
l C0854 = 3
– The LOW−WORD of AIF−OUT.D2 is output.
Byte 5 and 6
l C0852 = 0
– The analog signal at AIF−OUT.W2 is output at bytes 5 and 6.
l C0852 = 1
– The bits 0 ... 15 of FDO are output.
l C0852 = 2
l C0852 = 3
– The HIGH−WORD of AIF−OUT.D2 is output.
Byte 7 and 8
l C0853 = 0
l C0853 = 1
l C0853 = 2
Example
You want to output 16 digital signals of FDO and the LOW−WORD of AIF−OUT.D1:
l The LOW−WORD of AIF−OUT.D1 can only be output at bytes 5 and 6.
– For this purpose, C0852 is set to 2. The angle signal at C0851 is output at bytes 5 and 6.
l For the digital signals, only the bits 16 ... 31 (bytes 7 and 8) are available (bytes 5 and 6 are
assigned):
– For this purpose, C0853 is set to 1. Bits 16 ... 31 (FDO) are output at bytes 7 and 8.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.6 Analog inputs via terminal X6/1, X6/2 and X6/3, X6/4 (AIN)
Purpose
These function blocks are the interface for analog signals as the
l setpoint input,
l actual value input and
l parameter control.
C0034 AIN1
1 + AIN1-OUT
2 +
AIN1-OFFSET
C0402 C0400
C0404/1
AIN1-GAIN
C0403
C0404/2
Fig. 3−10 Analog input via terminal X6/1, X6/2 (AIN1)
Signal Source Note

AIN1−OFFSET a C0404/1 dec [%] C0402 1 19502 −
AIN1−GAIN a C0404/2 dec [%] C0403 1 19504 −
AIN1−OUT a C0400 − − − − −
Special features of AIN1

l A dead band element can be integrated into the output signal at AIN1 via code C0034.
Together with the jumper position X2 (controller front) the function 4 ... 20 mA can be
implemented as a master current value.
l The signal is read cyclically (1 ms).
AIN2
3 + AIN2-OUT
4 +
AIN2-OFFSET
C0407 C0405
C0409/1
AIN2-GAIN
C0408
C0409/2
Signal Source Note

AIN2−GAIN a C0409/2 dec [%] C0408 1 19505 −
AIN2−OUT a C0405 − − − − −
Special feature of AIN2

l The signal is read cyclically every 250 ms.

Function library
Function blocks
Function
l The analog input value is added to the value at input AINx−OFFSET.
l The result of the addition is limited to ±200 %.
l The limited value is multiplied by the value which is applied to input AINx−GAIN.
l Then the signal is limited to ±200%.
l The signal is output at AINx−OUT.
AIN−OUT
AIN−GAIN
ÎÎÎÎÎAIN−OFFSET
IN
Fig. 3−12 Offset and gain of the analog input

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.7 AND operation (AND)

Purpose
With this function digital signals can be logically ANDed. These links can be used to control functions
or to create status information.
AND1-IN1 AND1
C0820/1
C0821/1
AND1-IN2 & AND1-OUT
C0820/2
C0821/2
AND1-IN3
C0820/3
C0821/3
Fig. 3−13 AND operation (AND1)
Signal Source Note

AND1−IN1 d C0821/1 bin C0820/1 2 1000 −
AND1−IN2 d C0821/2 bin C0820/2 2 1000 −
AND1−IN3 d C0821/3 bin C0820/3 2 1000 −
AND1−OUT d − − − − − −
AND2-IN1 AND2
C0822/1
C0823/1
AND2-IN2 & AND2-OUT
C0822/2
C0823/2
AND2-IN3
C0822/3
C0823/3
Signal Source Note

AND2−IN1 d C0823/1 bin C0822/1 2 1000 −
AND2−IN2 d C0823/2 bin C0822/2 2 1000 −
AND2−IN3 d C0823/3 bin C0822/3 2 1000 −
AND2−OUT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
AND3-IN1 AND3
C0824/1
C0825/1
AND3-IN2 & AND3-OUT
C0824/2
C0825/2
AND3-IN3
C0824/3
C0825/3
Signal Source Note

AND3−IN1 d C0825/1 bin C0824/1 2 1000 −
AND3−IN2 d C0825/2 bin C0824/2 2 1000 −
AND3−IN3 d C0825/3 bin C0824/3 2 1000 −
AND3−OUT d − − − − − −
AND4-IN1 AND4
C0826/1
C0827/1
AND4-IN2 & AND4-OUT
C0826/2
C0827/2
AND4-IN3
C0826/3
C0827/3
Signal Source Note

AND4−IN1 d C0827/1 bin C0826/1 2 1000 −
AND4−IN2 d C0827/2 bin C0826/2 2 1000 −
AND4−IN3 d C0827/3 bin C0826/3 2 1000 −
AND4−OUT d − − − − − −
AND5-IN1 AND5
C0828/1
C0829/1
AND5-IN2 & AND5-OUT
C0828/2
C0829/2
AND5-IN3
C0828/3
C0829/3
Signal Source Note

AND5−IN1 d C0829/1 bin C0828/1 2 1000 −
AND5−IN2 d C0829/2 bin C0828/2 2 1000 −
AND5−IN3 d C0829/3 bin C0828/3 2 1000 −
AND5−OUT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
A N D 6 -IN 1 A N D 6
C 1 1 7 5 /1
C 1 1 7 6 /1
A N D 6 -IN 2 & A N D 6 -O U T
C 1 1 7 5 /2
C 1 1 7 6 /2
A N D 6 -IN 3
C 1 1 7 5 /3
C 1 1 7 6 /3
Signal Source Note

AND6−IN1 d C1176/1 bin C1175/1 2 1000 −
AND6−IN2 d C1176/2 bin C1175/2 2 1000 −
AND6−IN3 d C1176/3 bin C1175/3 2 1000 −
AND6−OUT d − − − − − −
A N D 7 -IN 1 A N D 7
C 1 1 7 8 /1
C 1 1 7 9 /1
A N D 7 -IN 2 & A N D 7 -O U T
C 1 1 7 8 /2
C 1 1 7 9 /2
A N D 7 -IN 3
C 1 1 7 8 /3
C 1 1 7 9 /3
Signal Source Note

AND7−IN1 d C1179/1 bin C1178/1 2 1000 −
AND7−IN2 d C1179/2 bin C1178/2 2 1000 −
AND7−IN3 d C1179/3 bin C1178/3 2 1000 −
AND7−OUT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
Function
ANDx−IN1 ANDx−IN2 ANDx−IN3 ANDx−OUT
0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0
0 0 1 0
1 0 1 0
0 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
The function corresponds to a series connection of normally−open contacts in a contactor control.
ANDx−IN1
ANDx−IN2
ANDx−IN3
ANDx−OUT
Fig. 3−20 AND function as a series connection of normally−open contacts
Tip!
If only two inputs are required, use the inputs ANDx−IN1 and ANDx−IN2. Assign the input ANDx−IN3
to the signal source FIXED1 via the configuration code.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.8 Inverter (ANEG)

Purpose
This FB inverts the sign of an analog signal.
Two inverters are available:
ANEG1
ANEG1-IN ( 1)
ANEG1-OUT
C0700
C0701
Fig. 3−21 Inverter (ANEG1)
Signal Source Note

ANEG1−IN a C0701 dec [%] C0700 1 19523 −
ANEG1−OUT a − − − − − −
ANEG2
ANEG2-IN ( 1)
ANEG2-OUT
C0703
C0704
Signal Source Note

ANEG2−IN a C0704 dec [%] C0703 1 1000 −
ANEG2−OUT a − − − − − −
Function
The input value is multiplied by −1 and then output again.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.9 Analog output via terminal 62/63 (AOUT)

Purpose
AOUT1 and AOUT2 can be used as monitor outputs.
Internal analog signals can be output as voltage signals and be used e.g. as display values or
setpoints for slaves.
C434/1 AOUT1
AOUT1-IN +
C0431 62
+
AOUT1-GAIN
C0433
C0434/3
AOUT1-OFFSET
C0432
C0434/2
Fig. 3−23 Analog output via terminal X6/62 (AOUT1)
Signal Source Note

AOUT1−IN a C0434/1 dec [%] C0431 1 5001 −
AOUT1−GAIN a C0434/3 dec [%] C0433 1 19510 −
AOUT1−OFFSET a C0434/2 dec [%] C0432 1 19512 −
C439/1 AOUT2
AOUT2-IN +
C0436 63
+
AOUT2-GAIN
C0438
C0439/3
AOUT2-OFFSET
C0437
C0439/2
Signal Source Note

AOUT2−IN a C0439/1 dec [%] C0436 1 5002 −
AOUT2−GAIN a C0439/3 dec [%] C0438 1 19511 −
Function
l The value at input AOUTx−IN is multiplied by the value at input AOUTx−GAIN.
– The formula for the multiplication is: 100% * 100% = 100%.
l The result of the multiplication is limited to ±200%.
l The limited value is added to the value which is applied at input AOUTx−OFFSET.
– The formula for the addition is 50% + 10% = 60%. The result of the calculation is mapped
in such a way that 100% = 10 V.
l The result of the addition is again limited to ±200%.
l The result of the calculation is mapped in such a way that 100% = 10 V and is output as a
signal at terminal 62 or 63.

Function library
Function blocks
Example for an output value

AOUT1−IN = 50%, AOUT1−GAIN = 100%, AOUT1−OFFSET = 10%
Output terminal 62 = ((50% * 100% = 50%) + 10% = 60%) = 6 V
OUT
AOUT−GAIN
ÎÎÎÎÎ
AOUT−OFFSET
AOUT−IN
Fig. 3−25 Offset and gain of the analog output

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.10 Arithmetic block (ARIT)

Purpose
Arithmetic operation of two "analog" signals.
A R IT 1 -IN 1 C 0 3 3 8 A R IT 1
C 0 3 3 9 /1 ± 1 9 9 .9 9 %
x
C 0 3 4 0 /1
y + - * A R IT 1 -O U T
A R IT 1 -IN 2
/ x /(1 -y )
C 0 3 3 9 /2
C 0 3 4 0 /2
9300posARIT1
Fig. 3−26 Arithmetic block (ARIT1)
Signal Source Note

ARIT1−IN1 a C0340/1 dec [%] C0339/1 1 1000 −
ARIT1−IN2 a C0340/2 dec [%] C0339/2 1 1000 −
ARIT1−OUT a − − − − − Limited to ±199.99 %
A R IT 2 -IN 1 C 0 6 0 0 A R IT 2
C 0 6 0 1 /1 ± 1 9 9 .9 9 %
x
C 0 6 0 2 /1
y + - * A R IT 2 -O U T
A R IT 2 -IN 2
/ x /(1 -y )
C 0 6 0 1 /2
C 0 6 0 2 /2
9300posARIT2
Signal Source Note

ARIT2−IN1 a C0602/1 dec [%] C0601/1 1 1000 −
ARIT2−IN2 a C0602/2 dec [%] C0601/2 1 1000 −
Function
For both arithmetic blocks the following functions can be preselected:
Code Subcode Arithmetic function Example
0 OUT = IN1
Note: IN2 will not be processed

1 OUT = IN1 + IN2 100% = 50% + 50%
2 OUT = IN1 − IN2 50% = 100% − 50%
ARIT1: C0338 3 OUT [inc] = IN1 [inc] ÍN2 [inc] ¸16384 100% = 100% ´100% ¸(100)
OUT [%] = IN1 [%] ´ IN2 [%] ¸100
4 OUT [inc] = IN1 [inc] ´16384¸100 ¸ ½IN2½[inc] 1% = 100% ¸100%
OUT [%] = IN1 [%] ¸ ½ IN2 ½[%]
5 OUT [inc] = IN1 [inc] ´16384 ¸ (16384 − IN2 [inc]) 200% = 100% ´ (100) ¸ (100 − 50%)
OUT [%] = IN1 [%] ´ 100 ¸ (100 − IN2 [%])
Conversion: [inc] = [%] ¸100 ´ 16384

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.11 Arithmetic block (ARITPH)

Purpose
The FB ARITPH calculates a angle output signal from two angle input signals.
ARITPH1
Mode ARITPH1
ARITPH1-IN1 C1010
C1011/1
x ±230-1
C1012/1 + * ARITPH1-OUT
y
- /
ARITPH1-IN2
C1011/2
C1012/2
Fig. 3−28 Function block ARITPH1
Signal Source Note

Name Type DIS DIS format CFG List
ARITPH1−IN1 ph C1012/1 dec [inc] C1011/1 3 −
ARITPH1−OUT ph − − − −
Function
l Selection of the arithmetic function with the code ARITPH mode.
l The function block limits the result (see table)
ARITPH mode Arithmetic function Limitation
C1010 = 0 OUT = IN1 230 −1
C1010 = 1 OUT = IN1 + IN2 230 −1
C1010 = 2 OUT = IN1 − IN2 230 −1
C1010 = 3 OUT = (IN1 * IN2) / 2 30 230 −1 (remainder not considered)
C1010 = 13 OUT = IN1 * IN2 231
C1010 = 14 OUT = IN1 / IN2 30
2 −1 (remainder not considered)
C1010 = 21 OUT = IN1 + IN2 without with overflow
C1010 = 22 OUT = IN1 − IN2 without with overflow
l The calculation is performed cyclically in the control program.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.12 Analog signal changeover switch (ASW)
Purpose
This FB changes between two analog signals.
This FB enables you to change e.g. during a winding process between an initial diameter and a
calculated diameter.
C0812/1 ASW1
ASW1-IN1 0
C0810/1 ASW1-OUT
ASW1-IN2 1
C0810/2
C0812/2
ASW1-SET
C0811
C0813
Fig. 3−29 Changeover switch for analog signals (ASW1)
Signal Source Note

ASW1−IN1 a C0812/1 dec [%] C0810/1 1 55 −
ASW1−IN2 a C0812/2 dec [%] C0810/2 1 1000 −
ASW1−SET d C0813 bin C0811 2 1000 −
ASW1−OUT a − − − − − −
C0817/1 ASW2
ASW2-IN1 0
C0815/1 ASW2-OUT
ASW2-IN2 1
C0815/2
C0817/2
ASW2-SET
C0816
C0818
Signal Source Note

ASW2−IN2 a C0817/1 dec [%] C0815/1 1 1000 −
ASW2−IN1 a C0817/2 dec [%] C0815/2 1 1000 −
ASW2−SET d C0818 bin C0816 2 1000 −
ASW2−OUT a − − − − − −
C 1 1 6 2 /1 A S W 3
A S W 3 -IN 1 0
C 1 1 6 0 /1 A S W 3 -O U T
A S W 3 -IN 2 1
C 1 1 6 0 /2
C 1 1 6 2 /2
A S W 3 -S E T
C 1 1 6 1
C 1 1 6 3
Signal Source Note

ASW3−IN2 a C1162/1 dec [%] C1160/1 1 1000 −
ASW3−IN1 a C1162/2 dec [%] C1160/2 1 1000 −
ASW3−SET d C1163 bin C1161 2 1000 −
ASW3−OUT a − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
C 1 1 6 7 /1 A S W 4
A S W 4 -IN 1 0
C 1 1 6 5 /1 A S W 4 -O U T
A S W 4 -IN 2 1
C 1 1 6 5 /2
C 1 1 6 7 /2
A S W 4 -S E T
C 1 1 6 6
C 1 1 6 8
Signal Source Note

ASW4−IN2 a C1167/1 dec [%] C1165/1 1 1000 −
ASW4−IN1 a C1167/2 dec [%] C1165/2 1 1000 −
ASW4−SET d C1168 bin C1166 2 1000 −
ASW4−OUT a − − − − − −
Function
This FB is controlled via the binary input. Depending on the input signal, different signals are sent to
the output:
l If a HIGH signal is applied at the binary input, the signal which is applied at the ASWx−IN2
input is sent to the output.
l If a LOW signal is applied, the signal which is applied at the ASW−IN2 input is sent to the
output.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.13 Holding brake (BRK)
Danger!
Condition for using the BRK function block
Triggering the holding brake solely via the function block BRK is not permissible!
The safe triggering of the holding brake additionally requires a second switch−off path. Unsafe
triggering creates the risk of severe personal injury and danger to material assets!
Applications with active loads
When the DC−bus voltage increases (e.g. by braking processes), the torque limitation may be
activated via code C0172. The torque limitation becomes active if for instance the brake resistor is
defective or the switching threshold set on the brake chopper or the brake module is not correctly
adjusted.
Code C0172 is a pre−stage of the monitoring function OU" (overvoltage of the DC−bus voltage).
Code C0172 defines the voltage difference to OU causing a reduction in torque. In the Lenze setting,
the torque is reduced to "0" if the DC−bus voltage reaches 760 V (770V−10V):
l OU threshold = 770V (C0173 = 0...3)

– Exception: OU threshold 800 V for C0173 = 4 (see description in code table)
l C0172 = 10 V
l No message is generated.
Only after the DC−bus voltage has decreased below the OU reconnection threshold, the torque is
reconnected.
With unchanged basic conditions the continuously "chopping" drive behaviour may lead to
undefined motions.
Remedy
1. Set C0172 = 0 V
2. MONIT−OU has to generate EEr−TRIP (e.g. by C0871/0 = 15011).
– By this, the standstill brake is engaged via controller inhibit (CINH) if the braking energy
cannot be dissipated.

Function library
Function blocks
Purpose
The FB is used to trigger a holding brake.
Possible applications:
l Hoists
l Traversing drives
l Active loads
BRK1
C0196
BRK1-Nx BRK1-QSP
C0450
t 0
C0458/1 BRK1-OUT
DCTRL-IMP BRK1-M-STORE
MCTRL-NACT
CTRL
MCTRL-NSET2 C0195
MCTRL-MACT
BRK1-SET BRK1-CINH
C0451
0 t
C0459
C0244
BRK1-SIGN SIGN BRK1-M-SET
C0452
C0458/2
Fig. 3−33 Holding brake (BRK1)
Signal Source Note

BRK1−SET d C0459 bin C0451 2 1000 −
BRK1−NX a C0458/1 dec [%] C0450 1 1000 Speed threshold from which the drive may
output the signal "Close brake". The signal
source for this input can be a control code,
a fixed value, or any other analog FB
output.
The input signal is processed internally as
an absolute value.
BRK1−SIGN a C0458/2 dec [%] C0452 1 1000 Direction of the torque with which the drive
is to set up a torque against the brake. The
signal source for this input can be a control
code, a fixed value, or any other FB output.
BRK1−M−SET a Feedforward control torque for releasing
the brake
100 % = value of C0057
) Note!
The internal signals MCTRL−NACT, MCTRL−MACT and MCTRL−NSET2 are
processed as absolute values.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.13.1 Engaging the brake

Purpose A HIGH signal at the BRK1−SET input
activates the function. The output BRK1−SET
BRK1−QSP is simultaneously switched
to HIGH. This signal can be used to
decelerate the drive to zero speed via a t
deceleration ramp. BRK1−QSP
t
MCTRL−NSET2
|BRK1−Nx
Function If the setpoint speed falls below the |
value set at the BRK1−Nx input, the t
output BRK1−OUT is set to HIGH. In BRK1−OUT
order to ensure a fail−safe design this
signal must be inverted at the output
C0195
(e.g. via C0118). t
BRK1−CINH
3.2.13.2 Disengaging (releasing) the brake

Purpose A LOW signal at the BRK−SET input
immediately sets the BRK−CINH output BRK1−SET
to LOW. At the same time the
BRK1−M−STORE output is set to HIGH.
This signal can be used to generate a t
defined torque against the brake. The BRK1−CINH
drive thus takes over the torque while
the brake is released. The signal is only
reset after the time set under C0196 t
has elapsed. BRK1−QSP
t
BRK1−M−STORE
Function As soon as the torque reaches the
value set under C0244 (holding torque), t
the output BRK1−OUT is set to LOW. MACT = C0244
MCTRL−MACT
When the input is reset, a timing
element is triggered. After the time set
under C0196 has elapsed the t
BRK1−QSP output is reset. This signal BRK1−OUT
serves to e.g. release the setpoint
integrator after the brake release time C0196 t
has elapsed.
MCTRL−NSET2
t
Note If an actual speed higher than the value at BRK1−Nx is detected before the brake release time (C0196) has elapsed, the
signals BRK1−QSP and BRK1−M−STORE are reset immediately. The drive can operate in a speed or angle−controlled
manner immediately. If the BRK1−QSP output acts on the QSP control word, then the drive is synchronised to the actual
speed and follows its setpoint.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.13.3 Setting controller inhibit

Setting controller inhibit may for instance be required in the case of a fault (LU, OU, ...).
Function
When the controller is inhibited (CINH), the BRK1−OUT signal is set to HIGH immediately. The drive
is then braked via the mechanical brake.
If the fault is eliminated quickly, i.e. the controller inhibit (CINH) is reset before the actual speed falls
below the threshold value BRK1−Nx, the BRK1−OUT signal is set to LOW immediately. The drive is
synchronised to the actual speed and follows its setpoint.
If the value falls below the threshold, the drive starts as described under "Release brake".
BRK1−CINH
MCTRL−NACT
|BRK1−Nx|
t
BRK1−OUT
t
BRK1−QSP
t
BRK1−M−STORE
C0196 t
MCTRL−MACT MCTRL−MACT = C0244
Fig. 3−34 Brake control with CINH

Function library
Function blocks
BRK1−SET
C0196
t
BRK1−QSP
t
BRK1−M−STORE
t
MCTRL−MACT
MCTRL−MACT = C0244
t
BRK1−OUT
C0195 t
BRK1−CINH
t
MCTRL−NSET2
|BRK1−Nx|
Fig. 3−35 Switching cycle when braking

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.14 System bus (CAN−IN)

A detailed description of the system bus (CAN) can be found in the "CAN Communication Manual".

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.15 System bus (CAN−OUT)


Function library
Function blocks
3.2.16 Comparator (CMP)

Purpose
These FBs serve to compare two analog signals. Three comparators are available which serve to
implement triggers.
CMP1
C0680 CMP1
C0681
C0682
CMP1-IN1 CMP1-OUT
C0683/1
C0684/1
CMP1-IN2
C0683/2
C0684/2
Fig. 3−36 Comparator (CMP1)
Signal Source Note

CMP1−IN1 a C0684/1 dec [%] C0683/1 1 5001 −
CMP1−IN2 a C0684/2 dec [%] C0683/2 1 19500 −
CMP1−OUT a − − − − − −
CMP2
C0685 CMP2
C0686
C0687
CMP2-IN1 CMP2-OUT
C0688/1
C0689/1
CMP2-IN2
C0688/2
C0689/2
Signal Source Note

CMP2−IN1 a C0689/1 dec [%] C0688/1 1 1000 −
CMP2−IN2 a C0689/2 dec [%] C0688/2 1 1000 −
CMP2−OUT a − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
CMP3
C0690 CMP3
C0691
C0692
CMP3-IN1 CMP3-OUT
C0693/1
C0694/1
CMP3-IN2
C0693/2
C0694/2
Signal Source Note

CMP3−IN1 a C0694/1 dec [%] C0693/1 1 1000 −
CMP3−IN2 a C0694/2 dec [%] C0693/2 1 1000 −
CMP3−OUT a − − − − −
Function
The description uses the example of CMP1 and also applies to CMP2 and CMP3.
The function of these function blocks can be set via code C0680 (CMP1). The following comparison
operations are available:
l CMP1−IN1 = CMP1−IN2
l CMP1−IN1 > CMP1−IN2
l CMP1−IN1 < CMP1−IN2
l |CMP1−IN1| = |CMP1−IN2|
l |CMP1−IN1| > |CMP1−IN2|
l |CMP1−IN1| < |CMP1−IN2|

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.16.1 Function 1: CMP1−IN1 = CMP1−IN2

This function serves to compare two signals with regard to equality. Hence, the comparison "actual
speed equals setpoint speed (nact = nset)" can be carried out.
l Via code C0682 the window of equality can be set.
l Via code C0681 a hysteresis can be set if the input signals are not stable and cause the output
to oscillate.
The exact function can be obtained from the line diagram.
C0681 C0682 C0682 C0681

1
0 CMP1−IN2 CMP1−IN1
CMP1−IN1
C0681
C0682
CMP1−IN2
C0682
C0681
CMP1−OUT
Fig. 3−39 Equality of signals (CMP1−IN1 = CMP1−IN2)

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.16.2 Function 2: CMP1−IN1 > CMP1−IN2

This function is used, for example, to implement the comparison "Actual speed is higher than a limit
value (nact > nx)" for a direction of rotation.
l If the value at input CMP1−IN1 exceeds the value at input CMP1−IN2, the output CMP1−OUT
changes from LOW to HIGH.
l Only if the signal at input CMP1−IN1 falls below the value of CMP1−IN2 − C0681 again, the
output changes from HIGH to LOW.
CMP1−IN1
CMP1−IN2
C0681
CMP1−OUT C0681
1 t
CMP1−OUT
0
CMP1−IN2 CMP1−IN1 t
Fig. 3−40 Exceeding signal values (CMP1−IN1 > CMP1−IN2)
3.2.16.3 Function 3: CMP1−IN1 < CMP1−IN2

This function is used, for example, to implement the comparison "Actual speed is lower than a limit
value (nact <nx)" for a direction of rotation.
l If the value at input CMP1−IN1 falls below the value at input CMP1−IN2, the output CMP1−OUT
l Only if the signal at input CMP1−IN1 exceeds the value of CMP1−IN2 − C0681 again, the
CMP1−IN1
C0681
CMP1−IN2
CMP1−OUT C0681
1 t
CMP1−OUT
0
t
CMP1−IN2 CMP1−IN1
Fig. 3−41 Values falling below signal values (CMP1−IN1 CMP1−IN2)
3.2.16.4 Function 4: |CMP1−IN1| = |CMP1−IN2|

This function is the same as function 1. Before signal processing the absolute value of the input
signals (without sign) is generated.
This can be used to implement the comparison "nact = 0".
3.2.16.5 Function 5: |CMP1−IN1| > |CMP1−IN2|

This function is the same as function 3. Before signal processing the absolute value of input signals
(without sign) is generated.
This can be used to implement the comparison "|nact| > |nx|" irrespective of the direction of rotation.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.16.6 Function 6: |CMP1−IN1| < |CMP1−IN2|

This can be used to implement the comparison "|nact| < |nx|" irrespective of the direction of rotation.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.17 Signal conversion (CONV)

Purpose
These function blocks can be used to standardize signals or signal types or to convert signal types
into different signal types.The conversion is very precise by providing the conversion factor as
numerator and denominator.
CONV1
CONV1
CONV1-IN C0940 CONV1-OUT
C0942
C0941
C0943
Fig. 3−42 Function block CONV1
Signal Source Note

CONV1−IN a C0943 dec [%] C0942 1 1000
CONV1−OUT a − − − − − Limited to ±199.99 %
This function block is used to multiply or divide analog signals.
The conversion is done according to the formula:
CONV1–OUT + CONV1–IN @ C0940
C0941
Example:
An analog signal is to be multiplied with 1.12.
For this, enter C0940 = 112 and C0941 = 100.
CONV2
CONV2
C0947
C0946
C0948
Signal Source Note

CONV2−IN a C0948 dec [%] C0947 1 1000
CONV2–OUT + CONV2–IN @ C0945
C0946

Function library
Function blocks
CONV3
CONV3
C0952
C0951
C0953
Signal Source Note

CONV3−IN phd C0953 dec [rpm] C0952 4 1000
This function block is used to convert speed signals into analog signals.
100 %
CONV3−OUT + CONV3−IN @ @ C0950
15000 rpm C0951
CONV4
CONV4
C0957
C0956
C0958
Signal Source Note

100 %
15000 rpm C0956
CONV5
CONV5
C0657
C0656
C0658
Signal Source Note

CONV5−IN a C0658 dec [%] C0657 1 1000
CONV5−OUT phd − − − − − Limited to ±29999 rpm
This function block is used to convert analog signals into speed signals.
Conversion according to formula:
15000 rpm C0655
CONV5−OUT + CONV5−IN @ @
100 % C0656

Function library
Function blocks
CONV6
C O N V 6
C O N V 6 -IN C 1 1 7 0 C O N V 6 -O U T
C 1 1 7 2
C 1 1 7 1
C 1 1 7 3
Signal Source Note

CONV6−IN a C1173 dec [%] C1172 1 1000
15000 rpm C1170
100 % C1171

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.18 Angle conversion (CONVPHA)

Purpose
l Converts a angle signal into an analog signal
or
l converts a angle difference signal into a speed signal.
C O N V P H A 1
C O N V P H A 1 -IN
1 -O U T 2
C 1 0 0 1 C 1 0 0 0
2 -O U T
C 1 0 0 2 ± 1 9 9 ,9 9 %
Fig. 3−48 Angle conversion (CONVPHA1)
Signal Source Note

CONVPHA1−IN ph C1002 dec [inc] C1001 3 −
CONVPHA1−OUT a − − − − Limited to ±199.99 %, remainder considered
CONVPHA1−OUT2 phd − − − − Limited to ±32767 rpm, remainder considered
Function
l Conversion with adaptation using a divisor.
l Conversion according to formula:
CONVPHA1−OUT[%] + CONVPHA1−IN[inc] @ 100
2 14 @ 2 C1000
CONVPHA1−OUT2[rpm] + CONVPHA1−IN[inc] @ 15000

2 14 @ 2 C1000
CONVPHA1−OUT2[inc] + CONVPHA1−IN[inc] @ 1
2 C1000

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.19 Angle conversion (CONVPHPH)

Purpose
Conversion of a angle signal with dynamic fraction.
C O N V P H P H 1 -N U M
C 1 2 4 0 /1 C O N V P H P H 1
C 1 2 4 5 /1
C O N V P H P H 1 -
C O N V P H P H 1 -IN x O U T
C 1 2 4 2 y
C 1 2 4 7
C 1 2 4 1
C O N V P H P H 1 _ A C T
C 1 2 4 6
C O N V P H P H 1 _ D E N
C 1 2 4 0 /2 1
C 1 2 4 5 /2
Fig. 3−49 Angle conversion (CONVPHPH1)
Signal Source Note

CONVPHPH1−IN ph C1247 dec [inc] C1242 3 −
CONVPHPH1−NUM a C1245/1 dec C1240/1 1 Numerator
CONVPHPH1−DEN a C1245/2 dec C1240/2 1 Denominator (with absolute value generation)
CONVPHPH1−ACT d C1246 bin C1241 2 −
CONVPHPH1−OUT ph − − − − Without limitation, remainder considered
Function
Caution!
The conversion result is not limited. The result must therefore not exceed the range of ±2147483647.
l C1241 = HIGH
– The angle signal at CONVPHPH1−IN is evaluated using the factor from C1245/1 / C1245/2.
l C1241 = LOW
– The value 0 is evaluated using the factor from C1245/1 / C1245/2.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.20 Speed conversion (CONVPP)

Purpose
Conversion of a speed signal with dynamic fraction.
C O N V P P 1 -N U M C O N V P P 1
C 1 2 5 1 /1
C 1 2 5 4 /1
C O N V P P 1 -
C O N V P P 1 -IN x O U T
C 1 2 5 0 y
C 1 2 5 3
C O N V P P 1 _ D E N
C 1 2 5 1 /2 1
C 1 2 5 4 /2
Fig. 3−50 Speed conversion (CONVPP1)
Signal Source Note

CONVPP1−IN phd C1253 dec [rpm] C1250 4 −
CONVPP1−NUM ph C1254/1 dec [inc] C1251/1 3 Numerator
CONVPP1−DEN ph C1254/2 dec [inc] C1251/2 3 Denominator (with absolute value generation)
CONVPP1−OUT phd − − − − Without limitation, remainder considered
Function
Caution!
The conversion result is not limited. The result must therefore not exceed ±32767.
l The speed signal at CONVPP1−IN is evaluated using the factor from C1251/1 / C1251/2.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.21 Characteristic function (CURVE)

Purpose
Conversion of an analog signal into a characteristic.
C h a r a c te r is tic 1 C U R V E 1
y
y 1 0 0
C 0 9 6 0 y 0
x
1 C h a r a c te r is tic 2 1
y
C 0 9 6 7
C U R V E 1 -IN 2 y 1 y 1 0 0 2 C U R V E 1 -O U T
C 0 9 6 8 3 y 0
x
3
x 1
Y 0 = C 0 9 6 1 C h a r a c te r is tic 3
Y 1 = C 0 9 6 2 y y 1 0 0
Y 2 = C 0 9 6 3
Y 1 0 0 = C 0 9 6 4 y 2
y 0 y 1
X 1 = C 0 9 6 5
x
X 2 = C 0 9 6 6 x 1 x 2
CURVE1
Fig. 3−51 Characteristic function (CURVE1)
Signal Source Note

CURVE1−IN a C0968 dec [%] C0967 1 5001 −
CURVE1−OUT a − − − − − −
Range of functions
Under C0960, you can select the function:
l Characteristic with two interpolation points
l Characteristic with three interpolation points
l Characteristic with four interpolation points
The codes for entering the interpolation points can be obtained from the line diagrams.
Linear interpolation between the points.
For negative input values at CURVEx−IN, the settings of the interpolation points are processed
inversely (see line diagrams). If this is not desired:
l Connect an absolute value generator (ABS) before or behind the CURVE function block
or
l connect a limiter (LIM) before or behind the CURVE function block

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.21.1 Characteristic with two interpolation points

Set C0960 = 1.
y
CURVE1-OUT
y100
C0964
C0961 y0
-100%
100% x
CURVE1-IN
-C0961
-C0964
Fig. 3−52 Line diagram of characteristic with 2 interpolation points
3.2.21.2 Characteristic with three interpolation points

Set C0960 = 2.
y
CURVE1-OUT
y100
C0964
y1
C0962
C0961 y0
-100% -C0965 x1
C0965 100% x
CURVE1-IN
-C0961
-C0962
-C0964

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.21.3 Characteristic with four interpolation points

Set C0960 = 3.
y
CURVE1-OUT
y100
C0964
y1
C0962
C0961 y0
-100% y2
-C0966 -C0965 C0963
x1 x2
-C0963 C0965 C0966 100% x
CURVE1-IN
-C0961
-C0962
-C0964

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.22 Dead band (DB)

Purpose
The dead band element is used to set interfering influences around zero, e.g. interferences on analog
input voltages, to digital zero.
C 0 6 2 0 D B 1
C 0 6 2 1
± 1 9 9 ,9 9 %
D B 1 -IN D B 1 -O U T
C 0 6 2 2
C 0 6 2 3
Fig. 3−55 Dead band element (DB1)
Signal Source Note

DB1−IN a C0623 dec [%] C0622 1 1000 −
DB1−OUT a − − − − − Limited to ±199.99 %
Function
l The dead band is parameterised under C0621.
l The gain is set under C0620.
DB1−OUT
C0620
DB1−IN
C0621
Fig. 3−56 Dead band and gain

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.23 Control of the drive controller (DCTRL)

Purpose
Directs the controller to certain states (e.g. trip, trip reset, quick stop or controller inhibit).
C0135 DCTRL
CAN-CTRL.B3 ³1
16 AIF-CTRL.B3 QSP
C135.B3 DCTRL-QSP
MCTRL
CAN-CTRL.B8 ³1
AIF-CTRL.B8 DISABLE
C135.B8 DCTRL-RDY
MONIT-TRIP DCTRL-CINH
CAN-CTRL.B9
AIF-CTRL.B9
C0136/1 C135.B9 DCTRL-IMP
X5/28
DCTRL-CINH1 ³1 CINH DCTRL-TRIP
C0870/1
DCTRL-WARN
C0878/1
DCTRL-CINH2 DCTRL-MESS
C0870/2
C0878/2 ³1 DCTRL-FAIL
CAN-CTRL.B10
AIF-CTRL.B10
C135.B10 ³1 TRIP-SET DCTRL-CW/CCW
DCTRL-TRIP-SET
C0871 DCTRL-NACT=0
C0878/3
CAN-CTRL.B11 DCTRL-STAT*1
AIF-CTRL.B11
C135.B11 ³1 TRIP-RESET DCTRL-STAT*2
DCTRL-TRIP-RESET DCTRL-STAT*4 STAT
C0876
DCTRL-STAT*8
C0878/4
DCTRL-PAR*1 DCTRL-INIT
C0880/1
C0884/1 DCTRL-PARBUSY
DCTRL-PAR*2
C0880/2
DCTRL-PAR*1-O
C0884/2
DCTRL-PAR-LOAD DCTRL-PAR*2-O
C0881
C0884/3
fb_dctrl
Fig. 3−57 Control of the drive controller (DCTRL)

Function library
Function blocks
Signal Source Note

DCTRL−CINH1 d C0878/1 bin C0870/1 2 1000 HIGH = Inhibit controller
DCTRL−CINH2 d C0878/2 bin C0870/2 2 1000 HIGH = Inhibit controller
DCTRL−TRIP−SET d C0878/3 bin C0871 2 54 HIGH = Fault signal EEr
DCTRL−TRIP−RESET d C0878/4 bin C0876 2 55 LOW−HIGH signal = TRIP reset
DCTRL−PAR*1 d C0884/1 bin C0880/1 2 1000 Selecting a parameter set
DCTRL−PAR*2 d C0884/2 bin C0880/2 2 1000 Selecting a parameter set
DCTRL−PAR−LOAD d C0884/3 bin C0881 2 1000 LOW−HIGH edge = Loading a parameter set
DCTRL−QSP d − − − − − HIGH = Drive performs quick stop
DCTRL−RDY d − − − − − HIGH = Ready for operation
DCTRL−CINH d − − − − − HIGH = Controller reset
DCTRL−IMP d − − − − − HIGH = High−resistance power output
stages
DCTRL−TRIP d − − − − − HIGH = Active fault
DCTRL−WARN d − − − − − HIGH = Active warning
DCTRL−MESS d − − − − − HIGH = Active message
DCTRL−FAIL d − − − − − −
DCTRL−CW/CCW d − − − − − LOW = CW rotation, HIGH = CCW rotation
DCTRL−NACT=0 d − − − − − HIGH = Motor speed < C0019
DCTRL−STAT*1 d − − − − − General status (binary coded)
DCTRL−INIT d − − − − − −
DCTRL−PARBUSY d − − − − HIGH = Parameter set changeover is active
DCTRL−PAR*1−O d − − − − − Parameter set X is active (binary coded)
DCTRL−PAR*2−0 d − − − − − Parameter set X is active (binary coded)
Function
l Quick stop (QSP)
l Operation inhibited (DISABLE)
l Controller inhibit (CINH)
l TRIP−set
l TRIP−RESET
l Change of parameter set (PAR)
l Controller state
3.2.23.1 Quick stop (QSP)

The drive is braked to standstill via the deceleration ramp C105 and generates a holding torque.
l The function can be controlled by three inputs
– Control word CAN−CTRL bit 3 of CAN−IN1
– Control word AIF−CTRL bit 3 of AIF−IN
– Control word C0135 bit 3
l All inputs are linked by an OR−operation.
l C0136/1 displays the control word C0135

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.23.2 Operation inhibit (DISABLE)

In this state the drive cannot be started by the "Controller enable" command. The power output
stages are inhibited. All controllers are reset.
3.2.23.3 Controller inhibit (CINH)

The power output stages are inhibited. All controllers are reset.
l The function can be controlled by seven inputs:
– Terminal X5/28 (LOW = controller inhibit)
– MONIT−TRIP (HIGH = in the function block MONIT a monitoring function configured to TRIP
has been triggered)
– Free input DCTRL−CINH1
) Note!
If an LU message or an OU message occurs, the CINH signal will not be set.
3.2.23.4 TRIP−SET
The drive is controlled into the state under code C0581 and indicates EEr (external monitoring).
l The function can be controlled by four inputs
– Free input DCTRL−TRIP−SET

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.23.5 TRIP−RESET
Resets a pending trip as soon as the cause of malfunction has been removed. If the cause is still
active, no reaction occurs.
– Free input DCTRL−TRIP−RESET
l The function can only be performed by a LOW−HIGH edge of the signal resulting from the OR
operation.
) Note!
If one of the inputs is set to HIGH, it is not possible that a LOW−HIGH edge will
occur on the resulting signal.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.23.6 Parameter set changeover (PAR)

The controller loads and operates with the parameter set selected.
l The parameter set to be loaded is selected via the inputs DCTRL−PAR*1 and DCTRL−PAR*2.
The inputs are binary coded (1 from 4).
PAR*2 PAR*1 Selected parameter set
0 0 Parameter set 1
0 1 Parameter set 2
1 0 Parameter set 3
1 1 Parameter set 4
l A LOW−HIGH edge at the input DCTRL−PAR−LOAD enables the controller to switch to the new
parameter set.
) Note!
If the parameter set to be loaded via the terminal X5/Ex is already selected before
switching on the supply voltage, there is no need for the LOW−HIGH edge at the
input DCTRL−PAR−LOAD. In this case, the controller loads the selected parameter
set automatically.
l The controller is not ready for operation for approx. one second. During this period, DCTRL−
RDY displays LOW.
3.2.23.7 Controller state

The binary−coded status of the controller is output via DCTRL−STAT*x. These outputs are connected
to the STAT function block inside the device.
The status can be evaluated via the status word C0150, CAN status word and AIF status word.
STAT*8 STAT*4 STAT*2 STAT*1 Action of the controller
0 0 0 0 Initialisation after the supply voltage has been connected
0 0 0 1 Lock mode, restart protection is active C0142
0 0 1 1 Drive is in controller inhibit mode
0 1 1 0 Controller enabled
0 1 1 1 The release of a monitoring function resulted in a "message"
1 0 0 0 The release of a monitoring function resulted in a "trip"
3.2.23.8 Standstill message (DCTRL−NACT=0)

The standstill message (DCTRL−NACT=0) is set immediately if the actual speed (MCTRL−NACT) falls
below the speed threshold (without any hysteresis effect) set in C0019.
The standstill message disappears if the actual speed (MCTRL−NACT) exceeds the sum of the speed
threshold set in C0019 and the hysteresis. The hysteresis amounts to 1 % of the maximum speed
set in C0011.
) Note!
The hysteresis ensures a stable standstill signal even if the actual speed value jitters.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.24 Master frequency input (DFIN)

Purpose
Converting and scaling a power pulse current at the digital frequency input X9 into a speed and phase
setpoint. The digital frequency is transferred in a high−precision mode (with offset and gain errors).
X9
C0427 DFIN
DFIN-OUT
C0425 C0426
Fig. 3−58 Digital frequency input (DFIN)
Signal Source Note

DFIN−OUT phd C0426 dec [rpm] − −
Function
l The input X9 is designed for signals with TTL level.
l In the event of digital frequency cascade or digital frequency rail, adapt the drive to the
connected encoder or controller via C0425.
l The input of a zero track is optional.
l Via C0427 the following input signals can be evaluated:
C0427 = 0
O
O
B
B
Z
Z
Fig. 3−59 Phase−delayed signal sequence (CW rotation)

CW rotation Track A is leading track B by 90 (positive value at DFIN−OUT).
CCW rotation Track A is lagging track B by 90 (negative value at DFIN−OUT).

Function library
Function blocks
C0427 = 1
O
O
B
B
Z
Z
Fig. 3−60 Control of direction of rotation via track B

C0427 = 2
O
O
B
B
Z
Z
Fig. 3−61 Control of speed and direction of rotation via track A or track B
CW rotation Track A transmits the speed and direction of rotation (positive value at DFIN−OUT)
Track B = LOW
CCW rotation Track B transmits the speed and direction of rotation (negative value at DFIN−OUT)
Track A = LOW
Transfer function
DFIN−OUT[rpm] + f[Hz] @ 60
Number of increments from C0425
Example:
Input frequency = 200 kHz
C0425 = 3 (¢ a number of increments of 2048 Inc/rev.)
DFIN−OUT[rpm] + 200000Hz @ 60 + 5859rpm

2048

Function library
Function blocks
Signal adaptation
Finer resolutions than the power−of−two format can be realised by connecting an FB (e.g. CONV3 or
CONV4).
Example:
The FB CONV3 converts the speed signal into a quasi−analog signal. The conversion is done
according to the formula:
0, 4
CONV3−OUT[%] + f[Hz] @ @ C0950
Number of increments from C0425 C0951
X9
C0427 DFIN CONV3
DFIN-OUT CONV3-IN C0950 CONV3-OUT
C0952
C0951
C0953
C0425 C0426
Fig. 3−62 Digital frequency input (DFIN) with connected converter
( STOP!
If C0540 = 0, 1, 2, 3 and a feedback system C0025 > 10, you must not use the
digital frequency input X9 anymore.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.25 Digital frequency output (DFOUT)

Purpose
Converts internal speed signals into frequency signals and outputs them to subsequent drives. The
transmission is highly precise (without offset and gain errors).
C0030 DFOUT
C0540
DFOUT-DF-IN DFOUT-OUT
C0542
C0549
DFOUT-AN-IN
C0541
C0547
DFOUT-SYN-RDY
C0544 CTRL
C0548 C0540
X5 E5
0 X10
C0545 1
X9 C0429
2
3
4
X8 5
Fig. 3−63 Digital frequency output (DFOUT)
Signal Source Note

DFOUT−DF−IN phd C0549 dec [rpm] C0542 4 −
DFOUT−AN−IN a C0547 dec [%] C0541 1 Input in [%] of nmax (C0011)
DFOUT−SYN−RDY d C0548 bin C0544 2 −
DFOUT−OUT phd − − − − −
Function
l Output signals on X10
l Output of an analog signal
l Output of a speed signal
l Encoder simulation of the resolver with internal zero track
l Encoder simulation of the resolver with external zero track
l Direct output of X8

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.25.1 Output signals on X10
C W r o t a tio n
A
A
B
B
Z
Z
Fig. 3−64 Signal sequence for CW rotation (definition)
l The output signal corresponds to the simulation of an incremental encoder:

– Track A, B and, if necessary, zero track as well as the corresponding inverted tracks are
output with tracks shifted by 90 degrees.
– The levels are TTL−compatible.
l Positive input values (CW rotation) result in the represented signal sequence.
l With negative input values (CCW rotation) track B is leading track A by 90° .
l The zero track is output according to the function set in C0540
l With C0030 the encoder constant of the encoder simulation is set.
l The function of the digital frequency output X10 is defined via C0540.
( Stop!
C0540 = 0 to C0540 = 3 cannot be set if the connection to the digital frequency
input DFIN X9 has been established and C0025 > 10 has been selected.
C0540 Signal at X10

0 DFOUT−AN−IN is output at X10; zero track can be input externally
1 DFOUT−DF−IN is output at X10; zero track can be input externally
2 Encoder simulation of the resolver with zero track in resolver zero position (mounted on the motor)
3 Encoder simulation of the resolver with external input of the zero track (terminal X5/E5)
4 The signal at input X9 is electrically amplified and directly output (C0030 is without function)
Create zero track (Z track)

l Condition:
– Set C0540 = 0, C0540 = 1 or C0540 = 3.
– Encoder simulation must be active.
l Start creation:
– The creation starts immediately with the first rising or falling edge on track A or track B.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.25.2 Output of an analog signal

For this purpose, set code C0540 = 0. The value applied at input DFOUT−AN−IN is converted into a
frequency.
Transfer function
No. of increments from C0030 C0011
f[Hz] + DFOUT * AN * IN[%] @ @
100 60
Example:
DFOUT−AN−IN = 50 %
C0030 = 3, this corresponds to a number of increments of 2048 inc/rev.
C0011 = 3000 rpm
f[Hz] + 50% @ 2048 @ 3000 + 51200Hz

100 60
Generating a zero pulse

An artificial zero pulse can be generated for the output frequency.
1. Activate the function through a LOW ® HIGH edge at the input DFOUT−SYN−RDY.
2. A LOW ® HIGH edge at terminal X5/E5 causes the generation of the zero pulse after 360°.
After this, every 360° a zero pulse is generated according to the setting in C0030.
3. The zero pulse is automatically shifted by the value C0545.
) Note!
This procedure must be done after every mains switching.
3.2.25.3 Output of a speed signal

l Set C0540 = 1.
– This setting only converts the value at input DFOUT−DF−IN into a frequency.
Transfer function
No. of increments from C0030
f[Hz] + DFOUT−DF−IN[rpm] @
60
Example:
DFOUT−DF−IN = 3000 rpm
f[Hz] + 3000[rpm] @ 2048 + 102400[Hz]

60

1. Set input DFOUT−SYN−RDY = edge from LOW ® HIGH.
2. A LOW−HIGH edge at terminal X5/E5 causes the generation of the zero pulse after 360°. After
this, every 360° a zero pulse is generated according to the setting in C0030.
3. The zero pulse can be shifted by +360° via C0545 (65536 inc = 360°).

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.25.4 Encoder simulation of the resolver

Set C0540 = 2 or C0540 = 3 (depending on the desired generation of the zero track)
l The function is used when a resolver is connected to X7.
l The encoder constant for output X10 is set in C0030.
Generating a zero pulse in resolver zero position (C0540 = 2)

The output of the zero pulse with regard to the rotor depends on how the resolver is mounted to the
motor.
l The zero pulse can be shifted by +360° via C0545 (65536 inc = 360°).
Generating an external zero pulse (C0540 = 3)

l The function is activated through a LOW−HIGH edge at the input DFOUT−SYN−RDY.
l A LOW−HIGH edge at terminal X5/E5 causes the generation of the zero pulse after 360°.
– After this, every 360° a zero pulse is generated according to the setting in C0030.
) Note!
The procedure for generating an artificial zero pulse must be repeated after every
mains switching and after every setting of C0540 = 3.
3.2.25.5 Direct output of X8 (C0540 = 5)

l The input signal at X8 is electrically amplified and directly output.
l The signals depend on the assignment of the input X8.
l C0030 and C0545 have no function.
l The zero track is only output if it is connected to X8.

) Note!
For directly outputting X8 or X9 to the digital frequency output X10 the function
block DFOUT does not need to be entered into the processing table.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.26 Digital frequency ramp function generator (DFRFG)

Purpose
The drive (motor shaft) is synchronised to a digital frequency (phase selection). The drive then
performs a phase−synchronous operation with the digital frequency.
C 0 7 5 3 C 0 7 6 6 D F R F G 1
C 0 7 5 7 C 0 7 5 1 C 0 7 5 6
C 0 4 2 9 C 0 7 5 5
0
X 5 0
D F R F G 1 -S Y N C
1
E 5 C T R L
C 0 7 5 2
D F R F G 1 -IN
C 0 7 5 8 D F R F G 1 -O U T
C 0 7 6 5
D F R F G 1 -Q S P C 0 7 5 4
C 0 7 5 9
C 0 7 6 4 /1 D F R F G 1 -F A IL
S Q
D F R F G 1 -S T O P
C 0 7 6 0
C 0 7 6 4 /2 R
D F R F G 1 -R E S E T
C 0 7 6 1
C 0 7 6 4 /3 FB_dfrfg1
Fig. 3−65 Digital frequency ramp function generator (DFRFG1)
Signal Source Note

Designation Type DIS DIS format CFG List
DFRFG1−SET phd C0769 − C0768 − Initial speed
DFRFG1−IN phd C0765 dec [rpm] C0758 4 Speed/Phase setpoint
DFRFG1−QSP d C0764/1 bin C0759 2 HIGH = quick stop
DFRFG1−STOP d C0764/2 bin C0760 2 HIGH = save setpoint
DFRFG1−RESET d C0764/3 bin C0761 2 HIGH = reset
DFRFG1−OUT phd − − − − Speed/Phase setpoint
DFRFG1−SYNC d − − − − HIGH = drive runs synchronously
DFRFG1−FAIL d − − − − HIGH = phase difference exceeded
Function
l Profile generator
l Quick stop
l Ramp function generator stop
l RESET
l Detect phase difference
l Start via touch probe initiator (terminal X5/E5)
l Correction of the touch probe initiator (terminal X5/E5)

Function library
Function blocks
DFRFG-OUT
C0751 C0751
C0755
DFRFG-IN C0752
DFRFG-SYNC t
Fig. 3−66 Synchronisation on DFRFG
The profile generator generates ramps which lead the setpoint phase to its target position.
l Set acceleration and deceleration via C0751.
l Set max. speed via C0752.
l When the distance and speed reach their setpoints, the output switches
DFRFG1−SYNC = HIGH. At the same time the FB switches the profile generator to "inactive".
l Set the switching point via C0755.
Stop!
Do not operate the drive with this function at the torque limitation Mmax, Imax.
Fig. 3−67 Speed−time diagram DFRFG
The number of increments at DFRFG−IN (master drive) defines the target position. The target can be
displayed as a path. The speed−time diagram shows the distance covered (angle) as the area below
the speed profile. When synchronicity is reached, master and slave have covered the same distance
(angle).

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.26.2 Quick stop

Removes the drive from the network and brakes it to standstill.
l Activate with DFRFG−QSP = HIGH.
l Set deceleration time via C0753.
l Store the setpoint phase detected at DFRFG−IN.
l Approach the setpoint phase via the profile generator after resetting the quick stop request.
DFRFG-OUT
C0751 C0751
DFRFG-IN C0752
C0753
DFRFG-QSP t
Fig. 3−68 Quick stop DFRFG
3.2.26.3 Ramp function generator stop

Maintains the state of the profile generator during operation.
l Activate with DFRFG−STOP = HIGH
l Output of the last state at DFRFG−OUT.
l Approach the setpoint phase via the profile generator after resetting the stop request.
DFRFG-OUT
DFRFG-IN C0752
DFRFG-STOP t
Fig. 3−69 Ramp function generator stop

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.26.4 RESET
DFRFG−RESET = HIGH:
l Resets setpoint phases which are internally added.
l Activates the profile generator.
l HIGH−LOW edge at DFRFG−RESET: Detecting the setpoint phase.
3.2.26.5 Detect phase difference

Monitoring the phase difference between input DFRFG−IN and output DFRFG−OUT.
l Set limit value of monitoring via C0754.
l Activates the monitoring: DFRFG−FAIL = HIGH
l Storing the signal until DFRFG−RESET = HIGH.
l The profile generator can accept a phase difference of up to ±2140000000 inc (= 32000
revolutions).

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.26.6 Start via touch probe initiator (terminal X5/E5)
Stop!
In the default setting the terminal X5/E5 is assigned to another function.
Function
l Set C0757 = 1.
l The function is activated by simultaneously setting the inputs:
– DFRFG−QSP and DFRFG−RESET = HIGH.
l Starting procedure:
– Signals at DFRFG−QSP and DFRFG−RESET = LOW.
– Otherwise touch probe signals are ignored.
l A LOW−HIGH edge at terminal X5/E5 starts the process:
DFRFG-OUT
DFRFG-IN
Touch-Probe X5/E5
DFRFG-QSP
DFRFG-RESET
Fig. 3−70 Start via touch probe initiator (terminal X5/E5)

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.26.7 Correction of the touch probe initiator (terminal X5/E5)

Delay times during the activation of the initiator cause a speed−dependent phase offset (e.g. during
positioning, synchronising).
In order to take this angular offset into account, the response time [ms] of the initiators as a function
of the setpoint speed DFRFG−IN is converted to a phase angle correction and is then taken into
consideration in the setpoint angle. For this, the response time [ms] has to be converted to a
correction value [Inc.] first.
l Set correction value for the phase offset under C0429.
l Formula for input value in C0429:
Input value C0429 = 16384 × response time [ms]
l The response time [ms] can be gathered from the data sheet of the initiator or requested by
the manufacturer.
3.2.26.8 Offset setting

The offset can be set with code C0756. The offset refers to the digital frequency input and is scaled
to 1 revolution (¢65536 increments).
The touch probe (TP) initiates the start of the ramp function generator. The leading of the master drive
from the moment of starting or the resulting path/phase difference is taken up during the acceleration
phase.
l Setting: positive offset values
– Causes a time shift of the TP
– This means that less time is necessary − compared to the setting with e.g. offset = 0 − to
obtain synchronism with the master drive.
Tip!
With high offsets and low input speeds the drive may reverse. To avoid this, a direction of rotation
can be selected for the output via C0766.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.27 Digital frequency processing (DFSET)
Purpose
Conditions the digital frequency for the controller. Selection of stretch factor, gearbox factor and
speed trimming or angular trimming.
C0429 DFSET
DFSET-0-PULSE C0534
C0525 C0546
C0532 C0551
C0538/1
3 C0531
X5/E4
2
1 DFSET-ACK
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
3
2
X5/E5 CTRL
1 C0528/1
X9/6,7 C0528/3
DFSET-N-TRIM2 C0528/4
C0535
C1255
+
DFSET-N-TRIM C1258
C0524
+
DFSET-RAT-DIV C0537
C0522
DFSET-VP-DIV C0536/2
C0521
DFSET-POUT
C0536/1
a a
DFSET-IN a a + DFSET-NOUT
C0520 * b * b + C0530
C0539 b b
C0252 C0253
C0533 C0033 0 + + + DFSET-PSET
1
+ + -
DFSET-SET C0528/2
DFSET-PSET2
C0527
C0538/3
C0526 DFSET-RESET
C0538/2
DFSET-A-TRIM
C0523 * C0529
C0536/3
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
fb_dfset
Fig. 3−71 Digital frequency processing (DFSET)
Signal Source Note

DFSET−IN phd C0539 dec [rpm] C0520 4 Speed/angle setpoint
DFSET−N−TRIM a C0537 dec [%] C0524 1 Speed trimming in [%] of C0011
DFSET−N−TRIM2 phd C1258 dec [rpm] C1255 4 Speed trimming in [rpm] of C0011
DFSET−A−TRIM a C0536/3 dec [inc] C0523 1 Angular trimming 100% = 16384 inc
DFSET−VP−DIV a C0536/1 dec C0521 1 Numerator of stretch factor 100 % = 16384 inc
DFSET−RAT−DIV a C0536//2 dec C0522 1 Numerator of gearbox factor 100 % = 16384 inc
DFSET−0−PULSE d C0538/1 bin C0525 2 HIGH = Enabling of zero pulse synchronisation
DFSET−SET d C0538/3 bin C0527 2 · HIGH = Sets angle integrators to equal values
· LOW−HIGH edge sets DFSET−PSET = 0
· HIGH−LOW edge sets DFSET−PSET = current value
of MCTRL−PHI−SET
· DFSET−SET has a higher priority than DFSET−RESET
DFSET−RESET d C0538/2 bin C0526 2 · HIGH = Sets position difference = 0
· HIGH = Sets DFSET−PSET and DFSET−PSET2 = 0
DFSET−NOUT a − − − − In [%] of nmax (C0011)
DFSET−POUT phd − − − − Speed/angle setpoint
DFSET−PSET ph − − − − Following error for angle controller
DFSET−PSET2 ph − − − − Angle setpoint 65536 inc = 1 revolution
DFSET−ACK d − − − − HIGH = Synchronising is performed

Function library
Function blocks
Function
l Setpoint conditioning with stretch and gearbox factor
l Processing of correction values
l Synchronising to zero track or touch probe (for resolver feedback touch probe only)
l Suppressing fault signals when synchronising via touch probe
3.2.27.1 Setpoint conditioning with stretch and gearbox factor
Stretch factor
The stretch factor defines the ratio between the drive in operation and its setpoint.
The evaluation is based on the setpoint at DFSET−IN. DFSET−POUT outputs the result.
DFSET−POUT + DFSET−IN @ DFSET−VP−DIV

C0533
The stretch factor results from numerator and denominator:
l The numerator (DFSET−VP−DIV) can be variable (provided by an analog signal source) or a
constant value (provided by a code).
l The denominator must be set in C0533.
Gearbox factor
The gearbox factor defines the gearbox ratio of the drive. Enter the transmission ratio of the drive.
The evaluation is based on the setpoint at DFSET−IN multiplied by the stretch factor. DFSET−NOUT
outputs the result.
DFSET−NOUT + Reckfaktor @ DFSET−RAT−DIV

C0033
DFSET−NOUT + DFSET−IN @ DFSET−VP−DIV @ DFSET−RAT−DIV

C0533 C0033
The gearbox factor results from numerator and denominator.
l The numerator ca be variable (provided by an analog signal source) or a constant value
(provided by a code).
l The denominator must be set in C0033.
) Note!
With code C0530 you can deactivate the use of the gearbox factor and the
DFSET−N−TRIM values as the basis for the setpoint angle integrator. When
C0530 = 1, only the stretch factor is used for the calculation of the setpoint angle.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.27.2 Processing of correction values
Speed trimming
This is used to add correction values, e.g. by a superimposed control loop. This enables the drive to
accelerate or decelerate.
l Adds an analog value at DFSET−N−TRIM (see C0537) to the speed setpoint.
l Adds a speed value at DFSET−N−TRIM2 (see C1258) to the speed setpoint.
– The speed trimming via this input is more precise.
Angular trimming
Adds a setpoint at DFSET−A−TRIM (see C0536/3) to the angle setpoint. The rotor position with
respect to the setpoint can be changed in either direction by the defined number of increments (the
drive is leading or lagging). The angle is trimmed within a range of ±32767 increments (corresponds
to ±1/2 revolution). Every analog signal can be used as a source.
l The input is made in increments (one revolution corresponds to 65536 increments).
l When analog values are entered, 100% correspond to 1/4 revolution = 16384 increments.
l Extension of the setting range with a multiplier under C0529.
Angular offset
The angular offset (C0252) adds a constant angular offset to the setpoint of the drive.
Speed−proportional angle adjustment

With speed−proportional angle adjustment the angle lags or leads with rising speed.
l Enter a corresponding adjustment value in increments in C0253.
l The set angle adjustment is reached at 15000 rpm of the drive (linear relationship).

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.27.3 Synchronising to zero track or touch probe
( Stop!
If synchronisation via terminals X5/E4 and X5/E5 (C0532 = 2) is activated, there
must not be any other signal connections to the terminals. If you have selected a
basic configuration via C0005, the terminals are subject to a basic assignment.
The synchronisation mode can be selected in C0532.

l C0532 = 1, zero pulse
– Zero track of digital frequency input X9 and zero track by the feedback system set under
C0490 (not for resolver evaluation).
l C0532 = 2, touch probe
– Via terminals X5/E4 (actual pulse) and X5/E5 (setpoint pulse).
l C0532 = 3, zero pulse (setpoint) and touch probe (actual value)
– Setpoint pulses of digital frequency input X9 and actual pulses via the touch probe input at
terminal X5/E4.
) Note!
For all three modes you can define a division factor for the actual pulses (code
C0531) and for the setpoint pulses (code C0535).
l Example: For C0531 = 10 only every tenth actual pulse is evaluated. The other 9
pulses are ignored.
l Lenze setting: C0531 = 1, C0533 = 3
Correction of the touch probe initiator (terminal X5/E5)

Delay times during the activation of the initiator cause a speed−dependent angular offset (e.g. during
positioning, synchronising). To compensate this angular offset, the response time [ms] of the
initiators is converted into an angular correction value depending on the setpoint speed and then
taken into account in the setpoint angle.
How to determine the angular correction value:
1. Use the below formula to convert the response time [ms] into a correction value [inc]:
Angular correction value in C0429 = 16384 × response time [ms]

– Please refer to the data sheet for the response time [ms] or contact the manufacturer of the
initiator.
2. Set the angular correction value for the angular offset in C0429.

Function library
Function blocks
Synchronisation mode
For the synchronisation, different modes are available which can be set under C0534.
C0534 Synchronisation mode Note
0 Inactive Function inactive
1 Continuous synchronisation with correction in the shortest
possible way
2 Continuous synchronisation with correction in the shortest A LOW−HIGH edge at DFSET−0−Pulse initiates continuous
possible way synchronisation
10 One−time synchronisation, an angular deviation is corrected in
the shortest possible way
CW direction
A LOW−HIGH edge at DFSET−0−Pulse initiates a one−time
CCW direction
synchronisation
13 One−time synchronisation, an angular difference is determined
between setpoint pulse and actual pulse and is corrected to the
corresponding direction of rotation according to the sign
Code C0528/1 displays the number of increments (angular difference) between the setpoint pulse
and the actual pulse before the synchronisation.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.27.4 Suppressing fault signals when synchronising via touch probe

Interference pulses which act on the actual pulse and setpoint pulse signal at the inputs X5/E4 and
X5/E5 can cause unwanted transients and faulty functions.
As of software version 6.2 it is possible to filter interference pulses via masking windows, thus
reducing interferences by up to 90%, depending on the application.
The masking windows can be set separately, for the actual pulses (X5/E4) via C0551 and for the
setpoint pulses (X5/E5) via C0546.

C0551 0
X5/E4

C0546 0
X5/E5
9300STD340
Fig. 3−72 Masking of interference pulses for setpoint and actual pulses
Variations of the actual / setpoint pulses
Actual pulses at X5/E4
Setpoint pulses at X5/E5
Interference pulse in the masked area is filtered out
Interference pulse in a non−masked area causes transients
Setting of masking window

1. Measure the number of increments between two pulses. Since the number varies depending
on the application, the variation limits must be detected and considered when setting the
masking windows.
– C0528/4 displays the number of increments between 2 actual pulses at X5/E4 (e.g. motor
increments).
– C0528/3 displays the number of increments between 2 setpoint pulses at X5/E5 (e.g. master
increments).
2. Set the size of the masking window, considering the variation limits. The higher the limits the
smaller the masking window must be set.
– In C0551 the size of the masking window between 2 actual pulses at X5/E4 can be set by
entering the corresponding number of increments.
– In C0546 the size of the masking window between 2 setpoint pulses at X5/E5 can be set by
entering the corresponding number of increments.
– Consider the division factors C0531 and C0535 when setting the masking windows.
) Note!
l The range to be masked out (masking windows C0546 and C0551) starts with the
first touch probe pulse and restarts with every new touch probe pulse.
Modifications of the masking window via C0546 or C0551 are accepted
immediately.
l If very low speeds are used, the masking window in C0551 should be set to
1 increment to prevent that actual pulses are classified as interference pulses.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.28 Delay elements (DIGDEL)

Purpose
This function is used to delay digital signals. This function can be used for the control of functions
or the generation of status information.
C0720 DIGDEL1
C0721
DIGDEL1-IN DIGDEL1-OUT
C0723
C0724 0 t
Fig. 3−73 Delay element (DIGDEL1)
Signal Source Note

DIGDEL1−IN d C0724 bin C0723 2 1000 −
DIGDEL1−OUT d − − − − − −
C0725 DIGDEL2
C0726
C0728
C0729 0 t
Signal Source Note

DIGDEL2−IN d C0729 bin C0728 2 1000 −
DIGDEL−OUT d − − − − − −
Function
You can select the following functions under C0720 (DIGDEL1) and C0725 (DIGDEL2):
l On−delay
l Off−delay
l General delay

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.28.1 On−delay
If the on−delay is set, a signal change from LOW to HIGH at the input DIGDELx−IN is passed on to
the DIGDELx−OUT output after the delay time set under C0721 or C0726 has elapsed.
DIGDEL1−IN
C0721 C0721 t
DIGDEL1−OUT
Fig. 3−75 On−delay (DIGDEL1)
In this function, the time element operates like a retriggerable monoflop:

l A LOW−HIGH edge at the input DIGDELx−IN starts the time element.
l If the delay time set under C0721 or C0726 has elapsed, the output DIGDELx−OUT is set to
HIGH.
l The time element is reset and the output DIGDELx−OUT is set to LOW with a HIGH−LOW edge
at the input DIGDELx−IN.
3.2.28.2 Off−delay
An off−delay causes a signal change from HIGH to LOW at the input DIGDELx−IN to be passed on
to the output DIGDELx−OUT after the delay time set under C0721 or C0726 has elapsed.
DIGDEL1−IN
C0721 C0721 t
DIGDEL1−OUT
Fig. 3−76 Off−delay (DIGDEL1)
l A LOW−HIGH edge at the input DIGDELx−IN causes the output DIGDELx−OUT to be set to
HIGH and the time element to be reset.
l The time element is started with a HIGH−LOW edge at the input DIGDELx−IN.
l After the delay time set under C0721 or C0726 has elapsed, the output DIGDELx−OUT is set to
LOW.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.28.3 General delay

A general delay causes any signal change at the input DIGDELx−IN to be passed onto the output
DIGDELx−OUT only after the time set under C0721 or C0726 has elapsed.
DIGDEL1−IN
DIGDEL1−TIMER
ÎÎÎ
C0721 t
DIGDEL1−OUT
Fig. 3−77 General delay
l The time element is started with any edge at the input DIGDELx−IN.
l When the timer (can be set under C0721 or C0726) has reached the upper limit, the output
DIGDELx−OUT is set to the same value as the input DIGDEL1−IN.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.29 Freely assignable digital inputs (DIGIN)

Purpose
Reading and conditioning of the signals at the terminals X5/E1 to X5/E5.
X5
DIGIN DCTRL -X5/28
DIGIN-CINH
28
DIGIN1
E1 C0114/1...5 DIGIN2
E2 DIGIN3
0
E3 1 DIGIN4
1
E4 DIGIN5
E5 C0443
Fig. 3−78 Freely assignable digital inputs (DIGIN)
Signal Source Note

DIGIN−CINH d − dec − − − Controller inhibit acts directly on the DCTRL
control
DIGIN1 d C0443 dec − − − −
DIGIN2 d C0443 dec − − − −
DIGIN3 d C0443 dec − − − −
DIGIN4 d C0443 dec − − − −
DIGIN5 d C0443 dec − − − −
Function
The terminals X5/E1 to X5/E5 are scanned every millisecond. The level for every input can be
inverted. For this, proceed as follows:
l Select code C0114 with corresponding subcode (e.g. subcode 3 for input X5/E3)
l Enter the desired level as a parameter:
– 0 = Level not inverted (HIGH active)
– 1 = Level inverted (LOW active)

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.30 Freely assignable digital outputs (DIGOUT)

Purpose
Conditioning of the digital signals and output at the terminals X5/A1 to X5/A4.
DIGOUT
DIGOUT1
C0117/1 X5
DIGOUT2 C0118/1...4
C0117/2 A1
DIGOUT3
C0117/3 0
DIGOUT4 A2
C0117/4 1
1
C0444/1 A3
C0444/2
C0444/3 A4
C0444/4
Fig. 3−79 Freely assignable digital outputs (DIGOUT)
Signal Source Note

DIGOUT1 d C0444/1 bin C0117/1 2 15000 −
DIGOUT2 d C0444/2 bin C0117/2 2 10650 −
DIGOUT3 d C0444/3 bin C0117/3 2 500 −
DIGOUT4 d C0444/4 bin C0117/4 2 5003 −
Function
The terminals X5/A1 to X5/A4 are updated every millisecond. The level for every output can be
l Select code C0118 with corresponding subcode (e.g. subcode 3 for output X5/A3)

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.31 First order derivative−action element (DT1)

Purpose
Derivative action on signals.
For instance, used for the acceleration processes (dv/dt).
C0650 DT1-1
C0653 C0651
±199.99 %
DT1-1-IN DT1-1-OUT
C0652
C0654
fb_dt1−1
Fig. 3−80 First order derivative−action element (DT1−1)
Signal Source Note

DT1−1−IN a C0654 dec [%] C0652 1 1000 −
DT1−1−OUT a − − − − − Limited to ±199.99 %
Function
l The delay Tv is set under C0651.
l The input sensitivity of the DT1−1 element can be reduced under C0653.
l The FB only evaluates the specified most significant bits, according to the setting.
K=Td / Tv
Tv t
Fig. 3−81 Delay time Tv of the first order derivative−action element

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.32 Free piece counter (FCNT)

Purpose
Digital up/down counter
C 1 1 0 0 F C N T 1
F C N T 1 -C L K U P F C N T 1 -O U T
C 1 1 0 2 /1
C 1 1 0 4 /1
F C N T 1 -C L K D W N
C 1 1 0 2 /2
C 1 1 0 4 /2 C T R L F C N T 1 -E Q U A L
F C N T 1 -L D -V A L
C 1 1 0 1 /1
C 1 1 0 3 /1
F C N T 1 -L O A D
C 1 1 0 2 /3
C 1 1 0 4 /3
F C N T 1 -C M P -V A L
C 1 1 0 1 /2
C 1 1 0 3 /2
Fig. 3−82 Free piece counter (FCNT1)
Signal Source Note

FCNT1−CLKUP d C1104/1 bin C1102/1 2 LOW−HIGH edge = counts up by 1
FCNT1−CLKDWN d C1104/2 bin C1102/2 2 LOW−HIGH edge = counts down by 1
FCNT1−LD−VAL a C1103/1 dec C1101/1 1 Starting value
FCNT1−LOAD d C1104/3 bin C1102/3 2 · HIGH = Accept starting value
· The input has the highest priority
FCNT1−CMP−VAL a C1103/2 dec C1101/2 1 Comparison value
FCNT1−OUT a − − − − Counter limited to ±199.99 % (¢ ±32767)
FCNT1−EQUAL d − − − − HIGH = comparison value reached
Function
l C1100 = 1
– If | counter content | ³ | FCNT1−CMP−VAL | (comparison value), FCNT1−EQUAL is set = HIGH
for 1 ms. Afterwards the counter is reset to the starting value (FCNT1−LD−VAL).
) Note!
If the signal is to be available longer, e. g. for a query of the output via a PLC, you
can prolong the signal via the TRANS function block.
l C1100 = 2
– If | counter content | ³ | FCNT1−CMP−VAL | (comparison value), the counter is stopped.
– Via FCNT1−LOAD = HIGH, the counter is reset to the starting value (FCNT1−LD−VAL).
l C1100 = 3
– If | counter content| = | FCNT1−CMP−VAL | (comparison value), the counter is stopped.
– FCNT1−OUT is limited to 32767 for counting upwards and to −32767 for counting
downwards.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.33 Free digital outputs (FDO)

Purpose
This function block can be used to connect digital signals via C0151, the function block AIF−OUT and
function block CAN−OUT to the connected fieldbus systems.
FDO-0 FDO
C0116/1
FDO-1
C0116/2
FDO-2
C0116/3
FDO-3
C0116/4
FDO-4
C0116/5
FDO-5
C0116/6
FDO-6
C0116/7
FDO-7
C0116/8
FDO-8
C0116/9
FDO-9 C0151
C0116/10
FDO-10
C0116/11
FDO-11
C0116/12
FDO-12
C0116/13 AIF-OUT
FDO-13
C0116/14
FDO-14
C0116/15
FDO-15
C0116/16
FDO-16 CAN1-OUT
C0116/17
FDO-17
C0116/18
FDO-18
C0116/19
FDO-19
C0116/20 CAN2-OUT
FDO-20
C0116/21
FDO-21
C0116/22
FDO-22
C0116/23
FDO-23 CAN3-OUT
C0116/24
FDO-24
C0116/25
FDO-25
C0116/26
FDO-26
C0116/27
FDO-27
C0116/28
FDO-28
C0116/29
FDO-29
C0116/30
FDO-30
C0116/31
FDO-31
C0116/32
Fig. 3−83 Free digital outputs (FDO)

Function library
Function blocks
Signal Source Note

FDO−0 d C0151 hex C0116/1 2 1000
FDO−1 d C0151 hex C0116/2 2 1000
FDO−2 d C0151 hex C0116/3 2 1000
FDO−3 d C0151 hex C0116/4 2 1000
FDO−4 d C0151 hex C0116/5 2 1000
FDO−5 d C0151 hex C0116/6 2 1000
FDO−6 d C0151 hex C0116/7 2 1000
FDO−7 d C0151 hex C0116/8 2 1000
FDO−8 d C0151 hex C0116/9 2 1000
FDO−9 d C0151 hex C0116/10 2 1000
FDO−10 d C0151 hex C0116/11 2 1000
FDO−11 d C0151 hex C0116/12 2 1000
FDO−12 d C0151 hex C0116/13 2 1000
FDO−13 d C0151 hex C0116/14 2 1000
FDO−14 d C0151 hex C0116/15 2 1000
FDO−15 d C0151 hex C0116/16 2 1000
FDO−16 d C0151 hex C0116/17 2 1000
FDO−17 d C0151 hex C0116/18 2 1000
FDO−18 d C0151 hex C0116/19 2 1000
FDO−19 d C0151 hex C0116/20 2 1000
FDO−20 d C0151 hex C0116/21 2 1000
FDO−21 d C0151 hex C0116/22 2 1000
FDO−22 d C0151 hex C0116/23 2 1000
FDO−23 d C0151 hex C0116/24 2 1000
FDO−24 d C0151 hex C0116/25 2 1000
FDO−25 d C0151 hex C0116/26 2 1000
FDO−26 d C0151 hex C0116/27 2 1000
FDO−27 d C0151 hex C0116/28 2 1000
FDO−28 d C0151 hex C0116/29 2 1000
FDO−29 d C0151 hex C0116/30 2 1000
FDO−30 d C0151 hex C0116/31 2 1000
FDO−31 d C0151 hex C0116/32 2 1000
Function
You can freely select a digital signal source for every signal input.
l The corresponding bit in the data word (DWORD) is marked with FDO−x (e.g. FDO−0 for the
LSB and FDO−31 for the MSB).
l The DWORD is transferred to code C0151 and to the function blocks AIF−OUT, CAN−OUT1,
CAN−OUT2, and CAN−OUT3.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.34 Freely assignable input variables (FEVAN)

Purpose
Transfer of analog signals to any code. At the same time, the FB converts the signal into the data
format of the target code.
C 1 0 9 1 F E V A N 1
C 1 0 9 5 C 1 0 9 2
+ C o d e /S u b c o d e
F E V A N 1 -IN C 1 0 9 3
C 1 0 9 6 S & H (C x x x x /y y y )
C 1 0 9 4 +
C 1 0 9 8
C 1 0 9 0 C T R L F E V A N 1 -B U S Y
F E V A N 1 -L O A D
C 1 0 9 7 F E V A N 1 -F A IL
C 1 0 9 9
Fig. 3−84 Freely assignable input variables (FEVAN1)
Signal Source Note

FEVAN1−IN a C1098 dec C1096 1 Input value
FEVAN1−LOAD d C1099/1 bin C1097/1 2 A LOW−HIGH edge transmits the converted signal to the
target code.
FEVAN1−BUSY d − − − − HIGH = transmitting
FEVAN1−FAIL d − − − − HIGH = transmission failed
A LOW−HIGH edge at FEFAN1−LOAD sets FEFAN1−FAIL
= LOW.
− − C1090 − − − Display of the converted signal
C 1 5 0 1 F E V A N 2
C 1 5 0 5 C 1 5 0 2
F E V A N 2 -IN C 1 5 0 3
C 1 5 0 6 S & H (C x x x x /y y y )
C 1 5 0 4 +
C 1 5 0 8
C 1 5 0 0 C T R L F E V A N 2 -B U S Y
C 1 5 0 7 F E V A N 2 -F A IL
C 1 5 0 9
Signal Source Note

target code.
= LOW.

Function library
Function blocks
Function
l Conversion of the read data via:
– Numerator, denominator.
– Offset.
l Selection of a target code for the read data.
Codes for the conversion of the read data and for the selection of the target code
Function block Numerator Denominator Offset Code Subcode Examples
FEVAN1 C1093 C1094 C1095 C1091 C1092
FEVAN2 C1503 C1504 C1505 C1501 C1502
Data transmission
Correct transmission Wrong transmission
FEVANx-FAIL
FEVANx-BUSY
FEVANx-LOAD
Fig. 3−86 Signal flow
Transmission errors may occur if

l no target code is available,
l no target subcode is available,
l the data transmitted are out of the target code limits,
l the target code is inhibited since it may only be written if the controller is inhibited. Inhibit the
controller (see code table).
Cyclic data transmission
C 1 0 9 1 F E V A N 1
C 1 0 9 5 C 1 0 9 2
F E V A N 1 -IN C 1 0 9 3
C 1 0 9 6 S & H (C x x x x /y y y )
C 1 0 9 4 +
C 1 0 9 8
N O T 1 C 1 0 9 0 C T R L F E V A N 1 -B U S Y
N O T 1 -IN 1 N O T 1 -O U T F E V A N 1 -L O A D
C 0 8 4 0 C 1 0 9 7 F E V A N 1 -F A IL
C 0 8 4 1 C 1 0 9 9
Fig. 3−87 Example for a cyclic data transmission to a target code

Function library
Function blocks
Conversion
In the example, the conversion is made at FB FEVAN1.
l The data format of the target code is important for the conversion (see attribute table).
l Adapt the input signal to the data format of the target code:
– C1093 (numerator).
– C1094 (denominator).
l C1094 also fixes the decimal positions of the target code:
– Set C1094 according to the existing decimal positions of the target code. The number of
decimal positions can be obtained from the code table.
– 0.0001 ¢ no decimal positions.
– 0.001 ¢ one decimal position.
– 0.01 ¢ two decimal positions.
– 0.1 ¢ three decimal positions.
– 1 ¢ four decimal positions.
l For target codes with % scaling the formula for conversion must include a scaling factor (see
example 1).

Function library
Function blocks
Example 1 (only for FIX32 format with % scaling):
C 1 0 9 1 F E V A N 1
C 1 0 9 5 C 1 0 9 2
F E V A N 1 -IN C 1 0 9 3
C 0 4 7 2 /1 C 1 0 9 6 S & H (C x x x x /y y y )
C 1 0 9 4 +
C 1 0 9 8
C 1 0 9 0 C T R L F E V A N 1 -B U S Y
C 0 4 7 1 .B 0 C 1 0 9 7 F E V A N 1 -F A IL
C 1 0 9 9
Fig. 3−88 Example of a circuit for FIX32 format with % scaling
Task:
l C0472/1 = 1.05 %. Write this value to C0141.
Configuration:
l Connect FEVAN1−IN (C1096) with FCODE−472/1 (19521).
l Connect FEVAN1−LOAD (C1097/1) with FCODE−471.B0 (19521).
Parameter setting:
l Set C1091 = 141 (¢ C0141)
l Set C1092 = 0 (no subcode available)
l C1093 = calculate numerator
l Set C1094 = 0.01 (two decimal positions)
l Set C1095 = 0 (no offset).
Calculation:
FEVAN1–IN[%] @ 1 @ 16384 @ C1093 ) C1095 + C0141[%]

10000 100 C1094
Scaling factor Scaling factor
Control:
l Set C0471.B0 = 1 (¢ 00000001h) so that the data are transmitted to the target code.
Example for converting to C1093:
1.05% @ 10000 @ 100 @ C1094 @ 1 + C1093 + 0.6103

16384 1.05%
Setpoint in C0141 FEVAN1−IN
Display:
l C0141 = 1.00 %

Function library
Function blocks
Example 2 (only for FIX32 format without % scaling):

Task:
l C0473/1 = 1000. Write this value to C0011.
Configuration:
Parameter setting:
l Set C1091 = 11 (¢ C0011)
l Set C1093 = 1.0
l Set C1094 = 0.0001 (no decimal position)
The source code has no unit. The scaling factor is dropped.
Calculation:
FEVAN1–IN @ 1 @ C1093 ) C1095 + C0011[rpm]
10000 C1094
Scaling factor
1, 0
1000 @ 1 @ ) 0 + 1000rpm
10000 0.0001
Control:
l Set C0471.B0 = 1 (¢ 00000001h) so that the data are transmitted to the target code.
Display:
l C0011 displays the value 1000 rpm.
The other formats are calculated with the following formula:
FEVAN1–IN @ C1093 ) C1095 + x
C1094

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.35 Fixed setpoints (FIXSET)

Purpose
This FB serves to program up to 15 fixed setpoints which can be retrieved via digital terminals or
control codes.
The fixed setpoints can e.g. be used for:
l different setpoint dancer positions for one dancer position control or
l different stretching ratios (gearbox factor) for a speed ratio control with digital frequency
coupling
FIXSET1-AIN FIXSET1
C0561
FIXSET1-IN1*1 C0560/1 FIXSET1-OUT
C0562/1 C0563 C0560/2
C0564/1 C0560/15
FIXSET1-IN2*2 DMUX
C0562/2 0
C0564/2 0 FIXSET1...15
15
FIXSET1-IN3*4
C0562/3 3
C0564/3
FIXSET1-IN4*8
C0562/4
C0564/4
Fig. 3−89 Fixed setpoint (FIXSET1)
Signal Source Note

FIXSET1−AIN a C0563 dec [%] C0561 1 1000 The input is switched to the output if a LOW
level is applied to all selection inputs
FIXSET−INx.
FIXSET1−IN1*1 d C0564/1 bin C0562/1 2 1000 The number of the inputs to be assigned
FIXSET1−IN2*2 d C0564/2 bin C0562/2 2 1000 depends on the number of the FIXSET
setpoints required.
FIXSET1−IN3*4 d C0564/3 bin C0562/3 2 1000
FIXSET1−IN4*8 d C0564/4 bin C0562/4 2 1000
FIXSET1−OUT a − − − − −
Function
The FB output can be used as a setpoint source (signal source) for another FB (e.g. process controller,
arithmetic block etc.). Parameter setting and handling are similar to JOG but independent of JOG (cp.
FB NSET).
l Parameter setting of the fixed setpoints:
– The single fixed setpoints are parameterised via the subcodes of C0560.
l Output of the fixed setpoint selected:
– If the binary inputs are triggered with HIGH signal, a fixed setpoint from the table is switched
to the output.
l Value range:
– The values for the fixed setpoint can be set between −200% and +200%.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.35.1 Release of the FIXSET1 setpoints

Number of the fixed setpoints required Number of inputs to be assigned
1 at least 1
1 ... 3 at least 2
4 ... 7 at least 3
8 ... 15 4
System for decoding the binary input signals:

Output signal 1st input 2nd input 3rd input 4th input
FIXSET1−OUT = FIXSET1−IN1 FIXSET1−IN2 FIXSET1−IN3 FIXSET1−IN4
FIXSET1−Ain 0 0 0 0
C0560/1 1 0 0 0
C0560/2 0 1 0 0
C0560/3 1 1 0 0
C0560/4 0 0 1 0
C0560/5 1 0 1 0
C0560/6 0 1 1 0
C0560/7 1 1 1 0
C0560/8 0 0 0 1
C0560/9 1 0 0 1
C0560/10 0 1 0 1
C0560/11 1 1 0 1
C0560/12 0 0 1 1
C0560/13 1 0 1 1
C0560/14 0 1 1 1
C0560/15 1 1 1 1

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.36 Flipflop element (FLIP)

Purpose
This FB is a D flipflop. This function is used to evaluate and save digital signal edges.
FLIP1-D FLIP1
C0770
C0773/1 FLIP1-OUT
D Q
FLIP1-CLK
C0771
C0773/2 CLR
FLIP1-CLR
C0772
C0773/3
Fig. 3−90 Flipflop element (FLIP1)
Signal Source Note

FLIP1−D d C0773/1 bin C0770 2 1000 −
FLIP1−CLK d C0773/2 bin C0771 2 1000 Evaluates LOW−HIGH edges only
FLIP1−CLR d C0773/3 bin C0772 2 1000 Evaluates the input level only: input has
highest priority
FLIP1−OUT d − − − − − −
FLIP2-D FLIP2
C0775
C0778/1 FLIP2-OUT
D Q
FLIP2-CLK
C0776
C0778/2 CLR
FLIP2-CLR
C0777
C0778/3
Signal Source Note

FLIP2−D d C0778/1 bin C0775 2 1000 −
highest priority
FLIP2−OUT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
FLIP3−D
FLIP3
C1060/1 FLIP3−OUT
C1061/1 D Q
FLIP3−CLK
C1060/2
C1061/2
FLIP3−CLR CLR
C1060/3
C1061/3
FB_flip3
Signal Source Note

FLIP3−D d C1061/1 bin C1060/1 2 1000 −
FLIP3−CLK d C1061/2 bin C1060/2 2 1000 Evaluates LOW−HIGH edges only
FLIP3−CLR d C1061/3 bin C1060/3 2 1000 Evaluates the input level only: input has
highest priority
FLIP3−OUT d − − − − − −
FLIP4
C1060/4 FLIP4−D FLIP4−OUT
C1061/4 D Q
FLIP4−CLK
C1060/5
C1061/5
FLIP4−CLR CLR
C1060/6
C1061/6
FB_flip4
Signal Source Source Note

FLIP4−D d C1061/4 bin C1060/4 2 1000 −
highest priority
FLIP4−OUT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
Function
FLIPx−D
FLIPx−CLK
FLIPx−OUT
Fig. 3−94 Function sequence of a flipflop
l The input FLIPx−CLR always has priority.

l If a HIGH level is applied at the input FLIPx−CLR, the output FLIPx−OUT is set to and
maintained at a LOW level al long as this input is at a HIGH level.
l With a LOW−HIGH edge at the input FLIPx−CLK, the level at the input FLIPx−D is switched to
the output and saved until
– another LOW−HIGH edge is applied at the input FLIPx−CLK or
– the input FLIPx−CLR is set to a HIGH level.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.37 Gearbox compensation (GEARCOMP)

Purpose
Compensates elasticities in the drive train (e.g. gearbox torsion).
Implementation of an adaptive linkage of e.g. the phase setpoint (32 bits) and the torque feedforward
control (14 bits).
G E A R C O M P
C 1 2 6 0
G E A R C O M P -T O R Q U E 1 4 1 5
2 + 2 -1
C 1 2 6 5 C 1 2 6 1
+ C 1 2 6 2
C 1 2 6 8 0 1 5
V o r z e ic h e n -2 + 1
G E A R C O M P -P H I-IN + G E A R C O M P -O U T
C 1 2 6 6
+
C 1 2 6 9
Fig. 3−95 Gearbox compensation (GEARCOMP)
Signal Source Comment

GEARCOMP−TORQUE a C1268 dec [%] C1265 2 Input value
GEARCOMP−PHI−IN ph C1269 dec [inc] C1266 3
GEARCOMP−OUT ph − − − − Outputs the compensated phase setpoint.
Function
l The signal at GEARCOMP−TORQUE is broken down into the absolute value and the sign.
– The absolute value is limited to 214 (+16384) first.
l The absolute value is converted (via C1260, C1261, C1262).
l The result is evaluated with the sign and is added to the signal at GEARCOMP−PHI−IN.
Codes for the conversion of the absolute value:
Code Function Selection Comment
C1260 Offset −16383 {1} 16383
C1261 Numerator −32767 {1} 32767 Dynamic disconnection at C1261 = 0
(GEARCOMP−PHI−IN = GEARCOMP−OUT)
C1262 Denominator 1 {1} 32767

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.38 Limiting element (LIM)

Purpose
This FB is used to limit signals to adjustable value ranges.
C0630 LIM1
LIM1-IN LIM1-OUT
C0632
C0633
C0631
Fig. 3−96 Limiting element (LIM1)
Signal Source Note

LIM1−IN1 a C0633 dec [%] C0632 1 1000 −
LIM1−OUT a − − − − − −
Function
l If the input signal exceeds the upper limit (C0630), the upper limit is effective.
l If the input signal falls below the lower limit (C0631), the lower limit is effective.
Tip!
The lower limit (C0631) must be smaller than the upper limit (C0630).

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.39 Internal motor control (MCTRL)

Purpose
This function block controls the drive machine consisting of angle controller, speed controller, and
motor control.
MCTRL
DCTRL-QSP >
–1 MCTRL-QSP-OUT
MCTRL-QSP
C0900
C0042
C0907/3 MCTRL-NSET2
MCTRL-HI-M-LIM C0050 MCTRL-MMAX
C0893
MCTRL-MSET2
MCTRL-LO-M-LIM C0906/4
C0892
C0056 MCTRL-MACT
MCTRL-N/M-SWT C0906/3
C0899
MCTRL-IACT
MCTRL-I-LOAD C0907/2
C0902 C0054 MCTRL-IMAX
MCTRL-I-SET C0907/4
C0901 MCTRL-DCVOLT
C0105 C0906/8 C0053
QSP
C0909
±100%
1 + + 1 VECT-CTRL PWM
MCTRL-N-SET + 0
0 0
C0890 + - + 1
C0906/1
C0254
C0072 C0006 C0018
MCTRL-P-ADAPT C0070 C0022
C0903
C0071 C0075
C0906/9 C0076
MCTRL-PHI-SET 0 C0077
C0894 1 C0086 C0078
C0081
C0908 - C0084
MCTRL-PHI-LIM + C0085
C0895 C0087
C0906/5 C0088
MCTRL-PHI-ON C0089
C0897 C0090
C0907/1 C0091 MCTRL-LOAD-I2xt
MCTRL-N2-LIM
C0896
C0906/6 C0066
MCTRL-M-ADD
C0891 MCTRL-UTILIZATION
C0906/2
CONST C0064
MCTRL-FLD-WEAK
C0898 MCTRL-PHI-ANA
C0906/7
C0497
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
X7 Resolver
MCTRL-NACT
C0051 MCTRL-PHI-ANG
X8 Encoder C0420 C0011
C0490 C0025
C0495
fb_mctrl
Fig. 3−97 Internal motor control (MCTRL)

Function library
Function blocks
Signal Source Note

MCTRL−PHI−SET ph C0908 dec [inc] C0894 3 1000 Angle controller input for difference of
setpoint angle to actual angle
MCTRL−N−SET a C0906/1 dec [%] C0890 1 5050 Speed setpoint input
MCTRL−M−ADD a C0906/2 dec [%] C0891 1 1000 Additional torque setpoint or torque
setpoint
MCTRL−LO−MLIM a C0906/3 dec [%] C0892 1 5700 Lower torque limitation in % of C0057
MCTRL−HI−MLIM a C0906/4 dec [%] C0893 1 19523 Upper torque limitation in % of C0057
MCTRL−PHI−LIM a C0906/5 dec [%] C0895 1 1006 Influence of angle controller in % of nmax
C0011
MCTRL−N2−LIM a C0906/6 dec [%] C0896 1 1000 Lower speed limit at speed limitation
MCTRL−FLDWEAK a C0906/7 dec [%] C0898 1 1006 Motor excitation
MCTRL−I−SET a C0906/8 dec [%] C0901 1 1006 Input for setting the I component of the
speed controller
MCTRL−P−ADAPT a C0906/9 dec [%] C0903 1 1006 Influence in % on VP of C0254, the absolute
value is processed (without sign)
MCTRL−PHI−ON d C0907/1 bin C0897 2 1000 HIGH = Activation of angle controller
MCTRL−N/M−SWT d C0907/2 bin C0899 2 1000 LOW = active speed control
HIGH = active torque control
MCTRL−QSP d C0907/3 bin C0900 2 10250 HIGH = drive performs QSP
MCTRL−I−LOAD d C0907/4 bin C0902 2 1000 HIGH = I component of the n−controller is
accepted by MCTRL−I−SET
MCTRL−QSP−OUT d − − − − − HIGH = drive performs QSP
MCTRL−NSET2 a − − − − − In % of nmax (C0011)
MCTRL−MMAX d − − − − − HIGH = speed controller operates within the
limits
MCTRL−MSET2 a − − − − − In % of Mmax (C0057)
MCTRL−MACT a − − − − − In % of Mmax (C0057)
MCTRL−IACT a − − − − − MCTRL−IACT = 100 % = C0022
MCTRL−IMAX d − − − − − HIGH = drive operates at the current limit
C0022
MCTRL−DCVOLT a − − − − − 100 % = 1000 V
MCTRL−LOAD−I2xt a − − − − − I2 × t utilisation of the motor in %
MCTRL−UTILIZATION a − − − − − Device utilisation I × t in %
MCTRL−PHI−ANA a − − − − − Actual angle value as analog signal
90° = 100 %
MCTRL−PHI−ACT phd − − − − −
MCTRL−NACT a − − − − − In % of nmax (C0011)
MCTRL−PHI−ANG ph − − − − − 65536 inc = one revolution

Function library
Function blocks
Function
l Current controller
l Torque limitation
l Additional torque setpoint
l Speed controller
l Torque control with speed limitation
l Speed setpoint limitation
l Angle controller
l Quick stop QSP
l Field weakening
l Switching frequency changeover
3.2.39.1 Current controller

Adapt current controller via C0075 (proportional gain) and C0076 (reset time) to the machine
connected.
) Note!
Use C0086 to select a suitable motor from the motor selection list. In this way, the
parameters of the current controller are automatically set to the correct values.
3.2.39.2 Additional torque setpoint

The input MCTRL−M−ADD serves as torque setpoint or additional torque setpoint, depending on the
control of the input MCTRL−N/M−SWT. The additional torque setpoint can be used e.g. for friction
compensation or speed injection (dv/dt).
l When MCTRL−N/M−SWT = LOW the speed control is active.
– MCTRL−M−ADD is added to the output of the n−controller.
– The limits defined by the torque limitations MCTRL−LO−M−LIM and MCTRL−HI−M−LIM
cannot be exceeded.
l When MCTRL−N/M−SWT = HIGH, the torque control is active.
– MCTRL−M−ADD acts as torque setpoint
– The n−controllers have a monitoring function.
l The torque setpoint is specified in [%] of the max. possible torque (see C0057).
– Negative values mean a torque with CCW rotation of the motor.
– Positive values mean a torque with CW rotation of the motor.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.39.3 Torque limitation

Via the inputs MCTRL−LO−M−LIM and MCTRL−HI−M−LIM an external torque limitation can be set.
This serves to set different torques for the quadrants "driving" and "braking".
l MCTRL−HI−M−LIM is the upper torque limit in [%] of the max. possible torque (C0057).
l MCTRL−LO−M−LIM is the lower torque limit in [%] of the max. possible torque (C0057).
l In case of quick stop (QSP) the torque limitation is deactivated.
( Stop!
Only apply positive values to MCTRL−HI−M−LIM and negative values to
MCTRL−LO−M−LIM. Otherwise the speed controller may lose control and the drive
may rev up in an uncontrolled manner.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.39.4 Speed controller

The speed controller is designed as an ideal PID controller.
Parameter setting
If you select a motor via C0086, the parameters are preset so that only a few (if any) adaptations to
the application are necessary.
l Parameterisation of the proportional gain Vp in C0070:
– Enter approx. 50 % of the speed setpoint
– Increase C0070 until the drive becomes unstable (observe motor noises)
– Reduce C0070 until the drive runs stable again
– Reduce C0070 to approx. 50 %
l Parameterisation of the reset time Tn in C0071:
– Reduce C0071 until the drive becomes unstable (observe motor noises)
– Increase C0071 until the drive runs stable again
– Set C0071 to the double value
l Parameterisation of the derivative gain Td in C0072:
– Increase C0072 during operation until an optimum behaviour is achieved.
Signal limitation
When the drive outputs the max. torque, the speed controller operates within the limits.
l The drive cannot follow the speed setpoint.
l This state is indicated with MCTRL−MMAX = HIGH.
Setting the integral component

To enter defined starting values for the torque the integral component of the n−controller can be set
externally (e.g. when using the brake control).
l MCTRL−I−LOAD = HIGH
– The n−controller accepts the value at input MCTRL−I−SET as its integral component.
– The value at input MCTRL−I−SET acts as a torque setpoint for the motor control.
l MCTRL−I−LOAD = LOW
– Function is switched off.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.39.5 Torque control with speed limitation

This function is activated with MCTRL−N/M−SWT = HIGH. A second speed controller (auxiliary speed
controller) is connected for the speed limitation.
l MCTRL−M−ADD acts as bipolar torque setpoint.
l The n−controller 1 is used to create the upper speed limit.
– The upper speed limit is selected at the input MCTRL−N−SET in [%] of nmax (C0011) (pos.
sign for CW rotation).
– The upper speed limit is only to be used for CW rotation.
l The n−controller (auxiliary speed controller) is used to form the lower speed limit
– The lower speed limit is selected at the input MCTRL−N2−LIM in [%] of nmax (C0011) (neg.
sign for CCW rotation).
– The lower speed limit is only to be used for CCW rotation.
3.2.39.6 Speed setpoint limitation

The speed setpoint is limited to ±100 % of nmax (C0011) at the MCTRL−N−SET input.
C0909 is used to set a limitation of the direction of rotation for the speed setpoint.

Function library
Function blocks

The angle controller is required to achieve angular synchronism and drift−free standstill.
) Note!
Select a configuration with digital frequency coupling in C0005 since this serves to
link all important signals automatically. On this basis the system can be optimised.
Activating the angle controller

1. Configure a signal source with C0894, which provides the angular difference between setpoint
and actual angle (see "Digital frequency configuration under C0005).
2. Select a value > 0 at the MCTRL−PHI−LIM input.
3. Trigger the input MCTRL−PHI−ON with HIGH (e.g. with FIXED1).
4. Set the gain of the angle controller > 0 in C0254 (see chapter 3.2.39.4)
– Before setting C0254, select an as high as possible P−gain for the n−controller in C0070.
– Increase C0254 during operation until the drive shows the required control response.
Influence of angle controller

The output of the angle controller is added to the speed setpoint.
l If the actual angle is lagging, the drive is accelerated
l If the actual angle is leading the drive is decelerated until the required angular synchronism is
achieved.
The influence of the angle controller consists of:
l Angular difference multiplied by the P−gain C0254
l Additional influence via analog signal at MCTRL−P−ADAPT
l Limitation of the angle controller output to ±MCTRL−PHI−LIM
Limitation of the angle controller output

This limits the max. speed−up of the drive at high angular differences.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.39.8 Quick stop QSP

The QSP function is used to stop the drive within an adjustable time independently of the setpoint
selection.
The QSP function is active
l if the input MCTRL−QSP is triggered with HIGH.
l if the controller is triggered via the control words (DCTRL).
Function:
l If torque control has been selected, it will be deactivated. The drive is controlled by the speed
controller.
l The speed runs with the deceleration time set under C0105 to zero speed.
l The torque limitations MCTRL−LO−M−LIM and MCTRL−HI−M−LIM are deactivated.
l The angle controller is activated. If the rotor position is shifted actively, the drive generates a
torque against this displacement if:
– C0254 is not zero
– The input MCTRL−PHI−LIM is triggered with a value > 0 %.
( Stop!
If the field is weakened manually (MCTRL−FLD−WEAK < 100%), the drive is unable
to generate the max. torque.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.39.9 Field weakening

The field weakening range does not need to be set if the motor type has been set in C0086. In this
case all settings required are made automatically. The motor is operated in the field weakening mode
if
l the output voltage of the controller exceeds the rated motor voltage set in C0090,
l the controller cannot increase the output voltage with rising speed any more because of the
mains voltage / DC−bus voltage.
Manual field weakening

A manual field weakening is possible via the input MCTRL−FLD−WEAK. For reaching the maximum
excitation this input must be triggered with +100 % (e.g. FIXED100%).
( Stop!
The available torque is reduced by the field weakening.
3.2.39.10 Switching frequency changeover

The switching frequency of the inverter can be selected:
l 8 kHz fixed, for power−optimised operation (C0018 = 1)
– maximum power output of the controller, but with audible pulse operation
l 16 kHz fixed, for noise−optimised operation (C0018 = 2)
– inaudible pulse operation of the controller, but with reduced power output (torque)
l Automatic changeover between power−optimised and noise−optimised operation (C0018 = 0)
Automatic switching frequency changeover

The automatic switching frequency changeover can be used if the drive is to be operated in the
noise−optimised range, but the available torque is not sufficient for acceleration processes.
Condition M = f(I) Function
M < MN16 (IN16) Controller is operated with 16 kHz (noise−optimised)
MN16 (IN16) < M < MN8 (IN8) Controller switches over to 8 kHz (power−optimised)
M > Mmax8 (Imax8) Controller operates with 8 kHz in the current limitation

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.40 Mains failure control (MFAIL)

Purpose
If the supply voltage via L1, L2, L3 or +UG, −UG fails, the drive (drive network) can be decelerated
(braked) in a controlled way. Without this function, the drive (drive network) would coast.
MFAIL-ADAPT MFAIL
C0973
C988/2 C0980 Vp
MFAIL-CONST -
C0974 +
C988/3 C0982 MCRTL-
DCVOLT
MFAIL-DC-SET -
C0978 +
C0988/7
C0981 Tn
MFAIL-N-SET 1
C0970 MFAIL-NOUT
0
C0988/1
C0983
MFAIL-FAULT
C0971
C0989/1
MFAIL-RESET
C0972
C0989/2
MFAIL-THRESHOLD CTRL
C0975
MFAIL-STATUS
C0988/4
MFAIL-NACT
C0976
MFAIL-I-RESET
C0988/5
MFAIL-SET
C0977
C0988/6
Fig. 3−98 Mains failure control (MFAIL)
Signal Source Note

MFAIL−N−SET a C0988/1 dec [%] C0970 1 1000 Speed setpoint in [%] of C0011
MFAIL−ADAPT a C0988/2 dec [%] C0973 1 1000 Dynamic adaptation of the proportional
gain of the UGset controller in [%] of C0980
MFAIL−KONST a C0988/3 dec [%] C0974 1 1000 Proportional gain of the UGset controller in
[%] of C0980
MFAIL−THRESHOLD a C0988/4 dec [%] C0975 1 1000 Restart threshold in [%] of C0011
MFAIL−NACT a C0988/5 dec [%] C0976 1 1000 Comparison value for the restart threshold
in [%] of C0011
MFAIL−SET a C0988/6 dec [%] C0977 1 1000 Speed start point for the deceleration in
[%] of C0011
MFAIL−DC−SET a C0988/7 dec [%] C0978 1 1000 Voltage setpoint on which the DC bus
voltage is to be maintained, 100% =
1000V
MFAIL−FAULT d C0989/1 bin C0971 2 1000 HIGH = activates the mains failure control
MFAIL−RESET d C0989/2 bin C0972 2 1000 HIGH = reset
MFAIL−N−OUT a − − − − − Speed setpoint in [%] of C0011
MFAIL−STATUS d − − − − − HIGH = mains failure control active
MFAIL−I−RESET d − − − − − HIGH = mains failure control active, the
drive is braking

Function library
Function blocks
Range of functions
l Mains failure detection
l Mains failure control
l Restart protection
l Reset of the mains failure control
l Dynamic adaptation of the control parameters
l Fast mains recovery (KU)
l Application examples
3.2.40.1 Mains failure control

A failure of the controller’s power section supply can be detected by
l evaluating the DC−bus voltage or
l an external system for mains failure detection (e.g. 934X module or voltage measuring relay).
It is possible to combine the two methods.
The type of the mains failure detection to be used depends on the drive system used.
DC−bus voltage evaluation

Use with single drives or multi−axis drives, which do not use external monitoring systems.
l For this you can use a comparator (e.g. CMP2). Set the following signal combinations:
– C0688/1 = 5005 (MCTRL−DCVOLT to CMP2−IN1)
– C0688/2 = 19540 (free code C0472/20 to CMP2−IN2)
– C0971 = 10655 (CMP2−OUT to MFAIL−FAULT)
– Set function of the comparator CMP2 with C0685 = 3
Enter the function blocks CMP2 and MFAIL into free positions of the processing table in C0465.
MFAIL
C0685 CMP2 MFAIL-N-SET 1
C0686 C0970 MFAIL-NOUT
C0687 0
C0988/1
CMP2-IN1 CMP2-OUT MFAIL-FAULT
C0472/20 C0688/1 C0971
C0689/1 C0989/1 CTRL
CMP2-IN2 MFAIL-RESET
MCTRL-DCVOLT C0688/2 C0972
C0989/2
C0689/2
Fig. 3−99 Example of a mains failure detection with internal function blocks (section)

Function library
Function blocks
External system for mains failure detection (934x supply module)

l A digital output of the supply module 934x is applied to the function block MFAIL via the digital
inputs DIGIN of the controller 93XX. In the example the input X5/E4 is used. For this purpose
the signal combination must be set as follows:
– C0971 = 54 (DIGIN4 to MFAIL−FAULT)
– C0871 = 1000 (remove DCTRL−TRIP−SET from terminal X5/E4)
– Select level (HIGH or LOW active) with C0114/4
Enter the function block MFAIL into a free position of the processing table in C0465.
X5 DIGIN DCTRL -X5/28 MFAIL
28
DIGIN1 MFAIL-N-SET 1
E1 C0970 MFAIL-NOUT
C0114/1...5 DIGIN2
E2 C0988/1
0
E3 0 DIGIN3
MFAIL-FAULT
E4 1 DIGIN4 C0971
E5 DIGIN5 C0989/1 CTRL
C0443 MFAIL-RESET
C0972
C0989/2
Fig. 3−100 Example of a mains failure detection by an external monitoring system
Combination of the two methods

l The combination of both processes is done via an OR operation with an internal function
block. In the example, OR5 is used. For this, set the following signal combinations:
– C0838/1 = 10655 (CMP2−OUT to OR5−IN1)
– C0838/2 = 54 (DIGIN5 to OR5−IN2)
– C0971 = 10570 (OR5−OUT to MFAIL−FAULT)
Enter the function blocks CMP2, OR5 and MFAIL into free positions of the processing table in C0465.
X5 DIGIN DCTRL -X5/28
28
E1 DIGIN1
C0114/1...5 DIGIN2
E2
E3 0 DIGIN3
E4 1 DIGIN4 MFAIL
E5 DIGIN5 OR5-IN1 OR5 MFAIL-N-SET 1
C0838/1 C0970 MFAIL-NOUT
C0443 0
C0839/1 C0988/1
OR5-IN2 ³1 OR5-OUT MFAIL-FAULT
FIXED0 C0838/2 C0971
C0839/2 C0989/1 CTRL
C0685 CMP2 OR5-IN3 MFAIL-RESET
C0838/3 C0972
C0686
C0687 C0839/3 C0989/2
CMP2-IN1 CMP2-OUT
C0472/20 C0688/1
C0689/1
CMP2-IN2
MCTRL-DCVOLT C0688/2
C0689/2
Fig. 3−101 Example of a mains failure detected by different sources

Function library
Function blocks
Integration of the function block into the signal flow of the controller
As an example, the function block is integrated into the basic configuration C0005 = 1000 (speed
control).
MFAIL−ADAPT MFAIL
FIXED0% C0973
C988/2 C0980 Vp
MFAIL−CONST −
FIXED100% C0974 +
C988/3 C0982 MCRTL−
DCVOLT
MFAIL−DC−SET −
C1472/19 C0978
+
C0988/7
C0981 Tn
MFAIL−N−SET 1
NSET−NOUT C0970 MFAIL−NOUT
0 MCTRL−n−set
C0988/1
C0983
MFAIL−FAULT
CMP2−OUT C0971
C0989/1
MFAIL−RESET
DIGIN5 C0972
C0989/2
MFAIL−THRESHOLD CTRL
C0472/18 C0975
MFAIL−STATUS
C0988/4
MFAIL−NACT
MCTRL−NACT C0976
MFAIL−I−RESET
C0988/5 MCTRL−i−load
MFAIL−SET
MCTRL−NACT C0977
C0988/6
9300kur024
Fig. 3−102 Linkage for the base configuration C0005 = 1000
1. Create speed setpoint path · C0970 = 5050 (NSET−NOUT to MFAIL−N−SET)

· C0890 = 6100 (MFAIL−NOUT to MCTRL−N−SET)
2. Start value selection (here: act. speed value) · C0977 = 6100 (MFAIL−NOUT to MFAIL−SET)
3. Selection of setpoint source for DC−bus voltage (here: by · C0978 = 19539 (C0472/19 to MFAIL−DC−SET)
the freely connectable code FCODE C0472/19)
4. Selection of source which activates the mains failure · see chapter 3.2.40.1
control
5. Adaptation of proportional gain and DC−bus voltage · C0974 = 1006 (FIXED100% to MFAIL−CONST)
controller · C0973 = 1000 (FIXED0% to MFAIL−ADAPT)
6. Achieve restart protection · C0976 = 6100 (MFAIL−NACT to MCTRL−NACT)
· C0975 = 19538 (C0472/18 to MFAIL−THRESHLD)
· First enter approx. 2 % under C0472/18 (reference: nmax C0011)
7. Connect reset input (here with terminal X5/E5 · C0972 = 55 (DIGIN5 to MFAIL−RESET)
TRIP−RESET)
8. Enter all function blocks used (except for codes and digital inputs DIGIN) into free positions of the processing table in C0465.
) Note!
All settings must be saved non−volatile in a parameter set under C0003.

Function library
Function blocks
Activation
l MFAIL−FAULT = HIGH activates the mains failure control.
l MFAIL−FAULT = LOW triggers a timing element. After the time set under C0983 has elapsed,
the mains failure control is completed/cancelled (see description of mains recovery,
chapter 3.2.40.6).
– The drive is accelerated to the speed setpoint if the restart protection is not active.
– The drive is continued to be braked to zero speed if the restart protection is active (see
description for restart protection, chapter 3.2.40.3).
– If the restart protection is active, the drive can only be reset by a HIGH level signal at the
MFAIL−RESET input.
Function
The controller generates the operational energy required from the rotational energy of the driving
machine. The driving machine is braked via the power loss of the controller and the motor. Thus, the
speed deceleration ramp is shorter than with a non−controlled system (coasting drive).
With the activation,
l the DC bus voltage is controlled to the value at the MFAIL−DC−SET input.
l An internally generated speed setpoint is output at output MFAIL−N−OUT. This serves to brake
the drive (via the speed setpoint) to a speed of almost zero.
– Starting value for the controlled deceleration is the value at input MFAIL−SET. This input is
generally connected to the output MCTRL−NACT (actual speed value) or MCTRL−NSET2,
MFAIL−NOUT (speed setpoint).
– The speed deceleration ramp (and thus the brake torque) results from the moment of inertia
of the driven machine(s), the power loss, and the parameterisation.
( Stop!
l If a connected braking unit is activated, the drive is braked with the max. possible
torque (Imax). In this case, the parameter setting can be adapted, if required (see
description for parameter setting).
l If the power stage is not supplied, the drive cannot generate a standstill torque
(important for active loads such as hoists).

Function library
Function blocks
Parameter setting
The parameters to be set depend strongly on the motor used, the inertia of the driven machine and
the drive configuration (single drive, drive network, master/slave operation etc.). For this reason, this
function must be adjusted to the prevailing application case.
The following specifications refer to chapter 3.2.40.1.
Important settings prior to the initial set−up:
1. Save the previous setting in a parameter set (e.g. parameter set 4)
( Stop!
For the internal voltage supply of the terminals (C0005 = xx1x) the terminal X6/63 is
used as a voltage source for external potentiometers. In this case, measure at the
terminals +UG, −UG.
2. Measure the DC bus voltage with an oscilloscope (channel 1)

– with a suitable voltage divider across terminals +UG, −UG. or
– by outputting the DC−bus voltage e.g. to terminal X6/62. For this purpose set C0436 = 5005
(MCTRL−DCVOLT). 1 V at terminal X6/63 = 100 V to +UG, −UG.
3. Measure the speed with an oscilloscope (channel 2)
– by outputting the speed e.g. to terminal X6/62. (Standard setting). For this purpose set
C0431 = 5001 (MCTRL−NACT). 10 V to terminal X6/62 = nmax (C0011).
4. Defining the operating threshold for the mains failure detection in C0472/20. The definition
depends on the setting in C0173.
– Set the operating threshold approx. 50 V above the LU switch−off threshold (e.g. C0173 = 0,
1; C0472/20 = 48 % ¢ 480 V).

Function library
Function blocks
FB_mfail_7
Message LU Message OU
Mains voltage range C0173

< 400 V 0 285 V 430 V 755 V 770 V
400 V 1 285 V 430 V 755 V 770 V
400 V ... 460 V 2 328 V 473 V 755 V 770 V
480 V without brake chopper 3 342 V 487 V 755 V 770 V
Operation with brake chopper (up to 480 V) 4 342 V 487 V 785 V 800 V
DC−bus voltage (UZK)
( Stop!
This setpoint must be below the operating threshold of a possibly connected
braking unit. If a connected braking unit is activated, the drive will be braked with
the max. possible torque (Imax). The desired operational performance gets lost.
5. Set the setpoint on which the DC bus voltage is to be controlled:

– Set the setpoint to approx. 700 V (C0472/19 = 70 %).

Function library
Function blocks
Commissioning
The commissioning should be carried out with motors without load.
1. The drive can be started with a LOW−HIGH edge at X5/E5.
2. Set the acceleration time Tir:
– Set speed setpoint to 100%, operate controller with maximum speed.
– Inhibit controller via terminal X5/28 (you can also use any other controller inhibit source,
CINH) and measure deceleration time until standstill.
– Set approx. 1/10 of the deceleration time in C0982.
3. Setting the retrigger time
l In case of mains failure detection by detecting the DC bus voltage level:
– Set measured deceleration time from item 2. under C0983.
l In case of mains failure detection via an external system (e.g. supply module 934X):
– Under C0983, set the time in which the drive is to be continued to be braked in a controlled
way for short−term mains recovery.
4. Switch off supply voltage (mains or DC bus).
The oscilloscope should display the following characteristic:
0
t
UG Abschaltschwelle OU
Einschaltschwelle Bremseinheit
MFAIL-DC-SET
Ansprechschwelle
CMP2-OUT Abschaltschwelle LU
0
t1 t2 t
Fig. 3−103 Schematic representation with activated mains failure control (ideal characteristic)
t1 Mains failure
t2 Zero speed reached

Function library
Function blocks
Fine setting
0
t
UG Abschaltschwelle OU
Einschaltschwelle Bremseinheit
MFAIL-DC-SET
Ansprechschwelle
CMP2-OUT Abschaltschwelle LU
0
t1 t2 t3 t
Fig. 3−104 Schematic with different brake torques

t = t1 Mains failure
t = t2 Zero speed with higher braking torque (short adjustment time)
t = t3 Drive reaches the LU switch−off threshold with lower brake torque (higher adjustment time)
without reaching speed 0
t > t3 Drive is no longer controlled (is braked by friction)
Repeat the following steps several times.

1. Obtaining a very low final speed before the controller reaches the undervoltage threshold LU:
– Increasing the proportional gain MFAIL Vp (C0980).
– Decreasing the integral−action time MFAIL Tn (C0981).
2. Avoid activation of the brake unit or the overvoltage threshold:
– Increasing the integral−action time MFAIL Tn (C0981) until the characteristic in Fig. 3−103 is
almost reached.
– Reduce additionally the setpoint of the DC bus voltage at the input MFAIL−DC−SET (in the
example C0472/19), if necessary.

Function library
Function blocks
3. Increase of the deceleration time or reduction of the brake torque (see Fig. 3−104) is only
possible with restrictions:
– An increase of the acceleration time MFAIL Tir (C0982) reduces the initial brake torque and
increases the deceleration time.
– Increasing the integral−action time MFAIL Tn (C0981) decreases the braking torque and
simultaneously increases the deceleration time. If C0981 contains too high integral−action
times, the controller runs into the LU threshold before speed 0 is reached. Thus, the drive is
not controlled anymore.
4. Re−establish possibly required signal connections to the outputs of the controller (terminals
X6).
) Note!
All settings must be saved non−volatile in a parameter set under C0003.
3.2.40.3 Restart protection

The integrated restart protection is to avoid a restart in the lower speed range, after the supply voltage
was interrupted for a short time only (mains recovery before the drive has come to standstill).
l How to protect the drive from restart is explained in chapter 3.2.40.2.
l Go to C0472/18 and enter the threshold in [%] of nmax (C0011) if you do not want an
automatic restart below this threshold after mains recovery.
– Speed at mains recovery < threshold in C0472/18: Drive is continued to be braked in a
controlled way. This function can only be completed by MFAIL−RESET = HIGH.
– Speed after mains recovery > threshold in C0472/18 Drive accelerates to its setpoint along
the set ramps.
l The function is deactivated by:
– C0472/18 = 0 % or
– C0975 = 1000 (FIXED0% to MFAIL−THRESHLD)
l Reset with MFAIL−RESET = HIGH
– is required after every mains connection
– is displayed by MFAIL−STATUS = HIGH, if MFAIL−FAULT = LOW
3.2.40.4 Reset of the mains failure control

l The mains failure control is reset with MFAIL−RESET = HIGH (in the example with terminal
X5/E5).
l The reset pulse is always required if:
– the restart protection is active.
– the restart protection is used and the supply (mains or DC supply) was switched on.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.40.5 Dynamic adaptation of the control parameters

In special cases a dynamic change of the proportional gain may be sensible. For this purpose, the
function block MFAIL is provided with two inputs (MFAIL−CONST and MFAIL−ADAPT). The resulting
proportional gain arises from:
MFAIL−CONST * |MFAIL−ADAPT|
V p + C0980 @
100%
3.2.40.6 Fast mains recovery (KU)

The fast mains recovery leads to the restart of the controller if the restart protection is not activated.
Then the drive runs to its setpoint. If this is not required, the restart can be decelerated via the retrigger
time C0983 or prevented in connection with the restart protection.
A fast mains recovery occurs:
l Due to the system, the mains recovery is indicated by the mains failure detection via the level
of the DC bus voltage (see chapter 3.2.40.1).
l because of a "short interrupt" (KU) of the utility company (e.g. in case of thunderstorms)
l because of faulty components in the supply cables
Set the retrigger time C0983 higher than the measured deceleration time during braking.
3.2.40.7 Application example
Drive network with pulse train coupling
( Stop!
In drive networks which are connected via pulse trains (a master and one or more
slaves):
l the mains failure detection may only be activated for the master.
– the mains failure control must be integrated correspondingly into the signal
flow.
l All controllers must be operated via the terminals +UG, −UG in the DC−bus
connection. For this, the information in the "Dimensioning" chapter must be
observed.
) Note!
Further information and predefined configurations can be obtained from Lenze.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.41 Motor phase failure detection (MLP)

Purpose
Motor phase monitoring.
MLP1
Fig. 3−105 Motor phase failure detection (MLP1)
Code LCD Possible settings Important

Lenze Selection
C0597 MONIT LP1 3 0 Trip Conf. LP1
3 Off monitoring
C0599 LIMIT LP 1 5.0 1.0 {0.1} 10.0 Current limit LP1
Current limit for motor phase failure
monitoring
Function
Detailed descriptions of monitoring systems and error messages can be found in the system manual,
document number EDSVS9332P.
The function block MLP1 must be entered in the processing table if the motor phase failure detection
is to be used.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.42 Monitor outputs of monitoring system (MONIT)

Purpose
The monitoring functions output digital monitor signals.
MONIT
LU
OU
EER
..
..
..
..
P18
SD8
nErr
FB_monit
Fig. 3−106 Monitor outputs of the monitoring system (MONIT)
Function
The MONIT outputs switch to HIGH level if one of the monitoring functions responds.
The digital monitor signals respond dynamically, i.e.
l depending on the state of the monitoring function, but
l independently of the selected fault reaction (e.g. TRIP).
Example
MONIT−LP1 (motor phase monitoring) responds if a cable disruption is detected in a motor
connection phase, although the fault reaction of LP1 is set to "Off" (C0597 = 3).
) Note!
l With appropriate signal conditioning, the MONIT outputs can be used to locate
the cause of malfunction (e.g. by storing the MONIT output signal via the FLIP
function block).
l More detailed descriptions of the monitoring functions / error messages can be
found in the chapter "Troubleshooting and fault elimination".

Function library
Function blocks
MONIT outputs
MONIT output Description
CE0 Communication error − automation interface (AIF)
CE1 Communication error − process data input object CAN1_IN
CE4 BUS−OFF state of system bus (CAN)
EEr External monitoring, triggered via DCTRL
H05 Internal fault (memory)
H07 Internal fault (power section)
H10 Thermal sensor error − heatsink
H11 Thermal sensor error − inside the device
LP1 Motor phase failure
LU Undervoltage in the DC bus
nErr Speed control error
NMAX Maximum speed (C0596) exceeded
OC2 Earth fault − motor cable
OC5 I x t overload
OC6 I2 x t overload
OC8 I2 x t overload advance warning
OH Heatsink temperature > +90 °C
OH3 Motor temperature > +150 °C threshold
(temperature detected via resolver or incremental value encoder)
OH4 Heatsink temperature > C0122
OH7 Motor temperature > C0121
(temperature detected via resolver or incremental value encoder)
OH8 Motor temperature measured via inputs T1 and T2 too high
OU DC−bus overvoltage
P03 Following error
P16 Faulty transmission of sync telegram on system bus (CAN)
P19 Limitation of input values at X9
PL Error during rotor position adjustment
Sd2 Resolver error at X7
Sd3 Encoder error at X9
Sd5 Encoder error at X6 pins 1 and 2
Sd6 Thermal sensor error − motor (X7 or X8)
Sd7 Absolute value encoder at X8
Initialisation error or communication error during rotor position adjustment
Sd8 Sin/cos encoder at X8 transmits no or inconsistent data

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.43 Motor potentiometer (MPOT)

Purpose
The FB replaces a hardware motor potentiometer.
The motor potentiometer is used as an alternative setpoint source, which is controlled via two
terminals.
MPOT1-UP MPOT1
C0267/1 C0265 C0260
C0264 C0262
C0269/1
MPOT1-INACT MPOT MPOT1-OUT
C0268
CRTL
C0269/3
MPOT1-DOWN C0263
C0267/2 C0261
C0269/2
Fig. 3−107 Motor potentiometer (MPOT1)
Signal Source Note

MPOT1−UP d C0269/1 bin C0267/1 2 1000 −
MPOT1−INACT d C0269/3 bin C0268 2 1000 −
MPOT1−DOWN d C0269/2 bin C0267/2 2 1000 −
MPOT1−OUT a − − − − −
Function
Control of the motor potentiometer:
l MPOT1−UP = HIGH
– The motor potentiometer approaches its upper limit value.
l MPOT1−DOWN = HIGH
– The motor potentiometer approaches its lower limit value.
l MPOT1−UP = LOW and MPOT1−DOWN = LOW or
MPOT1−UP = HIGH and MPOT1−DOWN = HIGH:
– The motor potentiometer does not change the output signal.

Function library
Function blocks
C0260
Tir
Tir
+
Tif
MPOT1−OUT 0
−
Tir
C0261
MPOT1−UP
MPOT1−DOWN
Fig. 3−108 Control signals of the motor potentiometer
In addition to the digital signals MPOT1−UP and MPOT1−DOWN another digital input exists
(MPOT1−INACT). The input MPOT1−INACT is used to activate or deactivate the motor potentiometer
function. Logic 1 at this input deactivates the motor potentiometer function. The input
MPOT1−INACT has priority over the inputs MPOT1−UP and MPOT1−DOWN.
When the motor potentiometer is deactivated, the motor potentiometer output (MPOT1−OUT)
follows the function set under C0264. The following functions can be set under C0264:

Function library
Function blocks
C0264 = Meaning
0 No further action; the output MPOT1−OUT keeps its value
1 The motor potentiometer returns to 0 % with the corresponding deceleration time
2 The motor potentiometer approaches the lower limit value with the corresponding deceleration time (C0261)
3 The motor potentiometer immediately changes its output to 0%. (Important for EMERGENCY−OFF function)
4 The motor potentiometer immediately changes its output to the lower limit value (C0261)
5 The motor potentiometer approaches the upper limit value with the corresponding acceleration time (C0260)
If the motor potentiometer is activated (input MPOT1−INACT = 0), the subsequent function depends
on
l the current output signal,
l the set limit values of the MPOT,
l the control signals UP and DOWN.
If the output value is out of the set limits, the MPOT approaches the next limit with the set Ti times.
This function is independent of the control inputs MPOT1−UP and MPOT1−DOWN
If the output value is within the set limits, the output follows the selected control function UP, DOWN
or no action.
C0260
Tif
Tir Tif
MPOT1−OUT C0261
Tif Tir
MPOT1−UP
MPOT1−DOWN
MPOT1−INACT
Fig. 3−109 Deactivation of the motor potentiometer via the input MPOT1−INACT
Initialisation
This function is used to store the output value of the MPOT non−volatilely in the internal memory of
the device, when the mains is switched off. The value is saved automatically if this function was
selected via the code. When the mains is switched on, the value is reloaded into the MPOT.
C0265 can be used to activate other initialisation functions (see code table).
When the initialisation is completed, the MPOT follows the applied control function.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.44 Logic NOT
3.2.44 Logic NOT

Purpose
Logic inversion of digital signals. The inversion can be used to control functions or generate status
information.
NOT1
NOT1-IN 1 NOT1-OUT
C0840
C0841
Fig. 3−110 Logic NOT (NOT1)
Signal Source Note

NOT1−IN d C0841 bin C0840 2 1000 −
NOT1−OUT d − − − − − −
NOT2
NOT2-IN 1 NOT2-OUT
C0842
C0843
Signal Source Note

NOT2−IN d C0843 bin C0842 2 1000 −
NOT2−OUT d − − − − − −
NOT3
NOT3-IN 1 NOT3-OUT
C0844
C0845
Signal Source Note

NOT3−IN d C0845 bin C0844 2 1000 −
NOT3−OUT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.44 Logic NOT
NOT4
NOT4-IN 1 NOT4-OUT
C0846
C0847
Signal Source Note

NOT4−IN d C0847 bin C0846 2 1000 −
NOT4−OUT d − − − − − −
NOT5
NOT5-IN 1 NOT5-OUT
C0848
C0849
Signal Source Note

NOT5−IN d C0849 bin C0848 2 1000 −
NOT5−OUT d − − − − − −
Function
NOTx−IN1 NOTx−OUT
0 1
1 0
The function corresponds to a change from an NO contact to an NC contact in a contactor control.
NOTx−IN
NOTx−OUT
Fig. 3−115 Function of NOT when changing an NO contact to an NC contact.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.45 Speed setpoint conditioning (NSET)

Purpose
This FB conditions
l the main speed setpoint and
l an additional setpoint (or other signals as well)
for the following control structure via ramp function generator or fixed speeds.
N S E T -C IN H -V A L
C 0 7 8 4 N S E T
C 0 7 9 8 /1
N S E T -R F G -S T O P
C 0 7 9 0
C 0 7 9 9 /1 3
N S E T -R F G -0
C 0 7 8 9
C 0 7 9 9 /1 2
N S E T -N -IN V
C 0 7 8 1
C 0 7 9 9 /1 C IN H C 0 1 8 2 C 0 1 9 0
N S E T -N
C 0 7 8 0
0 ± 1 9 9 ,9 9 %
C 0 0 3 9 /1 x
C 0 0 4 6 C 0 0 3 9 /2
*-1
1
y + - * N S E T -N O U T
N S E T -J O G *1
D M U X C 0 0 3 9 /1 5 / x /(1 -y )
C 0 7 8 7 /1 0
N S E T -J O G *2 C 0 0 4 5 C 0 1 3 4
C 0 7 8 7 /2 0 J O G 1 ...1 5
C 0 7 8 7 /3 N S E T -J O G *4
1 5
C 0 2 4 1
N S E T -J O G *8 C 0 0 1 2 C 0 0 1 3
C 0 7 8 7 /4 3
C 0 1 0 1 /1 C 0 1 0 3 /1
C 0 1 0 1 /2 C 0 1 0 3 /2
D M U X N S E T -R F G -I= 0
N S E T -T I* 1
C 0 7 8 8 /1 0 C 0 1 0 1 /1 5 C 0 1 0 3 /1 5
N S E T -T I* 2
C 0 7 8 8 /2 0 T I 0 ...1 5
N S E T -T I* 4
C 0 7 8 8 /3 1 5
N S E T -T I* 8
C 0 7 8 8 /4 3 C 0 1 3 0
N S E T -S E T
C 0 7 8 5
C 0 7 9 8 /2
N S E T -L O A D
C 0 7 8 6
C 0 7 9 9 /3 C 0 2 2 0 /
C 0 7 8 3
N S E T -N A D D -IN V C 0 2 2 1 C IN H
N S E T -N A D D C 0 7 9 9 /2 0
C 0 7 8 2 1
*-1
C 0 0 4 9
Fig. 3−116 Speed setpoint conditioning (NSET)

Function library
Function blocks
Signal Source Note

NSET−N O C0046 dec [%] C0780 1 50 Intended for main setpoint, other signals
are permissible
NSET−NADD O C0047 dec [%] C0782 1 5650 Intended for additional setpoint, other
signals are permissible
NSET−JOG*1 d C0799/4 bin C0787/1 2 53 Selection and control of overriding "fixed
NSET−JOG*2 d C0799/5 bin C0787/2 2 1000 setpoints" for the main setpoint
NSET−JOG*4 d C0799/6 bin C0787/3 2 1000
NSET−JOG*8 d C0799/7 bin C0787/4 2 1000
NSET−TI*1 d C0799/8 bin C0788/1 2 1000 Selection and control of alternative
NSET−TI*2 d C0799/9 bin C0788/2 2 1000 acceleration and deceleration times for the
main setpoint
NSET−TI*4 d C0799/10 bin C0788/3 2 1000
NSET−TI*8 d C0799/11 bin C0788/4 2 1000
NSET−N−INV d C0799/1 bin C0781 2 10251 Control of the signal inversion for the main
setpoint
NSET−NADD−INV d C0799/2 bin C0783 2 1000 Control of the signal inversion for the
additional setpoint
NSET−RFG−0 d C0799/12 bin C0789 2 1000 The main setpoint integrator is led to zero
via the current Ti times.
NSET−RFG−STOP d C0799/13 bin C0790 2 1000 Keeping (freezing) of the main setpoint
integrator to its actual value.
NSET−CINH−VAL O C0798/1 dec [%] C0784 1 5001 Here, the signal is applied which is to be
accepted by the main setpoint integrator
when the controller is inhibited
NSET−SET O C0798/2 dec [%] C0785 1 5000 Here, the signal is applied which is to be
when the NSET−LOAD input is set
NSET−LOAD d C0799/3 bin C0786 2 5001 Control of both ramp function generators in
special situations, e.g. QSP
NSET−OUT O − − − − − −
NSET−RFG−I=0 d − − − − − −
Function
l Main setpoint path
l JOG setpoints
l Setpoint inversion
l S ramp
3.2.45.1 Main setpoint path

l The signals in the main setpoint path are limited to the value range ±199.99 %.
l The signal at input NSET−N is led via the function JOG selection.
l The JOG function has priority over the setpoint input NSET−N. This means a selected JOG
value deactivates the input. The subsequent signal conditioning the JOG value instead.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.45.2 JOG setpoints

l Are fixed values which are stored in the memory.
l JOG values can be called from the memory via the inputs NSET−JOG*x.
l The inputs NSET−JOG*x are binary coded so that 15 JOG values can be called.
l The decoding for enabling the JOG values (called from the memory) is carried out according to
the following table:
NSET−JOG*1 NSET−JOG*2 NSET−JOG*4 NSET−JOG*8
NSET−N 0 0 0 0
JOG 1 1 0 0 0
JOG 2 0 1 0 0
JOG 3 1 1 0 0
JOG 4 0 0 1 0
JOG 5 1 0 1 0
JOG 6 0 1 1 0
JOG 7 1 1 1 0
JOG 8 0 0 0 1
JOG 9 1 0 0 1
JOG 10 0 1 0 1
JOG 11 1 1 0 1
JOG 12 0 0 1 1
JOG 13 1 0 1 1
JOG 14 0 1 1 1
JOG 15 1 1 1 1
l When all inputs are assigned with 0, the input NSET−N is active.
l The number of inputs that must be assigned depends on the required number of JOG values.
Four inputs and thus 15 possible selections are available. A digital signal source is assigned
via C0787 and the corresponding subcode.
Number of required JOG setpoints Number of inputs to be assigned
1 at least 1
1 ... 3 at least 2
4 ... 7 at least 3
8 ... 15 4

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.45.3 Setpoint inversion

The output signal of the JOG function is led via an inverter.
The sign of the setpoint is inverted, if the input NSET−N−INV is triggered with HIGH signal.
Ramp function generator for the main setpoint

The setpoint is then led via a ramp function generator with linear characteristic. Setpoint
step−changes at the input are thus led into a ramp.
[%]
RFG−OUT
100 %
w2
W1
0
t ir t if t
t ir t if
T ir + t ir 100% T if + t if 100%
w2 * w1 w2 * w1
Fig. 3−117 Acceleration and deceleration times of the ramp function generator
l The ramps can be set separately for acceleration and deceleration.

– Different acceleration and deceleration times can be activated via the inputs NSET−TI*x 16
(for table and function see JOG setpoints; the decoding must be done according to the
signal graphic).
– The Ti times can only be activated in pairs.
l When the controller is inhibited (CINH) the ramp function generator accepts the value that was
applied to the input NSET−CINH−VAL and transmits it to the next function. This function has
priority over all other functions.
l NSET−RFG−STOP = HIGH
– The ramp function generator is stopped. Changes at the input of the ramp function
generator have no effect on the output.
l NSET−RFG−0 = HIGH
– The ramp function generator decelerates to zero along the deceleration ramp.
l It is also possible to load the ramp function generator online with a defined value. For this, the
input NSET−LOAD must be set to HIGH. As long as this input is set, the value at input
NSET−SET is accepted by the ramp function generator and provided the output.

Function library
Function blocks
Priorities:
CINH NSET−LOAD NSET−RFG−0 NSET−RFG−STOP Function
0 0 0 0 RFG follows the input value via the set ramps
0 0 0 1 The value at the output of RFG is frozen
0 0 1 0 RFG decelerates to zero along the set deceleration time
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0 RFG accepts the value applied to input NSET−SET and provides it at its
output
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 RFG accepts the value applied to input CINH−VAL and provides it at its
output
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
3.2.45.4 S ramp
The linear ramp function generator is connected to a PT1 element. This arrangement implements an
S ramp for an almost jerk−free acceleration and deceleration.
l The PT1 element is switched on and off via C0134.
l The time constant is set via C0182.
3.2.45.5 Arithmetic operation

The output value is led to an arithmetic module. This module links the main setpoint and the additional
setpoint arithmetically. The arithmetic operation is selected via C0190 (see the following table).
C0190 Function Example
0 Output = X (Y is not processed) −
1 Output = X + Y 100 % = 50 % + 50 %
2 Output = X − Y 50 % = 100 % − 50%
3 Output = X * Y 100 % = 100 % * 100%
4 Output = X/|Y| 1 % = 100 % / 100%
5 Output = X/(100% − Y) 200 % = 100 % / (100 % − 50 %)
3.2.45.6 Additional setpoint

l An additional setpoint (e.g. a correction signal) can be linked with the main setpoint via the
input NSET−NADD.
l The input signal can be inverted via the input NSET−NADD−INV before affecting the ramp
function generator. The ramp function generator has a linear characteristic and an acceleration
time and deceleration time each.
l With NSET−LOAD = HIGH the ramp function generator is set to zero and kept there without
considering the Ti times.The same applies when the controller is inhibited.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.46 OR operation (OR)

Purpose
Logical ORing of digital signals. The operations are used for controlling functions or creating status
information.
OR1-IN1 OR1
C0830/1
C0831/1
1
OR1-IN2 OR1-OUT
C0830/2
C0831/2
OR1-IN3
C0830/3
C0831/3
Fig. 3−118 OR operation (OR1)
Signal Source Note

OR1−IN1 d C0831/1 bin C0830/1 2 1000 −
OR1−IN2 d C0831/2 bin C0830/2 2 1000 −
OR1−IN3 d C0831/3 bin C0830/3 2 1000 −
OR1−OUT d − − − − − −
OR2-IN1 OR2
C0832/1
C0833/1
OR2-IN2 1 OR2-OUT
C0832/2
C0833/2
OR2-IN3
C0832/3
C0833/3
Signal Source Note

OR2−IN1 d C0833/1 bin C0832/1 2 1000 −
OR2−IN2 d C0833/2 bin C0832/2 2 1000 −
OR2−IN d C0833/3 bin C0832/3 2 1000 −
OR2−OUT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
OR3-IN1 OR3
C0834/1
C0835/1
1
OR3-IN2 OR3-OUT
C0834/2
C0835/2
OR3-IN3
C0834/3
C0835/3
Signal Source Note

OR3−IN1 d C0835/1 bin C0834/1 2 1000 −
OR3−IN2 d C0835/2 bin C0834/2 2 1000 −
OR3−IN3 d C0835/3 bin C0834/3 2 1000 −
OR3−OUT d − − − − − −
OR4-IN1 OR4
C0836/1
C0837/1
1
OR4-IN2 OR4-OUT
C0836/2
C0837/2
OR4-IN3
C0836/3
C0837/3
Signal Source Note

OR4−IN1 d C0837/1 bin C0826/1 2 1000 −
OR4−IN2 d C0837/2 bin C0826/2 2 1000 −
OR4−IN3 d C0837/3 bin C0826/3 2 1000 −
OR4−OUT d − − − − − −
OR5-IN1 OR5
C0838/1
C0839/1
1
OR5-IN2 OR5-OUT
C0838/2
C0839/2
OR5-IN3
C0838/3
C0839/3
Signal Source Note

OR5−IN1 d C0839/1 bin C0828/1 2 1000 −
OR5−IN2 d C0839/2 bin C0828/2 2 1000 −
OR5−IN3 d C0839/3 bin C0828/3 2 1000 −
OR5−OUT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
Function of OR1 ... OR5

l ORx−OUT = ORx−IN1 Ú ORx−IN2 Ú ORx−IN3
l Equivalent network:
ORx-IN1 ORx-IN2 ORx-IN3
ORx-OUT
9300kur071
Fig. 3−123 Equivalent network of the OR operation for OR1 ... OR5
) Note!
Connect inputs that are not used to FIXED0.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.47 Oscilloscope function (OSZ)

Purpose
Detection of any measured variable (e. g. speed setpoint, actual speed, torque etc.). They are
visualised in Global Drive Control.
Supports the commissioning of controllers and the troubleshooting.
OSZ
OSZ-CHANNEL1 1
C0732/1
measuring value
OSZ-CHANNEL2 2
memory
C0732/2
OSZ-CHANNEL3
C0732/3 3
OSZ-CHANNEL4 CTRL
C0732/4 4
OSZ-DIG-TRIGGER C0730 C0738

C0733/1 C0731 C0739
C0734 C0740
C0735 C0741
C0736 C0744
C0737 C0749
fb_osz
Fig. 3−124 Oscilloscope function (OSZ)
Signal Source Note

OSZ CHANNEL1 a − − C0732/1 1 − −
OSZ CHANNEL2 a − − C0732/2 1 − −
OSZ CHANNEL3 a − − C0732/3 1 − −
OSZ CHANNEL4 a − − C0732/4 1 − −
OSZ−DIG−TRIGGER d − − C0733/1 2 − −
Function
The FB has three function units:
l Trigger check
– Monitoring of the digital trigger source for a valid trigger event
l Processing of the measured signal
– Linking the measurement inputs
– Calculating the time base
– Monitoring of the analog trigger source for a valid trigger event.
l Measuring value memory
– Scaling the ring buffer
– Filing the measured data in the ring buffer
– Saving the measuring points for image generation

Function library
Function blocks
Functional description
Function Code Selection Description
OSZ mode Controls the measurement in the controller
C0730 1 · Starts the recording of the measured values
0 · Cancels a running measurement
OSZ status Displays five different operating states
C0731 1 · Measurement completed
– The memory of the measured values is completely filled with measured data. The
measured values can be accessed via the PC.
2 · Measurement active
– A measurement was started with C0730 = 1. The FB is waiting for a valid trigger
event.
3 · Trigger detected
– The FB has detected a valid trigger event. Depending on the trigger delay the
saving of the measured data is not yet completed. It is automatically completed
with the entry into the last memory unit.
4 · Measurement cancelled
– Cancel of a running recording of the measured values (C0730 = 0). The memory of
the measured values is filled with the data that has just been measured. The data
can be accessed via the PC.
5 · Read data memory
– The measured data memory is being read at the moment. No settings are possible
in this operating state.
Configuration C0732/1 · Links the measuring channels of the FB with the signals of the process environment
OSZ channel to – The four measuring channels can be assigned with any analog signal. Enter the
1 ... 4 C0732/4 corresponding signal number into C0732/1 ... C0732/4.
– Always start linking with channel 1, then channel 2 and so on. Unused channels
are automatically assigned with signal FIXED 0%.
Configuration C0733/1 Links the digital trigger input with a digital signal in the process environment.
OSZ trigger – The trigger input can be assigned with any digital signal. Enter the corresponding
signal number into C0733/1.
Trigger source Defines the trigger source
C0734 1 Source is one of the four measuring channels (C0734/1 ... C0734/4)
0 Source is the digital trigger input (C0733/1)
Trigger level C0735 −32767 ... 32767 · Defines the trigger level which activates the triggering when the level is exceeded.
– The trigger level is only monitored when the triggering is done on one of the four
channels.
– The trigger level is not effective with digital triggering.
Trigger edge Defines the trigger edge which activates the triggering.
· Triggering on an analog input channel
– With a LOW−HIGH trigger edge the analog trigger signal must exceed a defined
trigger level to activate the triggering.
– With a HIGH−LOW trigger edge the analog trigger signal must fall below a defined
· Triggering on a digital trigger input
– With a LOW−HIGH trigger edge the digital trigger signal must change from LOW to
HIGH to activate the triggering.
– With a HIGH−LOW trigger edge the digital trigger signal must change from HIGH to
LOW to activate the triggering.
Fig. 3−125 shows the triggering of an analog signal with a positive edge.
C0736 1 – HIGH−LOW trigger edge
0 LOW−HIGH trigger edge

Function library
Function blocks

Trigger delay The trigger delay defines when to begin with the saving of the measured values with
regard to the trigger time.
C0737 −100.0 % ... 0 % · Negative trigger delay (pre−triggering)
– Defines a percentage of the whole memory content. This part of the memory
content is filled with measured values before the triggering (see Fig. 3−126).
0 % ... 999.9 % · Positive trigger delay (post−triggering)
– Defines a percentage of the whole memory content. The saving of the measured
values after triggering is delayed by this part of the memory content (Fig. 3−125).
Sampling period C0738 1 ms ... 10 min · Setting of the sampling period
– The sampling period is the time between two measurements
– The measurements are carried out simultaneously for all channels (e. g. value
measured at channel 1 is measured at the same time as the measured value at
channel 2, 3 or 4.
– The sampling period can be set in steps of 1, 2 and 5.
Number of C0739 Number of channels used for measurements.
Channels
Read data The code is required if the GDC is not used for the visualisation.
memory C0740/1 0 ... 16383 · Defines the starting point for reading the data memory and thus enables the memory
array to be selectively accessed.
– In order to read the data memory bit by bit (e. g. reading only the measured values
of one channel or reading with reduced memory depth), the starting point can be
changed.
C0740/2 1 · Enable Read memory"
– Enables the access to the memory to read the data
0 · Inhibit Read memory"
– Inhibits the access to the memory. The access must be inhibited after every
reading of the data
Information Provides information on the function block
about the C0741/1 Version of the function block (e. g. 120: Version 1.20)
function block C0741/2 Data memory size (1024 ... 16384 bytes)
C0741/3 Data width of the measured values (1 byte / 2 bytes)
C0741/4 Number of the available measuring channels (1 ... 4)

Function library
Function blocks

Memory size C0744 0 ... 6 Set memory depth of the data memory
– Max. size of the data memory: 8192 measured values ¢ 16384 bytes (C0744 = 6)
– Min. size of the data memory: 512 measured values ¢ 1024 bytes (C0744 = 0)
– Changing the memory depth from 512 to 8192 measured values/step
– A memory depth which is optimally adapted to the corresponding measuring task
reduces the data transmission time.
Information on Information on saving the measured values in the data memory
saving The FB saves the data in a ring format. For reconstructing the chronological signal
sequence the following three "graphic points" are marked.
C0749/1 Measured value no. of the instant of abortion
C0749/2 Measured value no. of the instant of triggering
C0749/3 Measured value no. of the instant of completion
Memory content
Instant of triggering
Trigger level
Measured signal
Signal characteristic Signal characteristic after triggering

before triggering
Fig. 3−125 Example: Trigger level and trigger delay with approx. −30 % of pre−triggering
Memory content
Trigger level
Measured signal
Trigger delay

before triggering
Fig. 3−126 Example: Trigger level and trigger delay with approx. −30 % of post−triggering

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.48 Process controller (PCTRL1)

Purpose
The FB is used, for instance, as a higher−level controller (dancer position controller, tension controller,
pressure controller etc.).
The control characteristic follows the ideal PID algorithm, but it can also be changed over to a PI or
P characteristic.
C0222 C0329 PCTRL1
PCTRL1-ADAPT Vp C0222 0
C0803
Vp2 C0325 1
C0808/4 2 Vp C0222 2
3 Vp2 C0325 3
Vp3 C0326
C0328 soll1 soll2 C0327
C0337
C0223 C0336
C0224
C0332
±100%
PCTRL1-SET + PCTRL1-OUT
C0800
-
C0808/1 RESET
C0333
PCTRL1-ACT
C0801
C0808/2
PCTRL1-INACT
C0804
C0809/1
PCTRL1-I-OFF
C0805
C0809/2
PCTRL1-INFLU
C0802
C0808/3
Fig. 3−127 Process controller (PCTRL1)
Signal Source Note

PCTRL1−SET a C0808/1 dec [%] C0800 1 1000 Input of the process setpoint. Possible
value range: ±200%. The time
characteristic of step−change signals can
be affected via the ramp function generator
(C0332 for the acceleration time; C0333 for
the deceleration time).
PCTRL1−ACT a C0808/2 dec [%] C0801 1 1000 Actual value input; value range ±200%
PCTRL1−INFLU a C0808/3 dec [%] C0802 1 1000 Evaluation or suppression of the output
signal; value range ±200%
PCTRL1−ADAPT a C0808/4 dec [%] C0803 1 1000 Online change of the P gain;
value range ±200%
PCTRL1−INACT d C0809/1 bin C0804 2 1000 Online deactivation of the process
controller
PCTRL1−I−OFF d C0809/2 bin C0805 2 1000 Online setting of the I component to zero
PCTRL1−OUT a − − − − − −
Function
Setpoint and actual value are sent to the process controller via the corresponding inputs and
processed according to the selected control algorithm (control chararacteristic).

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.48.1 Control characteristic

l In the default setting, the PID algorithm is active.
l The D−component can be deactivated by setting code C0224 to zero. Thus, the controller
becomes a PI−controller (or P−controller if the I−component is also switched off).
l The I−component can be switched on or off online via the PCTRL−I−OFF input. For this, the
input is assigned a digital signal source (e.g. one of the freely assignable digital input
terminals). If the I−component is to be switched off permanently, the input is assigned the
signal source "FIXED1".
– PCTRL−I−OFF = HIGH switches off the I−component
– PCTRL−I−OFF = LOW switches on the I−component
l The reset time is parameterised via C0223.
l The P−gain can be set in different ways. The function providing the P−gain is selected under
C0329:
– C0329 = 0
The P−gain is entered under C0222.
– C0329 = 1
The P−gain is entered via the PCTRL−ADAPT input. The input value is led via a linear
characteristic. The slope of the characteristic is set under C0222 (upper limit) and C0325
(lower limit). The value under C0222 is valid if the input value = +100 % or −100 %. The value
under C0325 applies if the input value is 0 %.
Vp
Vp1
Input data:
Vp1 = C0222
Vp2 = C0325
Vp2
Display value:
PCTRL−ADAPT Vpact = C0336
0 100 %
Fig. 3−128 Input of the P−gain via PCTRL−ADAPT input

– C0329 = 2
The P−gain is derived from the process setpoint PCTRL−SET. The setpoint is measured after
the ramp function generator and calculated by means of a characteristic with three
interpolation points.
Vp
Input data:
Vp1 Vp1 = C0222
Vp2 = C0325
Vp3 = C0326
Vp2 s0= C0328
s1= C0327
Vp3
s Display value:
s0 s1 Vpact = C0336
Fig. 3−129 P−gain derived from the PCTRL−SET process setpoint

– C0329 = 3
The P−gain is derived from the control difference and calculated by means of a characteristic
as for C0329 = 2.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.48.2 Ramp function generator

The setpoint PCTRL−SET is led via a ramp function generator with linear characteristic. Thus,
setpoint step−changes at the input can be transformed into a ramp.
[%]
RFG−OUT
100 %
w2
w1
0
t ir t if t
T ir T if
T ir + t ir 100% T if + t if 100%
w2 * w1 w2 * w1
l The ramps can be adjusted separately for acceleration and deceleration.

– Acceleration time tir with C0332.
– Deceleration time tif with C0333.
l PCTRL−INACT = HIGH
– The ramp function generator is immediately set to zero.
3.2.48.3 Value range of the output signal

l The process controller operates in bipolar mode in the default setting.
– The output value is limited to ±100 %.
l The function can be set to unipolar mode under C0337.
– The output value is limited to 0 ... +100 %.
3.2.48.4 Evaluation of the output signal

l The output signal can be evaluated after the limitation block via PCTRL−INFLU.
– The process controller can be hidden or unhidden with this evaluation.
– The calcuation is done according to the following formula:
100 % (PCTRL−OUT) = 100 % * 100 % (PCTRL−INFLU).
3.2.48.5 Deactivation of the process controller

l PCTRL−INACT = HIGH deactivates the process controller
– PCTRL−OUT is set to zero.
– The I−component is set to zero.
– The ramp function generator is set to zero.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.49 Angle addition block (PHADD)

Purpose
Adds or subtracts angle signals depending on the input used.
PHADD1
±231−1
PHADD1−IN1 + + PHADD1−OUT
C1200/1
+ −
C1201/1
PHADD1−IN2 PHADD1−OUT2
C1200/2
C1201/2
PHADD1−IN3
C1200/3
C1201/3 FB_phadd1
Fig. 3−131 Angle addition block (PHADD1)
Signal Source Note

PHADD1−IN1 ph C1201/1 dec [inc] C1200/1 3 1000 Addition input
PHADD1−IN3 ph C1201/3 dec [inc] C1200/3 3 1000 Subtraction input
PHADD1−OUT ph − − − − − Limited to ±2147483647
PHADD1−OUT2 ph − − − − − −
Function
l Input PHADD1−IN1 is added to input PHADD1−IN2.
l The input PHADD−IN3 is subtracted from the calculated result.
l Then the result of the subtraction
– is limited to ±2147483647 and output at PHADD1−OUT.
– is output at PHADD1−OUT2 without limitations.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.50 Angle comparator (PHCMP)
Purpose
Compares two angle signals (distances) with each other.
PHCMP1
C0695
PHCMP1-IN1 PHCMP1-OUT
C0697/1
C0698/1
PHCMP1-IN2
C0697/2
C0698/2
Fig. 3−132 Angle comparator (PHCMP1)
Signal Source Note

PHCOMP1−IN1 ph C0698/1 dec [inc] C0697/1 3 1000 Signal to be compared
PHCOMP1−IN2 ph C0698/2 dec [inc] C0697/2 3 1000 Comparison value
PHCOMP1−OUT d − − − − −
P H C M P 2
C 1 2 0 7
P H C M P 2 -IN 1 P H C M P 2 -O U T
C 1 2 0 5 /1
C 1 2 0 6 /1
P H C M P 2 -IN 2
C 1 2 0 5 /2
C 1 2 0 6 /2
Signal Source Note

P H C M P 3
C 1 2 7 2
C 1 2 7 0 /1
C 1 2 7 1 /1
P H C M P 3 -IN 2
C 1 2 7 0 /2
C 1 2 7 1 /2
Signal Source Note


Function library
Function blocks
Function
Function block Code Function Note
PHCMP1 C0695 = 1 · If PHCMPx−IN1 < PHCMPx−IN2, PHCMPx−OUT switches to HIGH
PHCMP2 C1207 = 1 · If PHCMPx−IN1 ³ PHCMPx−IN2, PHCMPx−OUT switches to LOW
PHCMP3 C1272 = 1
PHCMP1 C0695 = 2 · If | PHCMPx−IN1 | < | PHCMPx−IN2 |, PHCMPx−OUT switches to HIGH Compares the
PHCMP2 C1207 = 2 · If | PHCMPx−IN1 | ³ | PHCMPx−IN2 |, PHCMPx−OUT switches to LOW absolute values of the
PHCMP3 C1272 = 2 inputs
PHCMPx-IN2
PHCMPx-IN1
PHCMPx-OUT
t
9300std004
Fig. 3−135 Diagram of the function

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.51 Actual angle integrator (PHDIFF)

Purpose
Selective addition of a angle signal to the setpoint angle.
It is also possible to compare setpoint and actual angle signals.
P H D IF F 1
P H D IF F 1 -S E T P H D IF F 1 -O U T
C 1 2 3 2 /1
+ -
C 1 2 3 7 /1
P H D IF F 1 -A D D
C 1 2 3 2 /2
C 1 2 3 7 /2
C 1 2 3 0 /1
P H D IF F 1 -E N
C 1 2 3 5 /1
P H D IF F 1 -IN
C 1 2 3 1
C 1 2 3 6
P H D IF F 1 -R E S E T
C 1 2 3 0 /2
C 1 2 3 5 /2
Fig. 3−136 Actual angle integrator (PHDIFF1)
Signal Source Note

PHDIFF1−IN phd C1236 dec [rpm] C1231 4 −
PHDIFF1−SET ph C1237/1 dec [inc] C1232/1 3 −
PHDIFF1−ADD ph C1237/2 dec [inc] C1232/2 3 −
PHDIFF1−EN d C1235/1 bin C1230/1 2 −
PHDIFF1−RESET d C1235/2 bin C1230/2 2 HIGH = sets the actual angle integrator = 0
PHDIFF1−OUT ph − − − − Without limit
Function
C1230/1 = HIGH
l The speed signal at PHDIFF1−IN is integrated by the actual angle integrator.
l The angle signal at PHDIFF1−ADD is added to the integrated speed signal.
l The result of the actual angle integrator is subtracted from the angle signal at PHDIFF1−SET.
C1230/1 = LOW

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.52 Signal adaptation for angle signals (PHDIV)

Purpose
Power−of−two division or multiplication of angle signals.
±32767 PHDIV1
Revolution
PHDIV1-IN 1 PHDIV1-OUT
C0996 C0995
2
C0997
Fig. 3−137 Signal adaptation for angle signals (PHDIV1)
Signal Source Note

PHDIV1−IN ph C0997 dec [inc] C0996 3 1000
PHDIV1−OUT ph − − − − − 65536 inc = one encoder revolution
Function
l Arithmetic function:
PHDIV1−OUT + PHDIV1−IN
2 C0995
– Positive values in C0995 result in a division.

– Negative values in C0995 result in a multiplication.
l The output value is limited to ±(231−1) inc (corresponds to ±32767 encoder revolutions).
– If the limit is exceeded, the output is kept at the limit value.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.53 Phase integrator (PHINT)

Purpose
Integrates a speed or a velocity to a phase (distance). The integrator can maximally accept ±32000
encoder revolutions.
PHINT3 can recognise a relative distance.
P H IN T 1
P H IN T 1 -IN P H IN T 1 -O U T
C 0 9 9 0
± 3 2 0 0 0
C 0 9 9 2 R e v o lu tio n
P H IN T 1 -R E S E T P H IN T 1 -F A IL
C 0 9 9 1
C 0 9 9 3
Fig. 3−138 Phase integrator (PHINT1)
Signal Source Note

PHINT1−IN phd C0992 dec [rpm] C0990 4 1 revolution = 65536 increments
PHINT1−RESET d C0993 bin C0091 2 HIGH = sets the phase integrator to 0 and PHINT1−FAIL
= LOW
PHINT1−OUT ph − − − − 65536 inc = 1 encoder revolution, overflow is possible
PHINT1−FAIL d − − − − HIGH = overflow
P H IN T 2
C 1 0 3 0
± 3 2 0 0 0
C 1 0 3 1
C 1 0 3 3
Signal Source Note

PHINT2−RESET d C1033 bin C1031 2 HIGH = sets the phase integrator to 0 and PHINT2−FAIL
= LOW

Function library
Function blocks
C 1 1 5 0 P H IN T 3
C 1 1 5 1
P H IN T 3 -O U T
P H IN T 3 -IN
C 1 1 5 3 P H IN T 3 -S T A T U S
C 1 1 5 7
C 1 1 5 4 P H IN T 3 -L O A D
C 1 1 5 8
C 1 1 5 5 P H IN T 3 -S E T
C 1 1 5 9
Signal Source Note

PHINT3−LOAD d C1158 bin C1154 2 HIGH = sets the phase integrator to the input signals of
PHINT3−IN and PHINT3−STATUS = LOW
PHINT3−SET ph C1159 dec [inc] C1155 3
PHINT3−STATUS d − − − − HIGH = Overflow or distance is processed
Function
l Constant input value (PHINT1, PHINT2 and PHINT3)
l Input value with sign reversal (PHINT3)
l Scaling of PHINTx−OUT

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.53.1 Constant input value (PHINT1 and PHINT2)
P H IN T x -O U T
+ 3 2 7 6 7 re v .
+ 3 2 0 0 0
-3 2 0 0 0
-3 2 7 6 7 re v .
P H IN T x -F A IL
Fig. 3−141 Function of PHINTx with constant input value
l The FB integrates speed or velocity values at PHINTx−IN to a phase (distance).

l PHINTx−OUT outputs the count of the bipolar integrator.
– A positive value at PHINTx−IN increments the integrator (count is increased).
– A negative value at PHINTx−IN decrements the integrator (count is reduced).
l If the count exceeds the value of +32767 encoder revolutions (¢ +2147483647 inc)
– an overflow occurs. The counting is continued with the value −32768.
– PHINTx−FAIL switches to HIGH when the value w +32000 is reached.
PHINTx−FAIL = HIGH.
l If the count falls below the value of −32768 encoder revolutions (¢ −2147483648 inc)
– an overflow occurs. The counting starts at the value +32767.
– PHINTx−FAIL switches to HIGH when the value v −32000 is reached.
l PHINTX−RESET = HIGH
– sets the integrator to 0
– sets PHINTx−OUT = 0, as long as a HIGH level is applied to PHINTx−IN.
– sets PHINTx−FAIL = LOW.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.53.2 Constant input value (PHINT3)

The FB PHINT3 has three modes which can be set via C1150.
Mode C1150 = 2 is in chapter. 3.2.53.3.
C1150 = 0 C1150 = 1
The input PHINT3−LOAD is state−controlled (HIGH level). The input PHINT3−LOAD is edge−triggered (LOW−HIGH edge).
· PHINT3−LOAD = HIGH · PHINT3−LOAD = LOW−HIGH edge
– The integrator is loaded with the input value at PHINT3−SET. – The integrator is loaded with input value at PHINT3−SET and
– Sets the output PHINT3−STATUS = LOW immediately starts to integrate
– Sets the output PHINT3−STATUS = LOW
P H IN T 3 -O U T
+ 3 2 7 6 7 re v .
+ C 1 1 5 1
-C 1 1 5 1
-3 2 7 6 7 re v .
P H IN T 3 -S T A T U S
Fig. 3−142 Function of PHINT3 with constant input value at C1150 = 0 and C1150 = 1
l The FB integrates speed or velocity values at PHINT3−IN to a phase (distance).

l PHINT3−OUT outputs the count of the bipolar integrator.
– A positive value at PHINT3−IN increments the integrator (count is increased).
– A negative value at PHINT3−IN decrements the integrator (count is reduced).
l If the count exceeds the value of +32767 encoder revolutions (¢ +2147483647 inc)
– an overflow occurs. The counting is continued with the value −32768,
– PHINT3−STATUS switches to HIGH when the value of (+) C1151 is reached.
l If the count falls below the value of −32768 encoder revolutions (¢ −2147483648 inc)
– an overflow occurs. The counting starts at the value +32767,
– PHINT3−STATUS switches to HIGH when the value of (−) C1151 is reached.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.53.3 Input value with sign reversal (PHINT3)
C1150 = 2
The input PHINT3−LOAD is state−controlled (HIGH level).
l PHINT3−LOAD = HIGH
– The integrator is loaded with the input value at PHINT3−SET.
– Sets the output PHINT3−STATUS = LOW.
P H IN T 3 -O U T
C 1 1 5 1
C h a n g e o f s ig n a t th e in p u t
-C 1 1 5 1
Fig. 3−143 Function of PHINT3 with sign reversal of the input value at C1150 = 2
l The FB integrates speed or velocity values at PHINT3−IN to a phase (distance).

l PHINT3−OUT outputs the count of the bipolar integrator.
– A positive value at PHINT3−IN increments the integrator (count is increased).
– A negative value at PHINT3−IN decrements the integrator (count is reduced).
l If the counter content exceeds the value of (+) C1151
– the value of C1151 is subtracted from the counter content,
– switches PHINT3−STATUS = HIGH for 1 ms.
l If the counter content falls below the value of () C1151
– the value of C1151 is added to the counter content,
– switches PHINT3−STATUS = HIGH for 1 ms.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.53.4 Scaling of PHINTx−OUT

Mathematical description of PHINTx−OUT:
PHINTx * OUT[inc] + PHINTx * IN[rpm] @ t[s] @ 65536[incńrev.]

t Integration time
Example:
You want to determine the count of the integrator with a certain speed at the input and a certain
integration time.
l Given values:
– PHINTx−IN = 1000 rpm
– t = 10 s
– Start value of the integrator = 0
l Solution:
– Conversion of PHINTx−IN:
1000rpm + 1000rev.
60s
– Calculation of PHINTx−OUT:
PHINTx * OUT + 1000rev. @ 10s @ 65536inc

rev. + 10922666inc
60s

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.54 Delay element (PT1−1)

Purpose
Filtering and delaying of analog signals.
C0640 PT1-1
PT1-1-IN PT1-1-OUT
C0641
C0642
Fig. 3−144 Delay element (PT1−1)
Signal Source Note

PT1−1−IN a C0642 dec [%] C0641 1 1000 −
PT1−1−OUT a − − − − − −
Function
l The delay time T is set under C0640.
l The proportional coefficient is fixed at K = 1.
K=1
T t
Fig. 3−145 Delay time T of the first order delay element

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.55 CW/CCW/QSP linking (R/L/Q)

Purpose
The FB provides a fail−safe connection for the selection of a rotation direction and the QSP function.
C0889/1 R/L/Q
R/L/Q-R R/L/Q-QSP
C0885
R/L/Q-L R/L/Q-R/L
C0886
C0889/2
Fig. 3−146 CW/CCW/QSP linking (R/L/Q)
Signal Source Note

R/L/Q−R d C0889/1 bin C0885 2 51 −
R/L/Q−L d C0889/2 bin C0886 2 52 −
R/L/Q−QSP d − − − − − −
R/L/Q−R/L d − − − − − −
Function
l After mains connection and simultaneous HIGH level at both inputs, the outputs are set as
follows:
Inputs Outputs
R/L/Q−R R/L/Q−L R/L/Q−R/L R/L/Q−QSP
1 1 0 1
l The following truth table results if one of the inputs is set to LOW once after mains connection:
Inputs Outputs
0 0 0 1
1 0 0 0
0 1 1 0
1 1 unchanged unchanged
l If both inputs are set to HIGH during operation, the values at both outputs remain unchanged.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.56 Homing function (REF)
Purpose
The homing function serves to bring the drive shaft to a defined position.
) Note!
At first, select the predefined configuration in C0005, which already contains the
REF function block. This ensures that all important signal connections are restored
automatically. Then, adapt the configuration to your application.
REF-ACTPOS-IN
C0933
C0932
REF
C0925 C0930
C0926/1 C0931
C0934
REF-POS-LOAD C0935
C0924
C0936
C0927/3 CTRL
C0926/3
REF-MARK C0926/4
C0921 REF-OK
C0927/2 REF-BUSY
REF-ON
C0920
C0927/1
REF-N-SET
REF-N-IN
C0923
C0929
REF-PSET
REF-PHI-IN
C0922
C0928
Fig. 3−147 Homing function (REF)
Signal Source Note

REF−N−IN a C0929 dec [%] C0923 1 1000 Speed setpoint in [%] of nmax C0011
REF−PHI−IN ph C0928 dec [inc] C0922 3 1000 Angle setpoint (following error for angle
C0926/2 controller in FB MCTRL)
REF−ACTPOS−IN ph C0926/1 dec [inc] C0925 3 1000 Loading value for current position
(REF−ACTPOS)
REF−ON d C0927/1 bin C0920 2 1000 HIGH = Start homing
REF−MARK d C0927/2 bin C0921 2 1000 Reference switch
REF−POS−LOAD d C0927/3 bin C0924 2 1000 LOW−HIGH edge = Angle at the input
REF−ACTPOS−IN is loaded in REF−ACTPOS
(starting value)
REF−OK d − − − − − HIGH = Homing completed/home position
known
REF−BUSY d − − − − − HIGH = Homing function active
REF−N−SET a − − − − − Speed setpoint for n−controller
REF−PSET ph − − − − − Angle setpoint (following error for angle
controller in FB MCTRL)
Range of functions
l Profile generator
l Homing modes
l Control via input signals
l Output of status signals

Function library
Function blocks

The speed profile for homing can be adapted to the application.
v Referenzpunkt-Offset C0934
C0935 C0936
C0936
t
REF-MARK Nullimpuls Referenzpunkt
Fig. 3−148 Homing speed profile
Code Meaning Note

C0930 Encoder/gearbox factor − numerator (motor speed) Setting only required if the actual value encoder is not
C0931 Encoder/gearbox factor − denominator (encoder speed) mounted to the motor
C0933 Selection of the edge of the touch probe signal at X5/E4 The touch probe edge provides the bench mark for the home
position offset to the homing modes that include touch probe.
C0934 Home position offset = number of increments after zero pulse Reference: 65536 inc = 1 revolution. Max. entry: 2140000000
inc
C0935 Homing speed Input in [%] of nmax (C0011)
C0936 Homing acceleration time, homing deceleration time Linear ramps
C0926/3 REFC−ACTPOS, actual position value Read only
C0926/4 REFC−TARGET, current target position Read only
The profile generator calculates the speed profile from the set profile parameters.
l The parameters can be changed during homing.
– C0935 and C0936 become active if REF−ON = LOW.
l The drive should not be driven at the torque limit (MCTRL−MMAX = HIGH), otherwise the drive
cannot follow the speed profile.
– Prolonging the acceleration / deceleration time until MCTRL−MMAX does not respond
anymore.
l The angle controller in the MCTRL function block must be activated.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.56.2 Homing modes
The home position is defined via

l the homing mode C0932
l the signal edge of the zero pulse or touch probe signal C0933
l the home position offset C0934
) Note!
For position feedback via resolver, the zero position (depending on the resolver
attachment to the motor) is used instead of the zero pulse. Accordingly, the touch
probe angle is used for homing via touch probe.
Homing to zero pulse/zero position with reference switch

The home position is after the negative edge of the reference switch REF−MARK, at the next zero
pulse/zero position plus the home position offset:
l Mode 0 (C0932 = 0):
– Move to the home position in CW rotation.
– Enter positive home position offset C0934.
C0934
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
REF-MARK
Fahrtstrecke
Startpunkt Referenzpunkt
Fahrtrichtung
l Mode 1 (C0932 = 1):

– Move to the home position in CCW rotation.
– Enter negative home position offset C0934.
C0934
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
REF-MARK
Fahrtstrecke
Fahrtrichtung Startpunkt
Referenzpunkt
9300STD219

Function library
Function blocks
Homing with reference switch and touch probe (TP)

The home position is after the negative edge of the reference switch REF−MARK, at the touch probe
signal (terminal X5/E4) plus the home position offset:
l Mode 6 (C0932 = 6):
C0934
X5/E4
REF-MARK
Fahrtstrecke
Fahrtrichtung
9300STD220
Fig. 3−151 Homing with touch probe; approaching the home position in CW rotation
l Mode 7 (C0932 = 7):

Homing with touch probe (TP)

The home position is at the next touch probe signal (terminal X5/E4) plus the home position offset.
l Mode 8 (C0932 = 8):
l Mode 9 (C0932 = 9):

Function library
Function blocks
Direct homing
The home position is on the home position offset.
l Mode 20 (C0932 = 20):
– Directly after the activation (REF−ON = HIGH), the drive traverses from the actual position
(REF−ACTPOS) to the home position.
– Before that, the actual position (REF−ACTPOS) can be loaded with the input value
REF−ACTPOS−IN (see chapter 3.2.56.3).
– The route and direction of travel results from the actual position (REF−ACTPOS) and the
home position offset (C0934) set.
Referenzpunktoffset (C0934)
REF-ACTPOS Fahrtstrecke
Fahrtstrecke
0 Startpunkt Fahrtrichtung Referenzpunkt
Fig. 3−152 Direct homing; approaching the home position in CW rotation
l Mode 21 (C0932 = 21) is the same as mode 20 but additionally features:

– The actual position value (REF−ACTPOS) is stored when the mains is disconnected and
reloaded when the mains is connected.
3.2.56.3 Control via input signals

l REF−ON = LOW−HIGH edge starts homing:
– The input must remain on HIGH until the end of the homing process. Homing is aborted if
the input is set to LOW before the home position is reached.
l REF−ON = LOW interrupts homing:
– The drive is decelerated to zero speed along the ramp set under C0936.
– The inputs REF−N−IN and REF−PHI−IN are switched to the outputs REF−N−SET and
REF−PSET.
– Has no effect if homing is already completed (REF−BUSY = LOW).
l REF−POS−LOAD = LOW−HIGH edge
– The profile generator accepts the angle at the input REF−ACTPOS−IN as starting value in the
actual position value REF−ACTPOS.
– The function is only active if REF−ON = LOW
– The function is only active in the modes 20 and 21.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.56.4 Output of status signals

l REF−BUSY = HIGH: the homing function is active:
– The profile generator is switched to the outputs REF−PSET and REF−N−SET.
l REF−BUSY = LOW: the homing function is not active nor is it completed:
– The inputs REF−N−IN and REF−PHI−IN are switched to the outputs REF−N−SET and
REF−PSET.
l REF−OK = HIGH: homing has been completed successfully:
– Homing is completed when the setpoint of the profile generator has reached the home
position.
– If a following error is present, it is transferred into the function block DFSET and corrected
(see chapter 3.2.56.5), provided that the drive is not operated within the torque limitation.
l REF−OK = LOW:
– Homing is currently being executed or
– the home position is no longer known, e.g. due to a failure, or
– homing has been interrupted.
3.2.56.5 Function block interconnection

l REF−PSET provides the angle setpoint belonging to REF−N−SET (following error) for the angle
controller in the function block MCTRL.
– Faultless homing requires a processing of both signals (REF−PSET and REF−N−SET).
l The homing function must be connected to the function block DFSET (see signal flow diagram
for the configurations 5000, 6000 and 7000).
– Otherwise accumulating angle errors may occur.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.57 Ramp function generator (RFG)

Purpose
The ramp function generator limits the rise of signals.
C0671 RFG1
C0672
RFG1-IN RFG1-OUT
C0673
C0676/1 0
RFG1-SET 1
C0674
C0676/2
RFG1-LOAD
C0675
C0677
Fig. 3−153 Ramp function generator (RFG1)
Signal Source Note

RFG1−IN a C0676/1 dec [%] C0673 1 1000 −
RFG1−SET a C0676/2 dec [%] C0674 1 1000 −
RFG1−LOAD d C0677 − C0675 2 1000 −
RFG1−OUT a − − − − − −
Function
l Calculation and setting of the times Tir and Tif
l Loading of the ramp function generator

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.57.1 Calculation and setting of the times Tir and Tif

The acceleration time and deceleration time refer to a change of the output value from 0 to 100 %.
The times Tir and Tif to be set can be calculated as follows:
[%]
RFG1−OUT
100 %
w2
w1
0
t ir t if t
T ir T if
T ir + t ir 100% T if + t if 100%
w2 * w1 w2 * w1
tir and tif are the times desired for the change between w 1 and w2.The values for Tir and Tif can be
set under C0671 and C0672.
3.2.57.2 Loading of the ramp function generator

The ramp function generator can be initialised with defined values via the inputs RFG1−SET and
RFG1−LOAD.
l As long as the input RFG1−LOAD = HIGH, the input RFG1−SET is switched to the output.
l If the input RFG1−LOAD = LOW, the ramp function generator accelerates/decelerates from this
value to its input value within the set T i times.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.58 Sample and hold function (S&H)
3.2.58 Sample and hold function (S&H)

Purpose
The FB can save analog signals. The saved value is also available after mains switching.
S&H1
S&H1-IN
C0570 S&H S&H1-OUT
C0572
S&H1-LOAD
C0571
C0573
Fig. 3−155 Sample and hold function (S&H1)
Signal Source Note

S&H1−IN a C0572 dec [%] C0570 1 1000
S&H1−LOAD d C0573 bin C0571 2 1000 LOW = save
S&H1−OUT a − − − − −
Function
l With S&H1−LOAD = HIGH the signal at the input S&H1−IN is switched to the output
S&H1−OUT.
l With S&H1−LOAD = LOW the output S&H1−OUT is disconnected from the input S&H1−IN and
outputs the value which was last valid.
Saving in the case of mains disconnection:
l Keep S&H1−LOAD at LOW level when disconnecting the supply voltage (mains, DC bus or
terminal 59).
l Keep S&H1−LOAD at LOW level when connecting the supply voltage (mains, DC bus or
terminal 59).

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.59 S−shaped ramp function generator (SRFG)

Purpose
The function block serves to direct the input signal via a jerk−limited ramp generator (S shape) in order
to avoid setpoint step−changes.
C1040 SRFG1
C1041
SRFG1-OUT
C1042 SRFG1-IN
SRFG1-DIFF
C1045/1 0
SRFG1-SET 1
C1043
C1045/2
SRFG1-LOAD
C1044
C1046
Fig. 3−156 S−shaped ramp function generator (SRFG1)
Signal Source Note

SRFG1−IN a C1045/1 dec [%] C1042 1 input
SRFG1−SET a C1045/2 dec [%] C1043 1 Starting value for the ramp function generator, will be
accepted if SRFG1−LOAD = High
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
SRFG1−LOAD d C1046 bin C0144 2 HIGH = accepts the value at SRFG1−SET and provides it
at SRFG1−OUT; SRFG1−DIFF always remains at 0 %
SRFG1−OUT a − − − − Output limited to ±100 %
SRFG1−DIFF a − − − − Output limited to ±100 %, provides the acceleration of
the ramp function generator
SRFG1−LOAD
l Via digital input SRFG1−LOAD, the ramp function generator is loaded (set) with the signal from
SRFG1−SET.
l This value is immediately accepted, i.e. there is no acceleration/deceleration via S shape (the
output skips to this value).
l As long as SRFG−LOAD = HIGH, the ramp function generator remains inhibited.

Function library
Function blocks
Function
The maximum acceleration and the jerk can be set separately.
SRFG1-IN
SRFG1-OUT
t
SRFG1-DIFF
(Beschleunigung)
C1040
t
C1040
C1041
Ruck
Fig. 3−157 Line diagram
l Max. acceleration:
– C1040 applies to both the positive and the negative acceleration.
– Setting according to formula:
W 2[%] * W 1[%] n [% ]
T irlin + 1s @
C1040[%] W 2
W 1
t [s ]
T ir lin
K35.0272
l Jerk (C1041):
– The jerk is selected in [s] until the ramp function generator operates at max. acceleration
(see Fig. 3−157).

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.60 Output of digital status signals (STAT)
3.2.60 Output of digital status signals (STAT)

Purpose
The FB evaluates digital signals of function blocks and the status of the controller and passes them
on to C0150 and FB AIF−OUT and CAN−OUT1.
STAT.B0 0 STAT
C0156/1
DCTRL-IMP 1
STAT.B2 2
C0156/2
STAT.B3
C0156/3 3
STAT.B4 4
C0156/4 C0150
STAT.B5 5
C0156/5
DCTRL-NACT=0 6
DCTRL-CINH 7 AIF-
DCTRL-STAT*1 8 Statusword
DCTRL-STAT*2 9
DCTRL-STAT*4 10
DCTRL-STAT*8 CAN1-
11 Statusword
DCTRL-WARN 12
DCTRL-MESS 13
STAT.B14 14
C0156/6
STAT.B15 15
C0156/7
Fig. 3−158 Output of digital status signals (STAT)
Signal Source Note

STAT.B0 d − bin C0156/1 2 2000
STAT.B2 d − bin C0156/2 2 5002
STAT.B3 d − bin C0156/3 2 5003
STAT.B4 d − bin C0156/4 2 5050
STAT.B5 d − bin C0156/5 2 10650
STAT.B14 d − bin C0156/6 2 505
STAT.B15 d − bin C0156/7 2 500
Function
The status word consists of some fixedly linked (DCTRL−xxxx−) and some freely linkable signal inputs
(STAT.Bx).
l Digital signal sources can be freely assigned to the inputs STAT.Bx.
l The corresponding bit in the data word is marked with STAT.Bx (e.g. STAT.B0 for the LSB)
l The status word is transferred to code C0150 and to the function blocks AIF−OUT and
CAN−OUT1.
l The inputs with the name DCTRL−xxxx are directly accepted from the function block DCTRL.
( 3−57)

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.61 Control of a drive network (STATE−BUS)
3.2.61 Control of a drive network (STATE−BUS)

Purpose
The FB controls the drive network to specified states (e.g. trip, quick stop or controller inhibit).
+10V STATE-BUS
STATE-BUS-O
STATE-BUS 1
C0440
ST
C0441 ST
X5
Fig. 3−159 Control of a function block STATE−BUS
Signal Source Note

STATE−BUS d C0441 bin C0440 2 1000
STATE−BUS−O d − − − − −
TERMINAL X5/ST d − − − − −
Function
The STATE−BUS is a device−specific bus system which is designed for Lenze controllers only. The
function block STATE−BUS acts on the terminals X5/ST or reacts on a LOW signal at these terminals
(multi−master capable).
l Every connected controller can set these terminals to LOW.
l All connected controllers evaluate the signal level at these terminals and control the internally
configured function blocks.
l Up to 20 controllers can be connected.
Stop!
Do not apply an external voltage at terminals X5/ST.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.62 Storage block (STORE)

Purpose
Stores a set phase signal created from a speed signal. The storage process is activated via the TP
input Ex.
T P E in g a n g E 5 0 S T O R E 1
0 1
1 D S T O R E 1 -T P -IN H
S T O R E 1 -E N T P R
C 1 2 1 0 /2 >_ 1
C 1 2 1 5 /2
S T O R E 1 -E N W IN
C 1 2 1 0 /3 &
C 1 2 1 5 /3
S T O R E 1 -M A S K V
C 1 2 1 2 >_ 1
_> M a s k v
C 1 2 1 7
S T O R E 1 -M A S K I
C 1 2 1 1 /2
C 1 2 1 6 /2 S T O R E 1 -A C T
S T O R E 1 -IN C S T O R E 1 -P H 1
C 1 2 1 1 /1 R e g 1
R
C 1 2 1 6 /1
S T O R E 1 -R E S E T C S T O R E 1 -P H 2
R e g 2
C 1 2 1 0 /1 R -
+
C 1 2 1 5 /1
C T R S T O R E 1 -P H D IF F
S T O R E 1 -L O A D 0 >_ 1 C 1 2
C 1 2 1 0 /4 R R S & H
L C
C 1 2 1 5 /4
S T O R E 1 -L O A D 1
C 1 2 1 0 /5
C 1 2 1 5 /5
Fig. 3−160 Storage block (STORE1)
Signal Source Note

STORE1−IN phd C1216/1 dec [rpm] C1211/1 4 1000 −
STORE1−RESET d C1215/1 bin C1210/1 2 1000 HIGH = resets all functions
STORE1−ENTP d C1215/2 bin C1210/2 2 1000 HIGH = enables the triggering via the
TP input E5
STORE1−MASKI phd C1216/2 dec [rpm] C1211/2 4 1000 −
STORE1−MASKV ph C1217 dec [inc] C1212 3 1000 −
STORE1−ENWIN d C1215/3 bin C1210/3 2 1000 HIGH = signal enable when
| STORE1−MASKI | w STORE1−MASKV
STORE1−LOAD0 d C1215/4 bin C1210/4 2 1000 HIGH = resets the counter which controls
the output at STORE1−PHDIFF
STORE1−LOAD1 d C1215/5 bin C1012/5 2 1000 LOW−HIGH edge = sets the counter = 1
which controls the output to
STORE1−PHDIFF

Function library
Function blocks

STORE1−ACT ph − − − − − Outputs the currently integrated value
STORE1−PH1 ph − − − − − Outputs the last value stored by X5/E5
STORE1−PH2 ph − − − − − Outputs the last but one value stored by
X5/E5
STORE1−PHDIFF ph − − − − − Outputs the difference of STORE1−PH1 and
STORE1−PH2
STORE1−TP−INH d − − − − − HIGH = triggering via TP input E5 has been
done. For another triggering a positive edge
must be activated at the input
STORE1−ENTP.
T P E in g a n g E 4 0 S T O R E 2
0 1
1 D S T O R E 2 -T P -IN H
S T O R E 2 -E N T P R
C 1 2 2 0 /2 >_ 1
C 1 2 2 3 /2 S T O R E 2 -A C T
M C T R L -P H I-A C T C S T O R E 2 -P H 1
R e g 1
R
S T O R E 2 -R E S E T C S T O R E 2 -P H 2
R e g 2
C 1 2 2 0 /1 R
C 1 2 2 3 /1
Fig. 3−161 Storage block (STORE2)
Signal Source Note

STORE2−RESET d C1223/1 bin C1220/1 2 1000 HIGH = resets all functions
STORE2−ENTP d C1223/2 bin C1220/2 2 1000 HIGH = enables the triggering via the
TP input E4 free
STORE2−ACT ph − − − − − Outputs the currently integrated value
STORE2−PH1 ph − − − − − Outputs the last value stored by X5/E5
STORE2−PH2 ph − − − − − Outputs the last but one value stored by
X5/E5
STORE2−TP−INH d − − − − − HIGH = triggering via TP input E4 has been
done. For another triggering a positive edge
must be activated at the input
STORE1−ENTP.
Function
l STORE1 control via TP input E5
l Storing STORE1 phase signal
l Storing STORE2 phase signal

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.62.1 STORE1 control via TP input E5

The trigger signal STORE1−TP−INH indicates a triggering done via the TP input E5 with a HIGH signal
(LOW−HIGH edge at X5/E5). At the same time it is signalled with STORE1−TP−INH that the triggering
is deactivated and must be reset to the active state. This can be done via
l STORE1−RESET = HIGH
l STORE1−ENTP = LOW−HIGH edge
l STORE1−ENWIN = HIGH and the comparison of phase signals
Comparison of phase signals

A phase signal is created from the speed signal at STORE1−MASKI and is compared with the phase
signal at STORE1−MASKV.
If the condition | STORE1−MASKI | w STORE1−MASKV
is fulfilled,
l the TP input E5 is enabled for the next triggering with STORE1−ENWIN = HIGH,
l the integrator for the speed signal at STORE1−MASKI is reset.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.62.2 Storing STORE1 phase signal

A phase signal is created from a speed signal at STORE1−IN. The following sequence shows, in
addition to storing, the options of signal output
l The actual phase signal is output at STORE1−ACT.
1. A LOW−HIGH edge at the TP input E5 stores the last phase signal and outputs it at
STORE1−PH1.
2. STORE1−ENTP = LOW−HIGH edge enables the TP input E5 for the next triggering.
3. A renewed LOW−HIGH edge at the TP input E5 stores the last phase signal.
– STORE1−PH1 outputs this last phase signal.
– STORE1−PH2 outputs the last but one phase signal.
– STORE1−PHDIFF outputs the difference of STORE1−PH1 and STORE1−PH2.
l STORE1−RESET = HIGH resets memory, counter and integrators and activates the TP input
for triggering.
Output of the difference between both phase signals stored

l A two−stage counter controls the output to STORE1−PHDIFF.
l Every second triggering via the TP input results in a new output to STORE1−PHDIFF.
l STORE1−LOAD0 = HIGH resets the counter.
Additional control
1. STORE1−LOAD1 = LOW−HIGH edge, sets the counter to the first stage (preparation for the
output to STORE1−PHDIFF).
2. Triggering via TP input E5 sets the counter to the second stage (output to STORE1−PHDIFF is
done).
Tip!
If STORE1−LOAD1 is set cyclically, STORE1−PHDIFF outputs a new difference signal after every
triggering.
3.2.62.3 Storing STORE2 phase signal

A phase signal is created from a speed signal at MCTRL−PHI−ACT. The following sequence shows,
in addition to storing, the options of signal output.
l The actual phase signal is output to STORE2−ACT.
1. A LOW−HIGH edge at the TP input E4 stores the last phase signal and outputs it at
STORE2−PH1.
2. STORE2−ENTP = LOW−HIGH edge activates the TP input E4 for the next triggering.
3. A renewed LOW−HIGH edge at the TP input E4 stores the last phase signal.
– STORE2−PH1 outputs this last phase signal.
– STORE2−PH2 outputs the last but one phase signal.
l STORE2−RESET = HIGH resets the memory and integrator and activates the TP input E4 for
triggering.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.63 Multi−axis synchronisation (SYNC1)

Purpose
Synchronises the control program cycle of the drives to the cycle of a master control.
C 1 1 2 0 S Y N C 1
C 1 1 2 1 /1
C 1 1 2 1 /2
C 1 1 2 2
C 1 1 2 3 /1
C 1 1 2 3 /2
X 4
X 5 -E 5 C LK S Y N C 1 -S T A T
S Y N C 1 -IN 1 S Y N C 1 -O U T 1
C 1 1 2 4
C 1 1 2 7
S Y N C 1 -IN 2 S Y N C 1 -O U T 2
C 1 1 2 5
C 1 1 2 8
S Y N C 1 -IN 3 S Y N C 1 -O U T 3
C 1 1 2 6
C 1 1 2 9
C 0 3 6 3
Signal Source Note

SYNC1−IN1 a C1127 dec [inc] C1124 1 1000 −
SYNC1−IN2 ph C1128 dec [inc] C1125 3 1000 −
SYNC1−IN3 a 1129 dec C1126 1 1000
SYNC1−STAT d − − − − − After the synchronisation is completed,
SYNC1−STAT switches to HIGH.
If the synchronisation is quit,
SYNC1−STAT switches to LOW.
SYNC1−OUT1 phd − − − − − Cannot be used for angle−accurate
speed/angle difference transmission
SYNC1−OUT2 ph − − − − − With interpolation, for cyclically
synchronised position information
SYNC1−OUT3 a − − − − − With interpolation, for analog values

Function library
Function blocks
Function
l Possible axis synchronisations (chapter 3.2.63.1)
l Cycle times (chapter 3.2.63.2)
l Phase displacement (chapter 3.2.63.3)
l Synchronisation window for synchronisation via terminal (SYNC WINDOW) (chapter 3.2.63.4)
l Correction value of phase controller (SYNC CORRECT) (chapter 3.2.63.5)
l Fault indications (chapter 3.2.63.6)
l Configuration examples (chapter 3.2.63.7)
l Scaling (chapter 3.2.63.8)
3.2.63.1 Possible axis synchronisations
Operating mode
Code Value Function
C1120 0 FB without function.
Assigns the data at the inputs directly to the outputs.
1 CAN Sync active
Synchronises the controllers to the sync telegram of the system bus.
2 Terminal Sync active
Synchronises the controllers to the sync signal of terminal X5/E5.
Synchronisation time
In addition to certain mains connection and initialisation time of the controller, the FB SYNC1 also
requires a synchronisation time.
The synchronisation time depends on
l the baud rate of the system bus (CAN−SYNC),
l the starting time (reception of the first SYNC telegram / signal),
l the time between the SYNC telegrams,
l the SYNC correction factor (C0363),
l the operating mode of the FB SYNC1.

Function library
Function blocks
Axis synchronisation via system bus (CAN)

The system bus (CAN) transmits the sync telegram and the process signals.
Application examples:
l Selection of cyclic, synchronised position setpoint information for multi−axis positioning via the
system bus (CAN).
C A N -IN 3
C A N -IN 3 .B 1 6
C 0 8 6 3 /6 C A N -IN 3 .B 1 7
1 6 b in a r y
C 1 1 2 0 S Y N C 1
C 1 1 2 1
...
s ig n a ls C A N -IN 3 .B 3 0 C 1 1 2 2
B y te 3 ,4
C A N -IN 3 .B 3 1 S Y N C 1 -S T A T
X 4 C L K
S Y N C 1 -IN 1 S Y N C 1 -O U T 1
1 6 B it C 1 1 2 4
L o w W o rd C 1 1 2 7
S y te m b u s C A N -IN 3 .D 1 S Y N C 1 -IN 2 S Y N C 1 -O U T 2
C 1 1 2 5 P O S -P S E T -E X T
X 4 1 6 B it C 1 1 2 8
C 0 8 6 7 /3
H ig h W o r d S Y N C 1 -IN 3 S Y N C 1 -O U T 3
C 1 1 2 6
C 1 1 2 9
C A N -IN 3 .W 3
B y te 5 ,6
1 6 B it
C 0 8 6 6 /1 0
Fig. 3−162 Example for linking the FB SYNC1
Axis synchronisation via terminal control (X5/E5)

The transmission paths for the sync signal and the process signals are separated.
l The process signals are connected via a freely selectable input channel (e. g. AIF interface, DF
input).
l The sync signal is injected via terminal X5/E5.
l Selection of cyclic, synchronised position setpoint information for multi−axis positioning via
other bus systems (e. g. Interbus).
l Synchronisation of the internal processing cycles of the FB to higher−level process controls.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.63.2 Cycle times
Sync cycle time (SYNC CYCLE)

The master (e. g. PLC) sends the periodic sync telegram1) (sync signal2)).
The controllers (slaves) receive the sync telegram and compare the time between two LOW−HIGH
edges of the signal with the selected cycle time (1121/1).
The cycle time is entered in integers (1 ms, 2 ms, 3 ms, ...).
1) Designation for the synchronisation via system bus (CAN)
2) Designation for the synchronisation via terminal
Code Value Function

C1121/1 1 ... 13 ms Definition of the cycle time of the sync telegram (sync signal).
Parameters must only be set for the slave.
· C1120 = 1 (CAN sync)
– Time between two sync telegrams of the master. Adapt the time to the master SYNC. C0362
indicates the time (CAN sync cycle) for the slave. Set the value in C1121/1 higher than the value in
C0362.
· C1120 = 2 (terminal SYNC)
– Time between two sync signals of the master at X5/E5. Adapt the time to the master SYNC. Set the
value in C1121/1 w the cycle time of the master.

Function library
Function blocks
Interpolation cycle time (INTPOL. CYCLE)

The FB interpolates the input signals (C1124, C1125, C1126) between the sync telegrams or sync
signals and transmits them to the corresponding output. This ensures an optimum signal course with
regard to the internal processing cycle (e. g. minimising signal jumps in the output variable when
operating with high sync cycles).
The interpolation is restarted with every sync signal (LOW−HIGH edge).
Code Value Function
C1121/2 1 ... 13 ms Definition of the interpolation cycles/steps
· C1120 = 1
– C1121/2 has no effect.
– The interpolation cycles are derived from the sync cycle (C1121/1).
· C1120 = 2
– The interpolation cycle can be selected irrespective of the sync cycle.
– The parameter setting of C1121/2 must be selected according to the cycle of the process value
input.
CANNEL 3
SYNC1-OUT3
[x.x%; 1ms]
GND3
CANNEL 2
GND2 SYNC1-IN3
[x.x%; 1ms]
CANNEL 1
SYNC - SIGNAL
[10V; 1ms]
GND1
TSYNC TINTPOL
9300kur095
Fig. 3−163 Interpolation example
See Fig. 3−163:

An analog value at SYNC1−IN3 is output as an interpolated value at SYNC1−OUT3.
l Sync cycle (C1121/1) = 4 ms
l Interpol. cycle (C1121/2) = process cycle = 2 ms
l Phase displacement (C1123/1) = 0 ms

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.63.3 Phase displacement
Phase displacement for synchronisation via system bus (SYNC TIME)

Code Value Function
C1122 0 ...10.000 ms · C1120 = 1
– Phase displacement between the sync telegram and the start of the internal control program.
– The parameters are set automatically depending on the parameter setting of the system bus (CAN).
· C1120 = 2
– C1122 has no effect.
Phase displacement for synchronisation via terminal (PHASESHIFT)

Code Value Function
C1123/1 −1.000 ms · C1120 = 1
to – C1123/1 has no effect.
+1.000 ms · C1120 = 2
– Phase displacement between the sync signal and the start of the internal control program (e. g. for
compensating the effects of signal propagation delays/dead times for the sync signal of the single
slave drives).
3.2.63.4 Time slot for synchronisation via terminal
Code Value Function

C1123/2 0 ... 1.000 ms · C1120 = 1
– C1123/2 has no effect.
· C1120 = 2
– Definition of a "time slot" for the LOW−HIGH edges of the sync signal for the slave (defined via
C1121/1).
– If the sync signal sent by the master is within the "time slot", the SYNC1−STAT is switched to HIGH.
S Y N C - W in d o w (C 1 1 2 3 /2 )
S Y N C - S ig n a l
S Y N C - C y c le ( C 1 1 2 1 /1 )
Fig. 3−164 Time slot" for the LOW−HIGH edges of the sync signal
Tip!
A jitter of up to ±200 μs on the LOW−HIGH edges of the sync signal is permissible. The size of the
jitter affects the parameter setting of the "time slot".

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.63.5 Correction value of the phase controller
Code Value Function

C0363 1 ... 5 · Correction values for C0363 =
1 ® 0.8 ms
2 ® 1.6 ms
3 ® 2.4 ms
4 ® 3.2 ms
5 ® 4.0 ms
· C1120 = 1
– The value is automatically derived from the internal parameters of the system bus (CAN).
· C1120 = 2
– Optimising the rise time of the phase controller depending on the frequency of the sync signal.
– Increase the value if the frequency of the sync signal decreases.
– A stable signal at SYNC1−STAT is an indicator for an optimal parameter setting.
3.2.63.6 Fault indications
Fault indications for the synchronisation via system bus

Fault Cause Remedy
P16 Controller was enabled in an unsynchronised Only enable the controller when SYNC1−STAT = HIGH
state (SYNC1−STAT = LOW)
The time between two sync telegrams is C0362 indicates the time between two sync telegrams
faulty · Set the time in C1121/1 to the time in C0362
· Adapt the time interval of the sync telegram from the master
Fault indications for the synchronisation via terminal

Fault Cause Remedy
P16 Controller was enabled in an unsynchronised Only enable the controller when SYNC1−STAT = HIGH
state (SYNC1−STAT = LOW)
Sync signal is missing Connect sync signal with terminal X5/E5
The period of the sync signal is not a multiple Adapt the period
of 1 ms
Sync window is too small Adapt C1123/2 to the conditions

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.63.7 Configuration examples
Configuration example CAN−SYNC

Observe the following order for commissioning:
Step Where Operation
1. − Commission controller and system bus without FB SYNC1
2. − Inhibit controller
3. CAN master Define the sequence of the telegrams
1. Send new setpoint to all slaves
2. Send sync telegram
3. All slaves must respond
4. CAN slave drives Enter FB SYNC1 into the first position of the processing table
5. Parameterise the signal assignment of the inputs at FB SYNC1
6. Select C1120 = 1 (sync mode for FB SYNC1)
7. CAN master Start communication, send sync telegrams
8. CAN slave drives FB SYNC1 (CAN SYNC−CYCLE)
· Retrieve cycle time of the SYNC telegram from the master via C0362
9. FB SYNC1 (SYNC CYCLE)
· Set C1121 according to the time interval of the sync telegrams from the control
· Set C1121 w C0362
10. Parameterise the monitoring function P16 via C1290
11. Connect the output signals of SYNC1 with the required inputs of the corresponding FB
12. Via FB DIGOUT
· Detect signal of SYNC1−STAT
13. Only enable the controller when SYNC1−STAT = HIGH
Configuration example TERMINAL−SYNC

Observe the following order for commissioning:
Step Where Operation
1. − Commission controller without FB SYNC1
2. − Inhibit controller
3. Slave drives Enter FB SYNC1 into the first position of the processing table
4. Apply sync signal to terminal X5/E5
5. Parameterise the signal assignment of the inputs at FB SYNC1
6. Select C1120 = 2 (sync mode for FB SYNC1)
7. Sync master Start communication, send sync signals
8. Slave drives FB SYNC1 (SYNC CYCLE)
· Parameterise the sync cycle time of the sending source via C1121
9. Parameterise the monitoring function P16 via C1290
10. Connect the output signals of SYNC1 with the required inputs of the corresponding FB
11. Via FB DIGOUT
· Output signal of SYNC1−STAT
12. FB SYNC1 (SYNC WINDOW)
· Enter the optimal size of the "time slot" via C1123/2
· If the sync signal jitters strongly, increase the "time slot"
13. Only enable the controller when SYNC1−STAT = HIGH
3.2.63.8 Scaling
The signal at input is transmitted in a scaled form to SYNC1−OUT1.
Scaling formula:
1875rpm
SYNC1−OUT1[rpm] + SYNC1−IN1[inc] @
2048inc
The inputs SYNC1−IN2 and SYNC1−IN3 are not scaled. The FB transmits the data to SYNC1−OUT2
or SYNC1−OUT3 without any evaluation.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.64 Edge evaluation (TRANS)
Purpose
This function is used to evaluate digital signal edges and convert them into pulses of a defined
duration.
C0710 C0711 TRANS1
TRANS1-IN TRANS1-OUT
C0713
C0714 0 t
Fig. 3−165 Edge evaluation (TRANS1)
Signal Source Note

TRANS1−IN d C0714 bin C0713 2 1000 −
TRANS1−OUT d − − − − − −
C0715 C0716 TRANS2
TRANS2-IN TRANS2-OUT
C0718
C0719 0 t
Signal Source Note

TRANS2−IN d C0719 bin C0718 2 1000 −
TRANS2−OUT d − − − − − −
C 1 1 4 0 C 1 1 4 1 T R A N S 3
T R A N S 3 -IN T R A N S 3 -O U T
C 1 1 4 3
C 1 1 4 4 0 t
Signal Source Note

TRANS3−IN d C1144 bin C1143 2 1000 −
TRANS3−OUT d − − − − − −
C 1 1 4 5 C 1 1 4 6 T R A N S 4
T R A N S 4 -IN T R A N S 4 -O U T
C 1 1 4 8
C 1 1 4 9 0 t
FB_trans4
Fig. 3−168 Signal evaluation (TRANS4)
Signal Source Note

TRANS4−IN d C1149 bin C1148 2 1000 −
TRANS4−OUT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
Function
This FB is an edge evaluator which can be retriggered. This FB can react to different events. The
following functions can be selected under code C0710 or C0716:
l Positive edge
l Negative edge
l Positive or negative edge
3.2.64.1 Evaluate positive edge
TRANS1−IN
C0711 C0711 t
TRANS1−OUT
Fig. 3−169 Evaluation of positive edges (TRANS1)
l The output TRANSx−OUT is set to HIGH as soon as a LOW−HIGH edge is sent to the input.
l After the time set under C0711 or C0716 has elapsed, the output changes again to LOW
unless there is another LOW−HIGH edge at the input.
3.2.64.2 Evaluate negative edge
TRANS1−IN
C0711 C0711 t
TRANS1−OUT
Fig. 3−170 Evaluation of negative edges (TRANS1)
l The output TRANSx−OUT is set to HIGH as soon as a HIGH−LOW edge is sent to the input.
l After the time set under C0711 or C0716 has elapsed, the output changes again to LOW,
unless there is another HIGH−LOW edge at the input.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.64.3 Evaluate positive or negative edge
TRANS1−IN
C0711 C0711 t
TRANS1−OUT
Fig. 3−171 Evaluation of positive and negative edges (TRANS1)
l The output TRANSx−OUT is set to HIGH as soon as a HIGH−LOW edge or a LOW−HIGH edge
is sent to the input.
l After the time set under C0711 or C0716 has elapsed, the output changes again to LOW
unless there is another HIGH−LOW edge or LOW−HIGH edge at the input.

Function library
Function blocks

Application examples
4 Application examples
Contents
4.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−3
4.2 Speed control (C0005 = 1000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−4
4.3 Torque control with speed limitation (C0005 = 4000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−7
4.4 Master frequency − Master − Drive (C0005 = 5000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−9
4.5 Master frequency bus − slave − drive (C0005 = 6000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−12
4.6 Master frequency cascade − slave − drive (C0005 = 7000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−14


4.1 Important notes
4.1 Important notes
Signal processing in the controller is saved in basic configurations for common applications.
l You can select and activate the basic configurations via C0005 and adapt them with only a
few settings to your application (short setup). ( 2−4)
l The setting of the motor data and the adaptation of the motor control is generally independent
of the configuration and is described in chapter "Commissioning".
Configuration Basic function
1xxx Speed control 4−4
4xxx Torque control with speed limitation 4−7
5xxx Master for digital frequency coupling 4−9
6xxx Slave to digital frequency bus 4−12
7xxx Slave to digital frequency cascade 4−14
) Note!
The GDC and the keypad include the most important codes for the basic
configurations in the Short setup" menus.

4.2 Speed control (C0005 = 1000)
Tip!
The most important settings can be found in the menu: "Short Setup / Speed mode" of the XT keypad
or in the menu "Short setup / Speed mode" in Global Drive Control.
Enter motor type (contains all nameplate data of the motor)

C0173 xxx Enter UG limit (mains voltage)
C0086 000 Enter motor data manually
Enter maximum motor current

C0022 xxxA Determine Imax
Enter controller configuration

C0005 1000 Select speed control
C0025 xxx Enter feedback system
Speed setpoint settings

C0011 xxx rpm Determine max. speed
C0012 xxx s Set acceleration time
C0013 xxx s Set deceleration time
C0105 xxx s Set QSP deceleration time
Application parameters
C0070 xxx Vp n−controller
C0071 xxx Tn n−controller
Save parameters
C0003 xxx Save all parameters

Fig. 4−1
4.2
l
NSET-CINH-VAL Ramp generator main setpoint
MCTRL-NACT C0784 NSET
R/L/Q C0798/1
X5 NSET-RFG-STOP
R FIXED0 C0790
QSP
DIGIN DIGIN1 QSP
E1 L NSET-RFG-0
C0799/13
R/L C0789
E2 C0114/1...5 DIGIN2
E3 DIGIN3 C0799/12 S-shape Linking of main
0 NSET-N-INV and additional
E4 C0781
1 DIGIN4 TRIP-SET
E5 C0799/1 CINH C0182 C0190 setpoint
DIGIN5 TRIP-RESET NSET-N
C0780
C0039/1
0 200%
C0046 C0039/2
x NSET-NOUT
AIN1 *-1
1
y +
- *
C0034 x/(1-y)
X6 DMUX C0039/15 /
NSET-JOG*1
C0787/1 0
1 +
C0787/2 NSET-JOG*2
JOG1...15 C0045 C0134
0
2 + NSET-JOG*4 C0241
C0787/3 15
NSET-JOG*8 C0012 C0013
FIXED0 C0787/4 3 C0101/1 C0103/1
C0101/2 C0103/2
C0027/1 DMUX NSET-RFG-I=0
C0026/1 MCTRL-NSET2 NSET-TI*1 C0101/15 C0103/15
C0788/1 0
NSET-TI*2
ASW1 C0788/2 0 TI 0...15
X6 NSET-TI*4
AIN2 C0812/1 C0788/3 15 C439/1 AOUT2
NSET-TI*8 X6
C0788/4 3 C0130 +
3 + 0 AOUT2-IN
C0436 63
+
NSET-SET +
4 1 C0785 AOUT2-GAIN
C0438
Signal flow diagram for configuration 1000

FIXED0% C0798/2 C0439/3
NSET-LOAD AOUT2-OFFSET
C0026/2 C0027/2 C0786 C0437
C0799/3 C0220/ C0439/2
NSET-NADD-INV C0221 CINH
FIXED0 C0783
NSET-NADD C0799/2 0 C434/1 AOUT1
MCTRL-QSP-OUT X6
C0782 1 AOUT1-IN +
*-1
Ramp generator additional setpoint C0431 62
C0049 +
AOUT1-GAIN
C0433
C0434/3
AOUT1-OFFSET
MCTRL C0432
C0472/3 DCTRL-QSP C0434/2
1 MCTRL-QSP-OUT
R/L/Q-QSP MCTRL-QSP
C0900
C0042
C0907/3
ANEG MCTRL-HI-M-LIM
C0893 Current controller
EDSVS9332S−EXT EN 2.0
*-1 C0906/4
MCTRL-LO-M-LIM
C0892 C0030 DFOUT
MCTRL-NSET2
C0906/3 C0540
MCTRL-N/M-SWT
FIXED0 C0899 C0050 DFOUT-DF-IN DFOUT-OUT
MCTRL-MMAX FIXED-PHI-0 C0542
C0907/2
MCTRL-I-LOAD MCTRL-MSET1
C0902 C0549
MCTRL-MSET2
MCTRL-I-SET C0907/4 DFOUT-AN-IN
FIXED0% C0901 C0056 MCTRL-IMAX C0541
C0105 C0906/8 Speed MCTRL-IACT
C0547
QSP decel. ramp controller MCTRL-DCVOLT
C0909 MCTRL-MACT DFOUT-SYN-RDY
100%
FIXED0 C0544
1 1 CTRL
+ + + 0 VECT-CTRL PWM C0540
MCTRL-N-SET 0 0
C0548
C0890 + - + 1
X5 E5
C0906/1 Phase controller 0 X10
C0072
C0254 C0070 C0545 1
C0071
Torque C0006 C0018
MCTRL-PHI-SET C0022 X9 2
FIXED0INC C0894 1 limitation C0075 3
C0908 -
C0076
+ 4
C0077
FIXED0% MCTRL-PHI-LIM C0086 C0078 5
C0895 X8
C0906/5 Speed C0081
MCTRL-PHI-ON C0084
FIXED0 C0897 limitation C0085
Speed control (C0005 = 1000)
MCTRL-N2-LIM C0907/1 C0087

FIXED0% C0896 C0017
C0088
MCTRL-M-ADD C0906/6 C0089
FIXED0% C0891 C0090
CONST C0091
CMP1
MCTRL-FLD-WEAK C0906/2
FIXED100% C0898 MCTRL-PHI-ANA
C0906/7 C0683/1 DIGOUT X5
RESOLVER MCTRL-PHI-ACT TRIP DIGOUT1
X7 Actual speed NACT=0 C0118/1...4 A1
MCTRL-NACT DIGOUT2
A2
ENCODER MCTRL-PHI-ANG RDY DIGOUT3 0
C0051
X8 C0420 A3
C0011 C0497 MMAX DIGOUT4 1
C0490 C0025 C0680 A4
C0495 C0681
9300STD322
4−5
M a in s s w itc h
L 1
L 2
L 3
N
P E
M a in s fu s e O F F
O N
M a in s K 1
c o n ta c to r K 1
M a in s c h o k e
J R B
L K
K 1
F 1 F 2
L 1 L 2 L 3 P E + U G -U G -U G + U G P E
9 3 X X
9 3 5 2
X 6 X 5
U V W P E X 7 1 2 3 4 P E 2 8 E 1 E 2 E 3 E 4 E 5 3 9 A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 5 9 R B 1 R B 2
+
= R F R
- R L
K 1
M R B J R B
3 ~ R
Q S P T R IP -S E T
M o to r
9300std016
Fig. 4−2 Connection diagram of configuration 1000
Tip!
A braking unit is only required if the DC−bus voltage in the 93XX servo inverter exceeds the upper
switch−off threshold set in C0173 when operating in generator mode (activation of the monitoring
function "OU"). The braking unit prevents "OU" from being activated by converting the kinetic energy
of the machine into heat which prevents the DC−bus voltage from exceeding the upper switch−off
threshold.

4.3 Torque control with speed limitation (C0005 = 4000)
4.3 Torque control with speed limitation (C0005 = 4000)
Tip!
The most important settings can be found in the menu: "Short Setup / Speed mode" of the operating
module or in the menu "Short setup / Speed mode" in Global Drive Control.



C0005 4000 Select torque control

C0105 xxx s Set QSP deceleration time
Speed limitation
C0472/4 xxx % nmax Determine lower speed limit
Save parameters

4−8
Fig. 4−3
4.3
NSET-CINH-VAL Ramp generator main setpoint

R/L/Q C0798/1
X5 NSET-RFG-STOP
R FIXED0 C0790
QSP
DIGIN DIGIN1 QSP
E1 L NSET-RFG-0
C0799/13
R/L C0789
E2 C0114/1...5 DIGIN2
E3 DIGIN3 C0799/12 S-shape Linking of main
0 NSET-N-INV and additional
E4 C0781
1 DIGIN4 TRIP-SET
E5 C0799/1 CINH C0182 C0190 setpoint
DIGIN5 TRIP-RESET NSET-N
C0780
C0039/1
0 200%
C0046 C0039/2
x NSET-NOUT
AIN1 *-1
1
y +
- *
C0034 x/(1-y)
X6 DMUX C0039/15 /
NSET-JOG*1
C0787/1 0
1 + NSET-JOG*2
JOG1...15 C0045 C0134
C0787/2 0
2 + NSET-JOG*4 C0241
C0787/3 15
NSET-JOG*8 C0012 C0013
C0787/4 3
C0101/1 C0103/1
C0101/2 C0103/2
C0026/1 C0027/1 DMUX NSET-RFG-I=0
NSET-TI*1 C0101/15 C0103/15
C0788/1 0
NSET-TI*2
C0788/2 0 TI 0...15
X6 NSET-TI*4
AIN2 C0788/3 15 C439/1 AOUT2
NSET-TI*8 X6
C0788/4 3 C0130 +
3 + AOUT2-IN
C0436 63
+ NSET-SET +
4 MTCRL-NSET2 C0785 AOUT2-GAIN
Signal flow diagram of configuration 4000

C0438
C0798/2 C0439/3
MCTRL-QSP-OUT NSET-LOAD AOUT2-OFFSET
C0026/2 C0027/2 C0786 C0437
C0220/ C0439/2
C0799/3 CINH
FIXED0 NSET-NADD-INV C0221

C0783
NSET-NADD C0799/2 0 C434/1 AOUT1 X6
C0782 1 AOUT1-IN +
*-1 C0431 62
C0049 Ramp generator additional setpoint AOUT1-GAIN +
C0433
C0434/3
R/L/Q-QSP
AOUT1-OFFSET
MCTRL C0432
C0472/3 C0434/2
DCTRL-QSP 1 MCTRL-QSP-OUT
MCTRL-QSP
C0900
C0042
C0907/3
ANEG MCTRL-HI-M-LIM
C0893 Current controller
*-1 MCTRL-LO-M-LIM C0906/4
C0892 C0030 DFOUT
MCTRL-NSET2
C0906/3 C0540
MCTRL-N/M-SWT
FIXED1 C0899 C0050 DFOUT-DF-IN DFOUT-OUT
MCTRL-MMAX FIXED-PHI-0 C0542
C0907/2
MCTRL-I-LOAD
FIXED0 C0902 MCTRL-MSET1 C0549
Torque control with speed limitation (C0005 = 4000)
C0907/4 MCTRL-MSET2 DFOUT-AN-IN

MCTRL-I-SET
FIXED0% C0901 C0056 MCTRL-IMAX C0541
C0105 C0906/8
Speed MCTRL-IACT
controller C0547
QSP decel. ramp MCTRL-DCVOLT
C0909 MCTRL-MACT DFOUT-SYN-RDY
100% FIXED0 C0544
1 1 CTRL
+ + + 0 VECT-CTRL PWM C0540
MCTRL-N-SET 0 0
C0548
C0890 + - + 1
X5 E5
C0906/1 Phase controller 0 X10
C0072
C0254 C0070 C0545 1
C0071
Torque C0006 C0018
MCTRL-PHI-SET C0022 X9 2
FIXED0INC C0894 1 limitation C0075 3
C0908 -
C0076
+ 4
C0077
MCTRL-PHI-LIM C0086 C0078 5
FIXED0% C0895 X8
C0906/5 Speed C0081
MCTRL-PHI-ON C0084
FIXED0 C0897 limitation C0085
MCTRL-N2-LIM C0907/1 C0087
C0472/4 C0896 C0017
C0088
MCTRL-M-ADD C0906/6 C0089
C0891 C0090
CONST C0091
CMP1
C0906/7 C0683/1 DIGOUT X5
RESOLVER MCTRL-PHI-ACT TRIP DIGOUT1
X7 NACT=0 C0118/1...4 A1
Actual speed MCTRL-NACT DIGOUT2
A2
ENCODER MCTRL-PHI-ANG RDY DIGOUT3 0
C0051
X8 C0420 A3
C0011 C0497 MMAX DIGOUT4 1
C0490 C0025 C0680 A4
C0495 C0681
9300STD323
l
4.4 Master frequency − Master − Drive (C0005 = 5000)
4.4 Master frequency − Master − Drive (C0005 = 5000)
Tip!



C0005 5000 Master frequency − master − general drive
5900 with emergency stop for the drive system with QSP

C0012 xxx s Set acceleration time
C0013 xxx s Set deceleration time
C0105 xxx s Set QSP deceleration time under C0005 = 5000
C0672 xxx s Set QSP deceleration time under C0005 = 59xx
C0032 xxx Numerator of gearbox factor
C0033 xxx Denominator of gearbox factor
C0473/1 xxx Numerator of stretching factor
C0533 xxx Denominator of stretching factor
C0254 xxx Gain of the angle controller
Save parameters

4−10
Fig. 4−4
4.4
NSET-CINH-VAL
C0798/1
NSET-RFG-STOP
C0790
C0799/13
FIXED0 NSET-RFG-0
C0789
C0799/12
AIN1 NSET-N-INV C0030 DFOUT
X6 C0034 C0781 C0540
C0799/1 CINH C0182 C0190 DFOUT-DF-IN DFOUT-OUT
1 + NSET-N FIXEDPHI-0 C0542
C0780 C0549
2 + C0039/1
0 200%
C0046 C0039/2
x NSET-NOUT DFOUT-AN-IN
*-1
1
y +
- * C0541
DMUX C0039/15 / x/(1-y)
NSET-JOG*1 C0547
C0026/1 C0027/1 C0787/1 0
NSET-JOG*2 C0134 DFOUT-SYN-RDY
C0787/2 0 JOG1...15 C0045
NSET-JOG*4 C0241 FIXED0 C0544
C0787/3 15
NSET-JOG*8 C0012 C0013 CTRL C0540
C0787/4 3 C0548
C0101/1 C0103/1
C0101/2 C0103/2 X5 E5
DMUX NSET-RFG-I=0 0 X10
NSET-TI*1 C0101/15 C0103/15
FIXED0 C0788/1 0 C0545 1
NSET-TI*2 X9
C0788/2 0 TI 0...15 2
NSET-TI*4
C0788/3 15 3
NSET-TI*8
C0788/4 3 C0130 4
NSET-SET X8 5
MCTRL-NSET2 C0785
C0798/2
MCTRL-QSP-OUT NSET-LOAD
C0786
ASW1 C0799/3 C0220/
NSET-NADD-INV C0221 CINH
X6 AIN2 C0812/1 C0783
3 + 0 NSET-NADD C0799/2 0
C0782 1
4 + *-1
1
FIXED0% C0049
FIXDE0
C0026/2 C0027/2
Signal flow diagram for configuration 5000 (sheet 1)

DFSET-0-PULSE
C0525 C0534
DFSET
C0538/1 X5 C0531
2
E4
1 C0474/1 C0933 REF
MCTRL-PHI-ACT REF-ACTPOS-IN C0932
DFSET-ACK
X5 CTRL C0925 C0930
2
E5 C0926/1 C0931
1
X9/6,7 C0528/1 C0934
REF-POS-LOAD C0935
Speed C0924
C0532 C0535 C0936
DFSET-N-TRIM trimming C0927/3 CTRL
C0472/5 C0524 C0926/3
REF-MARK C0926/4
Master frequency − Master − Drive (C0005 = 5000)
C0537 C0921 REF-OK

DFSET-RAT-DIV
C0032 C0522 C0927/2 REF-BUSY
DFSET-VP-DIV C0536/2 DFSET-POUT REF-ON
C0473/1 C0521 C0920
C0536/1
a
Phase offset C0927/1
a Set phase REF-N-SET
DFSET-IN a a + DFSET-NOUT REF-N-IN
C0520 C0923
* b * b +
C0539 b b C0530 C0929
REF-PSET
C0533 C0033 C0252 C0253 REF-PHI-IN
C0922
0 + + + DFSET-PSET C0928
OR1 1
OR1-IN1 + + -
RSP C0830/1 DFSET-SET
C0831/1 C0527 C0528/2
C0538/3
OR1-IN2 1 OR1-OUT DFSET-RESET
QSP C0830/2 C0526
C0831/2 C0538/2 Phase trimming
DFSET-A-TRIM
OR1-IN3
C0473/3 C0523 * C0529
C0830/3 C0536/3
C0831/3 Phase trimming=f(n)
FIXED0
DIGIN DCTRL -X5/28

X5
DIGIN-CINH
28
DIGIN1 QSP
E1 C0114/1...5 DIGIN2
E2 DIGIN3
0
E3 1 DIGIN4 TRIP-SET
1
E4 DIGIN5 TRIP-RESET
E5 C0443
9300STD324
l
Fig. 4−5
4.4
l
C0472/3
ANEG MCTRL-HI-M-LIM MCTRL

MCTRL-LO-M-LIM
*-1 MCTRL-MMAX
MCTRL-N/M-SWT
FIXED0 MCTRL-NSET2
C0105 C439/1 AOUT2
QSP decel. ramp Speed controller C0050 MCTRL-MSET1 X6
QSP MCTRL-MSET2 +
C0909 C0072 QSP Current
63
MCTRL-IMAX +
controller
+/-100%
1 1
+ + + 0 VECT-CTRL PWM
MCTRL-N-SET 0 0 C0108/2
+ - + 1
C0906/1 C0109/2
Phase controller C0056
C0254 C0070 Torque limitation
C0071
MCTRL-PHI-SET C0006 C0018
1
C0022 C0017
C0908 -
C0081 DIGOUT X5
+ TRIP
MCTRL-PHI-LIM C0084 DIGOUT1
C0472/6 Speed NACT=0 C0118/1...4 A1
limitation
C0086 C0085 CMP1 DIGOUT2
MCTRL-PHI-ON A2
FIXED1 C0087 0
MCTRL-N2-LIM RDY DIGOUT3
FIXED0% C0088 C0683/1 A3
DIGOUT4 1
C0089 A4
C0906/6 C0090
MCTRL-M-ADD
Signal flow diagram for configuration 5000 (sheet 2)

FIXED0% C0091
C0906/2
Resolver MCTRL-PHI-ACT C0680 C434/1 AOUT1
X7 C0681 X6
Actual speed MCTRL-NACT +
62
+
C0051
C0420 C0011
Encoder C0490 C0108/1
X8 C0495 C0025
C0109/1
Master frequency − Master − Drive (C0005 = 5000)
9300STD327
4−11
4.5 Master frequency bus − slave − drive (C0005 = 6000)
4.5 Master frequency bus − slave − drive (C0005 = 6000)
Tip!



C0005 6000 Select digital frequency cascade − slave

C0425 xxx Adjust encoder constant to the master
Save parameters

Fig. 4−6
4.5
l
X10
DFSET-0-PULSE
FIXED0 C0525 C0534
DFSET
C0538/1 X5 C0531
2
E4
1
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
DFSET-ACK
X5 CTRL
2
E5
1 C0528/1
X9/6,7
X9 Speed C0933 REF
C0532 C0535 REF-ACTPOS-IN C0932
DFIN DFSET-N-TRIM trimming C0474/1 C0925 C0930
C0472/5 C0524
C0926/1 C0931
C0537 C0934
DFSET-RAT-DIV REF-POS-LOAD
C0032 C0522 C0935
C0924
DFSET-VP-DIV C0536/2 DFSET-POUT C0936
C0473/1 C0521 C0927/3 CTRL
C0425 C0926/3
C0536/1 Phase offset REF-MARK C0926/4
a a C0921
DFSET-IN + Set phase DFSET-NOUT REF-OK
a a
C0520 * b * b C0927/2 REF-BUSY
+
C0539 b b C0530 REF-ON
OR1 C0533 C0033 C0252 C0253 C0920
CINH 0 + + C0927/1
1 + DFSET-PSET
1 REF-N-SET
QSP + + - REF-N-IN
DFSET-SET C0923
C0527 C0528/2
FIXED0 C0929
C0538/3 REF-PSET
DFSET-RESET REF-PHI-IN

C0526 C0922
C0538/2 Phase trimming
DFSET-A-TRIM C0928
C0473/3 C0523 * C0529
DCTRL -X5/28 C0536/3 Act. phase
X5 DIGIN Phase trimming=f(n)
DIGIN-CINH
28
DIGIN1 QSP
E1 C0114/1...5 DIGIN2
E2 DIGIN3
0
1
E5 C0443
MCTRL
C0472/3 DCTRL-QSP 1 MCTRL-QSP-OUT
MCTRL-QSP
DIGIN1 C0900
C0042
C0907/3
MCTRL-HI-M-LIM AOUT2
ANEG C0893 C439/1 X6
C0906/4 Current controller +
MCTRL-LO-M-LIM
*-1 C0892 63
MCTRL-NSET2 +
C0906/3
MCTRL-N/M-SWT
FIXED0 C0899 C0050 MCTRL-MMAX
C0907/2
MCTRL-I-LOAD MCTRL-MSET1 C0108/2
FIXED0 C0902
MCTRL-MSET2
MCTRL-I-SET C0907/4 C0109/2
FIXED0% C0901 C0056 MCTRL-IMAX
C0105 C0906/8 Speed MCTRL-IACT
C0909 MCTRL-MACT
100%
1 1
MCTRL-N-SET 0 0 C0017 DIGOUT
C0890 + - + 1 TRIP DIGOUT1
C0117/1 X5
C0906/1 Phase controller NACT=0 DIGOUT2 C0118/1...4
C0072 C0117/2
C0254 C0070 CMP1 DIGOUT3 A1
C0006 C0018 RDY C0117/3 0
MCTRL-PHI-SET C0071 Torque DIGOUT4
C0894 C0022 C0117/4 1 A2
1 1
limitation C0075
C0908 - C0683/1
C0076 C0444/1 A3
+
C0077 C0444/2
Master frequency bus − slave − drive (C0005 = 6000)
MCTRL-PHI-LIM C0086 C0078 C0444/3 A4

C0472/6 C0895
C0906/5 C0081 C0444/4
MCTRL-PHI-ON Speed C0084
FIXED1 C0897
limitation C0085
MCTRL-N2-LIM C0907/1 C0087 C0680
FIXED0% C0896 C434/1 AOUT1 X6
C0088 C0681
MCTRL-M-ADD C0906/6 C0089 +
FIXED0% C0891 C0090 62
CONST C0091
+
C0906/7
RESOLVER MCTRL-PHI-ACT C0108/1
X7 Actual speed MCTRL-NACT
C0109/1
MCTRL-PHI-ANG
C0051
ENCODER C0420
X8 C0011 C0497
C0490 C0025
C0495
9300STD325
4−13
4.6 Master frequency cascade − slave − drive (C0005 = 7000)
4.6 Master frequency cascade − slave − drive (C0005 = 7000)
Tip!



C0005 7000 Select digital frequency cascade − slave

C0425 xxx Adjust encoder constant to the master
C0473/1 xxx Numerator of stretching factor
C0533 xxx Denominator of stretching factor
Save parameters

Fig. 4−7
4.6
l
C0030 DFOUT
C0540
C0542
DFSET-0-PULSE
FIXED0 C0525 C0534
DFSET C0549
C0538/1 X5 C0531 DFOUT-AN-IN
2 FIXED0% C0541
E4
1 C0547
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
DFSET-ACK DFOUT-SYN-RDY
X5 CTRL C0544
2 C0474/1 FIXED0
E5 CTRL C0540
1 C0528/1 C0548
X9/6,7
X9 C0933 X5 E5
Speed C0532 C0535 REF-ACTPOS-IN C0932
REF 0 X10
DFIN DFSET-N-TRIM trimming C0925 C0930 C0545 1
C0472/5 C0524 X9
C0926/1 C0931 2
C0537 C0934 3
DFSET-RAT-DIV REF-POS-LOAD
C0032 C0522 C0935 4
C0924
DFSET-VP-DIV C0536/2 DFSET-POUT C0936 X8 5
C0473/1 C0521 C0927/3 CTRL
C0425 C0926/3
C0536/1 Phase offset REF-MARK C0926/4
a a C0921
DFSET-IN + Set phase DFSET-NOUT REF-OK
a a
C0520 * b * b C0927/2 REF-BUSY
+
C0539 b b C0530 REF-ON
OR1 C0533 C0033 C0252 C0253 C0920
CINH 0 + + C0927/1
1 + DFSET-PSET
1 REF-N-SET
QSP + + - REF-N-IN
DFSET-SET C0923
C0527 C0528/2
FIXED0 C0929
C0538/3 REF-PSET
DFSET-RESET REF-PHI-IN
C0526 C0922
C0538/2 Phase trimming
DFSET-A-TRIM C0928
C0473/3 C0523 * C0529

C0536/3
Act. phase
DIGIN DCTRL -X5/28
X5
DIGIN-CINH i
Phase trimming=f(n)
28
DIGIN1 QSP
E1 C0114/1...5 DIGIN2
E2 DIGIN3
0
1
E5 C0443
MCTRL
C0472/3 DCTRL-QSP 1 MCTRL-QSP-OUT
MCTRL-QSP
DIGIN1 C0900 C0042
C0907/3
MCTRL-HI-M-LIM AOUT2
ANEG C0893 C439/1
Current controller X6
C0906/4 +
MCTRL-LO-M-LIM
*-1 C0892 63
MCTRL-NSET2 +
C0906/3
MCTRL-N/M-SWT
FIXED0 C0899 C0050 MCTRL-MMAX
C0907/2 MCTRL-MSET1
FIXED0 C0902 MCTRL-MSET2
MCTRL-I-SET C0907/4 C0056 C0109/2
FIXED0% C0901 MCTRL-IMAX
C0105 C0906/8 Speed MCTRL IACT
C0909 MCTRL-MACT
100%
1 1
MCTRL-N-SET 0 0 C0017 DIGOUT
C0890 + - + 1 TRIP DIGOUT1
C0117/1 X5
C0906/1 Phase controller NACT=0 DIGOUT2 C0118/1...4
C0072 C0117/2
C0254 C0070 CMP1 DIGOUT3 A1
C0006 C0018 RDY C0117/3 0
MCTRL-PHI-SET C0071 Torque C0022 DIGOUT4 A2
C0894 1 C0117/4 1
limitation C0075 1
C0908 - C0683/1
C0076 C0444/1 A3
+
C0077 C0444/2
MCTRL-PHI-LIM C0086 C0078 C0444/3 A4
C0472/6 C0895
C0906/5 C0081 C0444/4
MCTRL-PHI-ON Speed C0084
FIXED1 C0897
limitation C0085
Master frequency cascade − slave − drive (C0005 = 7000)
MCTRL-N2-LIM C0907/1 C0087 C0680

FIXED0% C0896 C434/1 AOUT1 X6
C0088 C0681
MCTRL-M-ADD C0906/6 C0089 +
FIXED0% C0891 C0090 62
CONST +
C0091
C0906/7 MCTRL-PHI-ACT
RESOLVER C0108/1
X7 Actual speed MCTRL-NACT
C0109/1
MCTRL-PHI-ANG
C0051
C0420
C0011 C0497
C0490 C0025
C0495
9300STD326
4−15
4−16
Fig. 4−8
4.6
S tr e tc h u n it 2
P u ll-o ff u n it (m a s te r d r iv e ) S tr e tc h u n it 1
v = 5 0 m /m in v = 8 0 m /m in v = 1 1 0 m /m in
i= 1 9 ,4 i= 5 ,3 i= 5 ,3
R M R M R M
D ig ita l fr e q u e n c y
D ig ita l fr e q u e n c y
+ 2 4 V e x te rn a l + 2 4 V e x te rn a l
X 7 X 1 0 X 9 X 7 X 1 0 X 9 X 7 X 1 0
9 3 0 0 M a s te r
V p u ll- o ff 9 3 0 0 S la v e 9 3 0 0 S la v e
2 E 4 E 4
S tre tc h > S tre tc h >
- = + E 3 E 3
S tre tc h < S tre tc h <
1
S tre tc h fa c to r S tre tc h fa c to r
G e a rb o x G e a rb o x G e a rb o x
Connection diagram of digital frequency configuration

2 8 E 1 E 5 5 9 A 1 A 4 3 9 A 2 2 8 E 1 E 5 5 9 A 1 A 4 3 9 A 2 2 8 E 1 E 5 5 9 A 1 A 4 3 9 A 2
+ 2 4 V + 2 4 V + 2 4 V
e x te rn a l e x te rn a l e x te rn a l
P L C
n is t= 0 n is t= 0 n is t= 0
R F R T R IP -R e s e t T R IP M m a x R F R T R IP -R e s e t T R IP M m a x R F R T R IP -R e s e t T R IP M m a x
P ro c e s s c o n tro l
R ig h t R ig h t R ig h t
Master frequency cascade − slave − drive (C0005 = 7000)
Q S P Q S P Q S P
9300STD127
l
Appendix
5 Appendix
Contents
5.1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−3
5.2 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−5

Appendix

Appendix
5.1 Glossary
5.1 Glossary
Cross−reference to a chapter with the corresponding page number

Controller Any frequency inverter, servo inverter, or DC speed controller

DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung(German Institute for Standardization)
Drive Lenze controller in combination with a geared motor, a three−phase AC motor, and other
Lenze drive components
IPC Industrial PC
L [mH] Inductance
PDC [kW] Power that can be additionally taken from the DC bus if a power−adapted motor is used for
operation
R [W] Resistance

Appendix
5.1 Glossary
VDE Verband deutscher Elektrotechniker (Association of German Electrical Engineers)
Xk/y Terminal y on terminal strip Xk (e. g. X5/28 = terminal 28 on terminal strip X5)

Appendix
5.2 Index
5.2 Index
A Configuration, 2−1
− Basic configurations, 2−4
Absolute position determination, 2−34 − Function blocks, 3−3
− Function library, 3−1
Acceleration and deceleration times, 2−7
− Global Drive Control, 2−3
− additional, 2−7
Control characteristic, 3−143
Actual angle integrator (PHDIFF), 3−148
Control of drive controller (DCTRL), 3−57
Addition block (ADD), 3−16
Controller inhibit, 2−10
Additional setpoint, 2−7 , 3−134
− correcting signal, 2−7 Controller inhibit (CINH), 3−59
Additional torque setpoint, 2−9 , 3−104 Current controller, 3−104
Analog input (AIN), 3−22 Current master value, 2−6
Analog output (AOUT), 3−29 CW/CCW/QSP linking (R/L/Q), 3−157
Analog signal changeover switch (ASW), 3−33

D
AND operation (AND), 3−24
Dead band(DB), 3−56
angle addition block (PHADD), 3−145
Definition of notes used, 1−6
Angle comparator (PHCMP), 3−146
Definitions, Terms, 5−3
Angle controller, 2−26
Delay element (PT1−1), 3−156
− Angle controller limits, 2−26
− Influence of angle controller, 3−108 Delay elements (DIGDEL), 3−81
Angle controller limits, 2−26 Derivative−action element (DT1), 3−86
Angle conversion (CONVPHA), 3−50 Digital frequency output (DFOUT), 3−65
Angle conversion (CONVPHPH), 3−51 Digital frequency processing (DFSET), 3−75
Angle signal adaptation (PHDIV), 3−149 Digital frequency ramp function generator
(DFRFG), 3−69
Angle−synchronous operation, 2−26
Digital inputs (DIGIN), 3−84
Angular synchronism, 2−26
Digital outputs (DIGOUT), 3−85
Angular trimming, 2−27
Digital status signals (STAT), 3−169
Application examples, 4−1
Drive system, 2−13
− Speed control, 4−4 , 4−7 , 4−9 , 4−12 , 4−14
Arithmetic blocks (ARIT), 3−31 E

Automation interface (AIF−IN), 3−17
Edge evaluation (TRANS), 3−183
Automation interface (AIF−OUT), 3−20 Electrical shaft, 2−26
C F
Cascading factor, 2−20 , 2−23 Fast mains recovery (KU), 3−121
Characteristic function (CURVE), 3−53 Field weakening, 3−110
CINH at the master, 2−17 Fieldbus module, 3−17
CINH at the slave, 2−20 , 2−23 Fixed setpoints (FIXSET), 3−95
Comparator (CMP), 3−42 Flipflop (FLIP), 3−97

Appendix
5.2 Index
Flying synchronising, 2−27 disengaging the brake, 3−37

engaging the brake, 3−37
Following error limit, 2−27 setting controller inhibit, 3−38
− Homing function (REF), 3−158
Free control codes, overview, 3−14 − Input name, 3−4
Free digital outputs (FDO), 3−88 − Input symbol, 3−4
− Internal motor control (MCTRL), 3−102
Free piece counter (FCNT), 3−87 − Inverter (ANEG), 3−28
Freely assignable input variables (FEVAN), 3−90 − Limiting element (LIM), 3−101
− Logic NOT, 3−128
Function blocks, 3−3 , 3−12 − Mains failure control (MFAIL), 3−111
− Actual angle integrator (PHDIFF), 3−148 − master frequency input (DFIN), 3−62
− Addition block (ADD), 3−16 − Monitor outputs of monitoring system (MONIT), 3−123
− analog input (AIN), 3−22 − motor phase failure detection (MLP), 3−122
− Analog output (AOUT), 3−29 − Motor potentiometer (MPOT), 3−125
− Analog signal changeover switch (ASW), 3−33 − Multi−axis synchronisation (SYNC), 3−175
− AND operation (AND), 3−24 − Names, 3−4
− angle addition block (PHADD), 3−145 − OR operation (OR), 3−135
− Angle comparator (PHCMP), 3−146 − Oscilloscope function (OSZ), 3−138
− angle conversion (CONVPHA), 3−50 − Output name, 3−5
− Angle conversion (CONVPHPH), 3−51 − Output symbol, 3−5
− Angle conversion (CONVPP), 3−52 − overview, 3−12
− Angle signal adaptation (PHDIV), 3−149 − Parameterisation code, 3−5
− Arithmetic blocks (ARIT), 3−31 − Phase integrator (PHINT), 3−150
− Automation interface (AIF−IN), 3−17 − Process controller (PCTRL1), Dancer position, tension, pressure
controller, 3−142
− Automation interface (AIF−OUT), 3−20
− Ramp generator(RFG), 3−164
− Characteristic function (CURVE), 3−53
− Remove connections, 3−9
− comparator (CMP), 3−42
− Sample and hold function (S&H), 3−166
− Configuration code, 3−5
− Signal conversion (CONV), 3−47
− Connection, 3−6
− Signal types, 3−3
− Control of drive controller (DCTRL), 3−57
Controller inhibit (CINH), 3−59 − speed setpoint conditioning (NSET), 3−130
Operation inhibit (DISABLE), 3−59 − State bus connection, 3−170
Parameter set changeover (PAR), 3−61 − storage block (STORE), 3−171
Quick stop (QSP), 3−58 − system bus (CAN−IN), 3−40
TRIP−RESET, 3−60
TRIP−SET, 3−59 − system bus (CAN−OUT), 3−41
− Create connections, 3−8 Function blocks , Freely assignable input
− CW/CCW/QSP linking (R/L/Q), 3−157 variables (FEVAN), 3−90
− Dead band(DB), 3−56
function blocks, S−shaped ramp function
− delay element (PT1−1), 3−156
generator (SRFG), 3−167
− Delay elements (DIGDEL), 3−81
− Derivative−action element (DT1), 3−86 Function library, 3−1
− Digital frequency output (DFOUT), 3−65
− Digital frequency processing (DFSET), 3−75 G
− digital frequency ramp function generator (DFRFG), 3−69
− Digital inputs (DIGIN), 3−84
Gearbox compensation (GEARCOMP), 3−100
− Digital outputs (DIGOUT), 3−85 Gearbox factors, weighting factors, 2−13
− Digital status signals (STAT), 3−169
Global Drive Control, configuration with, 2−3
− Display code, 3−5
− Edge evaluation (TRANS), 3−183
− Fixed setpoints (FIXSET), 3−95
H
− Flipflop (FLIP), 3−97 Holding brake (BRK), 3−35
− Free digital outputs (FDO), 3−88
− Free piece counter (FCNT), 3−87
Homing, 2−30 , 2−33
− gearbox compensation (GEARCOMP), 3−100 Homing function (REF), 3−158
− holding brake (BRK), 3−35 − Homing modes, 3−160
− holding brake (BRK1) − profile generator, 3−159

Appendix
5.2 Index
Homing modes, 2−31 , 3−160 Master configuration, 2−14

− CINH at the master, 2−17
− features, 2−14
− following error limit, 2−14
I − homing function, 2−14
− master frequency output X10, 2−15
Internal motor control (MCTRL), 3−102 − Master integrator, 2−15
− phase adjustment, 2−17
− Additional torque setpoint, 3−104
− Phase offset, 2−17
− Angle controller, Influence of angle controller, 3−108 − phase trimming, 2−16
− Current controller, 3−104 − phase trimming, speed correction, 2−14
− QSP at the master, 2−17
− Quick stop (QSP)
− QSP at the slave 0, 2−17
Field weakening, 3−110
Switching frequency changeover, 3−110 − Setpoint conditioning, 2−16
− speed trimming, 2−16
− Quick stop QSP, 3−109
− Speed controller, 3−106
Master frequency bus, 2−18
− cascading factor, 2−20
− Speed setpoint limitation, 3−107
Master frequency cascade, 2−21
− Torque control, with speed limitation, 3−107
− cascading factor, 2−23
− Torque limitation, 3−105 − CINH at the slave, 2−23
− QSP at the slave, 2−23
Inverter (ANEG), 3−28
Master frequency coupling, 2−13
− gearbox factors, 2−13
Inverting the main setpoint, 2−7
− master configuration, 2−14
− System description, 2−13
Master frequency input (DFIN), 3−62
J Master frequency output X10, 2−15
− encoder constant, 2−15
JOG setpoint, 2−6
Master integrator, 2−13 , 2−15
JOG setpoints, 3−132 Monitor outputs of monitoring system (MONIT),
3−123
Motor phase failure detection (MLP), 3−122
L Motor potentiometer (MPOT), 3−125
Multi−axis synchronisation (SYNC)
Limiting element (LIM), 3−101 − Configuration examples, 3−182
− Correcting the angle controller, 3−181
Logic NOT, 3−128 − Cycle times, 3−178
− Fault indications, 3−181
− Operating mode, 3−176
− Phase displacement, 3−180
M − Scaling, 3−182
− synchronising, 3−176
− Time slot, 3−180
Main setpoint, 2−6
Multi−axis synchronisation (SYNC1), 3−175
Main setpoint path, 3−131
N
Mains failure control, 3−112 , 3−114
Nameplate, 1−5
Mains failure control (MFAIL), 3−111 Notes, definition, 1−6
− fast mains recovery (KU), 3−121
− mains failure control, 3−112 , 3−114 O
− restart protection, 3−120 Operation inhibit (DISABLE), 3−59

Appendix
5.2 Index
OR operation (OR), 3−135 S

Oscilloscope function (OSZ), 3−138 S ramp, PT1 element, 3−134
S−shaped ramp function generator (SRFG), 3−167
P S−shaped ramp function generator characteristic,
Parameter set changeover (PAR), 3−61 2−7
Safety instructions
Phase adjustment, 2−17
− Definition, 1−6
Phase integrator (PHINT), 3−150 − Structure, 1−6
− constant input value, 3−152 , 3−153 Sample and hold function (S&H), 3−166
− Input value with sign reversal, 3−154
− Scaling of PHINTx−OUT, 3−155
Selection of direction of rotation, 2−8
Setpoint conditioning of the slave, 2−20
Phase offset, 2−17 , 2−27
Setpoint inversion, Ramp function generator, main
Phase trimming, 2−16 setpoint, 3−133
Phase−synchronous operation, 2−13 Setting the integral component, 3−106
Positioning control with driftfree standstill, 2−13 Signal conversion (CONV), 3−47
Process controller (PCTRL1) Slave, 2−18
− Control characteristic, 3−143 Speed control, 2−6 , 4−4 , 4−7 , 4−9 , 4−12 ,
− Dancer position, tension, pressure controller, 3−142 4−14
− Ramp function generator, 3−144 − acceleration and deceleration times, 2−7
Processing table, 3−10 − additional acceleration and deceleration times, 2−7
− additional setpoint, 2−7
− Frequent faults, 3−11
− additional torque setpoint, 2−9
Profile generator, 2−30 , 2−33 , 3−159 − controller inhibit, 2−10
− gearbox ratio, 2−33 − current master value, 2−6
− home position offset, 2−33 − inverting the main setpoint, 2−7
− homing speed, 2−33 − JOG setpoint, 2−6
− homing Ti time, 2−33 − main setpoint, 2−6
− resetting a fault, 2−10
− S−shaped ramp function generator characteristic, 2−7
Q − selection of direction of rotation, 2−8
− setpoint selection, 2−6
QSP (quick stop), 2−10 , 3−109 − speed limit, 2−9
QSP at the master, 2−17 Speed controller, 3−106
QSP at the slave, 2−20 , 2−23 − Setting the integral component, 3−106
Speed conversion (CONVPP), 3−52
QSP at the slave 0, 2−17
Speed limit, 2−9
Quick stop (QSP), 2−10 , 3−58
Speed limitation, 2−12
Quick stop QSP, 3−109
Speed ratio synchronism, 2−25
Speed setpoint conditioning (NSET), 3−130
R − Additional setpoint, 3−134
Ramp function generator, 3−144 − JOG setpoints, 3−132
− Main setpoint, 3−131
Ramp generator(RFG), 3−164 − S ramp, PT1 element, 3−134
− Setpoint inversion, Ramp function generator, main setpoint,
Referencing, 2−30 3−133
Resetting a fault, 2−10 Speed setpoint limitation, 3−107
Restart protection, 3−120 Speed synchronism, 2−25

Appendix
5.2 Index
Speed travel profile, 2−33 Torque limitation, 3−105

Speed trimming, 2−16 Torque setpoint, 2−11
Speed−ratio synchronism, 2−13 Touch probe, 2−32
Speed−synchronous operation, 2−13 , 2−18 Touch−Probe, 2−29
Speed−synchronous running, 2−25
TRIP, 2−10
State bus connection, 3−170
TRIP−RESET, 3−60
Storage block (STORE), 3−171
TRIP−SET, 3−59
Switching frequency changeover, 3−110
System bus (CAN−IN), 3−40
V
System bus (CAN−OUT), 3−41
Vertical shaft, 2−26
T Preface, 1−1
Terms
− controller, 5−3 Z
− Definitions, 5−3
− drive, 5−3 Zero pulse, 2−27
Torque control, 2−11 Zero pulse at the setpoint, 2−28
− Setpoint input, 2−11
Zero pulse evaluation, 2−28
− Speed limitation, 2−12
− with speed limitation, 3−107 Zero pulse synchronisation, 2−28

© 03/2012
Germany Germany
( +49(0)51 54 /82−0 ( 008000/ 2446877 (24 h helpline)
Ê +49(0)51 54 /82 − 28 00 Ê +49(0)5154/ 82−11 12
ü www.Lenze.com
EDSVS9332S−EXT § .FZ9 § EN § 2.0 § TD23

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
EDSVS9332K
.M)+
Global Drive
Ä.M)+ä
System Manual
9300 0.37 ... 75 kW
EVS9321xK ... EVS9332xK
Servo cam profiler

Contents i
1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.1.1 Information provided by the System Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1−1
1.1.2 Products to which the System Manual applies . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1−3
1.4 Notes used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4−1
2 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−1

2.2.1 Forced ventilated or naturally ventilated motors . . . . . . . . . . 2.2−2
2.2.2 Self−ventilated motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2−3
3 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−1

3.3 Rated data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3−1
3.3.1 Operation at 400 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3−1
3.3.2 Operation at 480 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3−2
3.3.3 Overcurrent operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3−4
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 i
i Contents
4 Installation of the standard device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−1

4.1.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1−1
4.2.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2−1
4.3.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3−1
4.4.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4−1
ii EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013
Contents i
5 Wiring of the standard device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−1

5.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−1
5.1.2 Device protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−3
5.2.2 Operation on public supply systems (EN 61000−3−2) . . . . . . . 5.2−1
5.2.4 Operation at earth−leakage circuit breaker (e.l.c.b.) . . . . . . . . 5.2−3
5.2.6 Discharge current for mobile systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−4
5.2.10 Motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−8
5.3.1 Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−1
5.3.3 Motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−1
5.3.4 Control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−3
5.4.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4−3
5.5.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5−3
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 iii

i Contents

5.6.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6−3
5.7.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7−3
5.8.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8−1
5.8.5 State bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8−8
5.8.6 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8−9
5.8.7 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8−10
5.10.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10−1
5.10.2 Resolver at X7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10−2
5.11 Wiring of digital frequency input / digital frequency output . . . . . . . 5.11−1
5.12 Communication modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12−1
iv EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013
Contents i
6 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−1
6.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1−1
6.5 Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−1
6.5.3 Entry of gearbox factors and feed constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−3
6.5.7 Motor temperature monitoring with KTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−18
6.6.1 Resolver at X7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6−1
6.7 Current controller adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7−1
6.8 Adjusting the rotor position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8−1
6.9.4 Free configuration of analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9−4
6.10 Generation of motion profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−1
6.10.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−1
6.10.2 Definition of data model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−2
6.10.3 Entry of basic motion profile data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−3
6.10.4 Profile data import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−3
6.10.5 Mathematical specification of profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−5
6.10.6 Saving of motion profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−6
6.10.7 Application example − generation of feed profiles . . . . . . . . . 6.10−7
6.11 Transfer of motion profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11−1
6.11.1 Transfer methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11−1
6.11.2 Background data field and active data field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11−2
6.11.3 Transfer of profile data from GDC to the controller . . . . . . . . 6.11−3
6.11.4 Transfer of profile data from the PLC/IPC to the controller . . 6.11−4
6.11.5 Transfer of profile data from the controller to the PLC/IPC . . 6.11−9
6.12 Acceptance of reloaded profile data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12−1
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 v
i Contents
6.13 Activation/deactivation of password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13−1

6.13.1 Master PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13−1
6.13.2 User PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13−1
6.14 Commissioning examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14−1
6.14.1 Replacement of a mechanical cam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14−1
6.14.2 Multi−axis application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14−2
6.15 Handwheel function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15−1
vi EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013
Contents i
7 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7−1

7.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1−1
7.2.8 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−10
7.2.9 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−11
8 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8−1
8.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1−1
8.2 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−1
8.2.1 Fault responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−1
8.2.4 Maximum speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−4
8.2.5 Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−4
8.2.8 Current load of motor (I2 x t monitoring: OC6, OC8) . . . . . . . 8.2−7
8.2.10 DC−bus voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−11
8.2.11 External error (EEr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−11
8.3 Monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.31
8.4 Code table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4−1
8.5 Selection lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5−1
8.5.4 Selection list 4: Speed signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5−10
8.6 Table of attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6−1
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 vii

i Contents
9 Troubleshooting and fault elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9−1

9.3.1 General error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3−1
9.3.2 Resetting system error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3−6
9.4 Error messages during profile download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4−1
10 DC−bus operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10−1

10.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1−1
11 Safety engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11−1

11.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1−1
11.2 Operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2−1
11.3 Safety relay KSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3−1
11.4 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4−1
11.5 Functional test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5−1
11.5.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5−1
12 Accessories (overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12−1

13 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13−1
13.1 Code−oriented transfer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1−1
13.2 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2−1
13.3 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3−1
viii EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Contents
1 Preface
Contents

1.1.1 Information provided by the System Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1−1
1.1.2 Products to which the System Manual applies . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1−3
1.4 Notes used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4−1
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 1−1

Information provided by the System Manual 1.1.1
Target group This System Manual is directed at all persons who design, install,
commission and adjust the 9300 servo cam profilers.
Together with the System Manual (Extension), document number
EDSVS9332K−EXT, and the catalogue it forms the project planning basis for
the manufacturer of plants and machinery.
Contents The System Manual is the basis of the 9300 servo cam profiler’s description.
Together with the System Manual (Extension), document number
EDSVS9332K−EXT, it provides a complete System Manual:
ƒ The features and functions are described in detail.
ƒ The parameter setting for typical applications is explained with the
help of examples.
ƒ In case of doubt, the Mounting Instructions supplied with the 9300
servo cam profiler are valid.
Contents of System Manual Contents of System Manual (Extension)
1 Preface 1 Preface
2 Safety instructions −
4 Installation of the standard device −
5 Wiring of the standard device −
6 Commissioning −
8.1 Monitoring 2.1 Configuring with Global Drive Control
8.3 Code table 2.3 Operating modes
8.4 Selection lists
9 Troubleshooting and fault −
elimination
12 Accessories −
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 1.1−1

How to find information Use the System Manual as the basis. It contains references to the
corresponding chapters in the System Manual Supplement:
ƒ Each chapter is a complete unit and comprehensively informs about a
subject.
ƒ The Table of Contents and Index help you to find all information about
a certain topic.
ƒ Descriptions and data of other Lenze products (Drive PLC, Lenze geared
motors, Lenze motors, ...) can be found in the corresponding catalogs,
Operating Instructions and manuals. The required documentation can
be ordered at your Lenze sales partner or downloaded as PDF file from
the Internet.
Tip!
1.1−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Products to which the System Manual applies 1.1.2
This documentation is valid for 9300 servo cam profilers as of nameplate

data:
Nameplate
EVS 93xx ˘ x x Vxx 1x 8x
Product series
400 V 480 V
9321 = 0.37 kW 0.37 kW
9322 = 0.75 kW 0.75 kW
9323 = 1.5 kW 1.5 kW
9324 = 3.0 kW 3.0 kW
9325 = 5.5 kW 5.5 kW
9326 = 11 kW 11 kW
9327 = 15 kW 18.5 kW
3928 = 22 kW 30 kW
9329 = 30 kW 37 kW 9300vec112
9330 = 45 kW 45 kW
9331 = 55 kW 55 kW
9332 = 75 kW 90 kW
Type
Design
K= Servo cam profiler
Variant
˘ Standard
Hardware version
Software version
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 1.1−3

What is new / what has Material number Version Description

changed?
.M)+ 8.0 07/2013 TD06 Error corrections
13375725 7.1 06/2011 TD23 Chapter "DC−bus operation" updated due to
changes of DC fuses
13344178 6.1 09/2010 TD23 Error correction
13344178 6.0 07/2010 TD23 Added description about the fan module
being modified for push−through technique
on the 45 kW device
Information about motor cable
cross−section was updated
13167298 5.0 10/2006 TD23 Revision for software version 4.0
Complete editorial revision and fault
correction
Division of the System Manual into 2 parts
(EDSVS9332K and EDSVS9332K−EXT)
Technical data supplemented by
circuit−breaker specifications for EVS9321
and EVS9322
Error correction
Editorial revision and fault correction
00412939 2.0 02/2000 − Revision for software version 2.0
Editorial revision
00403216 1.0 09/1998 − First edition
1.1−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Legal regulations 1.2
Identification Lenze controllers are unambiguously identified by the contents of the

nameplate.
Manufacturer Lenze Automation GmbH, Hans−Lenze−Str. 1, D−31855 Aerzen, Germany
CE conformity In conformity with EC "Low Voltage" Directive
Application as directed 9300 servo controllers and accessories

ƒ may only be operated under the conditions specified in this System
Manual.
ƒ are components
– for open and closed loop control of variable speed drives with PM
synchronous motors, asynchronous standard motors or asynchronous
servo motors.
– for installation in a machine.
– for assembly with other components to form a machine.
ƒ comply with the protection requirements of the EC "Low Voltage"
Directive.
ƒ are not machines for the purpose of the EC "Machinery" Directive.
ƒ are not to be used as domestic appliances, but only for industrial
purposes.
Drive systems with 9300 servo controllers
ƒ comply with the EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" Directive if they
are installed according to the guidelines of CE−typical drive systems.
ƒ can be used
– for operation on public and non−public mains supplies.
– for operation in industrial premises and residential and commercial
areas.
ƒ The user is responsible for the compliance of the machine application
with the EC Directives.
Any other use shall be deemed inappropriate!
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 1.2−1

Liability The information, data and notes given in this System Manual met the state
of the art at the time of printing. Claims on modifications referring to
controllers and components which have already been supplied cannot be
derived from the information, illustrations and descriptions contained in
this manual.
The procedural notes and circuit details given in this System Manual are
suggestions and their transferability to the respective application has to be
checked. Lenze does not take any responsibility for the suitability of the
given procedures and circuit suggestions.
The specifications given in this System Manual describe the product features
without guaranteeing them.
Lenze does not accept any liability for damage and malfunctioning caused
by:
ƒ Disregarding the System Manual
ƒ Unauthorised modifications to the controller
ƒ Operating faults
ƒ Improper working on and with the controller
Warranty See terms of sales and delivery of Lenze Automation GmbH.
Warranty claims must be made to Lenze immediately after detecting the
deficiency or fault.
The warranty is void in all cases where liability claims cannot be made.
1.2−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Conventions used 1.3
This documentation uses the following conventions to distinguish between

different types of information:
Spelling of numbers
Decimal separator language−depen In each case, the signs typical for
dent the target language are used as
decimal separators.
For example: 1234.56 or 1234,56
Warnings
UL warnings
UR warnings
Text
For example: »Engineer«, »Global
Drive Control« (GDC)
Icons
Page reference Reference to another page with
Documentation reference Reference to another
documentation with additional
information
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 1.3−1

Notes used 1.4
1.4 Notes used
The following pictographs and signal words are used in this documentation
to indicate dangers and important information:
Safety instructions Structure of safety instructions:
Danger!
Note
(describes the danger and gives information about how to
prevent dangerous situations)

Danger of personal injury through dangerous
electrical voltage.
Danger of personal injury through a general source of

danger.
Reference to a possible danger that may result in
Stop! property damage if the corresponding measures are
not taken.
Application notes Pictograph and signal word Meaning
Special safety instructions Pictograph and signal word Meaning

and application notes for UL
and UR Safety or application note for the operation of a

UL−approved device in UL−approved systems.
not taken.
Safety or application note for the operation of a

UR−approved device in UL−approved systems.
not taken.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 1.4−1

Contents
Contents

2.2.1 Forced ventilated or naturally ventilated motors . . . . . . . . . 2.2−2
2.2.2 Self−ventilated motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2−3
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 2−1

Scope The following general safety instructions apply to all Lenze drive and
automation components.
The product−specific safety and application notes given in this
documentation must be observed!
Note for UL−approved systems: UL warnings are notes which only apply to
UL systems. The documentation contains specific notes with regard to UL.
For your own safety
Danger!
Disregarding the following basic safety measures may lead to
severe personal injury and damage to material assets!
ƒ Lenze drive and automation components ...
... must only be used for the intended purpose.
... must never be operated if damaged.
... must never be subjected to technical modifications.
... must never be operated unless completely assembled.
... must never be operated without the covers/guards.
... can − depending on their degree of protection − have live, movable or
rotating parts during or after operation. Surfaces can be hot.
ƒ All specifications of the corresponding enclosed documentation must
be observed.
This is vital for a safe and trouble−free operation and for achieving the
specified product features.
The procedural notes and circuit details provided in this document are
proposals which the user must check for suitability for his application.
The manufacturer does not accept any liability for the suitability of the
specified procedures and circuit proposals.
ƒ Only qualified skilled personnel are permitted to work with or on Lenze
drive and automation components.
According to IEC 60364 or CENELEC HD 384, these are persons ...
... who are familiar with the installation, assembly, commissioning and
operation of the product,
... possess the appropriate qualifications for their work,
... and are acquainted with and can apply all the accident prevent
regulations, directives and laws applicable at the place of use.
Transport, storage ƒ Transport and storage in a dry, low−vibration environment without
aggressive atmosphere; preferably in the packaging provided by the
manufacturer.
– Protect against dust and shocks.
– Comply with climatic conditions according to the technical data.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 2.1−1

Mechanical installation ƒ Install the product according to the regulations of the corresponding
documentation. In particular observe the section "Operating
conditions" in the chapter "Technical data".
ƒ Provide for a careful handling and avoid mechanical overload. During
handling neither bend components, nor change the insulation
distances.
ƒ The product contains electrostatic sensitive devices which can easily be
damaged by short circuit or static discharge (ESD). Thus, electronic
components and contacts must not be touched unless ESD measures
are taken beforehand.
Electrical installation ƒ Carry out the electrical installation according to the relevant
regulations (e. g. cable cross−sections, fusing, connection to the PE
conductor). Additional notes are included in the documentation.
ƒ When working on live products, observe the applicable national
regulations for the prevention of accidents (e.g. BGV 3).
ƒ The documentation contains information about EMC−compliant
installation (shielding, earthing, arrangement of filters and laying
cables). The system or machine manufacturer is responsible for
compliance with the limit values required by EMC legislation.
Warning: The controllers are products which can be used in category C2
drive systems as per EN 61800−3. These products may cause radio
interference in residential areas. If this happens, the operator may need
to take appropriate action.
ƒ For compliance with the limit values for radio interference emission at
the site of installation, the components − if specified in the technical
data − have to be mounted in housings (e. g. control cabinets). The
housings have to enable an EMC−compliant installation. In particular
observe that for example control cabinet doors preferably have a
circumferential metallic connection to the housing. Reduce openings or
cutouts through the housing to a minimum.
ƒ Only plug in or remove pluggable terminals in the deenergised state!
Commissioning ƒ If required, you have to equip the system with additional monitoring
and protective devices in accordance with the respective valid safety
regulations (e. g. law on technical equipment, regulations for the
prevention of accidents).
ƒ Before commissioning remove transport locking devices and keep them
for later transports.
Operation ƒ Keep all protective covers and doors closed during operation.
Safety functions ƒ Without a higher−level safety system, the described product must
neither be used for the protection of machines nor persons.
ƒ Certain controller versions support safety functions (e.g. "Safe torque
off", formerly "Safe standstill").
The notes on the safety functions provided in the documentation of the
versions must be observed.
2.1−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Maintenance and servicing ƒ The components are maintenance−free if the required operating
conditions are observed.
ƒ If the cooling air is polluted, the cooling surfaces may be contaminated
or the air vents may be blocked. Under these operating conditions, the
cooling surfaces and air vents must be cleaned at regular intervals.
Never use sharp objects for this purpose!
ƒ Only replace defective fuses in the deenergised state to the type
specified.
ƒ After the system has been disconnected from the supply voltage, live
components and power connections must not be touched immediately
because capacitors may be charged. Please observe the corresponding
notes on the device.
Disposal ƒ Recycle metals and plastic materials. Ensure professional disposal of

assembled PCBs.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 2.1−3

Note!
currents.
switched.
threshold of 100 %.
Note!
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 2.2−1



I2xt load
ȡ ȣ IMot
Ir
t + * (t) lnȧ1 * z)1
ȧ t
ǒ Ǔ
Ȣ Ȥ
I Mot
100
C0127 (OC8)

load of the motor
(Display: C0066)
ǒI I Ǔ ǒ1 * e Ǔ
2
Mot *t
N
L(t) + L Start
in C0120 (OC6) or C0127 (OC8).
diagram
120
100
50
0 t [s]
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
9300STD105
thresholds
T Time
2.2−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Self−ventilated motors 2.2.2

ventilated motors.
Warnings!
C0129/x.

1.1
1.0
1 C0129/2
0.9
3
0.8
2
0.7
0.6
0 C0129/1
0 n / nN
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
0.132
9300STD350

EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 2.2−3

I2xt load
lnȧ1 * ȧ
T + * (t)
ǒ Ǔ
2
Ȣ Ȥ
I Mot
100
C0127 (OC8)
100% * C0129ń1 n
C0129ń2

load of the motor
(Display: C0066)
2
L(t) + 100% t
L(t) + L Start
Ǹ
t
e *t
in C0120 (OC6) or C0127 (OC8).
2.2−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Residual hazards 2.3
Protection of persons ƒ According to their enclosure, Lenze controllers (frequency inverters,

servo inverters, DC speed controllers) and their components can carry a
voltage, or parts of the controllers can move or rotate during operation.
Surfaces can be hot.
– If the required cover is removed, the controllers are used
inappropriately or installed or operated incorrectly, severe damage to
persons or material assets can occur.
– For more detailed information please see the documentation.
ƒ There is a high amount of energy within the controller. Therefore
always wear personal protective equipment (body protection,
headgear, eye protection, ear protection, hand guard) when working on
the controller when it is live.
ƒ Before working on the controller, check if no voltage is applied to the
power terminals.
– the power terminals U, V, W, +UG and −UG still carry dangerous
voltage for at least 3 minutes after power−off.
– the power terminals L1, L2, L3; U, V, W, +UG and −UG carry dangerous
voltage when the motor is stopped.
ƒ Before power−off during DC−bus operation, all controllers must be
inhibited and disconnected from the mains.
ƒ The discharge current to PE potential is > 3.5 mA. In accordance with
EN 61800−5−1
– the design of the PE conductor has to be double or, in the case of a
single design, must have a cable cross−section of at least 10 mm2.
ƒ The controller can only be safely disconnected from the mains via a
contactor on the input side.
ƒ During parameter set transfer the control terminals of the controller
can have undefined states.
– Therefore the connectors X5 and X6 must be disconnected from the
controller before the transfer takes place. This ensures that the
controller is inhibited and all control terminals have the defined state
"LOW".
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 2.3−1

ƒ Controllers can cause a DC current in the PE conductor. If a residual

current device (RCD) or a fault current monitoring unit (RCM) is used
for protection in the case of direct or indirect contact, only one
RCD/RCM of the following type can be used on the current supply side:
– Type B for the connection to a three−phase system
– Type A or type B for the connection to a single phase system
isolation from the environment by means of double or reinforced
insulation, or isolation from the supply system by using a transformer.
Device protection ƒ Frequent mains switching (e.g. inching mode via mains contactor) can
controller:
the devices EVS9321−xK and EVS9322−xK.
devices EVS9323−xK ... EVS9332−xK.
Motor protection ƒ For some controller settings, the connected motor may overheat (e.g.
when operating the DC injection brake or a self−ventilated motor at
low speed for longer periods).
– Using an overcurrent relay or a temperature monitoring device
provides a large degree of protection against overload.
– We recommend to use PTC thermistors or thermal contacts for motor
temperature monitoring. (Lenze three−phase AC motors are equipped
with thermal contacts (NC contacts) as standard)
– PTC thermistors or thermal contacts can be connected to the
controller.
ƒ Drives can attain dangerous overspeeds (e.g. setting of high output
frequencies with motors and machines not qualified for this purpose).
2.3−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Safety instructions for the installation according to UL 2.4
Warnings!
– For information on the protection level of the internal
overload protection for a motor load, see the corresponding
manuals or software helps.
– If the integral solid state motor overload protection is not
used, external or remote overload protection must be
provided.
– The integral solid state protection does not provide branch
circuit protection.
– Branch circuit protection has to be provided externally in
accordance with corresponding instructions, the National
Electrical Code and any additional codes.
ƒ Please observe the specifications for fuses and
screw−tightening torques in these instructions.
ƒ EVS9321 EVS9326:
when protected by CC, J, T or R class fuses.
ƒ EVS9327 EVS9329:
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 2.4−3

ƒ EVS9330 EVS9332:
2.4−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Technical data 3
Contents
3 Technical data
Contents

3.3 Rated data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3−1
3.3.1 Operation at 400 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3−1
3.3.2 Operation at 480 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3−2
3.3.3 Overcurrent operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3−4
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 3−1

Technical data 3
General data and operating conditions 3.1
General data Conformity and approval

Conformity
CE 2006/95/EC Low−Voltage Directive
2004/108/EG EMC Directive
Approval
UL cULus Power Conversion Equipment (File No. E132659)
Protection of persons and equipment

Type of protection EN 60529 IP20
IP41 in case of thermally separated installation
(push−through technique) between the control
cabinet (inside) and the environment.
NEMA 250 Protection against accidental contact in accordance
with type 1
Earth leakage current IEC/EN 61800−5−1 > 3.5 mA Observe regulations and
safety instructions!
Insulation of control EN 61800−5−1 Safe mains isolation by double (reinforced)
circuits insulation for terminals X1 and X5.
Basic insulation (single isolating distance) for
terminals X3, X4, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10 and X11.
Insulation resistance IEC/EN 61800−5−1 < 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category III
> 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category II
Protective measures Against short circuit, earth fault (earth−fault
protected during mains connection, limited
earth−fault protection during operation),
overvoltage, motor overtemperature (input for PTC
or thermal contact)
EMC
Noise emission IEC/EN 61800−3 Cable−guided, up to 10 m motor cable length with
mains filter A: category C2.
Radiation, with mains filter A and installation in
control cabinet: category C2
Interference IEC/EN 61800−3 Category C3
immunity
Operating conditions Ambient conditions

Climatic
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +55 °C) < 6 months
1K3 (−25 ... +40 °C) > 6 months
> 2 years: anodise DC bus
capacitors
Operation
EVS9321 ... IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (0 ... +55 °C)
2.5 %/°C.
EVS9327 ... 3K3 (0 ... +50 °C)
2.5 %/°C.
Pollution EN 61800−5−1 Degree of pollution 2
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 3.1−1

3 Technical data
Ambient conditions
Site altitude < 4000 m amsl
> 1000 m amsl: reduce the rated output current by
5 %/ 1000 m
Mechanical
Vibration resistance EN 50178 Tested according to "General Vibration Stress
EN 61800−5−1 Characteristic 1"
Germanischer
Lloyd, general
conditions
Electrical
AC−mains
connection
Max. mains 320 V − 0 % ... 528 V + 0 %
voltage range
Mains frequency 45 Hz − 0 % ... 65 Hz + 0 %
Power system TT, Operation permitted without restrictions with
TN earthed neutral.
Power system IT Operation only permitted with the device variants
V024 or V100.
Operation permitted without restrictions with
insulated neutral.
Observe instructions on specific measures!
Operation on EN 61000−3−2 Limitation of harmonic currents
public supply Total output at the Compliance with the
systems mains requirements 1)
< 1 kW With mains choke.
> 1 kW Without additional
measures.
1) The additional measures mentioned have the effect that solely
the controllers meet the requirements of EN 61000−3−2. The
machine/system manufacturer is responsible for the compliance
with the requirements for the machine/system!
DC−mains
connection
Max. mains 450 V − 0 % ... 740 V + 0 %
voltage range
Operating DC voltage must be symmetrical to PE.
conditions The controller will be destroyed when +UG or −UG
are earthed.
Motor connection
Length of the < 50 m
motor cable No additional output filters are required at a rated
mains voltage and a switching frequency of 8 kHz.
If EMC requirements have to be met, the
permissible cable length may be affected.
Mounting conditions
Mounting place In the control cabinet
Mounting position Vertical
Free spaces 4−1
Dimensions
Weights
3.1−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Technical data 3
Open and closed loop control 3.2
3.2 Open and closed loop control
Open and closed loopcontrol

Switching frequency 8 kHz or 16 kHz
Digital setpoint
selection
Accuracy ± 0.005 Hz (= ± 100 ppm)
Analog setpoint
selection
Linearity ± 0.15 % Signal level: 5 V or 10 V
Temperature ± 0.1 % 0 ... 50 °C
sensitivity
Offset ± 0.1 %
Analog inputs l 2 inputs (bipolar)
Analog outputs l 2 outputs (bipolar)
Digital inputs l 5 inputs (freely assignable)
Digital outputs l 1 input for controller inhibit
l 4 outputs (freely assignable)
l 1 resolver input; design: 9−pole Sub−D socket
l 1 incremental encoder input (500 kHz, TTL level); design: 9−pole Sub−D socket (pin)
l 1 digital frequency input (500 kHz, TTL level); design: 9−pole Sub−D socket (pin); can be optionally
used as incremental encoder input (500 kHz, TTL level)
l 1 digital frequency output (500 kHz, TTL level); design: 9−pole Sub−D socket
Cycle times
Digital inputs 1 ms
Digital outputs 1 ms
Analog inputs 1 ms
Analog outputs 1 ms (smoothing time: t= 2 ms)
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 3.2−1

Technical data 3
Rated data 3.3
3.3 Rated data
Note!
The controllers EVS9324, EVS9326 and EVS9328 EVS9333 may
only be operated with the prescribed mains chokes and mains
filters.
Basis of the data

Voltage Frequency
d]
(alternatively)
Output voltage
U, V, W +UG, −UG 3)
EVS9321−xK 1.5 2.1 0.37 0.5 1.0 2.0 100
EVS9322−xK 2.5 3.5 0.75 1.0 1.7 0.75 110
EVS9323−xK 3.9 5.5 1.5 2.0 2.7 2.2 140
EVS9324−xK 7.0 ˘ 3.0 4.0 4.8 0.75 200
EVS9325−xK 12.0 16.8 5.5 7.5 9.0 0 260
EVS9326−xK 20.5 ˘ 11.0 15.0 16.3 0 390
EVS9327−xK 27.0 43.5 15.0 20.0 22.2 10 430
EVS9328−xK 44.0 ˘ 22.0 30.0 32.6 4 640
EVS9329−xK 53.0 ˘ 30.0 40.0 40.9 0 810
EVS9330−xK 78.0 ˘ 45.0 60.0 61.6 5 1100
EVS9331−xK 100 ˘ 55.0 75.0 76.2 0 1470
EVS9332−xK 135 ˘ 75.0 100 100.5 0 1960
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 3.3−1

3 Technical data
3.3 Rated data

8 kHz 1) 16 kHz 1)
EVS9321−xK 1.5 2.25 2.3 1.1 1.65 1.7
EVS9322−xK 2.5 3.75 3.8 1.8 2.7 2.7
EVS9323−xK 3.9 5.85 5.9 2.9 4.35 4.4
EVS9324−xK 7.0 10.5 10.5 5.2 7.8 7.8
EVS9325−xK 13.0 19.5 19.5 9.7 14.6 14.6
EVS9326−xK 23.5 35.3 23.5 15.3 23.0 15.3
EVS9327−xK 32.0 48.0 32.0 20.8 31.2 20.8
EVS9328−xK 47.0 70.5 47.0 30.6 45.9 30.6
EVS9329−xK 59.0 88.5 52.0 38.0 57.0 33.0
EVS9330−xK 89.0 133.5 80.0 58.0 87.0 45.0
EVS9331−xK 110 165 110 70.0 105 70.0
EVS9332−xK 145 21.5 126 90.0 135 72.0
Basis of the data

Voltage Frequency
Supply
3/PE 480 V AC [Ur] 320 V − 0 % ... 528 V + 0 % 45 Hz − 0 % ... 65 Hz + 0 %
Output voltage
3.3−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Technical data 3
Rated data 3.3
U, V, W +UG, −UG 3)
EVS9321−xK 1.5 2.1 0.37 0.5 1.2 2.0 100
EVS9322−xK 2.5 3.5 0.75 1.0 2.1 0.75 110
EVS9323−xK 3.9 5.5 1.5 2.0 3.2 2.2 140
EVS9324−xK 7.0 ˘ 3.0 4.0 5.8 0.75 200
EVS9325−xK 12.0 16.8 5.5 7.5 10.8 0 260
EVS9326−xK 20.5 ˘ 11.0 15.0 18.5 0 390
EVS9327−xK 27.0 43.5 18.5 25.0 25.0 12 430
EVS9328−xK 44.0 ˘ 30.0 40.0 37.0 4.8 640
EVS9329−xK 53.0 ˘ 37.0 50.0 46.6 0 810
EVS9330−xK 78.0 ˘ 45.0 60.0 69.8 6 1100
EVS9331−xK 100 ˘ 55.0 75.0 87.3 0 1470
EVS9332−xK 135 ˘ 90.0 125 104 6 1960

8 kHz 1) 16 kHz 1)
EVS9321−xK 1.5 2.25 2.3 1.1 1.65 1.7
EVS9322−xK 2.5 3.75 3.8 1.8 2.7 2.7
EVS9323−xK 3.9 5.85 5.9 2.9 4.35 4.4
EVS9324−xK 7.0 10.5 10.5 5.2 7.8 7.8
EVS9325−xK 13.0 19.5 19.5 9.7 14.6 14.6
EVS9326−xK 22.3 33.5 22.3 14.5 21.8 14.5
EVS9327−xK 30.4 45.6 30.4 19.2 28.8 19.2
EVS9328−xK 44.7 67.1 44.7 28.2 42.3 28.2
EVS9329−xK 56.0 84.0 49.0 35.0 52.5 25.0
EVS9330−xK 84.0 126 72.0 55.0 82.5 36.0
EVS9331−xK 105 157.5 105 65.0 97.5 58.0
EVS9332−xK 125 187.5 111 80.0 120 58.0
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 3.3−3

3 Technical data
3.3 Rated data
Under the operating conditions described here, the

EVS9321−xK ... EVS9324−xK controllers can supply a rated output current
which is up to twice as high.
Note!
If you enter values > 1.5 × rated output current under C0022, the
controller switches to overcurrent operation.
ƒ Switching between overcurrent operation and standard
operation is only possible if the controller is inhibited
(X5/28 = LOW).
ƒ The continuous current is automatically reduced to 70 % of
the rated output current.

Basis of the data
Voltage Frequency
d]
(alternatively)
Output voltage
U, V, W +UG, −UG 3)
EVS9321−xK 1.5 2.1 0.37 0.5 1.0 2.0 100
EVS9322−xK 2.5 3.5 0.75 1.0 1.7 0.75 110
EVS9323−xK 3.9 5.5 1.5 2.0 2.7 2.2 140
EVS9324−xK 7.0 ˘ 3.0 4.0 4.8 0.75 200
3.3−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Technical data 3
Rated data 3.3
Overcurrent operation 3.3.3

8 kHz 1) 16 kHz 1)
EVS9321−xK 1.5 1.05 3.0 3.0 1.1 0.77 2.2 2.2
EVS9322−xK 2.5 1.75 5.0 5.0 1.8 1.26 3.6 3.6
EVS9323−xK 3.9 2.73 7.8 7.8 2.9 2.03 5.8 5.8
EVS9324−xK 7.0 4.9 14.0 14.0 5.2 3.64 10.4 10.4

Basis of the data
Voltage Frequency
Supply
3/PE 480 V AC [Ur] 320 V − 0 % ... 528 V + 0 % 45 Hz − 0 % ... 65 Hz + 0 %
Output voltage
U, V, W +UG, −UG 3)
EVS9321−xK 1.5 2.1 0.37 0.5 1.2 2.0 100
EVS9322−xK 2.5 3.5 0.75 1.0 2.1 0.75 110
EVS9323−xK 3.9 5.5 1.5 2.0 3.2 2.2 140
EVS9324−xK 7.0 ˘ 3.0 4.0 5.8 0.75 200

8 kHz 1) 16 kHz 1)
EVS9321−xK 1.5 1.05 3.0 3.0 1.1 0.77 2.2 2.2
EVS9322−xK 2.5 1.75 5.0 5.0 1.8 1.26 3.6 3.6
EVS9323−xK 3.9 2.73 7.8 7.8 2.9 2.03 5.8 5.8
EVS9324−xK 7.0 4.9 14.0 14.0 5.2 3.64 10.4 10.4
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 3.3−5

Technical data 3
Current characteristics 3.4
3.4 Current characteristics
The maximum output current of the EVS9326 ... EVS9332 devices is limited
under certain operating conditions:
ƒ At output frequencies fout < |5 Hz| and heatsink temperatures
JK > 40° C.
ƒ The current limitation depends on the switching frequency.
0 1
IOUT K < 40 °C
IOUT
Imax Imax
K = 80 °C
I0max I0max
0 0
0 5 fout [Hz] 0 5 fout [Hz]
9300vec132
Fig. 3.4−1 Current derating characteristics

The current limitation follows the characteristic curve
At output frequencies fout < |5 Hz| and heatsink temperatures
JK = 40 ... 80 °C, the current limit is steplessly adjusted in the range
The current limitation follows the characteristic curve and is independent of
the heatsink temperature
At automatic change−over of the switching frequency (C0018 = 0), the controller
operates at fchop = 16 kHz. The current limitation follows the characteristic
curve .
If an increased torque is required (e.g. acceleration processes), the controller
automatically switches over to fchop = 8 kHz. The current limitation follows the
characteristic curve .
9300 I0max [A] 1) I0max [A] 2)

fchop = 8 kHz fchop = 16 kHz
Umains Umains
400 V 480 V 400 V 480 V
EVS9326−xK 23.5 22.3 15.3 14.5
EVS9327−xK 32.0 30.4 20.8 19.2
EVS9328−xK 47.0 44.7 30.6 28.2
EVS9329−xK 52.0 49.0 33.0 25.0
EVS9330−xK 80.0 72.0 45.0 36.0
EVS9331−xK 110 105 70.0 58.0
EVS9332−xK 126 111 72.0 58.0
1) Maximum available output current at an output frequency fout = |0 Hz| and heatsink temperature
JK = 80 °C
2) Maximum available output current at an output frequency fout = |0 Hz|
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 3.4−1

Contents
4 Installation of the standard device
Contents

4.1.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1−1
4.2.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2−1
4.3.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3−1
4.4.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4−1
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 4−1


Type EVS93xx−EK EVS93xx−CK
[kg] [kg]
EVS9321−xK 4.0 3.1
EVS9322−xK 4.0 3.1
EVS9323−xK 5.5 3.9
EVS9324−xK 5.5 3.9
EVS9325−xK 7.4 5.2
EVS9326−xK 7.4 5.2
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 4.1−1


EVS9321−EK ... EVS9325−EK
EVS9324−EK EVS9326−EK
Fixing rails Drive controller fixing 2 4
Dimensions
0 1 2
L L ³ 100mm
b1 d b b1 d b
³ 100mm
c c1 c
g
a a e
9300std062
Fig. 4.1−1 Standard mounting with fixing rails 0.37 ... 11 kW


Type a b b1 c c1 d d1 e 1) g k
EVS9321−EK
78 384 350 39 − 365 ˘ 250 6.5 30
EVS9322−EK
EVS9323−EK
97 384 350 48.5 − 365 ˘ 250 6.5 30
EVS9324−EK
EVS9325−EK
135 384 350 21.5 92 365 ˘ 250 6.5 30
EVS9326−EK
Mounting ƒ Attach the fixing rails to the housing of the drive controller.
4.1−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

For mounting in push−through technique you have to use the controller type
EVS93xx−EK. Additionally you will require the mounting set for
push−through technique:
Type Mounting set
EVS9321−EK, EVS9322−EK EJ0036
Dimensions
0 1
L L
d1 d1
d b1 b d b1 b
g g
d1 d1
c c f
a1 a1 e
c1 c1
a a
9300std063
Fig. 4.1−2 Dimensions for thermally separated mounting 0.37 ... 11 kW

Type a a1 b b1 c c1 d d1 e 1) f g
EVS9321−EK
112.5 78 385.5 350 60 95.5 365.5 105.5 250 92 6.5
EVS9322−EK
EVS9323−EK
131.5 97 385.5 350 79 114.5 365.5 105.5 250 92 6.5
EVS9324−EK
EVS9325−EK
169.5 135 385.5 350 117 152.5 365.5 105.5 250 92 6.5
EVS9326−EK

cabinet
Type Width Height
EVS9321−EK
82 350
EVS9322−EK
EVS9323−EK
101 350
EVS9324−EK
EVS9325−EK
139 350
EVS9326−EK
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 4.1−3


collective coolers. For this purpose, the drive controllers of type EVS93xx−CKx
must be used.
EVS9321−CK EVS9323−CK EVS9325−CK
EVS9322−CK EVS9324−CK EVS9326−CK
Fixing bracket Controller fixing 2 2 2
Sheet metal screw Mounting the fixing 6 6 6
3.5 × 13 mm (DIN 7981) bracket to the controller
coolers controller:
9300 Cooling path
EVS9321−CK 24 1.45
EVS9322−CK 42 0.85
EVS9323−CK 61 0.57
EVS9324−CK 105 0.33
EVS9325−CK 180 0.19
EVS9326−CK 360 0.10
4.1−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Dimensions
0 1 2 3
L L L
b1 d b b1 d b b1 d b
< 75 °C
g g c1 g
c c c e
a a a
9300std064
Fig. 4.1−3 Dimensions for mounting in "cold plate" technique 0.37 ... 11 kW

Type a b b1 c c1 d e 1) g
EVS9321−CK
78 381 350 48 ˘ 367 168 6.5
EVS9322−CK
EVS9323−CK
97 381 350 67 ˘ 367 168 6.5
EVS9324−CK
EVS9325−CK
135 381 350 105 38 367 168 6.5
EVS9326−CK
low as possible.
1. Fasten the fixing bracket with sheet metal screws 3.5 × 13 mm at the
top and bottom of the drive controller .
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 4.1−5


9300vec113

[kg] [kg]
EVS9327−xK 13.5 9.5
EVS9328−xK 15.0 9.5
EVS9329−xK 15.0 ˘
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 4.2−1


Raised countersunk head screw Mounting of fixing bracket to the drive 4
Dimensions
0 ³ 100mm
L
d b1 b
³ 100mm
k
g
c1 c
d1 a e m
9300std065


EVS9327−EK
EVS9328−EK 250 402 350 22 206 370 24 250 6.5 24 11
EVS9329−EK
4.2−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013


EVS93xx−EKx must be used. In addition, the mounting set EJ0011 for the
Dimensions a
a1
L
d2
b1
d3
d
b
d2
d1
c1 g e1
h
h c2 e
c3
9300std066

Type a a1 b b1 c1 c2 c3 d d1 d2 d3 e 1) e1 g h
EVS9327−EK
EVS9328−EK 279.5 250 379.5 350 19 131 243 361.5 32 100 97 250 159.5 6 9
EVS9329−EK

cabinet
Type Width Height
EVS9327−EK
EVS9328−EK 236 336
EVS9329−EK
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 4.2−3


collective coolers. For this purpose, the drive controllers of type EVS93xx−CKx
must be used.
coolers controller:
9300 Cooling path
EVS9327−CK 410 0.085
EVS9328−CK 610 0.057
4.2−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Dimensions
L
b1
d
b
< 75 °C
g e
c
c1
a
a1
9300std067
Fig. 4.2−3 Dimensions for mounting in "cold plate" technique 15 ... 22 kW

Type a a1 b b1 c c1 d e 1) g
EVS9327−CK
234 250 381 350 110 220 367 171 6.5
EVS9328−CK
low as possible.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 4.2−5


9300vec113

[kg] [kg]
EVS9330−xK 38.0 ˘
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 4.3−1


Hexagon head cap screw Mounting of fixing bracket to the drive 4
Dimensions
0
³ 100 mm
³ 50 mm ³ 50 mm
l
d
b1
³ 100mm
b
k
g
m
d1
e
c c1
a
9300std068
Fig. 4.3−1 Standard mounting with fixing brackets 45 kW

bolts

EVS9330−EK 340 580 591 28.5 283 615 38 285 11 28 18
4.3−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013


Dimensions a e2
a1
d3
e3
L
d2
b1
d2
d
b
d2
d1
c1 g
e1
h
h c2
e
c3
c4
9300std069
Fig. 4.3−2 Dimensions for thermally separated mounting 45 kW

Type a a1 b b1 c1 c2 c3 c4 d d d2 d e e1 e2 e g h
1 3 1) 3
37 34 54 59 4 137. 217. 31 52 4 14 8 28 163. 18 6
EVS9330−EK 7 9
3 0 3 1 5 5 5 0 5 5 5 1 5 5 5 6

cabinet
Type Width Height
EVS9330−EK 320 515
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 4.3−3

For thermally separated mounting the fan module has to be rotated by 180°
so that the controller fits into the mounting cutout.
Removing the fan module
9300vec170
Fig. 4.3−3 Removing the fan module from the controller
1. Remove both screws.

The screws connect the fans to the supply voltage.
2. Remove the 4 screws for fixing the fan module on each side.
3. Pull back the fan module and carefully remove it to the top.
may break off.
Modifying the threaded
sleeves on the fan module
9300vec171
Fig. 4.3−4 Modifying the threaded sleeves for the voltage supply of the fans
1. Remove the threaded sleeves.

2. Screw−in the threaded sleeves on the opposite side and fasten them.
4.3−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Modification of the fan module for push−through technique 4.3.4
Plugging the fan connecting

cable to another terminal on
the fan module
9300vec173
Fig. 4.3−5 Plugging the fan connecting cable for the voltage supply to another terminal
1. Remove the cable lugs of the two red connecting cables and plug them
in again on the diagonally arranged side.
2. Remove the cable lugs of the two blue connecting cables and plug
them in again on the diagonally arranged side.
Mounting the fan module in a
manner rotated by 180°
9300vec172
Fig. 4.3−6 Mounting the fan module on the controller
1. Place the fan module onto the controller. Insert the lugs at the back
into the base plate .
may break off.
2. Push the fan module to the front.
3. Screw−in and fasten the 4 screws for fixing the fan module on each
side.
4. Screw−in and fasten the two screws for the supply voltage.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 4.3−5


9300vec113

[kg] [kg]
EVS9331−xK 59.0 ˘
EVS9332−xK 59.0 ˘
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 4.4−1


Hexagon head cap screw For fixing bracket 8
M8 × 16 mm (DIN 933)
Dimensions
0
³ 100mm
³ 50mm ³ 50mm
³ 100mm
d
b1
k
g
m
d1
c c1 e
a
9300std070

bolts

EVS9331−EK
450 750 680 28.5 393 702 38 285 11 28 18
EVS9332−EK
4.4−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013


Dimensions a
a1
d2
b1
d2
d
b
d2
d1
c1 g e1
h
h c2 e
c3
c4
9300std071

Typ a a1 b b1 c1 c2 c3 c4 d d1 d2 e 1) e1 g h
EVS9331−EK
488 450 718 680 49 172.5 295.5 419 698 49 200 285 164 9 10
EVS9332−EK

cabinet
Type a1 b1
EVS9331−EK
428.5 660
EVS9332−EK
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 4.4−3

Contents
Contents
5.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−1

5.1.2 Device protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−3
5.2.2 Operation on public supply systems (compliance with EN 61000−3−2) . .
5.2−1
5.2.4 Operation at earth−leakage circuit breaker (e.l.c.b.) . . . . . . . 5.2−3
5.2.6 Discharge current for mobile systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−4
5.2.10 Motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−8
5.3.1 Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−1
5.3.3 Motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−1
5.3.4 Control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−3
5.4.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4−3
5.5.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5−3
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5−1

Contents

5.6.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6−3
5.7.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7−3
5.8.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8−1
5.8.5 State bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8−8
5.8.6 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8−9
5.8.7 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8−10
5.10.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10−1
5.10.2 Resolver at X7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10−2
5.11 Wiring of digital frequency input / digital frequency output ...... 5.11−1
5.12 Communication modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12−1
5−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Important notes 5.1
Protection of persons 5.1.1
5.1 Important notes
Stop!
The drive controller contains electrostatically sensitive
components.
The personnel must be free of electrostatic charge when carrying
out assembly and service operations.
Danger!
Before working on the controller, check that all power terminals
are deenergised:
ƒ The power terminals U, V, W, +UG and −UG remain live for at
least 3 minutes after disconnection from the mains.
ƒ The power terminals L1, L2, L3, U, V, W, +UG and −UG remain
live when the motor is stopped.
Pluggable terminal strips Connect or disconnect all pluggable terminals only in the deenergised state!
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.1−1

5.1 Important notes
Electrical isolation The terminals X1 and X5 have double (reinforced) insulation according to
EN50178. The protection against accidental contact is ensured without
additional measured being taken.
Danger!
ƒ The terminals X3, X4, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10, X11 have basic
insulation (single isolating distance).
ƒ In the event of a defective isolating distance, protection
against accidental contact can only be guaranteed by taking
external measures such as double insulation.
ƒ If an external DC 24 V voltage source is used, the insulation
degree of the controller depends on the insulation degree of
the voltage source.
24 VDC
L1
N
59 39 A1 A2 A3 A4 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 ST1 ST2 28 X5 X1
L1
L2
L3
+UG
-UG
PE
PE X3 X4 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 X11
9300std084
Fig. 5.1−1 Electrical isolation between power terminals, control terminals and housing
Double (reinforced) insulation
Basic insulation
Replacing defective fuses Only replace defective fuses in the deenergised state to the type specified.
Disconnecting the controller Only carry out the safety−related disconnection of the controller from the
from the mains mains via a contactor on the input side or a manually operated toggle switch.
5.1−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Important notes 5.1
Device protection 5.1.2
5.1.2 Device protection
ƒ In the event of condensation, only connect the controller to the mains

voltage after the humidity has evaporated.
ƒ The controller is protected by external fuses.
ƒ Drive controllers EVS9324−xK, EVS9326−xK and
EVS9328−xK ... EVS9332−xK must only be operated with assigned mains
choke / mains filter.
ƒ Length of the screws for connecting the shield sheet for the control
cables: 12 mm.
ƒ Provide unused control inputs and outputs with terminal strips. Cover
unused Sub−D sockets with protective covers included in the scope of
supply.
ƒ Switching on the motor side of the controller is only permissible for
safety shutdown (emergency−off).
ƒ Frequent mains switching (e.g. inching mode via mains contactor) can
controller:
the devices EVS9321−xK and EVS9322−xK.
devices EVS9323−xK ... EVS9332−xK.
5.1.3 Motor protection
ƒ Extensive protection against overload:

– By overcurrent relays or temperature monitoring.
– We recommend the use of PTC thermistors or thermostats to monitor
the motor temperature.
– PTC thermistors or thermostats can be connected to the controller.
– For monitoring the motor, we recommend the use of the I2xt
monitoring.
ƒ Only use motors with an insulation suitable for the inverter operation:
– Insulation resistance: min. û = 1.5 kV, min. du/dt = 5 kV/ms
– When using motors with an unknown insulation resistance, please
contact your motor supplier.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.1−3

Supply forms / electrical supply conditions 5.2.1
5.2.1 Supply forms / electrical supply conditions
Observe the restrictions for the different supply forms!

Supply system Operation of controller Notes
Supply system: TT, Permitted without restrictions. l Observe the rated data of the
TN controller
(with earthed l RMS mains current: see chapter
neutral) "Technical data".
Supply system: IT Possible if the controller is l Safe operation in the event of an
(with isolated protected in the event of an earth earth fault at the inverter output
neutral) fault in the supply system cannot be guaranteed.
l by means of suitable devices l The variants V024 / V104 and
which detect the earth fault and V100 enable operation of the
l immediately separate the controller on IT systems.
controller from the supply
system.
DC supply via Permitted if the DC voltage is Earthing of the +UG or −UG
+UG/−UG symmetrical to PE. conductor will destroy the
controller.
5.2.2 Operation on public supply systems (compliance with EN 61000−3−2)
European standard EN 61000−3−2 defines limit values for the limitation of

harmonic currents in the supply system. Non−linear consumers (e.g.
frequency inverters) generate harmonic currents which "pollute" the
supplying mains and may therefore interfere with other consumers. The
standard aims at assuring the quality of public supply systems and reducing
the mains load.
Note!
The standard only applies to public systems. Mains which are
provided with a transformer substation of their own as in
industrial plants are not public and not included in the
application range of the standard.
If a device or machine consists of several components, the limit
values of the standard apply to the entire unit.
Measures for compliance with With the measures described, the controllers comply with the limit values
the standard according to EN 61000−3−2.
Operation on public EN 61000−3−2 Limitation of harmonic currents
supply systems Total power on the Compliance with the requirements 1)
mains
< 1 kW With mains choke
> 1 kW No measures required
1) The additional measures mentioned have the effect that solely the controllers meet the
requirements of EN 61000−3−2. The machine/system manufacturer is responsible for the
compliance with the requirements for the machine/system!
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.2−1

Controllers in the V024, V104 or V100 variants are suitable for operation on
insulated supply systems (IT systems). The controllers also have an insulated
design. This avoids the activation of the insulation monitoring, even if
several controllers are installed.
The electric strength of the controllers is increased so that damage to the
controller are avoided if insulation or earth faults in the supply system occur.
The operational reliability of the system remains intact.
Stop!
Only operate the controllers with the mains chokes assigned.
Operation with mains filters or RFI filters by Lenze is not
permitted, as these modules contain components that are
interconnected against PE. By this the protective design of the IT
system would be cancelled out. The components are destroyed
in the case of an earth fault.
Protect the IT system against earth fault at the controller.
Due to physical conditions, an earth fault on the motor side at
the controller can interfere with or damage other devices on the
same IT system. Therefore appropriate measures have to be
implemented, by means of which the earth fault is detected and
which disconnect the controller from the mains.
Permissible supply forms and Mains Operation of the controllers Notes

electrical supply conditions
With isolated star Possible, if the controller is Safe operation in the event of an
point (IT systems) protected in the event of an earth earth fault at the inverter output
fault in the supplying mains. cannot be guaranteed.
l Possible, if appropriate earth
fault detections are available
and
l the controller is immediately
disconnected from the mains.
DC−bus operation of several Central supply with 9340 regenerative power supply module is not possible.
drives
Installation of the CE−typical For the installation of drives on IT systems, the same conditions apply as for
drive system
the installation on systems with an earthed neutral point.
According to the binding EMC product standard EN61800−3, no limit values
are defined for IT systems for noise emission in the high−frequency range.
5.2−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Operation at earth−leakage circuit breaker (e.l.c.b.) 5.2.4
5.2.4 Operation at earth−leakage circuit breaker (e.l.c.b.)
Danger!
The controllers are internally fitted with a mains rectifier. In case
of a short circuit to frame a pulsating DC residual current can
prevent the AC sensitive or pulse current sensitive earth−leakage
circuit breakers from being activated, thus cancelling the
protective function for the entire equipment being operated on
this earth−leakage circuit breaker.
ƒ For the protection of persons and farm animals (DIN VDE 0100), we
recommend
– pulse current sensitive earth−leakage circuit breakers for plants
including controllers with a single−phase mains connection (L1/N).
– universal−current sensitive earth−leakage circuit breakers for plants
including controllers with a three−phase mains connection (L1/L2/L3).
ƒ Only install the earth−leakage circuit breaker between supplying mains
and drive controller.
ƒ Earth−leakage circuit breakers may trigger a false alarm due to
– capacitive compensation currents flowing in the cable shields during
operation (particularly with long, shielded motor cables),
– simultaneous connection of several inverters to the mains
– the use of additional interference filters.
5.2.5 Interaction with compensation equipment
ƒ Controllers only consume very little reactive power of the fundamental

wave from the AC supply mains. Therefore, a compensation is not
required.
ƒ If the controllers are connected to a supply system with compensation
equipment, this equipment must comprise chokes.
– For this, contact the supplier of the compensation equipment.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.2−3

Frequency inverters with internal or external RFI filters usually have a

discharge current to PE potential that is higher than 3.5 mA AC or 10 mA DC.
Therefore, fixed installation as protection is required (see EN 61800−5−1).
This must be indicated in the operational documents.
If a fixed installation is not possible for a mobile consumer although the
discharge current to PE potential is higher than 3.5 mA AC or 10 mA DC, an
additional two−winding transformer (isolating transformer) can be included
in the current supply as a suitable countermeasure. Here, the PE conductor
is connected to the PEs of the drive (filter, inverter, motor, shieldings) and
also to one of the poles of the secondary winding of the isolating
transformer.
Devices with a three−phase supply must have a corresponding isolating
transformer with a secondary star connection, the star point being
connected to the PE conductor.
filter inverter
L1
L1 L2 L
U
prim.
sec.
M
V 3~
W
N1 N2 N
N
PE
8200vec017
Fig. 5.2−1 Installation of a two−winding transformer (isolating transformer)
5.2−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Optimisation of the controller and mains load 5.2.7
5.2.7 Optimisation of the controller and mains load
A mains choke is an inductance which can be included in the mains cable of

the frequency inverter. As a result, the load of the supplying mains and the
controller is optimised:
ƒ Reduced system perturbation: The curved shape of the mains current
approaches a sinusoidal shape.
ƒ Reduced mains current: The effective mains current is reduced, i.e. the
mains, cable, and fuse loads are reduced.
ƒ Increased service life of the controller: The electrolytic capacitors in the
DC bus have a considerably increased service life due to the reduced AC
current load.
There are no restrictions for the combinations of mains chokes and RFI filters
Note!
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.2−5

Due to internal switching operations, every controller causes noise

emissions which may interfere with the functions of other consumers.
Depending on the site of the frequency inverter, European standard
EN 61800−3 defines limit values for these noise emissions:
Limit class C2: Limit class C2 is often required for industrial mains which are
isolated from the mains of residential areas.
Limit class C1: If the controller is operated in a residential area, it may
interfere with other devices such as radio and television receivers. Here,
interference suppression measures according to limit class C1 are often
required.
Limit class C1 is much more strict than limit class C2. Limit class C1 includes
limit class C2.
For compliance with limit class C1 / C2, corresponding measures for the
limitation of noise emissions are required, e.g. the use of RFI filters.
There are no restrictions for the combinations of RFI filters and mains chokes
The selection of the frequency inverter and the corresponding filters, if
applicable, always depends on the application in question and is determined
by e.g. the switching frequency of the controller, the motor cable length, or
the protective circuit (e.g. earth−leakage circuit breakers).
Note!
The graphics below illustrates the maximum possible motor cable length
based on the type of filter and the resulting interference voltage category
according to EN 61800−3. Depending on the used motor cable, the used
controller, and its switching frequency, the mentioned maximum motor
cable lengths may vary.
5.2−6 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

C2
E82ZZxxxxxB230 1)
E82ZNxxxxxB230 1)
EZN3A... (³ 15 kW)
EZN3A... (£ 11 kW)
5 10 20 30 40 50 lmot [m]
C1
EZN3B...
E82ZNxxxxxB230 1)
10 20 30 40 50 lmot [m]
9300vec060
Fig. 5.2−2 Maximum motor cable lengths lmot based on the type of filter for compliance with
limit class C2 / C1
1) Use low−capacitance cables
Component Component
EVS9321−xK EZN3A2400H002 EZN3A2400H002 5 EZN3B2400H002 50
EVS9326−xK ELN3−0150H024−001 EZN3A0150H024 5 EZN3B0150H024 50
EVS9327−xK ELN3−0088H035−001 EZN3A0110H030 25 E82ZN22334B230 10
E82ZZ15334B230 1) 10
E82ZN22334B230 50 EZN3B0110H030U 2) 50
E82ZZ15334B230 1) 50
EVS9328−xK ELN3−0075H045 EZN3A0080H042 25 E82ZN22334B230 10
E82ZN22334B230 50 EZN3B0080H042 50
E82ZN30334B230 50 EZN3B0055H060 50
EVS9330−xK ELN3−0038H085 EZN3A0030H110 25 EZN3B0030H110 50
EZN3A0030H110N001 3) 25
E82ZN55334B230 50
E82ZN75334B230 50 EZN3B0022H150 50
E82ZN75334B230 50 EZN3B0022H150 50
1) RFI filter
2) Footprint filter
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.2−7

5.2.10 Motor cable
5.2.10 Motor cable
Specification ƒ The used motor cables must

– meet the requirements on site (e.g. EN 60204−1, UL),
– comply with the following voltage data: EN 0.6/1 kV, UL 600 V.
ƒ For shielded motor cables, only use cables with braid made of tinned or
nickel−plated copper. Shields made of steel braid are not suitable.
angle of 90°.
ƒ Use low−capacitance motor cables:
Power class Capacitance per unit length
Core/core Core/shield
3 ... 11 kW from 2.5 mm2 £100 pF/m £ 150 pF/m
15 ... 30 kW £ 140 pF/m £ 230 pF/m
45 ... 55 kW £ 190 pF/m £ 320 pF/m
75 ... 90 kW £ 250 pF/m £ 410 pF/m
Cable length 9300 Maximum permissible motor cable length

Ur = 400 V Ur = 480 V
Type fchop = 8 kHz fchop = 16 kHz fchop = 8 kHz fchop = 16 kHz
EVS9321−xK, 50 m 45 m 50 m 25 m
EVS9322−xK
EVS9323−xK ... 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m
EVS9332−xK
Note!
ƒ The motor cable must be as short as possible for having a
positive effect on the drive behaviour.
ƒ If EMC requirements must be met, the permissible cable
length may be affected.
ƒ EVS9321−xKand EVS9322−xK: At a mains voltage of 480 V and
a switching frequency fchop = 16 kHz, the maximum
permissible cable length is reduced if the motor cable has
more than a single core:
– The following holds true for two parallel single cores:
lmax = 17 m
– The following holds true for three parallel single cores:
lmax = 9 m
5.2−8 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Motor cable 5.2.10
Cable cross−section
Note!
The cable cross−sections have been assigned to the permissible
current loading of the motor cables under the following
conditions:
ƒ Compliance with IEC/EN 60204−1 for fixed cable installation
ƒ Compliance with IEC 60354−2−52, table A.52−5 when using the
cable in a trailing cable
ƒ Laying system C
ƒ Ambient temperature 45 °C
ƒ Continuous motor operation at a
– standstill current I0 for servo motors or a
– rated current IR for three−phase asynchronous motors
The user is responsible for selecting a motor cable which
complies with the requirements of the current conditions if
different situations arise. Different situations may arise due to:
ƒ Laws, standards, national and regional regulations
ƒ Type of application
ƒ Motor utilisation
ƒ Ambient and operating conditions
ƒ Laying system and bundling of cables
ƒ Cable type
Motor cable
permanently installed for trailing cable Cable cross−section
IM [A] IM [A] [mm2] [AWG]
10.0 11.8 1.0 18
13.8 17.3 1.5 16
19.1 23.7 2.5 14
25.5 30.9 4.0 12
32.8 41.0 6.0 10
45.5 55.5 10 8
60.1 75.5 16 6
76.4 92.8 25 4
94.6 115 35 2
114 140 50 1
146 179 70 00
177 217 95 000
205 252 120 0000
Note!
Information on the design of the motor cable is provided in the
"System cables and system connectors" manual.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.2−9

Shielding 5.3.1
5.3.1 Shielding
The quality of shielding is determined by a good shield connection:

ƒ Connect the shield with a large surface.
ƒ Connect the shield directly to the intended shield sheet of the device.
ƒ In addition, connect the shield to the conductive and earthed mounting
plate with a large contact surface by using a conductive clamp.
ƒ Unshielded cable ends must be as short as possible.
ƒ Controllers, mains chokes, or mains filters may only be connected to

the mains via unshielded single cores or unshielded cables.
ƒ When a mains filter or RFI filter is used, shield the cable between mains
filter or RFI filter and controller if its length exceeds 300 mm.
Unshielded cores must be twisted.
ƒ In DC−bus operation or DC supply, use shielded cables.
ƒ The cable cross−section must be dimensioned for the assigned fusing
(observe national and regional regulations).
5.3.3 Motor cable
ƒ Only use shielded motor cables with braids made of tinned or

nickel−plated copper. Shields made of steel braids are not suitable.
angle of 90 °.
ƒ The cables used must correspond to the requirements at the location
(e.g. EN 60204−1).
ƒ Shield the cable for motor temperature monitoring (PTC or thermal
contact) and install it separately from the motor cable.
– In Lenze system cables, the cable for brake control is integrated into
the motor cable. If this cable is not required for brake control, it can
also be used to connect the motor temperature monitoring up to a
length of 50 m.
ƒ Connect the shield with a large surface and fix it with metal cable
binders or a conductive clamp.
ƒ Connect the shield directly to the corresponding device shield sheet.
– If required, additionally connect the shield to the conductive and
earthed mounting plate in the control cabinet.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.3−1

5.3.3 Motor cable
ƒ The motor cable is optimally installed if

– it only crosses mains cables and control cables at right angles,
– it is not interrupted.
ƒ If the motor cable must be opened all the same (e.g. due to chokes,
contactors, or terminals):
– The unshielded cable ends may not be longer than 100 mm
(depending on the cable cross−section).
– Install chokes, contactors, terminals etc. spatially separated from
other components (with a min. distance of 100 mm).
– Install the shield of the motor cable directly before and behind the
point of separation to the mounting plate with a large surface.
ƒ Connect the shield with a large surface to PE in the terminal box of the
motor at the motor housing.
– Metal EMC cable glands at the motor terminal box ensure a large
surface connection of the shield with the motor housing.
Motor supply cable Cable gland
Motor supply cable
max. 500mm Cable gland
Braid
Heat-shrinkable tube
Large-surface Cable gland acc. to EMC with
contact of high degree of protection
cable shield
8200EMV023 8200EMV024
Fig. 5.3−1 Shielding of the motor cable
5.3−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Control cables 5.3.4
5.3.4 Control cables
ƒ Control cables must be shielded to minimise interference injections.

ƒ For lengths of 200 mm and more, use only shielded cables for analog
and digital inputs and outputs. Under 200 mm, unshielded but twisted
cables may be used.
ƒ Connect the shield correctly:
– The shield connections of the control cables must be at a distance of
at least 50 mm from the shield connections of the motor cables and
DC cables.
ƒ To achieve an optimum shielding effect (in case of very long cables,
with high interference) one shield end of analog input and output
cables can be connected to PE potential via a capacitor (e.g.
10 nF/250 V) (see sketch).
9300vec043
Fig. 5.3−2 Shielding of long, analog control cables
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.3−3

Mounting plate requirements ƒ Only use mounting plates with conductive surfaces (zinc−coated or
V2A−steel).
ƒ Painted mounting plates are not suitable even if the paint is removed
from the contact surfaces.
ƒ If several mounting plates are used, ensure a large−surface connection
between the mounting plates (e.g. by using earthing strips).
Mounting of the components ƒ Connect controllers, filters, and chokes to the earthed mounting plate
with a surface as large as possible.
Optimum cable routing ƒ The motor cable is optimally installed if
– it crosses mains cables and control cables at right angles.
ƒ Always install cables close to the mounting plate (reference potential),
as freely suspended cables act like aerials.
ƒ Lead the cables to the terminals in a straight line (avoid tangles of
cables).
ƒ Use separated cable channels for motor cables and control cables. Do
not mix up different cable types in one cable channel.
ƒ Minimise coupling capacities and coupling inductances by avoiding
unnecessary cable lengths and reserve loops.
ƒ Short−circuit unused cores to the reference potential.
ƒ Install the positive and negative wires for DC 24 V close to each other
over the entire length to avoid loops.
Earth connections ƒ Connect all components (drive controllers, chokes, filters) to a central
earthing point (PE rail).
ƒ Set up a star−shape earthing system.
ƒ Comply with the corresponding minimum cable cross−sections.
5.3−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Wiring outside of the control cabinet 5.3.6
5.3.6 Wiring outside of the control cabinet
Notes for cable routing outside the control cabinet:

ƒ The longer the cables the greater the space between the cables must
be.
ƒ If cables for different signal types are routed in parallel, the
interferences can be minimized by means of a metal barrier or
separated cable ducts.
Cover
Barrier without
opening
Signal cables Power cables

EMVallg001
Fig. 5.3−3 Cable routing in the cable duct with barrier
Cover
Communication cables
Cable duct
Measuring cables
Analog cables
Control cables
Power cables
EMVallg002
Fig. 5.3−4 Cable routing in separated cable ducts
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.3−5

Fault Cause Remedy

Interferences of Unshielded motor cable Use shielded motor cable
analog setpoints of Shield contact is not extensive Carry out optimal shielding as
your own or other enough specified
devices and
measuring systems Shield of the motor cable is l Separate components from
interrupted by terminal strips, other component part with a
switched, etc. minimum distance of 100 mm
l Use motor choke/motor filter
Install additional unshielded Install and shield additional cables
cables inside the motor cable (e.g. separately
for motor temperature
monitoring)
Too long and unshielded cable Shorten unshielded cable ends to
ends of the motor cable maximally 40 mm
Conducted Terminal strips for the motor Spatially separate the terminal
interference level is cable are directly located next to strips for the motor cable from
exceeded on the the mains terminals main terminals and other control
supply side terminals with a minimum
distance of 100 mm
Mounting plate varnished Optimise PE connection:
l Remove varnish
l Use zinc−coated mounting
plate
HF short circuit Check cable routing
5.3−6 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013


Note!
according to EMC"!
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.4−1

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 … F3
K10
PE S2
Z2 S1 K10
PE L1 L2 L3
IN1 PES PES X11 X4

IN2 K31 HI
Z1
IN3 K32 LO
IN4 33 GND
34 X6 PES
63
PES PES X5 7
28 62
E1 7
E2 4
E3
3
EVS9321 …
E4 2
E5
EVS9332 1
+ ST1 PES
DC 24 V
ST2
– X7
PES
39
A1 X8
A2
A3 X9
A4
PES PES 59 X10
K10
PE
PES X7/8 PES PES
X7/9
PES PES PES

KTY
RB
J>
PES PES PES PES JRB
PE M PE M
3~ 3~ 9351
Z3
9300std072

F1 ... F3 Fuses
K10 Mains contactor
5.4−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

To gain access to the power connections, remove the covers:

ƒ Release the cover for the mains connection with slight pressure on the
front and pull it off to the top.
ƒ Release the cover for the motor connection with slight pressure on the
front and pull it off to the bottom.
Shield connection support Support of the shield sheets for the supply 2
cable and motor cable
Hexagon nut M5 Fastening of shield connection supports 4
Spring washer Æ 5 mm (DIN 127) 2
Serrated lock washer Æ 5.3 mm 2
(DIN 125)
Shield sheet Shield connections for supply cables, motor 2
cable
Screw and washer assembly Fastening of shield sheets 4
M4 × 10 mm (DIN 6900)
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.4−3

Note!
shielded DC cables.
Stop!
0
1 8
2
3 7
4
5
6 a 4
7
M6 2
M5 0
a 1.7 Nm
}+
15 lb-in L1 L2 L3 +UG -UG
PE
PE
M5
PE 3.4 Nm
30 lb-in
9300vec130
PE stud
Slide on washer
5.4−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Mains connection, DC supply 5.4.3
Mains connection, DC supply 0

1
2
L1 L2 L3 +UG -UG
PE
L1, L2, L3 0.5...0.6 Nm

+UG, -UG 4.4...5.3 lb-in
9300std033
Fig. 5.4−3 Mains connection, DC supply for drive controllers 0.37 ... 11 kW
Mains cable
Shield sheet
Securely clamp mains cable with the lugs
L1, L2, L3: Connection of mains cable
Cable cross−sections up to 4 mm2: Use wire end ferrules for flexible cables
Cable cross−sections > 4 mm2: Use pin−end connectors
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.4−5


with EN 60204−1
Range Description
and controller.

B2 C
EVS9321−xK 6 C6, B6 2) 1 1
EVS9322−xK 6 C6, B6 2) 1 1
300
EVS9323−xK 10 B10 1.5 1
EVS9325−xK 25 B20 4 2.5
EVS9321−xK 6 C6, B6 2) 1 1
EVS9322−xK 6 C6, B6 2) 1 1
EVS9323−xK 10 B10 1.5 1
300
EVS9324−xK 10 B10 1.5 1
EVS9325−xK 20 B16 2.5 2.5
EVS9326−xK 32 B25 ˘ 4
2) For short−time mains interruptions, use circuit breakers with tripping characteristic "C"
5.4−6 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013


Range Description
Fuses l Only in accordance with UL 248
l System short−circuit current up to 5000 Arms : All classes are permissible
l System short−circuit current up to 50000 Arms : Only classes "CC", "J", "T" or
"R" permissible
conditions:

Fuse L1, L2, L3, PE
Type [A] [AWG]
EVS9321−xK 6 18
EVS9322−xK 6 18
EVS9323−xK 10 16
EVS9325−xK 25 10
EVS9321−xK 6 18
EVS9322−xK 6 18
EVS9323−xK 10 16
EVS9324−xK 10 16
EVS9325−xK 25 10
EVS9326−xK 25 10
Max. connection cross−section of the terminal strip: AWG 12, with pin−end connector AWG 10
Component Component
EVS9326−xK ELN3−0150H024−001 EZN3A0150H024 5 EZN3B0150H024 50
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.4−7

Note!
Stop!
0 M5
1 PE 3.4 Nm
2
3 30 lb-in
4
5
6
7
a
1.7 Nm
T1T2
PE
}+ PE
M6 15 lb-in U V W
M5 0
a 2
4
7
8
9300vec128
PE stud
Slide on washer
5.4−8 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

controller.
Danger!
thermal contact.
15 V
2.7 k
7.4 k
3.3 k
MONIT-OH8
PES PES
PES PES
J>
PES
PE M
3~
9300vec139
contact) at T1, T2

Terminals T1, T2
DIN 44081 and DIN 44082)
l PTC: RJ> 1600 W
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.4−9


2 3 2 3
U, V, W PE U, V, W PE
0.5...0.6 Nm T1 T2 0.5...0.6 Nm T1 T2
T1, T2 4.4...5.3 lb-in T1, T2 4.4...5.3 lb-in
U V W U V W
1 1
0 0
9300std011
Shield sheet
cable tie.
Shield sheet
cable tie.
U, V, W
> 4 mm2

sensor
Note!
twisted in pairs.
5.4−10 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

X7 X7/8
X7/9
X8 X8/8
X8/5
X9
PES
X10
PES
PES
PES
KTY
PES
PE M
3~
9300std073

EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.4−11

U, V, W PE
0.5...0.6 Nm T1T2
T1, T2 4.4...5.3 lb-in
U V W
1
0
9300vec122

Motor cable
Shield sheet
cable tie.
U, V, W
> 4 mm2
5.4−12 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013


Note!
according to EMC"!
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.5−1

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 … F3
K10
PE S2
Z2 S1 K10
PE L1 L2 L3
IN1 PES PES X11 X4

IN2 K31 HI
Z1
IN3 K32 LO
IN4 33 GND
34 X6 PES
63
PES PES X5 7
28 62
E1 7
E2 4
E3
3
EVS9321 …
E4 2
E5
EVS9332 1
+ ST1 PES
DC 24 V
ST2
– X7
PES
39
A1 X8
A2
A3 X9
A4
PES PES 59 X10
K10
PE
PES X7/8 PES PES
X7/9
PES PES PES

KTY
RB
J>
PES PES PES PES JRB
PE M PE M
3~ 3~ 9351
Z3
9300std072

F1 ... F3 Fuses
K10 Mains contactor
5.5−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013


9300vec113

Hexagon nut M6 (DIN 934) Connection of supply cables (mains, +UG, −UG) 10
and motor cable to the stud bolts
Washer Æ 6 mm (DIN 125) For hexagon nut M6 10
Spring washer Æ 6 mm (DIN 127) For hexagon nut M6 10
Grommet Motor cable 1
Shield connection support Support of the shield sheet for motor cable 1
Self−tapping screw Æ 4 × 14 mm Fastening of shield connection support 2
Shield sheet Shield connection for motor cable 1
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.5−3

Note!
shielded DC cables.
0 1 2
}+ PE L1, L2, L3
+UG, -UG
PE
M6
5 Nm
44 lb-in
PE +UG L1 L2 L3 -UG
3
9300std034
Fig. 5.5−2 Mains connection, DC supply for drive controllers 15 ... 30 kW

PE stud
Conductive surface
Shield clamp
5.5−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013


with EN 60204−1
Range Description
and controller.

B2 C
EVS9327−xK 63 — 16 16 300
EVS9327−xK 40 — 10 10
EVS9328−xK 63 — 25 16 300
EVS9329−xK 80 — — 25
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.5−5


Range Description
permissible
conditions:

Fuse L1, L2, L3, PE
Type [A] [AWG]
EVS9327−xK 35 8
EVS9328−xK 60 4
EVS9329−xK 80 4
Component Component
EVS9327−xK ELN3−0088H035−001 EZN3A0110H030 25 E82ZN22334B230 10
E82ZZ15334B230 1) 10
E82ZN22334B230 50 EZN3B0110H030U 2) 50
E82ZZ15334B230 1) 50
E82ZN22334B230 50 EZN3B0080H042 50
E82ZN30334B230 50 EZN3B0055H060 50
1) RFI filter
2) Footprint filter
5.5−6 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Note!
Stop!
Do not use lugs as strain relief.
PE
T1 U V W
T2
3.4 Nm
a a 30 lb-in
0
9300vec131
Fig. 5.5−3 Installation of shield sheet for drive controllers 15 ... 30 kW

Fasten the shield sheet with two self−tapping screws Æ 4 × 14 mm (a)
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.5−7

controller.
Danger!
thermal contact.
15 V
2.7 k
7.4 k
3.3 k
MONIT-OH8
PES PES
PES PES
J>
PES
PE M
3~
9300vec139
contact) at T1, T2

Terminals T1, T2
DIN 44081 and DIN 44082)
l PTC: RJ> 1600 W
5.5−8 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013


2 2
T1
T2
2.5 Nm
22,1 lb-in
}+ PE
3 T1
T2
2.5 Nm
22,1 lb-in
PE PE
4 T1 U V W
4 T1
}+ PE
T2 T2
1 1
0 M6 0
U, V, W,
5 Nm
PE
44 lb-in
9300std030
Shield sheet
cable tie.
Shield sheet
cable tie.
PE stud
U, V, W
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.5−9


sensor
Note!
twisted in pairs.
X7 X7/8
X7/9
X8 X8/8
X8/5
X9
PES
X10
PES
PES
PES
KTY
PES
PE M
3~
9300std073

5.5−10 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

}+ PE
3
PE
T1 U V W
1 T2
M6
0 U, V, W,
5 Nm
PE
44 lb-in
9300vec123

Motor cable
Shield connection
cable tie.
PE stud
U, V, W
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.5−11


Note!
according to EMC"!
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.6−1

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 … F3
K10
PE S2
Z2 S1 K10
PE L1 L2 L3
IN1 PES PES X11 X4

IN2 K31 HI
Z1
IN3 K32 LO
IN4 33 GND
34 X6 PES
63
PES PES X5 7
28 62
E1 7
E2 4
E3
3
EVS9321 …
E4 2
E5
EVS9332 1
+ ST1 PES
DC 24 V
ST2
– X7
PES
39
A1 X8
A2
A3 X9
A4
PES PES 59 X10
K10
PE
PES X7/8 PES PES
X7/9
PES PES PES

KTY
RB
J>
PES PES PES PES JRB
PE M PE M
3~ 3~ 9351
Z3
9300std072

F1 ... F3 Fuses
K10 Mains contactor
5.6−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013


9300vec113

EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.6−3

Note!
shielded DC cables.
0 1 2
}+ PE L1, L2, L3
+UG, -UG
PE
M8
15 Nm
132 lb-in
PE +UG L1 L2 L3 -UG
3
9300vec126
Fig. 5.6−2 Mains connection, DC supply for 45 kW controller

PE stud
Conductive surface
Shield clamp
5.6−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013


with EN 60204−1
Range Description
and controller.

B2 C
EVS9330−xK 100 — — 35 300
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.6−5


Range Description
permissible
conditions:

Fuse L1, L2, L3, PE
Type [A] [AWG]
EVS9330−xK 100 1
Component Component
EVS9330−xK ELN3−0038H085 EZN3A0030H110 25 EZN3B0030H110 50
EZN3A0030H110N001 3) 25
E82ZN55334B230 50
5.6−6 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Note!
controller.
Danger!
thermal contact.
15 V
2.7 k
7.4 k
3.3 k
MONIT-OH8
PES PES
PES PES
J>
PES
PE M
3~
9300vec139
contact) at T1, T2
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.6−7


Terminals T1, T2
DIN 44081 and DIN 44082)
l PTC: RJ> 1600 W
}+
M8
PE U, V, W,
15 Nm 1
PE
132 lb-in
0
PE U V W
4
T1
T2
T1 2.5 Nm
T2 22.1 lb-in 2
3
M5 x 12
3 Nm (26.5 lb-in)
9300std031
PE stud
U, V, W
Shield clamps
Cable ties
5.6−8 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013


sensor
Note!
twisted in pairs.
X7 X7/8
X7/9
X8 X8/8
X8/5
X9
PES
X10
PES
PES
PES
KTY
PES
PE M
3~
9300std073

EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.6−9

}+ 1
M8
PE U, V, W,
PE 15 Nm
132 lb-in
0
PE U V W
T1
T2
2
3
M5 x 12
3 Nm (26.5 lb-in)
9300vec124

PE stud
U, V, W
Shield clamps
Cable ties
5.6−10 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013


Note!
according to EMC"!
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.7−1

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 … F3
K10
PE S2
Z2 S1 K10
PE L1 L2 L3
IN1 PES PES X11 X4

IN2 K31 HI
Z1
IN3 K32 LO
IN4 33 GND
34 X6 PES
63
PES PES X5 7
28 62
E1 7
E2 4
E3
3
EVS9321 …
E4 2
E5
EVS9332 1
+ ST1 PES
DC 24 V
ST2
– X7
PES
39
A1 X8
A2
A3 X9
A4
PES PES 59 X10
K10
PE
PES X7/8 PES PES
X7/9
PES PES PES

KTY
RB
J>
PES PES PES PES JRB
PE M PE M
3~ 3~ 9351
Z3
9300std072

F1 ... F3 Fuses
K10 Mains contactor
5.7−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013


9300vec113

EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.7−3

Note!
shielded DC cables.
0 1 2
}+ PE L1, L2, L3
+UG, -UG
PE
M10
30 Nm
264 lb-in
PE +UG L1 L2 L3 -UG
3
9300vec127
Fig. 5.7−2 Mains connection, DC supply for 55 ... 75 kW drive controller

PE stud
Conductive surface
Shield clamp
5.7−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013


with EN 60204−1
Range Description
and controller.

B2 C
EVS9331−xK 125 — — 35
300
EVS9332−xK 160 — — 70
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.7−5


Range Description
permissible
conditions:

Fuse L1, L2, L3, PE
Type [A] [AWG]
EVS9331−xK 125 1/0
EVS9332−xK 175 2/0
Component Component
E82ZN75334B230 50 EZN3B0022H150 50
E82ZN75334B230 50 EZN3B0022H150 50
5.7−6 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Note!
controller.
Danger!
thermal contact.
15 V
2.7 k
7.4 k
3.3 k
MONIT-OH8
PES PES
PES PES
J>
PES
PE M
3~
9300vec139
contact) at T1, T2
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.7−7


Terminals T1, T2
DIN 44081 and DIN 44082)
l PTC: RJ> 1600 W
0 1
}+
U, V, W, M10
PE 30 Nm
PE
264 lb-in
PE U V W
5
T1
T2 2
T1 2.5 Nm 3
T2 22.1 lb-in
4
M4 x 12: 2.5 Nm (22.1 lb-in)

M5 x 12: 3 Nm (26.5 lb-in)
9300std032
PE stud
U, V, W
Cable clamps for strain relief of motor cable
Fasten cable clamps with M4 × 12 mm screws
Shield clamps
Cable ties for additional strain relief of motor cable
5.7−8 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013


sensor
Note!
twisted in pairs.
X7 X7/8
X7/9
X8 X8/8
X8/5
X9
PES
X10
PES
PES
PES
KTY
PES
PE M
3~
9300std073

EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.7−9

}+ 1
M8
PE U, V, W,
PE 15 Nm
132 lb-in
0
PE U V W
T1
T2
2
3
M5 x 12
3 Nm (26.5 lb-in)
9300vec124

PE stud
U, V, W
Shield clamps
Cable ties
5.7−10 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Stop!
The control card will be damaged if
ƒ the voltage between X5/39 and PE or X6/7 and PE is greater
than 50 V,
ƒ the voltage between voltage source and X6/7 exceeds 10 V
(common mode) in case of supply via external voltage source.
Limit the voltage before switching on the drive controller:
ƒ Connect X5/39, X6/2, X6/4 and X6/7 directly to PE or
ƒ use voltage−limiting components.
ƒ For trouble−free operation, the control cables must be shielded:

– For lengths of 200 mm and more, use only shielded cables for analog
and digital inputs and outputs. Under 200 mm, unshielded but
twisted cables may be used.
Shield sheet Shield connection for control cables 1
Screw M4 × 10 mm (DIN 7985) Shield sheet fastening 1
Terminal strip, 4−pole Connection of safety relay KSR at X11 1
(only for variants V004 and V024)
Terminal strip, 7−pole Connection of digital inputs and outputs at 2
X5
Terminal strip, 4−pole Connection of analog inputs and outputs 2
at X6
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.8−1

How to connect the shield
0
2
9300vec129
Fig. 5.8−1 Connection of cable shield to shield sheet

Shield sheet
Fasten shield sheet with M4 × 10 mm screw at the bottom of the control
card
Securely clamp cable shield with lugs
Terminal data
Stop!
ƒ Connect or disconnect the terminal strips only if the controller
is disconnected from the mains!
ƒ Wire the terminal strips before connecting them!
ƒ Unused terminal strips must also be plugged on to protect the
contacts.
Cable type Wire end ferrule Maximum cable Tightening Stripping

cross−section torque length
Rigid — 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
Without wire end
ferrule
Wire end ferrule 0.5 ... 0.6 Nm
5 mm
Flexible without plastic 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14) (4.4 ... 5.3 lb−in)
sleeve
Wire end ferrule
with plastic sleeve
5.8−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Connection terminal of the control card 5.8.2
5.8.2 Connection terminal of the control card
X1
X3
59 ST2 ST1 A4 A3 A2 A1 GND LO HI

X4
39 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 28
1 X5
3 X6
2
4
62 7
63 7
X7
K31 K32 33 34
X11
X8
X9
X10
9300std085
Fig. 5.8−2 Connection terminal of the control card

2 light−emitting diodes (red, green) for status display
X1 Automation interface (AIF)
Slot for communication modules (e.g. keypad XT)
X3 Jumper for the preselection of the signal type for the input signal at X6/1,
X6/2
X4 System bus (CAN) connection, terminal strip
X5 Connection of digital inputs and outputs, terminal strips
X6 Connection of analog inputs and outputs, terminal strips
X7 Resolver connection
X8 Incremental encoder connection
X11 Connection of safety relay KSR, terminal strip
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.8−3

ƒ For the supply of the digital inputs (X5/E1 ... X5/E5) you have to set a
freely assignable digital output (e. g. X5/A1) permanently to HIGH
level.
to HIGH level.
GND2 +24V
1
2
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
100k
100k
100k
100k
3
X3 4
5 GND1 GND1
47k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
6 242R
3.3nF
AOUT2
AIN1 AIN2 AOUT1
S1
1 2 3 4 7 AOUTx
10k 10k
9300vec201
Fig. 5.8−3 Wiring of digital and analog inputs/outputs for internal voltage source
Z Load
GND2 +24V
1
2
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
100k
100k
100k
100k
3
X3 4
5 GND1 GND1
47k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
6 242R
3.3nF
AOUT2
AIN1 AIN2 AOUT1
S1
1 2 3 4 7 AOUTx
– + 10k 10k
DC 24 V
(+18 V … +30 V)
9300std077
Fig. 5.8−4 Wiring of digital and analog inputs/outputs for external voltage source
Z Load
5.8−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Safety instructions for the ƒ The installation and commissioning of the Safe torque off" function
installation of the "Safe
torque off" function
must be carried out by skilled personnel only.
feedback contact) outside the control cabinet must be protected, for
instance by a cable duct. Short circuits between the single cables must
be ruled out!
ƒ Wiring of the safety relay KSR with insulated wire end ferrules or rigid
cables is absolutely vital.
ƒ The electrical reference point for the coil of the safety relay KSR must be
connected with the protective conductor system (DIN EN 60204−1
paragraph 9.4.3). Only this measure guarantees that the operation is
protected against earth faults.
Tip!
A complete description can be found in the chapter "Safe torque
off".
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.8−5

ƒ If a freely assignable digital output (e. g. X5/A1) is fixedly applied to

HIGH level, it serves as an internal voltage source. An output can be
loaded with a maximum of 50 mA.
– Via a digital output you can supply the relay KSR and two digital
inputs (X5/28, and for instance X5/E1) with voltage.
– For the maximum connection (relay KSR and X5/E1 ... X5/E5) you have
to connect two digital outputs in parallel and fixedly apply them to
HIGH level.
to HIGH level.
+5 V GND2 +24V
1
2
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
+
100k
100k
100k
100k
3
X3 4
K SR 5 GND1 GND1
47k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
6 242R
3.3nF
AOUT2
DIGOUT4
AIN1 AIN2 AOUT1

S1 S2
1 2 3 4 7 AOUTx
10k 10k
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

Z1
9300vec135
and internal voltage source
ZLoad
Note!
If you load a basic configuration C0005 = xx1x (e.g. 1010 for
speed control with control via terminals), the following terminals
are switched to a fixed signal level:
ƒ Terminal X5/A1 to FIXED1 (corresponds to DC 24 V).
ƒ Terminal X6/63 to FIXED100% (corresponds to 10 V).
5.8−6 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

+5 V GND2 +24V
1
2
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
+
100k
100k
100k
100k
3
X3 4
K SR 5 GND1 GND1
47k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
6 242R
3.3nF
AOUT2
Z Z AIN1 AIN2 AOUT1
S1 S2 Z
1 2 3 4 7 AOUTx
– + 10k 10k
DC 24 V
(+18 V … +30 V)
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

Z1
9300std075
and external voltage source
ZLoad
Note!
Supplying the digital inputs via an external voltage source
enables a backup operation in the case of mains failure. After
switching off the mains voltage, all actual values are continued
to be detected and processed.
ƒ Connect the positive pole of the external voltage source with
X5/59 to establish the backup operation in the event of mains
failure.
ƒ The external voltage source must be able to supply a current
³ 1 A.
ƒ The starting current of the external voltage source is not
limited by the controller. Lenze recommends the use of
voltage sources with current limitation or with an internal
impedance of Z > 1 W.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.8−7

5.8.5 State bus
5.8.5 State bus
Stop!
Destruction of the control card!
External voltage at X5/ST1, X5/ST2 destroys the control card.
Protective measure:
Do not connect an external voltage to X5/ST1, X5/ST2.
GND2 +24V GND2 +24V GND2 +24V

50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
47k
47k
47k
X5 39 A1 A2 A3 A4 ST1 ST2 59 X5 39 A1 A2 A3 A4 ST1 ST2 59 X5 39 A1 A2 A3 A4 ST1 ST2 59
PES PES PES PES PES
9300std222
Fig. 5.8−7 Example for wiring a drive system to the STATE BUS
PES HF shield termination by large−surface connection to PE
5.8−8 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Terminal assignment 5.8.6
5.8.6 Terminal assignment
Analog input configuration Terminal Jumper strip Jumper setting Possible levels
X3
X6/1, 6 5 1−2 1) −10 V ... +10 V 1)
X6/2 4 3 3−4 −10 V ... +10 V
2 1 5−6 −20 mA ... +20 mA
1) Lenze setting (delivery state)
Non−configurable control Terminal Description Function Level / state

terminals
X11/K32 Safety relay KSR Pulse inhibit feedback Open contact: pulse
X11/K31 1st inhibit is inactive
disconnecting (operation)
path Closed contact:
X11/33 – coil of safety relay KSR Coil is not carrying
any current: pulse
inhibit is active
X11/34 + coil of safety relay KSR Coil is carrying
current: pulse inhibit
is inactive
(operation)
X5/28 Controller Controller enable/inhibit LOW: Controller
inhibit inhibited
(DCTRL−CINH) HIGH: Controller
2nd enabled
disconnecting
path
X5/ST1 STATE−BUS
X5/ST2
Configurable control Terminal Description Function Level

terminals (Lenze setting)
X5/E1 Digital inputs Deactivate quick stop/ CW rotation HIGH
X5/E2 Deactivate quick stop/ CCW rotation HIGH
X5/E3 Activate fixed frequency 1 HIGH
X5/E4 Set error message (TRIP set) LOW
X5/E5 Reset error message (TRIP reset) LOW−HIGH edge
X5/A1 Digital outputs Error message available LOW
X5/A2 Switching threshold QMIN: actual speed LOW
< setpoint speed in C0017
X5/A3 Ready for operation (DCTRL−RDY) HIGH
X5/A4 Maximum current reached (DCTRL−IMAX) HIGH
X6/1, Analog inputs Main speed setpoint −10 V ... +10 V
X6/2
X6/3, Additional speed setpoint −10 V ... +10 V
X6/4
X6/62 Analog outputs Actual speed value −10 V ... +10 V
X6/63 Torque setpoint −10 V ... +10 V
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.8−9

Safety relay KSR

X11/33
Digital inputs, digital outputs

X5/28 Controller inhibit PLC level, HTL LOW: 0 ... +3 V
(DCTRL−CINH) HIGH: +12 ... +30 V
2nd disconnecting path
X5/E1 Digital inputs PLC level, HTL LOW: 0 ... +3 V
X5/E2 HIGH: +12 ... +30 V
X5/E3 Input current per input 8 mA for +24 V
X5/E4
X5/E5 Cycle time 1 ms
X5/A1 Digital outputs PLC level, HTL LOW: 0 ... +3 V
X5/A2 HIGH: +12 ... +30 V
X5/A3 Load capacity per output Maximally 50 mA
X5/A4
Load resistance For +24 V at least 480 W
Cycle time 1 ms
X5/39 GND2 Reference potential for digital signals
X5/59 Connection of external Input voltage DC 24 V (+18 ... +30 V)
voltage source for backup
operation of the drive
controller in the case of Current consumption Maximally 1 A for 24 V
mains failure
X5/ST1 STATE−BUS Maximum number of nodes 20
X5/ST2 Maximum length of the bus cable 5m
5.8−10 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Technical data 5.8.7
Analog inputs, analog outputs

X6/2 Level −10 V ... +10 V
Current range
Level −20 mA ... +20 mA
Resolution 20 mA (10 Bit + sign)
X6/4 Level −10 V ... +10 V
X6/7 GND1 Reference potential for analog signals
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.8−11

Wiring of the system bus (CAN) 5.9
5.9 Wiring of the system bus (CAN)
Wiring
A1 A2 A3 An
93XX 93XX 93XX
X4 HI LO GND PE X4 HI LO GND PE X4 HI LO GND PE HI LO GND PE
120 120
9300VEC054
Fig. 5.9−1 System bus (CAN) wiring

An Bus device n (e. g. PLC), n = max. 63
X4/GND CAN−GND: System bus reference potential
X4/LO CAN−LOW: System bus LOW (data line)
X4/HI CAN−HIGH: System bus HIGH (data line)
Stop!
Connect a 120 W terminating resistor to the first and last bus
device.
We recommend the use of CAN cables in accordance with ISO 11898−2:
CAN cable in accordance with ISO 11898−2
Cable type Paired with shielding
Impedance 120 W (95 ... 140 W)
Cable resistance/cross−section
Cable length £ 300 m £ 70 mW/m / 0.25 0.34 mm2 (AWG22)
Cable length 301 1000 m £ 40 mW/m / 0.5 mm2 (AWG20)
Signal propagation delay £ 5 ns/m
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.9−1

The feedback signal can either be supplied via input X7 or via input X8.
– SinCos encoder
Note!
twisted in pairs.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.10−1


Resolver type recommended Receiver
Number of pole pairs of the 1
resolver
Transmission ratio 0.3
Evaluation method Voltage impression in the sine and cosine winding
Max. output voltage ± 10 V
Max. current consumption 50 mA per winding
Max. impedance [Z] 500 W per winding
Output frequency 4 kHz
Monitoring Monitoring for open circuit of the resolver and the resolver
cable (configurable)
Wiring
< 50 m
X7
+REF
1
-REF
2
3
+COS
4
-COS
5
+SIN
6
-SIN
7
+KTY
8
KTY -KTY
9
9300STD331
Fig. 5.10−1 Resolver connection

X7 − Resolver
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal +REF −REF GND +COS −COS +SIN −SIN +KTY −KTY
0.5 mm2 ˘ 0.14 mm2 (AWG 26)
(AWG 20)
5.10−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Incremental encoder with TTL level at X8 5.10.3

Connectable incremental encoder Incremental encoder with TTL level
l Encoder with two 5V complementary signals electrically offset by 90°
l Connection of zero track is possible (optional)
Input frequency 0 ... 500 kHz
Current consumption 6 mA per channel
(X8/4, X8/5)
Wiring
< 50 m
B X8
B
1
A
2
A
3
VCC
4
GND
5 A
Z A
6
Z B
KTY 7 B
+KTY
8 Z
-KTY
9 Z
9300VEC018
Fig. 5.10−2 Connection of incremental encoder with TTL level (RS−422)

X8 − Incremental encoder with TTL level

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal B A A VCC GND Z Z +KTY B
(−KTY)
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.10−3


Connectable SinCos encoders l SinCos encoders with a rated voltage from 5 V... 8 V.
l SinCos encoder of the company Stegmann with Hiperface®
interface, Stegmann type SCS/SCM (prolongs the
initialisation time of the controller to approx. 2 seconds)
Sine and cosine track voltage 1 Vss ±0.2 V
Voltage RefSIN and RefCOS +2.5 V
Internal resistance Ri 221 W
(X8/4, X8/5)
Wiring
l < 50 m
RefSIN X8
SIN
1
RefCOS
2
COS
3
VCC SIN
4
GND
5 RefSIN
0.5V
= 2.5 V
Z
6
Z COS
KTY 7
+KTY RefCOS = 2.5 V
8 0.5 V
-KTY
9
9300STD330
Fig. 5.10−3 SinCos encoder connection

X8 − SinCos encoder
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal SIN RefCOS COS VCC GND Z or Z or +KTY RefSIN
(−KTY) −RS485 +RS485
Note!
ƒ For encoders with tracks SIN, SIN, COS, COS:
– Assign RefSIN with SIN.
– Assign RefCOS with COS.
5.10−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Wiring of digital frequency input / digital frequency output 5.11

Technical data Field Digital frequency output X10

Pin assignment Dependent on the selected basic configuration
Output frequency 0 ... 500 kHz
Load capacity Max. 20 mA per channel
(up to 3 slave drives can be connected)
Special features The "Enable" output signal at X10/8 switches to LOW if the
drive controller is not ready for operation (e.g. disconnected
from mains). This can trip SD3 monitoring on the slave drive.
Internal voltage source DC 5 V / max. 50 mA
(X10/4, X10/5) Total current at X9/4, X9/5 and X10/4, X10/5: max. 200 mA
Field Digital frequency input X9

Input frequency 0 ... 500 kHz (TTL level)
Signal evaluation Via code C0427
Current consumption Max. 5 mA
Special features With activated SD3 monitoring, TRIP or warning is tripped if
the "Lamp Control" input signal at X9/8 switches to LOW.
Due to this the drive controller can respond if the master drive
is not ready for operation.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.11−1

Wiring
Note!
twisted in pairs.
< 50 m
X10 X9
B
B
1 1
A
2 2
A
3 3
4 4
5
GND
5
Z A
6 6 A
Z
7 7
B
Lamp
Enable (EN) 8 8 control (LC) B
9 9 Z
Z
9300VEC019
Fig. 5.11−1 Connection of digital frequency input (X9) / digital frequency output (X10)
X9 Slave drive Signals for CW rotation
X10 Master drive Cores twisted in pairs
X9 − Digital frequency input

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal B A A +5 V GND Z Z LC B
0.14 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.14 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.14 mm2
X10 − Digital frequency output

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal B A A +5 V GND Z Z EN B
0.14 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.14 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.14 mm2
Adjustment Evaluation of the input signals at X9

Code Function
CW rotation Track A leads track B by 90 ° (positive value at DFIN−OUT)

C0427 = 0
CCW rotation Track A lags track B by 90 ° (negative value at DFIN−OUT)
C0427 = 1
CW rotation Track A transmits the speed and direction of rotation (positive
Track B = LOW
C0427 = 2
CCW rotation Track B transmits the speed and direction of rotation (negative
Track A = LOW
5.11−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Communication modules 5.12
5.12 Communication modules
Further information ....

on wiring and application of communication modules can be
found in the corresponding Mounting Instructions and
Communication Manuals.
Possible communication Communication module Type/order number

modules
Keypad XT EMZ9371BC
LECOM−A/B (RS232/485) EMF2102IBV001
LECOM−B (RS485) EMF2102IBV002
LECOM−LI (optical fibre) EMF2102IBV003
LON EMF2141IB
INTERBUS EMF2113IB
INTERBUS Loop EMF2112IB
Handling Plug the communication module onto the AIF interface (X1) or pull it off from
the interface. The communication module can also be
connected/disconnected during operation.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 5.12−1

Commissioning 6
Contents
6 Commissioning
Contents
6.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1−1

6.5 Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−1
6.5.3 Entry of gearbox factors and feed constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−3
6.5.7 Motor temperature monitoring with KTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−16
6.6.1 Resolver at X7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6−1
6.7 Current controller adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7−1
6.8 Adjusting the rotor position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8−1
6.9.4 Free configuration of analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9−4
6.10 Generation of motion profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−1
6.10.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−1
6.10.2 Definition of data model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−1
6.10.3 Entry of basic motion profile data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−3
6.10.4 Profile data import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−3
6.10.5 Mathematical specification of profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−5
6.10.6 Saving of motion profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−6
6.10.7 Application example − generation of feed profiles . . . . . . . . 6.10−7
6.11 Transfer of motion profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11−1
6.11.1 Transfer methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11−1
6.11.2 Background data field and active data field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11−2
6.11.3 Transfer of profile data from GDC to the controller . . . . . . . 6.11−3
6.11.4 Transfer of profile data from the PLC/IPC to the controller . 6.11−4
6.11.5 Transfer of profile data from the controller to the PLC/IPC . 6.11−9
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6−1

6 Commissioning
Contents
6.12 Acceptance of reloaded profile data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12−1

6.13 Activation/deactivation of password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13−1
6.13.1 Master PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13−1
6.13.2 User PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13−1
6.14 Commissioning examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14−1
6.14.1 Replacement of a mechanical cam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14−1
6.14.2 Multi−axis application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14−2
6.15 Handwheel function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15−1
6−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Important notes 6.1
6.1 Important notes
Active loads
Stop!
For applications with active loads (e.g. hoists), you must set
C0172 = 0 (OV reduce: threshold for activation of brake torque
reduction before OV message) so that an overvoltage message
(OV) can be generated.
ƒ As long as the overvoltage message (OV) is active, pulse inhibit
is set and the drive operates in zero−torque mode.
ƒ The controller inhibit is also evaluated by the holding brake
(BRK)" function block.
»Global Drive Control« (GDC) Use a PC with the »Global Drive Control« (GDC) PC software for
commissioning. The full functionality of the servo cam profiler can only be
obtained through GDC.
ƒ Which GDC version is required?
9300 servo cam profiler »Global Drive Control«
Software version Version
3.3 3.6 or higher
3.4 4.4 or higher
4.0 4.4 or higher
ƒ Possible communication paths between GDC and controller including

adapters and connection cables required:
Controller Connection PC
Interface PC adapter Interface
Integrated system System bus cable System bus adapter Parallel (printer
bus or (supplied with the EMF2173IB interface)
CANopen system bus
communication adapters) System bus adapter USB
module EMF2177IB
EMF2175IB
Communication Serial cable A standard RS232 / RS485 Serial (RS232)
module LECOM−A/B EWL0020 converter and an RS485
EMF2102IBCV001 EWL0021 connection cable are required
for LECOM−B.
Communication Optical fibre Optical fibre adapter
module LECOM−LI EWZ0006 EMF2125IB
EMF2102IBCV003 EWZ0007 EMF2126IB
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.1−1

Commissioning 6
Before switching on 6.2
6.2 Before switching on
Stop!
Special commissioning procedure after long−term storage
If controllers are stored for more than two years, the insulation
resistance of the electrolyte may have changed.
ƒ During initial switch−on, the DC−bus capacitors and hence the
controller are damaged.
ƒ Form the DC−bus capacitors prior to commissioning.
Instructions can be found on the Internet (www.Lenze.com).
Note!
ƒ Keep to the switch−on sequence described.
ƒ The chapter "Troubleshooting and fault elimination" helps
you to eliminate faults during commissioning.
To avoid injury to persons or damage to material assets ...
... before the mains supply is connected, check:
ƒ The wiring for completeness, short circuit and earth fault.
ƒ The "EMERGENCY STOP" function of the entire system.
ƒ The in−phase connection of the motor.
ƒ The correct connection of the resolver or incremental encoder to
prevent the motor from rotating in the wrong direction.
... check the setting of the most important drive parameters before enabling
the controller:
ƒ Is the U/f rated frequency adapted to the motor circuit configuration?
ƒ Are the drive parameters relevant for your application set correctly?
ƒ Is the configuration of the analog and digital inputs and outputs
adapted to the wiring?
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.2−1

Commissioning 6
Switch−on sequence 6.3
Stop!
When commissioning is completed, do not enable the controller
before
ƒ CDATA−INIT−NOUT= LOW when using function block CDATA.
ƒ CURVEC1−INIT−DFOUT = LOW when using function block
CURVEC1.

1. Ensure that the controller inhibit is active after
mains connection } 59
X5
28
Terminal X5/28 = LOW
misc008
2. Ensure that there is no external error Terminal X5/E4 = HIGH

3. Switch on controller
A The control card is operated via an external voltage
supply: ON
Switch on the external DC 24 V supply voltage
misc002
B The control card is operated via the internal voltage
supply:
Switch on the mains. The controller provides the
DC 24 V supply.
4. The controller is initialised after approx. 2 s
5. Switch on the PC and start GDC GDC starts in the online mode if the PC
is connected to the controller.
Information on how to establish a
connection is given in the "Global Drive
Control (GDC) − Getting started"
manual.
6. Set the machine parameters in GDC
A Select the basic configuration 6.5−2
Lenze setting: C0005 = 10000 (basic configuration
˜Cam profiler˜)
B Adapt controller to the mains 6.5−2
C Enter gearbox and feed constants 6.5−3
D Enter motor data 6.5−5
E Set the temperature monitoring of the motor Motor with PTC or thermal contact:
6.5−17
Motor with KTY: 6.5−18
F Select the feedback system 6.6−1
7. Carry out a current controller adjustment if 6.7−1
necessary
8. Carry out a rotor position adjustment if necessary 6.8−1
9. Configure the control terminal functions in order to For internal voltage supply, assign X5/x
adapt them to your application. with "FIXED1"and X6/x with
"FIXED100%".
6.9−1
10. Create the motion profile 6.10−1
11. Save the motion profile 6.10−6
12. Transfer the motion profile to the controller 6.11−1
13. Save the settings safe from power failure in one of After connecting the DC 24 V supply or
the 4 parameter sets (C0003) after mains connection, parameter set
With C0003 = 1 the settings are stored in parameter 1 is activated automatically.
set 1. (See chapter "Parameter setting")
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.3−1

6 Commissioning

14. Switch on the mains if only the external DC 24 V
supply voltage is switched on.
}
15. Enable controller X5 Terminal X5/28 = HIGH
59 28 (see chapter "Commissioning"
misc009 ®"Controller inhibit")
16. Select setpoint Analog setpoint
selection:
−10 ... +10 V via
potentiometer at X6/1
and X6/2
Fixed speed: JOG 1 is parameterised under C0039/1
Activate JOG 1 with
X5/E3 = HIGH
17. The drive should be running now! CW rotation:
X5/E1 = HIGH and X5/E2 = LOW
CCW rotation:
X5/E1 = LOW and X5/E2 = HIGH
Note!
The "Diagnostics" menu provides the possibility to monitor the
most important drive parameters.
6.3−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Controller inhibit 6.4
6.4 Controller inhibit
Description If the controller inhibit is active, the power outputs are inhibited.
ƒ The drive coasts in zero−torque mode.
ƒ Status display of keypad: Pulse inhibit
ƒ Status display at the controller: The green LED is blinking.
Danger!
Do not use the "controller inhibit" function (DCTRL1−CINH) for
emergency−off. The controller inhibit only inhibits the power
outputs and does not disconnect the controller from the mains!
The drive could start again any time.
Activation Via terminal X5/28:

ƒ A LOW level at the terminal inhibits the controller (cannot be inverted)
ƒ A HIGH level re−enables the controller
Via the keys of the keypad (if C0469 = 1):
ƒ inhibits the controller
ƒ re−enables the controller
Via code C0040:
ƒ C0040 = 0 inhibits the controller
ƒ C0040 = 1 re−enables the controller
Note!
ƒ The sources for controller inhibit are ANDed, i.e. the drive only
restarts if the controller inhibit signals of all signal sources
have been eliminated.
ƒ The restart starts with zero speed. If centrifugal masses are
still rotating, this can lead to an overcurrent.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.4−1

Commissioning 6
Basic settings 6.5
Changing the basic configuration 6.5.1
6.5 Basic settings
9300kur006
Procedure
2. Click on field (1) and select a basic configuration suitable for your application, e.g.10000"
(Cam profiler)
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.5−1

6 Commissioning
6.5 Basic settings
9300kur006
Procedure
2. Click on field (1) and select the mains voltage and the supplementary component (if used).
6.5−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Basic settings 6.5
Entry of gearbox factors and feed constants 6.5.3
6.5.3 Entry of gearbox factors and feed constants
Stop!
Damage to the machine!
ƒ Changing the gearbox or feed constants results in the
controller losing the exact position of the tool.
ƒ If you change gearbox factors or feed constants later, the
profile data already transferred are no longer valid.
ƒ Repeat the profile data transfer to the drive.
ƒ Execute the Set reference" or Homing" function (for detailed
description see function block REFC in the System Manual
Extension, Chapter "Configuration"). When this function has
been executed, the controller knows the exact position of the
tool.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9300kur006
Procedure
1. Click on field (1) and enter the numerator for the gearbox ratio of the cam drive.
2. Click on field (2) and enter the denominator for the gearbox ratio of the cam drive.
3. Click on field (3) and enter the output−side feed.
l "units/r" means "units/revolution". By entering physical quantities uniformly, e.g. all
dimensions in [mm], the uniformity of the entire system is guaranteed.
4. Click on field (4) and enter the upper limit speed of the cam drive.
5. Click on field (5) and enter the numerator for the gearbox ratio of the master drive.
6. Click on field (6) and enter the denominator for the gearbox ratio of the master drive.
7. Click on field (7) and enter the input−side feed.
l "units/r" means "units/revolution". By entering physical quantities uniformly, e.g. all
dimensions in [mm], the uniformity of the entire system is guaranteed.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.5−3

6 Commissioning
6.5 Basic settings
6.5.3 Entry of gearbox factors and feed constants
Example
M RS
C1305/1
0 C1305/2
C1306

C1303/1
C1303/2
C1304

1
M
9300kur001
Fig. 6.5−4 Example of a cam drive and a master drive, entry of the constants
Cam drive (slave) Master drive (master)

Component Code Component Code
Gearbox C1305/1 = 4 Gearbox C1303/1 = 5
l i=4:1 C1305/2 = 1 l i=5:1 C1303/2 = 1
Leadscrew feed C1306 = 10 Toothed belt feed C1304 = 1000
l 10 mm/rev. l Number of teeth: 40
l Tooth pitch: 25 mm
Note!
The gearbox constant results from the ratio of the numbers of
teeth of
ƒ one or more gearbox stages,
ƒ toothed belt pulleys used to create an increase/reduction ratio
6.5−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Basic settings 6.5
For Lenze motors:
1
2
3
4
9300kur006
Procedure
2. Click into the field (1) and select the motor connected.
Just select the number specified on the nameplate of the motor from the open field.
Note!
A list of the motors available can be found in the chapter "Motor selection list". 6.5−9
3. Click into the field (2) and select the feedback system used.
4. Click into the field (3) and, if required, set the voltage supply for the encoder at X8.
Important!
For C0025 = 309, 310, 311, 409, 410 or 411 you have to adapt the voltage to 8 V.
5. Click into the field (4) and adapt the constant of the digital frequency input to the output
signal of the encoder connected.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.5−5

6 Commissioning
6.5 Basic settings
Enter the 8−digit resolver designation of the nameplate to achieve the

highest accuracy.
9300std088
Fig. 6.5−6 "Feedback" menu of the parameter menu
Procedure
1. Open the "Parameter menu ® Motor/Feedback ® Feedback" menu.
2. Click on C0416.
3. Enter the 8−digit designation of the motor nameplate in the dialog box.
4. Confirm with "OK".
6.5−6 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Basic settings 6.5
For non−Lenze motors or

Lenze motors not listed under
C0086
9300std089
Procedure
2. Click on C0086 and select the motor whose data corresponds best with the connected
motor.
Note!
The available motors are listed in chapter "Motor selection list". 6.5−9
3. Click on C0006 and select the motor control operating mode.
4. Enter the data of the connected motor in the following codes. The data can be found on
the nameplate or the data sheet of the motor.
C0022 Maximum current Imax of the motor
C0081 Rated motor power
C0084 Stator resistance of the motor
very high)
C0085 Leakage inductance of the motor
very high)
C0087 Rated motor speed
C0088 Rated motor current
C0089 Rated motor frequency
C0090 Rated motor voltage
C0091 Cos j.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.5−7

6 Commissioning
6.5 Basic settings
Motor mounting orientation
Stop!
Damage to the machine!
ƒ Changes in C1368 affect the homing function and the rotation
direction of the motor.
ƒ Execute the "Set reference" or "Homing" function when
changes have been made (for detailed description see function
block REFC in chapter "Configuration"). When this function
has been executed, the controller knows the exact position of
the tool.
9300kur006
Procedure
1. Click on field (1) and select the motor mounting orientation.
l The machine design determines which direction of motor rotation drives the machine
in the positive" effective direction.
Note!
Independently of the rotation direction of the motor, a positive
value is displayed under C1339/1 (profile position) if the motor
mounting orientation is correctly taken into account under
C1368.
6.5−8 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Basic settings 6.5
Servo motors The following table lists all servo motor which can be selected under C0086.
In the "Servo motor reference list" you can find the servo motors for which
the motor data must be entered manually. ( 6.5−11)
0 1
9300VEC058
[kW] [rpm]
10 MDSKA56−140 MDSKAXX056−22 0.80 3950 2.4 140
11 MDFKA71−120 MDFKAXX071−22 2.20 3410 6.0 120
12 MDSKA71−140 MDSKAXX071−22 1.70 4050 4.4 140
13 MDFKA80−60 MDFKAXX080−22 2.10 1635 4.8 60
14 MDSKA80−70 MDSKAXX080−22 1.40 2000 3.3 70
390
15 MDFKA80−120 MDFKAXX080−22 3.90 3455 9.1 120
16 MDSKA80−140 MDSKAXX080−22 2.30 4100 5.8 140
17 MDFKA90−60 MDFKAXX090−22 3.80 1680 8.5 60
18 MDSKA90−80 MDSKAXX090−22 2.60 2300 5.5 80
19 MDFKA90−120 MDFKAXX090−22 6.90 3480 15.8 120
20 MDSKA90−140 MDSKAXX090−22 4.10 4110 10.2 140 350
21 MDFKA100−60 MDFKAXX100−22 6.40 1700 13.9 60
22 MDSKA100−80 MDSKAXX100−22 4.00 2340 8.2 80 390
23 MDFKA100−120 MDFKAXX100−22 13.20 3510 28.7 120
24 MDSKA100−140 MDSKAXX100−22 5.20 4150 14.0 140 330 Asynchronous servo
KTY
motor
25 MDFKA112−60 MDFKAXX112−22 11.00 1710 22.5 60
26 MDSKA112−85 MDSKAXX112−22 6.40 2490 13.5 85 390
27 MDFKA112−120 MDFKAXX112−22 20.30 3520 42.5 120
28 MDSKA112−140 MDSKAXX112−22 7.40 4160 19.8 140 320
30 DFQA100−50 MDFQAXX100−22 10.60 1420 26.5 50
31 DFQA100−100 MDFQAXX100−22 20.30 2930 46.9 100
32 DFQA112−28 MDFQAXX112−22 11.50 760 27.2 28
33 DFQA112−58 MDFQAXX112−22 22.70 1670 49.1 58
34 DFQA132−20 MDFQAXX132−32 17.00 555 45.2 20 360
35 DFQA132−42 MDFQAXX132−32 35.40 1200 88.8 42
40 DFQA112−50 MDFQAXX112−22 20.10 1425 43.7 50
41 DFQA112−100 MDFQAXX112−22 38.40 2935 81.9 100
42 DFQA132−36 MDFQAXX132−32 31.10 1035 77.4 36
43 DFQA132−76 MDFQAXX132−32 60.10 2235 144.8 76 340
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.5−9

6 Commissioning
6.5 Basic settings
[kW] [rpm]
50 DSVA56−140 DSVAXX056−22 0.80 3950 2.4 140
51 DFVA71−120 DFVAXX071−22 2.20 3410 6.0 120
52 DSVA71−140 DSVAXX071−22 1.70 4050 4.4 140
53 DFVA80−60 DFVAXX080−22 2.10 1635 4.8 60
54 DSVA80−70 DSVAXX080−22 1.40 2000 3.3 70
390
55 DFVA80−120 DFVAXX080−22 3.90 3455 9.1 120
56 DSVA80−140 DSVAXX080−22 2.30 4100 5.8 140
57 DFVA90−60 DFVAXX090−22 3.80 1680 8.5 60
58 DSVA90−80 DSVAXX090−22 2.60 2300 5.5 80
59 DFVA90−120 DFVAXX090−22 6.90 3480 15.8 120 Asynchronous servo
Thermal contact
motor
60 DSVA90−140 DSVAXX090−22 4.10 4110 10.2 140 350
61 DFVA100−60 DFVAXX100−22 6.40 1700 13.9 60
62 DSVA100−80 DSVAXX100−22 4.00 2340 8.2 80 390
63 DFVA100−120 DFVAXX100−22 13.20 3510 28.7 120
64 DSVA100−140 DSVAXX100−22 5.20 4150 14.0 140 330
65 DFVA112−60 DFVAXX112−22 11.00 1710 22.5 60
66 DSVA112−85 DSVAXX112−22 6.40 2490 13.5 85 390
67 DFVA112−120 DFVAXX112−22 20.30 3520 42.5 120
68 DSVA112−140 DSVAXX112−22 7.40 4160 19.8 140 320
108 DSKS36−13−200 MDSKSXX036−13 0.25 4000 0.9 200 245
109 DSKS36−23−200 MDSKSXX036−23 0.54 4000 1.1 200 345
110 MDSKS56−23−150 MDSKSXX056−23 0.60 3000 1.25 150 350
111 MDSKS56−33−150 MDSKSXX056−33 0.91 3000 2.0 150 340
112 MDSKS71−13−150 MDSKSXX071−13 1.57 3000 3.1 150 360
113 MDFKS71−13−150 MDFKSXX071−13 2.29 3000 4.35 150 385
114 MDSKS71−23−150 MDSKSXX071−23 2.33 3000 4.85 150 360
115 MDFKS71−23−150 MDFKSXX071−23 3.14 3000 6.25 150 375
116 MDSKS71−33−150 MDSKSXX071−33 3.11 3000 6.7 150 330 Synchronous
KTY
117 MDFKS71−33−150 MDFKSXX071−33 4.24 3000 9.1 150 345 servo motor
160 DSKS56−23−190 MDSKSXX056−23 1.1 3800 2.3 190 330
161 DSKS56−33−200 MDSKSXX056−33 1.8 4000 3.6 200 325
162 DSKS71−03−170 MDSKSXX071−03 2.0 3400 4.2 170 330
163 DFKS71−03−165 MDFKSXX071−03 2.6 3300 5.6 165 330
164 DSKS71−13−185 MDSKSXX071−13 3.2 3700 7.0 185 325
165 DFKS71−13−180 MDFKSXX071−13 4.1 3600 9.2 180 325
166 DSKS71−33−180 MDSKSXX071−33 4.6 3600 10.0 180 325
167 DFKS71−33−175 MDFKSXX071−33 5.9 3500 13.1 175 325
6.5−10 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Basic settings 6.5
Servo motor reference list The motors listed in the Motor nameplate data" table column are not
[A] [kW] [W] [mH] [rpm] [A] [Hz] [V]
1000 MDSKA−71−22 54 3.75 0.88 8.4 34.98 1950 2.50 70 390 0.82 2 100 1.5 1.5
1001 MDFQA−112−12 33 42.60 12.90 0.45 4.3 1660 28.40 58 360 0.85 20 21 2 1
1002 MDFQA−112−12 41 70.50 21.80 0.45 4.3 2930 47.00 100 360 0.83 14 21 1.3 1
1003 MDSKA−56−22 50 6.75 1.57 2.25 6.5 6000 4.50 202 280 0.72 3 50 1.3 1.5
1004 MDSKS071−33−39 112 5.10 0.95 7.2 34.5 780 3.40 39 325 1.00 3 20 2.5 1.5
1005 MDSKS071−33−41 112 2.25 0.45 16.3 68 820 1.50 41 330 1.00 2 20 2.5 1.5
1076 MDSKS071−33−90 112 5.85 1.60 3.67 17.7 1800 3.90 90 310 1.00 10 20 0.7 1.7
1077 MDSKA−71−22 51 2.18 0.33 35.7 131.8 725 1.45 30 360 0.78 10 70 1.5 2
1103 SDSGA056−22 50 1.20 0.24 29.3 123 2790 0.80 100 390 0.71 14 150 0.35 1.8
1104 SDSGA056−22 40 2.55 0.24 29.3 123 2790 1.70 100 230 0.71 14 150 0.35 1.8
1105 SDSGA063−22 50 1.80 0.40 29.3 123 2800 1.20 100 390 0.70 14 150 0.35 1.8
1106 SDSGA063−22 40 3.15 0.40 29.3 123 2800 2.10 100 230 0.70 14 150 0.35 1.8
1107 SDSGA063−32 50 2.55 0.60 29.3 123 2800 1.70 100 390 0.70 14 150 0.35 1.8
1108 SDSGA063−32 40 4.50 0.6 29.3 123 2800 3 100 230 0.70 14 150 0.35 1.8
1109 MDSKS056−23−280 114 8.00 1.10 6.72 8.34 5600 2.30 280 320 1.00 10 20 1.3 1.5
1110 MDSKS056−23−310 114 9.00 1.10 5.42 6.78 6200 2.30 310 320 1.00 10 20 1.3 1.5
1111 MDSKS056−33−300 114 10.00 1.75 3.31 4.62 6000 3.60 300 320 1.00 10 20 1.3 1.5
1112 MDSKS056−33−265 114 8.00 1.72 4.1 5.73 5300 3.60 265 320 1.00 10 20 1.3 1.5
1113 MDSKS071−13−265 114 23.00 3.20 0.54 2.56 5300 7.00 265 320 1.00 10 20 1.3 1.5
1116 MDSKS071−33−270 114 25.00 5.70 0.38 1.91 5400 12.50 270 320 1.00 10 20 1.3 1.5
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.5−11

6 Commissioning
6.5 Basic settings
Three−phase asynchronous The following table lists all asynchronous motors which can be selected
motors
under C0086.
In the "Asynchronous motor reference list" you can find the asynchronous
motors for which the motor data must be entered manually. ( 6.5−14)
0 1
9300VEC058
[kW] [rpm]
210 DXRAXX071−12−50 DXRAXX071−12 0.25 1410 0.9
211 DXRAXX071−22−50 DXRAXX071−22 0.37 1398 1.2
212 DXRAXX080−12−50 DXRAXX080−12 0.55 1400 1.7
213 DXRAXX080−22−50 DXRAXX080−22 0.75 1410 2.3
214 DXRAXX090−12−50 DXRAXX090−12 1.10 1420 2.7
215 DXRAXX090−32−50 DXRAXX090−32 1.50 1415 3.6
216 DXRAXX100−22−50 DXRAXX100−22 2.20 1425 4.8
Asynchronous
218 DXRAXX112−12−50 DXRAXX112−12 4.00 1435 8.3 (star connection)
219 DXRAXX132−12−50 DXRAXX132−12 5.50 1450 11.0

220 DXRAXX132−22−50 DXRAXX132−22 7.50 1450 14.6
221 DXRAXX160−12−50 DXRAXX160−12 11.00 1460 21.0
222 DXRAXX160−22−50 DXRAXX160−22 15.00 1460 27.8
223 DXRAXX180−12−50 DXRAXX180−12 18.50 1470 32.8
224 DXRAXX180−22−50 DXRAXX180−22 22.00 1456 38.8
225 30kW−ASM−50 ˘ 30.00 1470 52.0
226 37kW−ASM−50 ˘ 37.00 1470 66.0
Asynchronous
228 55kW−ASM−50 ˘ 55.00 1480 93.0 (star connection)
229 75kW−ASM−50 ˘ 75.00 1480 132.0

250 DXRAXX071−12−87 DXRAXX071−12 0.43 2525 1.5
251 DXRAXX071−22−87 DXRAXX071−22 0.64 2515 2.0
252 DXRAXX080−12−87 DXRAXX080−12 0.95 2515 2.9
253 DXRAXX080−22−87 DXRAXX080−22 1.3 2525 4.0
254 DXRAXX090−12−87 DXRAXX090−12 2.0 2535 4.7
255 DXRAXX090−32−87 DXRAXX090−32 2.7 2530 6.2
256 DXRAXX100−22−87 DXRAXX100−22 3.9 2535 8.3
Asynchronous
258 DXRAXX112−12−87 DXRAXX112−12 7.10 2545 14.3 (delta connection)
259 DXRAXX132−12−87 DXRAXX132−12 9.7 2555 19.1

260 DXRAXX132−22−87 DXRAXX132−22 13.2 2555 25.4
261 DXRAXX160−12−87 DXRAXX160−12 19.3 2565 36.5
262 DXRAXX160−22−87 DXRAXX160−22 26.4 2565 48.4
263 DXRAXX180−12−87 DXRAXX180−12 32.4 2575 57.8
264 DXRAXX180−22−87 DXRAXX180−22 38.7 2560 67.4
6.5−12 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Basic settings 6.5
[kW] [rpm]
265 30kW−ASM−87 ˘ 52.00 2546 90.0
266 37kW−ASM−87 ˘ 64.00 2546 114.0
Asynchronous
268 55kW−ASM−87 ˘ 95.00 2563 161.0 (delta connection)
269 75kW−ASM−87 ˘ 130.00 2563 228.0
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.5−13

6 Commissioning
6.5 Basic settings
Asynchronous motor The motors listed in the Motor nameplate data" table column are not
reference list
[A] [kW] [W] [mH] [rpm] [A] [Hz] [V]
410 MDXMAXM−071−12 210 1.23 0.25 35.80 116.80 1400 0.82 50 400 0.70 6 300 1.5 10
411 MDXMAXM−071−32 211 1.80 0.37 27.00 112.70 1400 1.20 50 400 0.71 6 300 1.5 10
412 MDXMAXM−080−12 212 2.40 0.55 16.30 78.60 1400 1.60 50 400 0.72 6 300 1.5 10
413 MDXMAXM−080−32 213 3.00 0.75 11.20 59.30 1380 2.00 50 400 0.76 6 300 1.5 10
414 MDXMAXM−090−12 214 3.90 1.10 9.14 41.80 1410 2.60 50 400 0.80 6 300 1.5 10
415 MDXMAXM−090−32 215 5.25 1.50 5.10 27.70 1420 3.50 50 400 0.80 6 300 1.5 10
416 MDXMAXM−100−12 216 8.40 2.20 2.96 18.20 1400 5.60 50 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
417 MDXMAXM−100−32 217 10.95 3.00 2.20 13.40 1400 7.30 50 400 0.81 6 300 1.5 10
418 MDXMAXM−112−22 218 12.75 4.00 1.50 10.80 1430 8.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
440 MDXMAXM−071−12 250 2.10 0.43 35.8 116.80 2510 1.40 87 400 0.70 6 300 1.5 10
441 MDXMAXM−071−32 251 3.15 0.64 27.0 112.70 2510 2.10 87 400 0.71 6 300 1.5 10
442 MDXMAXM−080−12 252 4.20 0.95 16.3 78.60 2510 2.80 87 400 0.72 6 300 1.5 10
443 MDXMAXM−080−32 253 5.25 1.30 11.2 59.30 2490 3.50 87 400 0.76 6 300 1.5 10
444 MDXMAXM−090−12 254 6.75 2.00 9.14 41.80 2520 4.50 87 400 0.80 6 300 1.5 10
445 MDXMAXM−090−32 255 9.15 2.70 5.1 27.70 2530 6.10 87 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
446 MDXMAXM−100−12 256 14.55 3.90 2.96 18.20 2510 9.70 87 400 0.81 6 300 1.5 10
447 MDXMAXM−100−32 257 19.05 5.40 2.2 13.40 2510 12.70 87 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
448 MDXMAXM−112−22 258 22.20 7.10 1.5 10.80 2540 14.80 87 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
449 MDXMAXM−112−32 259 18.75 5.50 2.45 21.40 1440 12.50 50 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
450 MDXMAXM−132−22 259 25.20 7.50 1.42 15.00 1460 16.80 50 400 0.77 6 300 1.5 10
451 MDXMAXM−132−32 259 29.25 9.20 1.34 14.00 1450 19.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1006 MDXMAxx−071−12 210 1.28 0.25 39.90 157.20 1355 0.85 50 400 0.70 6 300 3.6 2
1007 MDXMAxx−071−12 250 2.25 0.47 39.90 157.20 2475 1.50 87 400 0.66 6 300 2 2
1008 MDXMAxx−071−32 211 1.73 0.37 25.03 122.60 1345 1.15 50 400 0.74 6 300 3.4 2
1009 MDXMAxx−071−32 251 3.00 0.67 25.03 122.60 2470 2.00 87 400 0.70 6 300 2.5 2
1010 MDXMAxx−080−12 212 2.40 0.55 20.69 89.00 1370 1.60 50 400 0.78 6 300 3.2 2
1011 MDXMAxx−080−12 252 3.90 1.00 20.69 89.00 2480 2.60 87 400 0.73 6 300 1.6 2
1012 MDXMAxx−080−32 213 2.85 0.75 11.69 65.20 1390 1.90 50 400 0.80 6 300 3.5 2
1013 MDXMAxx−080−32 253 4.95 1.35 11.69 65.20 2510 3.30 87 400 0.77 6 300 1.9 3
1014 MDXMAxx−090−12 214 3.90 1.10 10.01 40.20 1405 2.60 50 400 0.80 6 300 2.5 2
1015 MDXMAxx−090−12 254 6.75 2.00 10.01 40.20 2520 4.50 87 400 0.77 6 300 2 2
1016 MDXMAxx−090−32 215 5.25 1.50 5.85 28.80 1410 3.50 50 400 0.78 6 300 2 2
1017 MDXMAxx−090−32 255 9.15 2.70 5.85 28.80 2525 6.10 87 400 0.76 6 300 1 2
1018 MDXMAxx−100−12 216 7.20 2.20 2.90 20.00 1425 4.80 50 400 0.80 6 300 1 1.5
1019 MDXMAxx−100−12 256 12.45 3.90 2.90 20.00 2535 8.30 87 400 0.76 6 300 0.8 1.5
1020 MDXMAxx−100−32 217 9.75 3.00 2.10 17.00 1415 6.50 50 400 0.81 6 300 2.5 1.5
1021 MDXMAxx−100−32 257 17.10 5.40 2.10 17.00 2530 11.40 87 400 0.78 6 300 1.4 1.8
1022 MDXMAxx−112−22 218 12.45 4.00 1.50 11.00 1435 8.30 50 400 0.82 6 300 2 2
1023 MDXMAxx−112−22 258 21.45 7.10 1.50 11.00 2545 14.30 87 400 0.83 6 300 1 2
1024 MDXMAxx−132−12 219 16.50 5.50 0.86 13.00 1450 11.00 50 400 0.84 6 300 1.5 2
1025 MDXMAxx−132−12 259 28.65 9.70 0.86 13.00 2555 19.10 87 400 0.83 6 300 1.3 2
1026 MDXMAxx−132−22 220 21.90 7.50 0.80 11.00 1450 14.60 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 2
1027 MDXMAxx−132−22 260 38.10 13.20 0.80 11.00 2555 25.40 87 400 0.84 6 300 0.95 1.8
6.5−14 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Basic settings 6.5

[A] [kW] [W] [mH] [rpm] [A] [Hz] [V]
1028 MDXMAxx−160−22 221 31.50 11.00 0.50 7.00 1460 21.00 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.9 2.2
1029 MDXMAxx−160−22 261 54.75 19.30 0.50 7.00 2565 36.50 87 400 0.85 6 300 1 2
1030 MDXMAxx−160−32 222 41.70 15.00 0.40 5.50 1460 27.80 50 400 0.87 6 300 1.7 2.5
1031 MDXMAxx−160−32 262 72.60 26.40 0.40 5.50 2565 48.40 87 400 0.86 6 300 1 1.8
1032 MDXMAxx−180−12 223 49.20 18.50 0.40 4.00 1470 32.80 50 400 0.90 6 300 1.4 1.7
1033 MDXMAxx−180−12 263 86.70 32.40 0.40 4.00 2575 57.80 87 400 0.89 6 300 1 1.7
1034 MDXMAxx−180−22 224 58.20 22.00 0.20 3.80 1456 38.80 50 400 0.90 6 300 1 1.5
1035 MDXMAxx−180−22 264 101.1 38.70 0.20 3.80 2560 67.40 87 400 0.89 6 300 1 1.5
1036 MDXMAXM−63−12 210 0.68 0.12 87.58 610.53 1390 0.45 50 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1037 MDXMAXM−63−12 250 1.17 0.21 87.58 610.53 2500 0.78 87 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1038 MDXMAXM−63−32 210 0.98 0.18 56.90 342.11 1400 0.65 50 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1039 MDXMAXM−63−32 250 1.70 0.31 56.90 342.11 2510 1.13 87 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1040 MDXMAXM−112−32 219 18.75 5.50 0.86 7.20 1440 12.50 50 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
1041 MDXMAXM−112−32 259 32.55 9.60 0.86 7.20 2550 21.70 87 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
1042 MDXMAXM−132−22 220 25.20 7.50 0.54 4.80 1460 16.80 50 400 0.77 6 300 1.5 10
1043 MDXMAXM−132−22 260 43.80 13.10 0.54 4.80 2570 29.20 87 400 0.77 6 300 1.5 10
1044 MDXMAXM−132−32 221 29.25 9.20 0.46 4.70 1450 19.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1045 MDXMAXM−132−32 261 50.70 16.00 0.46 4.70 2560 33.80 87 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1046 MDXMAXM−160−22 260 31.50 11.00 1.27 18.97 1466 21.00 50 400 0.86 6 300 1.5 10
1047 MDXMAXM−160−32 260 42.30 15.00 0.87 14.28 1466 28.20 50 400 0.87 6 300 1.5 10
1048 MDXMAXM−180−22 260 54.60 18.50 0.40 4.00 1440 36.40 50 400 0.87 6 300 1.5 10
1049 MDXMAXM−180−32 260 66.15 22.00 0.20 3.80 1465 44.10 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1050 MDXMAXM−200−32 260 90.00 30.00 0.17 3.50 1455 60.00 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1051 MDXMAXM−225−12 260 108.0 37.00 0.15 2.00 1460 72.00 50 400 0.86 6 300 1.5 10
1052 MDXMAXM−225−22 260 128.25 45.00 0.15 2.00 1475 85.50 50 400 0.84 6 300 1.5 10
1053 MDXMAXM−063−11 210 1.43 0.18 51.00 273.7 2760 0.95 50 400 0.80 6 300 1.5 10
1054 MDXMAXM−063−31 210 1.65 0.25 33.00 93.4 2760 1.10 50 400 0.83 6 300 1.5 10
1055 MDXMAXM−071−11 211 1.50 0.37 22.50 90.2 2840 1.00 50 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
1056 MDXMAXM−071−31 212 2.25 0.55 16.90 62.9 2840 1.50 50 400 0.82 6 300 1.5 10
1057 MDXMAXM−080−11 213 2.85 0.75 11.36 47.4 2850 1.90 50 400 0.80 6 300 1.5 10
1058 MDXMAXM−080−31 214 4.20 1.10 6.86 33.4 2810 2.80 50 400 0.82 6 300 1.5 10
1059 MDXMAXM−090−11 215 4.80 1.50 5.10 22.2 2840 3.20 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1060 MDXMAXM−090−31 216 7.20 2.20 3.20 14.5 2840 4.80 50 400 0.86 6 300 1.5 10
1061 MDXMAXM−100−31 217 9.30 3.00 1.81 10.7 2850 6.20 50 400 0.88 6 300 1.5 10
1062 MDXMAXM−100−41 218 12.75 4.00 1.45 8.6 2830 8.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1063 MDXMAXM−112−31 250 18.30 5.50 3.10 17 2890 12.20 50 400 0.83 6 300 1.5 10
1064 MDXMAXM−112−41 250 23.25 7.50 1.96 12 2900 15.50 50 400 0.87 6 300 1.5 10
1065 MDXMAXM−132−21 250 28.05 9.00 1.41 11.292 2925 18.70 50 400 0.89 6 300 1.5 10
1066 MDXMAXM−071−13 210 1.13 0.18 58.93 342 870 0.75 50 400 0.71 6 300 1.5 10
1067 MDXMAXM−071−13 250 1.95 0.31 58.93 342 1610 1.30 87 400 0.71 6 300 1.5 10
1068 MDXMAXM−071−33 210 1.50 0.25 37.90 116.8 920 1.00 50 400 0.63 6 300 1.5 10
1069 MDXMAXM−071−33 250 2.55 0.43 37.90 116.8 1660 1.70 87 400 0.63 6 300 1.5 10
1070 MDXMAXM−080−13 211 2.10 0.37 28.00 112.7 900 1.40 50 400 0.67 6 300 1.5 10
1071 MDXMAXM−080−13 251 3.60 0.64 28.00 112.7 1640 2.40 87 400 0.67 6 300 1.5 10
1072 MDXMAXM−080−33 212 2.85 0.55 16.60 78.6 900 1.90 50 400 0.68 6 300 1.5 10
1073 MDXMAXM−080−33 252 4.95 0.95 16.60 78.6 1640 3.30 87 400 0.68 6 300 1.5 10
1078 MDFMAxx−250−22 224 147.75 55.00 0.04 1.92 1475 98.50 50 400 0.86 6 300 1 2
1079 MDFMAxx−250−22 264 255.90 95.00 0.04 1.92 2585 170.60 87 400 0.86 6 300 1 2
1080 MDEBAXM−063−12 210 0.68 0.12 87.58 610.53 1390 0.45 50 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1081 MDEBAXM−063−12 250 1.17 0.21 87.58 610.53 2500 0.78 87 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1082 MDEBAXM−063−32 210 0.98 0.18 56.90 342.11 1400 0.65 50 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1083 MDEBAXM−063−32 250 1.70 0.31 56.90 342.11 2510 1.13 87 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1084 MDEBAXM−071−12 210 1.35 0.25 39.90 157.20 1390 0.90 50 400 0.64 6 300 3.6 2
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.5−15

6 Commissioning
6.5 Basic settings

[A] [kW] [W] [mH] [rpm] [A] [Hz] [V]
1085 MDEBAXM−071−12 250 2.34 0.43 39.90 157.20 2500 1.56 87 400 0.64 6 300 2 2
1086 MDEBAXM−071−32 211 1.95 0.37 25.03 122.60 1380 1.30 50 400 0.64 6 300 3.4 2
1087 MDEBAXM−071−32 251 3.38 0.64 25.03 122.60 2490 2.25 87 400 0.64 6 300 2.5 2
1088 MDEBAXM−080−12 212 2.40 0.55 20.69 89.00 1400 1.60 50 400 0.68 6 300 3.2 2
1089 MDEBAXM−080−12 252 4.16 0.95 20.69 89.00 2510 2.77 87 400 0.68 6 300 1.6 2
1090 MDEBAXM−080−32 213 3.00 0.75 11.69 65.20 1400 2.00 50 400 0.72 6 300 3.5 2
1091 MDEBAXM−080−32 253 5.20 1.30 11.69 65.20 2510 3.46 87 400 0.72 6 300 1.9 3
1092 MDEBAXM−090−12 214 4.05 1.10 6.40 37.00 1420 2.70 50 400 0.77 6 300 2.5 2
1093 MDEBAXM−090−12 254 7.05 2.00 6.40 37.00 2535 4.70 87 400 0.77 6 300 2 2
1094 MDEBAXM−090−32 215 5.40 1.50 4.80 26.00 1415 3.60 50 400 0.77 6 300 2 2
1095 MDEBAXM−090−32 255 9.30 2.70 4.80 26.00 2530 6.20 87 400 0.77 6 300 1 2
1096 MDEBAXM−100−12 216 7.20 2.20 2.90 20.00 1425 4.80 50 400 0.80 6 300 1 1.5
1097 MDEBAXM−100−12 256 12.45 3.90 2.90 20.00 2535 8.30 87 400 0.80 6 300 0.8 1.5
1098 MDEBAXM−100−32 217 9.90 3.00 2.10 17.00 1415 6.60 50 400 0.81 6 300 2.5 1.5
1099 MDEBAXM−100−32 257 17.10 5.35 2.10 17.00 2530 11.40 87 400 0.81 6 300 1.4 1.8
1100 MDEBAXM−112−22 218 12.45 4.00 1.50 11.00 1435 8.30 50 400 0.82 6 300 2 2
1101 MDEBAXM−112−22 258 21.45 7.10 1.50 11.00 2545 14.30 87 400 0.82 6 300 1 2
1102 MDEBAXM−112−32 219 17.85 5.50 2.71 21.40 1425 11.90 50 400 0.84 6 300 1.5 10
1114 MDFMAxx−200−32 224 83.25 30.00 1465 55.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1 2
1115 MDFMAxx−200−32 264 145.50 52.00 2575 97.00 87 400 0.85 6 300 1 2
6.5−16 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Basic settings 6.5
Motor temperature monitoring with PTC or thermal contact 6.5.6
Description PTC resistors according to DIN 44081 and DIN 44082 can be connected via
the terminal inputs T1 and T2. The motor temperature is measured and
integrated into the drive monitoring.
A thermal contact (NC contact) can also be connected to T1 and T2. Lenze
three−phase AC motors provide thermal contacts as default.
When using motors equipped with PTC resistors or thermostats, we
recommend to always activate the PTC input. This prevents the motor from
being destroyed by overheating.
Stop!
ƒ The motor temperature monitoring may only be connected to
T1, T2 if the cable is terminated with a PTC or thermal contact
(NC contact) on the motor side.
– An "open" cable acts like an antenna and can cause faults on
– Input signals at T1, T2 are processed with a delay of 2 s.
ƒ The drive controller can only evaluate one PTC resistor! Do not
connect several PTC resistors in series or in parallel:
– The motor temperature would be measured incorrectly.
ƒ If you operate several motors on a drive controller, use
thermal contacts (NC contacts) for motor temperature
monitoring and connect these in series.
ƒ To achieve full motor protection, an additional temperature
monitoring with separate evaluation must be installed.
Activation
Note!
ƒ In the Lenze setting the motor temperature monitoring is
switched off!
ƒ If you work with several parameter sets, the monitoring must
be activated separately in each parameter set!
1. Connect the monitoring circuit of the motor to T1 and T2.
– With 1.6kW < R < 4kW, the monitoring responds.
2. Set the controller reaction:
– C0585 = 3: Temperature monitoring of the motor is switched off.
– C0585 = 0: TRIP error message (display of keypad: OH8 )
– C0585 = 2: Warning signal (display of keypad: OH8 )
Function test Connect the PTC input with a fixed resistor:
ƒ R>4kW: The fault message OH8 must be activated.
ƒ R<1kW: Fault message must not be activated.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.5−17

6 Commissioning
6.5 Basic settings
Description ƒ There are two possibilities to connect a KTY resistor:

– At the incremental encoder connection X8 (pins X8/5 and X8/8)
– At the resolver connection X7 (pins X7/8 and X7/9)
ƒ The motor temperature is measured and integrated into the drive
monitoring.
ƒ The KTY resistor is monitored for open and short circuit.
ƒ When using motors equipped with KTY resistors, we recommend
always to activate the KTY input. This prevents the motor from being
destroyed by overheating.
Stop!
ƒ The controller can only evaluate one KTY resistor! Do not use
several KTY resistors connected in series or in parallel:
– This would result in an incorrect measurement of the motor
temperature.
ƒ If several motors are operated on a controller, use thermal
contacts (NC contacts) for monitoring the motor temperature
and connect theses contacts in series.
ƒ To ensure full motor protection, an additional temperature
monitoring with separate evaluation has to be installed.
6.5−18 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Basic settings 6.5
Activation
Stop!
Overheating of the motor!
In the Lenze setting, temperature monitoring of the motor is
deactivated (C0583 = 3). The motor temperature in C0063 shows
0 °C even if C0584 = 2 is set.
ƒ The motor can be damaged by a too high motor temperature.
ƒ Activate the monitoring of the motor temperature via X7 or
X8 with C0583 = 2 or C0584 = 2.
ƒ Set C0594 = 2 or 3. Then the connection is additionally
monitored with regard to short circuit and interruption.
ƒ If you work with several parameter sets, you have to activate
the monitoring separately in each parameter set.
1. Connect monitoring circuit of the motor to X7/8, X7/9 or X8/5, X8/8.
2. Set response of the controller for short circuit or interruption on the
connection (monitoring of the motor temperature has to be activated):
– C0594 = 3: monitoring is switched off.
– C0594 = 0: TRIP error message (keypad display: Sd6 )
– C0594 = 2: warning signal (keypad display: Sd6 )
Adjustment Monitoring with a fixed operating temperature (150 °C)
– C0583 = 0: TRIP error message (keypad display: OH3 )
Monitoring with a variable operating temperature (45...150 °C)
1. Set the operating temperature in C0121.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.5−19

6 Commissioning
6.5 Basic settings
Adjustment of KTY operating The temperature and resistance range can be adapted to the KTY used.
range
ƒ C1190 = 0: Fixed operating range for KTY in Lenze motors (Lenze
setting)
ƒ C1190 = 1: Adjustable operating range
R [O h m ]
a
R 2
(C 1 1 9 2 /2 )
R 1
(C 1 1 9 2 /1 )
T 1 T 2 T [° C ]
(C 1 1 9 1 /1 ) (C 1 1 9 1 /2 )
Fig. 6.5−11 Setting of the operating range for the KTY (C1190 = 1)
The operating range is specified by means of limit values and is in the almost
linear section of the graph (a). The operating values are determined by
interpolation.
C1191/1 Setting of the lower and upper temperature value (T1, T2)
C1191/2 corresponding to the KTY used.
C1192/1 Setting of the lower and upper resistance value corresponding to
C1192/2 the KTY used.
6.5−20 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Resolver at X7 6.6.1
Description The feedback signal can either be supplied via input X7 or via input X8.
– SinCos encoder
Note!
ƒ Use a SinCos encoder with serial communication (multi−turn)
if homing of the drive is not possible. Please specify the
motor/encoder combination in your order.
ƒ You can only use 2 of the 3 interfaces X8, X9, X10
simultaneously. Due to this it may be possible that the
incremental encoder input cannot be activated or the digital
frequency input / digital frequency output does not work.
– This dependency does not apply if the digital frequency
output X10 is set to reproduction of the input signals at X8
or X9 (C0540 = 4 or 5).
– To deactivate the digital frequency input, it may be
necessary to delete the internal signal link from function
block DFIN to the following function block. Remove the
function block DFIN from the processing table.
Resolvers can be operated at X7. For the wiring diagram and the pin
Activation ƒ C0025 = 10 (Lenze setting)

ƒ Monitoring (SD2) of the resolver and the resolver cable for open circuit:
C0586 = 2 (warning)
C0586 = 3 (off)
Incremental encoders with TTL level can be operated at X8. For the wiring
diagram and the pin assignment of X8, please refer to chapter "Wiring of the
standard device" ® "Wiring of the feedback system".
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.6−1

6 Commissioning
Activation ƒ C0025 = 110, 111, 112 or 113. The number of increments (512, 1024,
Adjustment The incremental encoder is supplied with voltage by the drive controller.
Stop!
If the supply voltage is too high, it may destroy the incremental
encoder.
Under C0421 you can adjust the supply voltage VCC (5 V) of the incremental
encoder in order to compensate for the voltage drop along the incremental
encoder cable (if required).
R[W] l Length of the incremental encoder cable
DU [ l[m] @ @ I Inc[A]
[m]
R Resistance of the incremental encoder cable
IInc Current consumption of the incremental
encoder
SinCos encoders can be operated at X8. For the wiring diagram and the pin
Activation
Stop!
Uncontrolled acceleration of the motor!
ƒ If the SinCos encoder fails, the motor may accelerate in an
uncontrolled manner.
ƒ Activate the monitoring for the SinCos encoder with
C0580 = 0.
ƒ SinCos encoder with 5 V supply voltage:
C0025 = 210, 211, 212, or 213. The number of increments (512, 1024,
ƒ Single−turn SinCos encoder with 8 V supply voltage:
ƒ Multi−turn SinCos encoder with 8 V supply voltage:
ƒ Monitoring (SD8) of the SinCos encoder:
C0580 = 3 (off)
6.6−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
SinCos encoder at X8 6.6.3
Adjustment The SinCos encoder is supplied with voltage by the controller.
Stop!
If the supply voltage is too high, the SinCos encoder may be
damaged.
Under C0421 you can adjust the supply voltage VCC (5 ... 8 V) of the SinCos
encoder in order to compensate for the voltage drop along the cable (if
required).
R[W] l Length of the SinCos encoder cable
DU [ l[m] @ @ I SINCOS[A]
[m]
R Resistance of the SinCos encoder cable
ISINCOS Current consumption of the SinCos
encoder
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.6−3

Commissioning 6
When is a current controller adjustment required?

ƒ The motor data of the motor used is not contained in GDC (e.g. motors
from other manufacturers).
ƒ The application makes high demands on the dynamic performance of
the drive controller (e.g. dynamic positioning, cross cutter).
ƒ The motor/drive controller combination does conform to the standard
power−based assignment. The basic current controller settings only
match for a power−based assignment of the drive controller.
Preparations Measure Setting Explanation
Reduce maximum Reduce the value in With the motor at standstill, the motor
current C0022 current of the motor phase U is measured
(field frequency 0). This increases the
motor current in the motor phase to
141% and the motor temperature rises
significantly.
Generate maximum Connect MCTRL−M−ADD For speed control or position control
torque setpoint with FIXED100% (MCTRL−N/M−SWT = 0)
l Connect For torque control (MCTRL−N/M−SWT = 1)
MCTRL−M−ADD with
FIXED100%
l Connect
MCTRL−N−SET with
FIXED100%
Deactivate integral Set C0076 = 2000 ms The integral action component of the
action component of current controller is deactivated by
current controller setting the reset time Tn (C0076) to the
longest time. The gain (C0075) remains
unchanged (Lenze setting still valid).
Deactivate quick stop Set X5/E1 = HIGH or By preselecting a direction of rotation the
X5/E2 = HIGH quick stop is deactivated.
Change the operation of Set C0006 = 3 Even if an asynchronous motor is
the motor control connected, set the motor control to
’synchronous motor’.
Set the rotor position Set C0058 = −90° Set the rotor displacement angle to −90°.
setpoint
Set the actual value 1. Select a TTL encoder After mains connection C0060 = 0° is
display of the rotor under C0025 displayed.
position to 0° under 2. Save settings with
C0060 C0003 = 1
3. If required,
disconnect the
encoder cable at X8
4. Switch off the mains
supply and the
external 24V supply
(if required) and then
on again.
Connect the storage Put the clamp−on Oscilloscope settings:
oscilloscope ammeter around the l Time base: 400 ms/DIV
motor phase U and l Auto−triggering
connect it to the
oscilloscope
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.7−1

6 Commissioning
Adjustment
Stop!
Thermal destruction of the motor!
ƒ If the controller is enabled for too long and the motor current
is too high, the motor may be destroyed by overtemperature.
ƒ Reduce motor current under C0022 and enable the controller
only for some seconds.
1. Inhibit the controller (X5/28 = LOW)
2. Deactivate quick stop (X5/E1 =HIGH or X5/E2 =HIGH)
3. Enable the controller for some seconds and then inhibit it again.
4. Record the current flowing in motor phase U with the controller being
enabled.
5. Set the gain Vp (C0075) in such a way that the current rises rapidly.
6. Reduce the reset time Tn (C0076) so much that the transient response
shows almost no overshoot and an optimum rise is achieved.
7. After each change of C0075 and C0076, the time course of the motor
current must be recorded and checked again.
9300std090
Fig. 6.7−1 Current characteristic for optimum controller adjustment

Time base 200 ms/DIV
6.7−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
9300std091 9300std092
Fig. 6.7−2 Current characteristic for non−optimum controller adjustment

Current rise of motor current too slow
Reset time Tn (C0076) too long and/or gain Vp (C0075) too small
High−frequency oscillations of motor current, motor noises may occur
Reset time Tn (C0076) too short and/or gain Vp (C0075) too large
8. Check the transient response over a longer period of time (e.g. with
time base 4000 ms/DIV). The motor current must reach the final
steady−state value within the shortest possible time.
9300std093
Fig. 6.7−3 Transient response of motor current over longer period of time
Optimum transient response
Final steady−state value is reached too slowly
9. When the current controller adjustment is completed, reset the

temporary settings:
– Set the initial values again in C0006, C0022 and C0025. If necessary,
reconnect the encoder cable to X8.
– Connect the inputs MCTRL−M−ADD and MCTRL−N−SET with the initial
signals.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.7−3

Commissioning 6
When is a rotor position adjustment required?

ƒ A synchronous non−Lenze motor is used. The motor used is not
included in GDC.
ƒ Another encoder was mounted to the motor later on.
ƒ A defective encoder was replaced.
Note!
Only use single−pole resolvers or SinCos encoders (single−turn or
multi−turn).
Preparatory work ƒ Inhibit the controller.

ƒ Unload the motor mechanically.
– Disconnect the motor from the gearbox/machine.
– If necessary, remove toothed lock washers, gears, etc. from the motor
shaft.
– If necessary, support the holding torques provided by mounted motor
brakes by means of locking devices.
ƒ Deactivate the "safe torque off" function so that the motor can be
energised for the motor pole angle adjustment.
ƒ Release the holding brake (if available).
ƒ Adjust the current controller (see chapter "Current controller
adjustment").
ƒ Check resolver polarity.
ƒ Set C0006 = 3.
– For carrying out a rotor position adjustment, a synchronous motor
must be selected.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.8−1

6 Commissioning
Resolver polarity check
9300std200
Procedure
1. Inhibit the controller (X5/28 = LOW).
2. Disconnect the motor from the gearbox/machine.
4. Turn the rotor to the right (when looking at the front end of the motor shaft). The value in
C0060 must increase.
l In C0060 the angle of rotation is displayed as a numerical value between 0and2047.
Note!
The actual value is only displayed if the selection cursor is placed on the code and [F6] is
pressed.
5. If the value decreases, swap the signals at X7/6 and X7/7 (+SIN and −SIN).
6.8−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Rotor position adjustment
9300std203

Procedure
2. Open the "Parameter menu ® Motor/feedback system ® Motor setting" menu.
3. Select C0006 = 3.
l A synchronous motor with feedback must be selected for pole position adjustment.
4. Click C0095 and activate the adjustment process by selecting C0095 = 1.
5. Enable controller (X5/28 = HIGH).
6. The position adjustment program of the controller is started.
l The rotor rotates a full revolution in several steps.
l Then C0095 is automatically set to 0.
7. C0058 displays the current rotor displacement angle.
Note!
l The current value will not be displayed until the bar cursor is on the code and [F6] is
pressed.
l For sin/cos encoders, C0058 always displays a value of 0 because the value is saved to
the encoder.
9. Reset C0006 to default setting if necessary.
10. Click C0003 and save the setting by selecting C0003 = 1.
11. Disconnect the mains and reconnect the motor to the machine.
Danger!
Uncontrolled movements of the drive after an "Sd7" error in
conjunction with absolute value encoders or in the case of a
"PL−TRIP" error.
If the rotor position adjustment was completed with an "Sd7" or
"PL−TRIP" error ( 9.3−1) it was not possible to assign the rotor
position to the feedback system. In this case the drive may carry
out uncontrolled movements after the controller has been
enabled.
ƒ Death or severe injuries.
ƒ Destruction or damage to the machine.
ƒ Repeat rotor position adjustment (start with step 1).
ƒ Check the wiring and the interference immunity of the
encoder at X8.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.8−3

Commissioning 6
Free configuration of digital input signals 6.9.1
Danger!
If you select a configuration in C0005, the signal assignment of
the inputs and outputs will be overwritten with the
corresponding basic assignment!
ƒ Adapt the signal assignment to your wiring!
6.9.1 Free configuration of digital input signals
Description ƒ Internal digital signals can be freely linked with external digital signal
sources. This serves to establish a freely configurable control of the
drive controller.
– Digital inputs X5/E1 ... X5/E5
ƒ A signal source can be linked with several targets. Ensure reasonable
linkages for not activating functions that are mutually exclusive (e. g.
linking a digital input with quick stop and DC injection braking at the
same time).
Linking signals The internal digital signal can be linked with an external signal source by
code of the internal digital signal.
Example
ƒ C0787/2 =53 ð signal source for JOG2 is terminal X5/E3
NSET
DIGIN DCTRL -X5/28 NSET-N
X5 C0780
DIGIN-CINH
28 1 C0046
DIGIN1
E1 DMUX
C0114/1...6 DIGIN2 NSET-JOG*1 0
C0787/1
E2 NSET-JOG *2 JOG1...15
0 DIGIN3 C0787/2 0
NSET-JOG *4
C0787/3
E3 1 DIGIN4 NSET-JOG *8 3 15
1 C0787/4
E4 DIGIN5
DIGIN6
E5
C0443
ST
9300vec105
Fig. 6.9−1 Connecting digital signal JOG2 with terminal X5/E3
Tip!
GDC (ESP−GDC2).
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.9−1

6 Commissioning
Signal level ƒ Terminals (X5/E1 ... X5/E5):

– HIGH = +12 V ... +30 V
– LOW = 0 V ... +3 V
active) for the terminals X5/E1 ... X5/E5.
Example
ƒ C0114/3 =1 ð LOW level at X5/E3 activates JOG2
Description ƒ The digital outputs X5/A1 ... X5/A4 can be freely linked with internal
digital signals.
Linking signals The digital outputs can be linked with internal digital signals by entering the
selection figure of the internal signal into corresponding subcode of C0117.
Example
ƒ C0117/2 = 505 ð signal source for X5/A2 is the status message
"direction of rotation" (DCTRL−CW/CCW)
Signal level ƒ Terminals (X5/A1 ... X5/A4):
– HIGH = +12 V ... +30 V
– LOW = 0 V ... +3 V
active) for the terminals X5/A1 ... X5/A4.
Example
ƒ C0118/2 =1 ð With LOW level at X5/A2 the motor rotates in CW
direction (with in−phase motor connection)
6.9−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Free configuration of analog input signals 6.9.3
6.9.3 Free configuration of analog input signals
Description ƒ Internal analog signals can be freely linked with external analog signal
sources:
– Analog inputs X3/1, X3/2 and X3/3, X3/4
Linking signals The internal analog signals can be linked with an external signal source by
code of the internal analog signal.
Example
ƒ C0780 = 50 ð signal source for the main setpoint (NSET−N) is terminal
X6/1, X6/2
C0034 AIN1
X6 NSET
1 + + AIN1-OUT NSET-N
C0780
2 + +
AIN1-OFFSET C0046
C0402 C0400
C0010 DMUX
C0404/1 NSET-JOG*1 0
C0787/1
AIN1-GAIN NSET-JOG *2
C0787/2 0
C0403 NSET-JOG *4
C0787/3
NSET-JOG *8 3 15
C0404/2 C0787/4
9300vec106
Fig. 6.9−2 Linking analog signal NSET−N with terminal X6/1, X6/2
Tip!
GDC (ESP−GDC2).
Adjustment Gain and offset

Set gain (C0027) and offset (C0026) to adapt the input signal to the
application.
Input range of X6/1, X6/2
Input range C0034 Position of jumper at X3
−10 V ... +10 V C0034 = 0 6 5
4 3
2 1
+4 mA ... +20 mA C0034 = 1 6 5
4 3
−20 mA ... +20 mA C0034 = 2 2 1
Note!
Different settings in C0034 and of X3 result in a wrong input
signal.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.9−3

6 Commissioning
Description ƒ The analog outputs (X6/62, X6/63) can be freely linked with internal
analog process or monitoring signals. The controller outputs a voltage
proportional to the internal signal at the analog outputs.
Linking signals Analog outputs can be linked with internal analog signals by entering the
selection figure of the internal signal into the code of C0431 (AOUT1, X6/62)
or C0436 (AOUT2, X6/63).
Example
ƒ C0436 = 5006 ð signal source for X6/63 is the actual motor voltage
Tip!
GDC (ESP−GDC2).
Adjustment Set gain (C0108) and offset (C0109) to adapt the output signal to the
application.
With an internal signal of 100 % and a gain of 1, a voltage of 10 V is output
at the terminal.
6.9−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Generation of motion profiles 6.10
6.10 Generation of motion profiles
This chapter describes the generation of motion profiles in »Global Drive

Control« (GDC).
Stop!
If gearbox factors or feed constants are changed, you have to
repeat the profile data transfer to the controller.
Options for generating ƒ Profile editor of »Global Drive Control« (GDC)

motion profiles
– Import of motion profiles (CAD data)
– Mathematical input of the profile data
ƒ »CamDesigner«
– Import of motion profiles (CAD data)
– Graphical input of the profile data
ƒ »CamLoader«
– Import of CAD data, data from GDC (profile editor) or »CamDesigner«
– Download of motion profiles via interconnected axes
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.10−1

6 Commissioning
6.10.2 Definition of data model
6.10.2 Definition of data model
Note!
Select the data model for the drive before entering the basic
profile data in the "Basic cam data" dialog box.
9300kur031
Fig. 6.10−1 "Basic cam data" dialog box
Procedure
1. Click on field (1) and select the data model.
Relative data model ƒ For the relative data model, profile points cannot be changed later
since they are saved in a compressed form because of the data volume.
ƒ Compared with the absolute data model, the relative data model
provides a higher number of interpolation points.
ƒ The profile can be split into 5 sections. The interpolation points used
per section are distributed equidistantly.
Absolute data model ƒ The absolute data model provides the possibility to change individual
points of the profile later.
ƒ The interpolation points can be distributed as you like.
ƒ If the profile is split into different sections, an active section is not
output at CDATA−SEC1 ... CDATA−SEC5.
ƒ Profiles can be optimised through linear interpolation.
Number of interpolation Data model Maximum number of interpolation points for ...
points
1 profile 2 profiles 4 profiles 8 profiles
Relative 2048 1024 512 256
Absolute 512 256 128 64
6.10−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Entry of basic motion profile data 6.10.3
6.10.3 Entry of basic motion profile data
2
3
4
9300kur031
Procedure
1. Click on field (1) and enter the number of profiles to be transferred to the drive.
l A motion profile can consist of 1, 2, 4 or 8 profiles.
l A profile can consist of a maximum of 5 sections.
2. Enter the length in X direction (cycle length) of each profile in the fields of column (2).
3. Enter the starting point in Y direction of each profile in the fields of column (3).
l Unit: s_units
4. Enter the final profile value in Y direction of each profile in the fields of column (4).
l Unit: s_units
5. Define the source for the starting point in Y direction.
l The field Initial point of import file selected" (5) is activated:
– The first Y value of the import file is transferred to the field Starting point: First
Y−value" (3).
l The field Initial point of import file selected" (5) is not activated:
– The value entered in field Starting point: First Y−value" (3) is used.
Note!
Observe when distributing the interpolation points that not
more than 2 interpolation points/ms will be crossed at maximum
system speed.
6.10.4 Profile data import
The profile data to be imported must be given in the form of interpolation

point tables according to the VDI Guideline 2143 "Motion rules for cam
mechanisms".
The files required can be generated using a CAD system, the Lenze
CAMDesigner or a similar software.
ƒ The profile data must be given in the form of an ASCII file with the
ending *.txt.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.10−3

6 Commissioning
6.10.4 Profile data import
ƒ Each line contains the X and Y position of an interpolation point.

ƒ For the decimal sign a comma or a point can be used.
ƒ Between the two position specifications, there can be one or several
separators (space or tab character).
ƒ After the two position specifications, an optional comment can follow
in the same line separated at least by a separator and two slashes (//).
ƒ There can be space lines between the position specifications.
ƒ The interpolation points must be sorted in ascending order of the X
positions.
ƒ The file must at least contain two interpolation points.
2
3
4
5
6
9300kur053
Fig. 6.10−3 Cam editor" dialog box
Procedure
1. Click on field (1) and enter the number of the profile for which you want to import the
data.
2. Select the ASCII file (*.txt) to be imported.
l Enter the path and the file name in field (2) or
l click on the "Search" button (3). In the "Select import file" dialog box you can select the
file directly.
After the file has been selected, the following is displayed:
l Field (4): The number of value pairs (interpolation points) found.
l Field (5): The minimum values in X and Y direction.
l Field (6): The maximum values in X and Y direction
3. Click on button (8) to display the profiles in another dialog box. From this dialog box, the
profiles can be printed.
4. Click on button (7) to calculate the profiles. At the same time it is checked whether there
are faulty entries (e.g. discontinuity of the profile) and whether all required conditions are
met.
6.10−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Mathematical specification of profiles 6.10.5
6.10.5 Mathematical specification of profiles
Note!
For the mathematical selection the profile editor provides the
cam profiles according to VDI 2143 (5th degree polynomial,
inclined sinusoidal curve and rest phase).
10
1
2
3 9
8
5
6
9300kur054
Procedure
1. Activate the "mathematical" selection (3).
2. Click on field (1) and enter the number of the profile you want to create.
3. Click on field (2) and enter the number of profile sections the profile is to have.
4. Select a profile shape for each profile section in fields (4).
5. Enter the length of each profile section in fields (8).
l The first section always starts at X = 0. The last section ends at X = Xmax.
6. Enter the number of interpolation points for each profile section in fields (7).
Note!
l The number of interpolation points available depends on the data model used.
l For the Rest phase" profile shape, the number of interpolation points is automatically
selected.
7. In fields (5) enter the values in the mathematical functions for the profile shapes.
l The sections are automatically joined to form a profile and converted to the motor
motion in the background.
l Click on the "Display profile" button (10) to display the profile.
8. If you have selected "Import data" for a profile section, click on the "Search" button (6). In
the "Select import file" dialog box you can then select the file directly.
9. Click on the "Check profile" button (9) to calculate the profiles. At the same time it is
checked whether there are faulty entries (e.g. discontinuity of the profile) and whether all
required conditions are met.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.10−5

6 Commissioning
6.10.6 Saving of motion profiles
6.10.6 Saving of motion profiles
Saving of the motion profile

in the profile editor using the
parameter set
9300std232
Fig. 6.10−5 "Drive parameters" menu
ƒ Execute Drive parameters Write all parameter sets to file ... in the
menu.
ƒ Select the drive and the directory in which the parameter set is to be
saved.
– The parameter set is saved in a GDC file.
– At the same time the profile data are saved in an LCA file.
ƒ When you load a saved parameter set in GDC with the Drive
parameters Read all parameter sets from file ... command, you are
automatically asked if you want to load the profile data from the
corresponding LCA file.
6.10−6 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Application example − generation of feed profiles 6.10.7
External saving of the motion

profile in the profile editor
9300kur073
Fig. 6.10−6 Dialog boxes "Cam editor" and "Basic cam data"
ƒ Saving the motion profile for the transfer from the PLC/IPC to the
controller
Click on the "Save cam data" button (2) to save the motion profile in an
LC7 file.
– The profile data is saved in 64−bit format.
ƒ Saving the motion profile independently of the parameter set in a file
Click on the "Store data to file" button (1) to save the motion profile in an
LCD file.
To reload a saved motion profile to the parameter set, click on the "File
load" button (3).
6.10.7 Application example − generation of feed profiles
Generation of a motion y
profile consisting of a single s_units
profile 1
180
0 x
0 360 m_units
9300kur058
Fig. 6.10−7 Profile characteristic for a feed movement
To avoid jolts of the drive, do not start the motion profile with a starting
point y0 ¹ 0. To ensure this, do not change the default value "0" of the profile
in the "Starting point: First Y−value" column.
The factory−set motion profiles always start with x0=0 / y0=0 (see arrow).
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.10−7

6 Commissioning
6.10.7 Application example − generation of feed profiles
Generation of a motion Up to eight curve profiles can be combined in a motion profile. During
profile consisting of several
profiles
operation, the motion profile is generated by cyclically processing the single
curve profiles. Due to this, there may also be profile sections with starting
values y0 ¹ 0 (Fig. 6.10−8).
Stop!
For a jerk−free transition, the lifting and the gradient of the
cyclically successive profile sections must correspond.
y
s_units 1
180
0 x
0 360 m_units
y
s_units 1
180
0 x
0 360 m_units
9300kur059
Fig. 6.10−8 Transition between two profiles processed cyclically one after the other
Procedure
1. Select a basic configuration that matches your application.
2. Activate the automatic curve profile switching by setting CDATA−Cycle = HIGH
(C1322/1 = Fixed1).
3. Set the start profile under C1311 and the switching range under C1312.
4. Deactivate the feed function by setting CDATA−REL−SEL = LOW (C1322/3 = Fixed0).
5. Activate the asynchronous stretching/compression of the Y axis by setting C1313 = 0.
6.10−8 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Transfer of motion profiles 6.11
Transfer methods 6.11.1
6.11 Transfer of motion profiles
6.11.1 Transfer methods
1
EVS93xx-xK
CDATA
0
EEPROM
C0003 C0002
*.LC7
RAM1 MCTRL
2 CDATA-LOAD = HIGH
3 RAM2
C0387
*.LC7
9300kur072
Fig. 6.11−1 Different transfer methods
Transfer of profile data Description

From To
GDC (cam editor) Þ Controller Transfer of profile data created in the "cam editor" of 6.11−3
GDC to the background data field (RAM2) of the
controller. Subsequent transfer of data to the active data
field (RAM1).
GDC (basic data) Û Controller Loading of profile data from the controller to GDC via the 6.11−3
"Basic cam data" dialog box. Subsequent transfer of data
from GDC to other controllers.
PLC/IPC Þ Controller Transfer of profile data from GDC (*.LC7) or CamDesigner 6.11−3
(*.txt) to the PLC or IPC. Subsequent transfer of data to the
controller:
l Block transfer 6.11−4
l Interpolation−point−oriented transfer 6.11−6
l Code−oriented transfer 13.1−1
– Due to the complexity of this transfer method not
recommended by Lenze.
Controller Þ PLC/IPC Block transfer 6.11−9
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.11−1

6 Commissioning
6.11.2 Background data field and active data field
6.11.2 Background data field and active data field
EVS93xx-xK
CDATA
EEPROM
C0003 C0002
RAM1 MCTRL
M
3~
CDATA-LOAD = HIGH
RAM2
9300kur075
Fig. 6.11−2 Active data field (RAM1) and background data field (RAM2)
ƒ Background data field (buffer storage RAM2)

During operation, the controller can already save new profile data in the
buffer storage (e.g.for preparing a product change−over). This profile
data is not yet active.
ƒ Active data field (main memory RAM1)
Profile data in this data field is immediately active. If you accept profile
data, the active data in the main memory will be overwritten.
Inhibit the controller (X5/28 = LOW) before loading profile data into the
main memory to prevent uncontrolled motor movements.
As long as the controller is enabled, you may only accept profile data
which − compared to the active profile data −
– has slightly changed in the start and end point,
– has the same number of interpolation points,
– has the same distribution of interpolation points,
– has the same data model.
6.11−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Transfer of profile data from GDC to the controller 6.11.3
6.11.3 Transfer of profile data from GDC to the controller
Transfer of data created with

the cam editor to the
controller
1
2
9300kur073
Procedure
1. Click on the "Transfer data" button (1) to transfer the profile data to the background data
field (RAM2) of the controller.
l The data of all profiles created are transferred. The transmission takes approx.
1 ... 2 minutes.
Important!
Transfer the parameter set with the gearbox and feed constants first and then the profile
data.
2. Click on the "Accept data" button (2) to accept the transferred profile data in the active
data field (RAM1) of the controller.
Note!
Via PLC/IPC you can accept the profile data with the CDATA−LOAD" command (C1322/7).
Data transfer between

controllers
2
3
9300kur031
Procedure
1. Click on the "Profile upload" button (1) to transfer the profile data from the active data
field (RAM1) of the controller to GDC.
Important!
Do not process the profile data in the editor!
The conversion of profile data is inexact because in the controller the profile data is stored
in the 32−bit format, while the editor works with the 64−bit format.
2. Click on the "CAM download" button (3) to transfer the profile data to the active data
field (RAM1) of a controller.
3. If required, click on the "CAM store" button (2) to save the profile data in an LC7 file
(formatted in ASCII).
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.11−3

6 Commissioning
6.11.4 Transfer of profile data from the PLC/IPC to the controller
Block transfer For transferring data to the controller, the PLC / IPC needs the profile data to
be provided in the ASCII format (*.LC7). The following sources can be used:
ƒ Profile data generated with the cam editor
– The profile data generated with the cam editor can be saved in the
LC7 format in an ASCII file. ( 6.10−7)
ƒ Profile data of the controller
– Load the profile data set of the active data field (RAM1) to GDC.
( 6.11−3)
– This data transfer does not include the version identifier. The version
identifier can be used to ensure that the profile data set matches the
controller version.
– Read out the version identifier under C0506/1 and enter this value in
the first line of the profile data set.
Profile data set (example)
Line Data Meaning
1 100 Version identifier
2 4293787648 Profile data
... ... Profile data
1234 4294641604 Profile data
1242 0 Profile data
1243 55932 Checksum
Stop!
The drive may carry out uncontrolled movements if the version
level of the profile data set to be transferred does not correspond
with the version level under C0506/1.
Procedure
1. Use C0387 to select whether the profile data is to be transferred to the
background data field or to the active data field of the controller.
2. Read out the version identifier under C0506/1 and compare this value
with the value in line 1 of the *.LC7 file.
The two values must be identical.
3. Transfer the value "0" to C0505/2. This sets the pointer in the
controller to the beginning of the profile data set.
Then lines 2 ... 1242 of the profile data set are written to C0504/2 in the
form of 32−bit values.
The controller must acknowledge each transfer with the ACK" message.
Only then the next data can be transferred.
4. Check for correct transmission by using the checksum.
Write the checksum of the transferred profile set (value in the last line) to
6.11−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Transfer of profile data from the PLC/IPC to the controller 6.11.4
C0509 to check for correct transmission.

The controller compares the checksum entered under C0509 and the
checksum of the received profile data set:
– Error−free transmission: CDATA−CHK−ERR = LOW
– Faulty transmission: CDATA−CHK−ERR = HIGH and message CDA"
(see chapter "Troubleshooting and fault elimination")
5. Check whether the last sent data has been transferred. Read out the
value under C0504/2 and compare it with the value in the
second−to−last line of the profile data set.
This does not affect the pointer in the controller.
Note!
ƒ C0505 can only be transferred by a control (PLC or Lenze Drive
PLC). It cannot by addressed via GDC.
ƒ With the exception of the version identifier and the checksum,
every line must be transferred.
ƒ Each line may only be transferred once because the pointer in
the controller automatically jumps to the next element of the
profile data table after a transfer.
ƒ If an error occurs during transmission, the entire transmission
process has to be repeated.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.11−5

6 Commissioning
Interpolation−point−oriented
transfer
Stop!
Damage to the cam drive!
ƒ The acceptance of profile data in the active data field can
cause uncontrolled movements of the cam drive.
ƒ Inhibit the controller (X5/28 = LOW) before accepting the
profile data in the active data field.
Preparing the transfer
1. Set the "absolute" data model for the basic data of GDC.
2. Create a motion profile with the required number of profiles in GDC.
Transfer the motion profile to the controller.
3. Accept the profile data in the active data set. For this purpose set
C0389 = 1.
4. Select the background data field with C0387 = 1.
– Always change the profile data in the background data field to avoid
damaging the cam drive. Profile data is only active if it is accepted in
the active data field.
– In the active data field (C0387 = 0) you may only change those
profiles which are not being processed (see function block CDATA,
output CDATA−ACTCAM).
– See also chapter "Acceptance of reloaded profile data".
5. Only enter the number of profiles in C0390 if the number of profiles to
be stored differs from the number defined in GDC.
6. Only enter the number of interpolation points in C0391 if the number
of interpolation points required differs from the number defined in
GDC.
7. Define the input format for the profile data:
– User units [units]. This is a fixed point format with a maximum of 4
decimal places. Observe that the value must be multiplied by the
factor 10000. The data is transferred to the controller in [units] and
then converted to increments.
– Increments [inc]
Transferring profile data
1. Select the profile to be changed (0 ... 7) under C0502/1.
2. Start the profile data download by entering the first interpolation point
to be specified in X direction (C0505/3).
– Constant overwriting of code C0505/3 or C0505/4 with the
corresponding point number {(0 ... n−1) for n points} means that every
point of the profile can be addressed separately.
6.11−6 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Transfer of profile data from the PLC/IPC to the controller 6.11.4
Y
Y11
X Y Y10
X1 Y1 Y9
X2 Y2
X3 Y3
Y8
… …
… …
… …
X11 Y11 Y7
Y6
Y5
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 X11 X
9300kur060
Fig. 6.11−5 Example of a profile with absolute data model (assignment of the X/Y value pairs)
3. Reading or writing of X data:

– Writing as increments with C0504/3 or reading as increments with
C0504/5.
– Writing as units with C0511/1 or reading as units with C0511/2.
4. Enter the first interpolation point to be specified in Y direction
(C0505/4)
– Constant overwriting of code C0505/3 or C0505/4 with the
corresponding point number {(0 ... n−1) for n points} means that every
point of the profile can be addressed separately.
5. Reading or writing of Y data:
– Writing as increments [inc] with C0504/4 or reading as increments
with C0504/6.
– Writing as user units [units] with C0512/1 or reading as user units
with C0512/2.
Note!
Wait for ACK" from the system before you write the next X
value.
The next higher interpolation point is automatically addressed
after a writing or reading process (auto increments).
You can either write all X values and then all Y values or write
one each. Condition:
ƒ X0 must always be zero. All other values will be rejected.
ƒ Y0 is the starting point of the profile.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.11−7

6 Commissioning
Checking the X axis
9300kur033
Fig. 6.11−6 Checking the X axis of the profile
Note!
The data for the X axis must be entered in ascending order.
Otherwise the drive may operate incorrectly (e.g. CCR trip) or
execute uncontrolled movements.
The entry of data in X direction is checked with code
C0501/1 = 0:
ƒ Correct entry: The controller responds with the "ACK"
message.
ƒ Faulty entry: The controller responds with the
"INV_VALUE_RANGE" message (error number 13). Code
C0501/1 contains the faulty interpolation point. Further error
messages can be found in chapter "Troubleshooting and fault
elimination".
Excerpt from the attribute table
Code Index DS DA DT Format DL LCM−R Condition
/W
dec hex
C0387 24188 5E7C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0389 24186 5E7A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0390 24185 5E79 A 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0501 24074 5E0A A 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0502 24073 5E09 A 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/W
C0504 24071 5E07 A 6 U32 VH 4 Ra/W
C0505 24070 5E06 A 4 U32 VH 4 Ra/W
C0511 24064 5E00 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W
C0512 24063 5DFF A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W
C1317 23258 5ADA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa CINH
6.11−8 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Transfer of profile data from the controller to the PLC/IPC 6.11.5
6.11.5 Transfer of profile data from the controller to the PLC/IPC
EVS9300EK
CDATA
EEPROM
C0003 C0002
M
RAM1 MCTRL 3~
CDATA-LOAD = HIGH
RAM2
C0387
9300kur028
Fig. 6.11−7 Transfer of profile data from the controller to the PLC/IPC (principle)
1. Use C0387 to select whether the profile data in the background data
field or in the active data field of the controller is to be read.
2. Read out the version identifier under C0506/1. Enter the version
identifier in line 1 of the profile data set.
3. Transfer the value "0" to C0505/1. This sets the pointer in the
controller to the beginning of the profile data set.
Then lines 2 to 1242 of the profile data set in C0504/1 are read as 32−bit
values and written to the PLC / the IPC.
The controller must acknowledge each transfer with the ACK" message.
Only then the next data can be requested.
4. Check for correct transmission by using the checksum.
5. Compare the checksum in C0509 with the value in the last line of the
profile data set transferred. For fault−free transmission the two values
are identical.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.11−9

6 Commissioning
6.11.5 Transfer of profile data from the controller to the PLC/IPC
Profile data set (example)

Line Data Meaning
1 100 Version identifier
1234 4294641604 Profile data
1242 0 Profile data
1243 55932 Checksum
Note!
ƒ C0505 can only be transferred by a control (PLC or Lenze Drive
PLC). C0505 cannot be addressed via GDC.
ƒ Every line must be read.
ƒ Each line may only be read once because the pointer in the
controller automatically jumps to the next element of the
profile data table after a transfer.
ƒ Repeat the entire transmission process if an error occurs
during the transmission.
Extract from the table of attributes
Code Index DS DA DT Format DL LCM− Condition
R/W
dec hex
C0387 24188 5E7Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 RA/W special
C0504/x 24071 5E07h A 2 U32 VH 4 RA/W special
C0505/x 24070 5E06h A 2 B32 VH 4 RA/W special
C0506/x 24069 5E05h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 RA
C0509 24066 5E02h E 1 B32 VH 4 RA/W
6.11−10 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Acceptance of reloaded profile data 6.12
6.12 Acceptance of reloaded profile data
Stop!
When the controller is enabled, you may only transfer profile
data from the background data field (RAM2) to the active data
field (RAM1) if
ƒ the new profile data has only been changed slightly,
ƒ the number of profiles and the number of interpolation points
remains unchanged.
Adjustment In C1317 you can select the mode for the profile data being transferred from
the background data field (RAM2) to the active data field (RAM1).
ƒ C1317 = 0
– Profile data are accepted with the controller being inhibited
(X5/28 = LOW) (Lenze setting).
ƒ C1317 = 1
– Profile data are accepted with the controller being enabled ("set−up
in the gap").
– The drive may switch to the new profile via the following error
(maximum torque). The best option for changeover is a rest phase or
a phase in which the profile data remains unchanged.
C1303/2 C1304 data

C1305/x C1306 analysis
C1322/7 CDATA−LOAD & C1301/x

C1323/7
RSP C1317 C1315/x
C1316/x
Fig. 6.12−1 Wiring of C1317 in the CDATA function block
ƒ The profile data is accepted at CDATA−LOAD = HIGH. The signal must be

applied for at least 50 ms.
ƒ During the acceptance CDATA−BUSY−LOAD is HIGH
ƒ The acceptance is completed when there is a HIGH−LOW edge at
CDATA−BUSY−LOAD.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.12−1

6 Commissioning
6.12 Acceptance of reloaded profile data
Fig. 6.12−2 Diagram for acceptance of profile data with CDATA−LOAD = HIGH
6.12−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Activation/deactivation of password protection 6.13
Master PIN 6.13.1
6.13 Activation/deactivation of password protection
6.13.1 Master PIN
Always assign a master pin if you want to ensure safe access protection for
the profile data in the controller. Keep the master pin carefully.
With the master pin you can deactivate all types of access protection. It
overrides the user pin.
Assignment of master pin 1. Enter a number between 1 and 65535 under C0503/2.
2. Save the master pin non−volatilely in the parameter set with C0003 = 1.
Deactivation of access ƒ Enter the master pin under C0503/2.
protection
Note!
Code C0503/2 is not available in GDC. This code can be accessed
via the PLC or the keypad.
6.13.2 User PIN
If the user pin (personal identification number) is activated, access to profile

data is restricted or prevented completely.
ƒ Select the access protection for the profile data under C0499:
– C0499 = 0: Writing and reading of profile data is not possible (Lenze
setting).
– C0499 = 1: Reading of profile data is not possible.
– C0499 = 2: Writing of profile data is not possible.
Note!
Activate the read protection (C0499 = 1) for applications with
more than 8 profiles. The profiles can then be reloaded (via an
external control), but not be read out.
Activation of access 1. Enter a number between 1 and 65535 under C0503/1.

protection
2. Save the user pin non−volatilely in the parameter set with C0003 = 1.
ƒ Possible settings of C0503/1:
– C0503/1 = 9999: Access protection activated. No master pin assigned.
– C0503/1 = 9998: Access protection activated. Master pin assigned.
– C0503/1 = 0: Access protection deactivated.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.13−1

6 Commissioning
6.13 Activation/deactivation of password protection
6.13.2 User PIN
Deactivation of access 1. Enter the user pin under C0503/1.

protection
– If the entry is correct, "0" is displayed in C0503/1.
– If the entry is not correct, "9999" or "9998" is displayed in C0503/1.
Access is denied.
Note!
If you enter the user pin wrong two times, the access protection
cannot be deactivated with the user pin anymore.
To deactivate the access protection proceed as follows:
ƒ Enter the master pin under C0503/2. ( 6.13−1)
ƒ Load the Lenze setting.
– All profile data in the controller is deleted!
6.13−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Commissioning examples 6.14
Replacement of a mechanical cam 6.14.1
6.14 Commissioning examples
6.14.1 Replacement of a mechanical cam
Description A mechanical cam is to be replaced by the electronic cam" technology

function from Lenze. For this purpose, the outer dimensions of the
’mechanical’ cam must be numerically described by value pairs. These value
pairs must then be stored in the controller.
The source data for the numerical description of the cam profile can be
generated in two ways from already existing data:
ƒ Profile import
ƒ Mathematical profile specification
For this example the "profile import" method is used. The source data comes
from an already existing ASCII file. The X/Y value pairs contained in the file
must be arranged in alternating order of X and Y values. The X/Y value pairs
must be separated by tabulators, commas or semicolons (see also chapter
"Mathematical specification of profiles").
All commissioning steps, including parameter setting, are carried out using
the Global Drive Control" (GDC) program.
j
r
j r
r1
j r1
jn / rn
j r2
jn rn
13.53 Hz
j
r
Fig. 6.14−1 Retrofitting of a mechanical cam
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.14−1

6 Commissioning
6.14.2 Multi−axis application
Adjustment
Stop!
ƒ The sequence listed in the below table must be observed
when commissioning the drive.
ƒ Create or load the parameter set before the profile data are
transferred!
Section Action Description

Switch on 1. Inhibit controller (X5/28 = LOW). 6.3−1
controller 2. Apply digital terminal signals.
3. Apply analog input signals.
4. Switch on mains supply.
The controller is ready for operation after approx. 1 s
(2 s for drives with SinCos encoder with serial
interface).
Start GDC 5. Start GDC.
6. Set communication parameters for online operation
in the "Actual drive" dialog box and confirm with
"OK".
7. Select controller in the "Assign device description to
the Basic Unit" dialog box. Confirm with "OK".
Generate 8. Adapt controller to the mains. 6.5−2
parameter set 9. Enter motor data. 6.5−5
10.Enter machine constants. 6.5−3
Basic profile data 11.Define the data model. 6.10−2
12.Define the number of profiles required. 6.10−3
13.Enter all necessary data for the profiles required.
Create profiles 14.Open the "Cam editor" dialog box of GDC. 6.10−3
15.Import the profile data / enter the mathematical 6.10−5
formula for the description of the profile.
16.Save profile data to a storage medium
17.Protect profile data by password.
Load basic 18.Load the basic "Cam profiler" configuration with
configuration C0005 = 10000.
19.Adapt basic configuration to the application.
20.Save the settings in the controller with C0003 = 1.
Important notes ƒ With the controllers of firmware version 2.2 and higher, multi−axis
applications can be implemented.
ƒ From GDC version 3.6 onwards, the "Electronic cam" function is
available.
ƒ Load the basic configuration C0005 = 10xxx on all controllers.
ƒ Always parameterise and configure only one controller at a time with
GDC. GDC may then only communicate with this controller.
ƒ Do not change the described commissioning sequence.
ƒ Read the chapter "Before switching on" before switching on the
controller.
6.14−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Multi−axis application 6.14.2
Description ƒ The line shaft is the connecting element between mechanical cams.
ƒ With the 9300 servo cam profiler the connection between the drives is
implemented via the system bus (CAN):
– The motion sequence of the communicating drives resulting from the
workpiece to be manufactured is identical.
– The user benefits from a very flexible machine concept.
A A
Fig. 6.14−2 Comparison between mechanical and electronic cam

Workpiece to be machined
Line shaft
A HMI
C GDC
D E F
Fig. 6.14−3 Networking of master drive and slave drives via the system bus (CAN)
Machine control (PLC or IPC)
Fieldbus
System bus (CAN)
Master drive (virtual line shaft)
Slave drive
Slave drive
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.14−3

6 Commissioning
Basic settings for system bus

(CAN)
9300std225
Fig. 6.14−4 "Management" menu of the parameter menu
Procedure
1. Change to the "Management" menu.
2. Set the node address of the controller under C0350.
l C0350 = 1: Master
l C0350 = 2: Slave 1. The address is increased by 1 for every further slave.
3. Set the baud rate under C0351.
l The baud rate must be set identically for all controllers. (Recommended: 500 kbps for a
cable length of up to 100 m)
4. Set CAN master operation under C0352.
l C0352 = 1: Master
l C0352 = 0: Slave
5. Save the settings with C0003 = 1.
6. When the configuration has been completed, plug in terminal X4 on all controllers.
7. Execute a ’reset node’ (C0358 = 1) via the master to make the settings effective.
l Alternatively you can switch off the mains and − if used − the external 24V supply and
then switch the supply(ies) on again.
8. Click on C0359 and check the bus state.
l If "Operational" (C0359 = 0) is displayed, all parameters are set correctly.
6.14−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Multi−axis application 6.14.2
Settings for CAN master
9300std226
Fig. 6.14−5 "CAN−Master" menu of the parameter menu
Procedure
1. Change to the "CAN−Master" menu.
2. Set C0353/2 = 0 (own address C354).
3. Set a cycle time of 1 ms under C0356/2.
4. Set C0366 = 0 (no sync response). This reduces the load on the bus.
5. Set the time interval between two sent sync telegrams under C0369.
Rule of thumb: 5 ms
6. Configure the CAN output word CAN−OUT2.W1 (low angle) under C864/2 and the CAN
output word CAN−OUT2.W2 (high angle) under C0865/2 .
7. If possible, locate the function block CAN−OUT2 at the end of the processing table.
8. Link the output CDATA−X−ACT to the input CAN−OUT2−D1.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.14−5

6 Commissioning
Settings for CAN slave The following settings have to be carried out for all slaves.
9300std227
Fig. 6.14−6 "CAN−Slave" menu of the parameter menu
Procedure
1. Change to the "CAN−Slave" menu.
2. Set C0353/2 = 1 (extra address C354).
l This setting "links" the slaves to the address of the master.
3. Enter the value from C0354/4 (CAN master) under C0354/3.
4. Set C0366 = 0 (no sync response). This reduces the load on the bus.
5. Set C0369 = 0.
l This setting prevents the slave drives from sending sync telegrams.
6. Set C1120 = 1 (CAN sync activated). This setting activates the sync telegram
synchronisation.
7. Set the time interval at which the slave is to receive the sync telegrams from the master
under C1121.
l The time interval must be identical to the time interval set under C0369 (CAN Sync Tx
time" of the master).
l See section "Master settings": 5 ms
8. Set C1332 = 1. The master value is provided by CDATA−XIN.
9. If possible, locate the function block SYNC2 at the beginning of the processing table.
10. Link the output CAN−IN2.D1 to the input CDATA−XIN.
11. If you do not use the function block CAN−OUTx, check that the CAN−OUT address used is
not identical to the one used by the master.
l The function blocks CAN−INx are entered in the processing table by default.
6.14−6 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Commissioning 6
Handwheel function 6.15
6.15 Handwheel function
The handwheel function facilitates set−up and commissioning of the

system.
To avoid damage of the machine, the line shaft is moved slowly by hand
during the set−up process, while the operator checks the interaction of the
axes coupled via the line shaft.
0 HMI
1
2
3 3
9300kur067
Fig. 6.15−1 Handwheel function of 9300 servo cam profiler

PLC/IPC
Fieldbus
Virtual master
Slave
System bus (CAN)
Handwheel function of the electronic cam:

ƒ To X9 of the master, a simple incremental encoder is connected as a
handwheel.
ƒ In order to process the incremental encoder signals, function blocks
have to be interconnected in the master (see Fig. 6.15−2).
– It may be necessary to adapt the interconnection to your application.
ƒ The handwheel determines the angle of rotation for master and slaves
(line shaft").
ƒ The cams similarly follow the rotation speed and direction of the
handwheel.
ƒ The 9300 servo cam profiler can be easily and quickly optimised for
your application.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 6.15−1

6 Commissioning
6.15 Handwheel function
DFIN
X9/DIGSET-IN OUT
SWPHD1
IN1 OUT
DIGIN4 SET
IN2
CLUTCH2
DIGIN3 CLOSE OPEN STAT.B0
CAN-IN2.D1 PHI-SET NSET
PHI-ACT
LEN
CDATA
FIXED 100% XFACT X-ACT
FCODE-1476/16 TP-POS ACTLEN
DFIN
9300kur042
Fig. 6.15−2 Function block interconnection for handwheel function
6.15−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Parameter setting 7
Contents
7 Parameter setting
Contents
7.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1−1

7.2.8 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−10
7.2.9 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−11
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 7−1

Parameter setting 7
Important notes 7.1
7.1 Important notes
Adapting the controller The controller functions can be adapted to your applications by means of
functions to the application parameterisation. You can either parameterise via keypad, PC or via the
parameter channel of a bus system.
The function library contains a detailed description of the functions, the
signal flow diagrams contain all configurable signals.
Parameters and codes The parameters for the functions are stored in numbered codes:
ƒ Codes are marked in the text with a "C" (e.g. C0002).
ƒ The code table provides a quick overview of all codes. The codes are
sorted according to their numbers and can be used as reference.
( 8.4−1)
Parameter setting via keypad A quick parameter setting is provided by the keypad XT. Moreover, it serves
as status display, error diagnosis and transfer of parameters to other drive
controllers.
Keypad XT
EMZ9371BC
Can be used with 8200 vector, 8200 motec, starttec, Drive PLC,
9300 vector, 9300 servo
Operator buttons 8
Plain text display yes
Menu structure yes
Configurable menu (user menu") yes
Predefined basic configurations yes
Non−volatile memory for parameter transfer yes
Password protection yes
Diagnosis terminal Keypad XT in handheld design, IP 20
(E82ZBBXC)
Installation in control cabinet no
Type of protection IP 20
Detailed description 7.2−1
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 7.1−1

7 Parameter setting
7.1 Important notes
Parameter setting via PC You need the parameter setting / operating software »Global Drive Control«
(GDC) or »Global Drive Control easy« (GDC easy) and an interface for
communication:
ƒ Interface for system bus (CAN) (preset in GDC):
– PC system bus adapter
ƒ Serial interface for LECOM:
– Communication module LECOM−A/B (RS232/RS485)
EMF2102IB−V001
The parameter setting /operating software of the Global Drive Control
family are easy−to−understand and tools for the operation, parameter
setting and diagnostics or Lenze drive controllers.
GDC easy GDC
ESP−GDC2−E ESP−GDC2
Supply Free download from the Program package must be
internet at charged for
www.lenze.com
Operation in interactive mode yes yes
Comprehensive help functions yes yes
Menu "Short setup" yes yes
Monitor windows for displaying yes yes
operating parameters and for
diagnostic purposes
Saving and printing of parameter yes yes
settings as code list
Loading of parameter files from the yes yes
controller to the PC
Storing of parameter files from the PC yes yes
in the controller
Function block editor no yes
Technology functions for 9300 Servo no yes
Oscilloscope function for 9300 Servo no yes
and 9300 vector
Detailed description Online help of the Online help of the
program program
Parameter setting via bus Detailed information can be found in the documentation of the
system corresponding bus system.
7.1−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Parameter setting 7
General data and operating conditions 7.2.1
dcbBA
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
0050 00
50.00_Hz
MCTRL-NOUT
b0
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
a c
9371BC011
Feature Values
Dimensions
Width a 60 mm
Height b 73.5 mm
Depth c 15 mm
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Enclosure IP 20
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 7.2−1

7 Parameter setting
Lx
xx
W
2Z
A
E8
B 00
b 50
c 00 Hz
Menu
0_
d p
Code
Para .0 dcbBA
RG
SHP 50 T
U SHPRG p Menu
NO 0050 00
UV
Code
L-
Para
TR 50.00_Hz
ST
MC
MCTRL-NOUT
zZ
S T
U V
Yy z
Y Z
y
EMZ9371BC
dcbBA
SHPRG p
Code
Para
Menu
0050 00
GLOBAL DRIVE
E82ZBBXC
Init
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
d
0050 00 0 BA
dcb
50.00 Hz
20 %
1
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y 2 3
d
0050 00
50.00 Hz
20 %
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
9371BC018
Fig. 7.2−1 Installation and commissioning of XT EMZ9371BC keypad or E82ZBBXC diagnosis

terminal
0 4
1 dcbBA 5
6
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
0050 00
2 50.00_Hz
3 MCTRL-NOUT 7
S T
U V
z 8
Y Z
y
9371BC002
Fig. 7.2−2 Display elements and function keys of the XT EMZ9371BC keypad
Displays Status displays of standard device

Ready for operation
The set current limit is exceeded in
motor or generator mode
7.2−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Parameter setting 7
Display elements and function keys 7.2.3

(Only active for operation with
standard devices of the 9300
series)
! Active fault
" Parameter is accepted immediately Standard device operates
immediately with the new
parameter value
SHPRG " Parameter must be acknowledged Standard device operates with the
with #$ new parameter value after being
acknowledged
SHPRG Parameter must be acknowledged in Standard device operates with the
case of controller inhibit #$ new parameter value after the
controller is enabled again
Active level
subcodes
Short text
alphanumeric Contents of the menus, meaning of
al the codes and parameters
In the operating level display of
C0004 in % and the active fault
Number
Menu level Menu number Display is only active for operation
Number
Menu level Submenu number Display is only active for operation
Parameter value
Cursor
Function keys
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 7.2−3

7 Parameter setting
Function keys
Note!
Shortcuts with #:
Press and hold #, then press the second key in addition.
Key Function
Change to the Change to the Change to the code

parameter level operating level level
Go to the
"Short setup" Accept parameters
#$ menu and load when SHPRG " or
predefined SHPRG is displayed
configurations 1)
% Change between Change of code Change of digit via
& menu items number cursor
Quick change
#$% Quick change of Quick change of
#&
between menu
code number digit via cursor
items
' Change between main menu, submenu Cursor to the right
( and code level Cursor to the left
) Deactivate the function of the key *, the LED in the key goes off
* Inhibit the controller, the LED in the key is lit.
Reset fault 1. Remove the cause of malfunction
(TRIP−Reset): 2. Press *
3. Press )
Note!
Your settings have an effect on the current parameters in the
main memory. You must save your settings in a parameter set so
that they are not lost when the mains are connected.
If you only need one parameter set, save your settings as
parameter set 1, since parameter set 1 is loaded automatically
after mains connection.
Step Key Action

sequence
1. Select the menu %&'( Use the arrow keys to select the desired
menu
2. Change to the code level ' Display of the first code in the menu
3. Select code or subcode &% Display of the current parameter value
5. When SHPRG is displayed, * 1) The drive coasts
inhibit the controller
6. Change parameter
A '( Move cursor below the digit to be changed
B &% Change of digit
7.2−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Parameter setting 7
Changing and saving parameters 7.2.4
Step Key Action

sequence
#& Quick change of digit
#%
Display of SHPRG or SHPRG " # Confirm change to accept the parameter
Display "OK"
Display " − The parameter has been accepted
immediately
8. Enable the controller, if ) 1) The drive runs again
required
B Display of the code with changed
parameter
A %&'( Select the code C0003 "PAR SAVE" in the
menu "Load/Store"
Select the parameter set C % Save as parameter set 1:
in which the parameters ð Set "1" "Save PS1"
are to be saved
permanently
D # When "OK" is displayed, the settings are
permanently saved in the selected
parameter set.
13. Set parameters for another Restart the "loop" with step 1. or 3.
parameter set
1) The function of the * key can be programmed:
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 7.2−5

7 Parameter setting
The keypad serves to load a saved parameter set into the main memory
when the controller is inhibited. After the controller is enabled, it operates
with the new parameters.
Danger!
ƒ When a new parameter set is loaded, the controller is
reinitialised and acts as if it had been connected to the mains:
– System configurations and terminal assignments can be
changed. Make sure that your wiring and drive configuration
comply with the settings of the parameter set.
ƒ Only use terminal X5/28 as source for the controller inhibit!
Otherwise the drive may start in an uncontrolled way when
switching over to another parameter set.
Note!
ƒ After switching on the supply voltage, the controller always
loads parameter set 1 into the main memory.
ƒ It is also possible to load other parameter sets into the main
memory via the digital inputs or bus commands.
Step Key Action

sequence
2. Load the saved parameter set
into the main memory
A %&'( Select the code C0002 "PAR LOAD" in the
menu "Load/Store"
The active parameter set is displayed, e. g.
If you want to restore the delivery status,
proceed with D
Select the parameter set C % Load parameter set 1:
to be loaded ð Set "1" "Load PS1"
D # "RDY" goes off. The parameter set is loaded
completely into the main memory if "RDY"
is displayed again.
The drive is running with the settings of
the loaded parameter set
7.2−6 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Parameter setting 7
Transferring parameters to other standard devices 7.2.6
Parameter settings can be easily copied from one standard device to another
by using the keypad.
Danger!
During the parameter transfer from the keypad to the standard
device the control terminals can adopt undefined states!
Therefore the plugs X5 and X6 must be disconnected from the
standard device before the transfer takes place. This ensures that
the controller is inhibited and all control terminals have the
defined state "LOW".
Copying parameter sets from

the standard device into the
keypad Note!
After copying the parameter sets into the XT keypad
(C0003 = 11), always the parameter set that was loaded last via
C0002 is activated.
ƒ Save the current parameters in the parameter set before
copying and load this parameter set in the controller via
C0002.
Step Key Action

sequence
standard device 1
The drive coasts.
3. Select C0003 in the %$&$'$( Select code C0003 "PAR SAVE" in the
5. Copy all parameter set into the The settings saved in the keypad are
keypad overwritten.
% Set "11" "Save extern"
6. Start copying #$ The "RDY" status display goes off. As
If "BUSY" goes off after approx. one
minute, all parameter sets were copied into
the keypad. The "RDY" status display is lit.
9. Remove keypad from standard
device 1
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 7.2−7

7 Parameter setting
Copying parameter sets fom Step Key Action

keypad into the standard sequence
device
standard device 2
The drive coasts
3. Pull the plugs X5 and X6 All control terminals have the defined
"LOW" status.
4. Select C0002 in the %$&$'$( Select code C0002 "PAR LOAD" in the
5. Change to the parameter level The active parameter set is shown, e. g.
6. Select the correct copy The settings saved in the standard device
function are overwritten.
l Copy all parameter sets available into the l The parameter set that was active
EEPROM of the standard device and save before copying is overwritten.
them permanently. l The parameters are not yet active after
copying. Select parameter set and load
it in the main memory. 7.2−6
% Set "20" "ext −> EEPROM"
l Copy individual parameter sets into the
main memory of the standard device.
% Copy parameter set 1 into the main
memory:
memory:
memory:
memory:
7. Start copying #$ The "RDY" status display goes off. As
If "BUSY" goes off, the parameter sets
selected were copied into the standard
device. The "RDY" status display is lit.
9. l If the function "Copy all %$&$'$( Select code C0003 "PAR SAVE" in the
parameter sets into the "Load/Store" menu using the arrow keys
EEPROM" (C0002 = 20) is and store the contents of the main
selected, they might have memory permanently.
to be loaded in the main
memory manually.
l If the function "Copy
individual parameter sets
into the main memory"
(C0002 = 1x) is selected,
they might have to be
saved permanently in the
EEPROM manually.
7.2−8 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Parameter setting 7
Activating password protection 7.2.7
Note!
ƒ If the password protection is activated (C0094 = 1 ... 9999), you
only have free access to the user menu.
ƒ To access the other menus, you must enter the password. By
this, the password protection is annulled until you enter a new
password.
ƒ Please observe that the password−protected parameters can
be overwritten as well when transferring the parameter sets
to other standard devices. The password is not transferred.
ƒ Do not forget your password! If you have forgotten your
password, it can only be reset via a PC or a bus system!
Activate password protection Step Key Action

sequence
1. Select the "USER menu" %&'( Change to the user menu using the arrow
keys
2. Change to the code level ' Display of code C0051 "MCTRL−NACT"
3. Select C0094 % Display of code C0094 "Password"
5. Set password
A % Select password (1 ... 9999)
B # Confirm password
7. Change to the "USER menu" ((&
You can only quit the user menu if you re−enter the password and confirm it with #$.
Remove password protection Step Key Action

sequence
1. Change to the code level in the '
user menu
2. Select C0094 % Display of code C0094 "Password"
3. Change to the parameter level Display "9999" = password protection is
active
4. Enter password
A & Set valid password
B # Confirm
The password protection is deactivated by
entering the password once again.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 7.2−9

7 Parameter setting
7.2.8 Diagnostics
7.2.8 Diagnostics
In the "Diagnostic" menu the two submenus "Actual info" and "History"
contain all codes for
In the operating level, more status messages are displayed. If several status
messages are active, the message with the highest priority is displayed.
Switch−on inhibit
STP5 9300 servo, System bus (CAN)
ECSxA/E:
STP6 C0040
QSP−term−Ext The MCTRL−QSP input of the MCTRL function block is on
HIGH signal.
QSP−CAN 9300 servo, System bus (CAN)
ECSxA:
7.2−10 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Parameter setting 7
Menu structure 7.2.9
For simple, user−friendly operation, the codes are clearly arranged in

function−related menus:
Display Display

The predefined applications depend on the type of the standard
device (frequency inverter, servo inverter, position controller, ...)

MCTRL Motor control
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 7.2−11

7 Parameter setting

Display Display
CAN−IN1
CAN object 1
CAN−OUT1
CAN−IN2
CAN object 2
CAN−OUT2
CAN−IN3
CAN object 3
CAN−OUT3

7.2−12 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Contents
8 Configuration
Contents
8.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1−1

8.2 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−1
8.2.1 Fault responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−1
8.2.4 Maximum speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−4
8.2.5 Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−4
8.2.8 Current load of motor (I2 x t monitoring: OC6, OC8) . . . . . . 8.2−7
8.2.10 DC−bus voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−11
8.2.11 External error (EEr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−11
8.3 Monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.31
8.4 Code table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4−1
8.5 Selection lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5−1
8.5.4 Selection list 4: Speed signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5−10
8.6 Table of attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6−1
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8−1

Configuration 8
Important notes 8.1
8.1 Important notes
The chapter "Configuration" consists of two parts.
System Manual Contents of the chapter "Configuration" in the System Manual:

ƒ Monitoring
ƒ Monitoring functions
ƒ Code table
ƒ Selection lists
ƒ Table of attributes
System Manual (Extension) Contents of the chapter "Configuration" in the System Manual (Extension):
ƒ Configuring with Global Drive Control (GDC)
ƒ Basic configurations
ƒ Operating modes
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.1−1

Configuration 8
Monitoring 8.2
Fault responses 8.2.1
8.2 Monitoring
Different monitoring functions ( 8.31) protect the drive system from

impermissible operating conditions.
If a monitoring function responds,
ƒ the set fault response is triggered to protect the drive and
ƒ the fault message is entered position 1 in the fault history buffer
(C0168/x, in case of ECSxP: C4168/x) ( 9.2−2).
8.2.1 Fault responses
Depending on the failure, one or more of the following responses are

possible:
Response Effects on the drive and the controller Danger warnings
TRIP l Switches the power outputs U, V, W to a high
(highest resistance until TRIP is reset.
priority) l The drive coasts (no control!).
l After TRIP reset, the drive accelerates to its
setpoint on the ramps set.
Message Switches the power outputs U, V, W to a high
resistance as long as the message is active.
l Short−t The drive coasts (no control!) as long
Danger!
The drive restarts
erm as the message is active. automatically when the
messa When the message is not pending message is not pending
ge anymore, the drive accelerates to its anymore.
£ 0.5 s setpoint with maximum torque.
l Longer The drive coasts (due to internal
messa controller inhibit) as long as the
ge message is active.
> 0.5 s If required, restart the drive.
FAIL−QSP If a fault occurs, the drive brakes to standstill
within the quick stop deceleration time (C0105).
Warning l Only display of the failure.
l The drive continues to operate in a controlled Stop!
manner.
As these responses have no
Off l No response on failures! Monitoring is effect on the drive behaviour,
deactivated. the drive can be destroyed.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.2−1

8 Configuration
8.2 Monitoring
9300std230
ƒ Click on the "Monitorings" button.
9300std233
Fig. 8.2−2 "Monitorings" dialog box
1. Click on a monitoring option. The configuration dialog box opens.

2. Select the desired response and confirm with ÕK˜.
8.2−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Monitoring 8.2
Monitoring times for process data input objects 8.2.3
8.2.3 Monitoring times for process data input objects
Each process data input object can monitor whether a telegram has been
received within a time set. As soon as a telegram arrives, the corresponding
monitoring time (C0357) is restarted ("retriggerable monoflop" function).
The following assignments are valid:
Setting the response to the monitoring:
The following can be set:
ƒ 0 = error (TRIP) − controller sets controller inhibit (CINH)
ƒ 2 = warning
ƒ 3 = monitoring is switched off
You can also use the signals as binary output signals, e. g. for the assignment
of the output terminal.
Bus off If the controller disconnects from the CAN bus due to faulty telegrams, the
"BusOffState" (CE4) signal is set.
"BusOffState" can trigger an error (TRIP) or warning (like CE1, CE2, CE3). You
can also switch the signal off. The response is set via C0595. You can also
assign the terminal output.
Reset node Changes with regard to the baud rates, the CAN node addresses, or the
addresses of process data objects are only valid after a reset node.
The reset node can be effected by:
ƒ A reconnection of the low−voltage supply
ƒ Reset node via the bus system
ƒ Reset node via C0358
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.2−3

8 Configuration
8.2 Monitoring
8.2.4 Maximum speed
8.2.4 Maximum speed
Stop!
Destruction of the drive!
ƒ If the fault is triggered, the drive is without torque.
ƒ In the event of an actual speed value encoder failure it is not
guaranteed that the monitoring responds.
ƒ Use a mechanical brake if necessary.
ƒ Special, system−specific measures are to be taken.
The NMAX fault is triggered if the system speed (MCTRL−NACT)

ƒ exceeds the value set under C0596 or
ƒ exceeds the maximum speed nmax (C0011) by twice the max. speed
value.
A fault initiates TRIP NMAX. Other responses cannot be set.
8.2.5 Motor
Overcurrent in the motor Fault OC1 is triggered if the motor current exceeds the 2.25−fold rated
cable (OC1)
controller current.
If a fault occurs, TRIP OC1 is triggered. Other responses cannot be set.
Earth fault in the motor cable The OC2 fault is triggered if

(OC2)
ƒ the motor has a short circuit to the frame,
ƒ one of the phases has a short circuit to the shield,
ƒ one of the phases has a short circuit to PE,
ƒ the capacitive charging current of the motor cable is too high.
Failure of a motor phase (LP1) If a current−carrying motor phase fails, a motor winding is broken or the
current limit value set in C0599 is too high, the LP1 fault is triggered.
The monitoring is not appropriate for field frequencies > 480 Hz and when
synchronous servo motors are used. Deactivate the monitoring at these
conditions.
The response to exceeding the thresholds can be set under C0597.
Note!
The monitoring can only be activated if the function block MLP1
is entered in the processing table (C0465).
8.2−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Monitoring 8.2
Controller current load (I x t monitoring) 8.2.6
8.2.6 Controller current load (I x t monitoring)
Ir
200 %
150 %
100 %
70 %
10 60 120 180 t [s]

9300std228
Fig. 8.2−3 I × t diagram

Ir Device output current
100 % continuous thermal current at C0022 £ 1.5 Ir
70 % continuous thermal current at C0022 > 1.5 Ir
The I × t monitoring monitors the current load of the controller. The current
load is calculated from the mean value of the motor current over the
acquisition period of 180 s.
The monitoring is set in such a way that the following operation modes are
possible:
ƒ Continuously with device output current = Ir.
ƒ £ 60 s with device output current £ 1.5 x Ir.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.2−5

8 Configuration
8.2 Monitoring
KTY at X7 or X8 The motor temperature is monitored by means of a KTY. Connect the

thermal sensor to the resolver cable at X7 or the encoder cable at X8.
ƒ Warning threshold (OH7) can be set via C0121
– The switch−on point is 5 °C below the threshold set.
ƒ Fixed warning threshold (OH3) = 150 °C
– The switch−on point is 135 °C.
The response for the case when the thresholds are exceeded can be defined
in:
ƒ C0584 (adjustable threshold)
ƒ C0583 (fixed threshold)
Stop!
With the setting C0583 = 3, monitoring is deactivated. The
motor temperature in C0063 shows 0 °C, even if C0584 = 2
(warning) is set.
Monitoring of the KTY at X7 The SD6 fault is triggered if there is a short or open circuit between X7/8 and
or X8
X7/9 or X8/5 and X8/8.
PTC thermistor or thermal The motor temperature is monitored with a PTC thermistor or thermal
contact (NC contact) at T1, T2
contact. Wire the temperature sensor to T1, T2.
ƒ Fixed warning threshold (OH8)
– The switch−off threshold and the hysteresis depend on the
temperature sensor (DIN 44081).
The response to exceeding the threshold can be set under C0585.
Stop!
Motor could be destroyed!
ƒ If the responses "Warning" or "Off" are set, the motor could be
destroyed by overload.
Protective measure:
ƒ Set the response "TRIP".
8.2−6 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Monitoring 8.2
Note!
currents.
switched.
threshold of 100 %.
Note!
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.2−7

8 Configuration
8.2 Monitoring
8.2.8.1 Forced ventilated or naturally ventilated motors


I2xt load
ȡ ȣ IMot
Ir
t + * (t) lnȧ1 * z ) 1
ȧ t
ǒ Ǔ
Ȣ Ȥ
I Mot
100
C0127 (OC8)

load of the motor
(Display: C0066)
ǒI I Ǔ ǒ1 * e Ǔ
2
Mot *t
N
L(t) + L Start
in C0120 (OC6) or C0127 (OC8).
diagram
120
100
50
0 t [s]
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
9300STD105
thresholds
T Time
8.2−8 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Monitoring 8.2
8.2.8.2 Self−ventilated motors

ventilated motors.
Warnings!
C0129/x.

1.1
1.0
1 C0129/2
0.9
3
0.8
2
0.7
0.6
0 C0129/1
0 n / nN
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
0.132
9300STD350

EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.2−9

8 Configuration
8.2 Monitoring
I2xt load
lnȧ1 * ȧ
T + * (t)
ǒ Ǔ
2
Ȣ Ȥ
I Mot
100
C0127 (OC8)
100% * C0129ń1 n
C0129ń2

load of the motor
(Display: C0066)
2
L(t) + 100% t
L(t) + L Start
Ǹ
t
e *t
in C0120 (OC6) or C0127 (OC8).
Via a temperature threshold, the heatsink temperature of the controller can

be monitored:
ƒ Adjustable threshold (OH4) under C0122
– The reset point is 5° C below the adjusted threshold.
ƒ Fixed threshold (OH) = 85° C
– The reset point is at 80° C.
The response for exceeding the adjustable threshold can be set under C0582.
8.2−10 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Monitoring 8.2
DC−bus voltage 8.2.10
8.2.10 DC−bus voltage
In C0173 the mains voltage and the DC−bus voltage are set. The switching
thresholds for overvoltage and undervoltage are based on these settings.
Selection Mains Braking Message LU Message OU
voltage unit (undervoltage) (overvoltage)
C0173 Set Reset Set Reset
[V AC] [V DC] [V DC] [V DC] [V DC]
0 < 400 Yes / no 285 430 770 755
1 400 Yes / no 285 430 770 755
2 400 ... 460 Yes / no 328 473 770 755
3 480 No 342 487 770 755
4 480 Yes 342 487 800 785
C0173 = 1: Lenze setting
Overvoltage If the DC−bus voltage exceeds the upper switch−off threshold set in C0173,
the OU message is triggered.
Undervoltage If the DC−bus voltage falls below the lower switch−off threshold set in C0173,
the LU message is triggered.
ƒ An undervoltage message > 3 seconds is interpreted as an operating
state (e.g. mains switched off) and entered in the history buffer. The
entry is, however, deleted as soon as the cause has been eliminated
(e.g. mains switched on again).
This operating state can occur if the control module is already supplied
externally via terminals X5/39 and X5/59, but the mains voltage is not yet
switched on.
ƒ An undervoltage message < 3 seconds is interpreted as a fault
(e.g.mains fault), entered in the history buffer and saved.
8.2.11 External error (EEr)
A HIGH signal at DCTRL−TRIP−SET triggers the EEr fault.

You can, for example, connect the digital input DCTRL−TRIP−SET with an
input terminal (X5/Ex). In this way an external encoder can trigger the EEr
fault.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.2−11

EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013
8.3 Monitoring functions
The responses of monitoring functions can be partly parameterised via codes ˘ in GDC in the parameter
menu under Monitoring ˘.
Monitoring Possible fault responses

l Lenze setting
ü Can be set
Fault message Description Source Code TRIP Message Warning Fail−QSP Off
x071 CCR System fault Internal l

x091 EEr External monitoring (triggered via DCTRL) FWM C0581 l ü ü ü
Voltage supply
1020 OU Overvoltage in the DC bus (C0173) MCTRL l
1030 LU Undervoltage in the DC bus (C0173) MCTRL l
0107 H07 Internal fault (power section) Internal l
Communication
x061 CE0 Communication error on the automation interface (AIF) AIF C0126 ü ü l
x062 CE1 Communication error on the CAN1_IN process data input object CAN1_IN C0591 ü ü l
(monitoring time adjustable via C0357/1)
x065 CE4 BUS−OFF state of the system bus (CAN) CAN C0595 ü ü l
Monitoring functions
(too many faulty telegrams)
x166 P16 Faulty transmission of the sync telegram (system bus CAN) Internal C1290/1 ü ü l ü
Configuration
Temperatures / sensors
x050 OH Heatsink temperature > 85° C MCTRL l
x053 OH3 Motor temperature > 150° C MCTRL C0583 l ü ü
x054 OH4 Heatsink temperature > C0122 MCTRL C0582 l ü
x057 OH7 Motor temperature > C0121 MCTRL C0584 l ü
x058 OH8 Motor temperature via inputs T1 and T2 is too high. MCTRL C0585 ü ü l
Caution: At "warning" (C0585 = 2) or "off" (C0585 = 3), the
drive can be destroyed if the fault is not eliminated in time!
x086 Sd6 Thermal sensor error on the motor (X7 or X8) MCTRL C0594 ü ü l
x110 H10 Thermal sensor error at the heatsink FWM C0588 l 1) 1)
l 1) 1)
8.31
x111 H11 Thermal sensor error in the device interior FWM C0588
8.3
8
Motor / feedback system
0011 OC1 Short circuit of motor cable MCTRL l
0012 OC2 Motor cable earth fault MCTRL l
Monitoring Possible fault responses
l Lenze setting
ü Can be set
8.3
8
8.32
Fault message Description Source Code TRIP Message Warning Fail−QSP Off
0015 OC5 Device utilisation I x t (fix 100%) MCTRL l
0016 OC6 I2 x t overload MCTRL l

0018 OC8 I2 x t overload advance warning MCTRL C0606 ü l ü
Configuration
x032 LP1 Failure of a motor phase MCTRL C0597 ü ü l
(current limit adjustable under C0599)
Caution: Can only be used with asynchronous motors. The
function block MLP1 must be entered in C0465.
x082 Sd2 Resolver error at X7 MCTRL C0586 l ü ü
Note: If monitoring is switched off or in the case of "Warning",
the machine can reach very high speeds in the case of fault,
which may result in the damage of the motor and the machine
that is driven!
x083 Sd3 Interruption of the digital frequency coupling. The input signal MCTRL C0587 l ü ü
˜Lamp Control˜ at X9/8 is LOW
Please note: In the case of "Warning" (C0587 = 2), the drive can
be destroyed if the fault is not eliminated in time!
x085 Sd5 At analog input X6/1, X6/2, the input current is < 2 mA MCTRL C0598 ü ü l
Monitoring only possible if C0034 = 1
x087 Sd7 Absolute value encoder error at X8 MCTRL ü l
x088 Sd8 SinCos encoder error at X8 MCTRL C0580 ü l
(filter setting under C0575)
Speed
x190 nErr Speed control error MCTRL C0579 ü ü ü l
(speed window adjustable under C0576)
x200 NMAX Maximum speed (C0596) has been exceeded. MCTRL l
Time−out / overflow
0105 H05 Internal fault (memory) Internal l
x153 P03 Following error (digital frequency > C0255) Internal C0589 ü l ü
x163 P13 Angle controller overflow Internal C0590 l ü ü
x169 P19 Input signal at X9 is limited Internal C1292 ü l ü
Parameter setting
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013
0072 PR1 Check sum error in parameter set 1 Internal l

0074 PEr Program error Internal l
0075 PR0 Error in the parameter sets Internal l
0079 PI Error during parameter initialisation Internal l
x089 PL Error during rotor position adjustment Internal l
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

1) May only be set by Lenze service personnel
Configuration
8.33
8.3
8
Configuration 8
Code table 8.4
8.4 Code table
How to read the code table

Code Cxxxx Code Cxxxx l Parameter value of the code can be defined
1 Subcode 1 of Cxxxx differently for each parameter set
l Parameter value is accepted immediately (ONLINE)
2 Subcode 2 of Cxxxx
+ Changed parameter of code or subcode is accepted after pressing #
Changed parameter of code or subcode is accepted after pressing # when
the controller is inhibited
Designation Designation of the code
Lenze Lenze setting (value at delivery or after restoring the delivery status with C0002)
à The column "IMPORTANT" contains additional information
, The code only displays a value. It cannot be configured.
Selection 1 {%} 99 Min. value {unit} max. value
IMPORTANT − Short, important explanation

C0002 PAR LOAD 0 Load parameter set
0 Default setting Restore delivery status
1 Load parameter set 1 Load and activate the parameter set stored in
the controller
l Parameter set 1 is loaded automatically
after every mains connection.
11 Load parameter set externally Load parameter set from the keypad into the
controller
C0003 PAR SAVE 0 Save parameter set
0 Done Saving completed
1 Save parameter set 1 Save the parameters loaded into the
controller in the parameter set
C0004 OP DISPLAY 56 0 {1} 1999 Operating display
Keypad shows selected code in the operating
level if no other status messages of C0183
are active
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−1

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0005 SIGNAL CFG 1000 Signal configuration
(Predefined basic configurations)
0 COMMON Changed basic configuration
100 Empty All internal links are deleted
1000 Speed control The first two digits indicate the predefined
basic function, e.g.
l 01xxx: speed control
10000 Cam
l 10xxx: cam profiling
11000 Welding bar The third digit indicates the additional

function:
l xx0xx: no additional function
12000 Cam with position storage
l xx1xx: homing function
l xx2xx: clutch function
13000 Cam with virtual master l xx3xx: switching points
l xx4xx: mains failure control
l xx8xx: mark−controlled correction of the
14000 Cam with virtual master and welding
master value
bar
l xx9xx: mark−controlled correction of the
actual value
15000 Cam with virtual master and position
storage The fourth digit indicates the predefined
voltage source for the control terminals:
l xxx0x: external supply voltage
16000 Cam with absolute master value
l xxx1x: internal supply voltage
17000 Welding bar with absolute master The fifth digit indicates the predefined device
value control:
l xxxx0: terminal control
l xxxx1: RS232, RS485 or optical fibre
18000 Cam with absolute master value and
position storage l xxxx3: INTERBUS or PROFIBUS−DP
l xxxx5: system bus (CAN)
C0006 OP MODE à Motor control mode

1 SSC standard motor, sensorless, in star à Depending on C0086
connection l Change of C0086 resets value to the
2 Asynchronous servo motor, in star assigned default setting
connection l Change of C0006 sets C0086 = 0!
3 PM servo motor, synchronous, in star

connection
11 SSC standard motor, sensorless, in
delta connection
22 Asynchronous servo motor, in delta
connection
C0009 LECOM 1 1 {1} 99 LECOM device address

ADDRESS Bus device number for operation via interface
l 10, 20, ..., 90 reserved for broadcast to
device groups for RS232, RS485, fibre
optics.
C0011 NMAX 3000 500 {1 rpm} 16000 Max. speed Nmax
Reference value for the absolute and relative
setpoint selection for the acceleration and
deceleration times.
l For parameter setting via interface:
– Greater changes in one step should only
be made when the controller is
inhibited.
8.4−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0012 TIR (ACC) 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 NSET
Acceleration time Tir for the main setpoint of
NSET (referring to speed change 0 ... nmax)
C0013 TIF (DEC) 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 NSET
Deceleration time Tif Tif for the main setpoint
of NSET (referring to speed change nmax ... 0)
C0017 FCODE (QMIN) 50 −16000 {1 rpm} 16000 FCODE (Qmin)
Switching threshold nact < nx
nact < C0017 activates the comparator output
CMP1−OUT
C0018 FCHOP 1 0 16/8 kHz Switching frequency fchop
1 8 kHz sine Noise−optimised operation with automatic
2 16 kHz sine changeover to 8 kHz
C0019 THRESH 0 0 {1 rpm} 16000 Threshold nact =0
NACT=0 Threshold detection at nact = 0
C0021 SLIPCOMP 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 20.00 Slip compensation
l Active only for sensorless control below
the value entered under C0291
C0022 IMAX CURRENT à 0 {0.01 A} 1.50 Ir Imax limit current
assigned default setting (1.5 × Imotor)
C0025 FEEDBACK 10 Feedback
TYPE Input of the encoder specified on the
nameplate of the Lenze motor:
C0025 automatically changes C0420, C0490,
C0495
0 COMMON C0420, C0490 or C0495 has been changed
subsequently
1 No feedback Control without feedback system (sensorless
control, SSC)
10 RSx (resolver) The resolver is labelled with RSxxxxxxxx.
When a resolver is selected, the rotor
displacement angle in C0058 is set to −90°.
110 IT−512−5V Incremental encoder with TTL level
111 IT−1024−5V
112 IT−2048−5V
113 IT−4096−5V
210 IS−512−5V SinCos encoder
211 IS−1024−5V
212 IS−2048−5V
213 IS−4096−5V
309 AS−128−8V (SKS) Single−turn SinCos encoder with RS485
310 AS−512−8V (SCS) interface from Stegmann
l Enter the supply voltage under C0421.
311 AS−1024−8V (SRS)
409 AM−128−8V (SKM) Multi−turn SinCos encoder from Stegmann
410 AM−512−8V (SCM) l Enter the supply voltage under C0421.
411 AM−1024−8V (SRM)

C0026 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 FCODE (OffsetAIN)
Freely assignable code for relative analog
1 FCODE 0.00
signals
(OFFSET)
l Used for:
2 FCODE 0.00 – Offset for terminal X6/1,2
(OFFSET) – Offset for terminal X6/3,4
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−3

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0027 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 FCODE (gain AIN)
Freely assignable code for relative analog
1 FCODE (GAIN) 100.0
signals
0
l Used for:
2 FCODE (GAIN) 100.0 – Gain X6/1,2
0 – Gain X6/3,4
C0030 DFOUT CONST 3 0 256 inc./rev. DFOUT constant
1 512 inc./rev. Constant for the digital frequency output in
2 1024 inc./rev. increments per revolution
3 2048 inc./rev.
4 4096 inc./rev.
5 8192 inc./rev.
6 16384 inc./rev.
C0032 FCODE 1 −32767 {1} 32767 FCODE (gearbox factor numerator)
GEARBOX Freely assignable code
C0033 GEARBOX 1 1 {1} 32767 Gearbox factor denominator
DENOM
C0034 MST CURRENT 0 0 −10 V ... + 10 V Master voltage/master current
1 +4 mA ... +20 mA Selection for setpoint entry
2 −20 mA ... +20 mA
C0037 SET−VALUE 0 −16000 {1 rpm} 16000 Setpoint selection (rpm)
RPM
C0039 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 NSET JOG setpoints
1 JOG SET−VALUE 100.0 Fixed speeds (JOG setpoints) can be selected
0 for NSET using digital inputs

... ... ...
C0040 CTRL ENABLE 1 0 Controller inhibited Controller enable (RFR)
1 Controller enabled
C0042 QSP , 1 QSP: Inactive Quick stop
2 QSP: Active
C0043 TRIP RESET 0 0 Trip reset Reset error
1 Error active Reset of an active trip:
l Set C0043 = 0
C0045 ACT JOG , 0 Nset is active NSET
1 JOG 1 JOG selection
2 JOG 2
... ...
15 JOG 15
C0046 NSET−N , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 NSET
Main setpoint
C0049 NSET−NADD , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 NSET
Additional setpoint
C0050 MCTRL−NSET2 , −100.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 MCTRL
nset at speed controller input
C0051 MCTRL−NACT , −30000 {1 rpm} 30000 Actual speed value
C0052 MCTRL−UMOT , 0 {1 V} 800 Motor voltage
C0053 UG−VOLTAGE , 0 {1 V} 900 DC−bus voltage
8.4−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0054 IMOT , 0.0 {0.1 A} 300.0 Actual motor current Imot
MCTRL function block
l Read only
l MCTRL−IACT = 100 % = C0022
C0056 MCTRL−MSET2 , −100.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 MCTRL−MSET2 (Mset)
Torque setpoint (output n−controller)
C0057 MAX TORQUE , 0 {1 Nm} 500 Maximum torque (C86/C22)
Maximum possible torque of the drive
configuration
l Depending on C0022, C0086
C0058 ROTOR DIFF −90.0 −180.0 {0.1 °} 179.9 Rotor displacement angle
Zero phase of the rotor for synchronous
motors (C0095)
Is set to −90° when a resolver is selected in
C0025 or C0495.
C0059 MOT POLE NO. , 1 {1} 50 Number of motor pole pairs
C0060 ROTOR POS , 0 {1} 2048 Motor rotor position
l 1 rev. = 2048 inc.
C0061 HEATSINK , 0 {1 °C} 100 Heatsink temperature
TEMP
C0063 MOT TEMP , 0 {1 °C} 200 Motor temperature
C0064 UTILIZATION , 0 {1 %} 150 Device utilisation Ixt
IXT Utilisation of the most recent 180 s
l C0064 > 100 % releases Trip OC5
l Trip reset is possible only if C0064 < 95 %
C0064 UTILIZATION , 0 {1 %} 150 I2xt motor utilisation
I2XT
C0067 ACT TRIP , All fault à Selection list 10 Error message TRIP
messages Current fault message
C0070 VP SPEED CTRL à 0.0 {0.5} 255.0 Vpn speed controller
assigned default setting
C0071 TN SPEED CTRL à 1.0 {0.5 ms} 600.0 Tnn speed controller
For values > 512 ms the function is
deactivated
C0072 TD SPEED CTRL 0.0 0.0 {0.1 ms} 32.0 Tdn speed controller
C0075 VP CURR CTRL 0.35 0.00 {0.01} 15.99 Vpi current controller
C0076 TN CURR CTRL 1.8 0.5 {0.1 ms} 2000.0 Tni current controller
Setting the value 2000 ms deactivates the
function
C0077 VP FIELD CTRL 0.25 0.00 {0.01} 15.99 VpF field controller
C0078 TN FIELD CTRL 15.0 1.0 {0.5 ms} 8000.0 TnF field controller
Setting the value 8000 ms deactivates the
function
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−5

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0081 MOT POWER à 0.01 {0.01 kW} 150.00 Rated motor power acc. to nameplate
l Change of C0081 sets C0086 = 0
C0084 MOT RS à 0.00 {0.01 W} 150.00 Motor stator resistance
C0085 MOT LS à 0.00 {0.01 mH} 655.35 Motor leakage inductance
C0086 MOT TYPE à See motor selection list Motor type selection
à Depending on the controller used
l Change of C0086 resets C0006, C0022,
C0070, C0071, C0075, C0076, C0081,
C0084, C0085, C0087, C0088, C0089,
C0090, C0091 to the assigned default
setting
Controller Lenze Assigned motor Lenze motor type
setting type
EVS9329 225 30kW−ASM−50 —
EVS9330 227 45kW−ASM−50 —
EVS9331 228 55kW−ASM−50 —
EVS9332 229 75kW−ASM−50 —
C0087 MOT SPEED à 300 {1 rpm} 16000 Rated motor speed
C0088 MOT CURRENT à 0.2 {0.1 A} 500.0 Rated motor current
C0089 MOT à 10 {1 Hz} 1000 Rated motor frequency
FREQUENCY
C0090 MOT VOLTAGE à 50 {1 V} 500 Rated motor voltage
C0091 MOT COS PHI à 0.50 {0.01} 1.00 Motor cos j
C0093 DRIVE IDENT , 0 Defective power section Controller identification
1 No power section 93xx: servo cam profiler type
93xx 93xx
8.4−6 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0094 PASSWORD 0 0 {1} 9999 Password
l Parameter access protection for the
keypad. When the password is activated,
only the codes of the user menu can be
accessed. For further selection options see
C0096
C0095 ROTOR POS 0 0 Inactive Rotor position adjustment for a synchronous
ADJ 1 Active motor
l C0058 displays the zero angle of the rotor
l C0095 = 1 starts position adjustment
C0096 0 No password protection Extended password protection for bus
1 Read protection systems with activated password (C0094).
2 Write protection l All codes in the user menu can be fully
3 Read/write protection accessed.
1 AIF PROTECT. 0 AIF access protection
2 CAN PROTECT. 0 CAN access protection
C0099 S/W VERSION , x.xx Software version
C0100 , 0 {1 ns} 32767 Service code
1 CDATA May only be set by Lenze service personnel
2 CCTRL
3 VMAS
4 YSET
5 CLUTCH1
6 CSEL
7 CSEL
8 CONVPHD1
9
10 MSEL1
11 MSEL2
12 CCTRL
13 WELD
14 RFGPH1
15 CONVPHPHD1
16 CURVEC1
C0101 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 NSET
1 NSET−TIR 0.000 Additional acceleration for the main setpoint
(HOCHLF.) (refers to speed change 0...nmax.)
2 NSET TIR 0.000
... ... ...
15 NSET−TIR 0.000
C0103 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 NSET
1 NSET−TIF 0.000 Additional deceleration times for the main
setpoint
2 NSET−TIF 0.000 (refers to speed change 0...nmax.)
... ... ...
15 NSET−TIF 0.000
C0105 QSP TIF 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 QSP deceleration time
Deceleration time for quick stop (QSP)
(refers to speed change 0...nmax.)
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−7

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0108 100.0 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 FCOD (gain AOUT)
0
1 FCOD
(VERST.AOUT)
2 FCOD
(VERST.AOUT)
C0109 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 FCODE (Offset AOUT)
FCODE 0.00
(OFFSET)
FCODE 0.00
(OFFSET)
C0114 0 HIGH active DIGIN polarity
1 LOW active Terminal polarity
C0116 ® Selection list 2 Signal configuration FD0−xx
Free digital outputs can only be evaluated
1 FDO−O0 1000 FIXED0 when networked with automation interfaces.
... ... ... ...
32 FDO −31 1000 FIXED0
C0117 ® ® Selection list 2 DIGOUTx
1 DIGOUT1 15000 DCTRL−TRIP X5/A1
2 DIGOUT2 10650 CMP1−OUT X5/A2
3 DIGOUT3 500 DCTRL−RDY X5/A3
4 DIGOUT4 5003 MCTRL−MMAX X5/A4
C0118 0 HIGH active DIGOUTx
1 LOW active Terminal polarity
C0120 OC6 LIMIT 0 0 {1 %} 120 Threshold for I2 × t monitoring (motor).
l 0 = I2 × t monitoring switched off
l I2 × t > C0120 ð Trip OC6
Threshold for motor temperature warning
Threshold for heatsink temperature warning
C0125 BAUDRATE 0 0 9600 baud LECOM baud rate
1 4800 baud LECOM baud rate for 2102 module
2 2400 baud
3 1200 baud
4 19200 baud
8.4−8 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0126 MONIT CE0 3 0 TRIP Configuration of CE0
2 Warning Configuration of communication error
3 Off monitoring with automation interface CE0
C0127 OC8 LIMIT 0 0 {1 %} 120 Threshold for I2 × t advance warning (motor)
l 0 = I2 × t advance warning switched off
l I2 × t > C0127 ð Fault message OC8
(response set in C606)
C0128 TAU MOTOR 5.0 0.1 {0.1 min} 50.0 Thermal time constant of the motor
The time constant is required for calculating
the I2 × t disconnection.
C0130 ACT TI , NSET act. Ti times
Active Ti times of NSET
C0134 RFG CHARAC 0 0 Linear NSET RFG characteristic
1 S−shaped Characteristic of ramp function generator for
main setpoint
C0135 CONTROL 0 0 {1} 65535 Control word
WORD Controller control word for LECOM−A/B/LI or
keypad.
C0136 ,
1 CTRLWORD Control word C135
C135
2 CTRLWORD Control word CAN
CAN
3 CTRLWORD AIF Control word AIF
C0141 FCODE 0.0 −199.9 {0.1 %} 199.9 Main setpoint
(SETVAL)
C0142 START 1 Start options
OPTIONS 0 Start lock l Automatic start inhibited after
– mains connection
– cancelling of a message (t > 0.5 s)
– TRIP reset
l Start after HIGH−LOW−HIGH level change
at X5/28
1 Auto start Automatic start when X5/28 = HIGH
C0150 STATUS WORD , 0 {1} 65535 Status word when networked with
automation interfaces
states
C0151 FDO (DW) , Display (hex.) of the free digital output
signals configured with C0116
states
C0155 STATUS WORD , Bit00 Fail Bit08 CW/CC Status word 2
2 W Extended decimal status word
Bit01 Mmax Bit09 — l Binary interpretation indicates the bit
states
Bit02 Imax Bit10 —
Bit03 IMP Bit11 —
Bit04 RDY Bit12 —
Bit05 CINH Bit13 —
Bit06 Trip Bit14 —
Bit07 Init Bit15 —
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−9

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0156 ® Selection list 2 Configuration of user−definable bits of the
status word
1 STAT.B0 1000 DCTRL−PAR*1−O
2 STAT.B2 5002 MCTRL−IMAX
3 STAT.B3 5003 MCTRL−MMAX
4 STAT.B4 5050 NSET−RFG I=O
5 STAT.B5 10650 CMP1−OUT
6 STAT.B14 505 DCTRL−CW/CCW
7 STAT.B15 500 DCTRL−RDY
C0157 , Display of user−definable bits of the status
1 (C0156/1) word
... ...
7 (C0156/7)
C0161 ACT TRIP , All fault messages Error message Trip
Current fault message (as under C0168/1)
C0167 RESET 0 0 No reset History buffer reset
FAILMEM 1 Reset C0167 = 1 deletes the history buffer
C0168 , All fault messages List of errors occurred
1 FAIL NO. ACT Currently active fault
2 FAIL NO. OLD1 Last fault
... ... ...
8 FAIL NO. OLD7 Last but six fault
C0169 , Corresponding mains switch−on time List showing when the faults under C0168
occurred (referring to C0179)
1 FAILTIME ACT Currently active fault
2 FAILTIME OLD1 Last fault
... ... ...
8 FAILTIME OLD7 Last but six fault
C0170 , Corresponding mains switch−on time List showing how often the faults under
C0168 have occurred consecutively
History buffer
1 COUNTER ACT Currently active fault
2 COUNTER Last fault
OLD1
... .. ...
8 COUNTER Last but six fault
OLD7
C0172 OV REDUCE 0 0 {10 V} 100 OV reduce
Threshold for activating the brake torque
reduction before OU message
8.4−10 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0173 UG LIMIT 1 Adaptation of DC−bus voltage thresholds
Check during commissioning and adapt if
necessary!
All interconnected drive components must
have the same thresholds!
0 Mains<400V +−brake LU=285V, Operation on mains <400 V with or without
OU=770V−755V brake unit
3 Mains=480V −brake LU=342V, Operation on 480 V mains without brake unit
OU=770V−755V
4 Mains=480V +brake LU=342V, Operation on 480 V mains with brake unit
OU=800V−785V
C0178 OP TIMER , 0 {1 s} 4294967295 Elapsed−hour meter
l Time when the controller was enabled
C0179 MAINS TIMER , 0 {1 s} 4294967295 Power−on time meter
l Time when the mains was switched on
C0182 TI S−SHAPED 20.00 0.01 {0.01 s} 50.00 NSET
Ti time of the S−shaped ramp function
generator
(determines the shape of the S profile)
l Small values Þsmall S rounding
l Large values Þlarge S rounding
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−11

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0183 DIAGNOSTICS , Drive diagnostics
l Indicates fault or status information
l If several fault or status information units
are active simultaneously, the information
unit with the smallest number is displayed
0 OK No fault
91 TRIP set C0135 TRIP via LECOM−A/B/LI or keypad
92 Trip−Set AIF TRIP via AIF
93 Trip set CAN TRIP via CAN
101 Initialisation Initialisation phase
102 TRIP/fault TRIP active
103 Emergency stop Emergency stop has been executed
104 Pulse inhibit message Message active
105 Power OFF Function is not supported
111 Operation inhibit−C135
112 Operation inhibit−AIF Operation inhibited
113 Operation inhibit−CAN
121 Controller inhibit, terminal 28 Controller inhibited via X5/28
122 Controller inhibit, internal 1 DCTRL−CINH1
123 Controller inhibit, internal 2 DCTRL−CINH2
124 Controller inhibit−C135/STOP STOP key at the keypad
125 Controller inhibit−AIF Controller inhibited via AIF
126 Controller inhibit−CAN Controller inhibited via system bus
141 Switch−on inhibit Restart protection active
142 Pulse inhibit High−resistance power outputs
151 QSP−terminal, external quick stop Quick stop via MCTRL−QSP
152 QSP−C135 quick stop Quick stop via STOP key of the keypad
153 QSP−AIF quick stop Quick stop via AIF
154 QSP−CAN quick stop Quick stop via system bus
250 Warning C168 Warning active
C0190 NSET ARIT 0 0 OUT = C46 NSET
1 C46 + C49 Arithmetic block in the function block NSET
2 C46 − C49 Connects main setpoint C0046 and additional
3 C46 * C49 setpoint C0040
4 C46 / C49
5 C46/(100 − C49)
C0195 BRK1 T ACT 99.9 0.0 {0.1 s} 99.9 BRK1 brake engagement time
Engagement time of the mechanical holding
brake
the status "mechanical brake closed" is
reached
C0196 BRK T RELEASE 0.0 0.0 {0.1 s} 60.0 BRK1 brake disengagement time
Disengagement time of the mechanical
holding brake (see technical data of the
brake).
the status "mechanical brake open" is
reached
C0200 S/W ID , Software ID
Software identification
C0201 S/W DATE , Software release
Date of software release
8.4−12 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0202 INTERNAL IO , 0 {0.001} 100.000 Internal identification
C0203 KOMM.−NO. , x / xxxx / xxxxx Commission number
C0204 SERIAL−NO. , 0 {1} 65535 Serial number
C0206 PRODUCT , Production date of the device
DATE
C0207 DL INFO 1 , Download info 1
C0220 NSET TIR ADD 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 NSET
Acceleration time Tir of the additional
setpoint for NSET
C0221 NSET TIF ADD 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 NSET
Deceleration time Tif of the additional
setpoint for NSET
C0222 PCTRL1 VP 1.0 0.1 {0.1} 500.0 PCTRL1
Vp gain
C0223 PCTRL1 TN 400 20 {1 ms} 99999 PCTRL1
Tn I component
99999 ms: Switched off
C0224 PCTRL1 KD 0.0 0.0 {0.1} 5.0 PCTRL1
Kd differential component
C0241 CMP RFG−I = O 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 NSET
Threshold of ramp function generator for
main setpoint input = output, (100 % = nmax)
C0244 BRK M SET 0 −100.00 {1.00 %} 100.00 BRK1
Holding torque of the DC injection brake
100 % = value of C0057
C0250 FCODE 1BIT 0 0 Lower limit FCODE 1bit digital
1 Upper limit
C0252 ANGLE OFFSET 0 −245760000 {1 inc} 245760000 DFSET
Phase offset, constant angular offset for
digital frequency configurations
l 1 rev = 65536 inc
C0253 ANGLE N−TRIM ® −32767 {1 inc} 32767 DFSET
Speed−dependent phase trimming
à Depending on C0005, C0025, C0490
l Change of C0005, C0025, or C0490 resets
C0253 to the default setting
l 1 rev = 65536 inc
l C0253 is reached at 15000 rpm
C0254 VP ANGLE CTRL 0.400 0.0000 {0.0001} 3.9999 MCTRL
0 Vp phase controller
C0255 THRESHOLD 32768 10 {1 inc} 1800000000 Following error limit P03
P03 0 l 1 rev = 65536 inc
l Following error > C0255 triggers fault
"P03"
C0260 MPOT1 HIGH 100.0 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 MPOT1
0 Upper limit (condition: C0260 > C0261)
C0261 MPOT1 LOW −100.0 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 MPOT1
Lower limit (condition: C0261 < C0260)
C0262 MPOT1 TIR 10.0 0.1 {0.1 s} 6000.0 MPOT1
Acceleration time
(referring to change 0 ... 100 %)
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−13

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0263 MPOT1 TIF 10.0 0.1 {0.1 s} 6000.0 MPOT1
Deceleration time
(referring to change 0 ... 100 %)
C0264 MPOT1 0 0 No change MPOT1
ON/OFF 1 Deceleration with Tif to 0% Functions which can be executed when the
2 Deceleration with Tif to C0261 motor potentiometer is deactivated via input
3 Jump with Tif = 0 to 0% MPOT1−INACTIVE.
4 Jump with Tif = 0 to C0261
5 Acceleration with Tir to C0260
C0265 MPOT1 INIT 0 0 Value during mains failure MPOT1
1 Lower limit of C0261 Initialisation
2 0% Value which is accepted at mains switching
and activated motor potentiometer
C0267 ® Selection list 2 MPOT1
1 UP 1000 FIXED0
2 DOWN 1000 FIXED0
C0268 MPOT1−INACT 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 MPOT1
C0269 ,
1 (C0267/1)
2 (C0267/2)
3 (C0268)
C0291 SSC OVERRIDE 0 0 {1 rpm} 16000 SSC override frequency
Override frequency for the transition from
sensorless control to controlled operation
C0292 SSC IM SET 0.00 0.00 {0.01 A} 500.00 SSC Im setpoint
Motor current setpoint.
For sensorless control, set 1.0 to 1.1−fold
increased rated motor current.
C0293 SSC DYNAMIC 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.00 SSC dynamic constant
C0294 VP FRQ CTRL ® 0.0 {0.1} 99.9 Vp frequency controller
Proportional gain of frequency controller
C0295 TN FRQ CTRL ® 2 {1 ms} 20000 Tn frequency controller
Reset time of frequency controller
C0296 DYNAMIC 100 0 {0.1} 32767 Dynamic constant
CONST
C0325 VP2 ADAPT 1.0 0.1 {0.1} 500.0 PCTRL1 Adaptation Vp2
C0326 VP3 ADAPT 1.0 0.1 {0.1} 500.0 PCTRL1 Adaptation Vp3
C0327 SET2 ADAPT 100.0 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 PCTRL1 Adaptation nset2
0 Speed setpoint threshold of process
controller adaptation (condition: C0327 >
C0328)
C0328 SET1 ADAPT 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 PCTRL1 Adaptation nset1
Speed setpoint threshold of process
controller adaptation (condition: C0328 <
C0327)
8.4−14 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0329 ADAPT ON/OFF 0 PCTRL1 Adaptation On/Off
0 no process controller adaptation Activation of process controller adaptation
(C0222)
1 PCTRL1−ADAPT + linear characteristic
2 PCTRL1−ADAPT + 3−point characteristic
3 System deviation + 3−point
characteristic
C0332 PCTRL1 TIR 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 PCTRL1
(referring to setpoint change 0 ... 100 %)
C0333 PCTRL1 TIF 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 PCTRL1
(referring to setpoint change 0 ... 100 %)
C0336 ACT VP , 0.0 {0.1} 500.0 PCTRL1
Actual Vp
C0337 BI/UNIPOLAR 0 0 Bipolar PCTRL1
1 Unipolar Bipolar/unipolar range of action
C0338 ARIT1 FUNCT 1 0 OUT = IN1 ARIT1
2 OUT = IN1 − IN2
3 OUT = IN1 × IN2
4 OUT = IN1 / IN2
5 OUT = IN1 / (100% – IN2)
15 OUT = IN1 % IN2
C0339 ® Selection list 1 ARIT1
Configuration of analog input signals
C0340 , ARIT1
2 (C0339/2)
C0350 CAN ADDRESS 1 1 {1} 63 CAN
System bus node address
node˜ command
C0351 CAN 0 0 500 kbps CAN
BAUDRATE 1 250 kbps System bus baud rate
2 125 kbps l Change becomes effective after ˜reset
3 50 kbps node˜ command
4 1000 kbps
C0352 CAN MST 0 0 Slave CAN
1 Master Configuration of system bus node
node˜ command
C0353 0 C0350 CAN
1 C0354 Source for system bus address
1 CAN ADDR 0 CAN−IN1, CAN−OUT1
SEL1
SEL2
SEL3
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−15

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0354 1 {1} 513 CAN
Selective system bus address
l Individual addressing of system bus
process data objects
1 IN1 ADDR2 129 CAN−IN1
2 OUT2 ADDR2 1 CAN−OUT1
C0355 , 0 {1} 2047 CAN
1 IN1 ID System bus identifier
2 OUT1 ID
3 IN2 ID
4 OUT2 ID
5 IN3 ID
6 OUT3 ID
C0356 0 {1 ms} 65000 CAN
System bus time settings
1 CAN BOOT UP 3000 Required for CAN network without master
2 OUT2 CYCLE 0 0 = event−controlled process data transfer
3 OUT3 CYCLE 0 >0 = cyclic process data transfer
4 CAN DELAY 20 The delay time ˜CANdelay˜ starts when the
NMT status "operational" has been reached
(after "pre−operational" or "stopped"). When
the delay time has elapsed, the PDOs
CAN−OUT2 and CAN−OUT3 are sent for the
first time.
C0357 0 {1 ms} 65000 CAN
System bus monitoring times
l The CAN objects will stay in receive mode
after a fault message
TIME
TIME
TIME
C0358 RESET NODE 0 0 No function CAN
1 CAN reset Establishment of a system bus reset node
C0359 CAN STATE , 0 Operational CAN
1 Pre−operational System bus status
2 Warning
3 Bus OFF
8.4−16 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0360 , 0 65535 CAN
Telegram counter (number of telegrams)
Count values > 65535: Restart with 0
1 MESSAGE OUT All sent telegrams
2 MESSAGE IN All received telegrams
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT1
OUT2
channel 1
channel 2
C0361 , 0.00 {1.00 %} 100.00 CAN
Bus load of system bus
To ensure a perfect operation, the total bus
load (all connected devices) should be less
than 80%
1 LOAD OUT All sent telegrams
2 LOAD IN All received telegrams
channel 1
channel 2
C0362 SYNC CYCLE 1.000 −32.000 {0.100 32.000 CAN
ms} Time between two sync telegrams on the
system bus
C0363 SYNC CORR 1 1 0.8 ms CAN
2 1.6 ms Correction value for C0362
3 2.4 ms
4 3.2 ms
5 4.0 ms
C0364 CAN ACTIV 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 CAN
l Switches the system bus from
"pre−operational" to "operational" via an
external signal
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−17

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0365 (C0364) , CAN
State of the system bus
C0366 SYNC 1 0 No sync response CAN
RESPONSE 1 Sync response Response to sync telegram from the master
C0367 SYNC RX ID 128 1 {1} 256 CAN
Receive identifier (Rx)
l Sync identifier used for grouping for data
acceptance in CAN−IN1
C0368 SYNC TX ID 128 1 {1} 256 CAN
Transmit identifier (Tx)
l Identifier for generating a sync telegram
C0369 SYNC TX TIME 0 0 {1} 65000 CAN
Sync transmission interval (Tx)
l Transmission interval for the object set
under C0368
C0387 − 0 0 Active data field Profile data field
1 Background data field
C0389 − 0 0 CAM−DATA offline Profile data
1 CAM−DATA online
C0400 AIN1−OUT , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 AIN1
Display of output signal
C0402 OFFSET 19502 FCODE−26/1 ® Selection list 1 AIN1
C0403 GAIN FCODE−27/1 ® Selection list 1 AIN1
C0404 , −199.99 199.99 AIN1
2 (C0403)
C0405 OUT , −199.99 199.99 AIN2
Display of output signal
C0407 AIN2−OFFSET FCODE−26/2 ® Selection list 1 AIN2
19503 Offset configuration
C0408 AIN2−GAIN FCODE−27/2 ® Selection list 1 AIN2
C0409 , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 AIN2
2 (C0408)
C0416 RESOLVER ADJ 0 0 {1} 99999999 Correction of the resolver error
For Lenze motors, read resolver error from the
nameplate
C0420 ENCODER 512 1 {1 8192 Encoder constant for encoder input X8 in
CONST inc/rev} increments per revolution
C0421 ENC VOLTAGE 5.00 5.00 {0.1 V} 8.00 Encoder voltage
Setting of the encoder supply voltage
l CAUTION: Incorrect input may destroy the
encoder
C0425 DFIN CONST 3 0 256 inc./rev. DFIN
1 512 inc./rev. Number of increments of the digital
2 1024 inc./rev. frequency input
3 2048 inc./rev.
4 4096 inc./rev.
5 8192 inc./rev.
6 16384 inc./rev.
C0426 DFIN−OUT , −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 Output signal of DFIN
8.4−18 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0427 DFIN 0 0 2−phase DFIN
FUNCTION 1 A pulse / B direction Selection of the digital frequency signal
2 Pulses A or B
C0430 0.000 {0.001 2.000 Delay of the touch−probe signal
ms}
1 TP1 DELAY 0.218 Touch−probe signal at X5/E1
C0431 IN 5001 MCTRL−NACT ® Selection list 1 AOUT1
Gain configuration
C0434 , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 AOUT1
2 (C0432)
3 (C0433)
C0436 IN 5002 MCTRL−MSET2 ® Selection list 1 AOUT2
Gain configuration
C0439 , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 AOUT2
2 (C0437)
3 (C0438)
C0440 STATE−BUS 1000 ® Selection list 2 Configuration of state bus X5/ST

C0441 (C0440) ,
C0443 DIGIN−OUT , 0 {1} 255 Signals at X5/E1 to X5/E5, decimal value
l Binary interpretation indicates terminal
signals
C0444 (C0118) , 0 1
C0450 NX 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 BRK1
C0451 SET 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 BRK1
C0452 SIGN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 BRK1
C0458 , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 BRK1
2 (C0452)
C0459 (C0451) , BRK1
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−19

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0464 CUSTOMER I/F , 0 Original Customer interface
1 Changed Status of selected basic configuration
l Reassignment of terminals in a basic
configuration of C0005 does not change
C0005 and sets C0464 = 1
l Adding or removing function blocks or
changing the signal flow between the
function blocks in a basic configuration of
C0005 sets C0005 = 0 and C0464= 1
C0465 FB LIST ® ® Selection list 5 FB processing table
Contains the program for signal processing
1 200 (sequence in which the function blocks are
processed)
2 0 à Depending on C0005. Changing C0005
3 50 loads the assigned processing table
à Valid for C0005 = 1000
4 0
l After changing the signal flow, the
5 0 processing table must be adapted.
6 55 Otherwise the controller may use the
wrong signals!
7 0 l The function blocks DIGIN, DIGOUT,
8 0 AIF−IN, CAN−IN and MCTRL are always
9 10250 processed and do not have to be entered
in the table.
10 0
11 0
12 0
13 5650
14 0
15 0
16 5050
... 0
19 5700
... 0
22 10650
... 0
25 70
.. 0
28 75
... 0
31 250
... 0
41 25000
42 20000
... 0
49 0
50 0
C0466 CPU T REMAIN , Remaining process time
Time remaining for processing function
blocks
C0469 FUNKTION KEY 2 0 Switched off Setting the function of the keypad STOP key
STOP 1 Set controller inhibit
2 Set quick stop
8.4−20 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0470 0 {1} 255 Freely assignable code for digital signals
0 FCODE 8BIT 0 l The data words C0470 and C0471 are in
DIGITAL parallel and are identical
1 FCODE BIT 0−7 0

2 FCODE BIT8−15 0
3 FCODE 0
BIT16−23
4 FCODE 0
BIT24−31
C0471 FCODE 32 BIT 0 0 {1} 4294967296 FCODE 32 bits digital
Freely assignable code for digital signals
l The data words C0470 and C0471 are in
parallel and are identical
C0472 FCODE −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Freely assignable code for relative analog
ANALOG signals
1 0.00
2 0.00
3 100.0
0
6 100.0
0
... ...
19 0.00
20 0.00
C0473 FCODE ABS −32767 {1} 32767 FCODE
1 1 Freely assignable code for absolute analog
signals
2 1
3 0
... ...
9 0
10 0
C0474 FCODE PH −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 FCODE
1 0 Freely assignable code for phase signals
1 rev = 65536 inc
... ...
10 0
C0475 FCODE PHD −16000 {1 rpm} 16000 FCODE
1 0 Freely assignable code for speed
signals/digital frequency signals
2 0
3 0
4 0
5 0
C0490 FEEDBACK POS 0 Position feedback system
Feedback system for the position controller
0 Resolver at X7 The feedback system can be merged with the
settings of C0495 = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4.
2 Sin encoder at X8 value.
3 Absolute value encoder ST at X8

4 Absolute value encoder MT at X8
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−21

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0495 FEEDBACK N 0 Speed feedback system
Feedback system for the speed controller
0 Resolver at X7 The feedback system can be merged with the
settings of C0490 = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4.
l A setting of C0495 = 0 sets the rotor
displacement angle in C0058 to −90°
2 Sin/cos encoder at X8 value.
3 Hiperface single−turn absolute value

encoder at X8
4 Hiperface multi−turn absolute value
encoder at X8
C0497 NACT−FILTER 2.0 0.0 {0.1 ms} 50.0 Nact filter time constant
Time constant for actual speed value
C0499 0 Mode of profile data access protection
0 Read/write protection
1 Only read protection
2 Only write protection
C0500 CAM CHECK 0 CAM check of actual profile
ACTUAL CURVE 0 No CAM check
1 CAM check of all data
2 CAM check, X axis only
3 CAM check, Y axis only
C0503 0 {1} 65535 Password
The allocation of passwords prevents
unauthorised access to profile data and
parameter set
1 0 PIN − profile data
2 0 Master PIN − profile data
C0506 ,
1 Version
2 Data field length
8.4−22 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0517 0.00 {0.01} 1999.00 User menu
1 USER MENU 51.00 C0051/0 MCTRL−NACT Up to 32 entries
l Under the subcode, the number of the
2 USER MENU 54.00 C0054/0 Imot desired code is entered.
3 USER MENU 56.00 C0056/0 MCTRL−MSET2 l Input format: xxx.yy
4 USER MENU 46.00 C0046/0 N – xxx: Code number
– yy: Subcode number
5 USER MENU 49.00 C0049/0 NADD l There is no check for existence of entered
6 USER MENU 183.0 C0183/0 Diagnostics code.
0
7 USER MENU 168.0 C0168/1 Fail no. act
1
8 USER MENU 86.00 C0086/0 Mot type
9 USER MENU 22.00 C0022/0 Imax current
10 USER MENU 5.00 C005/0 Signal cfg
11 USER MENU 11.00 C0011/0 Nmax
12 USER MENU 12.00 C0012/0 Tir
13 USER MENU 13.00 C0013/0 Tif
14 USER MENU 105.0 C0105/0 QSP Tif
0
15 USER MENU 39.01 C0039/1 JOG setpoint
16 USER MENU 70.00 C0070/0 Vp speed CTRL
17 USER MENU 71.00 C0071/0 Tn speed CTRL
18 USER MENU 0 Not assigned
... ... 0 Not assigned
31 USER MENU 94.00 C0094/0 Password
32 USER MENU 3.00 C0003/0 Par save
C0520 IN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 DFSET
Configuration of input signal
C0521 VP−DIV 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 DFSET
Configuration of gain factor numerator
C0522 RAT−DIV 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 DFSET
Configuration of gearbox factor numerator
C0523 A−TRIM 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 DFSET
Configuration of phase trimming
C0524 N−TRIM 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 DFSET
Speed trimming of DFSET
C0525 0−PULSE 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 DFSET
Configuration of one−time zero pulse
activation
C0526 RESET 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 DFSET
Integrator resetting
C0527 SET 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 DFSET
Configuration of integrator setting
C0528 , −2.109 {1} 2.109 DFSET
1 0−PULSE A Phase difference between 2 zero pulses
2 OFFSET Offset results from C0523 × C0529 + C0252
C0529 MULTIP OFFSET 1 −20000 {1} 20000 Offset multiplier
C0530 DF 0 0 With gearbox factor DFSET
EVALUATION 1 Without gearbox factor Evaluation of the digital frequency
C0531 ACT 0 DIV 1 1 {1} 16384 DFSET actual zero pulse divider
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−23

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0532 0−PULSE/TP 1 1 0−pulse DFSET zero pulse/touch probe
2 Touch probe Selecting zero pulse, touch probe or zero
3 0−pulse and touch probe pulse and touch probe
C0533 VP DENOM 1 1 {1} 32767 DFSET Vp denominator
Gain factor denominator
C0534 0 PULSE FCT 0 0 Inactive DFSET
1 Continuous Zero pulse function
2 Cont. switchable
10 Once, fast way
11 Once, CW
12 Once, CCW
13 Once, 2 × zero pulse
C0535 SET 0 DIV 1 1 {1} 16384 DFSET
Setpoint zero pulse divider
C0536 , −32767 {1} 32767 DFSET
2 (C0522)
3 (C0523)
C0537 (C0524) , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 DFSET
C0538 , DFSET
2 (C0526)
3 (C0527)
C0539 (C0520) , −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 DFSET
Display of input signal
C0540 FUNCTION 2 0 Analog input DFOUT
1 Phase difference input Function of the encoder output
2 Resolver simulation + zero pulse
3 Resolver simulation, no zero pulse
4 X10 = X9
5 X10 = X8
C0541 AN−IN 5001 MCTRL−NACT ® Selection list 1 DFOUT
C0542 DF−IN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 DFOUT
Configuration of digital frequency input
C0544 SYN−RDY 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 DFOUT
Synchronisation signal for zero pulse
C0545 PH OFFSET 0 0 {1 inc} 65535 DFOUT
Phase offset
C0546 PULSE MIN SET 1000 1 {1inc} 2147483647 DFOUT
Masking (suppression) of interference pulses
at X5/E5 (setpoint pulse of the touch probe
signal)
l The size of the masking window between
two setpoint pulses is set
C0547 (C0541) , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 DFOUT
C0548 (C0544) , 0 1 DFOUT
C0549 (C0542) , −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 DFOUT
8.4−24 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0560 FIX SET−VALUE −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Fixed setpoints
1 100
2 75
3 50
4 25
5 0
... ...
15 0
C0561 AIN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 FIXSET1
C0562 ® Selection list 2 FIXSET1
1 IN1 1000 FIXED0
2 IN2 1000 FIXED0
3 IN3 1000 FIXED0
4 IN4 1000 FIXED0
C0563 (C0561) , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 FIXSET1
C0564 , FIXSET1
... ...
4 (C0562/4)
C0570 IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 S&H1
C0571 LOAD 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 S&H1 LOAD
C0572 (C0570) , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 S&H1
C0573 (C0571) , S&H1 LOAD
C0575 1 0 {1 ms} 200 SD8 monitoring
Tripping delay for error message SD8
C0576 100.0 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Speed window − nErr−monitoring
0 Setting the system deviation between actual
speed value and speed setpoint
C0577 VP FLD WEAK 3.00 0.00 {0.01} 15.99 Field weakening controller
Gain Vp
C0578 TN FLD WEAK 50.0 2.0 {0.5 ms} 8192.0 Field weakening controller
Reset time Tn
C0579 MONIT NERR 3 0 Trip nEEr monitoring
1 Message Configuration of monitoring for "system
2 Warning deviation between actual speed value and
3 Off speed setpoint"
3 Off Configuration of monitoring for encoder error
at X8
C0581 MONIT EER 0 0 Trip EEr monitoring
1 Message Configuration of monitoring for "external
2 Warning fault"
3 Off
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−25

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0582 MONIT OH4 2 2 Warning OH4 monitoring
3 Off Configuration of heatsink temperature
monitoring
C0583 MONIT OH3 ® 0 Trip OH3 monitoring
2 Warning Configuration of monitoring for "fixed motor
3 Off temperature"
C0584 MONIT OH7 ® 2 Warning OH7 monitoring
3 Off Configuration of monitoring for "adjustable
motor temperature"
Temperature monitoring via resolver input
C0585 MONIT OH8 3 0 Trip OH8 monitoring
2 Warning Configuration of monitoring for "adjustable
3 Off motor temperature"
Temperature monitoring via PTC input
2 Warning Configuration of resolver monitoring
3 Off
2 Warning Configuration of monitoring for "encoder at
3 Off X9"
C0588 MONIT 0 0 Trip H10 / H11 monitoring
H10/H11 2 Warning Only Lenze service personnel is permitted to
3 Off set C0588 = 2 or C0588 = 3
2 Warning Configuration of following error monitoring
3 Off l Function block DFSET monitors the
following error. Monitoring is only active if
DFSET is used.
2 Warning Configuration of phase error monitoring
3 Off l Function block DFSET monitors the
following error. Monitoring is only active if
DFSET is used.
3 Off
3 Off
3 Off
C0594 MONIT SD6 ® 0 Trip SD6 monitoring
2 Warning Configuration of "motor temperature sensor"
3 Off monitoring
2 Warning Configuration of "CAN bus off" monitoring
3 Off
C0596 NMAX LIMIT 5500 0 {1 rpm} 16000 System speed monitoring
C0597 MONIT LP1 3 0 Trip LP1 monitoring
3 Off monitoring
2 Warning Configuration of monitoring for master
3 Off current at X5/1.2 < 2 mA
8.4−26 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0599 LIMIT LP 1 5.0 1.0 {0.1 %} 10.0 LP1 monitoring
Current limit value for motor phase
monitoring
C0600 FUNCTION 1 0 OUT = IN1 ARIT2
2 OUT = IN1 − IN2
3 OUT = IN1 × IN2
4 OUT = IN1 / IN2
5 OUT = IN1 / (100% – IN2)
15 OUT = IN1 % IN2
C0601 IN ® Selection list 1 ARIT2
C0602 , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 ARIT2
2 (C0601/2)
C0606 MONIT−OC8 2 0 Trip Configuration of the I2 × t advance warning
2 Warning The threshold is set in C0127
3 Off
C0610 IN ® Selection list ADD
1 Configuration of analog input signals
C0611 , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 ADD
2 (C0610/2)
3 (C0610/3)
C0620 DB1 GAIN 1.00 −10.00 {0.01} 10.00 DB1 gain
Gain of dead band component DB1
C0621 DB1 VALUE 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 DB1 dead band
Dead band of DB1
C0622 DB1−IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 DB1
C0623 (C0622) , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 DB1
C0630 MAX LIMIT 100.0 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 LIM upper limit
0 Upper limit of limiter LIM1
C0631 MIN LIMIT −100.0 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 LIM lower limit
Lower limit of limiter LIM1
C0632 LIM−IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 LIM1
C0633 (C0632) , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 LIM1
C0640 DELAY T 20.00 0.01 {0.01 s} 50.00 PT1−1
Setting of the time constant
C0641 PT1−1−IN 1000 FIXED0% à Selection list 1 PT1−1
C0642 (C0641) , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 PT1−1
C0643 DELAY T 0.005 0.003 {0.001 s} 5.000 PT1−2
Setting of filter time constant
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−27

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0644 à Selection list 4 PT1−2
1 PT1−2−DFIN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0
C0645 (C0644) , PT1−2
C0646 0 {1 rpm} 16000 PT1−2
1 5 Compensation of the phase shift
(compensation speed) when filter is on
If C0646/1 = 0 is set, the position will be lost
2 15000 Compensation of the phase shift
(compensation speed) when filter is off
If C0646/2 = 0 is set, the position will be lost
C0647 à Selection list 2 PT1−2
1 PT1−2−DISABLE 1000 FIXED0 LOW = filter on
FILTER HIGH = filter off
2 PT1−2−RESET 1000 FIXED0 HIGH = filter reset
C0648 , PT1−2
2 (C0647/2)
C0650 DT1−1 GAIN 1.000 −320.00 {0.001} 320.00 DT1−1
Gain
C0651 DELAY T 1.00 0.003 {0.01 s} 5.000 DT1−1
Time constant
C0652 IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 DT1−1
C0653 SENSIBILITY 1 1 15−bit DT1−1
2 14−bit Sensitivity
3 13−bit
4 12−bit
5 11−bit
6 10−bit
7 9−bit
C0654 (C0652) , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99
C0655 NUMERATOR 1 −32767 {1} 32767 CONV5
Numerator
R Denominator
C0658 (C0657) , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 CONV5
C0661 IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 ABS1
Input for absolute value generator
C0662 (C0661) , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 ABS1
C0671 RFG1 TIR 0.000 0.000 {0.01 s} 999.900 RFG1
C0672 RFG1 TIF 0.000 0.000 {0.01 s} 999.900 RFG1
C0673 IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 RFG1
C0674 SET 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 RFG1
8.4−28 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0675 LOAD 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 RFG1
C0676 , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 RFG1
2 (C0674)
C0677 (C0675) , RFG1
2 IN 1 > IN2 Selection of the function for comparing
3 IN 1 < IN2 inputs IN1 and IN2
4 |IN1| = |IN2|
5 |IN1| > |IN2|
6 |IN1| < |IN2|
C0681 HYSTERESIS 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 CMP1
Hysteresis
C0682 WINDOW 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 CMP1
Window
1 CMP1−IN1 5001 MCTRL−NACT
2 CMP1−IN2 19500 FCODE−17
C0684 , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 CMP1
2 (C0683/1)
C0685 FUNCTION 1 1 IN1 = IN2 CMP2
4 |IN1| = |IN2|
5 |IN1| > |IN2|
6 |IN1| < |IN2|
C0686 HYSTERESIS 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 CMP2
Hysteresis
C0687 WINDOW 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 CMP2
Window
C0689 , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 CMP2
2 (C0688/2)
4 |IN1| = |IN2|
5 |IN1| > |IN2|
6 |IN1| < |IN2|
C0691 HYSTERESIS 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 CMP3
Hysteresis
C0692 WINDOW 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 CMP3
Window
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−29

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0694 , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 CMP3
2 (C0693/2)
C0695 FUNCTION 2 1 IN 1 < IN2 PHCMP1
2 |IN1| < |IN2| Selection of the function for comparing
inputs IN1 and IN2
Configuration of input signals
1 IN 1000 FIXED0INC
2 IN 1000 FIXED0INC
C0698 , −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 PHCMP1
2 (C0697/2)
C0700 IN 19523 FCODE−472/3 ® Selection list 1 ANEG1
C0701 (C0700) , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99
C0703 IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 ANEG2
C0704 (C0703) , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99
1 Falling edge Edge evaluation
2 Both edges With the corresponding signal edge at IN,
OUT switches to HIGH
C0711 PULSE T 0.001 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 TRANS1
Pulse duration of TRANS1
C0713 IN 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 TRANS1−IN
C0714 (C0713) , TRANS1−IN
1 Falling edge Edge evaluation
2 Both edges With the corresponding signal edge at IN,
OUT switches to HIGH
C0716 PULSE T 0.001 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 TRANS2
Pulse duration
C0719 (C0718) , TRANS2
2 On/off delay
C0721 DELAY T 1.000 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 DIGDEL1
C0724 (C0723) , DIGDEL1
8.4−30 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

2 On/off delay
C0726 DELAY T 1.000 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 DIGDEL2
C0729 (C0728) , DIGDEL2
C0730 OSZ MODUS 0 0 Start measurement OSZ
1 Stop measurement Start/stop of measured value recording
C0731 OSZ STATUS 0 0 Measurement completed OSZ
1 Measurement active Current operating state
2 Trigger detected
3 Cancel
4 Cancel after trigger
5 Read memory
1 KANAL1 1000 FIXED0%
1 TRIG INP 1000 FIXED0 Trigger input
C0734 TRIG−SOURCE 1 0 Digital trigger input OSZ
1 Measuring channel 1 Selection of trigger source
C0735 TRIGGER−LEVEL 0 −32767 {1} 32767 OSZ
Adjustment of the trigger level for channel 1
... 4
C0736 TRIGGER−SLOPE 0 0 LOW/HIGH edge OSZ
1 HIGH/LOW edge Selection of the trigger edge
C0737 TRIGGER−DELA 0.0 −100.0 {0.1 %} 999.9 OSZ
Y Setting of pretriggering and posttriggering
C0738 PROBE PERIOD 3 3 1 ms OSZ
4 2 ms Selection of the sampling period
5 5 ms
6 10 ms
7 20 ms
8 50 ms
9 100 ms
10 200 ms
11 500 ms
12 1s
13 2s
14 5s
15 10 s
16 20 s
17 50 s
18 1 min
19 2 min
20 5 min
21 10 min
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−31

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0739 KANALANZAHL 4 1 {1} 4 OSZ
Number of channels to be measured
C0740 DATA READ 0 OSZ
1 0 0 {1} 65535 Selection of the starting point for reading out
the data memory. Allows selective access to a
memory block
2 0 0 Data reading inhibited Inhibit "Read memory"
1 Data reading enabled
C0741 OSZ
1 VERSION OSZ , Version
2 LENGTH Memory size
MEMORY
3 DATA WIDTH Data width
4 NO. CHANNELS Number of channels
C0742 LENGTH OF DB , OSZ
Display of data block length
C0743 READ DB , OSZ
Reading of an 8−byte data block
C0744 MEM: DEPTH 2048 0 512 measured values OSZ
1 1024 measured values Adaptation of the memory size to the
2 1536 measured values measurement task
C0749 , OSZ
1 BRK:OFF INDEX Information on measured value storage
2 TRIGGER INDEX
3 END INDEX
C0750 VP DENOM 16 1 Vp = 1 DFRFG1
2 Vp = 1/2 Denominator of the position controller gain
4 Vp = 1/4
8 Vp = 1/8
16 Vp = 1/16
34 Vp = 1/32
64 Vp = 1/64
128 Vp = 1/128
256 Vp = 1/256
512 Vp = 1/512
1024 Vp = 1/1024
2048 Vp = 1/2048
4096 Vp = 1/4096
8192 Vp = 1/8192
16384 Vp = 1/16384
C0751 DFRFG1 TIR 1.000 0.001 {0.001 s} 999.900 DFRFG1
Tir (acceleration time)
C0752 MAX SPEED 3000 1 {1 rpm} 16000 DFRFG1
Maximum speed (here: maximum catch−up
speed)
C0753 DFRFG1 QSP 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 DFRFG1
Deceleration time Tif when deceleration ramp
is activated
C0754 PH ERROR 2.109 10 {1 inc} 2.109 DFRFG1
Following error
C0755 SYN WINDOW 100 0 {1 inc} 65535 DFRFG1
Synchronisation window
8.4−32 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0756 OFFSET 0 −1.109 {1 inc} 1.109 DFRFG1
Offset
C0757 FUNCTION 0 0 TP start inactive DFRFG1
1 TP start active Function
C0758 IN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 DFRFG1
C0759 QSP 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 DFRFG1
C0760 STOP 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 DFRFG1−STOP
"Ramp function generator stop"
C0761 RESET 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 DFRFG1
Reset of integrators
C0764 , DFRFG1
2 (C0760)
3 (C0761)
C0765 (C0758) , −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 DFRFG1
C0766 SPEED DIR 1 1 both directions (CW/CCW) DFRFG1
2 positive direction only (CW) Selection of the direction of rotation
3 negative direction only (CCW)
C0768 SET 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 DFRFG1
Start speed
C0769 (C0768) , DFRFG1
Data input
C0773 , FLIP1
2 (C0771)
3 (C0772)
Data input
c0777 CLR 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 FLIP2
C0778 , FLIP1
2 (C0776)
3 (C0777)
C0780 N 50 AIN1−OUT ® Selection list 1 NSET
setpoint
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−33

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0781 N−INV 10251 R/L/Q−R/L ® Selection list 2 NSET
setpoint inversion
C0782 NADD 5650 ASW1−OUT ® Selection list 1 NSET
Configuration of input signal for additional
setpoint
C0783 NADD−INV 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 NSET
Configuration of additional setpoint
inversion
C0784 CINH−VAL 5001 MCTRL−NACT ® Selection list 1 NSET
Configuration of output signal with the
controller being inhibited
C0785 SET 5000 MCTRL−NSET2 ® Selection list 1 NSET
Configuration of input signal for ramp
function generator
C0786 LOAD 5001 MCTRL−QSP−OUT ® Selection list 2 NSET
Configuration of digital input signal for
loading the ramp function generator
Configuration of JOG selection and JOG
1 JOG*1 53 DIGIN3 activation
Binary interpretation
2 JOG*2 1000 FIXED0
3 JOG*4 1000 FIXED0
4 JOG*8 1000 FIXED0
Configuration of Ti selection and Ti activation
1 TI*1 1000 FIXED0 l Binary interpretation
l Tir and Tif pairs are identical
2 TI*2 1000 FIXED0
3 TI*4 1000 FIXED0
4 TI*8 1000 FIXED0
C0789 RFG−0 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 NSET
function generator 0)
C0790 RFG−STOP 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 NSET
function generator stop)
C0798 , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 NSET
1 CINH−VAL Display of analog input signals
2 SET
8.4−34 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0799 , NSET
1 (781) Display of digital input signals
2 (783)
3 (786)
4 (787/1)
5 (787/2)
6 (787/3)
7 (787/4)
8 (788/1)
9 (788/2)
10 (788/3)
11 (788/4)
12 (789)
13 (790)
C0800 SET 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 PCTRL1
Configuration of setpoint input signal
C0801 ACT 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 PCTRL1
Configuration of actual value input signal
C0802 INFLU 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 PCTRL1
Configuration of evaluation input signal
C0803 ADAPT 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 PCTRL1
Configuration of adaptation input signal
C0804 INACT 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 PCTRL1
Configuration of inactivation input signal
C0805 I−OFF 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 PCTRL1
Configuration of digital input signal (switch
off I−component)
C0808 , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 PCTRL1
2 (C0801)
3 (C0802)
4 (C0803)
C0809 , PCTRL1
2 (C0805)
1 IN 55 AIN2−OUT
2 IN 1000 FIXED0%
C0812 , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 ASW1
2 (C0810/2)
C0813 (C0811) , ASW1
1 IN 1000 FIXED0%
2 IN 1000 FIXED0%
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−35

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0817 , −199.99 {0.01%} 199.99 ASW2
2 (C0815/2)
C0818 (C0816) , ASW2
1 IN 1000 FIXED0
2 IN 1000 FIXED0
3 IN 1000 FIXED0
C0821 , AND1
2 (C0820/2)
3 (C0820/3)
C0822 1000 ® Selection list 2 AND2
1 IN 1000 FIXED0
2 IN 1000 FIXED0
3 IN 1000 FIXED0
C0823 , AND2
2 (C0822/2)
3 (C0822/3)
1 IN 1000 FIXED0
2 IN 1000 FIXED0
3 IN 1000 FIXED0
C0825 , AND3
2 (C0824/2)
3 (C0824/3)
1 IN 1000 FIXED0
2 IN 1000 FIXED0
3 IN 1000 FIXED0
C0827 , AND4
2 (C0826/2)
3 (C0826/3)
1 IN 1000 FIXED0
2 IN 1000 FIXED0
3 IN 1000 FIXED0
8.4−36 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0829 , AND5
2 (C0828/2)
3 (C0828/3)
1 IN 1000 FIXED0
2 IN 1000 FIXED0
3 IN 1000 FIXED0
C0831 , OR1
2 (C083021)
3 (C0830/3)
1 IN 1000 FIXED0
2 IN 1000 FIXED0
3 IN 1000 FIXED0
C0833 , OR2
2 (C0832/2)
3 (C0832/3)
1 IN 1000 FIXED0
2 IN 1000 FIXED0
3 IN 1000 FIXED0
C0835 , OR3
2 (C0834/2)
3 (C0834/3)
1 IN 1000 FIXED0
2 IN 1000 FIXED0
3 IN 1000 FIXED0
C0837 , OR4
2 (C0836/2)
3 (C0836/3)
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−37

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0838 ® Selection list 2 OR5, OR6, OR7
8 IN 1000 FIXED0 OR6−IN5 (NOT)
13 IN 1000 FIXED0 OR7−IN5 (NOT)
C0839 (C0838) , OR5, OR6, OR7
1 Display of digital input signals
...
13
C0841 (C0840) , NOT1
C0843 (C0842) , NOT2
C0845 (C0844) , NOT3
C0847 (C0846) , NOT4
C0849 (C0848) , NOT5
C0850 ® Selection list 1 AIF−OUT
Configuration of process output words for
1 OUT.W1 1000 FIXED0% the automation interface AIF (X1)

C0851 OUT.D1 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 AIF−OUT
Configuration of 32−bit phase information
2 D1: LOW phase the automation interface AIF (X1)
3 D2: HIGH phase
8.4−38 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

2 High phase the automation interface AIF (X1)
3 D2: LOW phase Configuration of process output word 1 for
the automation interface AIF (X1)
C0855 IN , AIF
Hexadecimal process input words for the
automation interface X1
1 Bit 00 {1} Bit 15 AIF−IN
2 Bit 16 {1} Bit 31 AIF−IN
C0856 , −199 {1 %} 199 AIF−IN
1 IN.W1 Decimal process input words
Display: 100.00 % = 16384
2 IN.W2
3 IN.W3
C0857 IN.D1 , −2147483648 {1} 2147483647 AIF−IN
C0858 , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 AIF−OUT
1 OUT.W1 Process output words
Display: 100 % = 16384
2 OUT.W2
3 OUT.W3
C0859 OUT.D1 , −2147483648 {1} 2147483647 AIF−OUT

1 OUT1.W1 5001
10 OUT3.W3 1000 FIXED0%
11 OUT3.W4 1000 FIXED0%

C0863 , 0 1 AIF
1 IN1 (0−15)
2 IN1 (16−31)
3 IN2 (0−15)
4 IN2 (16−31)
5 IN3 (0−15)
6 IN3 (16−31)
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−39

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

2 Low phase system bus (CAN)
2 TYPEOUT2.W1 0
3 TYPEOUT3.W1 0
2 High phase system bus (CAN)
2 TYPEOUT2.W2 0
3 TYPEOUT3.W2 0
C0866 , −32768.00 {0.01%} 32767.00 CAN
1 IN1.W1
2 IN1.W2
3 IN1.W3
4 IN2.W1
5 IN2.W2
6 IN2.W3
7 IN2.W4
8 IN3.W1
9 IN3.W2
10 IN3.W3
11 IN3.W4
C0867 , CAN
1 IN1.D1
2 IN2.D1
3 IN3.D1
C0868 , −199.99 {0.01%} 199.99 CAN
1 OUT1.W1
2 OUT1.W2
3 OUT1.W3
4 OUT2.W1
5 OUT2.W2
6 OUT2.W3
7 OUT2.W4
8 OUT3.W1
9 OUT3.W2
10 OUT3.W3
11 OUT3.W4
C0869 , −2147483648 {1} 2147483647 CAN
1 OUT1.D1
2 OUT2.D1
3 OUT3.D1
Configuration of digital input signals (inhibit
1 CINH1 1000 FIXED0 controller)
2 CINH2 1000 FIXED0
C0871 TRIP−SET 54 DIGIN4 ® Selection list 2 DCTRL
C0876 TRIP−RES 55 DIGIN5 ® Selection list 2 DCTRL
8.4−40 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0878 , DCTRL
2 (C0870/2)
3 (C0871)
4 (C0876)
C0879 0 No reset Reset control words
1 RESET C135 0 1 Reset
2 RESET AIF 0
3 RESET CAN 0
C0885 R 51 DIGIN1 ® Selection list 2 R/L/Q
Configuration of digital input signal (CW
rotation)
C0886 L 52 DIGIN2 ® Selection list 2 R/L/Q
Configuration of digital input signal (CCW
rotation)
C0889 , R/L/Q
2 (C0886)
C0890 N−SET 5050 NSET−NOUT ® Selection list 1 MCTRL
setpoint
C0891 M−ADD 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MCTRL
Configuration of input signal for torque
setpoint
C0892 LO−M−LIM 5700 ANEG1−OUT ® Selection list 1 MCTRL
Configuration of input signal for lower torque
limit
C0893 HI−M−LIM 19523 FCODE−472/3 ® Selection list 1 MCTRL
Configuration of input signal for upper
torque limit
C0894 PHI−SET 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 MCTRL
Configuration of input signal for rotor
position setpoint
C0895 PHI−LIM 1006 FIXED100% ® Selection list 1 MCTRL
Configuration of input signal for phase
controller limit
C0896 N2−LIM 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MCTRL
Configuration of input signal for 2nd speed
limit value
C0897 PHI−ON 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 MCTRL
Configuration of phase controller switch−on
signal
C0898 FLD−WEAK 1006 FIXED100% ® Selection list 1 MCTRL
Configuration of input signal for field
weakening
C0899 N/M−SWT 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 MCTRL
Configuration of input signal for changeover
between speed and torque control
C0900 QSP 10250 R/L/Q−QSP ® Selection list 2 MCTRL
Configuration of control signal for release
C0901 I−SET 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MCTRL
Configuration of input signal for loading
I−component of speed controller
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−41

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0902 I−LOAD 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 MCTRL
Configuration of activation signal for loading
I−component of speed controller
C0903 P−ADAPT 1006 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MCTRL
of phase controller
C0906 , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 MCTRL
2 (C0891)
3 (C0892)
4 (C0893)
5 (C0895)
6 (C0896)
7 (C0898)
8 (C0901)
9 (C0903)
C0907 , MCTRL
2 (C0899)
3 (C0900)
4 (C0902)
C0908 (C0894) , −2147483647 {1 inc} 2147483647 Set phase signal
l 1 rev. = 65536 inc.
C0909 SPEED LIMIT 1 1 +/− 175 % Limitation of direction of rotation for the
2 0 ... +175 % speed setpoint
3 −175 ... 0 %
C0920 REFC−ON 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 REFC
Activation of homing function
C0921 REFC−MARK 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 REFC
Digital reference switch
C0922 REFC−PHI−IN 1000 DFSET−PSET ® Selection list 3 REFC
Configuration of phase input signal
C0923 REFC−N−IN 1000 DFSET−NOUT ® Selection list 1 REFC
C0924 REFC−POS−LOA 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 REFC
D Configuration of digital input signal
Control "Set position"
C0925 REFC−ACTPOS−I 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 REFC
Configuration of input signal for "Set
position"
C0926 , −2147483647 {1 inc} 2147483647 REFC
1 (C0925)
2 (C0922)
3 ACTPOS Actual position
4 TARGET Target position
C0927 , REFC
2 (C0921)
3 (C0924)
8.4−42 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0928 (C0922) , −2147483647 {1 inc} 2147483647 REFC
Phase signal (following error)
l 1 rev = 65536 inc
C0929 (C0923) , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 REFC
C0930 GEARBOX MOT 1 1 {1} 65535 REFC
Encoder−gearbox factor numerator (on the
motor side)
C0931 GEARBOX ENC 1 1 {1} 65535 REFC
Encoder−gearbox factor denominator (on the
encoder side)
C0932 REF MODE 0 REFC
Homing mode
0 Mode 0 Positive direction, reference switch, zero
pulse
1 Mode 1 Negative direction, reference switch, zero
pulse
6 Mode 6 Positive direction, reference switch, touch
probe
7 Mode 7 Negative direction, reference switch, touch
probe
8 Mode 8 Positive direction, touch probe
9 Mode 9 Negative direction, touch probe
20 Mode 20 Direct homing
21 Mode 21 Direct homing, store actual value
C0933 REF TRANS 0 0 Rising edge REFC
1 Falling edge Edge of homing signal
C0934 REF OFFSET 0 −2140000000 {1 inc} 2140000000 REFC
C0935 REF SPEED 2.000 0.0001 {0.0001 100.0000 REFC
0 %} Homing speed
Speed used for homing run
The value set is the percentage value of Nmax
C0936 REF TI 1.00 0.01 {0.01 s} 990.00 REFC
Homing acceleration/deceleration time
Tir and Tif are identical
C0937 REFC−DFIN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 REFC
Input configuration
C0938 (C0937) , REFC
C0940 NUMERATOR 1 −32767 {1} 32767 CONV1
Numerator
C0941 DENOMITATOR 1 1 {1} 32767 CONV1
Denominator
C0942 CONV1−IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 CONV1
C0943 (C0942) , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 CONV1
C0945 NUMERATOR 1 −32767 {1} 32767 CONV2
Numerator
R Denominator
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−43

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C0948 (C0947) , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 CONV2
C0950 NUMERATOR 1 −32767 {1} 32767 CONV3
Numerator
R Denominator
C0953 (C0952) , −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 CONV3
C0955 NUMERATOR 1 −32767 {1} 32767 CONV4
Numerator
R Denominator
C0958 (C0957) , −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 CONV4
C0960 FUNCTION 1 1 Characteristic 1 CURVE1
2 Characteristic 2 Selection of the characteristic function
3 Characteristic 3
C0961 Y0 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99 CURVE1
Interpolation point configuration
C0962 Y1 50.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99 CURVE1
Interpolation point configuration
C0963 Y2 75.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99 CURVE1
Configuration − grid point
C0964 Y100 100.0 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99 CURVE1
0 Configuration − grid point
C0965 X1 50.00 0.01 {0.01 %} 99.00 CURVE1
C0966 X2 75.00 0.01 {0.01 %} 99.00 CURVE1
C0967 IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 CURVE1
C0968 (C0967) , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 CURVE1
C0970 N−SET 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MFAIL
Configuration of speed input signal (setpoint
path)
C0971 FAULT 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 MFAIL
(activation of mains failure control)
C0972 RESET 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 MFAIL
Configuration of digital input signal (reset of
mains failure control)
C0973 ADAPT 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MFAIL
of voltage controller P−gain
C0974 CONST 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MFAIL
of voltage controller P−gain
C0975 THRESHLD 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MFAIL
Configuration of input signal for restart
protection when the value falls below the
speed threshold
8.4−44 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C0976 NACT 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MFAIL
Configuration of input signal for comparison
value of threshold function
l Starting point for U2 controller
C0977 SET 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MFAIL
Configuration of input signal for speed start
value
C0978 DC−SET 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 MFAIL
Configuration of input signal for DC−bus
voltage setpoint
C0980 MFAIL VP 0.500 0.001 {0.001} 31.000 MFAIL
Setting of the gain Vp
C0981 MFAIL TN 100 20 {1 ms} 2000 MFAIL
Setting of reset time Tn
C0982 MFAIL TIR 2.000 0.001 {0.001 s} 16.000 MFAIL
Setting of the acceleration time Tir
C0983 RETRIGGER T 1.000 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 MFAIL
Retrigger time
C0988 , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 MFAIL
2 (C0973)
3 (C0974)
4 (C0975)
5 (C0976)
6 (C0977)
7 (C0978)
C0989 , MFAIL
2 (C0972)
Configuration of reset signal
C0992 (C0990) , −32767 {1} 32767 PHINT1
C0993 (C0991) , PHINT1
C0995 DIVISION 0 −31 {1} 31 PHDIV
Divisor in the power−of−two format (2C0995)
C0996 IN 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 PHDIV
C0997 (C0996) , −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 PHDIV
C1000 DIVISION 1 0 {1} 31 CONVPHA1
Divisor in the power−of−two format (2C0995)
C1001 IN 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 Configuration of CONVPHA1 input

C1002 (C1001) , −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 CONVPHA1
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−45

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

2 OUT = IN1 − IN2
3 OUT = IN1 × IN2 / 230
13 OUT = IN1 × IN2
14 OUT = IN1 / IN2
15 OUT = IN1 % IN2
1 IN 1000 FIXED0INC
2 IN 1000 FIXED0INC
C1012 , −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 ARITPH1
2 (C1011/2)
2 OUT = IN1 − IN2
3 OUT = IN1 × IN2 / 230
13 OUT = IN1 × IN2
14 OUT = IN1 / IN2
15 OUT = IN1 % IN2
1 IN 1000 FIXED0INC
2 IN 1000 FIXED0INC
C1022 , −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 ARITPH2
2 (C1021/2)
2 OUT = IN1 − IN2
3 OUT = IN1 × IN2 / 230
13 OUT = IN1 × IN2
14 OUT = IN1 / IN2
15 OUT = IN1 % IN2
1 IN 1000 FIXED0INC
2 IN 1000 FIXED0INC
C1027 , −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 ARITPH3
2 (C1026/2)
Reset input
C1032 (C1030) , −32767 {1} 32767 PHINT2
8.4−46 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C1033 (C1031) , PHINT2
C1040 ACCELARATION 100.0 0.001 {0.001} 5000.000 SRFG1
0 Setting of acceleration
C1041 JERK 0.200 0.001 {0.001 s} 999.999 SRFG1
Setting of jerk
C1042 IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 SRFG1
C1043 SET 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 SRFG1
C1044 LOAD 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 SRFG1
C1045 , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 SRFG1
1 (C1042) Display of analog input signal
2 (C1043)
C1046 (C1044) , SRFG1
C1060 ® Selection list 2 FLIP3, FLIP4
1 1000 FIXED0 FLIP3−D
2 1000 FIXED0 FLIP3−CLK
3 1000 FIXED0 FLIP3−CLR
4 1000 FIXED0 FLIP4−D
5 1000 FIXED0 FLIP4−CLK
6 1000 FIXED0 FLIP4−CLR
C1061 , FLIP3, FLIP4
... ...
6 (C1060/6)
C1070 ® Selection list 2 RFGPH2, RFGPH3
1 1000 FIXED0 RFGPH2−RESET
2 1000 FIXED0 RFGPH2−STOP
3 1000 FIXED0 RFGPH2−RFG−0
4 1000 FIXED0 RFGPH2−REL−SEL
5 1000 FIXED0 RFGPH3−RESET
6 1000 FIXED0 RFGPH3−STOP
7 1000 FIXED0 RFGPH3−RFG−0
8 1000 FIXED0 RFGPH3−REL−SEL
C1071 , RFGPH2, RFGPH3
... ...
8 (C1070/8)
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−47

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C1072 ® Selection list 3 RFGPH2, RFGPH3
1 CFG: 1000 FIXED0INC
RFGPH2−SET
RFGPH2−ACT
RFGPH3−SET
RFGPH3−ACT
C1073 , RFGPH2, RFGPH3
... ...
4 (C1072/4)
C1074 0 RFGPHx−PHOUT = 0 RFGPH2, RFGPH3
1 RFGPHx−PHOUT = ACT Mode for reset
2 RFGPHx−PHOUT = SET
1 0 RFGPH2−PHOUT
2 0 RFGPH3−PHOUT
C1075 RFGPH2
Mode
0 Without limit stop The output signal at RFGPH2−PHOUT
continuously follows the setpoint at
RFGPH2−SET
1 With limit stop The output signal at RFGPH2−PHOUT follows
the setpoint at RFGPH2−SET for the length of
a positioning process.
After a HIGH−LOW edge at RFGPH2−STOP, the
output signal continues to follow the
setpoint again.
C1076 RFGPH3
Mode
0 Without limit stop The output signal at RFGPH3−PHOUT
continuously follows the setpoint at
RFGPH3−SET
1 With limit stop The output signal at RFGPH3−PHOUT follows
the setpoint at RFGPH3−SET for the length of
a positioning process.
After a HIGH−LOW edge at RFGPH3−STOP, the
output signal continues to follow the
setpoint again.
C1077 0 {1 inc} 32767 RFGPH2, RFGPH3
1 5 RFGPH2: Catch
2 5 RFGPH3: Catch
C1078 0 {0.0001 14000.0000 RFGPH2, RFGPH3
rpm}
1 200.0 RFGPH2: Nmax. forward
000
2 200.0 RFGPH2: Nmax. return
000
3 200.0 RFGPH3: Nmax. forward
000
4 200.0 RFGPH3: Nmax. return
000
8.4−48 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C1079 0.010 {0.001 s} 130.000 RFGPH2, RFGPH3
1 1.000 RFGPH2: STOP ramp
2 1.000 RFGPH2: Acceleration ramp
3 1.000 RFGPH2: Deceleration ramp
4 1.000 RFGPH3: STOP ramp
5 1.000 RFGPH3: Acceleration ramp
6 1.000 RFGPH3: Deceleration ramp
C1080 ® Selection list 2 LIMPHD1
1 CFG: 1000 FIXED0
LIMPHD1−RESE
T
2 CFG: 1000 FIXED0
LIMPHD1−NO−L
IM
C1081 , LIMPHD1
2 (C1080/2)
C1082 CFG: 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 LIMPHD1
LIMPHD1−DFIN Configuration of input signal
C1083 (C1082) , LIMPHD1
C1084 −16000.0000 {0.0001 16000.0000 LIMPHD1
rpm}
1 1000 Upper limit of Nmax.
2 1000 Lower limit of Nmax.
C1085 NO−LIM−Mode 0 LIMPHD1
Code is available from software version 3.4
onwards
0 Clear overflow buffer If LIMPHD1−NO−LIM = HIGH, the overflow
buffer is cleared. The position is lost.
1 Empty overflow buffer If LIMPHD1−NO−LIM = HIGH, the overflow
buffer is emptied. The increments are output
at LIMPHD1−DFOUT. The position is not lost.
C1090 OUTPUT , −2147483648 {1} 2147483647 FEVAN1
C1091 CODE 141 2 {1} 2000 FEVAN1
Selection of the target subcode
0 Numerator
C1094 DENOMIATOR 0.000 0.0001 {0.0001} 100000.0000 FEVAN1
1 Denominator
C1095 OFFSET 0 0 {1} 1000000000 FEVAN1
Offset setting
C1096 IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 FEVAN1
C1097 FEVAN1−LOAD 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 FEVAN1
C1098 (C1096) , −32768 {1} 32767 FEVAN1
C1099 (C1097) , FEVAN1
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−49

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C1100 FUNCTION 1 FCNT1
Function selection
1 Return If |counter content| ³ |FCNT1−CMP−Val|,
FCNT1−EQUAL is set to HIGH for 1 ms
2 Hold if >= If |counter content| ³ |FCNT1−CMP−Val|, the
counter stops
3 Hold if = If |counter content| = |FCNT1−CMP−Val|, the
counter stops
1 LD−VAL 1000 FIXED0%
2 CMP−VAL 1000 FIXED0%
1 CLKUP 1000 FIXED0
2 CLKDWN 1000 FIXED0
3 LOAD 1000 FIXED0
C1103 , −32768 {1} 32768 FCNT1
2 (C1101/2)
C1104 , FCNT1
2 (C1102/2)
3 (C1102/3)
C1106 ® Selection list 2 SWPH1, SWPH2
1 CFG: 1000 FIXED0
SWPH1−SET
2 CFG: 1000 FIXED0
SWPH2−SET
C1107 , SWPH1, SWPH2
2 (C1106/2)
C1108 1000 ® Selection list 3 SWPH1, SWPH2
1 SWPH1−IN1 1000 FIXED0INC Configuration of input signals
2 SWPH1−IN2 1000 FIXED0INC
C1109 , SWPH1, SWPH2
... ...
4 (C1108/4)
C1120 SYNC MODE 2 0 Sync off SYNC1, SYNC2
1 CAN sync activated Function
2 Terminal sync activated
8.4−50 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C1121 2 0 {1 ms} 13 SYNC1, SYNC2
The interpolation is restarted with every sync
signal
1 SYNC CYCLE 2 SYNC1, SYNC2
Definition of the cycle time of sync signals (in
the slave); for system bus only
2 INTERPOL. CYCL 2 SYNC1, SYNC2
Definition of the interpolation time between
the sync signals (in the slave); for terminal
only
C1122 SYNC TIME 0.460 0.000 {0.001 10.000 SYNC1, SYNC2
ms} Phase shift between CAN sync and internal
control program cycle.
l For system bus only
l Depending on the baud rate and bus load
C1123 −0.450 {0.001 0.450 SYNC1, SYNC2
ms}
1 PHASESHIFT 0.000 Phase shift between terminal sync and
internal control program cycle; for terminal
sync only
2 SYNC 0.200 Synchronisation window for the
WINDOW synchronisation edge of the terminal sync
(LOW/HIGH edge). For terminal sync only.
SYNCx−STAT = HIGH if the sent sync signal is
within the window.
C1125 IN2 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 SYNC1
C1127 (C1124) , −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 SYNC1
C1128 (C1125) , −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 SYNC1
C1129 (C1126) , −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 SYNC1
1 Falling edge Selection of edge evaluation
2 Both edges
C1141 PULSE T 0.001 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 TRANS3
Setting of the pulse duration
C1144 (C1143) , TRANS3
1 Falling edge Selection of edge evaluation
2 Both edges
C1146 PULSE T 0.001 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 TRANS4
Setting of the pulse duration
C1149 (C1148) , TRANS4
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−51

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C1150 FUNCTION 0 0 Load permanent PHINT3
1 Load edge Function selection
2 Compare & subtract
C1151 CMP. VALUE 2×109 0 {1} 2000000000 PHINT3
Setting of a comparison value
C1154 LOAD 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 PHINT3
C1155 SET 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 PHINT3
Configuration of phase input signal
C1157 (C1153) , −32767 {1} 32767 PHINT3
C1158 (C1154) , PHINT3
C1159 (C1155) , −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 PHINT3
1 IN1 1000 FIXED0%
2 IN2 1000 FIXED0%
C1162 , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 ASW3
2 (C1160/2)
C1163 (C1161) , ASW3
1 IN1 1000 FIXED0%
2 IN2 1000 FIXED0%
C1167 , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 ASW3
2 (C1165/2)
C1168 (C1166) , ASW4
C1170 NUMERATOR 1 −32767 32767 CONV6
Numerator
R Denominator
C1173 (C1172) , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 CONV6
1 IN1 1000 FIXED0
2 IN2 1000 FIXED0
3 IN3 1000 FIXED0
8.4−52 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C1176 , AND6
2 (C1175/2)
3 (C1175/3)
C1178 ® Selection list 2 AND7, AND8, AND9
1 IN 1000 FIXED0 AND7−IN1
8 IN 1000 FIXED0 AND8−IN5 (NOT)
13 IN 1000 FIXED0 AND9−IN5 (NOT)
C1179 , AND7, AND8, AND9
... ...
13 (C1178/13)
C1180 ® Selection list 2 PHINT4, PHINT5
1 LOAD 1000 FIXED0 PHINT4−LOAD
2 RESET 1000 FIXED0 PHINT4−RESET
3 RESET 1000 FIXED0 PHINT5−RESET
4 LOAD 1000 FIXED0 PHINT5−LOAD
5 TP−ENABLE 1000 FIXED0 PHINT5−TP−ENABLE
6 TP−EDGE−SELEC 1000 FIXED0 PHINT5−TP−EDGE−SELECT
T
C1181 , PHINT4, PHINT5
... ...
6 (C1180/6)
C1182 ® Selection list 3 PHINT4, PHINT5
Configuration of phase input signals
1 H−VALUE 1000 FIXED0INC PHINT4−H−VALUE
2 L−VALUE 1000 FIXED0INC PHINT4−L−VALUE
3 SET 1000 FIXED0INC PHINT4−SET
4 SET 1000 FIXED0INC PHINT5−SET
5 H−VALUE 1000 FIXED0INC PHINT5−H−VALUE
6 TP−POS 1000 FIXED0INC PHINT5−TP−POS
7 X−OFFSET 1000 FIXED0INC PHINT5−X−OFFSET
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−53

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C1183 , PHINT4, PHINT5
... ...
7 (C1182/7)
C1184 ® Selection list 4 PHINT4
Configuration of speed input signals
1 DFIN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 PHINT4−DFIN
2 DFIN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 PHINT5−DFIN
3 TP−SPEED−LIM 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 PHINT5−TP−SPEED−LIM
C1185 , PHINT4
2 (C1184/2)
3 (C1184/3)
C1186 1 PHINT5
0 X7/X8 + X5/E4, immediate Touch probe mode
compensation
1 X9 + X5/E5, immediate compensation
2 DFIN + X5/E5, compensation after zero
crossing
C1188 ® Selection list 1 PHINT5
1 NUM 1000 FIXED0%
2 DENOM 1000 FIXED0%
C1189 , PHINT5
2 (C1188/2)
C1190 0 Temperature characteristic for PTC
thermistor
Selection of the characteristic for the PTC
thermistor at X7 or X8 for motor temperature
detection
0 Standard Characteristic for PTC thermistors used in
Lenze motors
1 Characteristic Characteristic for application−specific PTC
thermistors
C1191 0 {1 °C} 255 PTC thermistor temperature range
Definition of temperature points on the PTC
thermistor characteristic
1 100 Lower temperature point T1
2 150 Upper temperature point T2
C1192 0 {1 W} 3000 PTC thermistor resistance range
Definition of resistance points on the PTC
thermistor characteristic
1 1670 Resistance point R1 for T1
2 2225 Resistance point R2 for T2
C1195 OUT.D2 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 AIF−OUT
1000 Configuration of phase input signal
C1196 (C1195) , −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 AIF−OUT
C1197 IN.D2 , AIF−IN
8.4−54 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C1200 ® Selection list 3 PHADD1
Configuration of phase input signals
C1201 , −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 PHADD1
2 (C1200/2)
3 (C1200/3)
2 PHADD1−IN2 1000 FIXED0INC
C1206 , −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 PHADD1
1 (C1205/1)
2 (C1205/2)
3 STORE1−ENWI 1000 FIXED0
N
1 STORE1−IN 1000 FIXEDP
HI−0
2 STORE1−MASKI 1000 FIXEDP
HI−0
C1212 MASKV 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 STORE1
C1215 , STORE1
... ...
5 (C1210/5)
C1216 , −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 STORE1
2 (C1211/2)
C1217 (C1212) , −2147483647 2147483647 STORE1
C1223 , STORE2
2 (C1220/2)
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−55

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

1 PHDIFF1−EN 1000 FIXED0
2 PHDIFF1−RES 1000 FIXED0
C1231 IN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 PHDIFF1
1 PHDIFF1−SET 1000 FIXED0INC
2 PHDIFF1−ADD 1000 FIXED0INC
C1235 , PHDIFF1
2 (C1230/2)
C1236 (C1231) , −32767 {1 rpm} 32767
C1237 , −2147483647 2147483647 PHDIFF1
2 (C1232/2)
C1240 ® Selection list 1 CONVPHPH1
1 CONVPHPH1−N 1000 FIXED0%
UM
2 CONVPHPH1−D 1000 FIXED0%
EN
C1241 CONVPHPH1−A 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 CONVPHPH1
CT Configuration of input signals
C1242 CONVPHPH1−I 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 CONVPHPH1
N Configuration of input signals
C1245 , −199.99 {0.01 %} 1999.99 CONVPHPH1
2 (C1240/2)
C1246 (C1241) , CONVPHPH1
C1247 (C1242) , −2147483647 2147483647 CONVPHPH1
C1250 IN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 CONVPP1
C1251 1000 ® Selection list 3 CONVPP1
1 CONVPP1−NU FIXED0INC
M
2 CONVPP1−DEN FIXED0INC
C1253 (C1250) , −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 CONVPP1
C1254 , −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 CONVPP1
2 (C1251/2)
C1255 N−TRIM2 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 DFSET
C1258 (C1255) , −32767 {1 rpm} 32767
C1260 OFFSET 0 −16383 {1} 16383 GEARCOMP
Offset
8.4−56 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C1261 NUM 1 −32767 {1} 32767 GEARCOMP
Numerator
C1262 DENUM 1 1 {1} 32767 GEARCOMP
Denominator
C1265 TORQUE 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 GEARCOMP
Configuration of correction input signal
C1266 PHI−IN 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 GEARCOMP
C1268 (C1265) , −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 GEARCOMP
C1269 (C1266) , −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 GEARCOMP
C1271 , −2147483647 {1} 2147483647 PHCMP3
2 (C1270/2)
2 Warning Configuration of sync error monitoring
3 Off
2 Warning Configuration of monitoring with limited
input value at DFIN
3 Off
C1295 0 0 Limited to ±29999 CDATA
CDATA−NOUT limitation mode
C1295 must be set to 1 to prevent positioning
1 Limited to ±14999 errors caused by the input signal for the
stretching and compressing function at
YSET1−FACT being > 100 %.
C1296 0 0 C1331/1 CDATA
Selection of the signal source for limiting the
1 Input CDATA−TP−SPEED−LIM TP catch−up speed
C1297 0 CDATA
Mode for CDATA−NOUT
0 NOUT follows continuously Output signal at CDATA−NOUT follows
positioning jumps
1 NOUT follows, NOUT=0 if X−RESET=1 If CDATA−REL−SEL = 0 and CDATA−X−RESET = 1,
CDATA−NOUT is set to 0
C1298 , Resolution of master value
Unit: [inc./s−units]
C1299 , Resolution of drive
Unit: [inc./s−units]
C1300 , 1 ... 8 CDATA
Number of profiles used
C1301 , 0 {1} 2048 CDATA
1 CURVE 0 Number of grid points
à Depending on the number of profiles
... ..
8 CURVE 7
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−57

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C1303 1 {1} 65535 Gearbox factor
1 1 Gearbox factor numerator − master value
2 1 Gearbox factor denominator − master value
C1304 360.0 0.0001 {0.0001 214000.0000 Output−side feed constant − master value
000 units/re Output−side feed constant − master value
v.}
C1305 1 {1} 65535 Gearbox factor
1 1 Gearbox factor numerator − actual value
2 1 Gearbox factor denominator − actual value
C1306 360.0 0.0001 {0.0001 214000.0000 Output−side feed constant − actual value
000 units/re Output−side feed constant − actual value
v.}
C1307 0 CDATA
Mode of profile change−over for input
CDATA−RESET
0 Init CAM via LH edge at RESET A LOW/HIGH edge at CDATA−RESET is used to
change between profiles.
1 Init CAM via HIGH edge at RESET The level at CDATA−RESET is evaluated.
Changing between profiles is possible when
the level is HIGH.
C1308 WELD MODE 0 WELD1
If FB WELD1 is used, C1308 must be set to 1.
0 Without WELD function When selecting a configuration without FB
WELD1, C1308 is automatically set to 0.
1 With WELD function When selecting a configuration with FB
WELD1, C1308 is automatically set to 1.
C1309 100 1 {1 inc.} 18×108 CDATA
Window for zero crossing of the master value
C1310 0 0 {1} 7 CURVEC1
Profile selection
C1311 0 0 Profile 1 CDATA
1 Profile 2 Start profile for cyclic profile switching. Input
2 Profile 3 CDATA−CYCLE must be HIGH.
3 Profile 4 Is internally limited to one profile.
4 Profile 5
5 Profile 6
6 Profile 7
7 Profile 8
C1312 1 0 {1} 7 CDATA
Range of profile switching
More x profiles (starting with C1311) will be
processed
C1313 0 0 Asynchronous stretching/compression CDATA
1 Synchronous stretching/compression Stretching/compression (actual value)
C1314 0 0 CW rotation CDATA
1 CCW rotation Direction of rotation of master value
l Set C1313 = 0 if the YSET1 FB is not used
C1315 , {1 inc} CDATA
1 Curve 0 Clock pulse length of the master value
... ...
8 Curve 7
8.4−58 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

1 Curve 0 Final Y value
... ...
8 Curve 7
C1317 0 CDATA
0 Load with ctrl. inhibit Reloading profiles with controller inhibit
1 Load without ctrl. inhibit Reloading profiles without controller inhibit
C1318 0 0 Adapt stop value TEACH mode
1 Maintain stop value
2 Maintain sections
C1319 0 CDATA
Stretching/compression mode
0 DFIN * XFACT / 100% l Use of XFACT as multiplier:
– XFACT = +100 %
l No stretching/compression:
– XFACT = −100 %
l No stretching/compression but reversal of
direction for X position. The profile will be
processed from the end:
– XFACT > 100 %
l Leads to compression:
– XFACT < 100 %
1 DFIN * 100% / XFACT l Use of XFACT as divisor (reciprocal value):
– Values < 1 % at input XFACT are
internally limited to +1 %
l If stretching/compression is not wanted:
– Connect XFACT with FIXED100%
(default setting)
C1320 ® Selection list 1 CDATA, CURVEC1

1 1000 FIXED0% CURVEC1−AIN
2 1006 FIXED100% CDATA
CDATA−XFACT
Stretching/compression factor:
l +100 % = no stretching/compression
l >100 % = compression
l <100 % = stretching
3 1000 FIXED0% CDATA
CDATA−SEL
Profile selection:
0 = profile 0 (1st profile)
C1321 ,
1 (C1320/1)
2 (C1320/2)
3 (C1320/3)
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−59

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

1 CDATA−CYCLE 1000 FIXED0 HIGH = Profiles under C1311 and C1312 are
processed cyclically.
2 CDATA−RESET 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: If CDATA−CYCLE = LOW, the input
CDATA−SEL is immediately evaluated; if
CDATA−CYCLE = HIGH, the profile under
C1311 is processed.
3 CDATA−REL−SEL 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: Feed function active
4 CDATA−XRESET 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: Sets master value integrator to 0
5 CDATA−X−TP 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: Sets master value integrator to TP−POS
if input X−TP/E5 = LOW
6 CDATA−HOLD 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: Inhibits profile switching, input has
priority
7 CDATA−LOAD 1000 FIXED0 LOW/HIGH edge activates reloaded/new
profiles
8 CDATA−X−TP/E 1000 FIXED0 Selection of TP initiator:
5 LOW= Initiator at X−TP
HIGH = Connect initiator to terminal X5/E5
9 CURVEC1−HOL 1000 FIXED0 HIGH = Outputs AOUT and OUT are stored;
D DFOUT = 0
10 CURVEC1−SEL−I 1000 FIXED0 Selection − input AIN «IN
N LOW = AIN
HIGH = IN
11 CURVEC1−REL−S 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: feed function active (relative
EL positioning)
12 CURVEC1−XRES 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: sets the master value integrator to the
ET value at input CDATA−X−START
13 CDATA−TEACH 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: Teach function is activated
l Contact Lenze
14 CDATA−TP−DISA 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: No evaluation of the touch−probe
BLE signals
15 CDATA−SEL−CA 1000 FIXED0 Mode for changing−over between profiles:
M−MODE l LOW: During operation, change−over
between profiles takes place at the end of
a profile
l HIGH: Change−over between profiles can
take place while a motion profile is being
processed
– Only possible with the absolute data
model
– The interpolation points must have an
absolutely equal distribution
– The motion profiles must be congruent
at the point of change−over
– The change−over takes place
immediately when a new profile
number is selected
16 CDATA−TP−EDG 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: The LOW/HIGH edge of the
E−SELECT touch−probe signal is evaluated
LOW: The HIGH/LOW edge of the
touch−probe signal is evaluated
C1323 , CDATA, CURVEC1
... ...
16 (C1322/16)
8.4−60 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

1 CDATA−X−STAR 1000 FIXED0INC
T
2 CDATA−XIN 1000 FIXED0INC Input for master value position if C1332 = 1
3 CDATA−XOFFS 1000 FIXED0INC Input for offset in X direction (only if
C1332 = 0)
4 CDATA−TP−POS 19616 FCODE 1476/16 TP position of the master value
5 CURVEC1−IN 1000 FIXED0INC Phase input
6 CADTA−YIN 1000 FIXED0INC Y position input signal for the TEACH function
7 CDATA−OFFS−XI 1000 FIXED0INC Offset on the input signal at CDATA−XIN for
N C1338 = 1 or C1338 = 2
C1325 , {1 inc} CDATA, CURVEC1
... ...
7 (C1324/7)
C1326 ® Selection list 3 CDATA
1 CDATA−DFIN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 Input for digital frequency at C1332 = 0
2 CDATA−TP−SPEE 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 Speed selection for a touch probe correction
D−LIM l The input can, for instance, be linked to an
RFGPH2 function block to compensate a
position deviation via a profile generator.
C1327 , CDATA
2 (C1326/2)
C1329 , CDATA
Display of X values in [m/units]
1 X axis position CDATA−X−ACT
2 X integrator position CDATA−XPOS
3 Distance between two marks
4 Offset to mark
C1330 , CDATA
Display of X values in [s/units]
1 Profile position CDATA−YOUT
2 Profile position CDATA−YOUT−CYCLE
C1331 100 0 {1 rpm} 15000 CDATA
Maximum TP catch−up speed. Only valid for:
l C1335 = 1
l C1335 = 2
C1332 0 CDATA
0 Master value from CDATA−DFIN Selection of master value
1 Master value from CDATA−XIN
2 Master value from CDATA−XPOS
Actual X position
C1334 , CDATA
Actual Y position
C1335 0 0 Without catch−up limitation CDATA
1 With catch−up limitation Effect on the catch−up speed during master
2 Cross cutter axis synchronisation via touch probe
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−61

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C1336 ,
1 DY
2 DX
C1337 , No. of interpolation point
C1338 XIN−MODE 0 CDATA
0 Without input CDATA−OFFS−XIN l CDATA−XOFFS and CDATA−XFACT have no
effect.
l If master position > Xmax,
CDATA−X > XMAX = HIGH is set. The
master position is internally limited to
Xmax.
l If master position < 0, CDATA−X < 0 = HIGH
is set. The master position is internally
limited to 0.
1 With input CDATA−OFFS−XIN l This option is suitable if an absolute value
encoders is used as a master position
encoder. Thus, the profile can be shifted
by maximally ± 1 profile clock pulse with
respect to the encoder.
l Offset connected to CDATA−OFFS−XIN:
CDATA−XOFFS and CDATA−XFACT have no
effect.
l If master position + offset > Xmax
((XIN + OFFS−XIN > ACTLEN) * 2)),
CDATA−X > XMAX = HIGH is set. The
master position is internally limited to
Xmax.
l If master position < 0, CDATA−X < 0 = HIGH
is set. The master position is internally
limited to 0.
2 With input CDATA−OFFS−XIN for l Function same as C1338 = 1 if
CDATA−X−RESET CDATA−X−RESET = HIGH.
l The signal at CDATA−X−NOUT is output
without pulse loss.
C1339 , CCTRL, CCTRL2
Display of Y values in [s_units]
1 Profile position CCTRL−PHI−SET
2 Second position setpoint CCTRL−PHI−SET2
3 Actual position value CCTRL−PHI−ACT
4 Actual following error CCTRL−POUT
C1340 ® Selection list 1 CCTRL, CCTRL2
1 CCTRL−NRED 1000 FIXED0% Gain for speed setpoint feedforward control
2 CCTRL−MRED 1000 FIXED0% Gain for torque setpoint feedforward control
3 CCTRL2−NRED 1000 FIXED0% Gain for speed setpoint feedforward control
4 CCTRL2−MRED 1000 FIXED0% Gain for torque setpoint feedforward control
C1341 , −199.99 {0.01%} 199.99 CCTRL, CCTRL2
... ...
4 (C1340/4)
8.4−62 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

1 CCTRL−RESET 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: Set phase = actual phase
(CCTRL−POUT = 0)
2 CCTRL−TPIN 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: External mark for setting the position
3 CCTRL−N2−SET 1000 FIXED0 HIGH = Input CCTRL−NSET2 active
4 CCTRL−TPIN/E4 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: Touch probe initiator at X5/E4
5 CCTRL−SUB−Y−E 1000 FIXED0 Acceptance clock pulse for profile end
ND
6 CCTRL−RESET−N 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: Deletes the following error if
2 CCTRL−N2−Set = 1
7 CCTRL−CLR−INT 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: Sets all integrators to 0
EG
8 CCTRL2−RESET 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: Set phase = actual phase
(CCTRL2−POUT = 0)
9 CCTRL2−TPIN 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: External mark for setting the position
10 CCTRL2−N2−SET 1000 FIXED0 HIGH = Input CCTRL2−NSET2 active
11 CCTRL2−TPIN/E 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: Touch probe initiator at X5/E4
4
12 CCTRL2−SUB−Y− 1000 FIXED0 Acceptance clock pulse for profile end
END
13 CCTRL2−RESET− 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: Deletes the following error if
N2 CCTRL2−N2−Set = 1
14 CCTRL2−CLR−IN 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: Sets all integrators to 0
TEG
15 CCTRL−TP−EDGE 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: The LOW/HIGH edge of the
−SELECT touch−probe signal is evaluated
LOW: The HIGH/LOW edge of the
touch−probe signal is evaluated
...
15 (C1342/15)
1 CCTRL−Y−END 1000 FIXED0INC Final value of the profile (only required for
touch probe)
2 CCTRL−TP−POS 1000 FIXED0INC Only with TP synchronisation. Position of the
TP sensor in the traversing range
3 CCTRL2−Y−END 1000 FIXED0INC Final value of the profile (only required for
touch probe)
4 CCTRL2−TP−POS 1000 FIXED0INC Only with TP synchronisation. Position of the
TP sensor in the traversing range
C1345 , {1 inc} CCTRL, CCTRL2
... ...
4 (C1344/4) ,
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−63

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

1 CCTRL−IN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 Input for main setpoint
2 CCTRL−NSET2 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 Input for alternative setpoint (2nd setpoint)
3 CCTRL2−IN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 Input for main setpoint
4 CCTRL2−NSET2 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 Input for alternative setpoint (2nd setpoint)
5 CCTRL2−TP−SPE 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 Speed selection for compensating for a
ED−LIM detected position deviation (touch probe).
l The input can, for instance, be linked to an
RFGPH3 function block to compensate a
position deviation via a profile generator.
... ...
5 (C1346/5)
C1348 1 {1} 32767 CCTRL, CCTRL2
Adaptation of the torque feedforward control
to the moment of inertia of the machine
1 100 Torque feedforward control − numerator
2 1 Torque feedforward control − denominator
C1349 1 0 CW rotation mode CCTRL
1 CW/CCW rotation mode Touch probe mode
2 Absolute value encoder mode
3 Homing mode
C1350 0 0 CW rotation YSET1
1 CCW rotation Actual value of direction of rotation
C1351 0 0 Without offset YSET1
1 With offset Compression mode
C1352 YSET1−FACT 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 YSET1
Stretching/compression factor:
+100 % = no stretching/compression
>100 % = compression
<100 % = stretching
C1353 (C1352) , YSET1
C1354 ® Selection list 2 YSET1

1 YSET1−RESET 1000 FIXED0 Reset of the −OFFS input
2 YSET1−SYNCH 1000 FIXED0 Clock pulse input for synchronous switching
of the stretching/compression factor
C1355 , YSET1
2 (C1354/2)
C1356 YSET1−OFFS 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 YSET1
Offset value
C1357 (C1356) , {1 inc}
C1358 − ® Selection list 4 YSET1
1 YSET1−IN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0
2 YSET1−IN−SYNC 1000 FIXEDPHI−0
H
8.4−64 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C1359 , YSET1
2 (C1358/2)
C1360 ® Selection list 3 VTPOSC
1 VTPOSC−IN1 1000 FIXED0INC
C1361 , VTPOSC
... ...
10 (C1360/10)
C1362 1000 ® Selection list 4 ADDPHD1
1 ADDPHD1−DFI FIXEDPHI−0 Addition input
N1
2 ADDPHD1−DFI FIXEDPHI−0 Addition input
N2
3 ADDPHD1−DFI FIXEDPHI−0 Subtraction input
N3
C1363 , ADDPHD1
2 (C1362/2)
3 (C1362/3)
C1364 0 YSET1
OFFSET−RESET mode
0 Y−Offset reset Offset is internally stored with
YSET1−RESET = HIGH
1 y−Offset disable Offset is internally set to "0" with
YSET1−RESET = HIGH
C1365 0.0000 {0.0001 15000.0000 CCTRL, CCTRL2
rpm} Maximum touch probe catch−up speed
1 100.0 Function only possible with C1366 = 0
000 (without catch−up limitation)
C1366 0 CCTRL
0 Without catch−up limitation Selection of catch−up speed limitation
1 With catch−up limitation
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−65

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C1367 −214000.0000 {0.0001 214000.0000 CCTRL, CCTRL2
s−units}
1 0.000 Set home position
0 1. When using an absolute value encoder as
feedback: Enter the distance between tool
and machine zero.
2. Switch off the controller and then on
again to reinitialise the profile data.
l The home position must only be set once.
After that, the controller is able to find the
position after mains switching.
l The y value displayed refers to machine
zero.
2 0.000 Reset home position
0 l Writing a "0" resets the "Set reference"
function executed under C1367/1.
l The encoders are no longer considered to
be absolute, but relative encoders.
C1368 0 0 Motor mounted on the right−hand side CCTRL
1 Motor mounted on the left−hand side Motor mounting direction
C1369 1 1 {1 ms} 100 CCTRL
M−Tv−CCTRL−MOUT
Rate time for torque feedforward control
C1370 EXTPOL1−AIN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 EXTPOL1
C1371 (C1370) , EXTPOL1
C1374 ® Selection list 3 EXTPOL1/EXTPOL2
1 EXTPOL1−PHIN 1000 FIXED0INC
2 EXTPOL2−PHIN 1000 FIXED0INC
C1375 , {1 inc} EXTPOL1, EXTPOL2
2 (C1374/2)
C1379 2 1 {1 ms} 127 EXTPOL2
Maximum extrapolation cycles
C1380 10 {1 inc} 1800000000 CERR1
1 10 Hysteresis of fault signal (ERR output)
2 10 Hysteresis of warning signal (WARN output)
C1384 CERR1−WFAC 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 1 CERR1
Reduction factor
+100 % = No reduction
<100 % = Reduction
>100 % = Increase
C1385 (C1384) , CERR1
C1386 CERR1−DISABLE 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 CERR1
HIGH sets CERR1−WARN and CERR1−EER = 0
C1387 (C1386) , CERR1
C1388 1000 ® Selection list 4 CERR1
1 CERR1−PHI−IN FIXED0INC Input
2 CERR1−LIM FIXED0INC Switching threshold; the absolute value is
generated from the input value
8.4−66 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C1389 , {1 inc} CERR1
2 (C1388/2)
C1394 ® Selection list 2 MSEL1, MSEL2
1 MSEL1−EN−M1 1000 FIXED0 Activation of master value 1
5 MSEL1−LOCK 1000 FIXED0 Locking
6 MSEL2−EN−M1 1000 FIXED0 Activation of master position 1
10 MSEL2−LOCK 1000 FIXED0 Locking
C1395 , MSEL1, MSEL2
... ...
10 (C1394/10)
C1396 ® Selection list 3 MSEL2

1 MSEL2−M1POS 1000 FIXED0INC Master position input 1
C1397 , {1 inc} MSEL2
... ...
4 (C1396/4)
C1398 ® Selection list 4 MSEL1
1 MSEL1−DFIN1 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 Master value input 1
C1399 , MSEL1
... ...
4 (C1398/4)
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−67

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C1400 ® Selection list 2 RFGPH1

1 RFGPH1−RESET 1000 FIXED0 l HIGH sets RFGPH1−OUT = 0 (jump)
l LOW sets RFGPH1−OUT to the value at
RFGPH1−IN according to the selected
function
l Input has priority over RFGPH1−RFG−0
2 RFGPH1−RFG−0 1000 FIXED0 l HIGH sets RFGPH1−OUT = 0 according to
the selected function
l LOW sets RFGPH1−OUT to the value at
RFGPH1−IN according to the selected
function
3 RFGPH1−T/DIST 1000 FIXED0 Function changeover:
l HIGH = path−based path change
l LOW = time−based path change
C1401 , RFGPH1
2 (C1400/2)
3 (C1400/3)
C1402 ® Selection list 3 RFGPH1
1 RFGPH1−IN 1000 FIXED0INC Position setpoint (65536 inc. = 1 rev.)
2 RFGPH1−DIST 1000 FIXED0INC Path difference by which the phase is to be
changed at the input RFGPH1−IN
(65536 inc. = 1 rev.)
C1403 , RFGPH1
2 (C1402/2)
C1404 RFGPH1−DFIN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 RFGPH1
Configuration of digital frequency input
signals
C1405 (C1404) , RFGPH1
C1408 300.0 −16000.0000 {0.0001 16000.0000 RFGPH1
000 rpm} Speed
C1409 0 0 With absolute value generation RFGPH1
1 Without absolute value generation Mode
2 Without absolute value with end
C1410 0 0 Directly engaged CLUTCH1
1 To open position Clutch mode
2 To target position
3 Engage at set position
C1411 200.0 1 {0.0000 16000.0000 CLUTCH1
000 rpm} Maximum speed
C1412 0.010 {0.010 s} 130.000 CLUTCH1, CLUTCH2
1 1.000 CLUTCH1: Disengagement time/ramp
2 1.000 CLUTCH1: Profile generator ramp
3 1.000 CLUTCH1: Overload time delay
4 1.000 CLUTCH2: Disengagement time
5 1.000 CLUTCH2: Profile generator ramp
C1413 5 {1 inc.} 32767 CLUTCH1, CLUTCH2
1 163 CLUTCH1: Catch hysteresis
2 163 CLUTCH2: Catch hysteresis
8.4−68 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C1414 ® Selection list 1 CLUTCH1
1 CLUTCH1−MLI 1000 FIXED0% Threshold for overload monitoring
M
2 CLUTCH1−MAC 1000 FIXED0% Act. value for overload monitoring
T
C1415 , CLUTCH1
2 (C1414/2)
C1416 ® Selection list 2 CLUTCH1, CLUTCH2
1 CLUTCH1−CLOS 1000 FIXED0 HIGH = Engage clutch
E LOW = Disengage clutch
2 CLUTCH1−OL−D 1000 FIXED0 HIGH = Activate overload monitoring
ET
3 CLUTCH2−CLOS 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: Engage clutch
E LOW: Disengage clutch
4 CLUTCH2−SEL 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: Engage clutch immediately
LOW: Wait for position setpoint, then engage
C1417 , CLUTCH1, CLUTCH2
... ...
4 (C1416/4)
C1418 ® Selection list 3 CLUTCH1, CLUTCH2
1 CLUTCH1−PHI−S 1000 FIXED0INC Set position of the drive
ET
2 CLUTCH1−PHI− 1000 FIXED0INC Actual position of the drive
ACT
3 CLUTCH2−PHI−S 1000 FIXED0INC Set position of line shaft (X axis)
ET
4 CLUTCH2−PHI− 1000 FIXED0INC Actual position of line shaft (X axis)
ACT
5 CLUTCH2−LEN 1000 FIXED0INC Clock pulse length (X axis)
C1419 , {1 inc.} CLUTCH1, CLUTCH2
... ...
5 (C1418/5)
C1420 0 0 Profile 0 CSEL1
1 Profile 1 Event profile
2 Profile 2
3 Profile 3
4 Profile 4
5 Profile 5
6 Profile 6
7 KURVE 7
C1424 ® Selection list 2 CSEL1
1 CSEL1−CAM*1 1000 FIXED0 (Selection bit 0)
2 CSEL1−CAM*2 1000 FIXED0 Selection bit 1
3 CSEL1−CAM*4 1000 FIXED0 Selection bit 2
4 CSEL1−LOAD 1000 FIXED0 Acceptance signal = LOW−>HIGH edge
5 CSEL1−EVENT 1000 FIXED0 Event profile
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−69

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C1425 , CSEL1
(C1424/1) Display of digital input signals
...
(C1424/5)
C1430 0.0000 {0.0001 214000.0000 PSAVE1
units}
1 1.000 Window for master value comparison
0
2 1.000 Window for actual value comparison
0
C1431 0 0 Compare MPOS and ACTPOS PSAVE1
1 Compare MPOS only Memory function
2 Compare ACTPOS only
C1434 ® Selection list 2 PSAVE1
1 PSAVE1−ON 1000 FIEXED0 HIGH = Comparison of inputs PSAVE1−MPOS
and PSAVE1−ACTPOS with saved values and
difference output
2 PSAVE1−SAVE 1000 FIEXED0 HIGH = Acceptance of inputs PSAVE1−MPOS
and PSAVE1−ACTPOS
C1435 , PSAVE1
2 (C1434/2)
C1436 ® Selection list 3 PSAVE1
1 PSAVE1−MPOS 1000 FIXED0INC Input for master position
2 PSAVE1−ACTPO 1000 FIXED0INC Input for actual position (e.g. rotor position)
S
C1437 , {1 inc.} PSAVE1
2 (C1436/2)
C1440 ® Selection list 2 SWPHD1, SWPHD2
1 SWPHD1−SET 1000 FIXED0
2 SWPHD2−SET 1000 FIXED0
C1441 , SWPHD1, SWPHD2
2 (C1440/2)
C1442 ® Selection list 4 SWPHD1/SWPHD2
1 SWPHD1−IN1 1000 FIXEDPHI−0
C1443 , SWPHD1, SWPHD2
... ...
4 (C1442/4)
8.4−70 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C1444 ® Selection list 3 WELD1
1 WELD1−XIN 1000 FIXED0INC Input X position
2 WELD1−LEN−O 1000 FIXED0INC Length of the closing phase
3 WELD1−LEN−C 1000 FIXED0INC Length of the opening phase
4 WELD1−LEN 1000 FIXED0INC Length of the profile
5 WELD1−TIME 1000 FIXED0INC Welding time in ms (1 inc. = 1 ms)
C1445 , {1 inc.} WELD1
... ...
5 (C1444/5)
C1446 0 WELD1
0 Weld1 mode: Time The value at input Weld−Time" is interpreted
as time.
1 Weld1 mode: Distance The value at input Weld−Time" is interpreted
as distance.
2 Weld1 mode: Distance with saving The value at input Weld−Time" is interpreted
as distance. WELD−TIME" is saved for the
further cycle when phase 2 of the profile is
started.
C1448 CFG: 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 WELD1
WELD1−BREAK Configuration of digital input signal
C1449 (C1448) , WELD1
C1450 ® Selection list 3 CONVPHPHD1, CONVPHPHD2
1 CONVPHPHD1− 1000 FIXED0INC
IN
2 CONVPHPHD2− 1000 FIXED0INC
IN
C1451 , {1 inc.} CONVPHPHD1, CONVPHPHD2
2 (C1450/2)
C1452 1 −32767 {1} 32767 CONVPHPHD1
Numerator
C1453 1 1 {1} 32767 CONVPHPHD1
Denominator
C1454 CONVPHPHD2− 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 CONVPHPHD2
RESET Configuration of digital input signal
C1455 (C1454) , CONVPHPHD2
C1456 CONV7−DFIN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 CONV7
C1457 (C1456) , CONV7
C1458 1 −32767 {1} 32767 CONV7
Numerator
C1459 1 1 {1} 32767 CONV7
Denominator
C1460 0 0 Analog setpoint VMAS1
1 Digital frequency setpoint Setpoint source selection
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−71

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C1461 −16000.0000 {0.0001 16000.0000 VMAS1
rpm}
1 300.0 CW speed
000
2 300.0 CCW speed
000
C1462 0.010 {0.001 s} 999.990 VMAS1
1 1.000 Acceleration time
2 1.000 Deceleration time
C1463 0 {1 rpm} 16000 VMAS1
1 100 Ramp function generator window
2 100 Ramp function generator hysteresis
C1466 ® Selection list 1 VMAS1
1 VMAS1−AIN 1000 FIXED0% Analog setpoint
2 VMAS1−RED−V 1000 FIXED0% Alternative analog setpoint, target for speed
AL reduction
C1467 , VMAS1
2 (C1466/2)
C1468 ® Selection list 2 VMAS1
1 VMAS1−EN−AIN 1000 FIXED0 HIGH = Activates the analog inputs
VMAS1−AIN or VMAS1−DFIN (depending on
the selection under C1460)
2 VMAS1−EN−RE 1000 FIXED0 HIGH = Activates the analog input
D VMAS1−RED−VAL
3 VMAS1−EN−RFG 1000 FIXED0 HIGH = Activates the ramp function
generator
LOW = Input values are processed directly
4 VMAS1−CW 1000 FIXED0 Input of CW rotation (activate speed under
C1461/1)
5 VMAS1−CCW 1000 FIXED0 Input of CCW rotation (activate speed under
C1461/2)
6 VMAS1−RFG=0 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: Set VMAS1−OUT to 0 rpm via the
adjustable ramp in C1463/3. The function has
priority over all other functions.
C1469 , VMAS1
... ...
6 (C1468/6)
C1472 VMAS1−DFIN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 VMAS1
Configuration of input signal for master
speed (digital frequency)
C1473 (C1472) , VMAS1
C1476 −214000.0000 {0.0001 214000.0000 FCODE master
1 0.000 m−units} Freely configurable code for master values
0 [m−units]
... 0.000
0
16 0.000
0
8.4−72 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C1477 −214000.0000 {0.0001 214000.0000 FCODE slave
1 0.000 s−units} Freely configurable code for actual values
0 [s−units]
... 0.000
0
16 0.000
0
C1478 −214000.0000 {0.0001 214000.0000 FCODE Z
1 0.000 z−units} Freely configurable code for a freely definable
0 system of units [z−units].
The unit system is set via C1680/x and
... 0.000 C1681.
0
6 0.000
0
C1480 512 10 {1} 32767 CONVPHD1
Encoder constant
C1486 ® Selection list 3 CONVPHD1
1 CONVPHD1−N 19521 FCODE−474/1 Stretch factor numerator, input limited to
OM ±1000000
2 CONVPHD1−DE 19522 FCODE−474/2 Stretch factor denominator, input limited to
N +1 ... +200000000
C1487 , CONVPHD1
1 (C1486/1) Display of input signal
2 (C1486/2)
C1488 CONVPHD1−IN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 CONVPHD1
Configuration of input signal (signal in rpm)
C1489 (C1488) , CONVPHD1
C1500 OUTPUT , −2147483648 {1} 2147483647 FEVAN2
C1501 CODE 141 2 {1} 2000 FEVAN2
Target code of FEVAN2
Target subcode of FEVAN2
0 Numerator
R 1 Denominator
C1505 OFFSET 0 0 1000000000 FEVAN2
Offset
C1506 FEVAN2−IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 FEVAN2
C1507 LOAD 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 FEVAN2
C1508 (C1506) , −32768 {1} 32767 FEVAN2
C1509 (C1507) , FEVAN2
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−73

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

2 OUT = IN1 − IN2
3 OUT = IN1 × IN2 / 230
13 OUT = IN1 × IN2
14 OUT = IN1 / IN2
15 OUT = IN1 % IN2
1 ARITPH4−IN1 1000 FIXED0INC
C1552 , −2147483647 {1 inc} 2147483647 ARITPH4
2 (C1551/2)
2 OUT = IN1 − IN2
3 OUT = IN1 × IN2 / 230
13 OUT = IN1 × IN2
14 OUT = IN1 / IN2
15 OUT = IN1 % IN2
C1557 , −2147483647 {1 inc} 2147483647 ARITPH5
2 (C1556/2)
C1560 ARITPH6−FUNC 1 0 OUT = IN1 ARITPH6
T 1 OUT = IN1 + IN2 Arithmetic function selection
2 OUT = IN1 − IN2
3 OUT = IN1 × IN2 / 230
13 OUT = IN1 × IN2
14 OUT = IN1 / IN2
15 OUT = IN1 % IN2
C1561 1000 ® Selection list 3 ARITPH6
1 ARITPH6−IN1 1000 FIXED0I
NC
2 ARITPH6−IN2 1000 FIXED0I
NC
C1562 , −2147483647 {1 inc} 2147483647 ARITPH6
2 (C1561/2)
C1580 CONVAD1−IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 CONVAD1
C1581 (C1580) , −32768 {1} 32767 CONVAD1
8.4−74 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C1582 CONVAD2−IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 CONVAD2
C1583 (C1582) , −32768 {1} 32767 CONVAD2
C1590 NUMERAATOR 1 −32768 {1} 32767 CONVAPH1
Numerator
C1591 DENUMERAAT 1 1 {1} 32767 CONVAPH1
OR Denominator
C1593 CONVAPH1−IN 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 CONVAPH1
C1594 (C01593) CONVAPH1
C1610 1 0 {1} 31 CONVAPH1
Division factor
C1611 CONVPHA2−IN 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 CONVPHA2
C1612 (C1611) , {1 inc.} CONVPHA2
C1615 1 0 {1} 31 CONVAPH2
Division factor
C1616 CONVPHA3−IN 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 CONVPHA3
C1617 (C1616) , {1 inc.} CONVPHA3
C1620 ® Selection list 3 CONVPHAA1
1 CONVPHAA1−P 1000 FIXED0INC
HIN
2 CONVPHAA2−P 1000 FIXED0INC
HIN
C1621 , {1 inc.} CONVPHAA1
2 (C1620/2)
C1640 RESET 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 SPC1

EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−75

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C1641 FCODE1476/x SPC1
1 SPC1−VALUE 1 FCODE1477/x Switching point output STATUS−01
1−1 FCODE0474/x
VTPOSC−No.x
2 SPC1−VALUE 1 Switching point output STATUS−01
1−2
2−1
2−2
3−1
3−2
4−1
4−2
5−1
5−2
6−1
6−2
7−1
7−2
8−1
8−2
C1642 SPC1−L−IN 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 SPC1
C1643 (C1640) , 0 1 SPC1
C1644 (C1642) , −1073741824 {1 inc} 1073741823 SPC1
C1645 MODE 0 0 On / off SPC1
1 Centre/range Mode
C1650 SPC2−RESET 1000 FIXED0 ® Selection list 2 SPC2
8.4−76 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C1651 FCODE1476/1 SPC2
1−1
1−2
2−1
2−2
3−1
3−2
4−1
4−2
5−1
5−2
6−1
6−2
7−1
7−2
8−1
8−2
C1652 SPC2−L−IN 1000 FIXED0INC ® Selection list 3 SPC2
C1653 (C1650) , 0 1 SPC2
C1654 (C1652) , −1073741824 {1 inc} 1073741823 SPC2
C1655 MODE 0 0 On / off SPC2 mode
1 Centre/range
C1657 −30000 {1 ms} 30000 SPC2
1 DEATH TIME 0 Dead time
... ... 0
4 DEATH TIME 0
C1658 HYSTERESIS 0 −32767 {1 inc} 32767 SPC2
Hysteresis
C1659 FILTER 1 0 Filter off SPC2
1 Filter 1 ms Filters
2 Filter 2 ms
4 Filter 4 ms
8 Filter 8 ms
16 Filter 16 ms
C1660 ACT.SEL. , 0 {1} 8 SELPH1
Display of actual selection
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−77

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

C1661 SELPH1−SELECT 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 SELPH1
C1662 ® Selection list 3 SELPH1
1 SELPH1−IN1 1000 FIXED0INC
... ... 1000 FIXED0INC
C1663 (C1661) , −32768 {1} 32767 SELPH1
C1664 (C1662) , −2147483648 {1 inc} 147483648 SELPH1
... ...
8 (C1662/8)
C1665 ACT.SEL. , 0 {1} 88 SELPH2
Display of actual selection
C1666 SELPH2−SELECT 1000 FIXED0% ® Selection list 1 SELPH2
C1667 ® Selection list 3 SELPH2
... ... 1000 FIXED0INC
C1668 (C1666) , −32768 {1} 32767 SELPH2
C1669 , −2147483648 {1 inc} 2147483648 SELPH2
... ...
8 (C1667/8)
C1680 1 {1} 65535 FCODE Z

1 1 Gearbox factor numerator for Z−axis
2 1 Gearbox factor denominator for Z−axis
C1681 360.0 0.0001 {0.0001 214000.0000 FCODE Z
000 untis/re Feed constant for Z−axis
v}
1 CLUTCH3−OPE 1000 FIXED0 HIGH:
N−INSTANT l Reset fault messages
l Disengage clutch immediately
2 CLUTCH3 1000 FIXED0 Reserved
3 CLUTCH3− 1000 FIXED0 HIGH: Engage
CLOSE LOW: Disengage. The function depends on
the mode set under C1707
4 CLUTCH3−SEL 1000 FIXED0 Reserved
C1701 , CLUTCH3
... ...
4 (C1700/4)
8.4−78 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

1 CLUTCH3−TARG 1000 FIXED0INC The "disengage" function depends on the
ET−POS mode set under C1707:
l C1707 = 0: After CLUTCH3−CLOSE = LOW,
the clutch opens along the set ramps and
stops in the position applied to
CLUTCH3−TARGET−POS.
l C1707 = 1: After CLUTCH3−CLOSE = LOW,
the clutch runs synchronously until the
position applied to CLUTCH3−TARGET−POS
is reached and opens subsequently. The
standstill position results from the speed
and the set ramp.
2 CLUTCH3−DIST 1000 FIXED0INC Reserved
3 CLUTCH3−PHI−S 1000 FIXED0INC Set position of the master shaft
ET
4 CLUTCH3−PHI− 1000 FIXED0INC Actual position of the master shaft
ACT
5 CLUTCH3−LEN 1000 FIXED0INC Clock pulse length (X axis)
C1703 , {1 inc} CLUTCH3
... ...
5 (C1702/5)
C1704 CLUTCH3−LOW 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 ® Selection list 4 CLUTCH3
−VEL Configuration of input signal
Selection of a minimum speed at which the
drive is to rotate after disengaging.
C1705 (C1704) , −32767 32767 CLUTCH3
C1706 0.010 {0.01 s} 50.000 CLUTCH3
1 Open−Instant/ 1.000 Deceleration time of the ramp at
Rampe CLUTCH3−OPEN−INSTANT = HIGH
(disengaging)
2 Öffnungszeit/R 1.000 Deceleration time of the ramp at
ampe CLUTCH3−CLOSE = LOW (disengaging)
3 Schließzeit/Ra 1.000 Acceleration time of the ramp at
mpe CLUTCH3−CLOSE = HIGH (engaging)
C1707 0 CLUTCH3
Clutch mode
0 Time−controlled: target = TARGET−POS After CLUTCH3−CLOSE = LOW, the clutch
opens along the set ramps and stops in the
position applied to CLUTCH3−TARGET−POS.
1 Time−controlled: start opening at After CLUTCH3−CLOSE = LOW, the clutch runs
TARGET−POS synchronously until the position applied to
CLUTCH3−TARGET−POS is reached and opens
subsequently. The standstill position results
from the speed and the set ramp.
C1708 0 {1 rpm} 15000 CLUTCH3
1 Window of 10 Speed window for master speed at the time
master speed of clutch−in (starting position)
in starting
position
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−79

8 Configuration
8.4 Code table

1 STORE3−OFFSE 1000 FIXED0% Selects the memory location the content of
T which is to be output
2 STORE3−FREE 1000 FIXED0% Reserved
C1719 , STORE3
1 (C1718/1) Configuration of analog input signals
2 (C1718/2)
1 STORE3−INIT 1000 FIXED0 Initialisation of all memory locations with the
value applied to STORE3−INIT−POS. The input
has the highest priority.
l LOW/HIGH edge: Starts the initialisation
of all memory locations. The handshake
signals at STORE3−BUSY and STORE3−RDY
indicate the status of the initialisation.
l LOW: sets STORE3−RDY = 0
l HIGH: inhibits all other functions
2 STORE3−LOAD−I 1000 FIXED0 l LOW/HIGH edge: Transfers the value at
N−POS STORE3−IN−POS to the memory location
STORE3−SEL−IN
3 STORE3−STORE− 1000 FIXED0 STORE3−MODE = LOW:
PHOUT l LOW/HIGH edge: Transfers the content of
memory location STORE3−SEL−OUT to
STORE3−PHOUT
STORE3−MODE = HIGH:
l Input inactive
4 STORE3−MODE 1000 FIXED0 l LOW: The data of memory location
STORE3−SEL−OUT is output to
STORE3−STORE−PHOUT.
l HIGH: The memory location to be output
to STORE3−PHOUT is calculated from
STORE3−SEL−IN ˘ STORE3−OFFSET. The
output is continuous.
C1721 , STORE3
... ...
4 (C1720/4)
1 STORE3−INIT−P 1000 FIXED0INC Value for initialising all memory locations.
OS l The initialisation is started by a
LOW/HIGH edge at STORE3−INIT.
2 STORE3−IN−POS 1000 FIXED0INC Value to be transferred to the memory
location selected with STORE3−SEL−IN.
l The value is transferred with a LOW/HIGH
edge at STORE3−INIT.
C1723 , {1 inc} STORE3
2 (C1722/2)
8.4−80 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Code table 8.4

C1726 −2147483647 {1 inc} 2147483647 STORE3
Memory
1 0 Memory location 0
... 0 ...
C1727 0 0 {1} 15 STORE3
Initial value at STORE3−SEL−IN
C1735 0 CCTRL2
Source for touch probe catch−up speed in the
event of deviations
0 Code 1365/1 l Detected deviations are compensate as
fast as possible with the speed selected
under C1365/1.
l Value under C1365/1 = 0: No
compensation of deviations.
1 Input CCTRL2−TP−SPEED−LIM l Detected deviations are compensated
with the speed selected at
CCTRL2−TP−SPEED−LIM.
l Signal at CCTRL2−TP−SPEED−LIM = 0: No
l The input is only active if
CCTRL2−TP−SYNC−BUSY = High.
C1740 0 PHINT5
Source for touch probe catch−up speed in the
event of deviations
0 Code 1741/1 l Detected deviations are compensated
with the speed selected under C1741/1.
l Value in C1741/1 = 0: no compensation of
deviations.
1 Input PHINT5−TP−SPEED−LIM l Detected deviations are compensated
with the speed selected at
PHINT5−TP−SPEED−LIM.
l Signal at PHINT5−TP−SPEED−LIM = 0: No
l The input is only active if
PHINT5−TP−SYNC−BUSY = HIGH.
C1741 0.0000 {0.0001 15000.0000 PHINT5
rpm} Maximum touch probe catch−up speed
1 10.00
00
C1799 1250 20 {1} 1250 DFOUT fmax (kHz)
1250 corresponds to 500 kHz
C1810 , SW identification LECOM
C1811 , SW creation
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.4−81

Configuration 8
Selection lists 8.5
Selection list 1: Analog output signals 8.5.1
8.5 Selection lists

Parameter Analog output signal (-)
00050 AIN1−OUT
00055 AIN2−OUT
00100 DFSET−NOUT
01000 FIXED0%
01006 FIXED100%
01007 FIXED−100%
05000 MCTRL−NSET2
05001 MCTRL−NACT
05002 MCTRL−MSET2
05003 MCTRL−MACT
05004 MCTRL−IACT
05005 MCTRL−DCVOLT
05009 MCTRL−PHI−ANA
05050 NSET−NOUT
05051 NSET−RFG−I
05100 MPOT1−OUT
05150 PCTRL1−OUT
05200 REFC−N−SET
05500 ARIT1−OUT
05505 ARIT2−OUT
05550 ADD1−OUT
05600 RFG1−OUT
05610 SRFG1−OUT
05611 SRFG1−DIFF
05650 ASW1−OUT
05655 ASW2−OUT
05660 ASW3−OUT
05665 ASW4−OUT
05700 ANEG1−OUT
05705 ANEG2−OUT
05750 FIXSET1−OUT
05800 LIM1−OUT
05850 ABS1−OUT
05900 PT1−1−OUT
05950 DT1−1−OUT
06100 MFAIL−NOUT
06150 DB1−OUT
06200 CONV1−OUT
06205 CONV2−OUT
06210 CONV3−OUT
06215 CONV4−OUT
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.5−1

8 Configuration
8.5 Selection lists
Parameter Analog output signal (-) Parameter Analog output signal (-)
06300 S&H1−OUT 19530 FCODE−%−472/10
06350 CURVE1−OUT 19531 FCODE−%−472/11
06400 FCNT1−OUT 19532 FCODE−%−472/12
06600 SYNC1−OUT3 19533 FCODE−%−472/13
10000 BRK1−M−SET 19534 FCODE−%−472/14
13301 CDATA−ACTCAM 19535 FCODE−%−472/15
13302 CURVEC1−AOUT 19536 FCODE−%−472/16
13303 CDATA−ERR−NR 19537 FCODE−%−472/17
13304 CDATA−LOAD−ERR−NR 19538 FCODE−%−472/18
13351 CCTRL−NOUT 19539 FCODE−%−472/19
13352 CCTRL−MOUT 19540 FCODE−%−472/20
13355 CCTRL2−NOUT 19551 FCODE−A−473/1
13356 CCTRL2−MOUT 19552 FCODE−A−473/2
13601 CSEL1−OUT 19553 FCODE−A−473/3
13701 MSEL1−MVAL 19554 FCODE−A−473/4
13711 MSEL2−MVAL 19555 FCODE−A−473/5
13920 CONVPHAA1−AOUT1 19556 FCODE−A−473/6
13921 CONVPHAA1−AOUT2 19557 FCODE−A−473/7
13925 CONVPHAA2−AOUT1 19558 FCODE−473/8
13926 CONVPHAA2−AOUT2 19559 FCODE−473/9
14800 STORE3−SEL−IN 19560 FCODE−473/10
14801 STORE3−SEL−OUT 20101 CAN−IN1.W1
15028 MCTRL utilisation 20102 CAN−IN1.W2
15030 MCTRL−LOAD−I2xt 20103 CAN−IN1.W3
19500 FCODE−SYS−17 20201 CAN−IN2.W1
19502 FCODE−SYS−26/1 20202 CAN−IN2.W2
19503 FCODE−SYS−26/2 20203 CAN−IN2.W3
19504 FCODE−SYS−27/1 20204 CAN−IN2.W4
19505 FCODE−SYS−27/2 20301 CAN−IN3.W1
19510 FCODE−SYS−108/1 20304 CAN−IN3.W4
19511 FCODE−SYS−108/2 25101 AIF−IN.W1
19512 FCODE−SYS−109/1 25102 AIF−IN.W2
19513 FCODE−SYS−109/2 25103 AIF−IN.W3
19515 FCODE−SYS−141
19521 FCODE−%−472/1
19522 FCODE−%−472/2
19523 FCODE−%−472/3
19524 FCODE−%−472/4
19525 FCODE−%−472/5
19526 FCODE−%−472/6
19527 FCODE−%−472/7
19528 FCODE−%−472/8
19529 FCODE−%−472/9
8.5−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Selection lists 8.5

Parameter Digital output signal (.) Parameter Digital output signal (.)
00051 DIGIN1 07150 CONVAD1−0
00052 DIGIN2 07151 CONVAD1−1
00053 DIGIN3 07152 CONVAD1−2
00054 DIGIN4 07153 CONVAD1−3
00055 DIGIN5 07154 CONVAD1−4
00060 STATE−BUS−O 07155 CONVAD1−5
00065 DIGIN−CINH 07156 CONVAD1−6
00100 DFSET−ACK 07157 CONVAD1−7
00500 DCTRL−RDY 07158 CONVAD1−8
00501 DCTRL−CINH 07159 CONVAD1−9
00502 DCTRL−INIT 07160 CONVAD1−10
00503 DCTRL−IMP 07161 CONVAD1−11
00504 DCTRL−NACT=0 07162 CONVAD1−12
00505 DCTRL−CW/CCW 07163 CONVAD1−13
01000 FIXED 0 07164 CONVAD1−14
01001 FIXED 1 07165 CONVAD1−SIGN
05001 MCTRL−QSP−OUT 07170 CONVAD2−0
05002 MCTRL−IMAX 07171 CONVAD2−1
05003 MCTRL−MMAX 07172 CONVAD2−2
05050 NSET−RFG−I=0 07173 CONVAD2−3
05200 REFC−OK 07174 CONVAD2−4
05201 REFC−BUSY 07175 CONVAD2−5
05912 PT1−2−LIM 07176 CONVAD2−6
05913 PT1−2−MEM 07177 CONVAD2−7
06000 DFRFG1−FAIL 07178 CONVAD2−8
06001 DFRFG1−SYNC 07179 CONVAD2−9
06100 MFAIL−STATUS 07180 CONVAD2−10
06101 MFAIL−I−RESET 07181 CONVAD2−11
06400 FCNT1−EQUAL 07182 CONVAD2−12
06450 SPC1−STATUS−01 07183 CONVAD2−13
06451 SPC1−STATUS−02 07184 CONVAD2−14
06452 SPC1−STATUS−03 07185 CONVAD2−SIGN
06453 SPC1−STATUS−04 10000 BRK1−OUT
06454 SPC1−STATUS−05 10001 BRK1−CINH
06455 SPC1−STATUS−06 10002 BRK1−QSP
06456 SPC1−STATUS−07 10003 BRK1−M−STORE
06457 SPC1−STATUS−08 10250 R/L/Q−QSP
06460 SPC2−STATUS−01 10251 R/L/Q−R/L
06461 SPC2−STATUS−02 10500 AND1−OUT
06600 SYNC1−STAT 10535 AND8−OUT
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.5−3

8 Configuration
8.5 Selection lists
10540 AND9−OUT 13304 CDATA−SEC4
10550 OR1−OUT 13305 CDATA−SEC5
10555 OR2−OUT 13306 CDATA−X0
10560 OR3−OUT 13307 CDATA−X>XMAX
10565 OR4−OUT 13308 CDATA−X<0
10570 OR5−OUT 13309 CDATA−BUSY−LENx
10575 OR6−OUT 13310 CDATA−LOAD−BUSY
10580 OR7−OUT 13311 CDATA−CHK−ERR
10600 NOT1−OUT 13312 CURVEC1−X<0
10605 NOT2−OUT 13313 CURVEC1−X>Xmax
10610 NOT3−OUT 13314 CDATA−X0−CYCLE
10615 NOT4−OUT 13315 CDATA−BUSY
10620 NOT5−OUT 13316 CURVEC1−BUSY
10650 CMP1−OUT 13317 CDATA−TP−RECOGN
10655 CMP2−OUT 13318 CDATA−TEACH−BUSY
10660 CMP3−OUT 13319 CDATA−TEACH−ACTIVE
10680 PHCMP1−OUT 13320 CDATA−TP−SYNC−BUSY
10685 PHCMP2−OUT 13321 CDATA−CHK−BUSY
10690 PHCMP3−OUT 13322 CURVEC1−CAM−SEL−BUSY
10700 DIGDEL1−OUT 13323 CDATA−INIT−NOUT
10705 DIGDEL2−OUT 13324 CURVEC1−INIT−DFOUT
10750 TRANS1−OUT 13325 CDATA−INIT−X−NOUT
10755 TRANS2−OUT 13327 CDATA−LOAD−RDY
10760 TRANS3−OUT 13328 CDATA−LOAD−ERR
10765 TRANS4−OUT 13351 CCTRL−TP−RECOGN
10900 FLIP1−OUT 13352 CCTRL−TP−SYNC−BUSY
10905 FLIP2−OUT 13355 CCTRL2−TP−RECOGN
10910 FLIP3−OUT 13356 CCTRL2−TP−SYNC−BUSY
10915 FLIP4−OUT 13401 YSET1−LIM
10920 FLIPT1−OUT 13451 EXTPOL1−STAT
10925 FLIPT2−OUT 13461 EXTPOL2−STAT
12000 PHINT1−FAIL 13462 EXTPOL2−LIM
12005 PHINT2−FAIL 13463 EXTPOL2−X0
12010 PHINT3−STAT 13501 CERR1−ERR
12020 PHINT4−H−STAT 13502 CERR1−WARN
12021 PHINT4−L−STAT 13551 CLUTCH1 −OPEN
12025 PHINT5−TP−SYNC−BUSY 13552 CLUTCH1−OL
12026 PHINT5−TP−RECOGN 13555 CLUTCH2−OPEN
12027 PHINT5−X0 13557 CLUTCH2−START
12028 PHINT5−DFOUT−INIT 13558 CLUTCH2−DIR_ERR
13000 FEVAN1−BUSY 13651 PSAVE1−M−HI
13001 FEVAN1−FAIL 13652 PSAVE1−M−LO
13005 FEVAN2−BUSY 13653 PSAVE1−ACT−HI
13006 FEVAN2−FAIL 13654 PSAVE1−ACT−LO
13301 CDATA−SEC1 13751 WELD1−T−ERR
13302 CDATA−SEC2 13752 WELD1−ON
13303 CDATA−SEC3 13753 WELD1−DIR−ERR
8.5−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Selection lists 8.5
13801 VMAS1−RFG−I=O 15041 MONIT−CE2
13911 CONVPHPHD1−FAIL 15042 MONIT−CE3
13915 CONVPHPHD2−LIM 15043 MONIT−CE4
13951 RFGPH1−RFG−I=O 15044 MONIT−PL
13955 RFGPH2−RFG−I=O 15045 MONIT−P19
13960 RFGPH3−RFG−I=O 15047 MONIT−OC6
14050 STORE1−TP−INH 15048 MONIT−OC8
14055 STORE2−TP−INH 15320 MONIT−SD8
14500 LIMPHD1−LIM 15321 MONIT−nErr
14600 ADDPHD1−LIM 19500 FCODE−DIG−250
14700 CLUTCH3−OPEN 19521 FCODE−DIG−.B0
14701 CLUTCH3−ACC/DEC 19522 FCODE−DIG−.B1
14702 CLUTCH3−DIR−ERR 19523 FCODE−DIG−.B2
14703 CLUTCH3−INIT 19524 FCODE−DIG−.B3
14704 CLUTCH3−ERR 19525 FCODE−DIG−.B4
14705 CLUTCH3−VEL−TO−LOW 19526 FCODE−DIG−.B5
14800 STORE3−INIT−BUSY 19527 FCODE−DIG−.B6
14801 STORE3−INIT−RDY 19528 FCODE−DIG−.B7
15000 DCTRL−TRIP 19529 FCODE−DIG−.B8
15001 DCTRL−MESS 19530 FCODE−DIG−.B9
15002 DCTRL−WARN 19531 FCODE−DIG−.B10
15003 DCTRL−FAIL 19532 FCODE−DIG−.B11
15010 MONIT−LU 19533 FCODE−DIG−.B12
15011 MONIT−OU 19534 FCODE−DIG−.B13
15012 MONIT−EEr 19535 FCODE−DIG−.B14
15013 MONIT−OC1 19536 FCODE−DIG−.B15
15015 MONIT−LP1 19538 FCODE−DIG−.B17
15016 MONIT−OH 19539 FCODE−DIG−.B18
15017 MONIT−OH3 19540 FCODE−DIG−.B19
15021 MONIT−Sd2 19544 FCODE−DIG−.B23
15022 MONIT−Sd3 19545 FCODE−DIG−.B24
15023 MONIT−P03 19546 FCODE−DIG−.B25
15024 MONIT−P13 19547 FCODE−DIG−.B26
15026 MONIT−CE0 19548 FCODE−DIG−.B27
15027 MONIT−NMAX 19549 FCODE−DIG−.B28
15029 MONIT−SD5 19551 FCODE−DIG−.B30
15030 MONIT−SD6 19552 FCODE−DIG−.B31
15031 MONIT−SD7 19751 FCODE−135.B0
15032 MONIT−H07 19752 FCODE−135.B1
15033 MONIT−H10 19753 FCODE−135.B2
15034 MONIT−H11 19755 FCODE−135.B4
15040 MONIT−CE1 19756 FCODE−135.B5
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.5−5

8 Configuration
8.5 Selection lists
19757 FCODE−135.B6 20131 CAN−IN1.B30
19758 FCODE−135.B7 20132 CAN−IN1.B31
19763 FCODE−135.B12 20201 CAN−IN2.B0
19764 FCODE−135.B13 20202 CAN−IN2.B1
19765 FCODE−135.B14 20203 CAN−IN2.B2
19766 FCODE−135.B15 20204 CAN−IN2.B3
20001 CAN−IN1−CTRL.B0 20205 CAN−IN2.B4
20101 CAN−IN1.B0 20216 CAN−IN2.B15
20102 CAN−IN1.B1 20217 CAN−IN2.B16
20103 CAN−IN1.B2 20218 CAN−IN2.B17
20104 CAN−IN1.B3 20219 CAN−IN2.B18
20105 CAN−IN1.B4 20220 CAN−IN2.B19
20106 CAN−IN1.B5 20221 CAN−IN2.B20
20107 CAN−IN1.B6 20222 CAN−IN2.B21
20108 CAN−IN1.B7 20223 CAN−IN2.B22
20109 CAN−IN1.B8 20224 CAN−IN2.B23
20110 CAN−IN1.B9 20225 CAN−IN2.B24
20111 CAN−IN1.B10 20226 CAN−IN2.B25
20112 CAN−IN1.B11 20227 CAN−IN2.B26
20113 CAN−IN1.B12 20228 CAN−IN2.B27
20114 CAN−IN1.B13 20229 CAN−IN2.B28
20115 CAN−IN1.B14 20230 CAN−IN2.B29
20116 CAN−IN1.B15 20231 CAN−IN2.B30
20117 CAN−IN1.B16 20232 CAN−IN2.B31
20118 CAN−IN1.B17 20301 CAN−IN3.B0
20119 CAN−IN1.B18 20302 CAN−IN3.B1
20120 CAN−IN1.B19 20303 CAN−IN3.B2
20121 CAN−IN1.B20 20304 CAN−IN3.B3
20122 CAN−IN1.B21 20305 CAN−IN3.B4
20123 CAN−IN1.B22 20306 CAN−IN3.B5
20124 CAN−IN1.B23 20307 CAN−IN3.B6
20125 CAN−IN1.B24 20308 CAN−IN3.B7
20126 CAN−IN1.B25 20309 CAN−IN3.B8
20127 CAN−IN1.B26 20310 CAN−IN3.B9
20128 CAN−IN1.B27 20311 CAN−IN3.B10
20129 CAN−IN1.B28 20312 CAN−IN3.B11
20130 CAN−IN1.B29 20313 CAN−IN3.B12
8.5−6 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Selection lists 8.5
20314 CAN−IN3.B13 25106 AIF−IN.B5
20315 CAN−IN3.B14 25107 AIF−IN.B6
20316 CAN−IN3.B15 25108 AIF−IN.B7
20317 CAN−IN3.B16 25109 AIF−IN.B8
20318 CAN−IN3.B17 25110 AIF−IN.B9
20319 CAN−IN3.B18 25111 AIF−IN.B10
20320 CAN−IN3.B19 25112 AIF−IN.B11
20321 CAN−IN3.B20 25113 AIF−IN.B12
20322 CAN−IN3.B21 25114 AIF−IN.B13
20323 CAN−IN3.B22 25115 AIF−IN.B14
20324 CAN−IN3.B23 25116 AIF−IN.B15
20325 CAN−IN3.B24 25117 AIF−IN.B16
20326 CAN−IN3.B25 25118 AIF−IN.B17
20327 CAN−IN3.B26 25119 AIF−IN.B18
20328 CAN−IN3.B27 25120 AIF−IN.B19
20329 CAN−IN3.B28 25121 AIF−IN.B20
20330 CAN−IN3.B29 25122 AIF−IN.B21
20331 CAN−IN3.B30 25123 AIF−IN.B22
20332 CAN−IN3.B31 25124 AIF−IN.B23
25001 AIF−IN−CTRL.B0 25125 AIF−IN.B24
25014 AIF−IN−CTRL.B13
25101 AIF−IN.B0
25102 AIF−IN.B1
25103 AIF−IN.B2
25104 AIF−IN.B3
25105 AIF−IN.B4
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.5−7

8 Configuration
8.5 Selection lists

Parameter Angle signal (/) Parameter Angle signal (/)
00100 DFSET−PSET 13353 CCTRL−PHI−ACT
00101 DFSET−PSET2 13354 CCTRL−PHI−SET2
01000 FIXED0INC 13355 CCTRL−ACT−TP−DIFF
05000 MCTRL−PHI−ANG 13356 CCTRL2−POUT
05200 REFC−PSET 13357 CCTRL2−PHI−SET
05520 ARITPH1−OUT 13358 CCTRL2−PHI−ACT
05525 ARITPH2−OUT 13359 CCTRL2−PHI−SET2
05530 ARITPH3−OUT 13360 CCTRL2−ACT−TP−DIFF
05535 ARITPH4−OUT 13501 CERR1−W−LIM
05540 ARITPH5−OUT 13451 EXTPOL1−PHOUT
05545 ARITPH6−OUT 13461 EXTPOL2−PHOUT
05580 PHADD1−OUT 13551 CLUTCH1−O−POS
05581 PHADD1−OUT2 13555 CLUTCH2−ACT−SET
05775 SELPH1−OUT 13556 CLUTCH2−DIST
05780 SELPH2−OUT 13557 CLUTCH2−PHOUT
05911 PT1−2−DIFF 13651 PSAVE1−M−DIFF
06235 CONVPHPH1−OUT 13652 PSAVE1−M−SAVE
06600 SYNC1−OUT2 13653 PSAVE1−ACT−DIFF
07050 CONVAPH1−OUT 13654 PSAVE1−ACT−SAVE
12000 PHINT1−OUT 13711 MSEL2−OUT
12005 PHINT2−OUT 13751 WELD1−XOUT
12010 PHINT3−OUT 13951 RFGPH1−OUT
12020 PHINT4−OUT 13952 RFGPH1−IN−OLD
12025 PHINT5−OUT 13955 RFGPH2−PHOUT
12026 PHINT5−TP−DIFF 13960 RFGPH3−PHOUT
12027 PHINT5−TP−DIST 14000 PHDIFF1−OUT
12028 PHINT5−X−DIFF 14050 STORE1−PHACT
12050 PHDIV1−OUT 14051 STORE1−PH1
13301 CDATA−LEN1 14052 STORE1−PH2
13302 CDATA−LEN2 14053 STORE1−PHDIFF
13303 CDATA−LEN3 14055 STORE2−PHACT
13306 CDATA−ACTLEN 14100 GEARCOMP−OUT
13307 CDATA−XPOS 14450 SWPH1−OUT
13308 CDATA−YOUT 14455 SWPH2−OUT
13309 CDATA−Y−END 14500 LIMPHD1−DIFF
13310 CDATA−X−ACT 14700 CLUTCH3−ACT−SET
13311 CDATA−YOUT−CYCLE 14701 CLUTCH3−DIST
13312 CURVEC1−OUT 14702 CLUTCH3−PHOUT
13313 CDATA−TP−DIFF 14800 STORE3−PHOUT
13314 CDATA−TP−DIST 19521 FCODE−PH−474/1
13315 CDATA−X−DIFF 19522 FCODE−PH−474/2
13351 CCTRL−POUT 19523 FCODE−PH−474/3
13352 CCTRL−PHI−SET 19524 FCODE−PH−474/4
13353 CCTRL−PHI−ACT 19525 FCODE−PH−474/5
8.5−8 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Selection lists 8.5
Selection list 3: Angle signals 8.5.3
Parameter Angle signal (/) Parameter Angle signal (/)

19526 FCODE−PH−474/6 20302 CAN−IN3.D2
19527 FCODE−PH−474/7 25103 AIF−IN.D1
19528 FCODE−PH−474/8 25104 AIF−IN.D2
19529 FCODE−PH−474/9
19530 FCODE−PH−474/10
19601 FCODE−MASTER−1476/1
19701 FCODE−SLAVE−1477/1
19720 FCODE−Z−1478/1
19721 FCODE−Z−1478/2
19722 FCODE−Z−1478/3
19723 FCODE−Z−1478/4
19724 FCODE−Z−1478/5
19725 FCODE−Z−1478/6
20103 CAN−IN1.D1
20201 CAN−IN2.D1
20202 CAN−IN2.D2
20301 CAN−IN3.D1
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.5−9

8 Configuration
8.5 Selection lists

Parameter Speed signal (0) Parameter Speed signal (0)
00050 DFIN−OUT 14700 CLUTCH3−NSET
00100 DFSET−POUT 19521 FCODE−PHD−475/1
00250 DFOUT−OUT 19522 FCODE−PHD−475/2
01000 FIXEDPHI−0 19523 FCODE−PHD−475/3
05000 MCTRL−PHI−ACT 19524 FCODE−PHD−475/4
05100 MPOT1−DFOUT 19525 FCODE−PHD−475/5
05200 REFC−DFOUT
05600 RFG1−DFOUT
05610 SRFG1−DFOUT
05910 PT1−2−DFOUT
06000 DFRFG1−OUT
06200 CONV1−DFOUT
06205 CONV2−DFOUT
06210 CONV3−DFOUT
06215 CONV4−DFOUT
06220 CONV5−OUT
06225 CONV6−OUT
06240 CONVPP1−OUT
06245 CONV7−DFOUT
06600 SYNC1−OUT1
12025 PHINT5−DFOUT
13301 CDATA−NOUT
13302 CDATA−N−SYNCH
13303 CDATA−X−NOUT
13312 CURVEC1−DFOUT
13351 CCTRL−DFOUT
13355 CCTRL2−DFOUT
13401 YSET1−OUT
13461 EXTPOL2−DFOUT
13551 CLUTCH1−NSET
13555 CLUTCH2−NSET
13701 MSEL1−OUT
13801 VMAS1−DFOUT
13851 CONVPHD1−OUT
13911 CONVPHPHD1−OUT
13915 CONVPHPHD2−OUT
13955 RFGPH2−NOUT
13960 RFGPH3−NOUT
14441 SWPHD1−OUT
14445 SWPHD2−OUT
14500 LIMPHD1−DFOUT
14600 ADDPHD1−DFOUT
8.5−10 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Selection lists 8.5
Selection list 5: Function blocks 8.5.5

Parameter Function block Parameter Function block
00000 empty 06230 CONVPHA1
00050 AIN1 06232 CONVPHA2
00055 AIN2 06234 CONVPHA3
00070 AOUT1 06235 CONVPHPH1
00075 AOUT2 06240 CONVPP1
00100 DFSET 06245 CONV7
00200 DFIN 06300 S&H1
00250 DFOUT 06350 CURVE1
05050 NSET 06400 FCNT1
05100 MPOT1 06450 SPC1
05150 PCTRL1 06460 SPC2
05200 REFC 06600 SYNC1
05500 ARIT1 06601 SYNC2
05505 ARIT2 07050 CONVAPH1
05520 ARITPH1 07150 CONVAD1
05525 ARITPH2 07170 CONVAD2
05530 ARITPH3 10000 BRK1
05535 ARITPH4 10250 R/L/Q
05540 ARITPH5 10500 AND1
05545 ARITPH6 10505 AND2
05550 ADD1 10510 AND3
05580 PHADD1 10515 AND4
05600 RFG1 10520 AND5
05610 SRFG1 10525 AND6
05650 ASW1 10530 AND7
05655 ASW2 10535 AND8
05660 ASW3 10540 AND9
05665 ASW4 10550 OR1
05700 ANEG1 10555 OR2
05705 ANEG2 10560 OR3
05750 FIXSET1 10565 OR4
05775 SELPH1 10570 OR5
05780 SELPH2 10575 OR6
05800 LIM1 10580 OR7
05850 ABS1 10600 NOT1
05900 PT1−1 10605 NOT2
05950 DT1−1 10610 NOT3
06000 DFRFG1 10615 NOT4
06100 MFAIL 10620 NOT5
06150 DB1 10650 CMP1
06200 CONV1 10655 CMP2
06205 CONV2 10660 CMP3
06210 CONV3 10680 PHCMP1
06215 CONV4 10685 PHCMP2
06220 CONV5 10690 PHCMP3
06225 CONV6 10700 DIGDEL1
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.5−11

8 Configuration
8.5 Selection lists
Parameter Function block Parameter Function block

10705 DIGDEL2 14100 GEARCOMP
10750 TRANS1 14440 SWPHD1
10755 TRANS2 14445 SWPHD2
10760 TRANS3 14450 SWPH1
10765 TRANS4 14455 SWPH2
10900 FLIP1 14500 LIMPHD1
10905 FLIP2 14600 ADDPHD1
10910 FLIP3 14700 CLUTCH3
10915 FLIP4 14800 STORE3
10920 FLIPT1 15100 MLP1
10925 FLIPT2 20000 CAN−OUT
12000 PHINT1 25000 AIF−OUT
12005 PHINT2 31000 VTPOSC
12010 PHINT3
12020 PHINT4
12025 PHINT5
12050 PHDIV1
13000 FEVAN1
13005 FEVAN2
13100 OSZ
13300 CDATA
13302 CURVEC1
13350 CCTRL
13351 CCTRL2
13400 YSET1
13450 EXTPOL1
13460 EXTPOL2
13500 CERR1
13550 CLUTCH1
13555 CLUTCH2
13600 CSEL1
13650 PSAVE1
13700 MSEL1
13710 MSEL2
13750 WELD1
13800 VMAS1
13850 CONVPHD1
13910 CONVPHPHD1
13915 CONVPHPHD2
13920 CONVPHAA1
13925 CONVPHAA2
13950 RFGPH1
13955 RFGPH2
13960 RFGPH3
14000 PHDIFF1
14050 STORE1
14055 STORE2
8.5−12 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8
Selection lists 8.5
Selection list 10: Error messages 8.5.6

Parameter Error message Parameter Error message
00000 No error 00110 H10−TRIP
00011 OC1−TRIP 00111 H11−TRIP
00012 OC2−TRIP 00153 P03−TRIP
00015 OC5−TRIP 00163 P13−TRIP
00032 LP1−TRIP 00166 P16−TRIP
00050 OH−TRIP 00169 P19−TRIP
00053 OH3−TRIP 00190 nErr−TRIP
00057 OH7−TRIP 00200 NMAX−TRIP
00058 OH8−TRIP 00220 CDA−TRIP
00061 CE0−TRIP 00221 CDA−LOAD−TRIP
00062 CE1−TRIP 01020 OU message
00063 CE2−TRIP 01030 LU message
00064 CE3−TRIP 01091 EEr message
00065 CE4−TRIP 02032 LP1 warning
00070 U15−TRIP 02053 OH3 warning
00071 CCr−TRIP 02054 OH4 warning
00072 Pr1−TRIP 02057 OH7 warning
00073 Pr2−TRIP 02058 OH8 warning
00074 PEr−TRIP 02061 CEO warning
00075 Pr0−TRIP 02062 CE1 warning
00079 PI−TRIP 02065 CE4 warning
00082 Sd2−TRIP 02082 Sd2 warning
00087 Sd7−TRIP 02091 EER warning
00088 Sd8−TRIP 02153 P03 warning
00089 PL−TRIP 02163 P13 warning
00091 EEr−TRIP 02166 P16 warning
00105 H05−TRIP 02169 P19 warning
00107 H07−TRIP 02220 CDA warning
02221 CDA−LOAD warning
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.5−13

Configuration 8
The attribute table describes the properties of the codes used. It enables you
to create your own communication programs for the controller.
How to read the table of attributes

Code Cxxxx Name of the Lenze code
Index dec 24575 − Lenze code Index under which the Is only required for control via INTERBUS,
number parameter is addressed PROFIBUS DP or system bus (CAN)
The subindex of array variables
hex 5FFFh − Lenze code corresponds to the Lenze
number subcode number
Data DS E Data structure Single variable
(only one parameter element)
A Array variable
(several parameter elements)
DA xx Number of array elements
(subcodes)
DT B8 Data type 1 byte bit−coded
FIX32 32−bit value with sign;
decimal with four decimal places
I32 4 bytes with sign
U32 4 bytes without sign
VS ASCII string
Format VD LECOM format ASCII decimal format
VH (see also Operating Instructions ASCII hexadecimal format
of the bus module)
VS String format
VO Octet string format for data blocks
DL Data length in byte The column "Important" contains further
information
Access LCM−R/W Ra Access authorisation for LECOM Reading is always permitted
Wa Writing is always permitted
W Writing is restricted
Condition CINH Condition for writing Writing permitted only when controller is
inhibited
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.6−1

8 Configuration

C0002 24573 5FFD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0003 24572 5FFC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0004 24571 5FFB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0005 24570 5FFA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0006 24569 5FF9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0009 24566 5FF6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0011 24564 5FF4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0012 24563 5FF3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0013 24562 5FF2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0017 24558 5FEE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0018 24557 5FED E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0019 24556 5FEC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0021 24554 5FEA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0022 24553 5FE9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0025 24550 5FE6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0026 24549 5FE5 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0027 24548 5FE4 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0030 24545 5FE1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0032 24543 5FDF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0033 24542 5FDE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0034 24541 5FDD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0037 24538 5FDA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0039 24536 5FD8 A 15 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0040 24535 5FD7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0042 24533 5FD5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0043 24532 5FD4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0045 24530 5FD2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0046 24529 5FD1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0049 24526 5FCE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0050 24525 5FCD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0051 24524 5FCC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0052 24523 5FCB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0053 24522 5FCA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0054 24521 5FC9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0056 24519 5FC7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0057 24518 5FC6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0058 24517 5FC5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0059 24516 5FC4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0060 24515 5FC3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0061 24514 5FC2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0063 24512 5FC0 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0064 24511 5FBF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0067 24508 5FBC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0070 24505 5FB9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0071 24504 5FB8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0072 24503 5FB7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
8.6−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8

C0075 24500 5FB4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0076 24499 5FB3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0077 24498 5FB2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0078 24497 5FB1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0081 24494 5FAE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0084 24491 5FAB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0085 24490 5FAA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0093 24482 5FA2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0094 24481 5FA1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0096 24479 5F9F A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0099 24476 5F9C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0100 24475 5F9B A 16 U32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0101 24474 5F9A A 15 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0103 24472 5F98 A 15 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0105 24470 5F96 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0108 24467 5F93 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0109 24466 5F92 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0114 24461 5F8D A 5 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0116 24459 5F8B A 32 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0117 24458 5F8A A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0118 24457 5F89 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0121 24454 5F86 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0122 24453 5F85 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0125 24450 5F82 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0126 24449 5F81 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0130 24445 5F7D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0134 24441 5F79 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0135 24440 5F78 E 1 B16 VH 2
C0136 24439 5F77 A 3 B16 VH 2 Ra
C0141 24434 5F72 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0142 24433 5F71 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0150 24425 5F69 E 1 B16 VH 2 Ra
C0151 24424 5F68 E 1 B32 VH 4 Ra
C0155 24420 5F64 E 1 B16 VH 2 Ra
C0157 24418 5F62 A 7 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0161 24414 5F5E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0167 24408 5F58 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0168 24407 5F57 A 8 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0169 24406 5F56 A 8 U32 VH 4 Ra
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.6−3

8 Configuration

C0170 24405 5F55 A 8 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0172 24403 5F53 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0173 24402 5F52 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0178 24397 5F4D E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra
C0179 24396 5F4C E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra
C0182 24393 5F49 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0183 24392 5F48 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0190 24385 5F41 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0195 24380 5F3C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0196 24379 5F3B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0200 24375 5F37 E 1 VS VS 14 Ra
C0201 24374 5F36 E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C0203 24372 5F34 E 1 VS VS 12 Ra
C0204 24371 5F33 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0207 24368 5F30 E 1 VS VS 14 Ra
C0208 24367 5F2F E 1 VS VS 14 Ra
C0209 24366 5F2E E 1 VS VS 14 Ra
C0220 24355 5F23 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0221 24354 5F22 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0222 24353 5F21 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0223 24352 5F20 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0224 24351 5F1F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0241 24334 5F0E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0244 24331 5F0B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0250 24325 5F05 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0252 24323 5F03 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0253 24322 5F02 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0254 24321 5F01 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0255 24320 5F00 E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0260 24315 5EFB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0261 24314 5EFA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0262 24313 5EF9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0263 24312 5EF8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0264 24311 5EF7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0265 24310 5EF6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0267 24308 5EF4 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0268 24307 5EF3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0269 24306 5EF2 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0291 24284 5EDC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0292 24283 5EDB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0293 24282 5EDA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0294 24281 5ED9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0295 24280 5ED8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0296 24279 5ED7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0325 24250 5EBA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0326 24249 5EB9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0327 24248 5EB8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
8.6−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8

C0328 24247 5EB7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0329 24246 5EB6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0332 24243 5EB3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0333 24242 5EB2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0336 24239 5EAF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0337 24238 5EAE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0338 24237 5EAD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0339 24236 5EAC A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0340 24235 5EAB A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0350 24225 5EA1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0351 24224 5EA0 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0352 24223 5E9F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0353 24222 5E9E A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0354 24221 5E9D A 6 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0355 24220 5E9C A 6 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0356 24219 5E9B A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0357 24218 5E9A A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0358 24217 5E99 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0359 24216 5E98 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0360 24215 5E97 A 12 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0361 24214 5E96 A 12 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0362 24213 5E95 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0363 24212 5E94 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0365 24210 5E92 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0366 24209 5E91 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0367 24208 5E90 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0368 24207 5E8F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0369 24206 5E8E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0387 24188 5E7C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0389 24186 5E7A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0390 24185 5E79 A 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0392 24183 5E77h A 128 I32 VH 4 RA/W CINH
C0393 24182 5E76h A 128 I32 VH 4 RA/W CINH
C0394 24181 5E75h A 128 I32 VH 4 RA/W CINH
C0395 24180 5E74h A 128 I32 VH 4 RA/W CINH
C0396 24179 5E73h A 128 I32 VH 4 RA/W CINH
C0397 24178 5E72h A 128 I32 VH 4 RA/W CINH
C0398 24177 5E71h A 128 I32 VH 4 RA/W CINH
C0399 24176 5E70h A 128 I32 VH 4 RA/W CINH
C0400 24175 5E6F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0404 24171 5E6B A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0405 24170 5E6A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.6−5

8 Configuration

C0409 24166 5E66 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0416 24159 5E5F E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra/W CINH
C0425 24150 5E56 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0426 24149 5E55 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0427 24148 5E54 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0430 24145 5E51 A 5 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0432 24143 5E4F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0433 24142 5E4E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0434 24141 5E4D A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0439 24136 5E48 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0441 24134 5E46 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0443 24132 5E44 E 1 B8 VH 1 Ra
C0444 24131 5E43 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0458 24117 5E35 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0459 24116 5E34 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0464 24111 5E2F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0465 24110 5E2E A 50 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0466 24109 5E2D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0470 24105 5E29 A 4 B8 VH 1 Ra/Wa
C0471 24104 5E28 E 1 B32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0472 24103 5E27 A 20 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0473 24102 5E26 A 10 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0474 24101 5E25 A 10 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0475 24100 5E24 A 5 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0497 24078 5E0E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0499 24076 5E0C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0500 24075 5E0B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0501 24074 5E0A A 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0502 24073 5E09 A 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/W
C0503 24072 5E08 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0504 24071 5E07 A 6 U32 VH 4 Ra/W
C0505 24070 5E06 A 4 U32 VH 4 Ra/W
C0506 24069 5E05 A 2 I32 VD 4 Ra
C0509 24066 5E02h E 1 B32 VH 4 RA/W
8.6−6 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8

C0511 24064 5E00 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W
C0512 24063 5DFF A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W
C0517 24058 5DFA A 32 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0528 24047 5DEF A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0529 24046 5DEE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0530 24045 5DED E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0531 24044 5DEC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0532 24043 5DEB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0533 24042 5DEA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0534 24041 5DE9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0535 24040 5DE8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0536 24039 5DE7 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0537 24038 5DE6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0538 24037 5DE5 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0539 24036 5DE4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0540 24035 5DE3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0544 24031 5DDF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0545 24030 5DDE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0546 24029 5DDD E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0547 24028 5DDC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0548 24027 5DDB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0549 24026 5DDA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0560 24015 5DCF A 15 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0561 24014 5DCE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0562 24013 5DCD A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0563 24012 5DCC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0564 24011 5DCB A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0572 24003 5DC3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0573 24002 5DC2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0577 23998 5DBE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0578 23997 5DBD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0581 23994 5DBA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0582 23993 5DB9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0583 23992 5DB8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0584 23991 5DB7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.6−7

8 Configuration

C0585 23990 5DB6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0586 23989 5DB5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0587 23988 5DB4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0588 23987 5DB3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0589 23986 5DB2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0590 23985 5DB1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0591 23984 5DB0 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0592 23983 5DAF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0593 23982 5DAE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0594 23981 5DAD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0595 23980 5DAC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0596 23979 5DAB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0597 23978 5DAA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0598 23977 5DA9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0599 23976 5DA8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0600 23975 5DA7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0601 23974 5DA6 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0602 23973 5DA5 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0610 23965 5D9D A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0611 23964 5D9C A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0620 23955 5D93 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0621 23954 5D92 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0623 23952 5D90 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0630 23945 5D89 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0631 23944 5D88 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0633 23942 5D86 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0640 23935 5D7F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0642 23933 5D7D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0643 23932 5D7C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0644 23931 5D7B A 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa CINH
C0645 23930 5D7A A 1 FIX32 VD 4 RA
C0646 23929 5D79 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0647 23928 5D78 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa CINH
C0648 23927 5D77 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0650 23925 5D75 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0651 23924 5D74 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0653 23922 5D72 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0654 23921 5D71 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0655 23920 5D70 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0656 23919 5D6F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0658 23917 5D6D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0661 23914 5D6A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
8.6−8 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8

C0662 23913 5D69 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0671 23904 5D60 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0672 23903 5D5F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0674 23901 5D5D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0676 23899 5D5B A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0677 23898 5D5A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0680 23895 5D57 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0681 23894 5D56 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0682 23893 5D55 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0684 23891 5D53 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0685 23890 5D52 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0686 23889 5D51 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0687 23888 5D50 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0688 23887 5D4F A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0689 23886 5D4E A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0690 23885 5D4D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0691 23884 5D4C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0692 23883 5D4B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0693 23882 5D4A A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0694 23881 5D49 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0695 23880 5D48 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0698 23877 5D45 A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0701 23874 5D42 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0704 23871 5D3F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0710 23865 5D39 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0711 23864 5D38 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0714 23861 5D35 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0715 23860 5D34 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0716 23859 5D33 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0719 23856 5D30 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0720 23855 5D2F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0721 23854 5D2E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0724 23851 5D2B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0725 23850 5D2A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0726 23849 5D29 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0729 23846 5D26 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0730 23845 5D25 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.6−9

8 Configuration

C0731 23844 5D24 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0732 23843 5D23 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0733 23842 5D22 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0734 23841 5D21 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0735 23840 5D20 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0736 23839 5D1F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0737 23838 5D1E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0738 23837 5D1D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0739 23836 5D1C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0740 23835 5D1B A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0741 23834 5D1A A 4 B32 VH 4 Ra
C0742 23833 5D19 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0743 23832 5D18 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0744 23831 5D17 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0749 23826 5D12 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0750 23825 5D11 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0751 23824 5D10 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0752 23823 5D0F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0753 23822 5D0E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0754 23821 5D0D E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0755 23820 5D0C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0756 23819 5D0B E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0757 23818 5D0A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0764 23811 5D03 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0765 23810 5D02 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0766 23809 5D01 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0768 23807 5CFF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0769 23806 5CFE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0770 23805 5CFD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0771 23804 5CFC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0772 23803 5CFB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0773 23802 5CFA A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
c0777 23798 5CF6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0778 23797 5CF5 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0784 23791 5CEF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0785 23790 5CEE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0786 23789 5CED E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
8.6−10 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8

C0787 23788 5CEC A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0788 23787 5CEB A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0789 23786 5CEA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0790 23785 5CE9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0798 23777 5CE1 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0799 23776 5CE0 A 13 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0800 23775 5CDF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0801 23774 5CDE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0802 23773 5CDD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0803 23772 5CDC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0804 23771 5CDB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0805 23770 5CDA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0808 23767 5CD7 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0809 23766 5CD6 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0811 23764 5CD4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0812 23763 5CD3 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0813 23762 5CD2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0816 23759 5CCF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0817 23758 5CCE A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0818 23757 5CCD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0820 23755 5CCB A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0821 23754 5CCA A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0823 23752 5CC8 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0825 23750 5CC6 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0827 23748 5CC4 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0829 23746 5CC2 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0831 23744 5CC0 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0832 23743 5CBF A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0833 23742 5CBE A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0834 23741 5CBD A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0835 23740 5CBC A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0836 23739 5CBB A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0837 23738 5CBA A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0838 23737 5CB9 A 13 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0839 23736 5CB8 A 13 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0841 23734 5CB6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0843 23732 5CB4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.6−11

8 Configuration

C0845 23730 5CB2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0847 23728 5CB0 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0848 23727 5CAF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0849 23726 5CAE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0850 23725 5CAD A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0851 23724 5CAC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0852 23723 5CAB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0853 23722 5CAA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0854 23721 5CA9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0855 23720 5CA8 A 2 B16 VH 2 Ra
C0856 23719 5CA7 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0857 23718 5CA6 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0858 23717 5CA5 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0859 23716 5CA4 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0863 23712 5CA0 A 6 B16 VH 2 Ra
C0864 23711 5C9F A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0865 23710 5C9E A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0866 23709 5C9D A 11 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0867 23708 5C9C A 3 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0868 23707 5C9B A 11 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0869 23706 5C9A A 3 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0878 23697 5C91 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0879 23696 5C90 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0889 23686 5C86 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0906 23669 5C75 A 9 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
8.6−12 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8

C0907 23668 5C74 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0908 23667 5C73 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0909 23666 5C72 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0926 23649 5C61 A 4 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0927 23648 5C60 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0928 23647 5C5F E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0929 23646 5C5E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0932 23643 5C5B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0933 23642 5C5A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0934 23641 5C59 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0935 23640 5C58 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0936 23639 5C57 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0938 23637 5C55 A 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0940 23635 5C53 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0941 23634 5C52 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0943 23632 5C50 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0945 23630 5C4E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0946 23629 5C4D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0948 23627 5C4B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0950 23625 5C49 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0951 23624 5C48 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0953 23622 5C46 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0955 23620 5C44 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0956 23619 5C43 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0958 23617 5C41 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0960 23615 5C3F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0961 23614 5C3E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0962 23613 5C3D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0963 23612 5C3C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0964 23611 5C3B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0965 23610 5C3A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0966 23609 5C39 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0968 23607 5C37 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.6−13

8 Configuration

C0980 23595 5C2B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0981 23594 5C2A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0982 23593 5C29 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0983 23592 5C28 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0988 23587 5C23 A 7 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0989 23586 5C22 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0992 23583 5C1F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0993 23582 5C1E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0995 23580 5C1C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0997 23578 5C1A E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1000 23575 5C17 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1002 23573 5C15 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1010 23565 5C0D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1011 23564 5C0C A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1012 23563 5C0B A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1020 23555 5C03 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1022 23553 5C01 A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1025 23550 5BFE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1026 23549 5BFD A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1027 23548 5BFC A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1032 23543 5BF7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1033 23542 5BF6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1040 23535 5BEF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1041 23534 5BEE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1042 23533 5BED E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1043 23532 5BEC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1044 23531 5BEB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1045 23530 5BEA A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1046 23529 5BE9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1060 23515 5BDB A 12 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1061 23514 5BDA A 12 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
8.6−14 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8

C1070 23505 5BD1 A 8 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1071 23504 5BD0 A 8 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1072 23503 5BCF A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1073 23502 5BCE A 4 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1074 23501 5BCD A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1075 23500 5BCC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1076 23499 5BCB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1077 23498 5BCA A 2 B32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C1078 23497 5BC9 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1079 23496 5BC8 A 6 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1080 23495 5BC7 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1081 23494 5BC6 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1082 23493 5BC5 A 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1083 23492 5BC4 A 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1084 23491 5BC3 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1085 23490 5BC2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1090 23485 5BBD E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1091 23484 5BBC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1092 23483 5BBB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1093 23482 5BBA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1094 23481 5BB9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1095 23480 5BB8 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C1098 23477 5BB5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1099 23476 5BB4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1100 23475 5BB3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1103 23472 5BB0 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1104 23471 5BAF A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1106 23469 5BAD A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1107 23468 5BAC A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1108 23467 5BAB A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1109 23466 5BAA A 4 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1120 23455 5B9F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1121 23454 5B9E A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1122 23453 5B9D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1123 23452 5B9C A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1125 23450 5B9A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1127 23448 5B98 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1128 23447 5B97 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1129 23446 5B96 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1140 23435 5B8B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1141 23434 5B8A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.6−15

8 Configuration

C1144 23431 5B87 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1145 23430 5B86 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1146 23429 5B85 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1149 23426 5B82 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1150 23425 5B81 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1151 23424 5B80 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C1155 23420 5B7C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1157 23418 5B7A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1158 23417 5B79 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1159 23416 5B78 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1162 23413 5B75 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1163 23412 5B74 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1167 23408 5B70 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1168 23407 5B6F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1170 23405 5B6D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1171 23404 5B6C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1173 23402 5B6A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1176 23399 5B67 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1179 23396 5B64 A 13 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1180 23395 5B63 A 6 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa CINH
C1181 23394 5B62 A 6 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1183 23392 5B60 A 7 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1185 23390 5B5E A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1186 23389 5B5D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1189 23386 5B5A A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1190 23385 5B59 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1191 23384 5B58 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1192 23383 5B57 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1196 23379 5B53 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1197 23378 5B52 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1201 23374 5B4E A 3 I32 VH 4 Ra
8.6−16 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8

C1205 23370 5B4A A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1206 23369 5B49 A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1207 23368 5B48 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1215 23360 5B40 A 5 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1216 23359 5B3F A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1217 23358 5B3E E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1223 23352 5B38 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1235 23340 5B2C A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1236 23339 5B2B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1237 23338 5B2A A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1245 23330 5B22 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1246 23329 5B21 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1247 23328 5B20 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1251 23324 5B1C A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1253 23322 5B1A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1254 23321 5B19 A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1258 23317 5B15 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1268 23307 5B0B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1269 23306 5B0A E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1271 23304 5B08 A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1272 23303 5B07 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1290 23285 5AF5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1292 23283 5AF3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1295 23280 5AF0 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1296 23279 5AEF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1297 23278 5AEE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1298 23277 5AED E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1299 23276 5AEC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1300 23275 5AEB A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.6−17

8 Configuration

C1301 23274 5AEA A 8 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1303 23272 5AE8 A 2 FIX32 VH 4 Ra/W CINH
C1304 23271 5AE7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1305 23270 5AE6 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1307 23268 5AE4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1308 23267 5AE3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1309 23266 5AE2 E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C1310 23265 5AE1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1312 23263 5ADF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1313 23262 5ADE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1314 23261 5ADD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1315 23260 5ADC A 8 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1316 23259 5ADB A 8 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1317 23258 5ADA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1318 23257 5AD9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1319 23256 5AD8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1320 23255 5AD7 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1321 23254 5AD6 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1323 23252 5AD4 A 16 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1325 23250 5AD2 A 7 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1327 23248 5AD0 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1329 23246 5ACE A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1330 23245 5ACD A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1331 23244 5ACC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1332 23243 5ACB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1333 23242 5ACA E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1334 23241 5AC9 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1335 23240 5AC8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1336 23239 5AC7 A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1337 23238 5AC6 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1338 23237 5AC5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1339 23236 5AC4 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1340 23235 5AC3 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1341 23234 5AC2 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1342 23233 5AC1 A 15 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1343 23232 5AC0 A 15 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1344 23231 5ABF A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1345 23230 5ABE A 4 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1346 23229 5ABD A 5 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1347 23228 5ABC A 5 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1348 23227 5ABB A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1349 23226 5ABA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
8.6−18 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8

C1350 23225 5AB9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1351 23224 5AB8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1352 23223 5AB7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1353 23222 5AB6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1354 23221 5AB5 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1355 23220 5AB4 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1356 23219 5AB3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1357 23218 5AB2 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1358 23217 5AB1 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1359 23216 5AB0 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1360 23215 5AAF A 10 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1361 23214 5AAE A 10 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1362 23213 5AAD A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1363 23212 5AAC A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1364 23211 5AAB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1365 23210 5AAA E 1 FIX32 DV 4 Ra/Wa
C1366 23209 5AA9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1367 23208 5AA8 A 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa CINH
C1368 23207 5AA7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1369 23206 5AA6 A 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C1370 23205 5AA5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1371 23204 5AA4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1374 23201 5AA1 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1375 23200 5AA0 A 2 I32 VD 4 Ra
C1379 23196 5A9C E 1 I32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1380 23195 5A9B A 2 B32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1384 23191 5A97 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1385 23190 5A96 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1387 23188 5A94 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1388 23187 5A93 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1389 23186 5A92 A 2 I32 VD 4 Ra
C1394 23181 5A8D A 10 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1395 23180 5A8C A 10 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1396 23179 5A8B A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1397 23178 5A8A A 4 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1399 23176 5A88 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1401 23174 5A86 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1403 23172 5A84 A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1405 23170 5A82 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1408 23167 5A7F A 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1409 23166 5A7E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.6−19

8 Configuration

C1411 23164 5A7C A 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1412 23163 5A7B A 5 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1413 23162 5A7A A 2 U32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C1415 23160 5A78 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1417 23158 5A76 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1419 23156 5A74 A 5 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1420 23155 5A73 E 1 FIX32 VD 4
C1424 23151 5A6F A 5 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1425 23150 5A6E A 5 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1430 23145 5A69 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1431 23144 5A68 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1435 23140 5A64 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1437 23138 5A62 A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1441 23134 5A5E A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1442 23133 5A5D A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1443 23132 5A5C A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1444 23131 5A5B A 5 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1445 23130 5A5A A 5 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1446 23129 5A59 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1449 23126 5A56 A 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1451 23124 5A54 A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1452 23123 5A53 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1453 23122 5A52 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1455 23120 5A50 A 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1457 23118 5A4E A 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1458 23117 5A4D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1459 23116 5A4C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1460 23115 5A4B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1461 23114 5A4A A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1462 23113 5A49 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1463 23112 5A48 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1467 23108 5A44 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1469 23106 5A42 A 6 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1473 23102 5A3E A 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
8.6−20 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Configuration 8

C1476 23099 5A3B A 16 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1477 23098 5A3A A 16 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1478 23097 5A39 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1487 23088 5A30 A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1489 23086 5A2E A 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1500 23075 5A23 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1501 23074 5A22 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1502 23073 5A21 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1503 23072 5A20 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1504 23071 5A1F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1505 23070 5A1E E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C1507 23068 5A1C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1508 23067 5A1B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1509 23066 5A1A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1550 23025 59F1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1552 23023 59EF A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1555 23020 59EC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1556 23019 59EB A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1557 23018 59EA A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1560 23015 59E7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1561 23014 59E6 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1562 23013 59E5 A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1581 22994 59D2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1583 22992 59D0 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1590 22985 59C9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1591 22984 59C8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1594 22981 59C5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1610 22965 59B5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1611 22964 59B4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1612 22963 59B3 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1615 22960 59B0 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1616 22959 59AF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1617 22958 59AE E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1620 22955 59AB A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1621 22954 59AA A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1640 22935 5997 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1641 22934 5996 A 16 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1642 22933 5995 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1643 22932 5994 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 8.6−21

8 Configuration

C1644 22931 5993 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1645 22930 5992 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1650 22925 598D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1651 22924 598C A 16 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1652 22923 598B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1653 22922 598A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1654 22921 5989 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1655 22920 5988 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1657 22918 5986 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1658 22917 5985 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1659 22916 5984 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1660 22915 5983 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1661 22914 5982 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1662 22913 5981 A 8 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1663 22912 5980 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1664 22911 597F A 8 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1665 22910 597E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1666 22909 597D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1667 22908 597C A 8 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1668 22907 597B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1669 22906 597A A 8 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1680 22895 596F A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1681 22894 596E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1700 22875 595 B A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1701 22874 595 A A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1702 22873 5959 A 5 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1703 22872 5958 A 5 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1704 22871 5957 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1705 22870 5956 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1706 22869 5955 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1707 22868 5954 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1708 22867 5953 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1718 22857 5949 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1719 22856 5948 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1720 22855 5947 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1721 22854 5946 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1722 22853 5945 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1723 22852 5944 A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1726 22849 5941 A 16 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C1727 22848 5940 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1799 22776 58F8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1810 22765 58ED E 1 VS 4 Ra
C1811 22764 58EC E 1 VS 4 Ra
8.6−22 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Contents
Contents

9.3.1 General error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3−1
9.3.2 Resetting system error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3−6
9.4 Error messages during profile download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4−1
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 9−1

Display of operating data, diagnostics 9.1
The dialog box displays important operating parameters and supports you
in diagnosing the drive controller.
9300std230
ƒ You can recognise immediately that a fault has occurred from the
display elements or status information.
– the history buffer in Global Drive Control (GDC) ( 9.2−2) or
– the XT keypad
– and with the "General error messages" table in the "System error
messages" chapter.
ƒ The "General error messages" table provides tips on how to eliminate
an error.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 9.1−1

Troubleshooting 9.2
Status display via controller LEDs 9.2.1
9.2 Troubleshooting
Detecting breakdowns A breakdown can be detected quickly via the LEDs at the controller or via the
status information at the keypad.
Analysing errors Analyse the error using the history buffer. The list of fault messages gives
you advice how to remove the fault. ( 9.3−1)

Red Green
On On Mains switched on and automatic start
inhibited
Off Blinking Controller inhibited
slowly
Blinking Off Undervoltage or overvoltage
quickly
Blinking Off Fault active
slowly
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 9.2−1

9.2 Troubleshooting

The history buffer can be used to trace faults. The fault messages are stored
in the 8 memory locations in the order of their occurrence.

9300std230
History buffer
Field Entry Note
location
1 Active fault If the fault is no longer pending or has
2 Last fault been acknowledged:
l The content of memory units 1 ... 7 is
3 Next to last fault shifted "upwards" by one memory unit.
4 Third to last fault l The content of memory unit 8 is
removed from the history buffer and
can no longer be retrieved.
6 Fifth to last fault l Memory unit 1 is deleted (= no active
7 Sixth to last fault fault).
Explanations
– Only the fault the response of which has the highest priority is entered
(1. TRIP, 2. message, 3. warning).
– The OH7 and OH3 warnings are exceptions. If an OH7 warning is pending and
the OH3 motor temperature threshold is reached, the OH7 warning is
overwritten by the OH3 warning. If the motor temperature decreases again,
the OH7 warning reappears.
l If a fault is immediately followed by another fault for several times, only the
time of the last occurrence is stored.
9.2−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Troubleshooting 9.2
Fault analysis via LECOM status words (C0150/C0155) 9.2.3

{Appl.}
Read only
Bit 0 Not assigned
Bit2 Not assigned
Bit3 Not assigned
Bit4 Not assigned
Bit5 Not assigned
Bit 6 n=0
Bit12 Warning
Bit13 Message
Bit14 Not assigned
Bit15 Not assigned
word)
Display only
Bit 0 Active fault
Bit 1 Mmax reached
Bit 2 Imax reached
Bit 6 TRIP active
Bit 9 Not assigned
Bit 10 Not assigned
Bit 11 Not assigned
Bit 12 Not assigned
Bit 13 Not assigned
Bit 14 Not assigned
Bit 15 Not assigned
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 9.2−3

Note!
In the case of a query via system bus (CAN), the fault messages
are represented as numbers (see first column of the table).

No. Display
−−− −−− No fault − −
circuit.
motor overcurrent.
with Imotor>Irmotor
motor overcurrent.
with Imotor>Irmotor
brake resistance.
(C0597 = 3).
low. via C0599.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 9.3−1


No. Display
connected.
(C0582 = 3).
is set too low.
encoder) current
connected.
is set too low.
current
connected contact.
(C0126 = 3).
(C0591 = 3).
(C0592 = 3).
(C0593 = 3).
9.3−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013


No. Display
(C0595 = 3).
the control cables
Lenze.
l Check resolver.
(C0586 = 3).
(C0598 = 3).
(C0594 = 3).
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 9.3−3


No. Display
C0025 ³ 309
8.0 V.
connected.
value encoder at X8 during rotor C0095 = 1 could not be completed 6.8−1
position adjustment successfully.
Note: After an Sd7 fault it is
DC bus)!
Setting:
– for 9300 servo cam in
C0575.
Stegmann company.
9.3−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013


No. Display
adjustment (the error is saved was cancelled. 6.8−1
with mains failure protection) l During rotor position
adjustment with an absolute Note: After an Sd7 fault it is
value encoder the error Sd7 or absolutely required to carry out
SD8 occurred. another rotor position
stage was detected.
values. (C0588 = 3).
values. (C0588 = 3).
C0255. (C0589 = 3).
l Note:
telegrams.
interrupted.
address.
l Note:
telegrams.
interrupted.
sync telegrams.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 9.3−5


No. Display
be identical.
load side
(C0607 = 3).
data

l pressing ð * on keypad XT EMZ9371 BC. Then, press ) to re−enable the controller.
l Control word AIF
Message Danger!
9.3−6 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Error messages during profile download 9.4
9.4 Error messages during profile download
During the profile download, the controller acknowledges a correctly

received message with ACK".
An error message is sent back to the sender (PLC/IPC). The content of the
error message depends on the communication profile used.
ƒ The "Error code sent" table assigns each fault message with a fault
name.
ƒ The "Cause of fault and fault elimination" table helps you to detect and
eliminate the possible fault cause by means of the fault name and the
code concerned.
Error code sent
Fault name 2102 2111/2113 2131/2133 2171/72 2175

LECOM INTERBUS DRIVECOM PROFIDRIVE CAN CANopen Device−
Net
E_SDF_... (Read L−C0068) Error class/code/Addcode class/code/Addcode Bytes 0/1/2/3
Read: 8/00/0020 Write: 8/00/0021 Write: FE/08/0/0
ILL_OPERATING_ACCESS 60 1008 0306 0800 0000 Status: 08
Write: 8/00/0021 Read: 8/00/FF08 Read: FF/08/0/0
Read: 8/00/0020 Write: 6/05/0012 Write: FE/0B/0/0
INV_LENGTH_RANGE 50 100B 0306 0504 0002 Status: 0B
Write: 6/05/0012 Read: 8/00/FF0B Read: FF/0B/0/0
Read: 8/00/0020 Write: 8/00/0040 Write: FE/0C/0/0
INV_COLLISION_RANGE 50 100C 0306 0800 0000 Status: 0C
Write: 8/00/0040 Read: 8/00/FF0C Read: FF/0C/0/0
Read: 8/00/0020 Write: 8/00/0030 Write: 2/0/0/0
INV_VALUE_RANGE 50 100D 0306 0609 0030 Status: 0D
Write: 8/00/0030 Read: 8/00/FF0D Read: FF/0D/0/0
Read: 8/00/0020 Write: 8/00/0030 Write: 2/0/0/0
INV_RANGE 50 100E 0306 0800 0000 Status: 0E
Write: 8/00/0030 Read: 8/00/FF0E Read: FF/0E/0/0
Read: 8/00/0020 Write: 8/00/FEFF Write: FE/FF/0/0
NOK F0 10FF 0306 0800 0000 Status: FF
Write: 8/00/0020 Read: 8/00/FFFF Read: FF/FF/0/0
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 9.4−1

Cause of fault and fault elimination
Code Fault name Cause Remedy

All ILL_OPERATING_ Password is set. Profile data l Deactivate password protection by entering the password
ACCESS cannot be accessed. (C0503/1).
l Note: If the password is not known, the password protection
can only be deactivated by loading the factory settings. This
procedure will also delete function block links and profile
data.
C0389/0 Enable for changing the number of profiles or interpolation points online
INV_COLLISION_ Relative data model is used Use GDC to create a profile with the absolute data model, load
RANGE (Lenze setting) it into the controller and accept it.
NOK Controller inhibit is not set, Set controller inhibit (e.g. via terminal X5/28, GDC F9, ...) and
controller inhibit must be set repeat data entry.
to enter data
C0390/0 Change number of profiles online
INV_COLLISION_ Online access not enabled. Set C0389/0 = 1.
RANGE Relative data model is used Use GDC to create a profile with the absolute data model, load
(Lenze setting). The number it into the controller and accept it.
of profiles can only be
changed if the absolute data
model is used.
INV_VALUE_RANGE The number of profiles Select a permissible number of profiles, 1, 2, 4 or 8.
selected is incorrect.
NOK Controller inhibit is not set, Set controller inhibit (e.g. via terminal X5/28, GDC F9, ...)
controller inhibit must be set
to enter data
C0391/x Change number of interpolation points (/1: profile number 0, /2: profile number 1, etc.)
INV_COLLISION_ Online access not enabled. Set C0389/0 = 1.
RANGE Relative data model is used Use GDC to create a profile with the absolute data model, load
(Lenze setting). The number it into the controller and accept it.
of interpolation points can
only be changed if the
absolute data model is used.
Selected number of Reduce the number of interpolation points according to the
interpolation points is too number of profiles (absolute data model):
large l 512 for 1 profile
l 256 for 2 profiles
l 128 for 4 profiles
l 64 for 8 profiles
INV_RANGE Master axis (X) cannot be Transfer a new profile from GDC. Increase the number of
calculated. interpolation points if necessary.
It is not possible to create
consistent data.
C0392/x INV_COLLISION_ Relative data model is used Use GDC to create a profile with the absolute data model, load
RANGE (Lenze setting). Access is only it into the controller and accept it.
possible if the absolute data
model is used.
C0393/x INV_COLLISION_ Online access not enabled. Set C0389/0 = 1.
RANGE
C0394/x INV_COLLISION_ Attempt to transfer a The first X value of a profile must always be zero.
RANGE non−zero value as the first X
value. The value has not
been accepted.
C0395/x INV_COLLISION_ The X values are not in Use GDC to create a profile with the X values being distributed
RANGE ascending order. correctly.
C0396/x INV_COLLISION_ Relative data model is used Use GDC to create a profile with the absolute data model, load
RANGE (Lenze setting). Access is only it into the controller and accept it.
possible if the absolute data
model is used.
9.4−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Error messages during profile download 9.4

C0397/x INV_COLLISION_ Online access not enabled. Set code C0389/0 = 1.
RANGE
C0398/x
C0399/x
C0501/1 Check X values (ascending order)
INV_VALUE_RANGE The X values are not in Check source data and repeat transfer.
ascending order.
C0502/1 Profile selection

INV_COLLISION_ Attempt to write to a Read out the maximum number of existing profiles from code
RANGE non−existing profile. C0390/0.
C0504/2 Write data field as an *.LC7 file
INV_LENGTH_RANGE Attempt to write beyond the l Limit the number of writing cycles.
data field. l Set the pointer to the beginning of the data field
(C0505/2=0)
C0504/3 Write the X values in increments with automatic indexing of the address pointer (auto−increment)
INV_LENGTH_RANGE Attempt to write beyond the l Limit the number of writing cycles to the existing number of
data field. interpolation points (see C0391/x).
l Set the pointer to the beginning of the value table
(C0505/3 = 0).
INV_COLLISION_RAN Relative data model is used Use GDC to create a profile with the absolute data model, load
GE (Lenze setting). The address it into the controller and accept it.
pointer has not been
incremented.
INV_VALUE_RANGE Attempt to transfer a Enter 0" for the first X value.
non−zero value as the first X
value. The address pointer
has not been incremented.
C0504/4 Write the Y values in increments with automatic indexing of the address pointer (auto−increment)
(C0505/4 = 0).
INV_VALUE_RANGE The relative data model is l Observe the maximum permissible difference between Y
selected. values of 32767 inc.
While writing the Y value, l This profile requires a larger number of interpolation points.
the representable value
range has been exceeded .
C0504/5 Read the X values in increments with automatic indexing of the address pointer (auto−increment)
INV_COLLISION_ Attempt to read beyond the l Limit the number of reading cycles to the existing number of
RANGE data field. interpolation points (see C0391/x).
(C0505/5 = 0).
C0504/6 Read the Y values in increments with automatic indexing of the address pointer (auto−increment)
INV_COLLISION_ Attempt to read beyond the l Limit the number of reading cycles to the existing number of
RANGE data field. interpolation points (see C0391/x).
(C0505/6 = 0).
C0505/3 Pointer on X values, selection of an interpolation point on the X axis
INV_LENGTH_RANGE The selected interpolation Observe the existing number of interpolation points under
point does not exist. C0391/x.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 9.4−3


C0505/4 Pointer on Y values, selection of an interpolation point on the Y axis
INV_LENGTH_RANGE The selected interpolation Observe the existing number of interpolation points under
point does not exist. C0391/x.
C0511/1 Write X values in physical units [m_units] with automatic indexing of the address pointer (auto−increment)
(C0505/3 = 0).
INV_COLLISION_ Relative data model is used Use GDC to create a profile with the absolute data model, load
RANGE (Lenze setting). The address it into the controller and accept it.
pointer has not been
incremented.
INV_VALUE_RANGE Attempt to transfer a Enter 0" for the first X value.
non−zero value as the first X
value
C0511/2 Read X values in physical units [m_units] with automatic indexing of the address pointer (auto−increment)
INV_LENGTH_RANGE Attempt to read beyond the l Limit the number of reading cycles to the existing number of
data field. interpolation points (see C0391/x)
(C0505/5 = 0).
C0512/1 Write Y values in physical units [s_units] with automatic indexing of the address pointer (auto−increment)
(C0505/4 = 0).
INV_VALUE_RANGE The relative data model is l Observe the maximum permissible difference between Y
selected. values of 32767 inc.
While writing the Y value, l This profile requires a larger number of interpolation points.
the representable value l Increase the number of interpolation points (via GDC) and
range has been exceeded . completely repeat the transfer of the profile.
C0512/2 Read Y values in physical units [m_units] with automatic indexing of the address pointer (auto−increment)
INV_LENGTH_RANGE Attempt to read beyond the l Limit the number of reading cycles to the existing number of
(C0505/6 = 0).
9.4−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Contents
Contents
10.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1−1

EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 10−1

Function 10.1
10.1 Function
ƒ DC−bus connections of drive systems enable the exchange of energy

between connected controllers.
ƒ If one or more controllers operate in generator mode (braking
operation), the energy will be fed into the shared DC−voltage bus. The
energy will then be available to the controllers which operate in motor
mode.
ƒ The use of braking units and supply units can be reduced.
ƒ The energy consumption from the three−phase AC mains can be
reduced.
ƒ The number of mains supplies and the related expenses (e.g. wiring)
can be perfectly adapted to your application.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 10.1−1

Conditions for trouble−free DC−bus operation 10.2
10.2 Conditions for trouble−free DC−bus operation
ƒ Distributed supply (parallel mains supply):

– Always use the prescribed mains choke when connecting a controller
to the mains.
– Controllers of the EVx9321 ... EVx9333, 8200 and 8200 vector series
must not be connected to the mains if they are operated in a DC−bus
connection with EVx9335 ... EVx9338 and EVx9381 ... EVx9383
controllers.
ƒ Only controllers with identical mains voltage/DC bus voltage ranges
can be operated in a DC−bus connection:
– Set the mains voltage/DC−bus voltage under C0173.
ƒ 9340 regenerative power supply modules and 9360 DC input modules
cannot be used together in the DC−bus connection.
ƒ Read the documentation for the other controllers connected to the DC
bus with regard to "DC−bus operation".
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 10.2−1

Fuses and cable cross−sections 10.3
Note!
ƒ All fuses specified here only have the purpose of
disconnection after a short circuit. For cable protection specific
fuses must be used.
ƒ In the following tables the rated currents of the Lenze fuses
are listed. If other fuses are used, other fuse currents and cable
cross−sections may result.
ƒ We recommend using fuse holders with a signalling contact.
Like this, the entire drive system can be switched off
(inhibited) when a fuse fails.
ƒ Always fuse DC cables using 2 poles (+UG, −UG).

with EN 60204−1
Range Description
Mains DC 460 ... 740 V
Fuses l Only semiconductor fuses.
l If you are using fuses other than those indicated, other fuse currents and
cable cross−sections may result.
Cables l DC cables (+UG, −UG) must always have two−pole insulation.
l Laying systems B2 and C: Use of PVC−insulated copper cables, conductor
temperature < 70 °C, ambient temperature < 40 °C, no bundling of cables or
cores, three loaded cores. The information is a recommendation. Other
designs/laying systems are possible (e.g. according to VDE 0298−4).
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 10.3−1

Inverter DC fuse 14 × 51 DC fuse 22 × 58 Installation in

(EFSGR0xx0AYHx) (EFSGR0xx0AYIx) accordance with
EN 60204−1
Laying system
B2 C
[A] [A] [mm2] [mm2]
EVS9321 12 12 1.5 1.5
EVS9322 12 12 1.5 1.5
EVS9323 3/PE 12 12 1.5 1.5
EVS9324 400 V 20 20 1.5 1.5
EVS9325 40 40 4.0 4.0
EVS9326 50 50 6.0 1) 4.0
1) Pin−end connector required, since a maximum cable cross−section of 4 mm2 can be connected to
the inverter.

(EFSGRxxx0ANVx) (EFSGR0xx0AYIx) accordance with
EN 60204−1
Laying system
B2 C
[A] [A] [mm2] [mm2]
EVS9327 100 100 − 25
EVS9328 100 100 − 25
EVS9329 3/PE 200 − − 25
400 V
EVS9330 200 − − 50
EVS9331 200 − − 50

(EFSGRxxx0ANWx) (EFSGR0xx0AYIx) accordance with
EN 60204−1
Laying system
B2 C
[A] [A] [mm2] [mm2]
3/PE
EVS9332 250 − − 95
400 V
10.3−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Distributed supply (several supply points) 10.4
10.4 Distributed supply (several supply points)

L1
L2
L2
N
PE
S2
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
K10
S1
Z1 Z2
JRB
K10 Z3
F7 F8 F9 F10
RB1 RB2 PE +UG -UG L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG
9352 932x … 933x 932x … 933x

PE PE
Z4 U V W U V W
X1 X2
M M
PE 3~ PE 3~
9300vec151
Fig. 10.4−1 Basic circuit diagram of a distributed supply with brake chopper
F1 ... F10 Fusing
K10 Mains contactor
Z1, Z2 Mains choke / mains filter
Z3 Brake resistor
Z4 Brake chopper
S1 Mains supply on
S2 Mains supply off

DC−bus operation.
Stop!
Set the DC−bus voltage thresholds of the controller (C0173) and
the brake chopper (see documentation of the brake chopper) to
the same values.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 10.4−1

Central supply (one supply point) 10.5
10.5 Central supply (one supply point)

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 F2 F3
Z1
F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9
L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG
9341 - 9343 932x … 933x 932x … 933x
PE
Z2 U V W PE U V W
X1 X2
M M
PE 3~ PE 3~
9300vec152
Fig. 10.5−1 Basic circuit diagram of a central supply with regenerative power supply module
F1 ... F9 Fusing
K10 Mains contactor
Z1 Mains choke / mains filter
Z2 Regenerative power supply module

DC−bus operation.
Note!
ƒ If the supply power of the regenerative power supply module
is not sufficient, the system can be additionally supplied via
the mains connection of further controllers.
ƒ Before connecting the supply module and the controllers read
the Operating Instructions of the regenerative power supply
module.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 10.5−1

Contents
Contents
11.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1−1

11.2 Operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2−1
11.3 Safety relay KSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3−1
11.4 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4−1
11.5 Functional test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5−1
11.5.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5−1
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 11−1

Important notes 11.1
11.1 Important notes
The controllers support the safety functions "Safe torque off" (former
designation "Safe standstill"), "Protection against unexpected start−up", in
accordance with the requirements of control category 3 of ISO 13849−1
(former EN 954−1). Depending on the external interconnection, a standard
up to "category 3" in accordance with ISO 13849−1 is achieved.
Note!
In order to comply with control category 3 in accordance with
ISO 13849−1 (former EN 954−1), the two methods "Pulse inhibit
via safety relay KSR" and "Controller inhibit", which are
independent of each other, have to be used.
ƒ Only qualified personnel may install and commission the Safe torque
off" function.
ƒ All control components (switches, relays, PLC, ...) and the control
cabinet must comply with the requirements of EN ISO 13849−1 and
EN ISO 13849−2. This includes among other things:
– Control cabinet, switches, relays in enclosure IP54!
– All other requirements can be found in EN ISO 13849−1 and
EN ISO 13849−2!
ƒ Wiring with insulated wire end ferrules or rigid cables is absolutely
required.
feedback contact) outside the control cabinet must be protected, e.g.
by a cable duct. It must be ensured that short circuits between the
individual cables cannot occur!
ƒ With the Safe torque off" function no emergency stop can be effected
without additional measures:
– There is neither an electrical isolation between motor and controller
nor a service or repair switch!
– An "Emergency stop" requires the electrical isolation of the conductor
to the motor, e.g. by means of a central mains contactor with
emergency stop wiring.
ƒ If in the case of the "Safe torque off" a force effect is to be expected
from outside, (e.g. sagging of hanging loads), additional measures are
required (e.g. mechanical brakes).
ƒ After the installation the operator has to check the function of the
"Safe torque off" circuit.
– The functional test must be repeated at regular intervals.
– Basically, the inspection intervals depend on the application, the
related risk analysis, and the overall system. The inspection intervals
must not be longer than 1 year.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 11.1−1

Operating mode 11.2
11.2 Operating mode
5V

X11/34
X11/33 K SR
X11/K32
X11/K31
-
~
V
X5/28 W
µC
DIGOUT
PWM
PWM
9300vec100
Fig. 11.2−1 Internal connection of the "Safe torque off" function with 3 electrically isolated
circuits
Area : Pulse inhibit via safety relay KSR; forcibly guided feedback for
monitoring the safety relay
Area : Controller inhibit (X5/28), optional feedback via a digital output
(DIGOUT)
Area : Power output stage
Activating "Safe torque off" The "Safe torque off" status is activated via two different disconnecting
paths which are independent of each other:
1. disconnecting path: Pulse inhibit via safety relay KSR (terminal X11/33,
X11/34)
ƒ In the case of LOW level at terminals X11/33, X11/34, the safety relay
KSR is deactivated.The driver supply of the power section drivers is
interrupted. The inverter no longer receives pulses.
ƒ The disconnection of the safety relay KSR has to be monitored
externally, so that a failure of this disconnecting path can be detected.
X11/K31, X11/K32 is a forcibly guided break contact, i. e. if the safety
relay KSR has been deactivated ("Safe torque off" activated), the
contact is closed.
2. disconnecting path: Controller inhibit by input signal at terminal X5/28
ƒ The input signal at X5/28 is fed to the microcontroller system and the
PWM unit. In the case of LOW level at terminal X5/28, the output of
pulses to the inverter is inhibited in the microcontroller system.
ƒ The disconnecting path "Controller inhibit" can be evaluated optionally
via a digital output. Further information can be gathered from the
chapter "Functional test" ( 11.5−1).
"Safe torque off" is activated if both disconnecting paths are on LOW level.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 11.2−1

11.2 Operating mode
Deactivating "Safe torque An AND operation of the disconnecting paths prevents the drive from
off" restarting if only one disconnecting path is enabled.
"Safe torque off" is deactivated if both disconnecting paths are on HIGH
level.
11.2−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Safety relay KSR 11.3
11.3 Safety relay KSR
Technical data

X11/33
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 11.3−1

Wiring 11.4
11.4 Wiring
Wiring
Danger!
Faulty operation in case of earth faults possible
The correct functioning of the safety function is not ensured if an
earth fault occurs.
ƒ A failure of the safety function can lead to death, severe
injuries or damage to material.
The electrical reference point for the coil of the safety relay KSR
must be connected to the PE conductor system (EN 60204−1,
paragraph 9.4.3)!
Terminal strip X11 Internal wiring / wiring of terminal strip X11

+5 V X11
3 4
3 4
K SR + 34 +
3 3
K 3 1 K 3 2 3 3
33 –
K 3 2 DC 24 V
K32
K 3 1
K31
9300vec103
Fig. 11.4−1 Safety relay KSR
Terminal Function Level / state Electrical data

X11/K32 Safety relay KSR Feedback − pulse inhibit Open contact: Pulse inhibit is See technical data of the
X11/K31 1st disconnecting inactive (operation) safety relay KSR
path Closed contact: Pulse inhibit is
active
X11/33 – coil of safety relay KSR Coil is not carrying any current:
X11/34 + coil of safety relay KSR Coil is carrying current: pulse
inhibit is inactive (operation)
X5/28 Controller inhibit Controller enable/inhibit LOW: Controller inhibited LOW: 0 ... +3 V
(DCTRL−CINH) HIGH: Controller enabled HIGH: +12 ... +30 V
2nd Input current at +24 V:
disconnecting 8 mA
path
Reading and processing
the input signals − 1/ms
(mean value)
Terminal data Wiring of the terminals X11/34, X11/33, X11/K32, X11/K31, X5/28:
Leitungstyp Wire end Cable cross−section Tightening Stripping
ferrule torque length
Rigid — 2,5 mm2 (AWG 14)
0,5 ... 0,6 Nm
With plastic 5 mm
Flexible 2,5 mm2 (AWG 14) (4.4 ... 5.3 lb−in)
sleeve
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 11.4−1

Danger!
Unexpected start−up of the machine possible
The "Safe torque off" safety function provides protection against
an unexpected start−up of the drive and therefore is an
important item within the safety concept for a machine. It has to
be ensured that this function works correctly.
ƒ Death, severe injury, or damage to material assets, when the
safety function fails.
After the installation and at regular intervals, the operator has to
check the function of the "Safe torque off" circuit.
ƒ When doing this, check both disconnecting paths separately
with regard to their disconnection capability.
ƒ The functional test can be carried out manually or
automatically via the PLC.
ƒ Basically the inspection interval depends on the application
and the corresponding risk analysis, as well as on the system
as a whole. It should not exceed 1 year.
ƒ If the functional test shows impermissible states,
– the drive or the machine has to be shut down immediately.
– commissioning is not permitted until the safety function
operates correctly.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 11.5−1

For the functional test, check both disconnecting paths separately.

1. Alternately apply LOW and HIGH level to input X11/34 and check the
states given in the table below.


1. Set controller inhibit (X5/28 = LOW).
2. Define a setpoint nset > 0.
3. Check that the motor is not rotating.
The individual test is passed if the motor does not rotate.

not passed.
correctly.
11.5−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

DC 24 V
9300
Z1 S2 S1
IN 1 X11/34
IN 2 X11/33 K SR
IN 3 X11/K32
IN 4 X11/K31
RFR
X5/28
µC
DIGOUT
PWM
PWM
9300vec104
Fig. 11.5−1 Circuit diagram for monitoring the safety function with a PLC
S1, S2 Separate disconnection options of the two disconnecting paths
KSR Safety relay
X11/34 Safety relay control
X11/33 Safety relay control (GND)
X11/K32 Forcibly guided feedback contact (24 V)
X11/K31 Forcibly guided feedback contact
DIGOUT Digital output for evaluating the motor current
X5/28 Controller inhibit
IN 1 − 4 Digital inputs
Requirements The following conditions must be met:

ƒ The PLC must be programmed such that the complete system is set to a
safe state immediately when the function check leads to an
impermissible state.
ƒ The parameter setting of a digital output must be such that you can
conclude to the output current Imotor of the drive (see parameterisation
example).
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 11.5−3

Example: Parameterising a In the following we will show you a possibility of parameterising a digital
digital output
output, so that a conclusion with regard to the motor current is provided.
Sequence Parameter Note
1. Configure function block CMP3
(comparator)
MCTRL−IACT
FCODE−472/1
l Configure the function IN1 < IN2 C0690 = 3
2. Configure output signal of CMP3 C0117/4 = 10660
l Connect DIGOUT4 to CMP3−OUT
3. Enter function block CMP3 in the
processing table
l Select a free space in the C0465/2 = 10660
processing table
In the Lenze setting, for instance
space 2 of the processing table is
free
4. Set the current threshold C0472/1 = 2.00 IMotor = 0 ® DIGOUT4 = HIGH
l Set the current threshold for IMotor ¹ 0 ® DIGOUT4 = LOW
Irated_FI to 2 %
11.5−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Functional test within the For the functional test, check both disconnecting paths separately.
inspection interval

Individual test X5/28 Setpoint Output DIGOUT
Controller inhibit LOW nset > 0 HIGH
Controller enable HIGH LOW

not passed.
correctly.
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 11.5−5

Contents
Contents

EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 12−1

General accessories 12.1

Communication LECOM−LI (optical fibre) EMF2102IBCV003
modules LECOM−B (RS485) EMF2102IBCV002
LECOM−A/B (RS232/485) EMF2102IBCV001
LON EMF2141IB
INTERBUS EMF2113IB
INTERBUS−Loop EMF2112IB
Operating module keypad XT EMZ9371BC
Diagnosis terminal (keypad XT in handheld design, IP20) 1) E82ZBBXC
Other Connecting cable 2.5 m E82ZWL025
5m E82ZWL050
10 m E82ZWL100
Parameterisation/operating software »Global Drive Control« ESP−GDC2
(GDC)
PC system bus adapter EMF2173IB
(Voltage supply via DIN connection)
(Voltage supply via PS2 connection)
(Voltage supply via PS2 connection, electrical isolation)
PC system bus adapter USB EMF2177IB
CAN repeater EMF2176IB
PC system cable RS232 5m EWL0020
10 m EWL0021
Optical fibre adapter (standard output power) EMF2125IB
Optical fibre adapter (increased output power) EMF2126IB
Power supply unit for optical fibre adapter EJ0013
Optical fibre, single−core, black PE sheath (basic protection), EWZ0007
sold by the meter
Optical fibre, single−core, red PUR sheath (reinforced EWZ0006
protection), sold by the meter
Setpoint potentiometer ERPD0010k0001W
Rotary knob for setpoint potentiometer ERZ0001
Scale for setpoint potentiometer ERZ0002
Digital display EPD203
Encoder cable 2.5 m EWLE002GX−T
5.0 m EWLE005GX−T
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 12.1−1


Connecting cable for digital frequency coupling 2.5 m EWLD002GGBS93
1) Additional connecting cable required
Tip!
12.1−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Type−specific accessories 12.2
9300 EVS9321 EVS9322 EVS9323 EVS9324

Mains choke EZN3A2400H002 EZN3A1500H003 EZN3A0900H004 EZN3A0500H007
Mains filter
EN 61800−3
Category C1 EZN3B2400H002 EZN3B1500H003 EZN3B0900H004 EZN3B0500H007
EN 61800−3
Brake resistor ERBD180R300W ERBD180R300W ERBD082R600W ERBD068R800W
Shield mounting kit
push−through
technique
9300 EVS9325 EVS9326 EVS9327 EVS9328

Mains choke EZN3A0300H013 ELN3−0150H024−001 ELN3−0088H035−001 ELN3−0075H045
Mains filter
EN 61800−3 E82ZN22334B230 E82ZN22334B230
E82ZZ15334B230 1)
Category C1 EZN3B0300H013 EZN3B0150H024 E82ZN22334B230 E82ZN22334B230
EN 61800−3 E82ZZ15334B230 1) EZN3B0080H042
EZN3B0110H030U 2)
Brake resistor ERBD047R01k2 ERBD047R01k2 ERBD033R02k0 ERBD022R03k0
Shield mounting kit
push−through
technique
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 12.2−1

9300 EVS9329 EVS9330 EVS9331 EVS9332

Mains choke ELN3−0055H055 ELN3−0038H085 ELN3−0027H105 ELN3−0022H130
Mains filter
Category C2 E82ZN30334B230 E82ZN55334B230 E82ZN75334B230 E82ZN75334B230
EN 61800−3 EZN3A0055H060 EZN3A0030H110 EZN3A0022H150 EZN3A0022H150
EZN3A0030H110N001 3)
Category C1 E82ZN30334B230 EZN3B0030H110 E82ZN75334B230 E82ZN75334B230
EN 61800−3 EZN3B0055H060 EZN3B0022H150 EZN3B0022H150
Brake chopper EMB9352−E 2 × EMB9352−E 2 × EMB9352−E 3 × EMB9352−E
Brake resistor ERBD018R03k0 2 × ERBD022R03k0 2 × ERBD022R03k0 3 × ERBD022R03k0
Shield mounting kit
Motor cable EZZ0017 ˘ ˘ ˘
push−through
technique
12.2−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Appendix 13
Contents
13 Appendix
Contents
13.1 Code−oriented transfer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1−1

13.2 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2−1
13.3 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3−1
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 13−1

Appendix 13
Code−oriented transfer mode 13.1
13.1 Code−oriented transfer mode
The mode is suitable for changing single codes. In contrast to the

interpolation−point−oriented mode only incremental values are assigned.
Condition for online access You can access the data stored in the controller online. Carry out the
following steps:
1. Select a profile with the absolute data model.
2. Activate the online access with C0389 = 1.
– Online access can only be activated if the controller is inhibited
(X5/28 = HIGH).
Y
Y11
X Y Y10
X1 Y1 Y9
X2 Y2
X3 Y3
Y8
… …
… …
… …
X11 Y11 Y7
Y6
Y5
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 X11 X
9300kur060
Fig. 13.1−1 Example of a profile with absolute data model (assignment of the X/Y value pairs)
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 13.1−1

13 Appendix
Access to profile data ƒ Profile data can be accessed via codes. Access via GDC is not possible.
Code Selection Meaning Important
C0389 0: CAM−DATA−offline Profile data Mode can only be changed
(Lenze setting) 1. if the controller is inhibited,
2. if profile has been transferred with absolute data model,
1: CAM−DATA−online 3. if the profile data has been accepted in the main memory.
C0392/1 0 ... +2147483647 X coordinates The coordinate is accessed via the subcode.
C0392/2 1st part Example: C0392/1 = X1, C0392/2 = X2, ... of profile 0 (entries for
... C0390/0 = 2)
C0392/128 The values must be entered in ascending order, otherwise NAK.
C0393/2 2nd part Example: C0393/1 = X129, C0393/2 = X130, C393/3 = X131, ... of
... profile 0 (entries for C0390/0 = 2)
C0394/2 3rd part Example: C0394/1 = X1, C0394/2 = X2, ... of profile 1 (entries for
... C0390/0 = 2)
C0395/2 4th part Example: C0395/1 = X129, C0395/2 = X130, ... of profile 1 (entries
... for C0390/0 = 2)
C0396/1 ±2147483647 Y coordinates The coordinate is accessed via the subcode.
C0396/2 1st part Example: C0396/1 = Y1, C0364/2 = Y2, ... of profile 0 (entries for
... C0390/0 = 2)
C0396/128
C0397/2 2nd part Example: C0397/1 = Y129, C0397/2 = Y130, ... of profile 0 (entries
... for C0390/0 = 2)
C0397/128
C0398/1 3rd part Example: C0398/1 = Y1, C0398/2 = Y2, ... of profile 1 (entries for
... C0390/0 = 2)
C0398/128
C0399/1 4th part Example: C0399/1 = Y129, C0399/2 = Y130, ... of profile 1 (entries
... for C0390/0 = 2)
C0399/128
13.1−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Appendix 13
Entry of coordinates The coordinates are entered online into the codes and subcodes. Acceptance
of the coordinates takes about 50 ms plus transmission time.
Values Profiles Code Meaning
Quantity Number
0 C0392/1 ... C0392/128 X1 to X128
0 C0393/1 ... C0393/128 X129 to X256
1
0 C0394/1 ... C0394/128 X257 to X384
0 C0395/1 ... C0395/128 X385 to X512
0 C0392/1 ... C0392/128 X1 to X128
0 C0393/1 ... C0393/128 X129 to X256
2
1 C0394/1 ... C0394/128 X1 to X128
1 C0395/1 ... C0395/128 X129 to X256
0 C0392/1 ... C0392/128 X1 to X128
X values 1 C0393/1 ... C0393/128 X1 to X128
4
2 C0394/1 ... C0394/128 X1 to X128
3 C0395/1 ... C0395/128 X1 to X128
0 C0392/1 ... C0392/64 X1 to X64
1 C0392/65 ... C0392/128 X1 to X64
2 C0393/1 ... C0393/64 X1 to X64
3 C0393/65 ... C0393/128 X1 to X64
8
4 C0394/1 ... C0394/64 X1 to X64
5 C0394/65 ... C0394/128 X1 to X64
6 C0395/1 ... C0395/64 X1 to X64
7 C0395/65 ... C0395/128 X1 to X64
0 C0396/1 ... C0396/128 Y1 to Y128
0 C0397/1 ... C0397/128 Y129 to Y256
1
0 C0398/1 ... C0398/128 Y257 to Y384
0 C0399/1 ... C0399/128 Y385 to Y512
0 C0396/1 ... C0396/128 Y1 to Y128
0 C0397/1 ... C0397/128 Y129 to Y256
2
1 C0398/1 ... C0398/128 Y1 to Y128
1 C0399/1 ... C0399/128 Y129 to Y256
0 C0396/1 ... C0396/128 Y1 to Y128
Y values 1 C0397/1 ... C0397/128 Y1 to Y128
4
2 C0398/1 ... C0398/128 Y1 to Y128
3 C0399/1 ... C0399/128 Y1 to Y128
0 C0396/1 ... C0396/64 Y1 to Y64
1 C0396/65 ... C0396/128 Y1 to Y64
2 C0397/1 ... C0397/64 Y1 to Y64
3 C0397/65 ... C0397/128 Y1 to Y64
8
4 C0398/1 ... C0398/64 Y1 to Y64
5 C0398/65 ... C0398/128 Y1 to Y64
6 C0399/1 ... C0399/64 Y1 to Y64
7 C0399/65 ... C0399/128 Y1 to Y64
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 13.1−3

13 Appendix
Y
(Y512) C0399/128
(Y511) C0399/127
(Y386) C0399/2
(Y385) C0399/1
(Y384) C0398/128
(Y383) C0398/127
(Y258) C0398/2
(Y257) C0398/1
(Y256) C0397/128
(Y255) C0397/127
(Y130) C0397/2
(Y129) C0397/1
(Y128) C0396/128
(Y127) C0396/127
(Y3) C0396/3
(Y2) C0396/2
(Y1) C0396/1
X
(X1) 0392/1
(X129) 0393/1
(X257) 0394/1
(X385) 0395/1
(X2) 0392/2
(X130) 0393/2
(X258) 0394/2
(X386) 0395/2
(X3) 0392/3
(X127) 0392/127
(X128) 0392/128
(X255) 0393/127
(X256) 0393/128
(X383) 0394/127
(X384) 0394/128
(X511) 0395/127
(X512) 0395/128
9300kur061
Fig. 13.1−2 Example of the access to 512 interpolation points if 1 profile is selected in GDC
(spread view)
Y
(Y256) C0397/128
(Y255) C0397/127
(Y131) C0397/3
(Y130) C0397/2
(Y129) C0397/1
(Y128) C0396/128
(Y127) C0396/128
(Y126) C0396/126
(Y3) C0396/3
(Y2) C0396/2
(Y1) C0396/1
X
(X1) C0392/1
(X129) C0393/1
(X2) C0392/2
(X130) C0393/2
(X3) C0392/3
(X126) C0392/126
(X127) C0392/127
(X131) C0393/3
(X128) C0392/128
(X255) C0393/127
(X256) C0393/128
9300kur062
Fig. 13.1−3 Example of the access to 256 interpolation points if 2 profiles are selected in GDC
(spread view)
13.1−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Appendix 13
Y
(Y128) C0396/128
(Y127) C0396/127
(Y126) C0396/126
(Y3) C0396/3
(Y2) C0396/2
(Y1) C0396/1
X
(X1) C0392/1
(X2) C0392/2
(X3) C0392/3
(X126) C0392/126
(X127) C0392/127
(X128) C0392/128
9300kur063
(spread view)
Y 0 Y 1
(Y64) C0396/64 (Y64) C0396/128
(Y63) C0396/63 (Y63) C0396/127

(Y62) C0396/62 (Y62) C0396/126
(Y3) C0396/3 (Y3) C0396/67

(Y2) C0396/2 (Y2) C0396/66
(Y1) C0396/1 (Y1) C0396/65
X X
(X1) C0392/1
(X2) C0392/2
(X62) C0392/62
(X64) C0392/64
(X3) C0392/3
(X63) C0392/63
(X2) C0392/66
(X3) C0392/67
(X62) C0392/126
(X63) C0392/127
(X64) C0392/128
(X1) C0392/65
9300kur064
(spread view)
Profile 0 of 8
Profile 1 of 8
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 13.1−5

13 Appendix
X coordinates (master drive)
C1303/1
C1303/2
C1303/4
9300kur020
Fig. 13.1−6 Entry of the X coordinates in the "Basic settings" dialog box of GDC
65536[incńrpm] @ C1303ń1
XPOS[inc] + XPOS[m_units] @
C1303ń4[m_unitsńrpm] @ C1303ń2
XPOS Target position
C1303/1 Gearbox numerator
C1303/2 Gearbox denominator
C1303/4 Feed constant
ƒ Enter all values in [inc].

ƒ A change of the profile clock pulse (last X value) will only be accepted
with the next clock pulse (profile cycle).
ƒ The 1st X value of a profile (C0392/1 and C0396/1) is always 0. All
other values will be rejected with NAK.
ƒ The X values have to be entered in ascending order, otherwise the
entries will be rejected with NAK.
Example: X1 < X2 < X3 < X4 < X5 < X6 < X7 < ...
ƒ Permissible value range: 0 ... +231
Note!
Changing the X coordinates online only makes sense for a few
applications. Generally, the distribution of the interpolation
points over the X coordinates is already specified when defining
the profile. This serves to set more interpolation points in critical
areas than in less critical areas.
13.1−6 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Appendix 13
Y
Y11
Y10
Y9
Y8
Y7
Y6
Y5
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X7 X8 X9 X10 X11 X
X6 X6
0 1
9300kur065
Fig. 13.1−7 Change of an X coordinate
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 13.1−7

13 Appendix
Y coordinates (cam drive)

C1305/1
C1305/2
C1306
9300kur020
Fig. 13.1−8 Entry of the Y coordinates in the "Basic settings" dialog box of GDC
65536[incńrpm] @ C1305ń1
YPOS[inc] + YPOS[s_units] @
C1306[s_unitsńrpm] @ C1305ń2
YPOS = position target
YPOS Target position

C1305/1 Gearbox numerator
C1305/2 Gearbox denominator
C1306 Feed constant
ƒ Enter all values in [inc].

ƒ Y values can be entered freely within the permissible value range.
ƒ Permissible value range: +231 to −231
Y
Y11
Y10
Y9
Y8
0 Y6
Y7
1 Y6
Y5
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 X11 X
9300kur066
Fig. 13.1−9 Change of a Y coordinate
13.1−8 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Appendix 13
Excerpt from the attribute Code Index DS DA DT Format DL LCM− Condition

table R/W
dec hex
C0389/0 24186 5E7Ah E 1 FIX32 VD 4 RA/W special
C0392/x 24183 5E77h A 128 I32 VH 4 RA/W special
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 13.1−9

Appendix 13
Glossary 13.2
Terminology and abbreviations used 13.2.1
13.2 Glossary
Cross−reference to a chapter with the corresponding

page number

Controller Any frequency inverter, servo inverter, or DC speed

controller

DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung(German Institute

for Standardization)
Drive Lenze controller in combination with a geared

motor, a three−phase AC motor, and other Lenze
drive components
IPC Industrial PC
L [mH] Inductance
PDC [kW] Power that can be additionally taken from the DC

bus if a power−adapted motor is used for operation
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 13.2−1

13 Appendix
13.2 Glossary
R [W] Resistance
VDE Verband deutscher Elektrotechniker (Association of

German Electrical Engineers)
Xk/y Terminal y on terminal strip Xk (e. g. X5/28 =

terminal 28 on terminal strip X5)
13.2−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Appendix 13
Index 13.3
13.3 Index
A CE conformity, 1.2−1
Acceleration time, 8.4−3, 8.4−13 CE−typical drive system, 5.4−1, 5.5−1, 5.6−1, 5.7−1
Access protection Central supply. Siehe DC−bus connection

− Activation, 6.13−1 Changing parameters
− Deactivation, 6.13−1, 6.13−2 − EMZ9371BC keypad, 7.2−7, 7.2−8
Accessories, 12−1 − Keypad EMZ9371BC, 7.2−4, 7.2−6, 7.2−9
Checking the X axis, 6.11−8
− Type−specific, 12.2−1
Code, 7.1−1
Activating the incremental encoder, 6.6−1
Code table, 8.4−1
Active data field, 6.11−2
Actual motor current, 8.4−5 Commissioning, 6−1
− Before switching on, 6.2−1
Actual motor voltage, 8.4−4
− Entry of motor data, 6.5−5
Actual speed value, 8.4−4 − Switch on, 6.3−1
Additional setpoint, 8.4−4 Communication modules, 5.12−1
Ambient conditions
Compensation equipment, Interaction with, 5.2−3
− Climatic, 3.1−1
− electrical, 3.1−2 Configuration, 8−1
− Mechanical, 3.1−2 − Analog input signals, 6.9−3
− Analog output signals, 6.9−4
Analog inputs
− Analog outputs, 6.9−4
− Configuration, 5.8−9
− Signals, 6.9−3 − Code table, 8.4−1
− Terminal assignment, 5.8−9 − Controller inhibit (DCTRL1−CINH), 6.4−1
− Digital input signals, 6.9−1
Analog outputs
− Digital output signals, 6.9−2
− Configuration, 6.9−4
− Signals, 6.9−4
− Display functions, 9.1−1
− Monitoring
Application as directed, 1.2−1 Current load of controller (Ixt monitoring), 8.2−5
Application example, profile generation, 6.10−7 DC−bus voltage, 8.2−9
B − monitoring, 8.2−1
Background data field, 6.11−2 bus off, 8.2−3
Basic function, 8.4−2 motor temperature, 8.2−6
reset node, 8.2−3
Bus off, 8.2−3
− Monitoring functions, Motor temperature, 2.2−1
− monitoring functions
C overview, 8.31
Cable responses, 8.2−1
− For control connections, 5.3−3 − Relay output, 6.9−2
− for the motor connection, 5.2−8, 5.3−1 − Table of attributes, 8.6−1
− Thermal motor monitoring, 2.2−1
Cable cross−section, Motor cable, 5.2−9
Conformity, 1.2−1
Cable cross−sections, 10.3−1
− mains connection, 5.4−6, 5.5−5, 5.6−5, 5.7−5 Control cable, 5.3−3
CAN bus identifier, 8.4−16 Control connections, Analog inputs, configuration, 5.8−9
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 13.3−1

13 Appendix
13.3 Index
Control terminals, 5.8−1 Digital outputs

− Changing the assignment of X5, 6.9−1 − Configuration, 6.9−2
− Changing the assignment of X6, 6.9−1 − Terminal assignment, 5.8−9
Controller Dimensions, 3.1−2, 4.1−3, 4.1−5, 4.2−3, 4.2−5, 4.3−3,
− Adaptation to mains, 6.5−2 4.4−3
− Application as directed, 1.2−1 Discharge current, Mobile systems, 5.2−4
− Identification, 1.2−1 Display, operating status, 9.2−1
Controller inhibit Display functions, 9.1−1
− Drive behaviour, 6.4−1
Disposal, 2.1−3
Distributed supply, 10.4−1
Current characteristics, current derating, 3.4−1
Drive behaviour
Current controller adjustment, 6.7−1
− Controller inhibit, 6.4−1
Current derating, 3.4−1 − Influence of the motor cable length, 5.2−8
Current load of controller, Ixt monitoring, 8.2−5
Current load of the motor, I2 x t monitoring, 2.2−1, 8.2−7 E
E.l.c.b., 5.2−3
D − operation at, 5.2−3
Data model Earth fault in motor cable (OC2), 8.2−4
− Absolute, 6.10−2 Earth−leakage circuit breaker, 5.2−3
− Definition, 6.10−2 − operation at, 5.2−3
− Relative, 6.10−2
Electrical installation, system bus (CAN), 5.9−1
DC supply, 5.3−1, 5.4−4, 5.5−4, 5.6−4, 5.7−4
EMC, what to do in case of interferences, 5.3−6
DC−bus connection
Emergency−off, Controller inhibit, 6.4−1
− Central supply, 10.5−1
− Distributed supply, 10.4−1 EMZ9371BC keypad, changing parameters, 7.2−7, 7.2−8
DC−bus operation, 10−1 EN 61000−3−2, 3.1−2, 5.2−1

− Conditions, 10.2−1 − operation on public supply systems, 5.2−1
− Several drives, 10−1 Entry of feed constants, 6.5−3
DC−bus voltage, 8.2−9, 8.4−4 Entry of gearbox factors, 6.5−3
− Monitoring, 8.2−9 Entry of motor data, 6.5−5
− Overvoltage, 8.2−9
Error analysis
− Undervoltage, 8.2−9
− Via history buffer, 9.2−2
Deceleration time, 8.4−3, 8.4−13 − via LECOM status word, 9.2−3
Definition of notes used, 1.4−1 Error messages, 9.3−1
Definitions, Terms, 13.2−1 − causes and remedies, 9.3−1
Device control, 8.4−2 − configuration, 8.31
Device protection, 2.3−2
Diagnostics, 7.2−10, 9.1−1
Exceeding of the maximum speed (NMAX), 8.2−4
Digital frequency input, connection to X9, 5.11−1
Explanations, Code table, 8.4−1
Digital frequency output, connection to X10, 5.11−1 External error (EEr), 8.2−9
Digital input signals, 6.9−1
Digital inputs, Terminal assignment, 5.8−9 F
Digital inputs/outputs, Terminal assignment, 11.4−1 FAIL−QSP, 8.2−1
Digital output signals, 6.9−2 Failure of a motor phase, 8.2−4
13.3−2 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Appendix 13
Index 13.3
Fault analysis Installation

− Via history buffer, 9.2−2 − Mechanical
− via LECOM status word, 9.2−3 Cold plate technique, 4.1−4, 4.2−4
Standard mounting 45 kW, 4.3−2
Fault messages Standard mounting 55 ... 75 kW, 4.4−2
− causes and remedies, 9.3−1 Thermally separated mounting (push−through technique)
45 kW, 4.3−3
− configuration, 8.31
Thermally separated mounting (push−through technique)
Fault responses, 8.2−1 55 ...75 kW, 4.4−3
Feedback system, wiring, 5.10−1 − mechanical, thermally separated (push−through
technique) 15 ... 30 kW, 4.2−3
Field controller, 8.4−5
Interaction with compensation equipment, 5.2−3
Free spaces, 3.1−2
Interferences, eliminating EMC interferences, 5.3−6
Function keys, keypad XT EMZ9371BC, 7.2−4
Interpolation points, maximum number possible, 6.10−2
Functional test, safety function, 11.5−2, 11.5−5
IT system, 5.2−2
Fuses, 10.3−1
− mains connection, 5.4−6, 5.5−5, 5.6−5, 5.7−5
J
JOG setpoint, 8.4−4
G
General accessories, 12.1−1
K
General data, 3.1−1, 7.2−1
Keypad EMZ9371BC, Changing parameters, 7.2−4, 7.2−6,
7.2−9
H Keypad XT EMZ9371BC
Harmonic currents − function keys, 7.2−4
− Limitation according to EN 61000−3−2, 5.2−1 − status display, 7.2−2
− limitation in accordance with EN 61000−3−2, 3.1−2 KSR safety relay, Terminal assignment, 5.8−9
Heatsink temperature, monitoring, 8.2−8 KTY motor monitoring, 6.5−18
History buffer, 9.2−2
L
I Leakage inductance, 8.4−6
Identification, Controller, 1.2−1 LECOM, status word (C0150/C0155), 9.2−3
Imax limit, 8.4−3 LED display, 9.2−1
Incremental encoder Legal regulations, 1.2−1
− At X8, 5.10−3, 6.6−1
Liability, 1.2−2
− With TTL level, 5.10−3, 6.6−1
Light−emitting diodes, 9.2−1
Input signals
− Analog, Configuration, 6.9−3 Limit class C1/C2, 5.2−6
− Digital, Configuration, 6.9−1
Inputs M
− Digital, Response times, 6.9−1 Mains, controller adaptation, 6.5−2
− KTY, 6.5−18 Mains choke, Assignment to standard device, 5.2−7,
− PTC, 6.5−17 5.4−7, 5.5−6, 5.6−6, 5.7−6
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 13.3−3

13 Appendix
13.3 Index
Mains connection, 5.3−1, 5.4−4, 5.5−4, 5.6−4, 5.7−4 Motion profiles

− AC mains, 3.1−2 − Acceptance of reloaded profile data, 6.12−1
− DC mains, 3.1−2 − Active data field, 6.11−2
Mains filter, Assignment to standard device, 5.2−7, 5.4−7, − Background data field, 6.11−2
5.5−6, 5.6−6, 5.7−6 − Code−oriented transfer, 13.1−1
Manufacturer, 1.2−1 − Entry of basic data, 6.10−3
− Generation, 6.10−1
Max. mains voltage range, 3.1−2
− Saving, 6.10−6
Maximum speed, 8.4−2 − Transfer, 6.11−1
Mechanical installation Motor, thermal monitoring, with PTC thermistor, 6.5−17,
− Cold plate technique, 4.1−4, 4.2−4 6.5−18
− Standard mounting 45 kW, 4.3−2 motor, Thermal monitoring, Sensorless, 2.2−1
− Standard mounting 55 ... 75 kW, 4.4−2
Motor cable, 5.2−8, 5.3−1
− thermally separated (push−through technique) 15 ... 30
kW, 4.2−3 − Cable cross−section, 5.2−9
− Thermally separated mounting (push−through technique) − for trailing cable, 5.2−9
45 kW, 4.3−3 − Influence of the length, 5.2−8
− Thermally separated mounting (push−through technique) − length, 3.1−2
55 ...75 kW, 4.4−3
− max. length, 5.2−7
Menu structure, XT EMZ9371BC keypad, 7.2−11 − permanently installed, 5.2−9
Message, 8.2−1 − permissible length, 5.2−8
− Specification, 5.2−8
Mobile systems, 5.2−4
Motor cable overcurrent (OC1), 8.2−4
Monitoring, 8.2−1
− bus off, 8.2−3 Motor connection, 3.1−2
− Current load of controller, Ixt monitoring, 8.2−5 Motor monitoring, 2.2−1
− current load of the motor, I2 x t monitoring, 2.2−1, 8.2−7
Motor potentiometer, 8.4−13
− DC−bus voltage, 8.2−9
− Earth fault in motor cable (OC2), 8.2−4 Motor protection, 2.3−2
− Exceeding of the maximum speed (NMAX), 8.2−4 Motor stator resistance, 8.4−6
− External error (EEr), 8.2−9 Motor temperature, monitoring, 8.2−6
− Failure of a motor phase (LP1), 8.2−4
Motor type selection, 8.4−6
− Heatsink temperature, 8.2−8
− Monitoring times for process data input objects, 8.2−3 Mounting conditions
− motor cable overcurrent (OC1), 8.2−4 − Dimensions, 3.1−2
− motor temperature, 8.2−6 − Free spaces, 3.1−2
− reset node, 8.2−3 − Mounting place, 3.1−2
− responses, 8.2−1 − Mounting position, 3.1−2
FAIL−QSP, 8.2−1 − Weights, 3.1−2
message, 8.2−1
TRIP, 8.2−1 Mounting place, 3.1−2
warning, 8.2−1
Mounting position, 3.1−2
− Motor temperature, 2.2−1
N
− responses, 8.2−1
Nameplate, 1.1−3
Network of several drives, Function, 10.1−1
Monitorings
− configuration, 8.31 Noise−optimised operation, 8.4−3
− possible fault responses, 8.31 Notes, definition, 1.4−1
13.3−4 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Appendix 13
Index 13.3
O Profiles
− Acceptance of reloaded profile data, 6.12−1
Operating conditions, 3.1−1, 7.2−1
− Active data field, 6.11−2
− Ambient conditions
Climatic, 3.1−1 − Background data field, 6.11−2
Mechanical, 3.1−2 − Code−oriented transfer, 13.1−1
− ambient conditions, electrical, 3.1−2 − Generation, application example, 6.10−7
− Mounting conditions − Mathematical specification, 6.10−5
Dimensions, 3.1−2 − Motion profile transfer, 6.11−1
Free space, 3.1−2
− Profile data import, 6.10−3
Mounting place, 3.1−2
Mounting position, 3.1−2 Protection against unexpected start−up, 11.1−1
Weight, 3.1−2 − operating mode, 11.2−1
Operating mode of the motor control, 8.4−2 − safety relay, 11.3−1
Operating status, display, 9.2−1 Protection of persons, 2.3−1
Operation, at earth−leakage circuit breaker, 5.2−3 − with earth−leakage circuit breaker, 5.2−3
Operation on public supply systems, EN 61000−3−2, 5.2−1 PTC motor monitoring, 6.5−17
Optimisation of the controller and mains load, 5.2−5

Output signals
Q
− Analog, Configuration, 6.9−4 QSP deceleration time, 8.4−7
− Digital, Configuration, 6.9−2
Outputs R
− Analog, 6.9−4 Rated motor power, 8.4−6
− Digital, 6.9−2 Rated motor voltage, 8.4−6
Overview, Accessories, 12−1 Reaction times of digital inputs, 6.9−1
Overvoltage threshold, DC−bus voltage, 8.2−9 Reduce noise emissions, 5.2−6
Relay output, Configuration, 6.9−2
P Residual hazards, 2.3−1
Parameter setting, 7−1
Resolver, Connecting, 5.10−2, 6.6−1
− code, 7.1−1
− with bus system, 7.1−2 Resolver polarity check, 6.8−2
− With XT EMZ9371BC keypad, 7.2−1 Responses, 8.2−1
Password − FAIL−QSP, 8.2−1
− Activation of access protection, 6.13−1 − message, 8.2−1
− Deactivation of access protection, 6.13−1, 6.13−2 − TRIP, 8.2−1
− Master PIN, 6.13−1 − warning, 8.2−1
− User PIN, 6.13−1 Rotor position adjustment, 6.8−1, 6.8−3
Pollution, 3.1−1
Power system, 3.1−2 S
Process controller adaptation, 8.4−14 Safe standstill, 11.1−1
Process input words, 8.4−39

Process output words, 8.4−39
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 13.3−5

13 Appendix
13.3 Index
Safe torque off, 11.1−1 Terminal assignment

− device variant with, 5.8−5 − Analog inputs, 5.8−9
− device variant without, 5.8−4 − Analog ouputs, 5.8−9
− functional test, 11.5−2, 11.5−5 − Controller inhibit, 5.8−9
− operating mode, 11.2−1 − Digital inputs, 5.8−9
− safety relay, 11.3−1 − Digital inputs/outputs, 11.4−1
Safety, safety engineering, 11−1 − Digital outputs, 5.8−9
− KSR safety relay, 5.8−9
Safety engineering, 11−1
− Safety relay KSR, 11.4−1
Safety function
Terminal data, 5.8−2, 11.4−1
− functional test, 11.5−2, 11.5−5
− Safe torque off, 11.1−1 Terms
− controller, 13.2−1
Safety instructions, 2−1
− Definitions, 13.2−1
− definition, 1.4−1
− drive, 13.2−1
− layout, 1.4−1
Thermal monitoring, motor
Safety relay, 11.3−1
− Sensorless, 2.2−1
− Connector X11
Terminal assignment, 11.4−1 − with PTC thermistor, 6.5−17, 6.5−18
Wiring, 11.4−1 Tni current controller, 8.4−5
Safety relay KSR, Terminal assignment, 11.4−1
Tnn speed controller, 8.4−5
Saving, motion profiles, 6.10−6
Transfer methods, 6.11−1
Selection of the feedback system, 8.4−3
Transfer mode, Code−oriented, 13.1−1
Setting the feedback system, 6.6−1
TRIP, 8.2−1
Setting the speed feedback, 6.6−1
Troubleshooting, 9.2−1
Site altitude, 3.1−2
Troubleshooting and fault elimination, 9−1
Status display, keypad XT EMZ9371BC, 7.2−2 − Monitoring, 8.2−1
Status word, 8.4−9 Current load of controller (Ixt monitoring), 8.2−5
DC−bus voltage, 8.2−9
− LECOM (C0150/C0155), 9.2−3 Heatsink temperature, 8.2−8
Supply conditions, 5.4−6, 5.4−7, 5.5−5, 5.5−6, 5.6−5,
5.6−6, 5.7−5, 5.7−6, 10.3−1 − monitoring
bus off, 8.2−3
Supply forms, IT system, 5.2−2 current load of the motor (I2 x t monitoring), 2.2−1, 8.2−7
Supply forms / electrical supply conditions, 5.2−1 reset node, 8.2−3
Switch on, 6.3−1 responses, 8.2−1
Switch−on, check before switching on, 6.2−1 Type−specific accessories, 12.2−1
System bus (CAN), wiring, 5.9−1

System error messages, 9.3−1
U
− General, 9.3−1 Undervoltage threshold, DC−bus voltage, 8.2−9
V
T Vpi current controller, 8.4−5
Table of attributes, 8.6−1 Vpn speed controller, 8.4−5
Technical data, 3−1
− Current characteristics, device protection through W
current derating, 3.4−1
− General data, 3.1−1 Warning, 8.2−1
− Operating conditions, 3.1−1 Warranty, 1.2−2
13.3−6 EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013

Appendix 13
Index 13.3
Weights, 3.1−2 Wiring according to EMC, 5.4−1, 5.5−1, 5.6−1, 5.7−1

Wiring
− digital frequency input to X9, 5.11−1 X
− digital frequency output to X10, 5.11−1 X axis, 6.11−8
− in the control cabinet, 5.3−4
XT EMZ9371BC keypad, Menu structure, 7.2−11
− Mobile systems, 5.2−4
− outside of the control cabinet, 5.3−5
− system bus (CAN), 5.9−1
EDSVS9332K EN 8.0−07/2013 13.3−7

12
© 07/2013
Germany Germany
( +49(0)51 54 /82−0 ( 008000/ 2446877 (24 h helpline)
Ê +49(0)51 54 /82 − 28 00 Ê +49(0)5154/ 82−11 12
ü www.Lenze.com
EDSVS9332K § .M)+ § EN § 8.0−07/2013 § TD06

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Global Drive
EDSVS9332K−EXT
.FZ<
Ä.FZ<ä
System Manual
(Extension)
9300 0,37 ... 75 kW
EVS9321xK ... EVS9332xK
Servo cam profiler

Contents
1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−1
2.2.2 Basic configuration C0005 = 1xXxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−6
2.2.3 Replacement of a mechanical cam (C0005 = 10000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−9
2.2.4 Welding bar drive (C0005 = 11000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−10
2.2.5 Operation with position storage (C0005 = 12000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−11
2.3 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−13
2.3.2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−13
3 Function library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−1

3.1.1 Signal types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−5
3.1.3 Connection of function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−8
3.2 Function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−14
3.2.3 Function block CDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−20
3.2.4 Absolute value generator (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−37
3.2.6 Addition block (ADDPHD1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−39
3.2.11 Inverter (ANEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−52
l EDSVS9332K−EXT EN 4.0 i
Contents
3.2.17 System bus (CAN−IN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−66

3.2.19 Setpoint conditioning (CCTRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−67
3.2.20 Setpoint conditioning (CCTRL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−74
3.2.21 Following error monitoring (CERR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−82
3.2.22 Virtual clutch (CLUTCH1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−85
3.2.24 Clutch (CLUTCH 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−91
3.2.25 Comparator (CMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−103
3.2.27 Analog/digital converter (CONVAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−112
3.2.28 Analog/angle converter (CONVAPH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−114
3.2.30 Position signal conversion (CONVPHAA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−118
3.2.31 Conversion of stretch factor (CONVPHD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−120
3.2.33 Conversion (CONVPHPHD1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−123
3.2.36 Profile selection (CSEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−127
3.2.38 Characteristic function (CURVEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−132
3.2.39 Dead band (DB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−136
3.2.40 Drive control (DCTRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−137
3.2.41 Digital frequency input (DFIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−141
3.2.49 Extrapolation (EXTPOL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−164
3.2.52 Free codes (FCODE) of the measuring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−171
3.2.57 Flipflop element (FLIPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−184
ii EDSVS9332K−EXT EN 4.0 l
Contents
3.2.60 Limiting element (LIMPHD1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−188

3.2.66 Master selection (MSEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−215
3.2.67 Logic NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−218
3.2.69 OR operation (OR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−226
3.2.76 Angle integrator (PHINT1, PHINT2, PHINT3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−242
3.2.77 Angle integrator (PHINT4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−248
3.2.78 Phase integrator (PHINT5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−249
3.2.79 Position memory (PSAVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−255
3.2.80 Delay element (PT1−1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−257
3.2.81 Delay element (PT1−2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−258
3.2.83 Homing function (REFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−261
3.2.85 Ramp function generator for angle signals (RFGPH1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−270
3.2.86 Ramp function generator for angle signals (RFGPH2 and RFGPH3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−275
3.2.88 Angle value selection (SELPH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−282
3.2.89 Position switch points (SPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−284
3.2.93 Storage block (STORE1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−294
3.2.95 Shift register (STORE3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−298
3.2.96 Angle signal changeover switch (SWPH1 and SWPH2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−303
3.2.97 Digital frequency changeover switch (SWPHD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−304
3.2.98 Multi−axis synchronisation (SYNC1 and SYNC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−305
3.2.100 Virtual master (VMAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−317
3.2.101 Positioning control (VTPOSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−321
3.2.102 Welding bar control (WELD1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−323
3.2.103 Stretching, compression, offset in Y direction (YSET1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−330
l EDSVS9332K−EXT EN 4.0 iii

Contents
4 Application examples ................................................. 4−1

4.1 Replacement of a mechanical cam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−3
4.2 Welding bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−5
4.3 Filling process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−8
4.4 Mark−controlled cam profile start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−11
5 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−1
5.1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−3
5.2 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−5
iv EDSVS9332K−EXT EN 4.0 l
1 Preface
Contents
l EDSVS9332K−EXT EN 4.0 1−1

1−2 EDSVS9332K−EXT EN 4.0 l


Target group
This System Manual is directed at all persons who design, install, commission and adjust the
9300 servo cam profilers.
Together with the System Manual, document number EDSVS9332K, and the catalogue, it forms the
project planning basis for the manufacturer of plants and machinery.
Contents
The System Manual (Extension) completes the System Manual, document number EDSVS9332K:
l The features and functions are described in detail.
l It describes additional possible applications in detail.
l The parameter setting for typical applications is explained with the help of examples.
l In case of doubt, the Mounting Instructions supplied with the 9300 servo cam profiler are valid.
Contents of System Manual Contents of System Manual (Extension)
1 Preface 1 Preface
2 Safety instructions −
4 Installation of the standard device −
5 Wiring of the standard device −
6 Commissioning −
8.3 Code table 2.3 Operating modes
8.4 Selection lists
9 Troubleshooting and fault elimination −
12 Accessories −

Information provided by the System Manual
1.1.1
How to find information

Use the System Manual as the basis. It contains references to the corresponding chapters in the
System Manual Supplement:
l Each chapter is a complete unit and comprehensively informs about a subject.
l The Table of Contents and Index help you to find all information about a certain topic.
l Descriptions and data of other Lenze products (Drive PLC, Lenze geared motors, Lenze
motors, ...) can be found in the corresponding catalogs, Operating Instructions and manuals.
The required documentation can be ordered at your Lenze sales partner or downloaded as
PDF file from the Internet.
) Note!
Information and tools concerning the Lenze products can be found in the download
area under
http://www.Lenze.com 1


.FZ< 4.0 06/2011 TD23 Fault correction
13344177 3.0 07/2010 TD23 Extended by functions for software version 8.0
Fault correction
13190509 2.0 02/2007 TD23 Fault correction
13142002 1.0 06/2006 TD23 First edition for software version 7.0
Division of the System Manual into 2 parts (EDSVS9332K and
EDSVS9332K−EXT)


This documentation is valid for 9300 servo cam profilers as of nameplate data:
Nameplate
EVS 93xx − x x Vxx 1x 8x
Product series

400 V 480 V
9321 = 0.37 kW 0.37 kW
9322 = 0.75 kW 0.75 kW
9323 = 1.5 kW 1.5 kW
9324 = 3.0 kW 3.0 kW
9325 = 5.5 kW 5.5 kW
9326 = 11 kW 11 kW
9327 = 15 kW 18.5 kW
3928 = 22 kW 30 kW
9329 = 30 kW 37 kW
9330 = 45 kW 45 kW
9331 = 55 kW 55 kW
9300vec112
9332 = 75 kW 90 kW
Type
Design
K= Servo cam profiler
Variant
− Standard
Hardware version
Software version

1.2 Definition of notes used
All safety information given in these instructions has the same layout:
Pictograph (indicates the type of danger)
} Signal word! (indicates the severity of danger)

Note (describes the danger and explains how to avoid it)
Pictograph Signal word Consequences if disregarded

Signal word Meaning

Danger! Impending danger for persons Death or severe injuries
Warning! Possible, very dangerous situation for Death or severe injuries

Dangerous electrical voltage persons

General danger
Caution! Possible, dangerous situation for
persons
Injuries

Stop! Possible damage to material Damage of the drive system or its
environment

Note! Useful tip
If you observe it, handling of the drive
system will be easier.


Configuration
2 Configuration
Contents
2.2.2 Basic configuration C0005 = 1xXxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−5
2.2.3 Replacement of a mechanical cam (C0005 = 10000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−8
2.2.4 Welding bar drive (C0005 = 11000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−9
2.2.5 Operation with position storage (C0005 = 12000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−10
2.3 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−12
2.3.2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−12

Configuration

Configuration
Configuration with Global Drive Control
2.1 Configuration with Global Drive Control
With Global Drive Control (GDC), Lenze offers an easy−to−understand, clearly−laid−out and
convenient tool for the configuration of your specific drive task.
Function block library

GDC provides an easy−to−read library of available function blocks (FB). GDC also displays the
complete assignment of an FB.
The signal configuration is done with only one dialog box. It is a convenient way
l to display every FB as a block diagram.
l to see the assignment of all signal inputs at a glance.
l to enter the FB in the processing table.
l to print your signal configuration.
Terminal assignment
Freely assignable terminals can be configured using two dialog boxes:
l Dialog box − to link digital inputs and outputs.
l Dialog box − to link analog inputs and outputs.

Configuration
2.2 Basic configurations
( Stop!
It is possible to load predefined basic configurations via code C0005. If you load a
configuration via C0005, the assignment of all inputs and outputs will be overwritten
with the corresponding basic assignment.
Adapt the function assignment to the wiring.
The internal signal processing is adapted to the drive task by selecting a predefined basic
configuration. You can, for instance, use the Lenze setting for speed control.
l A detailed description of the basic configurations with terminal assignments, signal flow
diagrams, and application examples can be found in the chapter "Application examples".
l Before loading a basic configuration via C0005, the controller must be inhibited.
Several predefined signal configurations can be loaded by using code C0005. The selection numbers
have the following meaning:
C0005 = 1 X X X X
Control
0 − Terminal control
1 − Control via LECOM A/B/LI
3 − Control via AIF (INTERBUS,PROFIBUS)
5 − Control via system bus (CAN)
Terminal supply
0 − External supply of control terminals
1 − Internal supply of control terminals
Additional functions (see chapter 2.2.2 ff.)
0 − None
1 − Homing function
2 − Clutch function
3 − Switching points
8 − Mark−controlled correction of the master value
9 − Mark−controlled correction of the act. value
Operating mode
0 − Replacement of a mechanical cam* (see chapter 2.2.3)
1 − Welding bar drive* (see chapter 4.2)
2 − Operation with position storage* (see chapter 2.2.5)
* − Incremental master value
Identification
1 − Cam profile

Configuration
Profile data
Before commissioning, the profile data must be generated with the Global Drive Control program and
the transmitted to the drive. The below basic cam profiles are included in the Lenze setting. They are
effective independently of the basic parameter setting.
Profile 1 Electronic gearbox (linear position profile)
Profile 2 Forward / backward movement with a standstill in the apex of the motion
Profile 3 Forward / backward movement with a standstill at the end of motion
Profile 4 Smooth feed
Profiles 5 − 8 No motion
} Warning!
With Lenze setting, the motor must be operated at no−load (no mechanical
connection to the machine).

If the basic configuration must be changed for a special application, proceed as follows:
1. Select a basic configuration via C0005 which largely meets the requirements.
2. Add functions by:
– Reconfiguring inputs and/or outputs.
– Setting parameters for function blocks. ( 3−6)
– Inserting or removing function blocks. ( 3−12)
) Note!
If you change the signal flow of the basic configuration, e. g. by adding function
blocks, C0005 is set to 0. The display indicates "COMMON".

Configuration
2.2.2 Basic configuration C0005 = 1xXxx

2.2.2.1 Basic configurations 1X0XX: No additional function
The signal flow corresponds to the basic functions described in chapters X.1 − X.3.
2.2.2.2 Basic configurations 1X1XX: Homing function
C1477/5
Homing function Following error

Profile control
Start homing x C1477/2 C1380/1,2
x
C0472/4 (CERR1)
Home mark (REFC)
(CCTRL)
C0472/2 Motor control

C0006, C0011,
C0472/3 (-1) C0022, C0070,
C0071, C0086,
C0105, C0254
(MCTRL)
9300kur080
Fig. 2−1 Section of the signal flow diagram showing the basic configuration 1X1XX with homing function
Function
Digital inputs X5/28 Controller enable
X5/E1 Event profile
X5/E2 Profile *1
X5/E3 Start homing
X5/E4 Home mark
X5/E5 Trip reset / profile acceptance
Digital outputs X5/A1 TRIP
X5/A2 Contouring error
X5/A3 RDY
X5/A4 Reference O.K.
Analog inputs X6/1, X6/2 –
X6/3, X6/4 –
Analog outputs X6/62 Actual speed value
X6/63 Actual torque value
Additional code C1477/5 Home position
Parameter of FB REFC C0011 Max. speed nmax

Configuration
2.2.2.3 Basic configurations 1x2xx: Clutch function
C1477/5
Following error
Clutch function
Profile control
Engage clutch x C1477/2 C1380/1,2
x
C0472/4 (CERR1)
Overload limt (CLUTCH)
value (CCTRL)
C0472/2
Motor control
C0006, C0011,
C0472/3 (-1) C0022, C0070,
C0071, C0086,
C0105, C0254
(MCTRL)
9300kur081
Fig. 2−2 Section of the signal flow diagram showing the basic configuration 1X2XX with clutch function
Function
X5/E1 Event profile
X5/E2 Profile *1
X5/E3 Profile *2
X5/E4 Engage clutch
X5/A3 RDY
X5/A4 Clutch disengaged
X6/3, X6/4 –
Additional code C1477/5 Home position
Parameters of FB CLUTCH C1410 Clutch mode
C1411 Max. velocity
C1412/1 Ramp opening time
C1412/2 Ramp profile generator
C1412/3 Overload time delay
C1413 Catch hysteresis

Configuration
2.2.2.4 Basic configurations 1x3xx: Switching points (cam group)
Following error
C1477/2 C1380/1,2
C0472/4 (CERR1)
Motor control
C0006, C0011,
(-1) C0022, C0070,
C0071, C0086,
C0105, C0254
Switching points
(MCTRL)
(SPC)
9300kur082
Fig. 2−3 Section of the signal flow diagram showing the basic configuration 1X3XX with switching points
Function
X5/E1 Event profile
X5/E2 Profile *1
X5/E3 Profile *2
X5/E4 Profile *4
X5/A3 RDY
X5/A4 Switching point 1
X6/3, X6/4 –
Additional codes C1476/x Codes can be used as switching point values
C1477/x
Parameters of FBs SPC1 C1645 SPC1 mode
and SPC2 C1655 SPC2 mode
C1657/1 to SPC2 dead time
C1657/4
C1658 SPC2 hysteresis
C1659 Filters
2.2.2.5 Basic configurations 1x8xx: Mark−controlled correction of master value

Changed terminal assignment
Digital inputs X5/E1 Event
X5/E2 Profile *1
X5/E3 Profile *2
X5/E5 TOUCH−PROBE signal input
Additional code C1476/16 TOUCH−PROBE position X
2.2.2.6 Basic configurations 1x9xx: Mark−controlled correction of actual value

Changed terminal assignment
Digital inputs X5/E1 Event
X5/E2 Profile *1
X5/E3 Profile *2
X5/E4 TOUCH−PROBE signal input X
X5/E5 TOUCH−PROBE / profile acceptance Y
Additional code C1476/16 TOUCH−PROBE position Y

2.2.3
Fig. 2−4
2.2.3
l
X9 X10
Master value
C0425 Stretching of X-axis Drive control

profile data
(DCTRL)
x +
C0472/1
X5 C1476/1
X5
C1300-C1317 Stretching of Y-Axis A1 Trip
Ctrl. enable 28 C1476/16
A2 Following error
(CDATA) x +
Event profile E1
A3 RDY
Profile *1 E2 C1477/1
Profile selection A4 Position error
C0474/1 (YSET1)
Profile *2 E3 C1420
Profile *3 E4 (CSEL1)
Trip-Reset/ E5
profile
acceptance
1
X6
X6 Following error 62
2
Nact
Profile control 63 Mact
3 x C1477/2 C1380/1,2
Block diagram of the basic configuration C0005 = 10000 (cam)

7 GND
4 x C0472/4
C0472/2 (CERR1)
EDSVS9332K−EXT EN 4.0
GND 7 C0472/3 (CCTRL)
C0006,C0011,
X7 (-1) C0022,C0070,
Resolver C0071,C0086,
C0105,C0254
(MCTRL)
Replacement of a mechanical cam (C0005 = 10000)
X8 C0420 C0025
C0490
Encoder C0495
SinCos
absolute value encoder
Configuration
Replacement of a mechanical cam (C0005 = 10000)
9300kur085
2−9
Configuration
2.2.4 Welding bar drive (C0005 = 11000)
Code Description
Basic configuration C0005 = 10000 The configuration C0005 = 10000 provides an electronical solution for the demands on a
mechanical cam. Additional functions such as stretching / compression / angle trimming in
X−direction and Y−direction are available.
Master value C0425 Encoder constant of the master value
Cam profile data C1300−C1317 The cam profile data are determined with the generation of the profile. Usually, they do not
have to be changed separately.
C1420 Determines the profile to be used when an event input is activated (digital input X5/E1 = LOW).
Contouring error C1380/1 and C1380/2 Determine comparison window and hysteresis of the contouring error evaluation.
evaluation
Adjustment values C0472/2 Influence of speed precontrol
C0472/3 Influence of torque precontrol
C1477/2 Contouring error limit (in s_units)
C0472/4 Reduction factor for contouring error warning
Warning limit: C0472/4 × C1477/2
Profile influence C0472/1 Stretching/compression of X−axis (100 % = no stretching/compression)
C1476/1 Angle trimming in X−direction
C1477/1 Angle trimming in Y−direction
C1476/16 TOUCH−PROBE position in X−direction
C0472/9 Stretching/compression of Y−axis
C0472/10 Torque limit value
2.2.4 Welding bar drive (C0005 = 11000)

See chapter 4.2. ( 4−5)

2.2.5
Fig. 2−5
2.2.5
l
X9 X10
Master value
PSAVE
C0425 Stretching of X-axis Drive control
profile data
x + (DCTRL)
C0472/1
X5 C1476/1
X5
C1300-C1317 Stretching of Y-Axis A1 Trip
Ctrl. enable 28 C1476/16
A2 Following error
(CDATA) x +
Event profile E1
A3 RDY
Profile *1 E2 C1477/1
Profile selection A4 Position error
C0474/1 (YSET1)
Profile *2 E3 C1420
Profile *3 E4 (CSEL1)
Trip-Reset/ E5
profile
acceptance
1
X6
X6 Following error 62
2
Nact
Profile control 63 Mact
3 x C1477/2 C1380/1,2
7 GND
4 x C0472/4
C0472/2 (CERR1)
EDSVS9332K−EXT EN 4.0
GND 7 C0472/3 (CCTRL)
C0006,C0011,
X7 (-1) C0022,C0070,
C0071,C0086,
Operation with position storage (C0005 = 12000)
Resolver
C0105,C0254
(MCTRL)
Block diagram of the basic configuration C0005 = 12000 (cam with position storage)
X8 C0420 C0025 Position memory
C0490 C1430/1,2
Encoder C0495 C1431
DCTRL
(PSAVE)
SinCos
absolute value encoder
Configuration
Operation with position storage (C0005 = 12000)
An incremental encoder cannot be used as a feedback system with this configuration.

9300kur083
2−11
Configuration
2.2.5 Operation with position storage (C0005 = 12000)
Code Description
C0005 = 12000 With this configuration and an absolute feedback system (resolver or Sin/Cos absolute value encoder), the position
values of the motor shaft can be stored when switching off the mains. When the mains is switched on again, the actual
values are compared to the stored values.
Master value
C0425 Encoder constant of the master value
Cam profile data
C1300 ... C1317 The cam profile data are determined by the generation of the profile. Usually, they do not have to be changed
separately.
C1420 Determines the profile to be used when an event input is activated (X5/E1 = LOW).
Contouring error evaluation
C1380/1 and C1380/2 Determine comparison window and hysteresis of the contouring error evaluation.
Adjustment values
C0472/2 Influence of speed precontrol
C0472/3 Influence of torque precontrol
C1477/2 Contouring error limit (in s/units)
C0472/4 Reduction factor for contouring error warning; warning limit = C0472/4 × C1477/2
Profile influence
C1472/1 Stretching/compression of X−axis (100 % = no stretching/compression)
C1476/1 Angle trimming in X−direction
C1477/1 Angle trimming in Y−direction
Position memory
C1430/1, C1430/2 Tolerance window of the comparison functions
C1431 Determination of values to be stored (master and/or actual value)
C1476/16 TOUCH−PROBE position in X−direction
C0472/9 Stretching/compression of Y−axis
C0472/10 Torque limit value

Configuration
Operating modes
2.3 Operating modes
By selecting the operating mode you can also select the interface you want to use for parameter
setting or control of the controller.
C0005 contains predefined configurations which allow a very easy change of the operating mode.

Parameters can be set with one of the following modules:
l Communication module
– 2102 (LECOM A/B/LI)
– 2111, 2113 (INTERBUS)
– 2131, 2133 (PROFIBUS)
– 2175 (CANopen/DeviceNet)
l PC system bus module (CAN)
– 2173
2.3.2 Control
The drive controller can be controlled via terminals (X5 and X6), via the fieldbus module at X1 or via
the system bus (X4). Mixed forms are also possible.

Configuration
Operating modes
2.3.2 Control

Function library
3 Function library
Contents
3.1.1 Signal types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−16
3.1.3 Connection of function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−19
3.2 Function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−25
3.2.3 Function block CDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−31
3.2.4 Absolute value generator (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−48
3.2.6 Addition block (ADDPHD1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−50
3.2.11 Inverter (ANEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−63
3.2.17 System bus (CAN−IN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−77
3.2.19 Setpoint conditioning (CCTRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−78
3.2.20 Setpoint conditioning (CCTRL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−85
3.2.21 Following error monitoring (CERR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−93
3.2.24 Clutch (CLUTCH 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−103
3.2.25 Comparator (CMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−115
3.2.27 Analog/digital converter (CONVAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−124
3.2.28 Analog/angle converter (CONVAPH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−126
3.2.30 Position signal conversion (CONVPHAA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−130
3.2.31 Conversion of stretch factor (CONVPHD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−132

Function library
3.2.36 Profile selection (CSEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−139

3.2.38 Characteristic function (CURVEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−144
3.2.39 Dead band (DB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−148
3.2.40 Drive control (DCTRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−149
3.2.41 Digital frequency input (DFIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−153
3.2.52 Free codes (FCODE) of the measuring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−183
3.2.57 Flipflop element (FLIPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−196
3.2.60 Limiting element (LIMPHD1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−200
3.2.66 Master selection (MSEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−227
3.2.67 Logic NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−230
3.2.69 OR operation (OR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−238
3.2.76 Angle integrator (PHINT1, PHINT2, PHINT3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−254
3.2.77 Angle integrator (PHINT4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−260
3.2.78 Phase integrator (PHINT5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−261
3.2.79 Position memory (PSAVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−267
3.2.80 Delay element (PT1−1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−269

Function library
3.2.81 Delay element (PT1−2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−270

3.2.83 Homing function (REFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−273
3.2.85 Ramp function generator for angle signals (RFGPH1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−282
3.2.86 Ramp function generator for angle signals (RFGPH2 and RFGPH3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−287
3.2.88 Angle value selection (SELPH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−294
3.2.89 Position switch points (SPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−296
3.2.95 Shift register (STORE3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−310
3.2.96 Angle signal changeover switch (SWPH1 and SWPH2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−315
3.2.97 Digital frequency changeover switch (SWPHD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−316
3.2.98 Multi−axis synchronisation (SYNC1 and SYNC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−317
3.2.100 Virtual master (VMAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−329
3.2.101 Positioning control (VTPOSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−333
3.2.102 Welding bar control (WELD1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−335
3.2.103 Stretching, compression, offset in Y direction (YSET1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−342

Function library

Function library
3.1.1 Signal types
3.1 Working with function blocks
The signal flow of the controller can be configured by connecting function blocks. The controller can
thus be easily adapted to diverse applications.
3.1.1 Signal types

Each function block is provided with a certain number of inputs and outputs which can be interlinked.
Corresponding to their functions, there are only certain types of signals at the inputs and outputs:
l Quasi analog signals
– Symbol:
– Unit: %
– Designation: a
– Value range: ±16384 = ±100 %
– Resolution: 16 bits, scaling ±16384 ¢ ±100 %
l Digital signals
– Symbol:
– Unit: binary, with HIGH or LOW level
– Designation: d
l Speed signals
– Symbol:
– Unit: rpm (for display, internal representation in [inc/ms])
– Designation: phd
– Resolution: 16 bits
l Angle signals
– Symbol:
– Unit: inc
– Designation: ph
– Resolution: 32 bits, scaling 1 revolution ¢ 65536 inc
Only the same signal types can be connected. Thus, an analog output signal of one function block
can only be connected to the analog input of the other function block. If you try to connect two
different signal types, the connection is rejected.

Function library
Input name FB name
C1100 FCNT1
FCNT1−CLKUP FCNT1−OUT
C1102/1
C1104/1
FCNT1−CLKDWN
C1102/2 Output symbol
C1104/2
CTRL FCNT1−EQUAL
Input symbol C1101/1 FCNT1−LD−VAL
C1103/1
FCNT1−LOAD
C1102/3
C1104/3
FCNT1−CMP−VAL
C1101/2
C1103/2
Configuration code Function
Display code Output name
Fig. 3−1 Function block structure − using the example of FCNT1
FB name
Identifies fhe FB unambiguously. FBs with the same function are distinguished by a number behind
the name.
Every FB is defined by a selection number. For calculating the FB, the selection number must be input
into the processing table. ( 3−12)
The selection numbers are listed in selection list 5.
Example:
l FCNT1 ¢ selection number 6400 (selection list 5).
Input symbol
Designates the signal type which is allowed as signal source for this input. ( 3−5)
Tip!
Only linked inputs can be configured.
Input name
Consists of the FB name and a designation. Inputs with the same function are distinguished by the

Function library
Configuration code
Configures the input with a signal source (e. g. terminal signal, control code, output of an FB, ...).
Inputs with identical codes are distinguished by the attached subcode (Cxxxx/1). These codes are
configured via the subcode.
It is not possible to connect an input with several signal sources.
Display code
Displays the current input value. Inputs with identical codes are distinguished by the attached
subcode (Cxxxx/1). These codes are displayed via the subcode.
Display codes cannot be processed.
Function
Represents the mathematical function as a block diagram (see Fig. 3−1).
Parameter setting code

Adaptation of the function or behaviour to the drive task. Possible settings are described in the text
and/or the line diagram. ( 3−14)
Output symbol
Designates the signal type. Connections with inputs of the same signal type are possible. ( 3−5)
Each output is defined by a selection number. The selection numbers are divided into selection lists
(1 ... 4) according to the different signal types.
An output is linked to an input by the selection numbers.
Example:
l FCNT1−OUT ¢ selection number 6400 (analog signal, selection list 1).
l FCNT1−EQUAL ¢ selection number 6400 (digital signal, selection list 2).
Tip!
Only linked outputs can be configured.
Output name
Consists of the FB name and a designation. Outputs with the same function are distinguished by the

Function library
3.1.3 Connection of function blocks

General rules
l Assign a signal source to an input.
l One input can have only one signal source.
l Inputs of different function blocks can have the same signal source.
l Only the same types of signals can be connected.
Stop!
Existing connections which are not required must be removed by reconfiguration. Otherwise the
drive cannot perform the desired function.
AND1−IN1 AND1 NOT1

C0820/1 NOT1−IN 1 NOT1−OUT
C0840
C0821/1
AND1−IN2 & C0841
AND1−OUT
C0820/2
NOT2
C0821/2 1
AND1−IN3 NOT2−IN NOT2−OUT
C0820/3 C0842
C0821/3 C0843
C0830/1
OR1−IN1 OR1 X C0720
C0721
DIGDEL1
C0831/1
OR1−IN2 |1 DIGDEL1−IN
OR1−OUT DIGDEL1−OUT
C0830/2 C0723
C0724 0 t
C0831/2
OR1−IN3
C0830/3
C0831/3
Connection is possible
Connection is not possible
Fig. 3−2 Correct connection of function blocks

Function library
Basic procedure
1. Select the configuration code of the function block input which is to be changed.
2. Determine the source of the input signal for the selected input
(e.g. from the output of another function block).
3. The function block input is assigned via a menu which contains only those signal sources
which are of the same type as the function block input to be assigned.
4. Select and confirm the signal source.
5. Remove undesired connections, if any.
– For this, select the corresponding signal assignment of the input via the configuration code
(e.g. FIXED0, FIXED1, FIXED0%, ...).
6. Repeat 1. to 5. until the desired configuration is set.
7. Save modified configuration in the desired parameter set.
Example
l Condition:
– Default setting
l Task:
– Square the analog signal of X6/3, X6/4 and output to X6/62.
l Solution:
– You need the function blocks AIN2, ARIT2 and AOUT2.
AIN2
+
C0601/1 "200% C434/1 AOUT1
4 + x
AIN2−OFFSET
C0026/2 C0407
C0602/1
C0431
AOUT1−IN +
62
C0409/1 ARIT2−IN2
C0108/1 C0433
C0601/2
AIN2−GAIN
C0027/2 C0408 C0434/3
C0602/2
C0109/1 C0432
C0434/2
Fig. 3−3 Example of a simple configuration

Function library
Establish connections
1. Determine the signal source for ARIT2−IN1:
– Change to the code level using the arrow keys
2. Determine signal source for ARIT2−IN2:
– Select C0601/2 using .
3. Parameterise ARIT2:
– Select multiplication (selection number 3).
4. Determine signal source for AOUT1:
– Select output ARIT2−OUT (selection number 5505).
5. Enter function block ARIT2 in the processing table:
– Select C0465 and subcode 8 using .
– Enter function block ARIT2 (selection number 5505).
– The sequence of the FB processing is thus determined.

Function library
Remove connections
l Since a source can have several targets, there may be further signal connections, which may
not be wanted.
l Example:
– In the default setting of the basic configuration C0005 = 1000 (speed control), ASW1−IN1
and AIN2−OUT are connected.
– This connection is not automatically removed by the settings described above! If you do not
want this connection, remove it.
C0812/1 ASW1
ASW1−IN1 0
C0810/1 ASW1−OUT
ASW1−IN2 1 NSET−NADD
FIXED0% C0810/2
C0812/2
ASW1−SET
FIXED0 C0811
C0813
AIN2
+
C0601/1 "200% C434/1 AOUT1
4 + x
AIN2−OFFSET
C0026/2 C0407
C0602/1
C0431
AOUT1−IN +
62
C0409/1 ARIT2−IN2
C0108/1 C0433
C0601/2
AIN2−GAIN
C0027/2 C0408 C0434/3
C0602/2
C0109/1 C0432
C0434/2
Fig. 3−4 Remove connections in a configuration
6. Remove connection between ASW1−IN1 and AIN2−OUT:

– Select the constant FIXED0% (selection number 1000) using or .
– Confirm with SH + PRG
Now the connection is removed.
7. Save new configuration, if desired:
– If you do not want to lose the modifications after mains disconnection, save the new signal
configuration in one of the parameter sets with C0003.

Function library
The 93XX controller provides a certain calculating time for processing the FBs. Since the type and
number of FBs to be used depends on the application and can vary strongly, not all available FBs are
permanently calculated. A processing table is therefore provided under code C0465, where only the
FBs used are listed. This means that the drive system is perfectly matched to the task. If further
function blocks are integrated into an existing configuration, they must be listed in the processing
table.
Several aspects must be observed:
The number of FBs to be processed is limited

A maximum of 50 FBs can be integrated into a configuration. Every FB requires a certain processing
time. Code C0466 displays the residual time for the processing of FBs. If this time is used up, no
further FBs can be integrated.
Entry sequence into the FBs

Normally, the entry sequence under C0465 is arbitrary, but it may be important for applications with
high response. In general, the most favourable sequence is adapted to the signal flow.
Example:
AND1-IN1 AND1
DIGIN DIGIN1 C0820/1
E1
E2 C0114/1...5 DIGIN2 C0821/1
& DIGOUT
E3 DIGIN3 AND1-IN2 AND1-OUT DIGOUT1
0 C0820/2 C0117/1
DIGOUT2 C0118/1...4 A1
E4 DIGIN4 C0117/2
1 C0821/2 DIGOUT3 A2
E5 DIGIN5 AND1-IN3 C0117/3 0
C0820/3 DIGOUT4 A3
C0117/4 1
C0443 C0821/3 A4
C0444/1
C0444/2
C0444/3
C0444/4
OR1-IN1 OR1
C0830/1
C0831/1
OR1-IN2 ≥1 OR1-OUT
C0830/2
C0831/2
OR1-IN3
FIXED0 C0830/3
C0831/3
AND2-IN1 AND2
C0822/1
C0823/1
AND2-IN2 & AND2-OUT
C0822/2
C0823/2
AND2-IN3
FIXED1 C0822/3
C0823/3
Fig. 3−5 Example of a configuration
Structure of the processing table for the configuration example of Fig. 3−5:
1. DIGIN does not have to be entered into the processing table
2. The first FB is AND1, since it receives its input signals from DIGIN and only has successors.
3. The second FB is OR1, since its signal source is the output of AND1 (predecessor). This
means that the output signal in AND1 must be generated first, before it can be processed in
OR1. At the same time, OR1 has a successor. This means that OR1 must be entered in the
processing table before the successor.
4. The third FB is AND2, since it has a predecessor (see 3.)

Function library
5. The entries in C0465 are:

– Position 11: OR1 10550
This example was started with position 10, because these positions are not assigned in the default
setting.
FBs need not to be entered into the processing table one after the other. Empty positions in the
processing table are permissible.
Tip!
It is also possible that other FBs are entered between the FBs listed in the example.
FBs which do not have to be entered into the processing table

The following signal sources are always executed and do not have to be entered into the processing
table:
l AIF−IN
l CANx−IN
l DIGIN
l DIGOUT
l FCODE (all free codes)
l MCTRL
l fixed signal sources (FIXED0, FIXED0%, etc.)
Frequent faults in the configuration

Malfunction Cause Remedy
FB does not supply an output signal FB was not entered into the processing table Enter FB
C0465
FB only supplies constant signals FB was deleted from or overwritten in the Enter FB again, possibly under a different
procesing table C0465. subcode (position)
The output signal does not arrive at the No connection between the FBs Make connection (from the view of the next
following FB. FB) via the configuration code (CFG)
FB cannot be entered in the table C0465 Residual process time is too short (see Remove FBs not used (e.g. inputs and outputs
C0466) not used)
In networked drives, functions may be
relocated to other controllers
The controller outputs internally calculated FBs are processed in an incorrect sequence Adapt processing table under C0465 to the
signals with a delay signal flow

Function library
Function blocks
3.2 Function blocks
Function block Description CPU time Used in basic configuration C0005

[s] 1000 10000 11000 12000
ABS1 Absolute value generator 3−37 4
ADD1 Addition block 3−38 8
ADDPHD1 Addition block 3−39 9
AIF−IN Fieldbus 3−40 60
AIF−OUT Fieldbus 3−43 56
AIN1 Analog input X6/1, X6/2 3−45 10
AIN2 Analog input X6/3, X6/4 28
AND1 Logic AND, block 1
AND4 Logic AND, block 4 6
AND5 Logic AND, block 5 3−47
8
ANEG1 Analog inverter 1 3−52 3
ANEG2 Analog inverter 2
AOUT1 Analog output X6/62 3−53 12
AOUT2 Analog output X6/63
ARIT1 Arithmetic block 1 3−55 11
ARIT2 Arithmetic block 2
ARITPH1 32−bit arithmetic block 1
3−56 15
3−59 4
BRK Triggering of holding brake 3−61 15
CAN−IN2 System bus 3−66 −
CAN−OUT2 System bus 3−66 56
CCTRL Setpoint conditioning 3−67 30
CCTRL2 Setpoint conditioning 3−74 45
CDATA Profile data conditioning 3−20 140
CERR Following error monitoring 3−82 15
CLUTCH1 Virtual clutch 1 3−85 47
CMP1 Comparator 1
15
CMP2 Comparator 2 3−103
CMP3 Comparator 3 15

Function library
Function blocks

[s] 1000 10000 11000 12000
CONV1 Conversion of analog signals
CONV2 Conversion of analog signals
CONV3 Conversion of speed signals to analog signals 3−108 8
CONV4 Conversion of speed signals to analog signals
CONV5 Conversion of analog signals to speed signals
CONVAD1 Analog/digital converter 1 3−112 4
CONVAD2 Analog/digital converter 2
CONVAPH1 Analog/angle converter 1 3−114 31
CONVPHA1 Angle/analog converter 1 3−115 6
CONVPHD1 Conversion of stretch factor 3−120 50
CONVPHPH1 Angle converter 1 3−122 80
CONVPHPHD1 Conversion of angle change to speed 3−123 27
CONVPHPHD2 Conversion of angle change to speed 3−124 7
CONVPP1 32 bit / 16 bit conversion 3−126 55
CSEL1 Profile selection 3−127 10
CURVE1 Characteristic function 3−129 15
CURVEC Characteristic function 3−132 75
DB1 Dead band 3−136 7
DCTRL Device control 3−137 −
DFIN Digital frequency input 3−141 5
DFOUT Digital frequency output 3−144 35
DFRFG1 Digital frequency ramp function generator 3−148 40
DFSET Digital frequency processing 3−154 85
3−158 9
DIGIN Input terminals X5/E1…X5/E5 3−161 −
DIGOUT Output terminals X5/A1…X5/A4 3−162 −
DT1 Derivative−action element 3−163 12
EXTPOL1 Extrapolation 3−164 5
EXTPOL2 Extrapolation 3−167 10
FCNT1 Free piece counter, block 1 3−170 11
FDO Free digital outputs 3−172 −
3−174 4
FIXSET1 Fixed setpoints 3−179 9
3−181 6
GEARCOMP Gearbox torsion 3−186 1
LIM1 Limiter 3−187 5
LIMPHD1 Speed limitation 3−188 12
MCTRL Servo control 3−190 −
MFAIL Mains failure control 3−199 40
MLP Motor phase failure 3−210 30
MONIT Monitoring 3−211 −
MPOT1 Motor potentiometer 3−212 20
MSEL1 Master selection 3−215 12
MSEL2 Master selection 3−215 15
NOT1 Logic NOT, block1
NOT3 Logic NOT, block3 3−218 4

Function library
Function blocks

[s] 1000 10000 11000 12000
NSET Speed setpoint conditioning 3−220 70
OR1 Logic OR, block 1
OR3 Logic OR, block 3 6
OR4 Logic OR, block 4 3−226
8
OSC Oscilloscope function 3−230 70
PCTRL1 Process controller 3−234 58
PHADD1 32−bit addition block 3−237 10
PHCMP1 Comparator
PHCMP2 Comparator 3−238 8
PHCMP3 Comparator
PHDIFF1 32 bit setpoint/act. value comparison 3−240 10
PHDIV1 Conversion 3−241 8
PHINT1 Angle integrator
7
PHINT2 Angle integrator
3−242
PHINT3 Angle integrator 10
PHINT4 Angle integrator 11
PHINT5 Master angle integrator 3−249 60
PSAVE1 Position memory 3−255 10
PT1−1 1st order delay element 3−257 8
PT1−2 1st order delay element 3−258 16
CW/CCW/Q QSP / setpoint inversion 3−260 8
REFC Homing function 3−261 100
RFG1 Ramp function generator 3−268 16
RFGPH1 Ramp function generator for angle signals 3−270 40
RFGPH2 Profile generator (ramp function generator for 32
angle signals)
3−275
RFGPH3 Profile generator (ramp function generator for 16
angle signals)
S&H1 Sample and Hold 3−281 4
SELPH1 Angle selection, block 1
3−282 6
SELPH2 Angle selection, block 2
SPC1 Switch points 80
3−284
SPC2 Switch points 130
SRFG1 S−shape ramp function generator 3−290 15
STAT Output of digital status signals 3−292 −
STATE−BUS Control of a drive network 3−293 −
STORE1 Storage block 1 3−294 35
STORE2 Storage block 2 3−297 20
STORE3 Shift register 3−298 10
3−305
SWPH1 Angle changeover
3−303 4
SWPH2 Angle changeover
SWPHD1 Digital frequency changeover switch
3−304 4
SWPHD2 Digital frequency changeover switch
3−314 7
VMAS1 Virtual master 3−317 20

Function library
Function blocks

[s] 1000 10000 11000 12000
VTPCSC Cam positioning control 3−321 45
WELD1 Welding bar control 3−323 20
YSET1 Stretching, compression, offset in Y direction 3−330 30
Code Description CPU time Used in basic configuration C0005

[s] 1000 10000 11000 12000
FCODE 17 Qmin −
FCODE26/1 AIN Offset
FCODE26/2 AIN offset
FCODE27/1 AIN gain
FCODE27/2 AIN gain
FCODE32 Gearbox factor (numerator)
FCODE 37 Setpoint selection (rpm)
FCODE 108/1 AOUT gain
FCODE 108/2 AOUT gain
FCODE 109/1 AOUT offset
FCODE 109/2 AOUT offset
FCODE 141 Main setpoint
FCODE250 1 bit digital
FCODE 470/1 Bits 0 ... 7 %
FCODE 470/2 Bits 8 ... 15 %
FCODE 470/3 Bits 16 ... 23 %
FCODE 470/4 Bits 24 ... 31 %
FCODE 471 32 bits digital
FCODE 472/1 Analog − %
FCODE 472/2
FCODE 472/3
FCODE 472/4
FCODE 472/5
FCODE 472/6
FCODE 472/7
FCODE 472/8
FCODE 472/9
FCODE 472/10
FCODE 472/11
FCODE 472/12
FCODE 472/13
FCODE 472/14
FCODE 472/15
FCODE 472/16
FCODE 472/17
FCODE 472/18
FCODE 472/19
FCODE 472/20
FCODE 473/1 Analog − absolute
FCODE 473/2
FCODE 473/3
FCODE 473/4
FCODE 473/5
FCODE 473/6
FCODE 473/7

Function library
Function blocks

[s] 1000 10000 11000 12000
FCODE 473/8
FCODE 473/9
FCODE 473/10
FCODE 474/1 Angle
FCODE 474/2
FCODE 474/3
FCODE 474/4
FCODE 474/5
FCODE 472/6
FCODE 474/7
FCODE 474/8
FCODE 474/9
FCODE 474/10
FCODE 475/1 Speed/digital frequency
FCODE 475/2
FCODE 475/3
FCODE 475/4
FCODE 475/5
FCODE 1476/1 Master value [m_units]
FCODE 1476/2
FCODE 1476/3
FCODE 1476/4
FCODE 1476/5
FCODE 1476/6
FCODE 1476/7
FCODE 1476/8
FCODE 1476/9
FCODE 1476/10
FCODE 1476/11
FCODE 1476/12
FCODE 1476/13
FCODE 1476/14
FCODE 1476/15
FCODE 1476/16
FCODE 1477/1 Actual value [s_units]
FCODE 1477/2
FCODE 1477/3
FCODE 1477/4
FCODE 1477/5
FCODE 1477/6
FCODE 1477/7
FCODE 1477/8
FCODE 1477/9
FCODE 1477/10
FCODE 1477/11
FCODE 1477/12
FCODE 1477/13
FCODE 1477/14
FCODE 1477/15
FCODE 1477/16
FCODE 1478/1 [z_units]
FCODE 1478/2
FCODE 1478/3
FCODE 1478/4

Function library
Function blocks

[s] 1000 10000 11000 12000
FCODE 1478/5
FCODE 1478/6

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.3 Function block CDATA
Purpose
CDATA is a profile generator especially made for cam profile applications. Up to 8 different profiles
can be managed.
C 1 3 0 9 C D A T A
C D A T A -A C T C A M
C D A T A -E R R -N R
C T R L
C D A T A -B U S Y
C D A T A -S E L
C 1 3 2 0 /3 0 C D A T A -B U S Y -L E N X
C 1 3 2 1 /3
1 C D A T A -L O A D -B U S Y
C 1 3 1 1 C 1 3 1 2
C D A T A -L O A D -R D Y
C D A T A -S E L -C A M -M O D E
C 1 3 2 2 /6 C D A T A -L O A D -E R R
C 1 3 2 3 /6
C D A T A -L O A D -E R R -N R
C D A T A -H O L D C u rv e
C 1 3 2 2 /6
D a ta C D A T A -C H K -E R R
C 1 3 2 3 /6
m e m o ry 0 C D A T A -C H K -B U S Y
C D A T A -C Y C L E
C 1 3 2 2 /1 1 C D A T A -X O
C 1 3 2 3 /1
C 1 3 0 0 C D A T A -X < 0
C D A T A -R E S E T 2
C 1 3 2 2 /2
C D A T A -X > X M A X
C 1 3 2 3 /2 C 1 3 0 3 /2 C 1 3 0 4
D a ta 3
C D A T A -S E C 1
C 1 3 0 5 /x C 1 3 0 6 a n a ly s is 4
C D A T A -L O A D C D A T A -S E C 2
C 1 3 2 2 /7 5
& C D A T A -S E C 3
C 1 3 2 3 /7 R S P C 1 3 1 7
C 1 3 0 1 /x
C D A T A -T E A C H 6 C D A T A -S E C 4
C 1 3 2 2 /1 3 C 1 3 1 5 /x
C 1 3 2 3 /1 3
7 C D A T A -S E C 5
C 1 3 1 6 /x
C D A T A -R E L -S E L C D A T A -X O -C Y C L E
C 1 3 2 2 /3
C 1 3 2 3 /3 C D A T A -T E A C H -B U S Y
C D A T A -T E A C H -A C T IV E
C D A T A -Y IN
C 1 3 2 4 /6 C D A T A -A C T L E N
C 1 3 2 5 /6 C 1 3 3 8 C D A T A -L E N 1
C 1 3 2 4 /7 C D A T A -O F F S -X IN
C D A T A -L E N 2
C 1 3 2 5 /7 C 1 3 3 2
0 + C D A T A -L E N 3
C 1 3 2 4 /2 C D A T A -X IN
C D A T A -L E N 4
C 1 3 2 5 /2
C D A T A -X O F F S + C D A T A -L E N 5
C 1 3 2 4 /3
C 1 3 2 5 /3 + C D A T A -Y O U T
C D A T A -X -S T A R T C 1 3 3 4 C 1 3 3 0
C 1 3 2 4 /3 C 1 2 9 5 In te r - C D A T A -N -S Y N C H
C 1 3 2 5 /3 C 1 2 9 7 p o la tio n C D A T A -N O U T
C D A T A -X R E S E T C 1 3 1 4
C 1 3 2 2 /4 C 1 3 1 3
C D A T A -Y E N D
C 1 3 2 3 /4
C D A T A -D F IN C D A T A -Y O U T -C Y C L E
C 1 3 2 6 /1
C 1 3 2 7 /1
-
C 1 3 3 0 /2
C D A T A -X F A C T
C 1 3 2 0 /2 C D A T A -X -A C T
C 1 3 2 1 /2
C 1 2 9 6 C 1 3 2 9
1
0
0 C D A T A -X -N O U T
C D A T A -T P -S P E E D -L IM 1 C D A T A -IN IT -N O U T
C 1 3 2 6 /2
C D A T A -IN IT -X -N O U T
C 1 3 2 7 /2
C D A T A -T P -S Y N C -B U S Y C D A T A -X P O S
C D A T A -T P -P O S
C 1 3 2 4 /3
C 1 3 3 3
C 1 3 2 5 /3
C D A T A -T P -D IS A B L E
C 1 3 2 2 /1 4
C 1 3 2 3 /1 4
C D A T A -X -T P /E 5
C 1 3 2 2 /8
C 1 3 2 3 /8 C 1 3 3 1 /1 C D A T A -X -D IF F
C D A T A -X -T P C D A T A -T P -D IF F
C 1 3 2 2 /5 0
C 1 3 2 3 /5 C 1 3 2 9 /3
C 0 4 3 0 /5 1
0 T P -C T R L C D A T A -T P -D IS T
X 5 /E 5 C 1 3 2 9 /4
1
C D A T A -T P -S Y N C -B U S Y
C D A T A -T P -E D G E -S E L E C T
C 1 3 2 2 /1 6 C D A T A -T P -R E C O G N
C 1 3 2 3 /1 6
FB_cdata
Fig. 3−6 Function block CDATA

Function library
Function blocks
Signal Source Note

Name Typ DIS DIS format CFG List
e
CDATA−SEL a C1321/3 dec [abs] C1320/3 1 Profile selection, 0 = profile 0 (1st profile)
CDATA−SEL−CAM−MODE d C1323/15 bin C132215 2 HIGH: profile changeover while travelling the profile. Hence, clutch functions can
be implemented via profiles.
CDATA−HOLD d C1323/6 bin C1322/6 2 HIGH: prevents profile switching, input has priority over CDATA−RESET
CDATA−CYCLE d C1323/1 bin C1322/1 2 Automatic profile switching
LOW: profile selection from input CDATA−SEL is active
HIGH: the profiles from C1311 and C1312 are cyclically processed
CDATA−RESET d C1323/2 bin C1322/2 2 If CDATA−RESET = HIGH and CDATA−CYCLE = LOW, the input CDATA−SEL is
evaluated immediately
If CDATA−RESET = HIGH and CDATA−CYCLE = HIGH, the profile from C1311 is
processed
CDATA−LOAD d C1323/7 bin C1322/7 2 Loaded profiles accepted with LOW−HIGH edge
CDATA−TEACH d C1323/13 bin C1322/13 2 Teach function, contact Lenze
CDATA−REL−SEL d C1323/3 bin C1322/3 2 HIGH: feed function active (relative positioning)
CDATA−YIN ph C1325/6 dec [inc] C1324/6 3 Input for the teach function, contact Lenze
CDATA−OFFS−XIN ph C1325/7 dec [inc] C1324/7 3 Offset on input CDATA−XIN if C1338 = 1 has been selected
CDATA−XIN ph C1325/2 dec [inc] C1324/2 3 Input for master value position if C1332 = 1
CDATA−XOFFS ph C1325/3 dec [inc] C1324/3 3 Input for offset in X direction (only if C1332 = 0)
CDATA−X−START ph C1325/1 dec [inc] C1324/1 3 Input for the profile starting position on the X axis
CDATA−X−RESET d C1323/4 bin C1322/4 2 HIGH: sets the master value integrator to the value at input CDATA−X−START
CDATA−DFIN phd C1327/1 dec [rpm] C1326/1 4 Input for digital frequency if C1332 = 0
CDATA−XFACT a C1321/2 dec [%] C1320/2 1 Stretching/compression factor
+100 % = no compression/stretching, >100 % = compression,
<100 % = stretching
CDATA−TP−SPEED−LIM phd C1327/2 dec [rpm] C1326/2 4 Selection of a compensation speed. Input is activated via C1296.
It is impermissible to select constant values, e.g. via free codes (FCODE).
CDATA−TP−POS ph C1325/4 dec [inc] C1324/4 3 Touch probe position of the master value (only if C1332 = 0)
CDATA−TP−DISABLE d C1323/14 C1322/14 HIGH: suppression of touch probe
CDATA−X−TP/E5 d C1323/8 − − − Selection of the touch probe source (only for synchronisation)
LOW: source CDATA−X−TP
HIGH: terminal X5/E5
CDATA−X−TP d C1323/5 bin C1322/5 2 LOW−HIGH edge sets master value integrator to position of input CDATA−TP−POS
CDATA−TP−EDGE−SELECT d C1323/16 bin C1322/16 2 LOW: HIGH−LOW edge of the input signal at X5/E4 is evaluated.
HIGH: LOW−HIGH edge of the input signal at X5/E5 is evaluated.
CDATA−ACTCAM a Output of the active profile
CDATA−ERR−NR a Display of the error number from the teach function
CDATA−BUSY d LOW−HIGH edge: the interpolation point distribution is not optimal, select fewer
points
CDATA−BUSY−LENx d HIGH: CDATA−LENx and CDATA−Y−END are not valid and are being determined at
present (e.g. profile switching)
CDATA−LOAD−BUSY d HIGH: new profile data is being accepted at present, the controller is inhibited
(only if input CDATA−LOAD = HIGH)
CDATA−LOAD−RDY d Handshake signal for reloading profiles
CDATA−LOAD−ERR d HIGH: error in the current profile at check via C0500
CDATA−LOAD−ERR−NR d HIGH: error in the current profile at check via C0500
CDATA−CHK−ERR d HIGH: the checksum transferred to C0509 does not correspond to the profile data
CDATA−CHK−BUSY d HIGH: profile checksum checking is active and not yet completed
CDATA−X0 d LOW−HIGH edge: zero crossing of the master value integrator
CDATA−X<0 d HIGH: number range exceeded in X direction
CDATA−X>XMAX d HIGH: number range exceeded in X direction
CDATA−SEC11) d HIGH: section 1 active
CDATA−X0−CYCLE d LOW−HIGH edge:zero crossing of the master value integrator when a profile cycle
from C1311 and C1312 is processed.
CDATA−TEACH−BUSY d Teach function, contact Lenze
CDATA−TEACH−ACTIVE d Teach function, contact Lenze

Function library
Function blocks
Signal Source Note

Name Typ DIS DIS format CFG List
e
CDATA−ACTLEN ph Output of the actual master value clock pulse length (65536 inc. = 1 encoder rev.)
CDATA−LEN11) ph Output of the actual X length of section 1 of the selected profile (65536 inc. = 1
encoder rev.)
encoder rev.)
encoder rev.)
CDATA−LEN41) ph Output of the actual X length of section 4 of the selected cam profile (65536 inc =
1 encoder rev.)
CDATA−LEN51) ph Output of the actual X length of section 5 of the selected cam profile (65536 inc =
1 encoder rev.)
CDATA−YOUT ph C1334 Drive setpoint position (65536 inc. = 1 motor revolution)
C1330/1
CDATA−N−SYNCH phd Link for synchronised compression/stretching
CDATA−NOUT phd Drive setpoint speed
For the "stretching and compression" function you have to preselect the limitation
of the output signal in C1295.
Stretching and compression 100 %
– Set C1295 = 0: the output signal is limited to ±29999 rpm (Lenze setting).
Stretching and compression 100 %
– Set C1295 = 1: the output signal is limited to ±14999 rpm.
CDATA−Y−END ph Y end value of the actual profile (65536 inc. = 1 motor revolution)
CDATA−YOUT−CYCLE ph C1330/2 Current value of the drive setpoint position within the limits of the profile
(65536 inc. = 1 motor revolution)
CDATA−X−ACT ph C1329/1 Current position of the master shaft / master angle
CDATA−X−NOUT phd X−axis as speed, without jump back if C1332 = 0 (master value of CDATA−DFIN) is
selected
CDATA−INIT−NOUT d This output refers to the motor. Do not enable the drive after mains
connection before CDATA−INIT−NOUT= LOW!
HIGH: the drive speed does not reach the setpoint defined by the position output.
During this deviation which may last over several cycles, a great position change
is output at the speed output. Increments do not get lost!
CDATA−INIT−X−NOUT d This output refers to the master axis. Do not enable the drive after mains
connection before CDATA−INIT−X−NOUT = LOW!
(for further description see CDATA−INIT−NOUT)
CDATA−XPOS ph C1333 Output of the master value integrator (65536 inc. = 1 encoder rev.)
CDATA−X−DIFF ph Outputs the difference between the integrator and the signal at CDATA−TP−POS if a
touch probe pulse occurs.
CDATA−TP−DIFF ph C1329/3 Touch−Probe mode of cross cutter, current angular difference between TP position
and actual X axis position
CDATA−TP−DIST ph C1329/4 Touch−Probe mode of cross cutter, distance between the last two TP positions
CDATA−TP−SYNC−BUSY d Compensation between TP position and current X axis position active (with
adjusted compensation speed)
CDATA−TP−RECOGN1) d Output is HIGH for 1 ms if a HIGH−LOW edge occurs at X5/E5 and
CDATA−X−TP/E5=HIGH
1) The outputs will not be output when using the absolute data model

Function library
Function blocks
Range of functions
l Select X position for the cam drive ( 3−23)
l Select X position directly ( 3−23)
l Create X position from a digital frequency ( 3−26)
l Change of direction ( 3−28)
l Profile changeover in the middle of the motion profile ( 3−29)
l Activation of profiles stored in the controller ( 3−29)
l Selection of one profile ( 3−30)
l Selection of several profiles ( 3−30)
l Inhibition of the profile selection ( 3−31)
l Online reloading of profiles ( 3−32)
l Stretching, compression, offset of the X axis ( 3−33)
l Synchronised stretching/compression in Y direction ( 3−34)
l Feed drive with profiles ( 3−35)
l Output of important status signals ( 3−36)
3.2.3.1 Select X position for the cam drive

l Select X position directly through
– the absolute shaft encoder (single−turn / multi−turn, programmable)
– upstream master drive
– calculation
l Create X position from a digital frequency ( 3−26)
– Synchronise X position and machine
3.2.3.2 Select X position directly
C1322/3 CDATA−REL−SEL
C1323/3 C1338
C1324/7 CDATA−OFFS−XIN
C1325/7 0 C1332
+
C1324/2 CDATA−XIN
C1325/2
C1324/3 CDATA−XOFFS
C1325/3 +
CDATA−X−START Inter−
C1324/3
C1325/3 polation
C1314
C1322/4 CDATA−XRESET
C1323/4
C1326/1 CDATA−DFIN
C1327/1
C1320/2 CDATA−XFACT CDATA−XPOS
Fig. 3−7 Relevant section of function block CDATA
The absolute X position can be selected via the input CDATA−XIN − e.g. via a bus system:

Function library
Function blocks
Selection of master Note

value
C1332 = 0 Master value source: CDATA−DFIN
Selection of a digital frequency
C1332 = 1 Master value source: CDATA−XIN
Selection of the absolute X position
C1332 = 2 Master value source: CDATA−XPOS
The output CDATA−XPOS is internally switched to the input CDATA−XIN. Therefore, the offset at CDATA−OFFS−XIN is
effective.
CDATA−XIN input Note

mode
C1338 = 0 Without input CDATA−OFFS−XIN
The inputs CDATA−OFFS−XIN and CDATA−XFACT are not effective
If CDATA−XIN > CDATA−ACTLEN, CDATA−X>XMAX is set to HIGH. The master position is internally limited to Xmax.
If CDATA−XIN < 0, CDATA−X<0 is set to HIGH. The master position is internally limited to 0.
C1338 = 1 With input CDATA−OFFS−XIN
For absolute value encoder as master position encoder
If CDATA−XIN + CDATA−OFFS−XIN > CDATA−ACTLEN × 2, CDATA−X>XMAX is set to HIGH. The master position is
internally limited to Xmax.
C1338 = 2 With input CDATA−OFFS−XIN for CDATA−X−RESET
For absolute value encoder as master position encoder
If CDATA−XRESET = HIGH, CDATA−XIN is internally set to 0. CDATA−OFFS−XIN remains effective.
If CDATA−XIN + CDATA−OFFS−XIN > CDATA−ACTLEN × 2, CDATA−X>XMAX is set to HIGH. The master position is
internally limited to Xmax.
Create X axis through master angle encoder

If an external master angle encoder (programmable multi−turn or single−turn absolute value encoder)
is used, the encoder must be adapted to the profile data:
l If possible, use an encoder with system bus (CAN) interface
l Use the following connection to adapt the encoder:
C 1 0 1 0 A R IT P H 1
A R IT P H 1 -IN 1
C A N -IN 1 .D 1 C 1 0 1 1 /1 x ± 2 3 0 -1
C 1 0 1 2 /1 + * A R IT P H 1 -O U T E X T P O L 2 -P H IN C D A T A -X IN
F C O D E - /
A R IT P H 1 -IN 2 y
C 0 4 7 4 /1 C 1 0 1 1 /2
C 1 0 1 2 /2
9300kur017
– ARITPH1: C1010=13, set multiplication

– FCODE C0474/1: 65536/enter encoder constant. (The encoder constant is indicated in
increments/revolution", see data sheet, e.g. with encoder constant = 8192
increments/revolution the following results: C0474/1 = 8)
– EXTPOL2: Should be used to improve the smooth running of the motor.
Extract from the table of attributes:
Code Index dec Index hex DS DA DT Format DL LCM−R/W Operation
C1338 23237 5AC5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa

Function library
Function blocks
Synchronisation of absolute value encoder and profile

In the ideal case, the profile pulse and encoder pulse are identical. But more commonly the case
shown in the graphics occurs:
X
0° 360° 720°
CDATA−OFFS−XIN 0° 360°
Profile pulse
Encoder pulse
In order to adapt the curve profile to the machine, the starting point of the profile can be shifted
towards the zero point of the encoder with the entry of code C1476/x. The profile can be shifted by
max. one profile pulse (+) compared to the encoder.
l Apply offset to the input CDATA−OFFS−XIN. The inputs CDATA−XOFFS and CDATA−XFACT
have no effect!
The pulse lengths of profile and encoder will not be changed!
) Note!
The encoder pulse of single−turn absolute value encoders is 360°. This corresponds
to the number of increments of the encoder constant, e.g. 8192
increments/revolution. Then, the pulse recurs. The process can also be represented
as follows:
l 360° = 1 revolution
l 720° = 2 revolutions etc.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.3.3 Create X position from a digital frequency

The digital frequency incoming at CDATA−DFIN is integrated to an X position. In this operating mode
it can be necessary to synchronise the controller to the master value (see synchronisation of X
position and machine).
l The integrator can be set to and held at CDATA−XSTART with CDATA−XRESET = HIGH.
l At the same time the output CDATA−XPOS is also set to CDATA−XSTART. Thus, the values
pending at the input CDATA−XOFFS are ineffective (see Fig. 3−6). Proceeding with
CDATA−XRESET = LOW
Synchronisation of X position and machine

Due to slipping material or non−integer pulse lengths, the angle difference between master and cam
drive may be constant or even increase. A sensor (e.g. touch probe initiator) can be used to
continuously synchronise the cam drive to the position of the machine master angle.
) Note!
l If the material is slipping, the sensor used for synchronisation should be in direct
contact with the material.
l The sensor should be set to a position where accelerations do not occur at
synchronous running to avoid as many accelerations (positive or negative) as
possible during the compensation phase.This, for instance, always happens
during a rest phase.
Synchronisation of the master axis through touch probe

The master axes synchronisation via touch probe is, for instance, used for mark−controlled cross
cutters. The master value is generated by an incremental encoder or via the digital frequency output
of an upstream controller.
l A synchronisation of the drive and machine measuring system may be required for the
following reasons:
– After mains connection, the measuring system of the controller and that of the machine can
diverge very much. The distance to be compensated in such cases often is very long.
– During operation, slipping may arise in the system (e.g. in conveying belts). During
resynchronisation, the distance to make up is relatively short.
A deviation to the setpoint detected via the touch probe signal (mark synchronisation) is output at
CDATA−X−DIFF. This deviation can be compensated by means of a compensation speed:
l Activating the function of the compensation speed (CDATA−TP−SPEED−MODE):
– C1335 = 0: without compensation limitation (Lenze setting).
– C1335 = 1: with compensation limitation (we recommend this setting).
– C1335 = 2: cross cutter (contact Lenze if you want to use this function).
l Selecting the source of the compensation speed (C1296 is only effective if C1335 = 1):
– C1296 = 0 (Lenze setting): The compensation speed is defined via C1331.
– C1296 = 1: the compensation process is controlled by selecting a profile at
CDATA−TP−SPEED−LIM.

Function library
Function blocks
) Note!
l The CDATA function block does not include a profile generator. The profiles must
be generated via additional function blocks (e.g. RFGPH2 or RFGPH2)
Also see example ( 3−253)
l Do not select constant values at CDATA−TP−SPEED−LIM
(e.g. via free codes FCODE).
Correction of the X position via the sensor

If the sensor switches,
l the value read in at CDATA−TP−POS is compared to the master angle and the compensation
process selected is carried out and
l at the same time the corresponding Y position is output at CDATA−YOUT and CDATA−DFOUT
(caution: the drive follows its position setpoint with the max. possible torque).
C D A T A -X -T P /E 5
C 1 3 2 2 /8
C 1 3 2 3 /8 C 1 3 3 1 /1
C D A T A -X -T P
C 1 3 2 2 /5 0
C 1 3 2 3 /5
C 0 4 3 0 /5 1
0 T P -C T R L
X 5 /E 5
1
C D A T A -T P -E D G E -S E L E C T
C 1 3 2 2 /1 6
C 1 3 2 3 /1 6
fb_cdata_4
Fig. 3−8 Section of function block CDATA
1. Set CDATA−X−TP/E5 = HIGH to activate the function.

2. Connect the sensor X5/E5.
3. Define the edge of the sensor signal which is to be evaluated:
– CDATA−TP−EDGE−SELECT = LOW: HIGH−LOW edge of the sensor signal is evaluated.
– CDATA−TP−EDGE−SELECT = HIGH: LOW−HIGH edge of the sensor signal is evaluated.
4. Enter the position of the sensor at input CDATA−TP−POS (in the Lenze setting, the input is
connected to C1476/16).
) Note!
l For a synchronisation via touch probe, C1335 has to be set to 1.
l The input values at CDATA−TP−POS must correspond to the clock pulse
(CDATA−ACTLEN):
– For a clock pulse of e.g. 360°, only values in the range of −359° ... +719° may be
selected at CDATA−TP−POS.
l Check the linking of terminal X5/E4 in the DIGIN function block. Where required,
adapt the linking to your application.
l When responding, sensors may have delay times which cause a
speed−dependent angular offset. This can be especially annoying at high speeds.
The correction value for the angular offset can be entered in x.xxx[ms] via
C0430/5.

Function library
Function blocks
One−time setting of X position

If slipping and non−integer pulse lengths can be ruled out, the X position must only be set once.
Procedure:
l Set the master drive (machine) to the position applied to the input CDATA−TP−POS.
– CDATA−X−TP/E5 = LOW
l X position is accepted with a LOW−HIGH edge at CDATA−X−TP.
3.2.3.4 Change of direction
C1338
C1324/7 CDATA−OFFS−XIN
C1325/7 0 C1332
+
C1324/2 CDATA−XIN
C1325/2
C1324/3 CDATA−XOFFS CDATA−YOUT
C1325/3 +
C1334
CDATA−X−START C1313 Inter−
C1324/3 CDATA−N−SYNCH
C1325/3 polation
C1314 CDATA−NOUT
C1322/4 CDATA−XRESET
C1323/4 CDATA−YEND
C1326/1 CDATA−DFIN CDATA−XPOS
C1327/1 C1333
C1320/2 CDATA−XFACT
C1321/2
Fig. 3−9 Section of function block CDATA
The direction" indicates the increase of the integrator (output CDATA−XPOS):

– With positive input values at CDATA−DFIN, the integrator runs from 0 to its clock pulse length
(X cycle).
– With negative input values at CDATA−DFIN, the integrator runs from the clock pulse length (X
cycle) to 0.
X X
n=const. n=const.
Xmax Xmax
t t

Absolute value encoder, CW rotation or internal master angle integrator

Absolute value encoder, CCW rotation or internal master angle integrator
Change of direction of rotation for connection at input CDATA−DFIN

(see also chapter 3.2.3.3)
This function is only available for the internal X integrator (C1332 = 0).
The direction can be reversed via code C1314 (see Fig. 3−9).
( Stop!
The input CDATA−XOFFS is not affected by a reversal of the direction under C1314!

Function library
Function blocks
Change of direction of rotation for connection at input CDATA−XIN

(see also chapter 3.2.3.2)
) Note!
The direction of rotation of an absolute shaft encoder connected to input
CDATA−XIN (single−turn or programmable multi−turn) can only be reversed by
changing the attachment.
3.2.3.5 Profile changeover in the middle of the motion profile

By means of 5th order polynomials you can implement a jerk−free, path−controlled clutch function.
For this, motion profiles have to be changed over in the middle of a profile.
Requirements for trouble−free clutch function:
l The function can only be implemented with the absolute data model.
l The profiles between which the changeover is effected must be structured in the same
manner:
– Same clock pulse lengths in X direction
– Same number of interpolation points
– Same distribution of the interpolation points
– Same lift at the changeover point
Activation of the clutch function:
l Set CDATA−SEL−CAM−MODE = HIGH.
3.2.3.6 Activation of profiles stored in the controller

The 9300 cam profiler provides the possibility to use one or several stored profiles for processing a
product.
Depending on the profile(s) selected, the stored data is assigned to the actual master value position
and output.
C1320/3 CDATA−SEL 0
C1321/3
1
C1311 C1312
C1322/6 CDATA−HOLD Data

Profile
C1323/6 memory 0
C1322/1 CDATA−CYCLE 1
C1323/1 C1300 2
C1322/2 CDATA−RESET
C1323/2 C1303/2 C1304 Data 3
evaluation 4
Fig. 3−10 Selection of one or several profiles

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.3.7 Selection of one profile

1. CDATA−CYCLE = LOW: deactivation of the automatic profile switching.
2. CDATA−SEL: Select the desired profile number (see Fig. 3−10).
3.2.3.8 Selection of several profiles

Permissible value range of CDATA−SEL:
l 0 to the number of profiles selected in the GDC dialog ’Basic cam data’ or ’Cam editor’.
) Note!
l Values at CDATA−SEL < 0 are interpreted as 0
l Values at CDATA−SEL maximum number of profiles are limited to the values
displayed in C1300/0 minus 1. Example:
– You have reserved four profiles. Thus, the profiles 0 ... 3 can be selected. If you
enter, for example, the value 5 at the input CDATA−SEL, profile 3 is selected.
The value at CDATA−SEL is accepted

l during operation at zero crossing of the X position.
– It is thus for instance possible to change to a new profile program via PLC without the
usually necessary times required to change the system.
l immediately if CDATA−RESET = HIGH.
Profile processing when the order remains the same

1. CDATA−CYCLE = HIGH: activation of the automatic profile switching
2. Code C1311: Determine initial profile
3. Code C1312: Determine cycle range
– The cycle range is limited by the profile number entered in GDC.
( Stop!
l After, for instance, a fault, CDATA−RESET = HIGH activates the profile selected
under C1311 at CDATA−SEL immediately without waiting for zero crossing!
l In some cases torque peaks may occur and damage the machine.
Example Profiles 2, 3 and 4 are to be processed cyclically:

C1311 = 2 (first profile)
C1312 = 2 (range: 2 further profiles)
Result With CW rotation, the profiles are processed in ascending order (2 3 4 2). When the last profile is reached, the
process starts again with the first profile.
With CCW rotation, the profiles are selected in descending order. When the first profile is reached, the process starts again
with the profile:
First profile + range. In our example: 2 4 3 2 4 etc.
– Profiles 0 and 1 cannot be reached with this setting!

Function library
Function blocks
Profile processing with any order

1. CDATA−CYCLE = LOW: deactivation of the automatic profile switching.
2. CDATA−SEL: Profile selection via this analog input
) Note!
For this purpose, an external control must be programmed in such a way that the
profile number required is available at the input CDATA−SEL at a certain time.
( Stop!
After, for instance, a fault, CDATA−RESET = HIGH activates the profile selected at
CDATA−SEL immediately without waiting for zero crossing!
In some cases torque peaks may occur and damage the machine.
3.2.3.9 Inhibition of the profile selection

l CDATA−HOLD = HIGH
The profile selection and the automatic profile switching can be inhibited by setting the input
CDATA−HOLD = HIGH (see Fig. 3−10). The profile being activated at that time is then processed
endlessly.
The input has priority over CDATA−RESET, CDATA−CYCLE and CDATA−SEL.
Is used, for instance, for rotary tables with target position selection. For this purpose, other function
blocks must be interconnected accordingly.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.3.10 Online reloading of profiles
This function serves to accept and activate reloaded profiles during operation. This function is
available from software version 3.4.
( Stop!
l In the initial range, the motion profiles must be almost identical, otherwise a
compensating movement with the max. possible torque is carried out.
l The function can only be used for master angle/digital frequency with CW
rotation.
l Condition:
– Set code C1307 = 1 (permit online reloading of profiles)
– Set code C1317 = 1 (reload profiles without controller inhibit)
– Set input CDATA−CYCLE = LOW
l Initialisation
– Each LOW−HIGH edge at CDATA−RESET initialises a profile.
CDATA
FCODE-472/1 XFACT ACTCAM DFSET-VP-DIV
CDATA-LOAD-RDY RESET X0 AND1-IN1
AND1 FIXED1 REL-SEL YSET1-SYNCH

CDATA-X0 IN1 OUT CDATA-LOAD AND1-OUT LOAD LOAD-RDY CDATA-RESET
DIGIN1 IN2 FCODE-475/1 DFIN NOUT YSET1-IN
FIXED1 IN3 N-SYNCH YSET1-IN-SYNCH
fb_cdata_1
Fig. 3−11 Interconnection of the function block CDATA for initialising profiles online
fb_cdata_2
Fig. 3−12 Initialisation cycle, displayed with Global Drive Oscilloscope

CDATA−X0, profile zero crossing
This causes the reloaded profile to be accepted. Reloading in the backup memory must be completed by then.
CDATA−LOAD−BUSY
The acceptance of the reloaded profile in the foreground data field was activated via CDATA−LOAD (duration:
approx. 50 ms)
CDATA−LOAD−RDY
Displays that the acceptance was completed successfully. Now, CDATA−RESET = HIGH must be activated.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.3.11 Stretching, compression, offset of the Y axis
) Note!
This operating mode only works with digital frequency preselection (chapter 3.2.3.3),
i.e. CDATA−DFIN must be selected with C1332 = 0.
Stretching / compression
The code C1319 serves to set the mode for stretching or compression. Two modes are used for
differentiation:
Result if input CDATA−XFACT =
C1319 Mode
100 % −100 % >100% <100%
No stretching,
no compression,
0 DFIN @ XFACT reversal of direction Compression Stretching
100% No stretching, (profile is processed in
no compression backward direction)
1 DFIN @ 100% See TIP below Stretching Compression

XFACT
) Note!
l Values < 1% are internally limited to +1% at input XFACT via C1319=1
(compression).
l If you do not want a stretching or compression, connect CDATA−XFACT to
FIXED100% (Lenze setting).
Offset
Use input CDATA−XOFFS to shift the X position by a constant value.
( Stop!
The drive follows this position change with the max. possible torque! This is why
l CDATA−XOFFS should be changed while the drive is in a latch phase or
l a ramp function generator (e.g. RFGPHx) should be used.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.3.12 Synchronised stretching/compression in Y direction
( Stop!
l If input CDATA−X−RESET = 1, the stretching/compression factor must not be
changed. Otherwise the drive may lose the synchronicity.
l If the FB YSET1 is not used, then set C1313 = 0 (asynchronous
stretching/compression).
l Set C1295 = 1 for stretching/compression factors > 100 %.
This function is useful if more than 8 profiles are required for a lift changing process (Y axis) of the cam
drive. The lift can be changed online via stretching and compression. The function is only valid for
the cam drive, not for the master value.
Synchronised stretching/compression is required when the master value and the cam drive must run
absolutely synchronously and the factor must be changed during operation.
CDATA
CDATA-X0 YSET1-SYNCH YSET1
C1354/2
C1355/2
CDATA-N-SYNCH YSET1-IN-SYNCH YSET1-LIM
C1358/2 CTRL
C1359/2 C1350
X9 CDATA-NOUT YSET1-IN YSET1-OUT
C0427 DFIN C1358/1 CCTRL-IN
+ +
DFIN-OUT CDATA-DFIN C1359/1
C1326/1 YSET1-FACT
C1327/1 C1352/1
C0425 C0426 C1353/1
1
YSET1-OFFS
C1477/1 C1356/1 0
C1357/1
C1364/1 C1351
YSET1-RESET
C1354/1
C1355/1
C0034 AIN1
X6 S&H1
1 + + AIN1-OUT S&H1-IN S&H1-OUT
C0570 S&H
2 + +
AIN1-OFFSET C0572
C0026/1 C0402 C0400
C0010 S&H1-LOAD
C0404/1 C0571
AIN1-GAIN C0573
C0027/1 C0403
C0404/2
fb_cdata_3
Fig. 3−13 Connection of the function blocks for the stretching/compression function in Y direction
The figure shows the minimum wiring. All function blocks used to generate the
stretching/compression factor must be entered into the processing table between the function
blocks CDATA and YSET1.
l The function is only active if C1313 = 1.
l The change−over between the stretching and compression factor is carried out during zero
crossing of the profile.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.3.13 Feed drive with profiles

The main characteristic of such a profile is that initial and end value are not identical.
l Rotary table, conveying belt (movement in one direction), material guide
This function is selected with CDATA−REL−SEL = HIGH
X
X

Individual profile
Endless profile
Profile length
( Stop!
The input CDATA−REL−SEL must not be set to LOW with endless feeds.
In some cases torque peaks may occur and damage the machine.
X

Fig. 3−14 CDATA_REL−SEL = LOW of an endless feed

Profile length
Reset CDATA−NOUT
After a feeding process, the traverse path is backed with CDATA−REL−SEL = LOW (signal at
CDATA−NOUT). In the case of long traverse paths, this procedure takes an accordingly long time.
You can set the signal at CDATA−NOUT to 0 directly:
1. Set C1297 = 1.
2. Set CDATA−REL−SEL = LOW and CDATA−X−RESET = HIGH.
– The drive is disconnected from the CDATA function block, and the speed signal at
CDATA−NOUT is reset to 0.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.3.14 Output of important status signals
Display of the current profile section (only with relative data model)
The current profile section is indicated by the assigned digital outputs CDATA−SEC1 to CDATA−SEC5.
Section length / cycle length (only with relative data model)

The lengths of the individual sections are output at CDATA−LEN1 to CDATA−LEN5 in X direction.
Added together they result in CDATA−ACTLEN.
The actual length of a master value cycle is output at CDATA−ACTLEN (image of code C1315/X).
Updating CDATA−LENx / CDATA−Y−END

CDATA−BUSY−LENx = HIGH indicates that the outputs CDATA−LENx and CDATA−Y−END are
updated one after the other. They are not valid for the update period.
Profile processed currently

CDATA−ACTCAM indicates which profile is being processed.
Indication of profile zero crossing

CDATA−X0 signals a zero crossing of the master value. The window width for comparison is defined
in C1309, the window is arranged symmetrically around the actual zero point of the master value.
( Stop!
Observe when setting the X axis position to X0 = 0 within one cycle.
l if X position < 1/2 cycle, CDATA−X0 is not set.
l if X position >= 1/2 cycle, CDATA−X0 is set as for zero crossing.
C 1 3 1 5 /x 0
Y
C 1 3 0 9 C 1 3 0 9
C 1 3 0 9 C 1 3 0 9 C 1 3 0 9 x
X - K o o r d in a te n C 1 3 1 5 /x C 1 3 1 5 /x
X 0
R e c h ts la u f
X 0
x
L in k s la u f
x
9300kur021

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.4 Absolute value generator (ABS)
3.2.4 Absolute value generator (ABS)

Purpose
This FB is used to convert bipolar signals into unipolar signals.
ABS1
ABS1-IN ABS1-OUT
C0661
C0662
Fig. 3−15 Absolute value generator (ABS1)
Signal Source Note

ABS1−IN1 a C0662 dec [%] C0661 1 1000 −
ABS1−OUT a − − − − − −
Function
The absolute value of the input signal is generated.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Adds or subtracts "analog" signal depending on the input used.
± 1 9 9 .9 9 % A D D 1
A D D 1 -IN 1 + A D D 1 -O U T
C 0 6 1 0 /1
C 0 6 1 1 /1 + -
A D D 1 -IN 2
C 0 6 1 0 /2
C 0 6 1 1 /2
A D D 1 -IN 3
C 0 6 1 0 /3
C 0 6 1 1 /3
9300POSADD1
Fig. 3−16 Addition block (ADD1)
Signal Source Note

ADD1−IN3 a C0611/3 dec [%] C0610/3 1 1000 Subtraction input
ADD1−OUT a − − − − − Limited to ±199.99%
Function
l Input ADD1−IN1 is added to input ADD1−IN2.
l The input ADD−IN3 is subtracted from the calculated result.
l Then, the result of the subtraction is limited to ±199.99 %.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.6 Addition block (ADDPHD1)
3.2.6 Addition block (ADDPHD1)

Purpose
Superimposition of several curve profiles.
ADDPHD1
±29999 rpm
ADDPHD1-DFIN1 + + ADDPHD1-DFOUT
C1362/1
+ – ADDPHD1-LIM
C1363/1
ADDPHD1-DFIN2
C1362/2
C1363/2
ADDPHD1-DFIN3
C1362/3
C1363/3
Fig. 3−17 Addition block (ADDPHD1)
Signal Source Note

ADDPHD1−DFIN1 phd C1363/1 [rpm] C1362/1 1 1000 Addition input
ADDPHD1−DFIN2 phd C1363/2 [rpm] C1362/2 1 1000 Addition input
ADDPHD1−DFIN3 phd C1363/3 [rpm] C1362/3 1 1000 Subtraction input
ADDPHD1−DFOUT phd − − − − − Signal is limited to ±29999 rpm
No position loss when signal is limited
ADDPHD1−LIM phd − − − − − HIGH = signal at ADDPHD1−DFOUT is
limited
(Function is available from software
version 3.4 onwards)
Function
l The signals of the cam profiles at the inputs ADDPHD1−DFIN1 and ADDPHD1−DFIN2 are
added.
l The cam profile at the input ADDPHD1−DFIN3 is subtracted from the sum of ADDPHD1−DFIN1
and ADDPHD1−DFIN2.
l The result is output as speed in [rpm] at ADDPHD1−OUT.
) Note!
l The integrated overflow buffer prevents the increments from getting lost when the
signal at ADDPHD1−OUT exceeds the limit of ±29999 rpm.
l The overflow buffer behaves according to the cycle of numbers (32 bits).

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Interface for input signals of the plug−on fieldbus module (e.g. INTERBUS, PROFIBUS) for setpoints
and actual values as binary, analog, or angle information. Please observe the corresponding
A IF -IN
A IF -C T R L .B 3 Q S P D C T R L
A IF -C T R L .B 8 D IS A B L E
A IF -C T R L .B 9 C IN H
A IF -C T R L .B 1 0 T R IP -S E T
A IF -C T R L .B 1 1 T R IP -R E S E T
B it 0 A IF -C T R L .B 0
A IF -C T R L .B 1
A IF -C T R L .B 2
A IF -C T R L .B 4
C o n tro l w o rd
A IF -C T R L .B 5
1 6 b its
A IF -C T R L .B 6
A IF -C T R L .B 7
B it 1 5 A IF -C T R L .B 1 4
C 0 1 3 6 /3
A IF -IN .W 1
B y te 3 ,4
1 6 b its
C 0 8 5 6 /1
1 6 B it
L O W W o rd A IF -IN .D 2
1 6 B it
H IG H W o rd C 1 1 9 7
A u to m a tio n
in te r fa c e X 1 A IF -IN .W 2
1 6 b its
C 0 8 5 6 /2
A IF -IN .W 3
1 6 b its
C 0 8 5 6 /3
A IF -IN .B 0
C 0 8 5 5 /1 A IF -IN .B 2
B y te 5 ,6
1 6 b in a r y
...
s ig n a ls
A IF -IN .B 1 4
A IF -IN .B 1 5
A IF -IN .B 1 6
C 0 8 5 5 /2 A IF -IN .B 1 7
1 6 b in a r y
...
s ig n a ls
A IF -IN .B 3 0
A IF -IN .B 3 1
B y te 7 ,8
1 6 b its
L O W w o rd
A IF -IN .D 1
1 6 b its C 0 8 5 7
H IG H w o rd
AIF−IN1
Fig. 3−18 Automation interface (AIF−IN)

Function library
Function blocks
Signal Source Note

AIF−IN.W1 a C0856/1 dec [%] − − − +16384 = +100 %
AIF−IN.W2 a C0856/2 dec [%] − − − +16384 = +100 %
AIF−IN.W3 a C0856/3 dec [%] − − − +16384 = +100 %
AIF−IN.B0 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B1 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B2 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B3 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B4 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B5 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B6 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B7 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B8 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B9 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B10 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B11 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B12 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B13 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B14 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B15 d C0855/1 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B16 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B17 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B18 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B19 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B20 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B21 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B22 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B23 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B24 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B25 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B26 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B27 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B28 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B29 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B30 d C0855/2 hex − − −
AIF−IN.B31 d C0855/2 hex − − −

Function library
Function blocks
Function
The input signals of the 8−byte user data of the AIF object are converted into corresponding signal
types. The signals can be used via further function blocks.
Byte 1 and 2
Byte 1 and 2 form the control word for the controller. The bits 3, 8, 9, 10, and 11 of these bytes are
directly transferred into the function block DCTRL where they are linked with further signals. The
other 11 bits can be used to control further function blocks.
Byte 3 and 4
form the signal to AIF−IN.W1.
Byte 5, 6, 7, and 8
This user data can be interpreted as different signal types. According to the requirement this data can
be evaluated as up to two analog signals, 32 digital signals or one angle signal. Mixed forms are also
possible.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Interface for output signals of the plug−on fieldbus modules (e.g. INTERBUS, PROFIBUS) for
setpoints and actual values as binary, analog or angle information. Please observe the corresponding
A IF -O U T
S T A T
B it 0
S T A T .B 0
C 0 1 5 6 /1
D C T R L -IM P
w o rd
...
1 6 b its
S T A T .B 1 4
C 0 1 5 6 /6
S ta tu s
S T A T .B 1 5
C 0 1 5 6 /7
1 6 b its B it 1 5
A IF -O U T .D 2 L O W w o rd
C 0 8 5 4 B it 0
C 1 1 9 5
1 6 b its
C 1 1 9 6 H IG H w o rd 0
A IF -O U T .W 1
B y te 3 ,4
C 0 8 5 0 /1
3
C 0 8 5 8 /1
A IF -O U T .W 2
C 0 8 5 0 /2
C 0 8 5 8 /2 B it 1 5 A u to m a tio n
A IF -O U T .W 3 in te r fa c e
C 0 8 5 0 /3 B it 0
C 0 8 5 2 X 1
C 0 8 5 8 /3
0
F D O
F D O -0
B y te 5 ,6
C 0 1 1 6 /1 1
1 6 b its
...
2
F D O -1 5 L O W w o rd
C 0 1 1 6 /1 6 3
F D O -1 6
C 0 1 1 6 /1 7 1 6 b its
...
H IG H w o rd
F D O -3 1
C 0 1 1 6 /3 2
C 0 8 5 3
1 6 b its
L O W w o rd 0
A IF -O U T .D 1
C 0 8 5 1
B y te 7 ,8
1
1 6 b its 2
C 0 8 5 9 H IG H w o rd
B it 3 1
AIF−OUT1
Fig. 3−19 Automation interface (AIF−OUT)
Signal Source Note

AIF−OUT.W1 a C0858/1 dec [%] C0850/1 1 1000 +100 % = +16384
AIF−OUT.W2 a C0858/2 dec [%] C0850/2 1 1000 +100 % = +16384
AIF−OUT.W3 a C0858/3 dec [%] C0850/3 1 1000 +100 % = +16384

Function library
Function blocks
Function
The input signals of this function block are copied into the 8−byte user data of the AIF object and
assigned to the plug−on fieldbus module. The meaning of the user data can be determined very easily
with C0852 and C0853 and the corresponding configuration code (CFG).
Byte 1 and 2
Here, the status word from the function block STAT is mapped. Some of the bits are freely assignable
(see description of the function block STAT in chapter 3.2.91)
Byte 3 and 4
l C0854 = 0
l C0854 = 3
Byte 5 and 6
l C0852 = 0
– The analog signal at AIF−OUT.W2 is output at bytes 5 and 6.
l C0852 = 1
l C0852 = 2
l C0852 = 3
Byte 7 and 8
l C0853 = 0
l C0853 = 1
l C0853 = 2
Example
You want to output 16 digital signals of FDO and the LOW−WORD of AIF−OUT.D1:
l The LOW−WORD of AIF−OUT.D1 can only be output at bytes 5 and 6.
– For this purpose, C0852 is set to 2. The angle signal at C0851 is output at bytes 5 and 6.
l For the digital signals, only the bits 16 ... 31 (bytes 7 and 8) are available (bytes 5 and 6 are
assigned):
– For this purpose, C0853 is set to 1. Bits 16 ... 31 (FDO) are output at bytes 7 and 8.

Function library
Function blocks
Purpose
These function blocks are the interface for analog signals as the
l setpoint input,
l actual value input and
l parameter control.
C0034 AIN1
1 + AIN1-OUT
2 +
AIN1-OFFSET
C0402 C0400
C0404/1
AIN1-GAIN
C0403
C0404/2
Signal Source Note

AIN1−GAIN a C0404/2 dec [%] C0403 1 19504 −
AIN1−OUT a C0400 − − − − −
Special features of AIN1

l A dead band element can be integrated into the output signal at AIN1 via code C0034.
Together with the jumper position X2 (controller front) the function 4 ... 20 mA can be
implemented as a master current value.
l The signal is read cyclically (1 ms).
AIN2
3 + AIN2-OUT
4 +
AIN2-OFFSET
C0407 C0405
C0409/1
AIN2-GAIN
C0408
C0409/2
Signal Source Note

AIN2−GAIN a C0409/2 dec [%] C0408 1 19505 −
AIN2−OUT a C0405 − − − − −
Special feature of AIN2

l The signal is read cyclically every 250 s.

Function library
Function blocks
Function
l The analog input value is added to the value at input AINx−OFFSET.
l The result of the addition is limited to ±200 %.
l The limited value is multiplied by the value which is applied to input AINx−GAIN.
l Then the signal is limited to ±200%.
l The signal is output at AINx−OUT.
AIN−OUT
AIN−GAIN
ÎÎÎÎ
AIN−OFFSET
IN
Fig. 3−22 Offset and gain of the analog input

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
With this function digital signals can be logically ANDed. These links can be used to control functions
or to create status information.
AND1-IN1 AND1
C0820/1
C0821/1
AND1-IN2 & AND1-OUT
C0820/2
C0821/2
AND1-IN3
C0820/3
C0821/3
Signal Source Note

AND1−IN1 d C0821/1 bin C0820/1 2 1000 −
AND1−IN2 d C0821/2 bin C0820/2 2 1000 −
AND1−IN3 d C0821/3 bin C0820/3 2 1000 −
AND1−OUT d − − − − − −
AND2-IN1 AND2
C0822/1
C0823/1
AND2-IN2 & AND2-OUT
C0822/2
C0823/2
AND2-IN3
C0822/3
C0823/3
Signal Source Note

AND2−IN1 d C0823/1 bin C0822/1 2 1000 −
AND2−IN2 d C0823/2 bin C0822/2 2 1000 −
AND2−IN3 d C0823/3 bin C0822/3 2 1000 −
AND2−OUT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
AND3-IN1 AND3
C0824/1
C0825/1
AND3-IN2 & AND3-OUT
C0824/2
C0825/2
AND3-IN3
C0824/3
C0825/3
Signal Source Note

AND3−IN1 d C0825/1 bin C0824/1 2 1000 −
AND3−IN2 d C0825/2 bin C0824/2 2 1000 −
AND3−IN3 d C0825/3 bin C0824/3 2 1000 −
AND3−OUT d − − − − − −
AND4-IN1 AND4
C0826/1
C0827/1
AND4-IN2 & AND4-OUT
C0826/2
C0827/2
AND4-IN3
C0826/3
C0827/3
Signal Source Note

AND4−IN1 d C0827/1 bin C0826/1 2 1000 −
AND4−IN2 d C0827/2 bin C0826/2 2 1000 −
AND4−IN3 d C0827/3 bin C0826/3 2 1000 −
AND4−OUT d − − − − − −
AND5-IN1 AND5
C0828/1
C0829/1
AND5-IN2 & AND5-OUT
C0828/2
C0829/2
AND5-IN3
C0828/3
C0829/3
Signal Source Note

AND5−IN1 d C0829/1 bin C0828/1 2 1000 −
AND5−IN2 d C0829/2 bin C0828/2 2 1000 −
AND5−IN3 d C0829/3 bin C0828/3 2 1000 −
AND5−OUT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
A N D 6 -IN 1 A N D 6
C 1 1 7 5 /1
C 1 1 7 6 /1
A N D 6 -IN 2 & A N D 6 -O U T
C 1 1 7 5 /2
C 1 1 7 6 /2
A N D 6 -IN 3
C 1 1 7 5 /3
C 1 1 7 6 /3
Signal Source Note

AND6−IN1 d C1176/1 bin C1175/1 2 1000 −
AND6−IN2 d C1176/2 bin C1175/2 2 1000 −
AND6−IN3 d C1176/3 bin C1175/3 2 1000 −
AND6−OUT d − − − − − −
A N D 7 -IN 1 A N D 7
C 1 1 7 8 /1
C 1 1 7 9 /1
A N D 7 -IN 2 & A N D 7 -O U T
C 1 1 7 8 /2
C 1 1 7 9 /2
A N D 7 -IN 3
C 1 1 7 8 /3
C 1 1 7 9 /3
Signal Source Note

AND7−IN1 d C1179/1 bin C1178/1 2 1000 −
AND7−IN2 d C1179/2 bin C1178/2 2 1000 −
AND7−IN3 d C1179/3 bin C1178/3 2 1000 −
AND7−OUT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
AND8-IN1 AND8
C1178/4
C1179/4 &
AND8-IN2
C1178/5
C1179/5
AND8-IN3 AND8-OUT
C1178/6
C1179/6
AND8-IN4
C1178/7
C1179/7
AND8-IN5
C1178/8
C1179/8
fb_and8
Signal Source Note

AND8−IN1 d C1179/4 bin C1178/4 2 1000 −
AND8−IN2 d C1179/5 bin C1178/5 2 1000 −
AND8−IN3 d C1179/6 bin C1178/6 2 1000 −
AND8−IN4 d C1179/7 bin C1178/7 2 1000 −
AND8−IN5 d C1179/8 bin C1178/8 2 1000 The input signal is inverted internally (NOT).
The input does not have to be assigned to
FIXED0 if it remains unused.
AND8−OUT d − − − − − −
AND9-IN1 AND9
C1178/9
C1179/9 &
AND9-IN2
C1178/10
C1179/10
AND9-IN3 AND9-OUT
C1178/11
C1179/11
AND9-IN4
C1178/12
C1179/12
AND9-IN5
C1178/13
C1179/13
fb_and9
Signal Source Note

AND9−IN1 d C1179/9 bin C1178/9 2 1000 −
AND9−IN2 d C1179/10 bin C1178/10 2 1000 −
AND9−IN3 d C1179/11 bin C1178/11 2 1000 −
AND9−IN4 d C1179/12 bin C1178/12 2 1000 −
AND9−IN5 d C1179/13 bin C1178/13 2 1000 The input signal is inverted internally (NOT).
The input does not have to be assigned to
FIXED0 if it remains unused.
AND9−OUT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
Function of AND1 ... AND7

l ANDx−OUT = ANDx−IN1 ANDx−IN2 ANDx−IN3
ANDx-IN1
ANDx-IN2
ANDx-IN3
ANDx-OUT
9300kur069
Fig. 3−32 Equivalent network of the AND operation for AND1 ... AND7
) Note!
Function of AND8, AND9

l ANDx−OUT = ANDx−IN1 ANDx−IN2 ANDx−IN3 ANDx−IN4 ANDx−IN5
ANDx-IN1
ANDx-IN2
ANDx-IN3
ANDx-IN4
ANDx-IN5
ANDx-OUT
9300kur068
Fig. 3−33 Equivalent network of the AND operation for AND8 and AND9
) Note!
l ANDx−IN1 ... ANDx−IN4: Connect inputs that are not used to FIXED1.
l Connect ANDx−IN5 to FIXED0 if you do not use the input.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
This FB inverts the sign of an analog signal.
Two inverters are available:
ANEG1
ANEG1-IN ( 1)
ANEG1-OUT
C0700
C0701
Signal Source Note

ANEG1−IN a C0701 dec [%] C0700 1 19523 −
ANEG1−OUT a − − − − − −
ANEG2
ANEG2-IN ( 1)
ANEG2-OUT
C0703
C0704
Signal Source Note

ANEG2−IN a C0704 dec [%] C0703 1 1000 −
ANEG2−OUT a − − − − − −
Function
The input value is multiplied by −1 and then output again.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
AOUT1 and AOUT2 can be used as monitor outputs.
Internal analog signals can be output as voltage signals and be used e.g. as display values or
setpoints for slaves.
C434/1 AOUT1
AOUT1-IN +
C0431 62
+
AOUT1-GAIN
C0433
C0434/3
AOUT1-OFFSET
C0432
C0434/2
Signal Source Note

AOUT1−IN a C0434/1 dec [%] C0431 1 5001 −
AOUT1−GAIN a C0434/3 dec [%] C0433 1 19510 −
C439/1 AOUT2
AOUT2-IN +
C0436 63
+
AOUT2-GAIN
C0438
C0439/3
AOUT2-OFFSET
C0437
C0439/2
Signal Source Note

AOUT2−IN a C0439/1 dec [%] C0436 1 5002 −
AOUT2−GAIN a C0439/3 dec [%] C0438 1 19511 −
Function
l The value at input AOUTx−IN is multiplied by the value at input AOUTx−GAIN.
– The formula for the multiplication is: 100% * 100% = 100%.
l The result of the multiplication is limited to ±200%.
l The limited value is added to the value which is applied at input AOUTx−OFFSET.
– The formula for the addition is 50% + 10% = 60%. The result of the calculation is mapped
in such a way that 100% = 10 V.
l The result of the addition is again limited to ±200%.
l The result of the calculation is mapped in such a way that 100% = 10 V and is output as a
signal at terminal 62 or 63.

Function library
Function blocks
Example for an output value

AOUT1−IN = 50%, AOUT1−GAIN = 100%, AOUT1−OFFSET = 10%
Output terminal 62 = ((50% * 100% = 50%) + 10% = 60%) = 6 V
OUT
AOUT−GAIN
ÎÎÎÎÎ
AOUT−OFFSET
AOUT−IN
Fig. 3−38 Offset and gain of the analog output

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Arithmetic linking of two "analog" signals.
A R IT 1 -IN 1 C 0 3 3 8 A R IT 1
C 0 3 3 9 /1
± 1 9 9 ,9 9 %
x
C 0 3 4 0 /1
y + - * A R IT 1 -O U T
A R IT 1 -IN 2
/ x /(1 -y )
C 0 3 3 9 /2
C 0 3 4 0 /2
Signal Source Note

ARIT1−IN1 a C0340/1 dec [%] C0339/1 1 1000 −
ARIT1−IN2 a C0340/2 dec [%] C0339/2 1 1000 −
A R IT 2 -IN 1 C 0 6 0 0 A R IT 2
C 0 6 0 1 /1
± 1 9 9 ,9 9 %
x
C 0 6 0 2 /1
y + - * A R IT 2 -O U T
A R IT 2 -IN 2
/ x /(1 -y )
C 0 6 0 1 /2
C 0 6 0 2 /2
Signal Source Note

ARIT2−IN1 a C0602/1 dec [%] C0601/1 1 1000 −
ARIT2−IN2 a C0602/2 dec [%] C0601/2 1 1000 −
Function
For both arithmetic blocks the following functions can be preselected:
Code Subcode Arithmetic function Example Note
0 OUT = IN1 IN2 is not processed
1 OUT = IN1 + IN2 100% = 50% + 50%
2 OUT = IN1 − IN2 50% = 100% − 50%
3 OUT = IN1 × IN2 100% = 100% ×100%
ARIT1: C0338 4 OUT = IN1 ÷ IN2 1% = 100% ÷100%
ARIT2: C0600 5 OUT = IN1 ÷ (100% − IN2) 200% = 100% ÷ (100% − 50%)
15 OUT = IN1 % IN2 20% = 200% [%] 60% Remainder calculation:
% here means "modulo" 40% = 160% [%] 60% OUT = IN1 − (n × IN2)
0 = 180% [%] 60% n = integer component of the
quotient IN1 ÷ IN2

Function library
Function blocks
Purpose
The FB ARITPH calculates a angle output signal from two angle input signals.
ARITPH1
Mode ARITPH1
ARITPH1-IN1 C1010
C1011/1
x ±230-1
y
- /
ARITPH1-IN2
C1011/2
C1012/2
Signal Source Note

ARITPH2
Mode ARITPH2
ARITPH2-IN1 C1020
C1021/1
x ±230-1
y
- /
ARITPH2-IN2
C1021/2
C1022/2
Signal Source Note

ARITPH3
Mode ARITPH3
ARITPH3-IN1 C1025
C1026/1
x ±230-1
y
- /
ARITPH3-IN2
C1026/2
C1027/2
Signal Source Note


Function library
Function blocks
ARITPH4
Mode ARITPH4
ARITPH4-IN1 C1550
C1551/1
x ±230-1
y
- /
ARITPH4-IN2
C1551/2
C1552/2
Signal Source Note

ARITPH5
Mode ARITPH5
ARITPH5-IN1 C1555
C1556/1
x ±230-1
y
- /
ARITPH5-IN2
C1556/2
C1557/2
Signal Source Note

ARITPH6
Mode ARITPH6
ARITPH6-IN1 C1560
C1561/1
x ±230-1
y
- /
ARITPH6-IN2
C1561/2
C1562/2
Signal Source Note


Function library
Function blocks
Function
l Selection of the arithmetic function with code ARITPH mode.
l The calculation is performed cyclically in the control program.
l The function block limits the results (see table)
Code Selection number Arithmetic function Limitation Note
0 OUT = IN1 Without limitation
1 OUT = IN1 + IN2 230 −1
ARITPH1: C1010 2 OUT = IN1 − IN2 230 −1
ARITPH2: C1020
3 OUT = (IN1 × IN2) ÷ 230 230 −1 Remainder not considered
ARITPH3: C1025
13 OUT = IN1 × IN2 231
ARITPH4: C1550
ARITPH5: C1555 14 OUT = IN1 ÷ IN2 230 −1 Remainder not considered
ARITPH6: C1560 15 OUT = IN1 % IN2 Remainder output (Modulo)
21 OUT = IN1 + IN2 No limit Without limitation
22 OUT = IN1 − IN2 No limit Without limitation

Function library
Function blocks
Purpose
This FB changes between two analog signals.
This FB enables you to change e.g. during a winding process between an initial diameter and a
calculated diameter.
C0812/1 ASW1
ASW1-IN1 0
C0810/1 ASW1-OUT
ASW1-IN2 1
C0810/2
C0812/2
ASW1-SET
C0811
C0813
Signal Source Note

ASW1−IN1 a C0812/1 dec [%] C0810/1 1 55 −
ASW1−IN2 a C0812/2 dec [%] C0810/2 1 1000 −
ASW1−SET d C0813 bin C0811 2 1000 −
ASW1−OUT a − − − − − −
C0817/1 ASW2
ASW2-IN1 0
C0815/1 ASW2-OUT
ASW2-IN2 1
C0815/2
C0817/2
ASW2-SET
C0816
C0818
Signal Source Note

ASW2−IN2 a C0817/1 dec [%] C0815/1 1 1000 −
ASW2−IN1 a C0817/2 dec [%] C0815/2 1 1000 −
ASW2−SET d C0818 bin C0816 2 1000 −
ASW2−OUT a − − − − − −
C 1 1 6 2 /1 A S W 3
A S W 3 -IN 1 0
C 1 1 6 0 /1 A S W 3 -O U T
A S W 3 -IN 2 1
C 1 1 6 0 /2
C 1 1 6 2 /2
A S W 3 -S E T
C 1 1 6 1
C 1 1 6 3
Signal Source Note

ASW3−IN2 a C1162/1 dec [%] C1160/1 1 1000 −
ASW3−IN1 a C1162/2 dec [%] C1160/2 1 1000 −
ASW3−SET d C1163 bin C1161 2 1000 −
ASW3−OUT a − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
C 1 1 6 7 /1 A S W 4
A S W 4 -IN 1 0
C 1 1 6 5 /1 A S W 4 -O U T
A S W 4 -IN 2 1
C 1 1 6 5 /2
C 1 1 6 7 /2
A S W 4 -S E T
C 1 1 6 6
C 1 1 6 8
Signal Source Note

ASW4−IN2 a C1167/1 dec [%] C1165/1 1 1000 −
ASW4−IN1 a C1167/2 dec [%] C1165/2 1 1000 −
ASW4−SET d C1168 bin C1166 2 1000 −
ASW4−OUT a − − − − − −
Function
This FB is controlled via the binary input. Depending on the input signal, different signals are sent to
the output:
l If a HIGH signal is applied at the binary input, the signal which is applied at the ASWx−IN2
input is sent to the output.
l If a LOW signal is applied, the signal which is applied at the ASW−IN2 input is sent to the
output.

Function library
Function blocks
Danger!
Condition for using the BRK function block
Triggering the holding brake solely via the function block BRK is not permissible!
The safe triggering of the holding brake additionally requires a second switch−off path. Unsafe
triggering creates the risk of severe personal injury and danger to material assets!
Applications with active loads
When the DC−bus voltage increases (e.g. by braking processes), the torque limitation may be
activated via code C0172. The torque limitation becomes active if for instance the brake resistor is
defective or the switching threshold set on the brake chopper or the brake module is not correctly
adjusted.
Code C0172 is a pre−stage of the monitoring function OU" (overvoltage of the DC−bus voltage).
Code C0172 defines the voltage difference to OU causing a reduction in torque. In the Lenze setting,
the torque is reduced to "0" if the DC−bus voltage reaches 760 V (770V−10V):
l OU threshold = 770V (C0173 = 0...3)

– Exception: OU threshold 800 V for C0173 = 4 (see description in code table)
l C0172 = 10 V
l No message is generated.
Only after the DC−bus voltage has decreased below the OU reconnection threshold, the torque is
reconnected.
With unchanged basic conditions the continuously "chopping" drive behaviour may lead to
undefined motions.
Remedy
1. Set C0172 = 0 V
2. MONIT−OU has to generate EEr−TRIP (e.g. by C0871/0 = 15011).
– By this, the standstill brake is engaged via controller inhibit (CINH) if the braking energy
cannot be dissipated.

Function library
Function blocks
Purpose
The FB is used to trigger a holding brake.
Possible applications:
l Hoists
l Traversing drives
l Active loads
BRK1
C0196
BRK1-Nx BRK1-QSP
C0450
t 0
C0458/1 BRK1-OUT
DCTRL-IMP BRK1-M-STORE
MCTRL-NACT
CTRL
MCTRL-NSET2 C0195
MCTRL-MACT
BRK1-SET BRK1-CINH
C0451
0 t
C0459
C0244
BRK1-SIGN SIGN BRK1-M-SET
C0452
C0458/2
Fig. 3−51 Holding brake (BRK1)
Signal Source Note

BRK1−SET d C0459 bin C0451 2 1000 −
BRK1−NX a C0458/1 dec [%] C0450 1 1000 Speed threshold from which the drive may
output the signal "Close brake". The signal
source for this input can be a control code,
a fixed value, or any other analog FB
output.
The input signal is processed internally as
an absolute value.
BRK1−SIGN a C0458/2 dec [%] C0452 1 1000 Direction of the torque with which the drive
is to set up a torque against the brake. The
signal source for this input can be a control
code, a fixed value, or any other FB output.
BRK1−M−SET a Feedforward control torque for releasing
the brake
100 % = value of C0057
) Note!
The internal signals MCTRL−NACT, MCTRL−MACT and MCTRL−NSET2 are
processed as absolute values.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.16.1 Engaging the brake

Purpose A HIGH signal at the BRK1−SET input
activates the function. The output BRK1−SET
BRK1−QSP is simultaneously switched
to HIGH. This signal can be used to
decelerate the drive to zero speed via a t
deceleration ramp. BRK1−QSP
t
MCTRL−NSET2
|BRK1−Nx
Function If the setpoint speed falls below the |
value set at the BRK1−Nx input, the t
output BRK1−OUT is set to HIGH. In BRK1−OUT
order to ensure a fail−safe design this
signal must be inverted at the output
C0195
(e.g. via C0118). t
BRK1−CINH
3.2.16.2 Disengaging (releasing) the brake

Purpose A LOW signal at the BRK−SET input
immediately sets the BRK−CINH output BRK1−SET
to LOW. At the same time the
BRK1−M−STORE output is set to HIGH.
This signal can be used to generate a t
defined torque against the brake. The BRK1−CINH
drive thus takes over the torque while
the brake is released. The signal is only
reset after the time set under C0196 t
has elapsed. BRK1−QSP
t
BRK1−M−STORE
Function As soon as the torque reaches the
value set under C0244 (holding torque), t
the output BRK1−OUT is set to LOW. MACT = C0244
MCTRL−MACT
When the input is reset, a timing
element is triggered. After the time set
under C0196 has elapsed the t
BRK1−QSP output is reset. This signal BRK1−OUT
serves to e.g. release the setpoint
integrator after the brake release time C0196 t
has elapsed.
MCTRL−NSET2
t
Note If an actual speed higher than the value at BRK1−Nx is detected before the brake release time (C0196) has elapsed, the
signals BRK1−QSP and BRK1−M−STORE are reset immediately. The drive can operate in a speed or angle−controlled
manner immediately. If the BRK1−QSP output acts on the QSP control word, then the drive is synchronised to the actual
speed and follows its setpoint.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.16.3 Setting controller inhibit

Setting controller inhibit may for instance be required in the case of a fault (LU, OU, ...).
Function
When the controller is inhibited (CINH), the BRK1−OUT signal is set to HIGH immediately. The drive
is then braked via the mechanical brake.
If the fault is eliminated quickly, i.e. the controller inhibit (CINH) is reset before the actual speed falls
below the threshold value BRK1−Nx, the BRK1−OUT signal is set to LOW immediately. The drive is
synchronised to the actual speed and follows its setpoint.
If the value falls below the threshold, the drive starts as described under "Release brake".
BRK1−CINH
MCTRL−NACT
|BRK1−Nx|
t
BRK1−OUT
t
BRK1−QSP
t
BRK1−M−STORE
C0196 t
MCTRL−MACT MCTRL−MACT = C0244
Fig. 3−52 Brake control with CINH

Function library
Function blocks
BRK1−SET
C0196
t
BRK1−QSP
t
BRK1−M−STORE
t
MCTRL−MACT
MCTRL−MACT = C0244
t
BRK1−OUT
C0195 t
BRK1−CINH
t
MCTRL−NSET2
|BRK1−Nx|
Fig. 3−53 Switching cycle when braking

Function library
Function blocks



Function library
Function blocks
3.2.19 Setpoint conditioning (CCTRL)
) Note!
For the CCTRL and CCTRL2 function blocks, partly the same codes are used.
Therefore you may only use CCTRL or CCTRL2. On the basis of extended functions
we recommend the use of CCTRL2.
Purpose
l Forming the set machine position (CCTRL−PHI−SET) from the set profile position (e. g. from the
YSET1 function block).
l Additional functions like inching/manual jog, reference search (REFC), position override
function with maintaining the set machine position from the cam via a second set machine
position (CCTRL−PHI−SET2).
l Output of the actual machine position (CCTRL−PHI−ACT) after carrying out the "Set reference"
function.
l Touch probe synchronisation of the drive.
l Calculation of the speed and acceleration precontrol.
CCTRL-MRED CCTRL
C1340/2 C1348/1
C1341/2 CCTRL-MOUT
CCTRL-NRED
C1340/1 C1348/2
1
C1341/1 CCTRL-NOUT
0
CCTRL-DFOUT
CCTRL-N2-SET
C1342/3
C1343/3
CCTRL-IN CCTRL-PHI-SET
C1346/1
C1347/1 C1339/1
CCTRL-RESET
C1342/1
C1343/1
CCTRL-Y-END
C1344/1
C1345/1 0
CCTRL-POUT
CCTRL-NSET2 1 -
C1346/2
C1339/4
C1347/2
CCTRL-RESET-N2 CCTRL-PHI-SET2
C1342/6
C1343/6 C1339/2
CCTRL-CLR-INTEG
C1342/7
C1343/7
CCTRL-PHI-ACT
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
C1339/3
CCTRL-SUB-Y-END
C1342/5
C1343/5
CCTRL-TP-POS
C1344/2
C1345/2
CCTRL-TPIN/E4
C1342/4
C1343/4
CCTRL-TPIN
C1342/2
0
C1343/2
1 CCTRL-TP-RECOGN
C0430/4
X5/E4
FB_cctrl
Fig. 3−54 Setpoint conditioning (CCTRL)

Function library
Function blocks

CCTRL−MRED a C1341/2 dec [%] C1340/2 1 Gain for the torque setpoint precontrol
CCTRL−NRED a C1341/1 dec [%] C1340/1 1 Gain for the speed setpoint precontrol
CCTRL−N2−SET d C1343/3 bin C1342/3 2 HIGH: input CCTRL−NSET2 active
CCTRL−IN phd C1347/1 rpm C1346/1 4 Input for the set profile position
CCTRL−RESET d C1343/1 bin C1342/1 2 HIGH: sets set angle = actual angle −> CCTRL−POUT = 0
CCTRL−Y−END ph C1345/1 inc C1344/1 3 Final value of the profile (only required for touch probe)
CCTRL−NSET2 phd C1347/2 rpm C1346/2 4 Input for the second set machine position
CCTRL−RESET−N2 d C1343/6 bin C1342/6 2 Deletes the contouring error if CCTRL−N2−Set = HIGH
CCTRL−CLR−INTEG d C1343/7 bin C1342/7 2 HIGH: Sets all integrators to 0
CCTRL−SUB−Y−END d C1343/5 bin C1342/5 2 Only required for touch probe
CCTRL−TP−POS d C1345/2 bin C1324/3 2 Only for synchronisation via touch probe. Position of the touch
probe sensor in the traversing range
CCTRL−TPIN/E4 d C1343/4 bin C1342/4 2 HIGH: Touch probe is activated via terminal X5/E4
LOW: Touch probe is activated via CCTRL−TPIN
CCTRL−TPIN d C1343/2 bin C1342/2 2 External mark for setting the position
CCTRL−MOUT a 1 Torque setpoint for input MCTRL−M−ADD (torque feedforward
control)
CCTRL−NOUT a 1 Speed setpoint for input MCTRL−N−SET (speed feedforward
control)
CCTRL−DFOUT phd 4 Speed setpoint
CCTRL−PHI−SET ph C1339/1 3 Output of the set machine position
CCTRL−POUT ph 3 Contouring error, input signal for MCTRL−PHI−SET
CCTRL−PHI−SET2 ph C1339/2 3 Output of the set machine position of CCTRL−NSET2
CCTRL−PHI−ACT ph C1339/3 3 Output of the actual machine position
CCTRL−TP−RECOGN d 2 Output is HIGH for 1 ms in the case of
a HIGH−LOW edge at terminal X5/E4 or
CCTRL−TPIN/E4 = HIGH
Function
l Set profile position and second set machine position ( 3−68)
l Homing ( 3−69)
l Set reference once ( 3−71)
l Speed feedforward control ( 3−73)
l Torque feedforward control ( 3−73)
3.2.19.1 Set profile position and second set machine position

At CCTRL−IN, the set profile position is specified. The set machine position is output at
CCTRL−PHI−SET. It is the reference value for controlling the cam.
For auxiliary functions like inching mode, position override function (e. g. approaching cleaning
position) or homing, you can define a second set machine position at CCTRL−PHI−SET2. If a
changeover to the second set machine position is effected, the set machine position at
CCTRL−PHI−SET is maintained and can be approached again after the auxiliary function has been
completed.

Function library
Function blocks
Activating set profile position at CCTRL−IN
( Stop!
Destruction of the machine!
If the outputs CCTRL−PHI−SET2 and CCTRL−PHI−SET display different values when
the set profile position is activated (CCTRL−N2−SET = LOW), this will result in
uncontrolled machine movements due to following errors.
Set the outputs CCTRL−PHI−SET2 and CCTRL−PHI−SET to equal values before
activating the set profile position. You have two possibilities:
l Direct the value at CCTRL−PHI−SET2 to the value at CCTRL−PHI−SET via the input
signal at CCTRL−NSET2.
l Set CCTRL−RESET = HIGH. By this, CCTRL−PHI−SET is set = CCTRL−PHI−ACT.
l Set the outputs CCTRL−PHI−SET2 and CCTRL−PHI−SET to equal values.

l Set CCTRL−N2−SET = LOW.
l The integrator for the second set machine position is reset. CCTRL−PHI−SET2 is set
= CCTRL−PHI−ACT, in order to be able to traverse from the current position when the second
set machine position is activated.
Activating the second set machine position at CCTRL−NSET2

l Set CCTRL−N2−SET = HIGH.
Resetting the set machine position

l CCTRL−PHI−SET = CCTRL−PHI−ACT is set with CCTRL−RESET = HIGH .
3.2.19.2 Homing
There are different possibilities of homing the drive:
l For commissioning, the reference is set once (reasonable for machines with risk of collision).
( 3−71)
l After mains connection, homing is carried out once, so that the drive finds the home position.
Possibilities for carrying out the homing process:
– Via the REFC function block ( 3−261)
– Via the function "Set reference dynamically" (see below).
l Permanent mark registration during running operation (mark synchronisation):
– Synchronising via touch probe at terminal X5/E4. ( 3−70)
– Synchronisation via touch probe at CCTRL−TPIN. ( 3−71)
) Note!
For a faultless homing with the REFC function block you have to deactivate the
touch probe function with CCTRL−TPIN/E4 = LOW during homing. ( 3−263)

Function library
Function blocks
Setting the reference dynamically

This function for instance can be used to traverse to the mark in the inching mode.
A) If you activate the function via the input CCTRL2−TPIN:
1. Set CCTRL−N2−SET = HIGH
2. Define the position of the touch probe sensor on the machine at CCTRL−TP−POS.
3. Set CCTRL−TPIN/E4 = LOW.
4. A LOW−HIGH edge at CCTRL−TPIN activates "Set reference".
B) If you activate the function via terminal X5/E4:

1. Set CCTRL−N2−SET = HIGH
3. Set CCTRL−TPIN/E4 = HIGH.
4. A HIGH−LOW edge at terminal X5/E4 activates "Set reference".
Synchronisation via touch probe at terminal X5/E41

A touch probe signal at terminal X5/E4 is the quickest and most accurate mark registration and is
suited for a cyclic synchronisation.
l For applications without a homing function.
l After mains connection, the measuring system of the controller and that of the machine can
diverge very much. In the majority of cases the path to be compensated is very long.
l For applications (e. g. with conveying belts) an occurring slip has to be compensated by cyclic
synchronisation. In the majority of cases the path to be compensated is relatively short.
Procedure:
1. Set CCTRL−TPIN/E4 = HIGH.
3. Activate the compensation limitation with C1366 = 1.
4. Enter the value for the maximum compensation speed in C1365/1 (Lenze setting=100rpm).
5. A HIGH−LOW edge at terminal X5/E4 synchronises the drive to the set position which is output
at CCTRL−PHI−SET.
) Note!
l For applications with feed the final Y value of the profile must be assigned to the
input CCTRL−Y−END (e.g. by the output CDATA−Y−END). The function is not
suitable for stretching and compression.
l The input CCTRL−SUB−Y−END must be linked with the output CDATA−X0.
l Save the settings with C0003 = 1 and switch the mains voltage off and on again.
– When the mark synchronisation is parameterised, the function block
automatically changes to the "Modulo" or "Limited traversing range" mode.
Only by mains switching the touch probe function is initialised with the mode
selected.

Function library
Function blocks
Synchronisation via touch probe at CCTRL2−TPIN.2

The input CCTRL−TPIN is suitable for a one−time synchronisation and sets the position of the drive
in standstill.
Procedure:
1. Set CCTRL−TPIN/E4 = LOW.
3. A LOW−HIGH edge at CCTRL−TPIN synchronises the drive to the set position which is output
at CCTRL−PHI−SET.
3.2.19.3 Setting the reference once
( Stop!
l If a parameter set is downloaded, C1367/1 is not transferred, as for each
commissioning the actual, current position of the tool to the machine zero point
has to be entered in the code. The position of the actual value encoder (multi−turn
absolute value encoder) depends on the rotor position when the motor is
mounted to the machine, and on the actual position of the tool. A new setting
therefore is required as soon as a drive component is not tied positively anymore.
l If the feedback system is switched over, also the machine zero point has to be
re−entered (the synchronisation always is effected via the feedback system and is
specifically adapted to it).
The function Set reference" only has to be carried out once:

1. Enter the current distance [s−units] of the tool to the machine zero point in C1367/1 (set
reference).
2. Switch the controller off and then on again, in order to reinitialise the profile data.
– After every mains connection, the controller automatically determines the current distance to
the machine zero point, which is output at CCTRL−PHI−SET2 (C1339/2) and
CCTRL−PHI−ACT (C1339/3).
– The profile position is output at CCTRL−PHI−SET after mains connection.
3. Where required, position the drive to the profile via the RFGPH2 function block.

Function library
Function blocks
Frequent zero shifting

Procedure for applications with frequent zero shifting:
1. Disconnect the drive from the profile (CCTRL−N2−SET = HIGH)
2. Carry out function Set reference" via touch probe
3. Set code C1349/0 to 2 (CCTRL−TP−MODE, absolute−value encoder)
4. Set input CCTRL−N2−SET to HIGH
5. Set input CCTRL−TPIN/E4 to LOW
6. Assign the current distance of the tool to the machine zero point to the input CCTRL−TP−POS.
– Enter, for instance, a corresponding value via C1477/x [s−units] or C0474/x [inc].
7. Generate a LOW−HIGH edge at input CCTRL−TPIN and then reset the input to LOW.
– The distance to the machine zero point is automatically saved with mains failure protection
and is again available after mains connection.
Now the drive can be positioned to the profile position via the RFGPH2 or RFGPH3 function blocks.
This function, however, must be configured manually since it is not included in the basic
configuration.
) Note!
l It is also possible to use absolute value encoders without homing function.
l Up to software version 3.3, the absolute value encoder must not have a zero
crossing within the measuring system of the machine. If necessary, the motor
must be turned during the commissioning procedure into the appropriate position
before being mounted.
l From software version 3.4, the zero crossing is considered automatically.
l The following applies to all software versions:
If the encoder is not supplied anymore (mains and DC 24 V are switched off), the
encoder may only be turned within certain limits:
– Single−turn absolute value encoders/resolvers by max. ±179.0 °
– Multi−turn absolute value encoders by max. ±2079.9 revolutions

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.19.4 Speed feedforward control

Via the speed feedforward control the faster control loops are activated earlier. Use this function if
the drive generates a following error (negative or positive) when accelerating.
l Via the input CCTRL−NRED the feedforward control can be decreased or increased
proportionally to the angle setpoint change d /dt.
l Values > 100% increase the feedforward control. If the values are too high, the drive leads or
runs unstable in dynamic processes.
l Values < 100% decrease the feedforward control. If the gain is too low, the drives generates a
following error (drive lags) during acceleration or braking (dynamic).
) Note!
The input value at CCTRL−NRED is processed as an absolute value, i.e. negative
values are interpreted as positive.
3.2.19.5 Torque feedforward control

Via the torque feedforward control the faster (internal) control loops are activated earlier. Use this
function if the drive generates a following error (negative or positive) when accelerating. Where
required, you have to increase the reset time of the n−controller.
( Stop!
The torque feedforward control has a much more sensitive influence on the drive
than the speed feedforward control.
l The feedforward control can be increased or decreased proportionally to the speed change
dn/dt via the input CCTRL−MRED.
– Values > 100% increase the feedforward control. If the values are too high, the drive leads or
– Values < 100% decrease the feedforward control. If the gain is too low, the drives generates
a following error (drive lags) during acceleration or braking (dynamic).
l With codes C1348/1 (numerator) and C1348/2 (denominator), the feedforward control can be
adapted to the inertia of the machine.
) Note!
The input value at CCTRL−MRED is processed as an absolute value, i.e. negative

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.20 Setpoint conditioning (CCTRL2)
) Note!
For the CCTRL and CCTRL2 function blocks partly the same codes are used.
Therefore you may only use CCTRL or CCTRL2. Due to its extended functions we
recommend the use of CCTRL2.
Purpose
l Generation of the machine setpoint position (CCTRL2−PHI−SET) from the profile setpoint
position (e.g. from the YSET1 function block).
l Additional functions like inching/manual jog, reference search (REFC), position override with
maintaining the machine setpoint position from the cam via a second machine setpoint
(CCTRL2−PHI−SET2).
l Output of the actual machine position (CCTRL2−PHI−ACT) after carrying out the "Set
reference" function.
l Touch probe synchronisation of the drive.
l Calculation of the speed and acceleration feedforword control.
CCTRL2-MRED CCTRL2
C1340/4 C1348/1
C1341/4 CCTRL2-MOUT
CCTRL2-NRED
C1340/3 C1348/2
1
C1341/3 CCTRL2-NOUT
0
CCTRL2-DFOUT
CCTRL2-N2-SET
C1342/10
C1343/10
CCTRL2-IN CCTRL2-PHI-SET
C1346/3
C1347/3 C1339/1
CCTRL2-RESET
C1342/8
C1343/8
CCTRL2-Y-END
C1344/3
C1345/3 0
CCTRL2-POUT
CCTRL2-NSET2 1 -
C1346/4
C1339/4
C1347/4
CCTRL2-RESET-N2 CCTRL2-PHI-SET2
C1342/13
C1343/13 C1339/2
CCTRL2-CLR-INTEG
C1342/14
C1343/14
CCTRL2-PHI-ACT
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
C1339/3
CCTRL2-TP-SPEED-LIM
C1346/5
C1347/5
C1735
0 1
0
CCTRL2-TP-POS
C1344/4 1
C1345/4
CCTRL2-TPIN/E4
C1342/11
C1343/11
C1365/1
CCTRL2-TPIN
C1342/9 CCTRL2-ACT-TP-DIFF
0
C1343/9
CCTRL2-TP-SYNC-BUSY
C0430/4 1
0 TP-CTRL
CCTRL2-TP-RECOGN
X5/E4 1
CCTRL2-TP-EDGE-SELECT
C1342/15
C1343/15
fb_CCTRL2
Fig. 3−55 Setpoint conditioning (CCTRL2)

Function library
Function blocks
Signal Source Note

CCTRL2−MRED a C1341/4 dec [%] C1340/4 1 Gain for the torque setpoint feedforward control
CCTRL2−NRED a C1341/3 dec [%] C1340/3 1 Gain for the speed setpoint feedforward control
CCTRL2−N2−SET d C1343/10 bin C1342/10 2 HIGH: Input CCTRL−NSET2 active
CCTRL2−IN phd C1347/3 rpm C1346/3 4 Input for the profile setpoint position
CCTRL2−RESET d C1343/8 bin C1342/8 2 HIGH: Sets setpoint phase = actual phase −>
CCTRL2−POUT = 0
CCTRL2−Y−END ph C1345/3 inc C1344/3 3 Final value of the profile (only required for touch probe)
CCTRL2−NSET2 phd C1347/4 rpm C1346/4 4 Input for the second machine setpoint position
CCTRL2−RESET−N2 d C1343/13 bin C1342/13 2 Deletes the following error if CCTRL2−N2−Set = HIGH
CCTRL2−CLR−INTEG d C1343/14 bin C1342/14 2 HIGH: Sets all integrators to 0
CCTRL2−TP−POS d C1345/4 bin C1344/4 2 Only for touch probe synchronisation. Position of the
touch probe sensor in the traversing range
CCTRL2−TP−SPEED−LIM phd C1347/5 dec [rpm] C1346/5 4 Selection of a compensation speed.
The input signal is active if
CCTRL2−TP−SYNC−BUSY = HIGH and C1735 = 1.
CCTRL2−TPIN/E4 d C1343/11 bin C1342/11 2 HIGH: Touch probe via terminal X5/E4 is activated
LOW: Touch probe via input CCTRL2−TPIN is activated
CCTRL2−TPIN d C1343/9 bin C1342/9 2 External mark for setting the position
CCTRL2−TP−EDGE−SELECT d C1345/15 bin C1342/15 2 LOW: The HIGH−LOW edge of the input signal at X5/E4
is evaluated.
LOW: The LOW−HIGH edge of the input signal at X5/E4
is evaluated.
CCTRL2−MOUT a 1 Torque setpoint for input MCTRL−M−ADD (torque
feedforward control)
CCTRL2−NOUT a 1 Speed setpoint for input MCTRL−N−SET (speed
feedforward control)
CCTRL2−PHI−SET ph 3 Output of the machine setpoint position
CCTRL2−DFOUT phd Speed setpoint
CCTRL2−POUT ph 3 Following error, input signal for MCTRL−PHI−SET
CCTRL2−PHI−SET2 ph 3 Output of the machine setpoint position of
CCTRL−NSET2
CCTRL2−PHI−ACT ph 3 Output of the actual machine position
CCTRL2−ACT−TP−DIFF ph 3 Outputs the deviation between the output signal at
CCTRL2−PHI−ACT and the input signal at
CCTRL2−TP−POS.
CCTRL2−TP−SYNC−BUSY d 2 Touch probe evaluation:
LOW: No deviation measured, or the deviation has
already been compensated
HIGH: There is a deviation between the integrator and
the input signal at CCTRL2−TP−POS that has not been
compensated. The compensation speed at
CCTRL2−TP−SPEED−LIM is activated if C1740 is set to
1.
LOW−HIGH edge: Compensation process completed
CCTRL2−TP−RECOGN d 2 Output is HIGH for 1 ms in the case of
a HIGH−LOW edge at terminal X5/E4 or
CCTRL2−TPIN/E4 = HIGH
Function
l Profile setpoint position and second machine setpoint ( 3−76)
l Homing ( 3−77)
l Set reference once ( 3−79)
l Speed feedforward control ( 3−81)
l Torque feedforward control ( 3−81)

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.20.1 Profile setpoint position and second machine setpoint

At CCTRL2−IN, the profile setpoint position is specified. The machine setpoint position is output at
CCTRL2−PHI−SET. It is the reference value for controlling the cam.
For auxiliary function like inching mode, position override setpoint (e.g. approaching the cleaning
position) or homing, you can define a second machine setpoint position at CCTRL2−PHI−SET2. If a
changeover to the second machine setpoint position is effected, the machine setpoint position at
CCTRL2−PHI−SET is maintained and can be approached again after the auxiliary function has been
completed.
Activating profile setpoint position at CCTRL2−IN
( Stop!
Destruction of the machine!
If the outputs CCTRL2−PHI−SET2 and CCTRL2−PHI−SET output different values
when the profile setpoint position is activated (CCTRL2−N2−SET = LOW), this will
result in uncontrolled machine movements due to following errors.
Set the outputs CCTRL2−PHI−SET2 and CCTRL2−PHI−SET to the same values
before activating the profile setpoint position. You have two possibilities:
l Direct the value at CCTRL2−PHI−SET2 to the value at CCTRL2−PHI−SET via the
input signal at CCTRL2−NSET2.
l Set CCTRL2−RESET = HIGH. By this, CCTRL2−PHI−SET is set
= CCTRL2−PHI−ACT.
l Set the outputs CCTRL−PHI−SET2 and CCTRL−PHI−SET to the same values.
l Set CCTRL2−N2−SET = LOW.
l The integrator for the second machine setpoint is reset. CCTRL2−PHI−SET2 is set
= CCTRL2−PHI−ACT, in order to be able to traverse from the current position when the second
machine setpoint is activated.
Activating the second machine setpoint at CCTRL2−NSET2

l Set CCTRL2−N2−SET = HIGH.
Resetting the machine setpoint

l Via CCTRL2−RESET = HIGH, CCTRL2−PHI−SET is set = CCTRL2−PHI−ACT.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.20.2 Homing
l For commissioning, the reference is set once (reasonable for machines with risk of collision).
( 3−77)
l After mains connection, homing is carried out once, so that the drive finds the home position.
Possibilities for carrying out the homing process:
– Via the REFC function block ( 3−261)
– Via the function "Set reference dynamically" (see below).
l Permanent mark registration during running operation (mark synchronisation):
– Synchronising via touch probe at terminal X5/E4. ( 3−78)
– Synchronising via touch probe at CCTRL2−TPIN. ( 3−79)
) Note!
touch probe function with CCTRL2−TPIN/E4 = LOW during homing. ( 3−263)
Setting the reference dynamically

This function for instance can be used to traverse to the mark in the inching mode.
A) If you activate the function via the input CCTRL2−TPIN:
1. Set CCTRL2−N2−SET = HIGH
2. Define the position of the touch probe sensor on the machine at CCTRL2−TP−POS.
3. Set CCTRL2−TPIN/E4 = LOW.
4. A LOW−HIGH edge at CCTRL2−TPIN activates "Set reference dynamically".
B) If you activate the function via terminal X5/E4:

1. Set CCTRL2−N2−SET = HIGH
3. Set CCTRL2−TPIN/E4 = HIGH.
4. Select the signal edge for the input signal at terminal X5/E4:
– In the case of CCTRL2−TP−EDGE−SELECT = LOW, HIGH−LOW edges are evaluated.
– In the case of CCTRL2−TP−EDGE−SELECT = HIGH, LOW−HIGH edges are evaluated.
5. A corresponding signal edge at terminal X5/E4 activates "Set reference dynamically".

Function library
Function blocks
Synchronisation via touch probe at terminal X5/E41

A touch probe signal at terminal X5/E4 is the quickest and most accurate mark registration and is
suited for a cyclic synchronisation.
By means of the touch probe signal, a deviation between CCTRL2−PHI−ACT and CCTRL2−TP−POS
is measured. At CCTRL2−ACT−TP−DIFF the deviation is always output as the shortest way. The
deviation can be compensated by a compensation speed.
l For applications without a homing function.
l After mains connection, the measuring system of the controller and that of the machine can
diverge very much. In the majority of cases, the path to be compensated is very long.
l For applications (e. g. with conveying belts) an occurring slip has to be compensated by cyclic
synchronisation. In the majority of cases, the path to be compensated is relatively short.
Procedure:
1. Set CCTRL2−TPIN/E4 = HIGH.
– The input values have to correspond to the cycle (CCTRL2−Y−END). For example, for a cycle
of 360 ° only values in the range of −359 ° ... +719 ° may be defined at CCTRL2−TP−POS.
3. Select the source for the compensation speed:
– C1735 = 0: The compensation speed is defined via C1365/1 (Lenze setting).
– C1735 = 1: The compensation process is controlled by selection of a profile at
CCTRL2−TP−SPEED−LIM.
) Note!
l The CCTRL2 function block does not contain a profile generator. The profiles
have to be generated via additional function blocks (e.g. RFGPH2 or RFGPH3).
See also example in fig. 3−205.
l Do not specify constant values at CCTRL2−TP−SPEED−LIM (e.g. via free codes
(FCODE)).
4. Select the signal edge for the input signal at terminal X5/E4:
– In the case of CCTRL2−TP−EDGE−SELECT = LOW, HIGH−LOW edges are evaluated.
– In the case of CCTRL2−TP−EDGE−SELECT = HIGH, LOW−HIGH edges are evaluated.
5. A corresponding signal edge at terminal X5/E4 synchronises the drive to the set position which
is output at CCTRL2−PHI−SET.
) Note!
l The set profile position has to be activated (CCTRL2−N2−SET = LOW).
l For applications with feed, the final Y value of the profile must be assigned to the
input CCTRL2−Y−END (e.g. by output CDATA2−Y−END). The function is not
suitable for stretching and compression.
l Save the settings with C0003 = 1 and switch the mains voltage off and on again.
– When the mark synchronisation is parameterised, the function block
automatically changes to the "Modulo" or "Limited traversing range" mode.
Only by mains switching the touch probe function is initialised with the mode
selected.

Function library
Function blocks
Synchronisation via touch probe at CCTRL2−TPIN.2

The input CCTRL2−TPIN is suitable for a one−time synchronisation and sets the position of the drive
in standstill.
Procedure:
1. Set CCTRL2−TPIN/E4 = LOW.
3. A LOW−HIGH edge at CCTRL2−TPIN synchronises the drive to the set position which is output
at CCTRL2−PHI−SET.
3.2.20.3 Setting the reference once
( Stop!
l If a parameter set is downloaded, C1367/1 is not transferred, as for each
commissioning the actual, current position of the tool to the machine zero point
has to be entered in the code. The position of the actual value encoder (multi−turn
absolute value encoder) depends on the rotor position when the motor is
mounted to the machine, and on the actual position of the tool. A new setting
therefore is required as soon as a drive component is not tied positively anymore.
l If the feedback system is switched over, also the machine zero point has to be
re−entered (the synchronisation always is effected via the feedback system and is
specifically adapted to it).
The function Set reference" only has to be carried out once:

1. Enter the current distance [s−units] of the tool to the machine zero point in C1367/1 (set
reference).
2. Switch the controller off and then on again, in order to reinitialise the profile data.
– After every mains connection, the controller automatically determines the current distance to
the machine zero point, which is output at CCTRL2−PHI−SET2 (C1339/2) and
CCTRL2−PHI−ACT (C1339/3).
– The profile position is output at CCTRL2−PHI−SET after mains connection.
3. Where required, position the drive to the profile via the RFGPH2 function block.

Function library
Function blocks
Frequent zero shifting

Procedure for applications with frequent zero shifting:
1. Disconnect the drive from the profile (CCTRL2−N2−SET = HIGH)
2. Carry out function Set reference" via touch probe
3. Set input CCTRL2−N2−SET to HIGH
4. Set input CCTRL2−TPIN/E4 to LOW
5. Assign the current distance of the tool to the machine zero point to the input
CCTRL2−TP−POS.
– Enter, for instance, define a corresponding value via C1477/x [s−units] or C0474/x [inc].
6. Generate a LOW−HIGH edge at input CCTRL2−TPIN and then reset the input to LOW.
– The distance to the machine zero point is automatically saved with mains failure protection
and is again available after mains connection.
Now the drive can be positioned to the profile position via the RFGPH2 or RFGPH3 function blocks.
This function, however, must be configured manually since it is not included in the basic
configurations.
) Note!
l It is also possible to use absolute value encoders without homing function.
l Up to software version 3.3, the absolute value encoder must not have a zero
crossing within the measuring system of the machine. If necessary, the motor
must be turned during the commissioning procedure into the appropriate position
before being mounted.
l From software version 3.4, the zero crossing is considered automatically.
l The following applies to all software versions:
If the encoder is not supplied anymore (mains and DC 24 V are switched off), the
encoder may only be turned within certain limits:
– Single−turn absolute value encoders/resolvers by max. ±179.0 °
– Multi−turn absolute value encoders by max. ±2079.9 revolutions

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.20.4 Speed feedforward control

Via the speed feedforward control the faster control loops are activated earlier. Use this function if
the drive generates a contouring error (negative or positive) when accelerating.
l Via the input CCTRL2−NRED the feedforward control can be decreased or increased
proportionally to the phase setpoint change d /dt.
l Values > 100% increase the feedforward control. If the values are too high, the drive leads or
l Values < 100% decrease the feedforward control. If the gain is too low, the drive generates a
) Note!
The input value at CCTRL2−NRED is processed as an absolute value, i.e. negative
3.2.20.5 Torque feedforward control

Via the torque feedforward control the faster (internal) control loops are activated earlier. Use this
function if the drive generates a following error (negative or positive) when accelerating. Where
required, you have to increase the reset time of the n−controller.
( Stop!
The torque feedforward control has a much more sensitive influence on the drive
than the speed feedforward control.
l The feedforward control can be increased or decreased proportionally to the speed change
dn/dt via the input CCTRL2−MRED.
– Values > 100% increase the feedforward control. If the values are too high, the drive leads or
– Values < 100% decrease the feedforward control. If the gain is too low, the drive generates a
l With codes C1348/1 (numerator) and C1348/2 (denominator), the feedforward control can be
adapted to the inertia of the machine.
) Note!
The input value at CCTRL2−MRED is processed as an absolute value, i.e. negative

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.21 Following error monitoring (CERR)

One function block (CERR1) is available.
Purpose
Following error monitoring with pre−warning stage.
C 1 3 8 6 /1
C E R R 1 -D IS A B L E C E R R 1
C 1 3 8 0 /1
C 1 3 8 7 /1
1
0 C E R R 1 -E R R
C E R R 1 -P H I-IN 0
C 1 3 8 8 /1
C 1 3 8 9 /1
C E R R 1 -L IM
C 1 3 8 8 /2
C 1 3 8 9 /2
C E R R 1 -W F A C
C 1 3 8 4 /1
C 1 3 8 5 /1 C E R R 1 -W -L IM
C E R R 1 -W A R N
C 1 3 8 0 /2
Fig. 3−56 Following error monitoring (CERR)
Signal Source Note

CERR1−WFAC a C1385/1 dec [%] C1384/1 1 Reduction factor for CERR1−WARN:
+100 % = no reduction
<100 % = reduction
>100 % = increase
CERR1−DISABLE d C1387/1 bin C1386/1 1 HIGH sets CERR1−WARN and CERR1−EER = 0
CERR1−PHI−IN ph C1389/1 dec [inc] C1388/1 4 Input
CERR1−LIM ph C1389/2 dec [inc] C1388/2 4 Switching threshold, the absolute value is generated from the
input value
CERR1−ERR bin Input value CERR1−PHI−IN has exceeded the limit CERR1−LIM
CERR1−WARN bin Input value CERR1−PHI−IN has exceeded the limit
CERR1−LIM × CERR1−WFAC / 100 %
CERR1−WLIM ph Warning limit in inc
Function
l Evaluation of the following error
l Defenition of the following error limits
l Deactivation of the output

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.21.1 Evaluation of the following error

The actual following error signal is generated by the function block CCTRL (output CCTRL−POUT)
and is read at CERR1−PHI−IN (see e.g. signal−flow diagramm, configuration 1000).
In the function block it is compared with the configurable following error limit CERR1−LIM. If the set
limit is exceeded, the following error warning is output at CERR1−ERR.
Input signal Output signal
CERR1−PHI−IN Within the window CERR1−ERR = LOW
Outside the window CERR1−ERR = HIGH
C1380 CERR1−LIM CERR1−LIM C1380
0 CERR1−PHI−IN
Hyst
CERR1−LIM generates a window around 0 inc.
3.2.21.2 Definition of the following error limits

l The following error limit is defined at the input CERR1−LIM.
l The limit for the following error pre−warning is determined via the reduction value
CERR1−WFAC.
– Limit value calculation for the following error pre−warning:
|CERR1−WFAC|
|CERR1−LIM| @
100%
) Note!
The input values at CERR1−LIM are limited to a maximum of 4194300 inc
(4194300 inc = 63.9 × motor revolutions).

Function library
Function blocks

The digital outputs CERR1−ERR and CERR1−WARN indicate if the actual limit values for following
errors and following error pre−warning are exceeded or fallen below.
Enter a hysteresis under codes C1380/1 and C1380/2 to avoid instable behaviour at the change over
point.
C E R R 1 - P H I- IN C 1 3 8 0
C E R R 1 - L IM C 1 3 8 1
I C E R R 1 -W F A C I
C E R R 1 - L IM
1 0 0 %
C E R R 1 -E R R
C E R R 1 -W A R N
cerrerr
Fig. 3−57 Signal behaviour CERR1−ERR and CERR1−WARN
Code Meaning Note

C1380/1 Following error hysteresis
C1380/2 Warning hysteresis
3.2.21.4 Deactivating the output

The output of following errors and following error warnings can be deactivated with
CERR1−DISABLE = HIGH.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.22 Virtual clutch (CLUTCH1)

Purpose
Engagement and disenConnection and disengagement of the X or Y axis.
C 1 4 1 2 /3 C L U T C H
C L U T C H -M L IM C L U T C H -O L
C 1 4 1 4 /1
C 1 4 1 5 /1 C 1 4 1 3 /1
C L U T C H -M -A C T
C 1 4 1 4 /2 C L U T C H -O P E N
C 1 4 1 5 /2 C T R L
C L U T C H -C L O S E C L U T C H -O -P O S
C 1 4 1 6 /1
C 1 4 1 7 /1
C 1 4 1 1 /1
C L U T C H -O L -D E T
C 1 4 1 6 /2 C 1 4 1 2 /1
C 1 4 1 7 /2 C 1 4 1 2 /2
C 1 4 1 0
C L U T C H -P H -S E T
C 1 4 1 8 /1
C 1 4 1 9 /1
C L U T C H -N S E T
C L U T C H -P H -A C T
C 1 4 1 8 /2
C 1 4 1 9 /2
Fig. 3−58 Virtual clutch (CLUTCH1)
Signal Source Note

CLUTCH1−MLIM a 1415/1 dec [%] 1414/1 1 Threshold for "overload" monitoring
CLUTCH1−MACT a 1415/2 dec [%] 1414/2 1 Act. value for "overload" monitoring
CLUTCH1−CLOSE d 1417/1 bin 1416/1 2 HIGH: Close clutch
LOW: Open clutch
CLUTCH1−OL−DET d 1417/2 bin 1416/2 2 HIGH: Activate overload monitoring
CLUTCH1−PHI−SET ph 1419/1 inc 1418/1 3 Set drive position
CLUTCH1−PHI−ACT ph 1419/2 inc 1418/2 3 Actual drive position
CLUTCH1 −OPEN d 1 HIGH: Clutch open
CLUTCH1−OL d 1 HIGH: overload monitoring has responded
CLUTCH1−O−POS ph 3 Position, in which the clutch has been disengaged (65536 inc =
1 motor rev.)
CLUTCH1−NSET phd 4 Speed setpoint for:
Brake drive after command OPEN
Set drive to target position
Set drive to open−position
Function
l Overload monitoring (chapter. 3.2.22.1)
l Disengage clutch (chapter 3.2.22.2)
l Engage clutch (chapter 3.2.22.3)

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.22.1 Overload monitoring

The clutch function can be activated when overload occurs (e.g. torque overload).
Inputs for overload monitoring

l CLUTCH1−MACT
– Assign the actual value of the value to be monitored (e.g. MCTRL−MACT). The input signal is
processed as an absolute value.
l CLUTCH1−OL−DET = HIGH (e.g. assign FIXED1). Activating the overload monitoring.
– CLUTCH1−OL−DET = LOW. Monitoring only sets the output CLUTCH1−OL = HIGH. No entry
is made in the history buffer!
l CLUTCH1−MLIM
– Definition of the monitoring threshold
Overload monitoring is active if

l CLUTCH1−MACT > CLUTCH1−MLIM
– Output CLUTCH1−OL = HIGH (irrespective of input CLUTCH1−OL−DET). The output remains
on HIGH until an L→H edge occurs at the input of CLUTCH1−CLOSE.
– The clutch is disengaged when CLUTCH1−OL−DET=HIGH.
) Note!
Code C1412/3 is used to set a delay time which has to expire before the time when
the overload is indicated.
Monitoring will be reset if the load conditions go back to normal within the delay
time set.
3.2.22.2 Disengage clutch

In contrast to the mechanical clutch, the clutch function CLUTCH1 only causes the drive to be really
disconnected from the master value or profile shape. This serves to brake the drive to standstill in
a controlled way.
l CLUTCH1−OPEN = HIGH (clutch open):
– Input CLUTCH1−CLOSE = LOW or
– Activation of the overload monitoring
l Speed control to standstill (CLUTCH1−NSET)
The output CLUTCH1−NSET provides a corresponding speed setpoint with which the drive is
decelerated to standstill.
The deceleration time can be set under C1412/1.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.22.3 Engage clutch

The function is activated with a HIGH signal at input CLUTCH1−CLOSE.
For the time required to start cam operation again, the function of the speed setpoint at
CLUTCH1−NSET can be configured under C1410.The alternatives are as follows:
l Engage clutch immediately
l Set drive back to open−position, engage clutch
l Set drive to target position, engage clutch
l Latch at setpoint position
After the selected function has been processed the output CLUTCH1−OPEN is set to LOW.
Engage clutch immediately

l C1410 = 0
– The output CLUTCH1−OPEN is immediately set to LOW.
Set drive back to open−position

l C1410 = 1
– The actual position at input CLUTCH1−PHI−ACT is saved when the monitoring is responder
or a HIGH LOW edge occurs at input CLUTCH1−CLOSE.
) Note!
The actual position is lost after mains switching.
A LOW HIGH edge at input CLUTCH1−CLOSE starts a profile generator which can be used to set the
drive back to the open−position.
l Acceleration/deceleration time adjustable under C1412/2
l Max. speed adjustable under C1411/1
l A corresponding speed setpoint is output at −NSET.
CLUTCH1−OPEN is set to LOW when the open−position is reached.
Set drive to target position

l C1410 = 2
A LOW→HIGH edge at the input CLUTCH1−CLOSE starts a profile generator which serves to take
the drive to the target position. The target position must be defined at CLUTCH1−PHI−SET.
l Acceleration/deceleration time adjustable under C1412/2
l Max. speed adjustable under C1411/1
A corresponding speed setpoint is output at CLUTCH1−NSET.
CLUTCH1−OPEN is set to LOW when the target position is reached.

Function library
Function blocks
Latch at setpoint position

l C1410 = 3
The drive remains in standstill until CLUTCH − PHI−ACT = CLUTCH − PHI−SET.
After a LOW HIGH edge at input CLUTCH1−CLOSE
– the output CLUTCH1−NSET outputs the speed setpoint 0
– CLUTCH1−PHI−ACT = CLUTCH1−PHI−SET sets the output CLUTCH1−OPEN=LOW,
– the hysteresis is adjustable under C1413/1.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Position−accurate engagement of the X axis (line shaft) with adjustable acceleration and deceleration
ramps.
CLUTCH2
CLUTCH2-CLOSE
C1416/3
CLUTCH2-OPEN
C1417/3 CTRL
CLUTCH2-SEL CLUTCH2-START
C1416/4
CLUTCH2-DIR-ERR
C1417/4
CLUTCH2-SET CLUTCH2-SET–ACT
C1418/3
CLUTCH2-DIST
C1419/3 C1412/x
CLUTCH2-ACT C1413/2 CLUTCH2-PHOUT
C1418/4
CLUTCH2-NSET
C1419/4
CLUTCH2-LEN
C1418/5
C1419/5
FB_clutch2
Fig. 3−59 Virtual clutch (CLUTCH2)
Signal Source Note

CLUTCH2−CLOSE d 1417/1 bin 1416/1 2 HIGH: Close clutch
LOW: Open clutch
CLUTCH2−SEL d 1417/2 bin 1416/2 2 HIGH: Close clutch immediately
LOW: Wait for position setpoint, then close
CLUTCH2−SET ph 1419/1 inc 1418/1 3 Setpoint position of X axis (line shaft)
CLUTCH2−ACT ph 1419/2 inc 1418/2 3 Actual position of X axis (line shaft)
CLUTCH2−LEN ph 1419/2 inc 1418/2 3 Clock pulse length (X axis)
CLUTCH2−OPEN d − − − − HIGH: Clutch open
LOW: Clutch engaged
CLUTCH2−START d − − − − HIGH: Clutch received command to close
CLUTCH2−DIR−ERR d − − − − HIGH: Error of direction of rotation
CLUTCH2−SET—ACT ph − − − − Output of the differential signal of
CLUTCH2−ACT – CLUTCH2−SET if CLUTCH2−CLOSE = HIGH
The output corresponds to the distance still to be
compensated
The output refers to the set acceleration ramp and can take
several clock pulses
CLUTCH2−DIST ph − − − − Distance required for acceleration
CLUTCH2−PHOUT ph − − − − Output of the "internal" master angle position
The signal refers to one machine pulse (0 ... CDATA−ACTLEN)
Can be used as input signal for CDATA−XIN
The "external" master angle is applied to CLUTCH2−SET. If
the clutch is closed, the "external" and "internal" master
angles are identical.
CLUTCH2−NSET phd − − − − Speed setpoint
Function
l Clutch engagement through ramp function with following synchronous running (chapter
3.2.23.1)
l Direct clutch engagement (chapter 3.2.23.2)
l Clutch disengagement (chapter 3.2.23.3)

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.23.1 Clutch engagement through ramp function with following synchronous running
Xmax

n=const.
t
n
Fig. 3−60 Transition characteristic of a cam drive when engaging the clutch and then running synchronously
After the cam drive has paused − mostly process−related − it can be synchronized again to the process
with a constantly operating master drive with CLUTCH2. At the time of engaging both drives have
synchronous speeds and the same positions.
In Fig. 3−60, the catching−up process is started. The distance required at this time(CLUTCH2−DIST)
is calculated from the following parameters:
l Ramp gradient, code C1412/5 (see Fig. 3−60, )
l nmax of the cam drive
CLUTCH2−DIST is available at the output of the function block and is a measure for the distance still
to be caught up. If CLUTCH2−DIST = 0, the clutch can be closed (CLUTCH2−CLOSE=HIGH) due
to the synchronous behaviour of both drives (Fig. 3−60, ).
) Note!
l Clutch engagement only possible when drive is rotating in CW direction.
l Connect the output CDATA−ACTLEN (function block CDATA) with the input
CLUTCH2−LEN to determine the position of the X axis (master).
3.2.23.2 Direct clutch engagement

The clutch immediately closes when CLUTCH2−SEL = HIGH.
) Note!
Please observe that the command CLUTCH2−SEL = HIGH has priority over all other
commands at function block CLUTCH2.
This function is only suitable for drives at stand still.
3.2.23.3 Disengagement of the clutch

When CLUTCH2−CLOSE = LOW the clutch is opened immediately. The drive is braked to standstill
via an adjustable ramp (C1412/4).

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.24 Clutch (CLUTCH 3)

Purpose
The CUTCH3 function block forms the interface between the external and internal master angle in
synchronous systems. CLUTCH3 has the following features:
l Engaging and disengaging at positive or negative direction of rotation of the master angle.
l Disengaging with standstill at an adjustable target point or with synchronous running to a
specified point.
l Engaging and disengaging in a time−controlled manner.
l Adjustable minimum speed in the disengaged state (e. g. for printing machines).
CLUTCH3
CLUTCH3-OPEN-INSTANT
C1700/1
CLUTCH3-OPEN
C1701/1 CTRL
CLUTCH3-CLOSE CLUTCH3-ACCDEC
C1700/3
CLUTCH3-DIR-ERR
C1701/3
CLUTCH3-TARGET-POS CLUTCH3-INIT
C1702/1
CLUTCH3-ERR
C1703/1 C1706/1
CLUTCH3-DIST C1706/2 CLUTCH3-VEL-TO-LOW
C1702/2 C1706/3
CLUTCH3-ACT-SET
C1703/2 C1707
CLUTCH3-PHI-SET CLUTCH3-PHOUT
C1702/3
CLUTCH3-NSET
C1703/3
CLUTCH3-PHI-ACT
C1702/4
C1703/4
CLUTCH3-LEN
C1702/5
C1703/5
CLUTCH3-LOW-VEL
C1704/1
C1705/1
fb_clutch3
Fig. 3−61 Clutch (CLUTCH3)

Function library
Function blocks
Signal Source Note

CLUTCH3−OPEN−INSTANT d C1701/1 bin C1700/1 2 HIGH: Disengage immediately, reset fault messages
CLUTCH3−CLOSE d C1701/3 bin C1700/3 2 HIGH: Close clutch
LOW: Open clutch
CLUTCH3−TARGET−POS ph C1703/1 dec [inc] C1702/1 3 Specification of the target position
CLUTCH3−DIST ph C1703/2 dec [inc] C1702/2 3 Reserved
CLUTCH3−PHI−SET ph C1703/3 dec [inc] C1702/3 3 Setpoint position of the external master angle
CLUTCH3−PHI−ACT ph C1703/4 dec [inc] C1702/4 3 Actual position of the internal master angle
CLUTCH3−LEN ph C1703/5 dec [inc] C1702/5 3 Clock pulse length (X axis)
CLUTCH3−LOW−VEL phd C1705/1 dec [rpm] C1704/1 4 Specification of a minimum speed with which the
internal master angle is to rotate after disengaging
CLUTCH3−OPEN d 2 HIGH: Clutch disengaged
LOW: Clutch engaged
CLUTCH3−ACC/DEC d 2 HIGH: Signal at CLUTCH3−PHOUT and CLUTCH3−NSET
is accelerated
LOW: Signal at CLUTCH3−PHOUT and CLUTCH3−NSET
is decelerated
CLUTCH3−DIR−ERR d 2 HIGH: The input signals at CLUTCH3−PHI−SET and
CLUTCH3−PHI−ACT have an opposite direction of
rotation
CLUTCH3−INIT d 2 Reserved
CLUTCH3−ERR d 2 General error message from CLUTCH3
HIGH: The process of engaging the clutch has been
started although the disengaging process had not
yet been completed.
The value 0 is applied at CLUTCH3−LEN.
CLUTCH3−VEL−TO−LOW d 2 HIGH: The process of engaging the clutch cannot be
carried out, as the speed at CLUTCH3−PHI−SET is
< 4 min−1
CLUTCH3−ACT−SET ph 3 Differential signal between CLUTCH3−ACT−SET and
CLUTCH3−PHI−SET if CLUTCH3−CLOSE is set = HIGH
The differential signal corresponds to the distance
of the internal master angle still be compensated
until it runs synchronously with the external master
angle.
CLUTCH3−PHOUT ph 3 Output of the internal master angle position
The signal refers to one machine clock pulse
(CLUTCH3−LEN)
The signal can be linked to CDATA−XIN.
If the clutch is engaged, the external and internal
master angles are running synchronously.
CLUTCH3−NSET phd 4 Speed setpoint
Function
l Important notes ( 3−93)
l Fault messages ( 3−93)
l Disengage immediately ( 3−93)
l Minimum speed after disengaging ( 3−94)
l Time−controlled engaging ( 3−95)
l Selection of the disengaging position ( 3−96)
l Selection of the target position in the disengaged state ( 3−97)
l Time−controlled disengaging in target position ( 3−97)
l Time−controlled disengaging at the disengaging position ( 3−99)
l Engaging the clutch at different positions of the external master angle ( 3−100)
l Time−controlled engaging ( 3−102)

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.24.1 Important notes

l A compensation function with an oversynchronous speed for engaging the clutch is not
possible. This function can be implemented via the DFRFG function block.
l The following actions may only be carried out if the clutch is disengaged or engaged. During
the process of engaging or disengaging the clutch, they will result in malfunctions.
– Setting ramps in C1706/1 ... C1706/3
– Altering clutch mode in C1707
– Altering input value at CLUTCH3−DIST
– Altering input value at CLUTCH3−LEN
– Altering input value at CLUTCH3−LOW−VEL
– Altering input value at CLUTCH3−TARGET−POS
3.2.24.2 Fault messages

If a fault occurs, the function block is automatically controlled to the status "Declutch immediately.
The output CLUTCH3−PHOUT is directed to 0 at the ramp set in C1706/1.
Fault messages Cause Remedy Note
CLUTCH3−DIR−ERR = HIGH The master angles at Apply signals with the same Monitoring is only active during
CLUTCH3−PHI–SET and the actual direction of rotation. engaging the clutch.
angle at CLUTCH−PHI–ACT have Check signal combination of
an opposite direction of rotation. the inputs.
Extend the speed window in
C1708/1 if the master value is
troubled or fluctuates.
CLUTCH3−ERR = HIGH The process of engaging the Wait until the declutching process General error for requirements
clutch has been started although is completed. beyond the specification of the
the declutching process had not function block.
yet been completed.
The value 0 is applied at Apply signal of the machine cycle
CLUTCH3−LEN. or the register length. The value
has to be > 0.
l Fault messages are reset by CLUTCH3−OPEN−INSTANT = HIGH.
3.2.24.3 Disengaging immediately

Description
You can use the function for disengaging under normal operating conditions or for disengaging in the
case of a fault.
Function sequence
l Start disengaging with CLUTCH3−OPEN−INSTANT = HIGH.
l The output CLUTCH3−PHOUT is directed immediately to the speed at CLUTCH3−LOW−VEL
along the ramp set in C1706/1.
l In the case of speed variations at CLUTCH3−LOW−VEL, the output CLUTCH3−PHOUT is
corrected along the ramp.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.24.4 Minimum speed after disengaging

Description
For printing units, the drive may not be brought into standstill after disengaging, because the paint
dries up. The printing unit has to continue rotating at a minimum speed.
Function sequence
C L O S E
N S E T
n N
v _ P H I-S E T
L O W -V E L
ti t
T i
O P E N
t
fb_clutch3_02
Fig. 3−62 Path−time diagram: Disengaging process

v_PHI−SET Speed of the external master angle at CLUTCH3−PHI−SET
nN Machine speed
NSET Speed setpoint at CLUTCH3−NSET
LOW−VEL The minimum speed which is taken up after disengaging is specified at CLUTCH3−LOW−VEL.
CLOSE With CLUTCH3−CLOSE = LOW, the declutching process is started.
After disengaging, all ramps are deactivated. In the case of speed variations at CLUTCH3−LOW−VEL, the
output CLUTCH3−NSET is directly corrected.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.24.5 Time−controlled engaging

Description
The engaging distance (acceleration distance), the start position and sync position result from the
acceleration time Ti (C1706/3) or the deceleration time Ti (C1706/2) and from the speeds at
CLUTCH3−PHI−SET and CLUTCH3−PHI–ACT.
The acceleration acts in accordance with the time Ti and therefore is independent of the machine
speed.
The engaging distance depends on the machine speed. If the speed is high, the engaging distance
and the duration of the asynchronism is longer than for a lower speed.
Function sequense
0 ° /3 6 0 ° 0 ° /3 6 0 °
3 1 5 ° 4 5 °
S y n c - P o s itio n P H I-S E T
2 7 0 ° 9 0 °
S y n c - P o s itio n P H I-S E T
ti ti
ti
ti
P H I-A C T P H I-A C T
1 8 0 ° 1 8 0 °
fb_clutch3_06
Fig. 3−63 Angle diagrams: Two clutch−engagement processes with different speeds
The two angle diagrams show two clutch−engagement processes at the start of synchronising with
equal acceleration times Ti (C1706/3), but with different machine speeds. From this, different
engaging distances result.
Engaging process for the angle diagram on the right:
l The internal master angle (PHI−ACT) is at 180 ° with a speed of 0 min−1.
l On the basis of the Ti−time set and the speed of the external master angle (PHI−SET), an
acceleration distance of 135 ° results.
l After the acceleration distance of 135 °, PHI−SET crosses the starting position and the process
of engaging the clutch is automatically initiated if CLUTCH3−CLOSE = HIGH.
l In the sync position, PHI−SET and PHI−ACT are running synchronously with regard to speed
and angle (position).
– From the start position to the sync position, PHI−SET covers twice the distance of PHI−ACT.

Function library
Function blocks
Calculation of the ramps

C L O S E
N S E T n N
v _ P H I-S E T
v _ P H I-A C T
ti t
T i
fb_clutch_
Fig. 3−64 Path−time diagram: Time−controlled engaging
ti + Ti @ nN ti Actual duration of the process of engaging the clutch

(v_PHI−SET * v_PHI−ACT) Ti Acceleration time of the ramp in C1706/3 for the clutch−engaging, relating to
a speed variation from 0 to the machine speed nN
v_PHI−SET Speed of the external master angle
v_PHI−ACT Minimum speed at CLUTCH3−LOW−VEL
(in the disengaged state, v_PHI−ACT is = CLUTCH3−LOW−VEL)
3.2.24.6 Selection of the disengaging position

Description
The disengaging position is specified if an operation has to be completed before the disengaging
process may be initiated.
Function procedure
v e lo c ity
T A R G E T - P O S = B r a k e p o s itio n
P H I-S E T
B r a k in g d is ta n c e
P H O U T
fb_clutch3_09
Fig. 3−65 Angle diagram: Disengaged status at zero speed
The internal master angle (PHOUT) is running synchronously to the external master angle (PHI−SET)
until the position at CLUTCH3−TARGET−POS is crossed. Then drive is decelerated to the speed at
CLUTCH3−LOW−VEL.
Adjustment
l Set C1707 = 1.
l Define the disengaging position at CLUTCH3−TARGET−POS.
l Start the disengaging process with CLUTCH3−CLOSE = LOW.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.24.7 Selection of the target position in the disengaged state

Description
The target position is specified if the drive has to be set to a specific position in the disengaged state.
As the internal master angle corresponds to the target position, the tool position can be derived from
the internal master angle.
Function sequence
v e lo c ity
B r a k e p o s itio n
P H I-S E T
B r a k in g d is ta n c e
T A R G E T -P O S = P H O U T
fb_clutch3_10
Fig. 3−66 Angle diagram: Disengaged status at zero speed
l The internal master angle (PHOUT) is running synchronously to the external master angle
(PHI−SET) until the braking position has been crossed.
– The braking position always is before the target position.
l If the braking position is crossed, the drive is celerated to the speed at CLUTCH3−LOW−VEL.
– If CLUTCH3−LOW−VEL = 0, the internal master angle is exactly on the target position.
Adjustment
l Set C1707 = 0.
l Define the target position at CLUTCH3−TARGET−POS.
l Start the disengaging process with CLUTCH3−CLOSE = LOW.
3.2.24.8 Time−controlled disengaging in target position

Description
The function is required for applications with material transfer (e.g. placing caps on the bottles and
screwing them).
If there are no bottles in the machine, no caps may be feeded. The cap feed is disengaged for one
or several machine pulses, until bottles are available again. If disengaging is to be carried out, it may
only be started with the following machine pulse. In the disengaged state, the cap feed has to be in
a defined target position.

Function library
Function blocks
Function sequence
C L O S E
t
N S E T
0
C 1 7 0 6 /2 t
P H O U T
L E N
v e lo c ity ti
B r a k e - P o s itio n
P H I-S E T
T A R G E T -P O S
ti
B r a k e - P o s itio n
T A R G E T -P O S
t
O P E N
t
A C C /D E C
t
fb_clutch3_12
Fig. 3−67 Angle diagram and path−time diagram: Time−controlled disengaging in target position
External master angle at CLUTCH3−PHI−SET
Internal master angle at CLUTCH3−PHI−ACT
PHI−SET Position of the external master angle at CLUTCH3−PHI−SET after completion of the disengaging process
TARGET−POS Target position specified at CLUTCH3−TARGET−POS
OPEN If CLUTCH3−OPEN switches to HIGH, the clutch is disengaged
ACC/DEC During the disengaging process, CLUTCH3−ACC/DEC = HIGH
l The internal master angle (PHOUT) synchronically follows the master value to the brake
position. At the brake position the braking process is started.
– The brake position is automatically calculated from the deceleration time Ti.
– The brake position is variable and depends on the current machine speed.
l If the target position is reached, the braking process is completed.
l If CLUTCH3−LOW−VEL = 0, the internal master angle (PHOUT) is 0 at the target position.
Adjustment
l Set C1707 = 0.
l Define the target position at CLUTCH3−TARGET−POS.
l Set the deceleration time Ti [s] in C1706/2.
l Define the external master angle at CLUTCH3−PHI−SET.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.24.9 Time−controlled disengaging at disengaging position

Description
In the case of printing machines, the last process (printing) must be completed before the tool or the
drive may be disengaged.
Function sequence
C L O S E
t
N S E T
0
C 1 7 0 6 /2 t
P H O U T
L E N
v e lo c ity ti
T A R G E T -P O S =

P H I-S E T B r a k e - P o s itio n
S ta n d s till- P o s itio n
ti
T A R G E T -P O S
S ta n d s till- P o s itio n
t
O P E N
t
A C C /D E C
t
fb_clutch3_14
Fig. 3−68 Angle diagram and path−time diagram: Time−controlled disengaging at disengaging position
PHI−SET Position of the external master angle at CLUTCH3−PHI−SET after completion of the disengaging process
TARGET−POS Disengaging position specified at CLUTCH3−TARGET−POS
OPEN If CLUTCH3−OPEN switches to HIGH, the clutch is disengaged
ACC/DEC During the disengaging process, CLUTCH3−ACC/DEC = HIGH
l The external master angle (PHI−SET) and the internal master angle (PHOUT) run synchronously
until the disengaging position is reached.
l If the external master angle (PHI−SET) crosses the disengaging position, the braking process is
initiated.
l The position of the internal master angle (PHOUT) results from the deceleration time Ti and the
machine speed.
l If CLUTCH3−LOW−VEL = 0, the internal master angle (PHOUT) is placed on the standstill
position (PHOUT = 0), when the disengaging position has been crossed and the braking
distance (DIST) has been travelld.
Adjustment
l Set C1707 = 1.
l Define the disengaging position at CLUTCH3−TARGET−POS.
l Set the deceleration time Ti [s] in C1706/2.
l Define the external master angle at CLUTCH3−PHI−SET.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.24.10 Engaging the clutch at to different positions of the external master angle
Description
Engaging the clutch is effected by an advancing internal master angle (PHOUT). The required
acceleration distance of the internal master angle (PHOUT) is automatically calculated from the
machine speed and the acceleration time Ti. Thus the next possible start position is determined.
Simultaneously the sync position results from this, from which the internal master angle (PHOUT)
runs synchronously to the external master angle (PHI−SET). With CLUTCH3−CLOSE = HIGH, the
engaging prcess is started. If the external master angle at CLUTCH3−PHI−SET crosses the start
position, synchronising is started.
Engaging the clutch if the external master angle PHI−SET is before the start position
C L O S E
t
N S E T
t
P H O U T
L E N
S y n c - P o s itio n

A c c e le r a tio n d is ta n c e

0 ° /3 6 0 ° A c c e le r a tio n d is ta n c e
S ta r t- P o s itio n
P H I-S E T
v e lo c ity t
2 7 0 °
S y n c - P o s itio n S ta r t- P o s itio n O P E N
t
A c c e le r a tio n d is ta n c e A c c e le r a tio n d is ta n c e A C C /D E C
P H I-A C T = P H O U T
1 8 0 ° t
fb_clutch3_04
Fig. 3−69 Angle diagram and path−time diagram: Engaging the clutch if the external master angle is before the start position
PHI−SET Position of the external master angle at CLUTCH3−PHI−SET at the start of the engaging process
(CLUTCH3−CLOSE = HIGH)
PHI−ACT Position of the internal master angle at CLUTCH3−PHI−ACT at the start of the engaging process
(CLUTCH3−CLOSE = HIGH)
Start position Position of the external master angle at which synchronising is initiated
Sync position Position from which the external and internal master angles run synchronously
OPEN If CLUTCH3−OPEN switches to HIGH, the clutch is engaged
ACC/DEC During the process of engaging the clutch, CLUTCH3−ACC/DEC = HIGH
If CLUTCH3−CLOSE = HIGH, the external master angle is befor the start position calculated. The
process of engaging the clutch is initiated during this clock pulse.
The internal master angle has to be synchronised to the external master angle with regard to position
and angle. The external master angle runs at a constant speed. During the process of engaging the
clutch, the internal master angle covers the "Acceleration distance" to the sync position. The external
master angle covers the "Acceleration distance" twice.

Function library
Function blocks
Engaging the clutch if the external master angle PHI−SET is behind the start position
0 ° /3 6 0 °
v e lo c ity
2 7 0 °
S y n c - P o s itio n S ta r t- P o s itio n
P H I-S E T
A c c e le r a tio n d is ta n c e A c c e le r a tio n d is ta n c e
P H I-A C T
1 8 0 °
fb_clutch3_05
Fig. 3−70 Angle diagram: Engaging the clutch with external master angle being the calculated start position
PHI−SET Position of the external master angle at CLUTCH3−PHI−SET at the start of the process of engaging the
clutch (CLUTCH3−CLOSE = HIGH)
PHI−ACT Position of the internal master angle at CLUTCH3−PHI−ACT at the start of the process of engaging the
clutch (CLUTCH3−CLOSE = HIGH)
Start position Position at which synchronising is initiated
If CLUTCH3−CLOSE = HIGH, the external master angle is behind the start position calculated. The
process of engaging the clutch is not started in this clock pulse. It automatically starts in the next
clock, if CLUTCH3−CLOSE remains = HIGH.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.24.11 Time−controlled engaging

Function sequence
C L O S E
t
N S E T n N
C 1 7 0 6 /3 t
P H O U T
L E N
v e lo c ity
P H I-S E T
S y n c - P o s itio n S y n c - P o s itio n

ti
P H I-A C T
t
O P E N
t
A C C /D E C
t
fb_clutch3_15
Fig. 3−71 Angle diagram and path−time diagram: Time−controlled engaging

PHI−SET Position of the external master angle at CLUTCH3−PHI−SET at the start of synchronising
PHI−ACT Position of the internal master angle at CLUTCH3−PHI−ACT at the start of synchronising
Start position Position of the external master angle at which synchronising is initiated
OPEN If CLUTCH3−OPEN switches to LOW, the clutch is engaged
ACC/DEC During the process of engaging the clutch, CLUTCH3−ACC/DEC = HIGH
l The sync position is calculated from the acceleration (C1706/3) and the speed of the external
master angle. From this, also the start position results.
l From the sync position, the external and internal master angles are synchronous with regard
to speed and angle (position).
Adjustment
l Set C1707 = 0 or C1707 = 1. The process of engaging the clutch is the same for both modes.
l Set the desired acceleration in C1706/3.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
These FBs serve to compare two analog signals. Three comparators are available which serve to
implement triggers.
CMP1
C0680 CMP1
C0681
C0682
CMP1-IN1 CMP1-OUT
C0683/1
C0684/1
CMP1-IN2
C0683/2
C0684/2
Signal Source Note

CMP1−IN1 a C0684/1 dec [%] C0683/1 1 5001 −
CMP1−IN2 a C0684/2 dec [%] C0683/2 1 19500 −
CMP1−OUT a − − − − − −
CMP2
C0685 CMP2
C0686
C0687
CMP2-IN1 CMP2-OUT
C0688/1
C0689/1
CMP2-IN2
C0688/2
C0689/2
Signal Source Note

CMP2−IN1 a C0689/1 dec [%] C0688/1 1 1000 −
CMP2−IN2 a C0689/2 dec [%] C0688/2 1 1000 −
CMP2−OUT a − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
CMP3
C0690 CMP3
C0691
C0692
CMP3-IN1 CMP3-OUT
C0693/1
C0694/1
CMP3-IN2
C0693/2
C0694/2
Signal Source Note

CMP3−IN1 a C0694/1 dec [%] C0693/1 1 1000 −
CMP3−IN2 a C0694/2 dec [%] C0693/2 1 1000 −
CMP3−OUT a − − − − −
Function
The description uses the example of CMP1 and also applies to CMP2 and CMP3.
The function of these function blocks can be set via code C0680 (CMP1). The following comparison
operations are available:
l CMP1−IN1 = CMP1−IN2
l CMP1−IN1 > CMP1−IN2
l CMP1−IN1 < CMP1−IN2
l |CMP1−IN1| = |CMP1−IN2|
l |CMP1−IN1| > |CMP1−IN2|
l |CMP1−IN1| < |CMP1−IN2|

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.25.1 Function 1: CMP1−IN1 = CMP1−IN2

This function serves to compare two signals with regard to equality. Hence, the comparison "actual
speed equals setpoint speed (nact = nset)" can be carried out.
l Via code C0682 the window of equality can be set.
l Via code C0681 a hysteresis can be set if the input signals are not stable and cause the output
to oscillate.
The exact function can be obtained from the line diagram.
C0681 C0682 C0682 C0681

1
0 CMP1−IN2 CMP1−IN1
CMP1−IN1
C0681
C0682
CMP1−IN2
C0682
C0681
CMP1−OUT
Fig. 3−75 Equality of signals (CMP1−IN1 = CMP1−IN2)

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.25.2 Function 2: CMP1−IN1 > CMP1−IN2

This function is used, for example, to implement the comparison "Actual speed is higher than a limit
value (nact > nx)" for a direction of rotation.
l If the value at input CMP1−IN1 exceeds the value at input CMP1−IN2, the output CMP1−OUT
l Only if the signal at input CMP1−IN1 falls below the value of CMP1−IN2 − C0681 again, the
CMP1−IN1
CMP1−IN2
C0681
CMP1−OUT C0681
1 t
CMP1−OUT
0
CMP1−IN2 CMP1−IN1 t
Fig. 3−76 Exceeding signal values (CMP1−IN1 > CMP1−IN2)
3.2.25.3 Function 3: CMP1−IN1 < CMP1−IN2

This function is used, for example, to implement the comparison "Actual speed is lower than a limit
value (nact <nx)" for a direction of rotation.
l If the value at input CMP1−IN1 falls below the value at input CMP1−IN2, the output CMP1−OUT
l Only if the signal at input CMP1−IN1 exceeds the value of CMP1−IN2 − C0681 again, the
CMP1−IN1
C0681
CMP1−IN2
CMP1−OUT C0681
1 t
CMP1−OUT
0
t
CMP1−IN2 CMP1−IN1
Fig. 3−77 Values falling below signal values (CMP1−IN1 CMP1−IN2)
3.2.25.4 Function 4: |CMP1−IN1| = |CMP1−IN2|

This function is the same as function 1. Before signal processing the absolute value of the input
signals (without sign) is generated.
This can be used to implement the comparison "nact = 0".
3.2.25.5 Function 5: |CMP1−IN1| > |CMP1−IN2|

This can be used to implement the comparison "|nact| > |nx|" irrespective of the direction of rotation.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.25.6 Function 6: |CMP1−IN1| < |CMP1−IN2|

This can be used to implement the comparison "|nact| < |nx|" irrespective of the direction of rotation.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
These function blocks can be used to standardize signals or signal types or to convert signal types
into different signal types.The conversion is very precise by providing the conversion factor as
numerator and denominator.
CONV1
C O N V 1
C O N V 1 -O U T
C O N V 1 -IN C 0 9 4 0
C 0 9 4 2 C O N V 1 -D F O U T
C 0 9 4 1
C 0 9 4 3
fb_conv1
Signal Source Note

CONV1−IN a C0943 dec [%] C0942 1 1000
CONV1−DFOUT phd − − − − − Limited to ±29999 rpm
100 %
15000 rpm C0941
or
CONV1−DFOUT + CONV1−IN @ C0940 [rpm]
C0941
Example:
An analog signal is to be multiplied by 1.12.
For this, enter C0940 = 112 and C0941 = 100.

Function library
Function blocks
CONV2
C O N V 2
C O N V 2 -O U T
C O N V 2 -IN C 0 9 4 5
C 0 9 4 7 C O N V 2 -D F O U T
C 0 9 4 6
C 0 9 4 8
FB_conv2
Signal Source Note

CONV2−IN a C0948 dec [%] C0947 1 1000
100 %
15000 rpm C0946
or
C0946
CONV3
C O N V 3
C O N V 3 -O U T
C O N V 3 -IN C 0 9 5 0
C 0 9 5 2 C O N V 3 -D F O U T
C 0 9 5 1
C 0 9 5 3
Signal Source Note

100 %
15000 rpm C0951
or
C0951

Function library
Function blocks
CONV4
C O N V 4
C O N V 4 -O U T
C O N V 4 -IN C 0 9 5 5
C 0 9 5 7 C O N V 4 -D F O U T
C 0 9 5 6
C 0 9 5 8
Signal Source Note

100 %
15000 rpm C0956
or
C0956
CONV5
CONV5
C0657
C0656
C0658
Signal Source Note

CONV5−IN a C0658 dec [%] C0657 1 1000
15000 rpm C0655
100 % C0656

Function library
Function blocks
CONV6
C O N V 6
C O N V 6 -IN C 1 1 7 0 C O N V 6 -O U T
C 1 1 7 2
C 1 1 7 1
C 1 1 7 3
Signal Source Note

CONV6−IN a C1173 dec [%] C1172 1 1000
15000 rpm C1170
100 % C1171
CONV7
CONV7
CONV7−DFIN C1458 CONV7−DFOUT
C1456
C1459
C1457
FB_conv7
Signal Source Note

CONV7−DFIN phd C1457 dec [%] C1456 1 1000
CONV7−DFOUT + CONV7−DFIN @ C1458 [rpm]

C1459

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.27 Analog/digital converter (CONVAD)
3.2.27 Analog/digital converter (CONVAD)

Conversion of an analog value into individual digital signals.
CONVAD1
CONVAD1.B0
20
CONVAD1.B1
21
CONVAD1.B2
22
CONVAD1.B3
23
CONVAD1.B4
24
CONVAD1.B5
25
CONVAD1.B6
CONVAD1-IN 26
C1580 CONVAD1.B7
C1581 27
CONVAD1.B8
28
CONVAD1.B9
29
CONVAD1.B10
210
CONVAD1.B11
211
CONVAD1.B12
212
CONVAD1.B13
213
CONVAD1.B14
214
CONVAD1-SIGN
215
Fig. 3−85 Analog/digital converter (CONVAD1)
Signal Source Note

CONVAD1−IN a C1581 dec C1580 1 −
CONVAD1.B0 ... B14 d − − − − −
CONVAD1−SIGN d − − − − Sign digit

Function library
Function blocks
CONVAD2
CONVAD2.B0
20
CONVAD2.B1
21
CONVAD2.B2
22
CONVAD2.B3
23
CONVAD2.B4
24
CONVAD2.B5
25
CONVAD2.B6
CONVAD2-IN 26
C1582 CONVAD2.B7
C1583 27
CONVAD2.B8
28
CONVAD2.B9
29
CONVAD2.B10
210
CONVAD2.B11
211
CONVAD2.B12
212
CONVAD2.B13
213
CONVAD2.B14
214
CONVAD2-SIGN
215
Fig. 3−86 Analog/digital converter (CONVAD2)
Signal Source Note

CONVAD2IN a C1583 dec C1582 1 −
CONVAD2.B0 ... B14 d − − − − −
CONVAD2−SIGN d − − − − Sign digit
Function
l Represents the analog value as 16−bit binary word.
l Every binary digit is assigned to a digital output.
l The 16th bit (215) is the sign digit indicating whether it is a positive or negative analog value.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.28 Analog/angle converter (CONVAPH)
3.2.28 Analog/angle converter (CONVAPH)

Conversion of an analog value into a angle signal.
CONVAPH1
CONVAPH1
± 230 -1
CONVAPH1-IN C1590 CONVAPH1-OUT
C1593
C1594 C1591
Signal Source Note

CONVAPH1−IN a C1594 dec C1593 1 −
CONVAPH1−OUT ph − − − − Limited to ±230−1
Function
l Conversion with adaptation through multiplier and divisor.
CONVAPH1–OUT + CONVAPH1–IN @ C1590 @ 16384

C1591 100%

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
l Converts a angle signal into an analog signal
or
l converts a angle difference signal into a speed signal.
C O N V P H A 1
C O N V P H A 1 -IN
1 -O U T 2
C 1 0 0 1 C 1 0 0 0
2 -O U T
C 1 0 0 2 ± 1 9 9 ,9 9 %
Fig. 3−87 Angle conversion (CONVPHA1)
Signal Source Note

CONVPHA1−OUT a − − − − Limited to ±199.99 %, remainder considered
CONVPHA1−OUT2 phd − − − − Limited to ±32767 rpm, remainder considered
Function
l Conversion with adaptation using a divisor.
CONVPHA1−OUT[%] + CONVPHA1−IN[inc] @ 100
2 14 @ 2 C1000
CONVPHA1−OUT2[rpm] + CONVPHA1−IN[inc] @ 15000

2 14 @ 2 C1000
CONVPHA1−OUT2[inc] + CONVPHA1−IN[inc] @ 1
2 C1000

Function library
Function blocks
CONVPHA2
CONVPHA2
± 199,99%
CONVPHA2-IN 1 CONVPHA2-OUT
C1611
C1612 2C1610
Fig. 3−88 Function block CONVPHA2
Signal Source Note

CONVPHA2−OUT a − − − − Limited to ±199.99 %, remainder not considered
Function
l Conversion with adaptation using divisor.
CONVPHA2–OUT + CONVPHA2–IN @ 1 @ 100%
2 C1610 16384

Function library
Function blocks
CONVPHA3
CONVPHA3
± 199,99%
CONVPHA3-IN 1 CONVPHA3-OUT
C1616
C1617 2C1615
Fig. 3−89 Function block CONVPHA3
Signal Source Note

CONVPHA3−OUT a − − − − Limited to ±199.99 %, remainder not considered
Function
l Conversion with adaptation using divisor.
CONVPHA3–OUT + CONVPHA3–IN @ 1 @ 100%
2 C1615 16384

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.30 Position signal conversion (CONVPHAA)

Purpose
Simultaneous transfer of two position signals by means of a CAN object.
CONVPHAA1
C O N V P H A A 1
1 6 B it
C O N V P H A A 1 -A O U T 1
L o w W o rd
C O N V P H A A 1 -P H IN
C 1 6 2 0 /1
1 6 B it C O N V P H A A 1 -A O U T 2
C 1 6 2 1 /1
H ig h W o r d
Fig. 3−90 Angle conversion (CONVPHAA1)
Signal Source Note

CONVPHAA1−PHIN ph C1621/1 [inc] C1620/1 −
CONVPHAA1−AOUT1 a − − − − Low word (16 bits)
CONVPHAA1−AOUT2 a − − − − High word (16 bits)
Function
The input signal is divided into a low word and a high word with 16 bits each.
The corresponding output signal can be processed as a position signal.
CONVPHAA2
C O N V P H A A 2
1 6 B it
C O N V P H A A 2 -A O U T 1
L o w W o rd
C O N V P H A A 2 -P H IN
C 1 6 2 0 /2
1 6 B it C O N V P H A A 2 -A O U T 2
C 1 6 2 1 /2
H ig h W o r d
Fig. 3−91 Function block CONVPHAA2
Signal Source Note

CONVPHAA2−PHIN ph C1621/2 [inc] C1620/2 −
CONVPHAA2−AOUT1 a − − − − Low word
CONVPHAA2−AOUT2 a − − − − High word
Function
The input signal is divided into a low word and a high word with 16 bits each.
The corresponding output signal can be processed as a position signal.

Function library
Function blocks
Use
If you want to transfer two position signals at the same time, the function block CONVPHAA1 or
CONVPHAA2 must be linked with the CAN object (e.g. CAN−OUT2) as follows:
CAN-OUT2
Bit0
C0864/2
CAN-OUT2.W1 0
C0860/4
Byte 1,2
1
C0868/4
CAN-OUT2.W2 2
C0860/5
C0868/5
Bit15
FDO
C0116/1 FDO-0
C0865/2
...
16 bits
FDO-15 Low word
C0116/16 0
Byte 3,4
FDO-16
C0116/17 1
...
16 bits
High word 2
FDO-31
C0116/32
16 bits
Low word Bit31
CAN-OUT2.D1 X4
C0861/2 Bit0
16 bits
C0869/2
CONVPHAA1 High word
Byte 5,6
16 bits
CONVPHAA1-AOUT1 CAN-OUT2.W3
CONVPHAA1-PHIN Low word C0860/6
C1620/1
16 bits CONVPHAA1-AOUT2 C0868/6
C1621/1
High word
Bit15
Bit0
Byte 7,8
CAN-OUT2.W4
C0860/7
C0868/7
Bit15
9300kur084

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.31 Conversion of stretch factor (CONVPHD)

One function block (CONVPHD1) is available.
Purpose
l Exact adaptation of the incremental encoder
l CONVPHD1 for the adjustment of the stretch factor via freely configurable inputs
C O N V P H D 1 -N O M C O N V P H D 1
C 1 4 8 6 /1
C 1 4 8 7 /1 C 1 4 8 0
± 1 9 6 5 rp m
C O N V P H D 1 -IN X C O N V P H D 1 -O U T
C 1 4 8 8 /1 Y
C 1 4 8 9 /1
C O N V P H D 1 -D E N
C 1 4 8 6 /2
C 1 4 8 7 /2
Signal Source Note

Name Type DIS/selection DIS format CFG List
CONVPHD1−DEN ph 1487/2 dec [inc] 1486/2 3 Stretch factor denominator, input limited to
+1 to +200000000
CONVPHD1−IN phd 1489/1 dec [inc] 1488/1 4 The input is limited to 1965 rpm
CONVPHD1−NOM ph 1487/1 dec [inc] 1486/1 3 Stretch factor numerator, input limited to
1 to 200000000
CONVPHD1−OUT phd − − − Output in rpm
Function
l Function block interconnection
l Encoder settings increments of one
l Stretch factor setting over 6 decades
3.2.31.1 Function block interconnection

The function block is connected directly after the digital frequency input DFIN.
STOP!
The DFIN code C0425 must be set to selection 6 to evaluate the encoder signals correctly.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.31.2 Encoder adaptation

The encoder is adapted to the controller using the freely adjustable encoder constants
l C1480 in CONVPHD1
Using this function block, the encoder can be adapted in increments of one (1, 2, 3, 4... 32767) instead
of in increments of 20, 21, 23 etc., when using DFIN.
3.2.31.3 Stretch factor setting over 6 decades

The function blocks can be used for fine adjustment of the stretch factor (6 decades).
The stretch factor is set:
l CONVPHD1:
via freely connectable inputs
Tip!
If only the stretch factor is used (in this case the function block is positioned elsewhere in the circuit),
set the encoder constant to 16384 inc/rev. Otherwise the signal will be additionally amplified (small
values) or attenuated (higher values).
When setting negative values in the numerator, the output signal will be inverted.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Conversion of a angle signal with dynamic fraction.
C O N V P H P H 1 -N U M
C 1 2 4 0 /1 C O N V P H P H 1
C 1 2 4 5 /1
C O N V P H P H 1 -
C O N V P H P H 1 -IN x O U T
C 1 2 4 2 y
C 1 2 4 7
C 1 2 4 1
C O N V P H P H 1 _ A C T
C 1 2 4 6
C O N V P H P H 1 _ D E N
C 1 2 4 0 /2 1
C 1 2 4 5 /2
Fig. 3−92 Angle conversion (CONVPHPH1)
Signal Source Note

CONVPHPH1−IN ph C1247 dec [inc] C1242 3 −
CONVPHPH1−NUM a C1245/1 dec C1240/1 1 Numerator
CONVPHPH1−DEN a C1245/2 dec C1240/2 1 Denominator (with absolute value generation)
CONVPHPH1−ACT d C1246 bin C1241 2 −
CONVPHPH1−OUT ph − − − − Without limitation, remainder considered
Function
Caution!
The conversion result is not limited. The result must therefore not exceed the range of ±2147483647.
l C1241 = HIGH
– The angle signal at CONVPHPH1−IN is evaluated using the factor from C1245/1 / C1245/2.
l C1241 = LOW
– The value 0 is evaluated using the factor from C1245/1 / C1245/2.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.33 Conversion (CONVPHPHD1)

A angle change is converted into a speed (digital frequency).
C O N V P H P H D 1
C 1 4 5 2
C O N V P H P H D 1 -O U T
C O N V P H P H D 1 -IN x
C 1 4 5 0 /1 y C O N V P H P H D 1 -F A IL
C 1 4 5 1 /1
C 1 4 5 3
Signal Source Note

CONVPHPHD1−IN ph 1451/1 dec [inc] 1450/1 3 Angle input (ref.: 65536 inc = 1 motor revolution)
CONVPHPHD1−FAIL d − − − HIGH: Resulting speed > 30000 rpm
CONVPHPHD1−OUT phd − − − Output in rpm
Function
An angle change at input CONVPHPHD1−IN is converted into a speed.
l The speed at the output CONVPHPHD1−OUT can be adapted by means of a division ratio.
The numerator (C1452) and denominator (C1453) can be set between −32767 and +32767.
l The output is limited to ±n = 30000 rpm.
l CONVPHPHD1−FAIL = HIGH for the time of limitation.
Note!
Angle errors can occur in the following function blocks if the output is limited. The profile position can
thus be lost.

Function library
Function blocks
( STOP!
This function block is not suitable for transmitting the virtual line shaft (electrical
shaft).
Purpose
The function block converts a angle change into a speed (digital frequency).
CONVPHPHD2
CONVPHPHD2-IN CONVPHPHD2-OUT
C1450/2
CONVPHPHD2-LIM
C1451/2
CONVPHPHD2-RESET
C1454
C1455
FB_convphphd2
Fig. 3−93 Conversion (CONVPHPHD2)
Signal Source Note

CONVPHPHD2−IN ph 1451/2 dec [inc] 1450/2 3 1000 Angle input (reference: 65536 inc = 1 revolution)
CONVPHPHD2−RESET d 1455 dec [inc] 14554 2 1000 As long as CONVPHPHD2−RESET = HIGH, the signal
at CONVPHPHD2−OUT is set to n = 0.
CONVPHPHD2−OUT phd − − − − Signal is limited to ±29999 rpm
CONVPHPHD2−LIM d − − − − HIGH = signal at CONVPHPHD2−OUT is limited
(Function is available as of software version 3.4)
Function
An angle change at input CONVPHPHD2−IN is converted to a speed and output at
CONVPHPHD2−OUT.

Function library
Function blocks
( STOP!
The function block can evaluate signal jumps at the input CONVPHPHD2−IN up to
max. 2147483647 inc (231−1). At higher signal jumps the sign of the output signal
changes.
A position loss occurs which cannot be compensated anymore. You must carry out
a reset (CONVPHPHD2−RESET = HIGH).
0
-1 1
-1073741824 (-231 /2) 1073741824 (231 /2)
-2 147 483 647 (-231 +1) 2 147 483 647 (231 -1)
-2 147 483 648 (-231 )
Fig. 3−94 32−bit data representation in the cycle of numbers

Example 1 1. The input signal at CONVPHPHD2−IN is 65536 inc.
2. Now it jumps to −65536 inc.
3. The output CONVPHPHD2−OUT outputs, as expected, negative values
Example 2 1. The input signal at CONVPHPHD2−IN is 65536 inc.
2. Now it jumps to −231 −1 inc.
3. The output CONVPHPHD2−OUT, however, outputs positive values

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Conversion of a speed signal with dynamic fraction.
C O N V P P 1 -N U M C O N V P P 1
C 1 2 5 1 /1
C 1 2 5 4 /1
C O N V P P 1 -
C O N V P P 1 -IN x O U T
C 1 2 5 0 y
C 1 2 5 3
C O N V P P 1 _ D E N
C 1 2 5 1 /2 1
C 1 2 5 4 /2
Fig. 3−95 Speed conversion (CONVPP1)
Signal Source Note

CONVPP1−IN phd C1253 dec [rpm] C1250 4 −
CONVPP1−NUM ph C1254/1 dec [inc] C1251/1 3 Numerator
CONVPP1−DEN ph C1254/2 dec [inc] C1251/2 3 Denominator (with absolute value generation)
CONVPP1−OUT phd − − − − Without limitation, remainder considered
Function
Caution!
The conversion result is not limited. The result must therefore not exceed ±32767.
l The speed signal at CONVPP1−IN is evaluated using the factor from C1251/1 / C1251/2.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.36 Profile selection (CSEL)

One function block (CSEL1) is available.
Purpose
l Selection of one profile out of eight possible profiles.
l Selection of an event profile
C S E L 1 -C A M *1 C S E L 1
C 1 4 2 4 /1 D M U X
C 1 4 2 5 /1
C S E L 1 -C A M *2 0
C 1 4 2 4 /2 C S E L 1 -O U T
C 1 4 2 5 /2 1
C 1 4 2 0
C S E L 1 -C A M *4
C 1 4 2 4 /3
C 1 4 2 5 /3
C 1 4 2 4 /4 C S E L 1 -L O A D
C 1 4 2 5 /4
C 1 4 2 4 /5 C S E L 1 -E V E N T
C 1 4 2 5 /5
Signal Source Note

Name Type DIS/selection DIS CFG List
CSEL1−CAM*1 d 1425/1 bin 1424/1 Selection bit 0
CSEL1−LOAD d 1425/4 bin 1424/4 Acceptance=LOW³HIGH edge
CSEL1−EVENT d 1425/5 bin 1424/5 Event profile selection value
CSEL1−OUT a 13651 − − −
Function
l Conversion of a bit pattern into an analog value
l Acceptance of the converted value
l Event−dependent output of a fixed value

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.36.1 Change of the input bit pattern

1st input 2nd input 3rd input CSEL1−LOAD CSEL1−Event Output
CSEL1−CAM*1 CSEL1−CAM*2 CSEL1−CAM*4 CSEL1−OUT
0 0 0 0³1 0 0
1 0 0 0³1 0 1
0 1 0 0³1 0 2
1 1 0 0³1 0 3
0 0 1 0³1 0 4
1 0 1 0³1 0 5
0 1 1 0³1 0 6
1 1 1 0³1 0 7
* * * * 1 Value in C1420
* − Signal status has no meaning
l Depending on the number of profiles used, not all inputs must be assigned for the profile
selection.
Number of profiles used Inputs to be assigned
(value of C1300) (CAM*1, CAM*2, CAM*4)
1 (only profile 0) 0
2 (profiles 0 and 1) 1 (CAM*1)
4 (profiles 0 to 3) 2 (CAM*1, CAM*2)
8 (profiles 0 to 7) 3 (CAM*1, CAM*2, CAM*4)
3.2.36.2 Acceptance of the converted value

Very often, a new profile is selected during operation. This new profile, i.e. the changed value, must
only be accepted if the drive reaches a certain position. The acceptance is activated by a L³H edge
at the input CSEL1−LOAD.
3.2.36.3 Event−dependent output of a fixed value

l The value entered under C1420 will be output at CSEL1−OUT (without signal edge at
CSEL1−LOAD) when the input CSEL1−EVENT is selected.
Stop!
The activation of a cam profile, which has been additionally defined in CSEL but exceeds the number
of profiles selected in the FB CDATA, will be ignored.
Example: Input in CDATA = 4 profiles; profile additionally defined in CSEL (profile 5).
The special profile would be ignored!
Code Meaning Note

C1420 Input of fixed values for the selection through
CSEL1−EVENT
If the signal at input CSEL1−EVENT = LOW, a L³H edge must again be set at the input CSEL1−LOAD
to accept.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Conversion of an analog signal into a characteristic.
C h a r a c te r is tic 1 C U R V E 1
y
y 1 0 0
C 0 9 6 0 y 0
x
1 C h a r a c te r is tic 2 1
y
C 0 9 6 7
C U R V E 1 -IN 2 y 1 y 1 0 0 2 C U R V E 1 -O U T
C 0 9 6 8 3 y 0
x
3
x 1
Y 0 = C 0 9 6 1 C h a r a c te r is tic 3
Y 1 = C 0 9 6 2 y y 1 0 0
Y 2 = C 0 9 6 3
Y 1 0 0 = C 0 9 6 4 y 2
y 0 y 1
X 1 = C 0 9 6 5
x
X 2 = C 0 9 6 6 x 1 x 2
CURVE1
Fig. 3−96 Characteristic function (CURVE1)
Signal Source Note

CURVE1−IN a C0968 dec [%] C0967 1 5001 −
CURVE1−OUT a − − − − − −
Range of functions
Under C0960, you can select the function:
l Characteristic with two interpolation points
l Characteristic with three interpolation points
l Characteristic with four interpolation points
The codes for entering the interpolation points can be obtained from the line diagrams.
Linear interpolation between the points.
For negative input values at CURVEx−IN, the settings of the interpolation points are processed
inversely (see line diagrams). If this is not desired:
l Connect an absolute value generator (ABS) before or behind the CURVE function block
or
l connect a limiter (LIM) before or behind the CURVE function block

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.37.1 Characteristic with two interpolation points

Set C0960 = 1.
y
CURVE1-OUT
y100
C0964
C0961 y0
-100%
100% x
CURVE1-IN
-C0961
-C0964
3.2.37.2 Characteristic with three interpolation points

Set C0960 = 2.
y
CURVE1-OUT
y100
C0964
y1
C0962
C0961 y0
-100% -C0965 x1
C0965 100% x
CURVE1-IN
-C0961
-C0962
-C0964

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.37.3 Characteristic with four interpolation points

Set C0960 = 3.
y
CURVE1-OUT
y100
C0964
y1
C0962
C0961 y0
-100% y2
-C0966 -C0965 C0963
x1 x2
-C0963 C0965 C0966 100% x
CURVE1-IN
-C0961
-C0962
-C0964

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.38 Characteristic function (CURVEC)

Purpose
The function block serves to map analog profiles.
C 1 3 1 0 C U R V E C 1
C U R V E C 1 -S E L -IN
C 1 3 2 2 /1 0 C U R V E C 1 -X < 0
0
C 1 3 2 3 /1 0 C U R V E C 1 -X > X M A X
1
C U R V E C 1 -A IN 2 C U R V E C 1 -B U S Y
C 1 3 2 0 /1
C 1 3 2 1 /1 0 3 C U R V E C 1 -A O U T
C U R V E C 1 -IN 1 4
C U R V E C 1 -O U T
C 1 3 2 4 /5 5
C 1 3 2 5 /5 C U R V E C 1 -D F O U T
6
C U R V E C 1 -H O L D 7 C U R V E C 1 -C A M -S E L -B U S Y
C 1 3 2 2 /9
C 1 3 2 3 /9 C U R V E C 1 -IN IT -D F O U T
C U R V E C 1 -R E L -S E L
C 1 3 2 2 /1 1
C 1 3 2 3 /1 1
C U R V E C 1 -X R E S E T
C 1 3 2 2 /1 2
C 1 3 2 3 /1 2
fb_curvec
Fig. 3−100 Characteristic function (CURVEC)
Signal Source Note

Name Type DIS/selectio DIS format CFG List
n
CURVEC1−SEL−IN d C1323/10 C1322/10 2 HIGH = input CURVEC−IN active
CURVEC1−AIN a C1321/1 C1320/1 1 Analog input (analog profile)
CURVEC1−IN ph C1325/5 C1324/5 3 Angle input
CURVEC1−HOLD d C1323/9 C1322/9 1 HIGH = outputs CURVEC−OUT and CURVEC−AOUT are
stored
DFOUT = 0
CURVEC1−REL−SEL d C1323/11 C1322/11 1 HIGH = feed function
CURVEC1−XRESET d C1323/12 C1322/12 1 HIGH = sets the input values internally = 0.
See notes about CURVEC1−CAM−SEL−BUSY.
CURVEC1−X<0 d HIGH = input value < 0
CURVEC1−X>Xmax d HIGH = input value > Xmax
CURVEC1−BUSY d LOW−HIGH edge = The point distribution is not optimal,
select less points"
CURVEC1−AOUT a Analog output
CURVEC1−OUT ph Angle output
CURVEC1−DFOUT phd DF/speed output
CURVEC1−CAM−SEL−BUSY d The output remains HIGH as long as the profile
changeover (C1310) is not completed.
During this procedure, the input CURVEC1−XRESET must
be HIGH.
CURVEC1−INIT−DFOUT d HIGH= the drive speed does not reach the setpoint
defined by the position output. During this deviation which
may last over several cycles, a great position change is
output at the speed output. Increments do not get lost!
Therefore, the drive should only be enabled after
switching−on if CURVEC−INIT−DFOUT LOW !

Function library
Function blocks
Function
l Identical with FB CDATA, but with reduced functionality (cam position profile)
l General characteristic
Selection between general cam position profile and characteristic function

Via CURVEC1−SEL−IN you can select which input (−AIN or −IN) is to be processed.
It is possible to change between a (quasi) analog input (16−bit input) and an input for angle signals
(32 bit input).
Thus it is possible to use the CURVEC function block
l to implement any function within the limits of ±199.99 % (e.g. Vp adaptation)
or
l to implement a mechanical cam function.
) Note!
The input should be assigned to a FIXED value to avoid an unintentional change to
another input.
Freezing of the output value

With CURVEC1−HOLD = HIGH the output signals remain the same as of the switching instant,
irrespectively of possibly changing input values.
With CURVEC1−HOLD = LOW the outputs are activated again. The output values immediately
change in accordance with the profile function to the input values pending now.
( STOP!
This change occurs abruptly!

Function library
Function blocks
Profiles with relative feed

Profiles with relative feed are used in continuous drives. The final value of such profiles is not identical
with its initial position.
Continuous drives are for instance:
l conveyor belts
l rotary tables with feed along the entire revolution.
This function is selected with CURVEC1−REL−SEL = HIGH (e.g. FIXED 1)
Example 1 Example 2
Y
Y
X
L X
L L L
REL_VOR1 REL_VOR2
L Profile length
With CURVEC1−REL−SEL = LOW, the last Y value of the profile will not be stored!
( STOP!
Depending on the cam profile data, this setting may result in a ’jump’ of the drive to
the new value (see fig. below).
X
L L L
REL_VOR3
L Profile length
Negative input values

A fault is indicated for negative input values (X<0):
l CURVEC1−X < 0 = HIGH
Furthermore, the output will show the y value which would result from the profile function for x=0.

Function library
Function blocks
Max. permissible input value exceeded

A fault is indicated for input values X>Xmax:
l CURVEC1−X > Xmax = HIGH
Furthermore, the output will show the y value which would result from the profile function for X=Xmax.
) Note!
Xmax is already determined when the profile is generated (GDC).
3.2.38.1 Selection of profiles stored in the controller

Procedure
1. Inhibit the controller or set CURVEC1−X−RESET = HIGH.
) Note!
If you have neither inhibited the controller nor set CURVEC1−X−RESET = HIGH, it is
not possible to change to another profile (error number 7;
ILLEGAL_SYSTEM_ACCESS).
2. Select the new profile (e.g. with FEVAN)

3. Wait 20 ms for data transfer
4. Initialisation starts with CURVEC1−CAM−SEL−BUSY = HIGH
5. Wait (approx. 20 ms) until CURVEC1−CAM−SEL−BUSY = LOW
6. Then CURVEC1−X−RESET = LOW.
) Note!
Even if the controller is not inhibited, the profile can be changed with
CURVEC1−X−RESET=HIGH (e.g. via FEVAN).
During this procedure, the output CURVEC1−CAM−SEL−BUSY is HIGH.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
The dead band element is used to set interfering influences around zero, e.g. interferences on analog
input voltages, to digital zero.
C 0 6 2 0 D B 1
C 0 6 2 1
± 1 9 9 ,9 9 %
D B 1 -IN D B 1 -O U T
C 0 6 2 2
C 0 6 2 3
Fig. 3−101 Dead band element (DB1)
Signal Source Note

DB1−IN a C0623 dec [%] C0622 1 1000 −
DB1−OUT a − − − − − Limited to ±199.99 %
Function
l The dead band is parameterised under C0621.
DB1−OUT
C0620
DB1−IN
C0621
Fig. 3−102 Dead band and gain

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.40 Drive control (DCTRL)

Purpose
Sets certain controller states (e. g. trip, trip reset, quick stop or controller inhibit).
C0135
CAN-CTRL.B3
DCTRL
16 ³1
AIF-CTRL.B3 QSP
C135.B3 DCTRL-QSP
MCTRL
CAN-CTRL.B8 ³1
AIF-CTRL.B8 DISABLE
C135.B8 DCTRL-RDY
MONIT-TRIP DCTRL-CINH
CAN-CTRL.B9
AIF-CTRL.B9
C0136/1 C135.B9 DCTRL-IMP
X5/28
DCTRL-CINH1 ³1 CINH DCTRL-TRIP
C0870/1
DCTRL-WARN
C0878/1
DCTRL-CINH2 DCTRL-MESS
C0870/2
C0878/2 ³1 DCTRL-FAIL
CAN-CTRL.B10
AIF-CTRL.B10
C135.B10 ³1 TRIP-SET DCTRL-CW/CCW
DCTRL-TRIP-SET
C0871 DCTRL-NACT=0
C0878/3
CAN-CTRL.B11 DCTRL-STAT*1
AIF-CTRL.B11
C135.B11 ³1 TRIP-RESET DCTRL-STAT*2
DCTRL-TRIP-RESET DCTRL-STAT*4 STAT
C0876
DCTRL-STAT*8
C0878/4
DCTRL-INIT
fb_dctrl
Fig. 3−103 Control of the controller (DCTRL)
Signal Source Note

Designation Type DIS DIS format CFG List Lenze
DCTRL−CINH1 d C0878/1 bin C0870/1 2 1000 HIGH = inhibit controller
DCTRL−CINH2 d C0878/2 bin C0870/2 2 1000 HIGH = inhibit controller
DCTRL−TRIP−SET d C0878/3 bin C0871 2 54 HIGH = error message EEr
DCTRL−TRIP−RESET d C0878/4 bin C0876 2 55 LOW−HIGH signal = Trip reset
DCTRL−QSP d − − − − − HIGH = drive performs quick stop
DCTRL−RDY d − − − − − HIGH = Ready for operation
DCTRL−CINH d − − − − − HIGH = Controller reset
DCTRL−IMP d − − − − − HIGH = High−resistance power output
stages
DCTRL−TRIP d − − − − − HIGH = Fault active
DCTRL−WARN d − − − − − HIGH = Active warning
DCTRL−MESS d − − − − − HIGH = Active message
DCTRL−FAIL d − − − − − −
DCTRL−CW/CCW d − − − − − LOW = CW rotation, HIGH = CCW rotation
DCTRL−NACT=0 d − − − − − HIGH = Motor speed < C0019
DCTRL−INIT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
Function
l Quick stop (QSP)
l Operation inhibited (DISABLE)
l Controller inhibit (CINH)
l TRIP set
l TRIP reset
l Change of parameter set (PAR)
l Controller state
3.2.40.1 Quick stop (QSP)

The drive is braked to standstill via the deceleration ramp C105 and generates a holding torque.
l C0136/1 indicates the control word C0135
3.2.40.2 Operation inhibit (DISABLE)

In this state the drive cannot be started by the command: Controller enable. The power output stages
are inhibited. All controllers are reset.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.40.3 Controller inhibit (CINH)
) Note!
When the controller changes to an LU message or an OU message, the signal
DCTRL−CINH is not set.
The power output stages are inhibited. All controllers are reset.
l The function can be controlled via seven inputs:
– Terminal X5/28 (LOW = controller inhibit)
– MONIT−TRIP (HIGH = A monitoring function that is configured to TRIP has been activated in
the MONIT function block)
3.2.40.4 TRIP−Set
The drive is lead to the state selected under code C0581 and indicates EEr (external monitoring).
– Free input DCTRL−TRIP−SET
3.2.40.5 TRIP RESET

Resets a pending trip if the cause of malfunction has been eliminated. If the cause of malfunction is
still active, no response is effected.
– Free input DCTRL−TRIP−RESET
l This function is only carried out by a LOW−HIGH edge of the signal resulting from the OR
operation.

Function library
Function blocks
) Note!
If one of the inputs is set to HIGH, it is not possible that a LOW−HIGH edge occurs
at the resulting signal.
3.2.40.6 Controller state

The status is binary coded via the outputs DCTRL−STAT*x. These outputs are connected with the
STAT function block inside the device.
The status can be evaluated via the status word C0150, CAN status word, and AIF status word.
STAT*8 STAT*4 STAT*2 STAT*1 Action of the controller
0 0 0 0 Initialisation after the supply voltage has been connected
0 0 0 1 Switch−on inhibit (LOCK MODE), restart protection is active C0142
0 0 1 1 Drive is inhibited
0 1 1 0 Controller enabled
0 1 1 1 The activation of a monitoring function resulted in a "message"
1 0 0 0 The activation of a monitoring function resulted in a "trip"
1 0 1 0 The activation of a monitoring function resulted in a "FAIL−QSP"
3.2.40.7 Speed threshold nact=0rpm

The standstill message (DCTRL−NACT=1) is set if the actual speed (MCTRL−NACT) is lower than the
threshold set in C0019.
The standstill message (DCTRL−NACT=0) is cancelled if the actual speed (MCTRL−NACT) exceeds
a threshold from C0019 plus hysteresis. The amount of hysteresis corresponds to 1 % of the max.
speed nmax from C0011.
) Note!
The hysteresis provides for a stable standstill signal, even in the case of a jittering
actual speed value. The hysteresis only has an effect during start−up and is not
active during a stop process.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.41 Digital frequency input (DFIN)

Purpose
Converting and scaling a pulsed current at the digital frequency input X9 into a speed and angle
setpoint. The digital frequency is transferred in a high−precision mode (without offset and gain errors).
X9
C0427 DFIN
DFIN-OUT
C0425 C0426
Fig. 3−104 Digital frequency input (DFIN)
Signal Source Note

DFIN−OUT phd C0426 dec [rpm] − −
Function
l The input X9 is designed for signals with TTL level.
l In the case of a digital frequency cascade or digital frequency bus, adapt the drive to the
connected encoder or upstream controller via C0425.
l The input of a zero track is optional.
l Via C0427 the following input signals can be evaluated:
C0427 = 0
A
A
B
B
Z
Z
Fig. 3−105 Phase−shifted signal sequence (CW rotation)

CW rotation Track A is leading track B by 90° (positive value at DFIN−OUT).
CCW rotation Track A is lagging track B by 90° (negative value at DFIN−OUT).

Function library
Function blocks
C0427 = 1
A
A
B
B
Z
Z
Fig. 3−106 Control of direction of rotation via track B

C0427 = 2
A
A
B
B
Z
Z
Fig. 3−107 Control of speed and direction of rotation via track A or track B
CW rotation Track A transmits the speed and direction of rotation (positive value at DFIN−OUT)
Track B = LOW
CCW rotation Track B transmits the speed and direction of rotation (negative value at DFIN−OUT)
Track A = LOW
Transfer function
DFIN−OUT[rpm] + f[Hz] @ 60
Number of increments from C0425
Example:
Input frequency = 200 kHz
C0425 = 3 (¢ a number of increments of 2048 inc./rev.)
DFIN−OUT[rpm] + 200000Hz @ 60 + 5859rpm

2048

Function library
Function blocks
Signal adaptation
Finer resolutions than the power−of−two format can be implemented by the downstream connection
of an FB (e.g. CONV3 or CONV4).
Example:
The FB CONV3 converts the speed signal into a quasi−analog signal. Conversion according to
formula:
CONV3−OUT[%] + f[Hz] @ 0.4 @ C0950

Number of increments from C0425 C0951
X9
C0427 DFIN CONV3
DFIN-OUT CONV3-IN C0950 CONV3-OUT
C0952
C0951
C0953
C0425 C0426
Fig. 3−108 Digital frequency input (DFIN) with downstream converter
( STOP!
If C0540 = 0, 1, 2, 3 and feedback system C0025 > 10, you must not use the digital
frequency input X9.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Converts internal speed signals into frequency signals and outputs them to subsequent drives. The
transmission is highly precise (without offset and gain errors).
C0030 DFOUT
C0540
C0542
C0549
DFOUT-AN-IN
C0541
C0547
DFOUT-SYN-RDY
C0544 CTRL
C0548 C0540
X5 E5
0 X10
C0545 1
X9 C0429
2
3
4
X8 5
Fig. 3−109 Digital frequency output (DFOUT)
Signal Source Note

DFOUT−DF−IN phd C0549 dec [rpm] C0542 4 −
DFOUT−AN−IN a C0547 dec [%] C0541 1 Input in [%] of nmax (C0011)
DFOUT−SYN−RDY d C0548 bin C0544 2 −
DFOUT−OUT phd − − − − −
Function
l Output signals on X10
l Output of an analog signal
l Output of a speed signal
l Encoder simulation of the resolver with internal zero track
l Encoder simulation of the resolver with external zero track

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.42.1 Output signals on X10
C W r o t a tio n
A
A
B
B
Z
Z
Fig. 3−110 Signal sequence for CW rotation (definition)
l The output signal corresponds to the simulation of an incremental encoder:

– Track A, B and, if necessary, zero track as well as the corresponding inverted tracks are
output with tracks shifted by 90 degrees.
– The levels are TTL−compatible.
l Positive input values (CW rotation) result in the represented signal sequence.
l With negative input values (CCW rotation) track B is leading track A by 90° .
l The zero track is output according to the function set in C0540
l With C0030 the encoder constant of the encoder simulation is set.
l The function of the digital frequency output X10 is defined via C0540.
( Stop!
C0540 = 0 to C0540 = 3 cannot be set if the connection to the digital frequency
input DFIN X9 has been established and C0025 > 10 has been selected.
C0540 Signal at X10

0 DFOUT−AN−IN is output at X10; zero track can be input externally
1 DFOUT−DF−IN is output at X10; zero track can be input externally
2 Encoder simulation of the resolver with zero track in resolver zero position (mounted on the motor)
3 Encoder simulation of the resolver with external input of the zero track (terminal X5/E5)
Create zero track (Z track)

l Condition:
– Set C0540 = 0, C0540 = 1 or C0540 = 3.
– Encoder simulation must be active.
l Start creation:
– The creation starts immediately with the first rising or falling edge on track A or track B.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.42.2 Output of an analog signal

For this purpose, set code C0540 = 0. The value applied at input DFOUT−AN−IN is converted into a
frequency.
Transfer function
No. of increments from C0030 C0011
f[Hz] + DFOUT * AN * IN[%] @ @
100 60
Example:
DFOUT−AN−IN = 50 %
C0011 = 3000 rpm
f[Hz] + 50% @ 2048 @ 3000 + 51200Hz

100 60

1. Activate the function through a LOW HIGH edge at the input DFOUT−SYN−RDY.
2. A LOW HIGH edge at terminal X5/E5 causes the generation of the zero pulse after 360°.
After this, every 360° a zero pulse is generated according to the setting in C0030.
3. The zero pulse is automatically shifted by the value C0545.
) Note!
This procedure must be done after every mains switching.
3.2.42.3 Output of a speed signal

l Set C0540 = 1.
– This setting only converts the value at input DFOUT−DF−IN into a frequency.
Transfer function
No. of increments from C0030
f[Hz] + DFOUT−DF−IN[rpm] @
60
Example:
DFOUT−DF−IN = 3000 rpm
f[Hz] + 3000[rpm] @ 2048 + 102400[Hz]

60

1. Set input DFOUT−SYN−RDY = edge from LOW HIGH.
2. A LOW−HIGH edge at terminal X5/E5 causes the generation of the zero pulse after 360°. After
this, every 360° a zero pulse is generated according to the setting in C0030.
3. The zero pulse can be shifted by +360° via C0545 (65536 inc = 360°).

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.42.4 Encoder simulation of the resolver

Set C0540 = 2 or C0540 = 3 (depending on the desired generation of the zero track)
l The function is used when a resolver is connected to X7.
l The encoder constant for output X10 is set in C0030.
Generating a zero pulse in resolver zero position (C0540 = 2)

The output of the zero pulse with regard to the rotor depends on how the resolver is mounted to the
motor.
Generating an external zero pulse (C0540 = 3)

l The function is activated through a LOW−HIGH edge at the input DFOUT−SYN−RDY.
l A LOW−HIGH edge at terminal X5/E5 causes the generation of the zero pulse after 360°.
– After this, every 360° a zero pulse is generated according to the setting in C0030.
) Note!
The procedure for generating an artificial zero pulse must be repeated after every
mains switching and after every setting of C0540 = 3.


) Note!
For directly outputting X8 or X9 to the digital frequency output X10 the function
block DFOUT does not need to be entered into the processing table.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
The drive (motor shaft) is synchronised to a digital frequency (phase selection). The drive then
performs a phase−synchronous operation with the digital frequency.
C 0 7 5 3 C 0 7 6 6 D F R F G 1
C 0 7 5 7 C 0 7 5 1 C 0 7 5 6
C 0 4 2 9 C 0 7 5 5
0
X 5 0
D F R F G 1 -S Y N C
1
E 5 C T R L
C 0 7 5 2
D F R F G 1 -IN
C 0 7 5 8 D F R F G 1 -O U T
C 0 7 6 5
D F R F G 1 -Q S P C 0 7 5 4
C 0 7 5 9
C 0 7 6 4 /1 D F R F G 1 -F A IL
S Q
D F R F G 1 -S T O P
C 0 7 6 0
C 0 7 6 4 /2 R
D F R F G 1 -R E S E T
C 0 7 6 1
C 0 7 6 4 /3 FB_dfrfg1
Fig. 3−111 Digital frequency ramp function generator (DFRFG1)
Signal Source Note

Designation Type DIS DIS format CFG List
DFRFG1−SET phd C0769 − C0768 − Initial speed
DFRFG1−IN phd C0765 dec [rpm] C0758 4 Speed/Phase setpoint
DFRFG1−QSP d C0764/1 bin C0759 2 HIGH = quick stop
DFRFG1−STOP d C0764/2 bin C0760 2 HIGH = save setpoint
DFRFG1−RESET d C0764/3 bin C0761 2 HIGH = reset
DFRFG1−OUT phd − − − − Speed/Phase setpoint
DFRFG1−SYNC d − − − − HIGH = drive runs synchronously
DFRFG1−FAIL d − − − − HIGH = phase difference exceeded
Function
l Profile generator
l Quick stop
l Ramp function generator stop
l RESET
l Detect phase difference
l Start via touch probe initiator (terminal X5/E5)
l Correction of the touch probe initiator (terminal X5/E5)

Function library
Function blocks
DFRFG-OUT
C0751 C0751
C0755
DFRFG-IN C0752
DFRFG-SYNC t
Fig. 3−112 Synchronisation on DFRFG
The profile generator generates ramps which lead the setpoint phase to its target position.
l Set acceleration and deceleration via C0751.
l Set max. speed via C0752.
l When the distance and speed reach their setpoints, the output switches
DFRFG1−SYNC = HIGH. At the same time the FB switches the profile generator to "inactive".
l Set the switching point via C0755.
Stop!
Do not operate the drive with this function at the torque limitation Mmax, Imax.
Fig. 3−113 Speed−time diagram DFRFG
The number of increments at DFRFG−IN (master drive) defines the target position. The target can be
displayed as a path. The speed−time diagram shows the distance covered (angle) as the area below
the speed profile. When synchronicity is reached, master and slave have covered the same distance
(angle).

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.43.2 Quick stop

Removes the drive from the network and brakes it to standstill.
l Activate with DFRFG−QSP = HIGH.
l Set deceleration time via C0753.
l Approach the setpoint phase via the profile generator after resetting the quick stop request.
DFRFG-OUT
C0751 C0751
DFRFG-IN C0752
C0753
DFRFG-QSP t
Fig. 3−114 Quick stop DFRFG
3.2.43.3 Ramp function generator stop

Maintains the state of the profile generator during operation.
l Activate with DFRFG−STOP = HIGH
l Output of the last state at DFRFG−OUT.
l Approach the setpoint phase via the profile generator after resetting the stop request.
DFRFG-OUT
DFRFG-IN C0752
DFRFG-STOP t
Fig. 3−115 Ramp function generator stop

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.43.4 RESET
DFRFG−RESET = HIGH:
l Resets setpoint phases which are internally added.
l Activates the profile generator.
l HIGH−LOW edge at DFRFG−RESET: Detecting the setpoint phase.
3.2.43.5 Detect phase difference

Monitoring the phase difference between input DFRFG−IN and output DFRFG−OUT.
l Set limit value of monitoring via C0754.
l Activates the monitoring: DFRFG−FAIL = HIGH
l Storing the signal until DFRFG−RESET = HIGH.
l The profile generator can accept a phase difference of up to ±2140000000 inc (= 32000
revolutions).

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.43.6 Start via touch probe initiator (terminal X5/E5)
Stop!
In the default setting the terminal X5/E5 is assigned to another function.
Function
l Set C0757 = 1.
l The function is activated by simultaneously setting the inputs:
– DFRFG−QSP and DFRFG−RESET = HIGH.
l Starting procedure:
– Signals at DFRFG−QSP and DFRFG−RESET = LOW.
– Otherwise touch probe signals are ignored.
l A LOW−HIGH edge at terminal X5/E5 starts the process:
DFRFG-OUT
DFRFG-IN
Touch-Probe X5/E5
DFRFG-QSP
DFRFG-RESET
Fig. 3−116 Start via touch probe initiator (terminal X5/E5)

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.43.7 Correction of the touch probe initiator (terminal X5/E5)

Delay times during the activation of the initiator cause a speed−dependent phase offset (e.g. during
positioning, synchronising).
In order to take this angular offset into account, the response time [ms] of the initiators as a function
of the setpoint speed DFRFG−IN is converted to a phase angle correction and is then taken into
consideration in the setpoint angle. For this, the response time [ms] has to be converted to a
correction value [Inc.] first.
l Formula for input value in C0429:
Input value C0429 = 16384 × response time [ms]
l The response time [ms] can be gathered from the data sheet of the initiator or requested by
the manufacturer.
3.2.43.8 Offset setting

The offset can be set with code C0756. The offset refers to the digital frequency input and is scaled
to 1 revolution (¢65536 increments).
The touch probe (TP) initiates the start of the ramp function generator. The leading of the master drive
from the moment of starting or the resulting path/phase difference is taken up during the acceleration
phase.
l Setting: positive offset values
– Causes a time shift of the TP
– This means that less time is necessary − compared to the setting with e.g. offset = 0 − to
obtain synchronism with the master drive.
Tip!
With high offsets and low input speeds the drive may reverse. To avoid this, a direction of rotation
can be selected for the output via C0766.

Function library
Function blocks
Purpose
Conditions the digital frequency for the controller. Input of the stretch factor, gearbox factor, and
speed or phase trimming.
C0525
DFSET-0-PULSE
C0430/5
DFSET
C0532 C0534
C0538/1
3 C0531
X5/E4
2
1 DFSET-ACK
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
3
2
X5/E5 CTRL
1 C0528/1
X9/6,7
DFSET-N-TRIM2 C0535
C1255
+
DFSET-N-TRIM C1258
C0524
+
DFSET-RAT-DIV C0537
C0522
DFSET-VP-DIV C0536/2
C0521
DFSET-POUT
C0536/1
a a
DFSET-IN a a + DFSET-NOUT
C0520 * b * b + C0530
C0539 b b
C0252 C0253
C0533 C0033 0 + + + DFSET-PSET
1
+ + -
DFSET-SET C0528/2
DFSET-PSET2
C0527
C0538/3
C0526 DFSET-RESET
C0538/2
DFSET-A-TRIM
C0523 * C0529
C0536/3
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
FB_dfset
Fig. 3−117 Digital frequency processing (DFSET)
Signal Source Note

DFSET−0−PULSE d C0538/1 bin C0525 2 HIGH = release of zero pulse synchronising
DFSET−N−TRIM a C0537 dec [%] C0524 1 Speed trimming in [%] of C0011
DFSET−N−TRIM2 phd C1258 dec [rpm] C1255 4 Speed trimming in [rpm] of C0011
DFSET−RAT−DIV a C0536//2 dec C0522 1 Numerator of gearbox factor 100 % = 16384 inc
DFSET−VP−DIV a C0536/1 dec C0521 1 Numerator of stretch factor 100 % = 16384 inc
DFSET−IN phd C0539 dec [rpm] C0520 4 Speed/Phase setpoint
DFSET−SET d C0538/3 bin C0527 2 HIGH = Set phase integrators to equal values
LOW−HIGH edge sets DFSET−PSET = 0
HIGH−LOW edge sets DFSET−PSET = current value
of MCTRL−PHI−SET
DFSET−SET has a higher priority than DFSET−RESET
DFSET−RESET d C0538/2 bin C0526 2 HIGH = sets position difference = 0
HIGH = sets DFSET−PSET and DFSET−PSET2 = 0
DFSET−A−TRIM a C0536/3 dec [inc] C0523 1 Phase trimming 100% = 16384 inc
DFSET−ACK d − − − − HIGH = synchronising is performed
DFSET−POUT phd − − − − Speed/Phase setpoint
DFSET−NOUT a − − − − in [%] of nmax (C0011)
DFSET−PSET ph − − − − Following error for phase controller
DFSET−PSET2 ph − − − − Phase setpoint 65536 inc = 1 revolution

Function library
Function blocks
Function
l Setpoint conditioning with stretch and gearbox factor
l Processing of correction values
l Synchronising to zero track or touch probe (for resolver feedback touch probe only)
3.2.44.1 Setpoint conditioning with stretch and gearbox factor
Stretch factor
Defines the ratio between the drive and the setpoint.
l The stretch factor evaluates the setpoint at DFSET−IN. DFSET−POUT outputs the result.
l The stretch factor results from numerator and denominator.
– Numerator is variable from analog signal source or fixed value by the code.
– Input of the denominator under C0533.
l Relationship:
DFSET–POUT + DFSET–IN @ DFSET–VP–DIV
C0533
Gearbox factor
Defines the transmission ratio of the drive. Enter the ratio of the drive.
l The gearbox factor evaluates the setpoint at DFSET−IN multiplied by the stretch factor.
DFSET−NOUT outputs the result.
l The gearbox factor results from numerator and denominator.
– Numerator is variable from analog signal source or fixed value by the code.
– Input of the denominator under C0033.
l Relationship:
DFSET–NOUT + Reckfaktor @ DFSET–RAT–DIV
C0033
DFSET–NOUT + DFSET–IN @ DFSET–VP–DIV @ DFSET–RAT–DIV

C0533 C0033
Deactivate the gearbox factor and the DFSET−N−TRIM values as a basis for the setpoint angle
integrator. If C0530 = 1, only the stretch factor is used for setpoint angle calculation.
3.2.44.2 Processing of correction values
Speed trimming
This is used to add correction values, e.g. by a superimposed control loop. This enables the drive to
accelerate or decelerate.
l Adds an analog value at DFSET−N−TRIM to the setpoint speed.
(see code C0537)
l Adds a speed value at DFSET−N−TRIM2 to the setpoint speed.
– The speed trimming via this input is more precise.
(see code C1258)

Function library
Function blocks
Phase trimming
This adds a setpoint at DFSET−A−TRIM to the phase setpoint (see code C0536/3) and changes the
rotor position to the setpoint with the number of increments provided in either direction (drive is
leading or lagging). The phase is trimmed within a range of ±32767 increments (¢ ±1/2 rev.). Every
analog signal can be used as a source.
l The input is done in increments (one revolution ¢ 65536 increments).
l When analog values are entered, 100% correspond to 1/4 revolution = 16384 increments.
l Extension of the setting range with a multiplier under C0529.
Phase offset
Addition of a fixed phase offset under C0252 to the setpoint of the drive.
Speed−proportional phase setting

Leading or lagging of the phase with rising speed.
l Enter a suitable setting in increments under code C0253.
l The set phase offset is reached at 15000 rpm of the drive (linear relationship).
3.2.44.3 Synchronising to zero track or touch probe

The synchronisation is selected under C0532.
l C0532 = 1, index pulse
– zero track of digital frequency input X9 and zero track by the feedback system set under
C0490 (not for resolver evaluation).
l C0532 = 2, touch probe
– via terminals X5/E4 (actual pulse) and X5/E5 (set pulse).
l C0532 = 3, zero pulse (setpoint) and TOUCH−PROBE (actual value)
– Zero track from the digital frequency input X9 for the setpoint and touch probe initiator via
terminal X5/E4 for the actual value.
) Note!
All three modes provide the possibility to define a divisor factor for the actual pulses
with codes C0531 as well as for the setpoint pulses with codes C0535 (default
setting = 1). Hence, it is possible to e.g. evaluate every 10th actual pulse if C0531 =
10. The other 9 pulses are ignored.
Touch probe initiators can have delay times which cause a speed−dependent phase offset.
To take this angular offset into account, the response time [ms] of the initiators is converted into an
angular correction depending on setpoint speed DFSET−NOUT and then considered in the setpoint
angle. For this purpose, the response time [ms] must be converted into a correction value [Inc.] first.
l Formula for the input value in C0430/x:
EingabewertinC0430ńx + 16384 @ Ansprechzeit[ms]
l Please take the response time [ms] from the data sheet of the initiator or contact the
manufacturer.

Function library
Function blocks
Stop!
When the synchronisation via the terminals X5/E4 and X5/E5 (C0532 = 2) is activated, no further
control signals must be taken from these terminals. Changing the configuration via C0005 assigns
the terminals with a basic setting.
Synchronisation mode
For the synchronisation, different modes are available which can be set under C0534.
C0534 Synchronisation mode Note
0 Inactive Function inactive
1 Continuous synchronisation with correction in the shortest
possible way
2 Continuous synchronisation with correction in the shortest after a LOW−HIGH edge at DFSET−0−Pulse, synchronisation is
possible way carried out continuously if a HIGH level remains at
DFSET−0−Pulse.
10 One synchronisation, a phase deviation is corrected in the after a LOW−HIGH edge at DFSET−0−Pulse, synchronisation is
shortest possible way carried out once
11 One synchronisation, a phase deviation is corrected in CW after a LOW−HIGH edge at DFSET−0−Pulse, synchronisation is
direction carried out once
12 One synchronisation, a phase deviation is corrected in CCW after a LOW−HIGH edge at DFSET−0−Pulse, synchronisation is
direction carried out once
13 Single synchronisation, a phase difference is determined between after a LOW−HIGH edge at DFSET−0−Pulse, synchronisation is
setpoint pulse and actual pulse and is corrected to the carried out once
corresponding direction of rotation according to the sign
Code C0528/1 displays the number of increments (angular difference) between the setpoint pulse
and the actual pulse prior to synchronisation.
Code C0528/2 displays the offset value from (C0523 x C0529 + C0252).

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
This function is used to delay digital signals. This function can be used for the control of functions
or the generation of status information.
C0720 DIGDEL1
C0721
C0723
C0724 0 t
Signal Source Note

DIGDEL1−IN d C0724 bin C0723 2 1000 −
DIGDEL1−OUT d − − − − − −
C0725 DIGDEL2
C0726
C0728
C0729 0 t
Signal Source Note

DIGDEL2−IN d C0729 bin C0728 2 1000 −
DIGDEL−OUT d − − − − − −
Function
You can select the following functions under C0720 (DIGDEL1) and C0725 (DIGDEL2):
l On−delay
l Off−delay
l General delay

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.45.1 On−delay
If the on−delay is set, a signal change from LOW to HIGH at the input DIGDELx−IN is passed on to
the DIGDELx−OUT output after the delay time set under C0721 or C0726 has elapsed.
DIGDEL1−IN
C0721 C0721 t
DIGDEL1−OUT
Fig. 3−120 On−delay (DIGDEL1)
In this function, the time element operates like a retriggerable monoflop:

l A LOW−HIGH edge at the input DIGDELx−IN starts the time element.
l If the delay time set under C0721 or C0726 has elapsed, the output DIGDELx−OUT is set to
HIGH.
l The time element is reset and the output DIGDELx−OUT is set to LOW with a HIGH−LOW edge
at the input DIGDELx−IN.
3.2.45.2 Off−delay
An off−delay causes a signal change from HIGH to LOW at the input DIGDELx−IN to be passed on
to the output DIGDELx−OUT after the delay time set under C0721 or C0726 has elapsed.
DIGDEL1−IN
C0721 C0721 t
DIGDEL1−OUT
Fig. 3−121 Off−delay (DIGDEL1)
l A LOW−HIGH edge at the input DIGDELx−IN causes the output DIGDELx−OUT to be set to
HIGH and the time element to be reset.
l The time element is started with a HIGH−LOW edge at the input DIGDELx−IN.
l After the delay time set under C0721 or C0726 has elapsed, the output DIGDELx−OUT is set to
LOW.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.45.3 General delay

A general delay causes any signal change at the input DIGDELx−IN to be passed onto the output
DIGDELx−OUT only after the time set under C0721 or C0726 has elapsed.
DIGDEL1−IN
DIGDEL1−TIMER
ÎÎÎ
C0721 t
DIGDEL1−OUT
Fig. 3−122 General delay
l The time element is started with any edge at the input DIGDELx−IN.
l When the timer (can be set under C0721 or C0726) has reached the upper limit, the output
DIGDELx−OUT is set to the same value as the input DIGDEL1−IN.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Reading and conditioning of the signals at the terminals X5/E1 to X5/E5.
X5
DIGIN DCTRL -X5/28
DIGIN-CINH
28
DIGIN1
E1 C0114/1...5 DIGIN2
E2 DIGIN3
0
E3 1 DIGIN4
1
E4 DIGIN5
E5 C0443
Fig. 3−123 Freely assignable digital inputs (DIGIN)
Signal Source Note

DIGIN−CINH d − dec − − − Controller inhibit acts directly on the DCTRL
control
DIGIN1 d C0443 dec − − − −
DIGIN2 d C0443 dec − − − −
DIGIN3 d C0443 dec − − − −
DIGIN4 d C0443 dec − − − −
DIGIN5 d C0443 dec − − − −
Function
The terminals X5/E1 to X5/E5 are scanned every millisecond. The level for every input can be
l Select code C0114 with corresponding subcode (e.g. subcode 3 for input X5/E3)

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Conditioning of the digital signals and output at the terminals X5/A1 to X5/A4.
DIGOUT
DIGOUT1
C0117/1 X5
DIGOUT2 C0118/1...4
C0117/2 A1
DIGOUT3
C0117/3 0
DIGOUT4 A2
C0117/4 1
1
C0444/1 A3
C0444/2
C0444/3 A4
C0444/4
Fig. 3−124 Freely assignable digital outputs (DIGOUT)
Signal Source Note

DIGOUT1 d C0444/1 bin C0117/1 2 15000 −
DIGOUT2 d C0444/2 bin C0117/2 2 10650 −
DIGOUT3 d C0444/3 bin C0117/3 2 500 −
DIGOUT4 d C0444/4 bin C0117/4 2 5003 −
Function
The terminals X5/A1 to X5/A4 are updated every millisecond. The level for every output can be
l Select code C0118 with corresponding subcode (e.g. subcode 3 for output X5/A3)

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Derivative action on signals.
For instance, used for the acceleration processes (dv/dt).
C0650 DT1-1
C0653 C0651
±199.99 %
DT1-1-IN DT1-1-OUT
C0652
C0654
fb_dt1−1
Fig. 3−125 First order derivative−action element (DT1−1)
Signal Source Note

DT1−1−IN a C0654 dec [%] C0652 1 1000 −
DT1−1−OUT a − − − − − Limited to ±199.99 %
Function
l The delay Tv is set under C0651.
l The input sensitivity of the DT1−1 element can be reduced under C0653.
l The FB only evaluates the specified most significant bits, according to the setting.
K=Td / Tv
Tv t
Fig. 3−126 Delay time Tv of the first order derivative−action element

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.49 Extrapolation (EXTPOL1)

Optimisation of running features
E X T P O L 1
E X T P O L 1 -A IN E X T P O L 1 -S T A T
C 1 3 7 0 /1
C 1 3 7 1 /1
E X T P O L 1 -P H IN E X T P O L 1 -P H O U T
C 1 3 7 4 /1
C 1 3 7 5 /1
Signal Source Note

EXTPOL1−AIN d 1371/1 bin 1370/1 Speed input
EXTPOL1−PHIN ph 1375/1 ph 1374/1 Position input
EXTPOL1−STAT d 13451 − − − HIGH = extrapolation on
LOW = new data at input PHIN
EXTPOL1−PHOUT ph 13451 − − − Extrapolated position of input PHIN
The function block EXTPOL1 is used when position information is exchanged between master and
slave using a bus system.
The transfer cycle via a bus system is often longer than 1 ms, especially if
l for instance, a PLC or an industrial PC is connected to the bus
l the baud rate is < 1Mbaud (e.g. with cable lengths > 25 m)
The short response time required between setpoint and actual value of the controller is prolonged
by the bus load. Especially when the position is changed, a linear speed characteristic is converted
into a step−like characteristic. The suddenly changing speed results in corresponding torque peaks
in all drive elements connected.
The function block EXTPOL1 smoothens this ’step’ character by ’fine−interpolation’ between the
steps (see function block symbol). The improved smoothness of running can even be heard.

Function library
Function blocks
Function block interconnection

The function blocks must be connected in both drives (master and slave).
CAN-OUT2
Bit0
C0864/2
CAN-OUT2.W1 0
C0860/4
Byte 1,2
1
C0868/4
CAN-OUT2.W2 2
C0860/5
C0868/5
Bit15
FDO
C0116/1 FDO-0
C0865/2
...
16 bits
FDO-15 Low word
C0116/16 0
Byte 3,4
FDO-16
C0116/17 1
...
16 bits
High word 2
FDO-31
C0116/32
16 bits
Low word Bit31
CAN-OUT2.D1 X4
CDATA-XPOS C0861/2 Bit0
16 bits
C0869/2
High word
CONV3
Byte 5,6
CONV3-IN C0950 CONV3-OUT CAN-OUT2.W3
CDATA-X-NOUT C0952 C0860/6
C0951
C0953 C0868/6
Bit15
Bit0
Byte 7,8
CAN-OUT2.W4
C0860/7
C0868/7
Bit15
9300kur086
Fig. 3−127 Master connection
CAN-IN2
CAN-IN2.W1
16 bits
C0866/4
CAN-IN2.W2
16 bits
Bit 0 C0866/5
CAN-IN2.B0
CAN-IN2.B1
C0863/3
.
Byte 1,2
.
16 .
binary CAN-IN2.B14
signals
CAN-IN2.B15
CAN-IN2.B16
Bit 15
C0863/4 CAN-IN2.B17
.
.
16 .
binary CAN-IN2.B30
signals
Byte 3,4
CAN-IN2.B31
EXTPOL1
16 bits EXTPOL1-AIN EXTPOL1-STAT
Low word C1370/1
C1371/1
CAN-IN2.D1 EXTPOL1-PHIN EXTPOL1-PHOUT
C1374/1 CDATA-XIN
X4 C1375/1
C0867/2
16 bits
High word
Byte 5,6
CAN-IN2.W3
16 bits
C0866/6
16 bits
Low word
CAN-IN2.D2
16 bits
High word
Byte 7,8
CAN-IN2.W4
16 bits
C0866/7
9300kur088
Fig. 3−128 Slave connection

Function library
Function blocks
Settings
Note!
FB EXTPOL1 does not require setting. It must however be ensured, that numerator (C0950) and
denominator (C0951) are 1 in the function block CONV3 of the master.
Status signal
l EXTPOL1−STAT = HIGH
– Function block extrapolates
l EXTPOL1−STAT = LOW
– Input data is accepted directly.

Function library
Function blocks

Optimisation of running features (function like EXTPOL1)
Smoothing of a low−resolution absolute value encoder (angle encoder)
Position detection while line shaft" crosses zero
C 1 3 7 9 E X T P O L 2
E X T P O L 2 -S T A T
E X T P O L 2 -P H IN E X T P O L 2 -L IM
C 1 3 7 4 /2
C 1 3 7 5 /2 E X T P O L 2 -P H O U T
E X T P O L 2 -D F O U T
fb_extpol2
Signal Source Note

EXTPOL2−PHIN ph 1425/2 ph 1374/1 Position input
EXTPOL2−STAT d 13461 − − HIGH = extrapolation on
LOW = new data at input −PHIN
EXTPOL2−LIM d 13462 − − HIGH = time limit of C1379 exceeded, extrapolation is cancelled or
master angle is in standstill
LOW = time limit not exceeded, master angle running
EXTPOL2−PHOUT ph 13461 − − Extrapolated position of input PHIN
EXTPOL2−DFOUT phd − − − Extrapolated speed difference signals
The output may be only used up to max. 10 extrapolation cycles per ms
(C1379 = max. 10 ms)
Tip!
Please observe the computing time of the FBs.
l 5 s (EXTPOL1)
l 10 s (EXTPOL2)
Function block interconnection

Function library
Function blocks
CAN-OUT2
Bit0
C0864/2
CAN-OUT2.W1 0
C0860/4
Byte 1,2
1
C0868/4
CAN-OUT2.W2 2
C0860/5
C0868/5
Bit15
FDO
C0116/1 FDO-0
C0865/2
...
16 bits
FDO-15 Low word
C0116/16 0
Byte 3,4
FDO-16
C0116/17 1
...
16 bits
High word 2
FDO-31
C0116/32
16 bits
Low word Bit31
CAN-OUT2.D1 X4
CDATA-XPOS C0861/2 Bit0
16 bits
C0869/2
High word
Byte 5,6
CAN-OUT2.W3
C0860/6
C0868/6
Bit15
Bit0
CAN-OUT2.W4 Byte 7,8

C0860/7
C0868/7
Bit15
9300kur087
Fig. 3−129 Master connection
CAN-IN2
CAN-IN2.W1
16 bits
C0866/4
CAN-IN2.W2
16 bits
Bit 0 C0866/5
CAN-IN2.B0
CAN-IN2.B1
C0863/3
.
Byte 1,2
.
16 .
binary CAN-IN2.B14
signals
CAN-IN2.B15
CAN-IN2.B16
Bit 15
C0863/4 CAN-IN2.B17
.
.
16 .
binary CAN-IN2.B30
signals
Byte 3,4
CAN-IN2.B31
16 bits
Low word C1379 EXTPOL2
EXTPOL2-STAT
CAN-IN2.D1 EXTPOL2-PHIN
C1374/2 EXTPOL2-LIM
X4 C1375/2 EXTPOL2-PHOUT
C0867/2 CDATA-XIN
16 bits EXTPOL2-ACTLEN CTRL EXTPOL2-DFOUT
C1374/3
High word C1375/3 EXTPOL2-X0
Byte 5,6
CAN-IN2.W3
16 bits
C0866/6
16 bits
Low word
CAN-IN2.D2
16 bits
High word
Byte 7,8
CAN-IN2.W4
16 bits
C0866/7
9300kur091
Fig. 3−130 Slave connection

Function library
Function blocks
Please see figures Fig. 3−129 and Fig. 3−130 for the interconnections of master and slave.
Differences to EXTPOL1:
l In the master only the X position (CDATA−X−POS) is sent
l The slave just receives the X position
Settings
l Code C1379
– Use C1379 to adapt the number of extrapolation cycles per ms to the cycle time of the bus.
STOP!
This function does not replace the monitoring of the bus system. The bus system should be
monitored with a "toggle bit".
Tip!
If, for instance, the transfer cycle is max. 5 ms, set at least 6 ms in C1379.
After the time set has been exceeded, the input EXTPOL2−PHIN is directly connected to the output
EXTPOL2−PHOUT. Only when new positions are detected at the input, the extrapolation restarts.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Digital up/down counter
C 1 1 0 0 F C N T 1
F C N T 1 -C L K U P F C N T 1 -O U T
C 1 1 0 2 /1
C 1 1 0 4 /1
F C N T 1 -C L K D W N
C 1 1 0 2 /2
C 1 1 0 4 /2 C T R L F C N T 1 -E Q U A L
F C N T 1 -L D -V A L
C 1 1 0 1 /1
C 1 1 0 3 /1
F C N T 1 -L O A D
C 1 1 0 2 /3
C 1 1 0 4 /3
F C N T 1 -C M P -V A L
C 1 1 0 1 /2
C 1 1 0 3 /2
Fig. 3−131 Free piece counter (FCNT1)
Signal Source Note

FCNT1−CLKUP d C1104/1 bin C1102/1 2 LOW−HIGH edge = counts up by 1
FCNT1−CLKDWN d C1104/2 bin C1102/2 2 LOW−HIGH edge = counts down by 1
FCNT1−LD−VAL a C1103/1 dec C1101/1 1 Starting value
FCNT1−LOAD d C1104/3 bin C1102/3 2 HIGH = Accept starting value
The input has the highest priority
FCNT1−CMP−VAL a C1103/2 dec C1101/2 1 Comparison value
FCNT1−OUT a − − − − Counter limited to ±199.99 % (¢ ±32767)
FCNT1−EQUAL d − − − − HIGH = comparison value reached
Function
l C1100 = 1
– If | counter content | | FCNT1−CMP−VAL | (comparison value), FCNT1−EQUAL is set = HIGH
for 1 ms. Afterwards the counter is reset to the starting value (FCNT1−LD−VAL).
) Note!
If the signal is to be available longer, e. g. for a query of the output via a PLC, you
can prolong the signal via the TRANS function block.
l C1100 = 2
– If | counter content | | FCNT1−CMP−VAL | (comparison value), the counter is stopped.
l C1100 = 3
– If | counter content| = | FCNT1−CMP−VAL | (comparison value), the counter is stopped.
– FCNT1−OUT is limited to 32767 for counting upwards and to −32767 for counting
downwards.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.52 Free codes (FCODE) of the measuring systems
3.2.52 Free codes (FCODE) of the measuring systems

A measuring system is described via the gearbox factor (numerator and denominator) and the feed
constant. These scaling factors have an effect on the conversion of units into increments.
The measuring systems have an effect on free codes.
Measuring system of the master phase (X axis)

l FCODE1476/1 ... FCODE1476/16
l Gearbox factor of the numerator: C1303/1
l Gearbox factor of the denomiator: C1303/2
l Feed constant: C1304
l The selection is effected in [m_units]
Measuring system of the actual value (Y axis)

l FCODE1477/1 ... FCODE1477/16
l Gearbox factor numerator: C1305/1
l Gearbox factor denomiator: C1305/2
l The selection is effected in [s_units]
Measuring system Z (Z axis)

l FCODE1478/1 ... FCODE1478/6
l Gearbox factor numerator: C1680/1
l Gearbox factor denomiator: C1680/2
l The selection is effected in [z_units]
) Note!
The Z measuring system has no effect on the profiles and displays.
The profiles are calculated in PC programs. If you want to calculate profiles via the
Z measuring system, you have to adapt the corresponding PC programs.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
This function block can be used to connect digital signals via C0151, the function block AIF−OUT and
function block CAN−OUT to the connected fieldbus systems.
FDO-0 FDO
C0116/1
FDO-1
C0116/2
FDO-2
C0116/3
FDO-3
C0116/4
FDO-4
C0116/5
FDO-5
C0116/6
FDO-6
C0116/7
FDO-7
C0116/8
FDO-8
C0116/9
FDO-9 C0151
C0116/10
FDO-10
C0116/11
FDO-11
C0116/12
FDO-12
C0116/13 AIF-OUT
FDO-13
C0116/14
FDO-14
C0116/15
FDO-15
C0116/16
FDO-16 CAN1-OUT
C0116/17
FDO-17
C0116/18
FDO-18
C0116/19
FDO-19
C0116/20 CAN2-OUT
FDO-20
C0116/21
FDO-21
C0116/22
FDO-22
C0116/23
FDO-23 CAN3-OUT
C0116/24
FDO-24
C0116/25
FDO-25
C0116/26
FDO-26
C0116/27
FDO-27
C0116/28
FDO-28
C0116/29
FDO-29
C0116/30
FDO-30
C0116/31
FDO-31
C0116/32
Fig. 3−132 Free digital outputs (FDO)

Function library
Function blocks
Signal Source Note

FDO−0 d C0151 hex C0116/1 2 1000
FDO−1 d C0151 hex C0116/2 2 1000
FDO−2 d C0151 hex C0116/3 2 1000
FDO−3 d C0151 hex C0116/4 2 1000
FDO−4 d C0151 hex C0116/5 2 1000
FDO−5 d C0151 hex C0116/6 2 1000
FDO−6 d C0151 hex C0116/7 2 1000
FDO−7 d C0151 hex C0116/8 2 1000
FDO−8 d C0151 hex C0116/9 2 1000
FDO−9 d C0151 hex C0116/10 2 1000
FDO−10 d C0151 hex C0116/11 2 1000
FDO−11 d C0151 hex C0116/12 2 1000
FDO−12 d C0151 hex C0116/13 2 1000
FDO−13 d C0151 hex C0116/14 2 1000
FDO−14 d C0151 hex C0116/15 2 1000
FDO−15 d C0151 hex C0116/16 2 1000
FDO−16 d C0151 hex C0116/17 2 1000
FDO−17 d C0151 hex C0116/18 2 1000
FDO−18 d C0151 hex C0116/19 2 1000
FDO−19 d C0151 hex C0116/20 2 1000
FDO−20 d C0151 hex C0116/21 2 1000
FDO−21 d C0151 hex C0116/22 2 1000
FDO−22 d C0151 hex C0116/23 2 1000
FDO−23 d C0151 hex C0116/24 2 1000
FDO−24 d C0151 hex C0116/25 2 1000
FDO−25 d C0151 hex C0116/26 2 1000
FDO−26 d C0151 hex C0116/27 2 1000
FDO−27 d C0151 hex C0116/28 2 1000
FDO−28 d C0151 hex C0116/29 2 1000
FDO−29 d C0151 hex C0116/30 2 1000
FDO−30 d C0151 hex C0116/31 2 1000
FDO−31 d C0151 hex C0116/32 2 1000
Function
You can freely select a digital signal source for every signal input.
l The corresponding bit in the data word (DWORD) is marked with FDO−x (e.g. FDO−0 for the
LSB and FDO−31 for the MSB).
l The DWORD is transferred to code C0151 and to the function blocks AIF−OUT, CAN−OUT1,
CAN−OUT2, and CAN−OUT3.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Transfer of analog signals to any code. At the same time, the FB converts the signal into the data
format of the target code.
C 1 0 9 1 F E V A N 1
C 1 0 9 5 C 1 0 9 2
F E V A N 1 -IN C 1 0 9 3
C 1 0 9 6 S & H (C x x x x /y y y )
C 1 0 9 4 +
C 1 0 9 8
C 1 0 9 0 C T R L F E V A N 1 -B U S Y
C 1 0 9 7 F E V A N 1 -F A IL
C 1 0 9 9
Signal Source Note

target code.
= LOW.
C 1 5 0 1 F E V A N 2
C 1 5 0 5 C 1 5 0 2
F E V A N 2 -IN C 1 5 0 3
C 1 5 0 6 S & H (C x x x x /y y y )
C 1 5 0 4 +
C 1 5 0 8
C 1 5 0 0 C T R L F E V A N 2 -B U S Y
C 1 5 0 7 F E V A N 2 -F A IL
C 1 5 0 9
Signal Source Note

target code.
= LOW.

Function library
Function blocks
Function
l Conversion of the read data via:
– Numerator, denominator.
– Offset.
l Selection of a target code for the read data.
Codes for the conversion of the read data and for the selection of the target code
Function block Numerator Denominator Offset Code Subcode Examples
FEVAN1 C1093 C1094 C1095 C1091 C1092
FEVAN2 C1503 C1504 C1505 C1501 C1502
Data transmission
Correct transmission Wrong transmission
FEVANx-FAIL
FEVANx-BUSY
FEVANx-LOAD
9300kur089
Fig. 3−135 Signal flow
Transmission errors may occur if

l the target code is not available,
l the target subcode is not available,
l the values transmitted are out of the target code limits,
l the target code is inhibited since it may only be written to if the controller is inhibited. Inhibit
the controller (see code table).
Cyclic data transmission

C 1 0 9 1 F E V A N 1
C 1 0 9 5 C 1 0 9 2
F E V A N 1 -IN C 1 0 9 3
C 1 0 9 6 S & H (C x x x x /y y y )
C 1 0 9 4 +
C 1 0 9 8
N O T 1 C 1 0 9 0 C T R L F E V A N 1 -B U S Y
N O T 1 -IN 1 N O T 1 -O U T F E V A N 1 -L O A D
C 0 8 4 0 C 1 0 9 7 F E V A N 1 -F A IL
C 0 8 4 1 C 1 0 9 9
Fig. 3−136 Example for a cyclic data transmission to a target code

Function library
Function blocks
Conversion
Conversion at the example of FB FEVAN1.
l The data format of the target code is important for the conversion (see attribute table).
l Adapt the input signal to the data format of the target code with:
– C1093 (numerator).
– C1094 (denominator).
l C1094 also determines the decimal positions of the target code:
– Set C1094 according to the existing decimal positions of the target code. The number of
decimal positions can be obtained from the code table.
– 0.0001 ¢ no decimal positions.
– 0.001 ¢ one decimal position.
– 0.01 ¢ two decimal positions.
– 0.1 ¢ three decimal positions.
– 1 ¢ four decimal positions.
l For target codes with % scaling the formula for conversion must include a scaling factor (see
example 1).

Function library
Function blocks
Example 1 (only for FIX32 format with % scaling):
C 1 0 9 1 F E V A N 1
C 1 0 9 5 C 1 0 9 2
F E V A N 1 -IN C 1 0 9 3
C 0 4 7 2 /1 C 1 0 9 6 S & H (C x x x x /y y y )
C 1 0 9 4 +
C 1 0 9 8
C 1 0 9 0 C T R L F E V A N 1 -B U S Y
C 0 4 7 1 .B 0 C 1 0 9 7 F E V A N 1 -F A IL
C 1 0 9 9
Fig. 3−137 Interconnection example of a circuit for FIX32 format with % scaling
Task:
l C0472/1 = 1.05 %. Write this value to C0141.
Configuration:
Parameter setting:
l Set C1091 = 141 (¢ C0141)
l C1093 = calculate numerator
l Set C1094 = 0.01 (two decimal positions)
Calculation:
FEVAN1–IN[%] @ 1 @ 16384 @ C1093 ) C1095 + C0141[%]

10000 100 C1094
Scaling factor Unit scaling factor
Control:
l Set C0471.B0 = 1 (¢ 00000001h) so that the data is transmitted to the target code.
Example for converting to C1093:
1.05% @ 10000 @ 100 @ C1094 @ 1 + C1093 + 0.6103

16384 1.05%
Setpoint in C0141 FEVAN1−IN
Display:
l C0141 = 1.00 %

Function library
Function blocks
Example 2 (only for FIX32 format without % scaling):

Task:
l C0473/1 = 1000. Write this value to C0011.
Configuration:
Parameter setting:
l Set C1091 = 11 (¢ C0011)
l Set C1093 = 1.0
l Set C1094 = 0.0001 (no decimal position)
The source code has no unit. The unit scaling factor is dropped.
Calculation:
FEVAN1–IN @ 1 @ C1093 ) C1095 + C0011[rpm]
10000 C1094
Scaling factor
1000 @ 1 @ 1.0 ) 0 + 1000rpm

10000 0.0001
Control:
l Set C0471.B0 = 1 (¢ 00000001h) so that the data is transmitted to the target code.
Display:
l C0011 displays the value 1000 rpm.
The other formats are calculated with the following formula:
FEVAN1–IN @ C1093 ) C1095 + x
C1094

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
This FB serves to program up to 15 fixed setpoints which can be retrieved via digital terminals or
control codes.
The fixed setpoints can e.g. be used for:
l different setpoint dancer positions for one dancer position control or
l different stretching ratios (gearbox factor) for a speed ratio control with digital frequency
coupling
FIXSET1-AIN FIXSET1
C0561
FIXSET1-IN1*1 C0560/1 FIXSET1-OUT
C0562/1 C0563 C0560/2
C0564/1 C0560/15
FIXSET1-IN2*2 DMUX
C0562/2 0
C0564/2 0 FIXSET1...15
15
FIXSET1-IN3*4
C0562/3 3
C0564/3
FIXSET1-IN4*8
C0562/4
C0564/4
Fig. 3−138 Fixed setpoint (FIXSET1)
Signal Source Note

FIXSET1−AIN a C0563 dec [%] C0561 1 1000 The input is switched to the output if a LOW
level is applied to all selection inputs
FIXSET−INx.
FIXSET1−IN1*1 d C0564/1 bin C0562/1 2 1000 The number of the inputs to be assigned
FIXSET1−IN2*2 d C0564/2 bin C0562/2 2 1000 depends on the number of the FIXSET
setpoints required.
FIXSET1−IN3*4 d C0564/3 bin C0562/3 2 1000
FIXSET1−IN4*8 d C0564/4 bin C0562/4 2 1000
FIXSET1−OUT a − − − − −
Function
The FB output can be used as a setpoint source (signal source) for another FB (e.g. process controller,
arithmetic block etc.). Parameter setting and handling are similar to JOG but independent of JOG (cp.
FB NSET).
l Parameter setting of the fixed setpoints:
– The single fixed setpoints are parameterised via the subcodes of C0560.
l Output of the fixed setpoint selected:
– If the binary inputs are triggered with HIGH signal, a fixed setpoint from the table is switched
to the output.
l Value range:
– The values for the fixed setpoint can be set between −200% and +200%.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.55.1 Release of the FIXSET1 setpoints

Number of the fixed setpoints required Number of inputs to be assigned
1 at least 1
1 ... 3 at least 2
4 ... 7 at least 3
8 ... 15 4
System for decoding the binary input signals:

FIXSET1−OUT = FIXSET1−IN1 FIXSET1−IN2 FIXSET1−IN3 FIXSET1−IN4
FIXSET1−Ain 0 0 0 0
C0560/1 1 0 0 0
C0560/2 0 1 0 0
C0560/3 1 1 0 0
C0560/4 0 0 1 0
C0560/5 1 0 1 0
C0560/6 0 1 1 0
C0560/7 1 1 1 0
C0560/8 0 0 0 1
C0560/9 1 0 0 1
C0560/10 0 1 0 1
C0560/11 1 1 0 1
C0560/12 0 0 1 1
C0560/13 1 0 1 1
C0560/14 0 1 1 1
C0560/15 1 1 1 1

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
This FB is a D flipflop. This function is used to evaluate and save digital signal edges.
FLIP1-D FLIP1
C0770
C0773/1 FLIP1-OUT
D Q
FLIP1-CLK
C0771
C0773/2 CLR
FLIP1-CLR
C0772
C0773/3
Signal Source Note

FLIP1−D d C0773/1 bin C0770 2 1000 −
highest priority
FLIP1−OUT d − − − − − −
FLIP2-D FLIP2
C0775
C0778/1 FLIP2-OUT
D Q
FLIP2-CLK
C0776
C0778/2 CLR
FLIP2-CLR
C0777
C0778/3
Signal Source Note

FLIP2−D d C0778/1 bin C0775 2 1000 −
highest priority
FLIP2−OUT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
FLIP3−D
FLIP3
C1060/1 FLIP3−OUT
C1061/1 D Q
FLIP3−CLK
C1060/2
C1061/2
FLIP3−CLR CLR
C1060/3
C1061/3
FB_flip3
Signal Source Note

FLIP3−D d C1061/1 bin C1060/1 2 1000 −
highest priority
FLIP3−OUT d − − − − − −
FLIP4
C1060/4 FLIP4−D FLIP4−OUT
C1061/4 D Q
FLIP4−CLK
C1060/5
C1061/5
FLIP4−CLR CLR
C1060/6
C1061/6
FB_flip4

FLIP4−D d C1061/4 bin C1060/4 2 1000 −
highest priority
FLIP4−OUT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
Function
FLIPx−D
FLIPx−CLK
FLIPx−OUT
Fig. 3−143 Function sequence of a flipflop
l The input FLIPx−CLR always has priority.

l If a HIGH level is applied at the input FLIPx−CLR, the output FLIPx−OUT is set to and
maintained at a LOW level al long as this input is at a HIGH level.
l With a LOW−HIGH edge at the input FLIPx−CLK, the level at the input FLIPx−D is switched to
the output and saved until
– another LOW−HIGH edge is applied at the input FLIPx−CLK or
– the input FLIPx−CLR is set to a HIGH level.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.57 Flipflop element (FLIPT)

Purpose
The function blockB is designed as D−flipflop. By means of this function, digital signal edges can be
evaluated and saved.
FLIPT1
C1060/7 FLIPT1−D FLIPT1−OUT
C1061/7 D Q
C1060/8 FLIPT1−CLK
C1061/8
clR
C1060/9 FLIPT1−CLR
C1061/9
fb_flipt1
Fig. 3−144 Flipflop element (FLIPT1)
Signal Source Note

FLIPT1−D d C1061/7 bin C1060/7 2 1000 −
FLIPT1−CLK d C1061/8 bin C1060/8 2 1000 Evaluates LOW−HIGH edges only
FLIPT1−CLR d C1061/9 bin C1060/9 2 1000 Evaluates LOW−HIGH edges only
FLIPT1−OUT d − − − − − −
FLIPT2
C1060/10 FLIPT2−D FLIPT2−OUT
C1061/10 D Q
C1060/11 FLIPT2−CLK
C1061/11
FLIPT2−CLR clR
C1060/12
C1061/12
fb_flipt2
Fig. 3−145 Flipflop element (FLIPT2)

FLIPT2−D d C1061/10 bin C1060/10 2 1000 −
FLIPT2−CLK d C1061/11 bin C1060/11 2 1000 Evaluates LOW−HIGH edges only
FLIPT2−CLR d C1061/12 bin C1060/12 2 1000 Evaluates LOW−HIGH edges only
FLIPT2−OUT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
Function
FLIPTx−D
FLIPTx−CLK
FLIPTx−CLR
FLIPTx−OUT
Fig. 3−146 Function sequence of the FLIPTx flipflop element
l Via a LOW−HIGH edge at input FLIPTx−CLK, the level at the input FLIPTx−D is switched to the
output FLIPTx−OUT.
l The output FLIPTx−OUT is reset to LOW by means of a LOW−HIGH edge at input FLIPTx−CLR.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Compensates elasticities in the drive train (e.g. gearbox torsion).
Implementation of an adaptive linkage of e.g. the phase setpoint (32 bits) and the torque feedforward
control (14 bits).
G E A R C O M P
C 1 2 6 0
G E A R C O M P -T O R Q U E 1 4 1 5
2 + 2 -1
C 1 2 6 5 C 1 2 6 1
+ C 1 2 6 2
C 1 2 6 8 0 1 5
V o r z e ic h e n -2 + 1
G E A R C O M P -P H I-IN + G E A R C O M P -O U T
C 1 2 6 6
+
C 1 2 6 9
Fig. 3−147 Gearbox compensation (GEARCOMP)

GEARCOMP−TORQUE a C1268 dec [%] C1265 2 Input value
GEARCOMP−PHI−IN ph C1269 dec [inc] C1266 3
GEARCOMP−OUT ph − − − − Outputs the compensated phase setpoint.
Function
l The signal at GEARCOMP−TORQUE is broken down into the absolute value and the sign.
– The absolute value is limited to 214 (+16384) first.
l The absolute value is converted (via C1260, C1261, C1262).
l The result is evaluated with the sign and is added to the signal at GEARCOMP−PHI−IN.
Codes for the conversion of the absolute value:
Code Function Selection Comment
C1260 Offset −16383 {1} 16383
C1261 Numerator −32767 {1} 32767 Dynamic disconnection at C1261 = 0
(GEARCOMP−PHI−IN = GEARCOMP−OUT)
C1262 Denominator 1 {1} 32767

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
This FB is used to limit signals to adjustable value ranges.
C0630 LIM1
LIM1-IN LIM1-OUT
C0632
C0633
C0631
Fig. 3−148 Limiting element (LIM1)
Signal Source Note

LIM1−IN1 a C0633 dec [%] C0632 1 1000 −
LIM1−OUT a − − − − − −
Function
l If the input signal exceeds the upper limit (C0630), the upper limit is effective.
l If the input signal falls below the lower limit (C0631), the lower limit is effective.
Tip!
The lower limit (C0631) must be smaller than the upper limit (C0630).

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.60 Limiting element (LIMPHD1)

Purpose
Speed limitation without position loss.
C1085 C1084/1 LIMPHD1

LIMPHD1-RESET
C1080/1
C1081/1 LIMPHD1-DFOUT
LIMPHD1-DFIN LIMPHD1-LIM
C1082/1 CTRL
LIMPHD1-DIFF
C1083/1
LIMPHD1-NO-LIM
C1080/2
C1081/2
C1084/2
fb_limphd1
Fig. 3−149 Limiting element (LIMPHD1)
Signal Source Note

LIMPHD1−RESET d C1081/1 bin C1080/1 2 1000 HIGH = overflow buffer is cleared
Input has the highest priority
LIMPHD1−NO−LIM d C1081/2 bin C1080/2 2 1000 HIGH = The limitation set via C1084/1 and
C1084/2 is switched off
The overflow buffer is cleared. The position
gets lost.
LIMPHD1−DFIN phd C1083/1 dec [rpm] C1082/1 4 1000 Input of the speed setpoint
LIMPHD1−DFOUT phd − − − − − Output of speed setpoint
LIMPHD1−LIM d − − − − − HIGH = Signal at LIMPHD1−DFOUT is
limited. Condition:
LIMPHD1−NO−LIM = 0 and
LIMPHD1−RESET = 0.
(Function is available as of software version
3.4)
LIMPHD1−DIFF ph − − − − − Output of the difference in position in [inc]
between input signal at LIMPHD1−DFIN and
output signal at LINPHD1−DFOUT
(Function is available as of software version
3.4)

Function library
Function blocks
Function
An active speed limitation results in a position loss of the cam (e.g. compared with the master drive).
While the speed limitation is active (asynchronous status), the overflow buffer is being filled.
The overflow buffer is cleared again if the signal at LIMPHD1−DFIN is lower then the upper and higher
than the lower limit value.
l The speed limitation can be set via C1084/1 and C1084/2.
– The speed is limited to the set maximum value via C1084/1.
– The speed is limited to the set minimum value via C1084/2.
– The lower limit (C1084/2) must be smaller than the upper limit (C1084/1).
l LIMPHD1−NO−LIM = HIGH is used to switch off the parameterisable limitation. The speed
signal is limited to ±29999 rpm.
– If C1085 = 0 (Lenze setting), the overflow buffer is cleared. The position gets lost.
– If C1085 = 1, the overflow buffer is cleared. The increments at output LIMPHD1−DFOUT. The
position is not lost.
– Code C1085 is available from the software version 3.4.
l If LIMPHD1−RESET = HIGH, the overflow buffer is cleared. The input has the highest priority.
– The limitations set via C1084/1 and C1084/2 remain active.
) Note!
The overflow buffer behaves according to the cycle of numbers (32 bits).

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
This function block controls the drive machine consisting of angle controller, speed controller, and
motor control.
MCTRL
DCTRL-QSP >
–1 MCTRL-QSP-OUT
MCTRL-QSP
C0900
C0042
C0907/3 MCTRL-NSET2
MCTRL-HI-M-LIM C0050 MCTRL-MMAX
C0893
MCTRL-MSET2
MCTRL-LO-M-LIM C0906/4
C0892
C0056 MCTRL-MACT
MCTRL-N/M-SWT C0906/3
C0899
MCTRL-IACT
C0902 C0054 MCTRL-IMAX
MCTRL-I-SET C0907/4
C0901 MCTRL-DCVOLT
C0105 C0906/8 C0053
QSP
C0909
±100%
1 + + +
1 VECT-CTRL PWM
MCTRL-N-SET 0
0 0
C0890 + - + 1
C0906/1
C0254
C0072 C0006 C0018
MCTRL-P-ADAPT C0070 C0022
C0903
C0071 C0075
C0906/9 C0076
MCTRL-PHI-SET 0 C0077
C0894 1 C0086 C0078
C0081
C0908 - C0084
MCTRL-PHI-LIM + C0085
C0895 C0087
C0906/5 C0088
MCTRL-PHI-ON C0089
C0897 C0090
C0907/1 C0091 MCTRL-LOAD-I2xt
MCTRL-N2-LIM
C0896
C0906/6 C0066
MCTRL-M-ADD
C0891 MCTRL-UTILIZATION
C0906/2
CONST C0064
MCTRL-FLD-WEAK
C0898 MCTRL-PHI-ANA
C0906/7
C0497
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
X7 Resolver
MCTRL-NACT
C0051 MCTRL-PHI-ANG
X8 Encoder C0420 C0011
C0490 C0025
C0495
fb_mctrl
Fig. 3−150 Internal motor control (MCTRL)

Function library
Function blocks
Signal Source Note

MCTRL−PHI−SET ph C0908 dec [inc] C0894 3 1000 Angle controller input for difference of
setpoint angle to actual angle
MCTRL−N−SET a C0906/1 dec [%] C0890 1 5050 Speed setpoint input
MCTRL−M−ADD a C0906/2 dec [%] C0891 1 1000 Additional torque setpoint or torque
setpoint
MCTRL−LO−MLIM a C0906/3 dec [%] C0892 1 5700 Lower torque limitation in % of C0057
MCTRL−HI−MLIM a C0906/4 dec [%] C0893 1 19523 Upper torque limitation in % of C0057
MCTRL−PHI−LIM a C0906/5 dec [%] C0895 1 1006 Influence of angle controller in % of nmax
C0011
MCTRL−N2−LIM a C0906/6 dec [%] C0896 1 1000 Lower speed limit at speed limitation
MCTRL−FLDWEAK a C0906/7 dec [%] C0898 1 1006 Motor excitation
MCTRL−I−SET a C0906/8 dec [%] C0901 1 1006 Input for setting the I component of the
speed controller
MCTRL−P−ADAPT a C0906/9 dec [%] C0903 1 1006 Influence in % on VP of C0254, the absolute
value is processed (without sign)
MCTRL−PHI−ON d C0907/1 bin C0897 2 1000 HIGH = Activation of angle controller
MCTRL−N/M−SWT d C0907/2 bin C0899 2 1000 LOW = active speed control
HIGH = active torque control
MCTRL−QSP d C0907/3 bin C0900 2 10250 HIGH = drive performs QSP
MCTRL−I−LOAD d C0907/4 bin C0902 2 1000 HIGH = I component of the n−controller is
accepted by MCTRL−I−SET
MCTRL−QSP−OUT d − − − − − HIGH = drive performs QSP
MCTRL−NSET2 a − − − − − In % of nmax (C0011)
MCTRL−MMAX d − − − − − HIGH = speed controller operates within the
limits
MCTRL−MSET2 a − − − − − In % of Mmax (C0057)
MCTRL−MACT a − − − − − In % of Mmax (C0057)
MCTRL−IACT a − − − − − MCTRL−IACT = 100 % = C0022
MCTRL−IMAX d − − − − − HIGH = drive operates at the current limit
C0022
MCTRL−DCVOLT a − − − − − 100 % = 1000 V
MCTRL−LOAD−I2xt a − − − − − I2 × t utilisation of the motor in %
MCTRL−UTILIZATION a − − − − − Device utilisation I × t in %
MCTRL−PHI−ANA a − − − − − Actual angle value as analog signal
90° = 100 %
MCTRL−PHI−ACT phd − − − − −
MCTRL−NACT a − − − − − In % of nmax (C0011)
MCTRL−PHI−ANG ph − − − − − 65536 inc = one revolution

Function library
Function blocks
Function
l Current controller
l Torque limitation
l Additional torque setpoint
l Speed controller
l Torque control with speed limitation
l Speed setpoint limitation
l Angle controller
l Quick stop QSP
l Field weakening
l Switching frequency changeover
3.2.61.1 Current controller

Adapt current controller via C0075 (proportional gain) and C0076 (reset time) to the machine
connected.
) Note!
Use C0086 to select a suitable motor from the motor selection list. In this way, the
parameters of the current controller are automatically set to the correct values.
3.2.61.2 Additional torque setpoint

The input MCTRL−M−ADD serves as torque setpoint or additional torque setpoint, depending on the
control of the input MCTRL−N/M−SWT. The additional torque setpoint can be used e.g. for friction
compensation or speed injection (dv/dt).
l When MCTRL−N/M−SWT = LOW the speed control is active.
– MCTRL−M−ADD is added to the output of the n−controller.
– The limits defined by the torque limitations MCTRL−LO−M−LIM and MCTRL−HI−M−LIM
cannot be exceeded.
l When MCTRL−N/M−SWT = HIGH, the torque control is active.
– MCTRL−M−ADD acts as torque setpoint
– The n−controllers have a monitoring function.
l The torque setpoint is specified in [%] of the max. possible torque (see C0057).
– Negative values mean a torque with CCW rotation of the motor.
– Positive values mean a torque with CW rotation of the motor.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.61.3 Torque limitation

Via the inputs MCTRL−LO−M−LIM and MCTRL−HI−M−LIM an external torque limitation can be set.
This serves to set different torques for the quadrants "driving" and "braking".
l MCTRL−HI−M−LIM is the upper torque limit in [%] of the max. possible torque (C0057).
l MCTRL−LO−M−LIM is the lower torque limit in [%] of the max. possible torque (C0057).
l In case of quick stop (QSP) the torque limitation is deactivated.
( Stop!
Only apply positive values to MCTRL−HI−M−LIM and negative values to
MCTRL−LO−M−LIM. Otherwise the speed controller may lose control and the drive
may rev up in an uncontrolled manner.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.61.4 Speed controller

The speed controller is designed as an ideal PID controller.
Parameter setting
If you select a motor via C0086, the parameters are preset so that only a few (if any) adaptations to
the application are necessary.
l Parameterisation of the proportional gain Vp in C0070:
– Enter approx. 50 % of the speed setpoint
– Increase C0070 until the drive becomes unstable (observe motor noises)
– Reduce C0070 until the drive runs stable again
– Reduce C0070 to approx. 50 %
l Parameterisation of the reset time Tn in C0071:
– Reduce C0071 until the drive becomes unstable (observe motor noises)
– Increase C0071 until the drive runs stable again
– Set C0071 to the double value
l Parameterisation of the derivative gain Td in C0072:
– Increase C0072 during operation until an optimum behaviour is achieved.
Signal limitation
When the drive outputs the max. torque, the speed controller operates within the limits.
l The drive cannot follow the speed setpoint.
l This state is indicated with MCTRL−MMAX = HIGH.
Setting the integral component

To enter defined starting values for the torque the integral component of the n−controller can be set
externally (e.g. when using the brake control).
l MCTRL−I−LOAD = HIGH
– The n−controller accepts the value at input MCTRL−I−SET as its integral component.
– The value at input MCTRL−I−SET acts as a torque setpoint for the motor control.
l MCTRL−I−LOAD = LOW
– Function is switched off.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.61.5 Torque control with speed limitation

This function is activated with MCTRL−N/M−SWT = HIGH. A second speed controller (auxiliary speed
controller) is connected for the speed limitation.
l MCTRL−M−ADD acts as bipolar torque setpoint.
l The n−controller 1 is used to create the upper speed limit.
– The upper speed limit is selected at the input MCTRL−N−SET in [%] of nmax (C0011) (pos.
sign for CW rotation).
– The upper speed limit is only to be used for CW rotation.
l The n−controller (auxiliary speed controller) is used to form the lower speed limit
– The lower speed limit is selected at the input MCTRL−N2−LIM in [%] of nmax (C0011) (neg.
sign for CCW rotation).
– The lower speed limit is only to be used for CCW rotation.
3.2.61.6 Speed setpoint limitation

The speed setpoint is limited to ±100 % of nmax (C0011) at the MCTRL−N−SET input.
C0909 is used to set a limitation of the direction of rotation for the speed setpoint.

Function library
Function blocks

The angle controller is required to achieve angular synchronism and drift−free standstill.
) Note!
Select a configuration with digital frequency coupling in C0005 since this serves to
link all important signals automatically. On this basis the system can be optimised.
Activating the angle controller

1. Configure a signal source with C0894, which provides the angular difference between setpoint
and actual angle (see "Digital frequency configuration under C0005).
2. Select a value > 0 at the MCTRL−PHI−LIM input.
3. Trigger the input MCTRL−PHI−ON with HIGH (e.g. with FIXED1).
4. Set the gain of the angle controller > 0 in C0254 (see chapter 3.2.61.4)
– Before setting C0254, select an as high as possible P−gain for the n−controller in C0070.
– Increase C0254 during operation until the drive shows the required control response.
Influence of angle controller

The output of the angle controller is added to the speed setpoint.
l If the actual angle is lagging, the drive is accelerated
l If the actual angle is leading the drive is decelerated until the required angular synchronism is
achieved.
The influence of the angle controller consists of:
l Angular difference multiplied by the P−gain C0254
l Additional influence via analog signal at MCTRL−P−ADAPT
l Limitation of the angle controller output to ±MCTRL−PHI−LIM
Limitation of the angle controller output

This limits the max. speed−up of the drive at high angular differences.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.61.8 Quick stop QSP

The QSP function is used to stop the drive within an adjustable time independently of the setpoint
selection.
The QSP function is active
l if the input MCTRL−QSP is triggered with HIGH.
l if the controller is triggered via the control words (DCTRL).
Function:
l If torque control has been selected, it will be deactivated. The drive is controlled by the speed
controller.
l The speed runs with the deceleration time set under C0105 to zero speed.
l The torque limitations MCTRL−LO−M−LIM and MCTRL−HI−M−LIM are deactivated.
l The angle controller is activated. If the rotor position is shifted actively, the drive generates a
torque against this displacement if:
– C0254 is not zero
– The input MCTRL−PHI−LIM is triggered with a value > 0 %.
( Stop!
If the field is weakened manually (MCTRL−FLD−WEAK < 100%), the drive is unable
to generate the max. torque.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.61.9 Field weakening

The field weakening range does not need to be set if the motor type has been set in C0086. In this
case all settings required are made automatically. The motor is operated in the field weakening mode
if
l the output voltage of the controller exceeds the rated motor voltage set in C0090,
l the controller cannot increase the output voltage with rising speed any more because of the
mains voltage / DC−bus voltage.
Manual field weakening

A manual field weakening is possible via the input MCTRL−FLD−WEAK. For reaching the maximum
excitation this input must be triggered with +100 % (e.g. FIXED100%).
( Stop!
The available torque is reduced by the field weakening.
3.2.61.10 Switching frequency changeover

The switching frequency of the inverter can be selected:
l 8 kHz fixed, for power−optimised operation (C0018 = 1)
– maximum power output of the controller, but with audible pulse operation
l 16 kHz fixed, for noise−optimised operation (C0018 = 2)
– inaudible pulse operation of the controller, but with reduced power output (torque)
l Automatic changeover between power−optimised and noise−optimised operation (C0018 = 0)
Automatic switching frequency changeover

The automatic switching frequency changeover can be used if the drive is to be operated in the
noise−optimised range, but the available torque is not sufficient for acceleration processes.
Condition M = f(I) Function
M < MN16 (IN16) Controller is operated with 16 kHz (noise−optimised)
MN16 (IN16) < M < MN8 (IN8) Controller switches over to 8 kHz (power−optimised)
M > Mmax8 (Imax8) Controller operates with 8 kHz in the current limitation

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
If the supply voltage via L1, L2, L3 or +UG, −UG fails, the drive (drive network) can be decelerated
(braked) in a controlled way. Without this function, the drive (drive network) would coast.
MFAIL-ADAPT MFAIL
C0973
C988/2 C0980 Vp
MFAIL-CONST -
C0974 +
C988/3 C0982 MCRTL-
DCVOLT
MFAIL-DC-SET -
C0978 +
C0988/7
C0981 Tn
MFAIL-N-SET 1
C0970 MFAIL-NOUT
0
C0988/1
C0983
MFAIL-FAULT
C0971
C0989/1
MFAIL-RESET
C0972
C0989/2
MFAIL-THRESHOLD CTRL
C0975
MFAIL-STATUS
C0988/4
MFAIL-NACT
C0976
MFAIL-I-RESET
C0988/5
MFAIL-SET
C0977
C0988/6
Fig. 3−151 Mains failure control (MFAIL)
Signal Source Note

MFAIL−N−SET a C0988/1 dec [%] C0970 1 1000 Speed setpoint in [%] of C0011
MFAIL−ADAPT a C0988/2 dec [%] C0973 1 1000 Dynamic adaptation of the proportional
gain of the UGset controller in [%] of C0980
MFAIL−KONST a C0988/3 dec [%] C0974 1 1000 Proportional gain of the UGset controller in
[%] of C0980
MFAIL−THRESHOLD a C0988/4 dec [%] C0975 1 1000 Restart threshold in [%] of C0011
MFAIL−NACT a C0988/5 dec [%] C0976 1 1000 Comparison value for the restart threshold
in [%] of C0011
MFAIL−SET a C0988/6 dec [%] C0977 1 1000 Speed starting point for the deceleration in
[%] of C0011
MFAIL−DC−SET a C0988/7 dec [%] C0978 1 1000 Voltage setpoint on which the DC bus
voltage is to be maintained, 100% =
1000V
MFAIL−FAULT d C0989/1 bin C0971 2 1000 HIGH = activates the mains failure control
MFAIL−RESET d C0989/2 bin C0972 2 1000 HIGH = reset
MFAIL−N−OUT a − − − − − Speed setpoint in [%] of C0011
MFAIL−STATUS d − − − − − HIGH = mains failure control active
MFAIL−I−RESET d − − − − − HIGH = mains failure control active, the
drive is braking

Function library
Function blocks
Range of functions
l Mains failure detection
l Mains failure control
l Restart protection
l Reset of the mains failure control
l Dynamic adaptation of the control parameters
l Fast mains recovery (auto reclosure)
l Application examples
3.2.62.1 Mains failure detection

A failure of the controller’s power supply can be detected by
l evaluating the DC−bus voltage or
l an external system for mains failure detection (e.g. 934X supply module or voltage measuring
relay).
It is possible to combine the two methods.
The type of the mains failure detection to be used depends on the drive system used.
DC−bus voltage evaluation

Use with single drives or multi−axis drives, which do not use external monitoring systems.
l For this you can use a comparator (e.g. CMP2). Link the signals as follows:
– C0971 = 10655 (CMP2−OUT to MFAIL−FAULT)
Enter the function blocks CMP2 and MFAIL into free positions of the processing table in C0465.
MFAIL
C0685 CMP2 MFAIL-N-SET 1
C0686 C0970 MFAIL-NOUT
C0687 0
C0988/1
CMP2-IN1 CMP2-OUT MFAIL-FAULT
C0472/20 C0688/1 C0971
C0689/1 C0989/1 CTRL
CMP2-IN2 MFAIL-RESET
MCTRL-DCVOLT C0688/2 C0972
C0989/2
C0689/2
Fig. 3−152 Example of a mains failure detection with internal function blocks (section)

Function library
Function blocks
External system for mains failure detection (934x supply module)

l A digital output of the supply module 934x is connected to the function block MFAIL via the
digital inputs DIGIN of the controller 93XX. In the example the input X5/E4 is used. For this
purpose link the signals as follows:
– C0971 = 54 (DIGIN4 to MFAIL−FAULT)
– C0871 = 1000 (remove DCTRL−TRIP−SET from terminal X5/E4)
– Select level (HIGH or LOW active) with C0114/4
Enter the function block MFAIL into a free position of the processing table in C0465.
X5 DIGIN DCTRL -X5/28 MFAIL
28
DIGIN1 MFAIL-N-SET 1
E1 C0970 MFAIL-NOUT
C0114/1...5 DIGIN2
E2 C0988/1
0
E3 0 DIGIN3
MFAIL-FAULT
E4 1 DIGIN4 C0971
E5 DIGIN5 C0989/1 CTRL
C0443 MFAIL-RESET
C0972
C0989/2
Fig. 3−153 Example of a mains failure detection by an external monitoring system
Combination of the two methods

l The combination of both processes is done via an OR operation with an internal function
block. In the example, OR5 is used. For this, link the signals as follows:
– C0838/1 = 10655 (CMP2−OUT to OR5−IN1)
– C0838/2 = 54 (DIGIN5 to OR5−IN2)
– C0971 = 10570 (OR5−OUT to MFAIL−FAULT)
Enter the function blocks CMP2, OR5 and MFAIL into free positions of the processing table in C0465.
X5 DIGIN DCTRL -X5/28
28
E1 DIGIN1
C0114/1...5 DIGIN2
E2
E3 0 DIGIN3
E4 1 DIGIN4 MFAIL
E5 DIGIN5 OR5-IN1 OR5 MFAIL-N-SET 1
C0838/1 C0970 MFAIL-NOUT
C0443 0
C0839/1 C0988/1
OR5-IN2 ³1 OR5-OUT MFAIL-FAULT
FIXED0 C0838/2 C0971
C0839/2 C0989/1 CTRL
C0685 CMP2 OR5-IN3 MFAIL-RESET
C0838/3 C0972
C0686
C0687 C0839/3 C0989/2
CMP2-IN1 CMP2-OUT
C0472/20 C0688/1
C0689/1
CMP2-IN2
MCTRL-DCVOLT C0688/2
C0689/2
Fig. 3−154 Example of a mains failure detected by different sources

Function library
Function blocks
Integration of the function block into the signal flow of the controller
As an example, the function block is integrated into the basic configuration C0005 = 1000 (speed
control).
MFAIL−ADAPT MFAIL
FIXED0% C0973
C988/2 C0980 Vp
MFAIL−CONST −
FIXED100% C0974 +
C988/3 C0982 MCRTL−
DCVOLT
MFAIL−DC−SET −
C1472/19 C0978
+
C0988/7
C0981 TN
MFAIL−N−SET 1
NSET−NOUT C0970 MFAIL−NOUT
0 MCTRL−n−set
C0988/1
C0983
MFAIL−FAULT
CMP2−OUT C0971
C0989/1
MFAIL−RESET
DIGIN5 C0972
C0989/2
MFAIL−THRESHOLD CTRL
C0472/18 C0975
MFAIL−STATUS
C0988/4
MFAIL−NACT
MCTRL−nact C0976
MFAIL−I−RESET
C0988/5 MCTRL−i−load
MFAIL−SET
MCTRL−nact C0977
C0988/6
9300kur024
Fig. 3−155 Integration into basic configuration C0005 = 1000
1. Create speed setpoint path C0970 = 5050 (NSET−NOUT to MFAIL−N−SET)

C0890 = 6100 (MFAIL−NOUT to MCTRL−N−SET)
2. Start value selection (here: act. speed value) C0977 = 6100 (MFAIL−NOUT to MFAIL−SET)
3. Selection of setpoint source for DC−bus voltage (here: C0978 = 19539 (C0472/19 to MFAIL−DC−SET)
freely connectable code FCODE C0472/19)
4. Selection of source which activates the mains failure see chapter 3.2.62.1
control
5. Create proportional gain and adaptation DC−bus voltage C0974 = 1006 (FIXED100% to MFAIL−CONST)
controller C0973 = 1000 (FIXED0% to MFAIL−ADAPT)
6. Implement restart protection C0976 = 6100 (MFAIL−NACT to MCTRL−NACT)
C0975 = 19538 (C0472/18 to MFAIL−THRESHLD)
First enter approx. 2 % under C0472/18 (reference: nmax C0011)
7. Connect reset input (here with terminal X5/E5 C0972 = 55 (DIGIN5 to MFAIL−RESET)
TRIP−RESET)
8. Enter all function blocks used (except for codes and digital inputs DIGIN) into free positions of the processing table in C0465.
) Note!
All settings must be saved non−volatilely in a parameter set under C0003.

Function library
Function blocks
Activation
l MFAIL−FAULT = HIGH activates the mains failure control.
l MFAIL−FAULT = LOW triggers a timing element. After the time set under C0983 has elapsed,
the mains failure control is completed/cancelled (see description of mains recovery,
chapter 3.2.62.6).
– The drive is accelerated to the speed setpoint if the restart protection is not active.
– The drive is continued to be braked to zero speed if the restart protection is active (see
description for restart protection, chapter 3.2.62.3).
– If the restart protection is active, the drive can only be reset by a HIGH level signal at the
MFAIL−RESET input.
Function
The controller generates the operational energy required from the rotational energy of the driving
machine. The driving machine is braked via the power loss of the controller and the motor. Thus, the
speed deceleration ramp is shorter than with a non−controlled system (coasting drive).
With the activation,
l the DC bus voltage is controlled to the value at the MFAIL−DC−SET input.
l an internally generated speed setpoint is output at output MFAIL−N−OUT. This serves to brake
the drive (via the speed setpoint) to a speed of almost zero.
– Starting value for the controlled deceleration is the value at input MFAIL−SET. This input is
generally connected to the output MCTRL−NACT (actual speed value) or MCTRL−NSET2,
MFAIL−NOUT (speed setpoint).
– The speed deceleration ramp (and thus the brake torque) results from the moment of inertia
of the driven machine(s), the power loss of the drive (drive network), and the
parameterisation.
( STOP!
l If a connected braking unit is activated, the drive is braked with the max. possible
torque (Imax). In this case, it may be necessary to adapt the parameter setting
(see description for parameter setting).
l If the power stage is not supplied, the drive cannot generate a standstill torque
(important for active loads such as hoists).

Function library
Function blocks
Parameter setting
The parameters to be set depend strongly on the motor used, the inertia of the driven machine and
the drive configuration (single drive, drive network, master/slave operation etc.). For this reason, this
function must be adjusted to the prevailing application case.
The following specifications refer to chapter 3.2.62.1.
Important settings prior to the initial commissioning:
1. Save the previous setting in a parameter set (e.g. parameter set 4)
( STOP!
For the internal voltage supply of the terminals (C0005 = xx1x), the terminal X6/63 is
used as a voltage source for external potentiometers. In this case, measure at the
terminals +UG, −UG.
2. Measure the DC−bus voltage with an oscilloscope (channel 1)

– with a suitable voltage divider across terminals +UG, −UG. or
– by outputting the DC−bus voltage e.g. to terminal X6/62. For this purpose set C0436 = 5005
(MCTRL−DCVOLT). 1 V at terminal X6/63 = 100 V across +UG, −UG.
3. Measure the speed with an oscilloscope (channel 2)
– by outputting the speed e.g. to terminal X6/62 (standard setting). For this purpose set
C0431 = 5001 (MCTRL−NACT). 10 V at terminal X6/62 = nmax (C0011).
4. Select the operating threshold for the mains failure detection in C0472/20. The selection
depends on the setting in C0173.
– Set the operating threshold approx. 50 V above the switch−off threshold LU (example for
C0173 = 0.1; C0472/20 = 48 % ¢ 480 V).

Function library
Function blocks
FB_mfail_7
Message LU Message OU
Mains voltage range C0173

< 400 V 0 285 V 430 V 755 V 770 V
400 V 1 285 V 430 V 755 V 770 V
400 V ... 460 V 2 328 V 473 V 755 V 770 V
480 V without brake chopper 3 342 V 487 V 755 V 770 V
Operation with brake chopper (up to 480 V) 4 342 V 487 V 785 V 800 V
DC−bus voltage (UZK)
( STOP!
This setpoint must be below the operating threshold of a possibly connected
braking unit. If a connected braking unit is activated, the drive will be braked with
the max. possible torque (Imax). The desired operational performance gets lost.
5. Set the setpoint to which the DC bus voltage is to be controlled:

– Set the setpoint to approx. 700 V (C0472/19 = 70 %).

Function library
Function blocks
Commissioning
The commissioning should be carried out with motors without load.
1. The drive can be started with a LOW−HIGH edge at X5/E5.
2. Set the acceleration time Tir:
– Set speed setpoint to 100%, operate controller with maximum speed.
– Inhibit controller via terminal X5/28 (you can also use any other controller inhibit source,
CINH) and measure deceleration time until standstill.
– Set approx. 1/10 of the deceleration time in C0982.
3. Set the retrigger time
l In case of mains failure detection by detecting the DC bus voltage level:
– Set measured deceleration time from (step 2.) under C0983.
l In case of mains failure detection via an external system (e.g. supply module 934X):
– Under C0983, you can set the time in which the drive is to be continued to be braked in a
controlled way for short−term mains recovery.
4. Switch off supply voltage (mains or DC bus).
The oscilloscope should display the following characteristic:
0
t
U G S w itc h - o ff th r e s h o ld O U
S w itc h - o n th r e s h o ld b r a k e u n it
M F A IL -D C -S E T
O p e r a tin g th r e s h o ld
C M P 2 -O U T S w itc h - o ff th r e s h o ld L U
0
t1 t2 t
Fig. 3−156 Schematic representation with activated mains failure control (ideal characteristic)
t1 Mains failure
t2 Zero speed reached

Function library
Function blocks
Fine adjustment
0
t
U G S w itc h - o ff th r e s h o ld O U
S w itc h - o n th r e s h o ld b r a k e u n it
M F A IL -D C -S E T
O p e r a tin g th r e s h o ld
C M P 2 -O U T S w itc h - o ff th r e s h o ld L U
0
t1 t2 t3 t
Fig. 3−157 Schematic representation with different brake torques

t = t1 Mains failure
t = t2 Zero speed with higher braking torque (short adjustment time)
t = t3 Drive reaches the LU switch−off threshold with lower brake torque (higher adjustment time)
without reaching speed 0
t > t3 Drive is no longer controlled (is braked by friction)
Repeat the following steps several times.

1. Obtain a very low final speed before the controller reaches the undervoltage threshold LU:
– Increase the proportional gain MFAIL Vp (C0980).
– Decrease the reset time MFAIL Tn (C0981).
2. Avoid activation of the brake unit or the overvoltage threshold on:
– Increase the reset time MFAIL Tn (C0981) until the characteristic in Fig. 3−156 is almost
reached.
– Additionally reduce the setpoint of the DC bus voltage at the input MFAIL−DC−SET (in the
example C0472/19), if necessary.

Function library
Function blocks
3. Increase of the deceleration time or reduction of the brake torque (see Fig. 3−157) is only
possible with restrictions:
– An increase of the acceleration time MFAIL Tir (C0982) reduces the initial brake torque and
simultaneously increases the deceleration time.
– Increasing the reset time MFAIL Tn (C0981) decreases the braking torque and
simultaneously increases the deceleration time. If C0981 contains too high reset times, the
controller runs into the LU threshold before speed 0 is reached. Thus, the drive is not
controlled anymore.
4. If required, relink the signals to the outputs of the controller (terminals X6).
) Note!
All settings must be saved non−volatilely in a parameter set under C0003.
3.2.62.3 Restart protection

The integrated restart protection is to avoid a restart in the lower speed range, after the supply voltage
was interrupted for a short time only (mains recovery before the drive has come to standstill).
l How to protect the drive from a restart is explained in chapter 3.2.62.2.
l In C0472/18 you can enter the threshold in [%] of nmax (C0011) below which you do not want
the drive to restart.
– Speed at mains recovery < threshold in C0472/18: Drive is continued to be braked in a
controlled way. This function can only be terminated by MFAIL−RESET = HIGH.
– Speed after mains recovery > threshold in C0472/18 Drive accelerates to its setpoint along
the set ramps.
l The function is deactivated by:
– C0472/18 = 0 % or
– C0975 = 1000 (FIXED0% to MFAIL−THRESHLD)
l Reset with MFAIL−RESET = HIGH
– is required after every mains connection
– is displayed by MFAIL−STATUS = HIGH, if MFAIL−FAULT = LOW
3.2.62.4 Reset of the mains failure control

l The mains failure control is reset with MFAIL−RESET = HIGH (in the example with terminal
X5/E5).
l The reset pulse is always required if:
– the restart protection is active.
– the restart protection is used and the supply (mains or DC supply) was switched on.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.62.5 Dynamic adaptation of the control parameters

In special cases a dynamic change of the proportional gain may be useful. For this purpose, the
function block MFAIL is provided with two inputs (MFAIL−CONST and MFAIL−ADAPT). The resulting
proportional gain arises from:
MFAIL−CONST * |MFAIL−ADAPT|
V p + C0980 @
100%
3.2.62.6 Fast mains recovery (auto reclosure)

The fast mains recovery leads to the restart of the controller if the restart protection is not activated.
Then the drive runs to its setpoint. If this is not desired, the restart can be delayed via the retrigger
time C0983 or prevented in connection with the restart protection.
A fast mains recovery occurs:
l Due to the system, the mains recovery is indicated by the mains failure detection via the level
of the DC bus voltage (see chapter 3.2.62.1).
l Because of an "auto reclosure" of the power supply company (e.g. in case of thunderstorms)
l Because of faulty components in the supply cables (e.g. slip rings)
Set the retrigger time C0983 higher than the measured deceleration time during braking.
3.2.62.7 Application example
Drive network with digital frequency coupling
( STOP!
In drive networks which are coupled via digital frequency (a master and one or more
slaves):
l The mains failure detection and control may only be activated for the master.
– The mains failure control must be integrated correspondingly into the signal
flow.
l All controllers must be operated via the terminals +UG, −UG in the DC−bus
connection. For this, the information in the "Dimensioning" chapter must be
observed.
) Note!
Further information and predefined configurations can be obtained from Lenze.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Motor phase monitoring.
MLP1
Fig. 3−158 Motor phase failure detection (MLP1)
Code LCD Possible settings Important

Lenze Selection
C0597 MONIT LP1 3 0 Trip Conf. LP1
3 Off monitoring
C0599 LIMIT LP 1 5.0 1.0 {0.1} 10.0 Current limit LP1
Current limit for motor phase failure
monitoring
Function
Detailed descriptions concerning monitoring/fault messages can be found in part E (Troubleshooting
and fault elimination) of the System Manual.
The function block MLP1 must be entered into the processing table if the motor phase failure
detection is to be used.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
The monitoring functions output digital monitor signals.
MONIT
LU
OU
EER
..
..
..
..
P18
SD8
nErr
FB_monit
Fig. 3−159 Monitor outputs of the monitoring system (MONIT)
Function
The MONIT outputs switch to HIGH level if one of the monitoring functions responds.
The digital monitor signals switches dynamically, i.e.
l depending on the state of the monitoring function, but
l independent of the selected fault response (trip, fail−QSP, ...).
Example
MONIT−LP1 (motor phase monitoring) responds if an open circuit is detected in a motor connection
phase, although the fault response of LP1 is set to "Off" (C0597 = 3).
Tip!
l Only with a corresponding signal conditioning it is possible to use the MONIT outputs to
detect the cause of malfunction afterwards (e.g. storing the signal by using function block
FLIP).
l Detailed descriptions concerning monitoring /fault messages can be found in the chapter
"Troubleshooting and fault elimination".

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
The FB replaces a hardware motor potentiometer.
The motor potentiometer is used as an alternative setpoint source, which is controlled via two
terminals.
MPOT1-UP MPOT1
C0267/1 C0265 C0260
C0264 C0262
C0269/1
MPOT1-INACT MPOT MPOT1-OUT
C0268
CRTL
C0269/3
MPOT1-DOWN C0263
C0267/2 C0261
C0269/2
Fig. 3−160 Motor potentiometer (MPOT1)
Signal Source Note

MPOT1−UP d C0269/1 bin C0267/1 2 1000 −
MPOT1−INACT d C0269/3 bin C0268 2 1000 −
MPOT1−DOWN d C0269/2 bin C0267/2 2 1000 −
MPOT1−OUT a − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
Function
Control of the motor potentiometer:
l MPOT1−UP = HIGH
– The motor potentiometer approaches its upper limit value.
l MPOT1−DOWN = HIGH
– The motor potentiometer approaches its lower limit value.
l MPOT1−UP = LOW and MPOT1−DOWN = LOW or
MPOT1−UP = HIGH and MPOT1−DOWN = HIGH:
– The motor potentiometer does not change the output signal.
C0260
Tir
Tir
+
Tif
MPOT1−OUT 0
−
Tir
C0261
MPOT1−UP
MPOT1−DOWN
Fig. 3−161 Control signals of the motor potentiometer
In addition to the digital signals MPOT1−UP and MPOT1−DOWN another digital input exists
(MPOT1−INACT). The input MPOT1−INACT is used to activate or deactivate the motor potentiometer
function. Logic 1 at this input deactivates the motor potentiometer function. The input
MPOT1−INACT has priority over the inputs MPOT1−UP and MPOT1−DOWN.
When the motor potentiometer is deactivated, the motor potentiometer output (MPOT1−OUT)
follows the function set under C0264. The following functions can be set under C0264:

Function library
Function blocks
C0264 = Meaning
0 No further action; the value of output MPOT1−OUT remains unchanged
1 The motor potentiometer returns to 0 % with the corresponding deceleration time
2 The motor potentiometer approaches the lower limit value with the corresponding deceleration time (C0261)
3 The motor potentiometer immediately changes its output to 0%. (Important for EMERGENCY−OFF function)
4 The motor potentiometer immediately changes its output to the lower limit value (C0261)
5 The motor potentiometer approaches the upper limit value with the corresponding acceleration time (C0260)
If the motor potentiometer is activated (input MPOT1−INACT = 0), the subsequent function depends
on
l the current output signal,
l the set limit values of the MPOT,
l the control signals UP and DOWN.
If the output value is out of the set limits, the MPOT approaches the next limit with the set Ti times.
This function is independent of the control inputs MPOT1−UP and MPOT1−DOWN
If the output value is within the set limits, the output follows the selected control function UP, DOWN
or no action.
C0260
Tif
Tir Tif
MPOT1−OUT C0261
Tif Tir
MPOT1−UP
MPOT1−DOWN
MPOT1−INACT
Fig. 3−162 Deactivation of the motor potentiometer via the input MPOT1−INACT
Initialisation
This function is used to save the output value of the MPOT non−volatilely in the internal memory of
the device, when the mains is switched off. The value is saved automatically if this function was
selected via the code. When the mains is switched on, the value is reloaded into the MPOT.
C0265 can be used to activate other initialisation functions (see code table).
When the initialisation is completed, the MPOT follows the applied control function.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.66 Master selection (MSEL)

Two function blocks (MSEL1 and MSEL2) are available
Purpose
Selection of a master value source from four possible master values
l MSEL1: FB for digital frequency or speed signals
l MSEL2: FB for angle signals
MSEL1
C 1 3 9 8 /1
M S E L 1 -D F IN 1 M S E L 1
C 1 3 9 9 /1
M S E L 1 -E N -M 1 M S E L 1 -O U T
C 1 3 9 4 /1
C 1 3 9 5 /1
M S E L 1 -D F IN 2
C 1 3 9 8 /2
C 1 3 9 9 /2
M S E L 1 -E N -M 2
C 1 3 9 4 /2
C 1 3 9 5 /2
M S E L 1 -D F IN 3
C 1 3 9 8 /3
C 1 3 9 9 /3 C T R L M S E L 1 -M V A L
M S E L 1 -E N -M 3
C 1 3 9 4 /3
C 1 3 9 5 /3
M S E L 1 -D F IN 4
C 1 3 9 8 /4
C 1 3 9 9 /4
M S E L 1 -E N -M 4
C 1 3 9 4 /4
C 1 3 9 5 /4
M S E L 1 -L O C K
C 1 3 9 4 /5
C 1 3 9 5 /5
Fig. 3−163 Master selection (MSEL1)
Signal Source Note

MSEL1−EN−M1 d 1395/1 bin 1394/1 2 Activation of master value 1
MSEL1−LOCK d 1395/5 bin 1394/5 2 Locking
MSEL1−DFIN1 phd 1399/1 dec [rpm] 1398/1 4 Master value input 1
MSEL1−OUT phd 13701 − − − Master value output
MSEL1−MVAL a 13701 − − − Currently selected master value input

Function library
Function blocks
MSEL2
C 1 3 9 6 /1
M S E L 2 -M 1 P O S M S E L 2
C 1 3 9 7 /1
M S E L 2 -O U T
C 1 3 9 4 /6 M S E L 2 -E N -M 1
C 1 3 9 5 /6
M S E L 2 -M 2 P O S
C 1 3 9 6 /2
C 1 3 9 7 /2
M S E L 2 -E N -M 2
C 1 3 9 4 /7
C 1 3 9 5 /7
C 1 3 9 6 /3 M S E L 2 -M 3 P O S
C 1 3 9 7 /3 C T R L M S E L 2 -M V A L
C 1 3 9 4 /8 M S E L 2 -E N -M 3
C 1 3 9 5 /8
M S E L 2 -M 4 P O S
C 1 3 9 6 /4
C 1 3 9 7 /4
C 1 3 9 4 /9 M S E L 2 -E N -M 4
C 1 3 9 5 /9
M S E L 2 -L O C K
C 1 3 9 4 /1 0
C 1 3 9 5 /1 0
Fig. 3−164 Master selection (MSEL2)
Signal Source Note

MSEL2−LOCK d 1395/10 bin 1394/10 2 Locking
MSEL2−M1POS ph 1397/1 dec [inc] 1396/1 4 Master angle input 1
MSEL2−OUT ph 13711 − − − Master angle output
MSEL2−MVAL a 13711 − − − Currently selected master angle input

Function library
Function blocks
Function
l 1 from 4 selection of the master value source
l Fixing the selection
The description applies to both function blocks. Please consider this for the following functional
description of the MSEL1.
3.2.66.1 1 from 4 selection of the master value source

l One master value source each can be connected to the inputs MSEL1−DFIN(1...4). For
selecting a master value source the assigned digital input MSEL1−EN−M(1...4) must be
triggered with a LOW−HIGH edge. An input set once remains active until another master value
source is selected.
l If two or more inputs are selected at the same time, the input with the lowest selection number
is activated.
l The selected input value is directly connected to the output MSEL1−OUT.
If no input has been selected (inputs MSEL1−EN−M(1...4) = LOW), 0 inc is output a the output
3.2.66.2 Locking the selection

A change−over to a new source is prevented by a HIGH level at the input MSEL1−LOCK. The input
channel last−output is locked until the input level at MSEL1−LOCK is reset to LOW.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.67 Logic NOT
3.2.67 Logic NOT

Purpose
Logic inversion of digital signals. The inversion can be used to control functions or generate status
information.
NOT1
NOT1-IN 1 NOT1-OUT
C0840
C0841
Signal Source Note

NOT1−IN d C0841 bin C0840 2 1000 −
NOT1−OUT d − − − − − −
NOT2
NOT2-IN 1 NOT2-OUT
C0842
C0843
Signal Source Note

NOT2−IN d C0843 bin C0842 2 1000 −
NOT2−OUT d − − − − − −
NOT3
NOT3-IN 1 NOT3-OUT
C0844
C0845
Signal Source Note

NOT3−IN d C0845 bin C0844 2 1000 −
NOT3−OUT d − − − − − −
NOT4
NOT4-IN 1 NOT4-OUT
C0846
C0847
Signal Source Note

NOT4−IN d C0847 bin C0846 2 1000 −
NOT4−OUT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.67 Logic NOT
NOT5
NOT5-IN 1 NOT5-OUT
C0848
C0849
Signal Source Note

NOT5−IN d C0849 bin C0848 2 1000 −
NOT5−OUT d − − − − − −
Function
NOTx−IN1 NOTx−OUT
0 1
1 0
The function corresponds to a change from an NO contact to an NC contact in a contactor control.
NOTx−IN
NOTx−OUT
Fig. 3−170 Function of NOT when changing an NO contact to an NC contact.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
This FB conditions
l the main speed setpoint and
l an additional setpoint (or other signals as well)
for the following control structure via ramp function generators or fixed speeds.
N S E T -C IN H -V A L
C 0 7 8 4 N S E T
C 0 7 9 8 /1
N S E T -R F G -S T O P
C 0 7 9 0
C 0 7 9 9 /1 3
N S E T -R F G -0
C 0 7 8 9
C 0 7 9 9 /1 2
N S E T -N -IN V
C 0 7 8 1
C 0 7 9 9 /1 C IN H C 0 1 8 2 C 0 1 9 0
N S E T -N
C 0 7 8 0
0 ± 1 9 9 ,9 9 %
C 0 0 3 9 /1 x
C 0 0 4 6 C 0 0 3 9 /2
*-1
1
y + - * N S E T -N O U T
N S E T -J O G *1
D M U X C 0 0 3 9 /1 5 / x /(1 -y )
C 0 7 8 7 /1 0
N S E T -J O G *2 C 0 0 4 5 C 0 1 3 4
C 0 7 8 7 /2 0 J O G 1 ...1 5
C 0 7 8 7 /3 N S E T -J O G *4
1 5
C 0 2 4 1
N S E T -J O G *8 C 0 0 1 2 C 0 0 1 3
C 0 7 8 7 /4 3
C 0 1 0 1 /1 C 0 1 0 3 /1
C 0 1 0 1 /2 C 0 1 0 3 /2
D M U X N S E T -R F G -I= 0
N S E T -T I* 1
C 0 7 8 8 /1 0 C 0 1 0 1 /1 5 C 0 1 0 3 /1 5
N S E T -T I* 2
C 0 7 8 8 /2 0 T I 0 ...1 5
N S E T -T I* 4
C 0 7 8 8 /3 1 5
N S E T -T I* 8
C 0 7 8 8 /4 3 C 0 1 3 0
N S E T -S E T
C 0 7 8 5
C 0 7 9 8 /2
N S E T -L O A D
C 0 7 8 6
C 0 7 9 9 /3 C 0 2 2 0 /
C 0 7 8 3
N S E T -N A D D -IN V C 0 2 2 1 C IN H
N S E T -N A D D C 0 7 9 9 /2 0
C 0 7 8 2 1
*-1
C 0 0 4 9
Fig. 3−171 Speed setpoint conditioning (NSET)

Function library
Function blocks
Signal Source Note

NSET−N a C0046 dec [%] C0780 1 50 Intended for main setpoint, other signals
are permissible
NSET−NADD a C0047 dec [%] C0782 1 5650 Intended for additional setpoint, other
signals are permissible
NSET−JOG*1 d C0799/4 bin C0787/1 2 53 Selection and control of overriding "fixed
NSET−JOG*2 d C0799/5 bin C0787/2 2 1000 setpoints" for the main setpoint
NSET−JOG*4 d C0799/6 bin C0787/3 2 1000
NSET−JOG*8 d C0799/7 bin C0787/4 2 1000
NSET−TI*1 d C0799/8 bin C0788/1 2 1000 Selection and control of alternative "fixed
NSET−TI*2 d C0799/9 bin C0788/2 2 1000 setpoints" for the main setpoint
NSET−TI*4 d C0799/10 bin C0788/3 2 1000
NSET−TI*8 d C0799/11 bin C0788/4 2 1000
NSET−N−INV d C0799/1 bin C0781 2 10251 Control of the signal inversion for the main
setpoint
NSET−NADD−INV d C0799/2 bin C0783 2 1000 Control of the signal inversion for the
additional setpoint
NSET−RFG−0 d C0799/12 bin C0789 2 1000 The main setpoint integrator is led to zero
via the current Ti times.
NSET−RFG−STOP d C0799/13 bin C0790 2 1000 Keeping (freezing) of the main setpoint
integrator to its actual value.
NSET−CINH−VAL a C0798/1 dec [%] C0784 1 5001 Here, the signal is applied which is to be
when the controller is inhibited
NSET−SET a C0798/2 dec [%] C0785 1 5000 Here, the signal is applied which is to be
when the NSET−LOAD input is set
NSET−LOAD d C0799/3 bin C0786 2 5001 Control of both ramp function generators in
special situations, e.g. QSP
NSET−OUT a − − − − − −
NSET−RFG−I=0 d − − − − − −
Function
l Main setpoint path
l JOG setpoints
l Setpoint inversion
l S ramp
3.2.68.1 Main setpoint path

l The signals in the main setpoint path are limited to the value range ±199.99 %.
l The signal at input NSET−N is led via the function JOG selection.
l The JOG function has priority over the setpoint input NSET−N. This means a selected JOG
value deactivates the input. The subsequent signal conditioning uses the JOG value instead.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.68.2 JOG setpoints

l Are fixed values which are saved in the memory.
l JOG values can be retrieved from the memory via the inputs NSET−JOG*x.
l The inputs NSET−JOG*x are binary coded so that 15 JOG values can be retrieved.
l The decoding for enabling the JOG values (retrieval from the memory) is carried out according
to the following table:
NSET−JOG*1 NSET−JOG*2 NSET−JOG*4 NSET−JOG*8
NSET−N 0 0 0 0
JOG 1 1 0 0 0
JOG 2 0 1 0 0
JOG 3 1 1 0 0
JOG 4 0 0 1 0
JOG 5 1 0 1 0
JOG 6 0 1 1 0
JOG 7 1 1 1 0
JOG 8 0 0 0 1
JOG 9 1 0 0 1
JOG 10 0 1 0 1
JOG 11 1 1 0 1
JOG 12 0 0 1 1
JOG 13 1 0 1 1
JOG 14 0 1 1 1
JOG 15 1 1 1 1
l When all inputs are assigned with 0, the input NSET−N is active.
l The number of inputs that must be assigned depends on the required number of JOG
setpoints. Four inputs and thus 15 possible selections are available. A digital signal source is
assigned via C0787 and the corresponding subcode.
Number of required JOG setpoints Number of inputs to be assigned
1 At least 1
1 ... 3 At least 2
4 ... 7 At least 3
8 ... 15 4

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.68.3 Setpoint inversion

The output signal of the JOG function is led to an inverter.
The sign of the setpoint is inverted if the input NSET−N−INV is triggered with HIGH signal.
Ramp function generator for the main setpoint

The setpoint is then led to a ramp function generator with linear characteristic. Setpoint
step−changes at the input are thus converted into a ramp.
[%]
RFG−OUT
100 %
w2
w1
0
t ir t if t
T ir T if
T ir + t ir 100% T if + t if 100%
w2 * w1 w2 * w1
l The ramps can be set separately for acceleration and deceleration.

– Different acceleration and deceleration times can be activated via the inputs NSET−TI*x 16
(for table and function see JOG setpoints; the decoding must be done according to the
signal graphic).
– The Ti times can only be activated in pairs.
l When the controller is inhibited (CINH), the ramp function generator accepts the value applied
to the input NSET−CINH−VAL and transmits it to the next function. This function has priority
over all other functions.
l NSET−RFG−STOP = HIGH
– The ramp function generator is stopped. Changes at the input of the ramp function
generator have no effect on the output.
l NSET−RFG−0 = HIGH
– The ramp function generator decelerates to zero along the deceleration ramp.
l It is also possible to load the ramp function generator online with a defined value. For this, the
input NSET−LOAD must be set to HIGH. As long as this input is set, the value at input
NSET−SET is accepted by the ramp function generator and passed to the output.

Function library
Function blocks
Priorities:
CINH NSET−LOAD NSET−RFG−0 NSET−RFG−STOP Function
0 0 0 0 RFG follows the input value via the set ramps
0 0 0 1 The value at the output of RFG is frozen
0 0 1 0 RFG decelerates to zero within the set deceleration time
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0 RFG accepts the value applied to input NSET−SET and passes it to its
output
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 RFG accepts the value applied to input CINH−VAL and passes it to its
output
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
3.2.68.4 S ramp
The linear ramp function generator is connected to a PT1 element. This arrangement implements an
S ramp for an almost jerk−free acceleration and deceleration.
l The PT1 element is switched on and off via C0134.
l The time constant is set via C0182.
3.2.68.5 Arithmetic operation

The output value is led to an arithmetic FB. This FB links the main setpoint and the additional setpoint
arithmetically. The arithmetic operation is selected via C0190 (see the following table).
C0190 Function Example
0 Output = X (Y is not processed) −
1 Output = X + Y 100 % = 50 % + 50 %
2 Output = X − Y 50 % = 100 % − 50%
3* Output = X * Y 100 % = 100 % * 100%
4* Output = X/|Y| 1 % = 100 % / 100%
5 Output = X/(100% − Y) 200 % = 100 % / (100 % − 50 %)
*) Please observe the note for C0190 = 3, 4 in the following chapter

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.68.6 Additional setpoint

l An additional setpoint (e. g. a correction signal) can be linked with the main setpoint via the
input NSET−NADD.
l The input signal can be inverted via the input NSET−NADD−INV before affecting the ramp
function generator. The ramp function generator has a linear characteristic and an acceleration
time and deceleration time each.
l With NSET−LOAD = HIGH the ramp function generator is set to zero and kept there without
considering the Ti times.The same applies when the controller is inhibited.
Tip!
Do not link the main setpoint with negative additional setpoints when C0190 = 3 or C0190 =4!
Otherwise the drive may change its direction of rotation!
The drive behaviour depends on the times set for the main setpoint and additional setpoint at the
ramp function generator.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Logical ORing of digital signals. The operations are used for controlling functions or creating status
information.
OR1-IN1 OR1
C0830/1
C0831/1
1
OR1-IN2 OR1-OUT
C0830/2
C0831/2
OR1-IN3
C0830/3
C0831/3
Signal Source Note

OR1−IN1 d C0831/1 bin C0830/1 2 1000 −
OR1−IN2 d C0831/2 bin C0830/2 2 1000 −
OR1−IN3 d C0831/3 bin C0830/3 2 1000 −
OR1−OUT d − − − − − −
OR2-IN1 OR2
C0832/1
C0833/1
OR2-IN2 1 OR2-OUT
C0832/2
C0833/2
OR2-IN3
C0832/3
C0833/3
Signal Source Note

OR2−IN1 d C0833/1 bin C0832/1 2 1000 −
OR2−IN2 d C0833/2 bin C0832/2 2 1000 −
OR2−IN d C0833/3 bin C0832/3 2 1000 −
OR2−OUT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
OR3-IN1 OR3
C0834/1
C0835/1
1
OR3-IN2 OR3-OUT
C0834/2
C0835/2
OR3-IN3
C0834/3
C0835/3
Signal Source Note

OR3−IN1 d C0835/1 bin C0834/1 2 1000 −
OR3−IN2 d C0835/2 bin C0834/2 2 1000 −
OR3−IN3 d C0835/3 bin C0834/3 2 1000 −
OR3−OUT d − − − − − −
OR4-IN1 OR4
C0836/1
C0837/1
1
OR4-IN2 OR4-OUT
C0836/2
C0837/2
OR4-IN3
C0836/3
C0837/3
Signal Source Note

OR4−IN1 d C0837/1 bin C0826/1 2 1000 −
OR4−IN2 d C0837/2 bin C0826/2 2 1000 −
OR4−IN3 d C0837/3 bin C0826/3 2 1000 −
OR4−OUT d − − − − − −
OR5-IN1 OR5
C0838/1
C0839/1
1
OR5-IN2 OR5-OUT
C0838/2
C0839/2
OR5-IN3
C0838/3
C0839/3
Signal Source Note

OR5−IN1 d C0839/1 bin C0828/1 2 1000 −
OR5−IN2 d C0839/2 bin C0828/2 2 1000 −
OR5−IN3 d C0839/3 bin C0828/3 2 1000 −
OR5−OUT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
OR6-IN1 OR6
C0838/4
C0839/4 >1
OR6-IN2
C0838/5
C0839/5
OR6-IN3 OR6-OUT
C0838/6
C0839/6
OR6-IN4
C0838/7
C0839/7
OR6-IN5
C0838/8
C0839/8
fb_or6
Signal Source Note

OR6−IN1 d C0839/4 bin C0838/4 2 1000 −
OR6−IN2 d C0839/5 bin C0838/5 2 1000 −
OR6−IN3 d C0839/6 bin C0838/6 2 1000 −
OR6−IN4 d C0839/7 bin C0838/7 2 1000 −
OR6−IN5 d C0839/8 bin C0838/8 2 1000 The input signal is inverted internally (NOT).
The input has to be assigned to FIXED1 if it
remains unused.
OR6−OUT d − − − − − −
OR/-IN1 OR7
C0838/9
C0839/9 >1
OR/-IN2
C0838/10
C0839/10
OR/-IN3 OR/-OUT
C0838/11
C0839/11
OR/-IN4
C0838/12
C0839/12
OR7-IN5
C0838/13
C0839/13
fb_or7
Signal Source Note

OR7−IN1 d C0839/9 bin C0838/9 2 1000 −
OR7−IN2 d C0839/10 bin C0838/10 2 1000 −
OR7−IN3 d C0839/11 bin C0838/11 2 1000 −
OR7−IN4 d C0839/12 bin C0838/12 2 1000 −
OR7−IN5 d C0839/13 bin C0838/13 2 1000 The input signal is inverted internally (NOT).
The input has to be assigned to FIXED1 if it
remains unused.
OR7−OUT d − − − − − −

Function library
Function blocks
Function of OR1 ... OR5

l ORx−OUT = ORx−IN1 ORx−IN2 ORx−IN3
ORx-IN1 ORx-IN2 ORx-IN3
ORx-OUT
9300kur071
Fig. 3−180 Equivalent network of the OR operation for OR1 ... OR5
) Note!
Function of OR6, OR7

l ORx−OUT = ORx−IN1 ORx−IN2 ORx−IN3 ORx−IN4 ORx−IN5
ORx-IN1 ORx-IN2 ORx-IN3 ORx-IN4 ORx-IN5
ORx-OUT
9300kur070
Fig. 3−181 Equivalent network of the OR operation for OR6 and OR7
) Note!
l ORx−IN1 ... ORx−IN4: Assign FIXED0 to inputs that are not used.
l Connect ORx−IN5 to FIXED1 if you don’t use the input.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Detection of any measured variable (e. g. speed setpoint, actual speed, torque etc.). They are
visualised in Global Drive Control.
Supports the commissioning of controllers and the troubleshooting.
OSZ
OSZ-CHANNEL1 1
C0732/1
measuring value
OSZ-CHANNEL2 2
memory
C0732/2
OSZ-CHANNEL3
C0732/3 3
OSZ-CHANNEL4 CTRL
C0732/4 4
OSZ-DIG-TRIGGER C0730 C0738

C0733/1 C0731 C0739
C0734 C0740
C0735 C0741
C0736 C0744
C0737 C0749
fb_osz
Fig. 3−182 Oscilloscope function (OSZ)
Signal Source Note

OSZ CHANNEL1 a − − C0732/1 1 − −
OSZ CHANNEL2 a − − C0732/2 1 − −
OSZ CHANNEL3 a − − C0732/3 1 − −
OSZ CHANNEL4 a − − C0732/4 1 − −
OSZ−DIG−TRIGGER d − − C0733/1 2 − −
Function
The FB has three function units:
l Trigger check
– Monitoring of the digital trigger source for a valid trigger event
l Processing of the measured signal
– Linking the measurement inputs
– Calculating the time base
– Monitoring of the analog trigger source for a valid trigger event.
l Measuring value memory
– Scaling the ring buffer
– Filing the measured data in the ring buffer
– Saving the measuring points for image generation

Function library
Function blocks
Functional description
OSZ mode Controls the measurement in the controller
C0730 1 Starts the recording of the measured values
0 Cancels a running measurement
OSZ status Displays five different operating states
C0731 1 Measurement completed
– The memory of the measured values is completely filled with measured data. The
measured values can be accessed via the PC.
2 Measurement active
– A measurement was started with C0730 = 1. The FB is waiting for a valid trigger
event.
3 Trigger detected
– The FB has detected a valid trigger event. Depending on the trigger delay the
saving of the measured data is not yet completed. It is automatically completed
with the entry into the last memory unit.
4 Measurement cancelled
– Cancel of a running recording of the measured values (C0730 = 0). The memory of
the measured values is filled with the data that has just been measured. The data
can be accessed via the PC.
5 Read data memory
– The measured data memory is being read at the moment. No settings are possible
in this operating state.
Configuration C0732/1 Links the measuring channels of the FB with the signals of the process environment
OSZ channel to – The four measuring channels can be assigned with any analog signal. Enter the
1 ... 4 C0732/4 corresponding signal number into C0732/1 ... C0732/4.
– Always start linking with channel 1, then channel 2 and so on. Unused channels
are automatically assigned with signal FIXED 0%.
Configuration C0733/1 Links the digital trigger input with a digital signal in the process environment.
OSZ trigger – The trigger input can be assigned with any digital signal. Enter the corresponding
signal number into C0733/1.
Trigger source Defines the trigger source
C0734 1 Source is one of the four measuring channels (C0734/1 ... C0734/4)
0 Source is the digital trigger input (C0733/1)
Trigger level C0735 −32767 ... 32767 Defines the trigger level which activates the triggering when the level is exceeded.
– The trigger level is only monitored when the triggering is done on one of the four
channels.
– The trigger level is not effective with digital triggering.
Trigger edge Defines the trigger edge which activates the triggering.
Triggering on an analog input channel
– With a LOW−HIGH trigger edge the analog trigger signal must exceed a defined
– With a HIGH−LOW trigger edge the analog trigger signal must fall below a defined
Triggering on a digital trigger input
– With a LOW−HIGH trigger edge the digital trigger signal must change from LOW to
HIGH to activate the triggering.
– With a HIGH−LOW trigger edge the digital trigger signal must change from HIGH to
LOW to activate the triggering.
Fig. 3−183 shows the triggering of an analog signal with a positive edge.
C0736 1 – HIGH−LOW trigger edge
0 LOW−HIGH trigger edge

Function library
Function blocks

Trigger delay The trigger delay defines when to begin with the saving of the measured values with
regard to the trigger time.
C0737 −100.0 % ... 0 % Negative trigger delay (pre−triggering)
– Defines a percentage of the whole memory content. This part of the memory
content is filled with measured values before the triggering (see Fig. 3−184).
0 % ... 999.9 % Positive trigger delay (post−triggering)
– Defines a percentage of the whole memory content. The saving of the measured
values after triggering is delayed by this part of the memory content (Fig. 3−183).
Sampling period C0738 1 ms ... 10 min Setting of the sampling period
– The sampling period is the time between two measurements
– The measurements are carried out simultaneously for all channels (e. g. value
measured at channel 1 is measured at the same time as the measured value at
channel 2, 3 or 4.
– The sampling period can be set in steps of 1, 2 and 5.
Number of C0739 Number of channels used for measurements.
Channels
Read data The code is required if the GDC is not used for the visualisation.
memory C0740/1 0 ... 16383 Defines the starting point for reading the data memory and thus enables the memory
array to be selectively accessed.
– In order to read the data memory bit by bit (e. g. reading only the measured values
of one channel or reading with reduced memory depth), the starting point can be
changed.
C0740/2 1 Enable Read memory"
– Enables the access to the memory to read the data
0 Inhibit Read memory"
– Inhibits the access to the memory. The access must be inhibited after every
reading of the data
Information Provides information on the function block
about the C0741/1 Version of the function block (e. g. 120: Version 1.20)
function block C0741/2 Data memory size (1024 ... 16384 bytes)
C0741/3 Data width of the measured values (1 byte / 2 bytes)
C0741/4 Number of the available measuring channels (1 ... 4)

Function library
Function blocks

Memory size C0744 0 ... 6 Set memory depth of the data memory
– Max. size of the data memory: 8192 measured values ¢ 16384 bytes (C0744 = 6)
– Min. size of the data memory: 512 measured values ¢ 1024 bytes (C0744 = 0)
– Changing the memory depth from 512 to 8192 measured values/step
– A memory depth which is optimally adapted to the corresponding measuring task
reduces the data transmission time.
Information on Information on saving the measured values in the data memory
saving The FB saves the data in a ring format. For reconstructing the chronological signal
sequence the following three "graphic points" are marked.
C0749/1 Measured value no. of the instant of abortion
C0749/2 Measured value no. of the instant of triggering
C0749/3 Measured value no. of the instant of completion
Memory content
Trigger level
Measured signal

before triggering
Fig. 3−183 Example: Trigger level and trigger delay with approx. −30 % of pre−triggering
Memory content
Trigger level
Measured signal
Trigger delay

before triggering
Fig. 3−184 Example: Trigger level and trigger delay with approx. −30 % of post−triggering

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
The FB is used, for instance, as a higher−level controller (dancer position controller, tension controller,
pressure controller etc.).
The control characteristic follows the ideal PID algorithm, but it can also be changed over to a PI or
P characteristic.
C0222 C0329 PCTRL1
PCTRL1-ADAPT Vp C0222 0
C0803
Vp2 C0325 1
C0808/4 2 Vp C0222 2
3 Vp2 C0325 3
Vp3 C0326
C0328 soll1 soll2 C0327
C0337
C0223 C0336
C0224
C0332
±100%
PCTRL1-SET + PCTRL1-OUT
C0800
-
C0808/1 RESET
C0333
PCTRL1-ACT
C0801
C0808/2
PCTRL1-INACT
C0804
C0809/1
PCTRL1-I-OFF
C0805
C0809/2
PCTRL1-INFLU
C0802
C0808/3
Fig. 3−185 Process controller (PCTRL1)
Signal Source Note

PCTRL1−SET a C0808/1 dec [%] C0800 1 1000 Input of the process setpoint. Possible
value range: ±200%. The time
characteristic of step−change signals can
be affected via the ramp function generator
(C0332 for the acceleration time; C0333 for
the deceleration time).
PCTRL1−ACT a C0808/2 dec [%] C0801 1 1000 Actual value input; value range ±200%
PCTRL1−INFLU a C0808/3 dec [%] C0802 1 1000 Evaluation or suppression of the output
signal; value range ±200%
PCTRL1−ADAPT a C0808/4 dec [%] C0803 1 1000 Online change of the P gain;
value range ±200%
PCTRL1−INACT d C0809/1 bin C0804 2 1000 Online deactivation of the process
controller
PCTRL1−I−OFF d C0809/2 bin C0805 2 1000 Online setting of the I component to zero
PCTRL1−OUT a − − − − − −
Function
Setpoint and actual value are sent to the process controller via the corresponding inputs and
processed according to the selected control algorithm (control chararacteristic).

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.71.1 Control characteristic

l In the default setting, the PID algorithm is active.
l The D−component can be deactivated by setting code C0224 to zero. Thus, the controller
becomes a PI−controller (or P−controller if the I−component is also switched off).
l The I−component can be switched on or off online via the PCTRL−I−OFF input. For this, the
input is assigned a digital signal source (e.g. one of the freely assignable digital input
terminals). If the I−component is to be switched off permanently, the input is assigned the
signal source "FIXED1".
– PCTRL−I−OFF = HIGH switches off the I−component
– PCTRL−I−OFF = LOW switches on the I−component
l The reset time is parameterised via C0223.
l The P−gain can be set in different ways. The function providing the P−gain is selected under
C0329:
– C0329 = 0
The P−gain is entered under C0222.
– C0329 = 1
The P−gain is entered via the PCTRL−ADAPT input. The input value is led via a linear
characteristic. The slope of the characteristic is set under C0222 (upper limit) and C0325
(lower limit). The value under C0222 is valid if the input value = +100 % or −100 %. The value
under C0325 applies if the input value is 0 %.
Vp
Vp1
Input data:
Vp1 = C0222
Vp2 = C0325
Vp2
Display value:
PCTRL−ADAPT Vpact = C0336
0 100 %
Fig. 3−186 Input of the P−gain via PCTRL−ADAPT input

– C0329 = 2
The P−gain is derived from the process setpoint PCTRL−SET. The setpoint is measured after
the ramp function generator and calculated by means of a characteristic with three
interpolation points.
Vp
Input data:
Vp1 Vp1 = C0222
Vp2 = C0325
Vp3 = C0326
Vp2 s0= C0328
s1= C0327
Vp3
s Display value:
s0 s1 Vpact = C0336
Fig. 3−187 P−gain derived from the PCTRL−SET process setpoint

– C0329 = 3
The P−gain is derived from the control difference and calculated by means of a characteristic
as for C0329 = 2.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.71.2 Ramp function generator

The setpoint PCTRL−SET is led via a ramp function generator with linear characteristic. Thus,
setpoint step−changes at the input can be transformed into a ramp.
[%]
RFG−OUT
100 %
w2
w1
0
t ir t if t
T ir T if
T ir + t ir 100% T if + t if 100%
w2 * w1 w2 * w1
l The ramps can be adjusted separately for acceleration and deceleration.

– Acceleration time tir with C0332.
– Deceleration time tif with C0333.
l PCTRL−INACT = HIGH
– The ramp function generator is immediately set to zero.
3.2.71.3 Value range of the output signal

l The process controller operates in bipolar mode in the default setting.
– The output value is limited to ±100 %.
l The function can be set to unipolar mode under C0337.
– The output value is limited to 0 ... +100 %.
3.2.71.4 Evaluation of the output signal

l The output signal can be evaluated after the limitation block via PCTRL−INFLU.
– The process controller can be hidden or unhidden with this evaluation.
– The calcuation is done according to the following formula:
100 % (PCTRL−OUT) = 100 % * 100 % (PCTRL−INFLU).
3.2.71.5 Deactivation of the process controller

l PCTRL−INACT = HIGH deactivates the process controller
– PCTRL−OUT is set to zero.
– The I−component is set to zero.
– The ramp function generator is set to zero.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Adds or subtracts angle signals depending on the input used.
PHADD1
±231−1
PHADD1−IN1 + + PHADD1−OUT
C1200/1
+ −
C1201/1
PHADD1−IN2 PHADD1−OUT2
C1200/2
C1201/2
PHADD1−IN3
C1200/3
C1201/3 FB_phadd1
Fig. 3−189 Angle addition block (PHADD1)
Signal Source Note

PHADD1−IN3 ph C1201/3 dec [inc] C1200/3 3 1000 Subtraction input
PHADD1−OUT ph − − − − − Limited to ±2147483647
PHADD1−OUT2 ph − − − − − −
Function
l Input PHADD1−IN1 is added to input PHADD1−IN2.
l The input PHADD−IN3 is subtracted from the calculated result.
l Then the result of the subtraction
– is limited to ±2147483647 and output at PHADD1−OUT.
– is output at PHADD1−OUT2 without limitations.

Function library
Function blocks
Purpose
Compares two angle signals (distances) with each other.
PHCMP1
C0695
PHCMP1-IN1 PHCMP1-OUT
C0697/1
C0698/1
PHCMP1-IN2
C0697/2
C0698/2
Signal Source Note

P H C M P 2
C 1 2 0 7
C 1 2 0 5 /1
C 1 2 0 6 /1
P H C M P 2 -IN 2
C 1 2 0 5 /2
C 1 2 0 6 /2
Signal Source Note

P H C M P 3
C 1 2 7 2
C 1 2 7 0 /1
C 1 2 7 1 /1
P H C M P 3 -IN 2
C 1 2 7 0 /2
C 1 2 7 1 /2
Signal Source Note


Function library
Function blocks
Function
Function block Code Function Note
PHCMP1 C0695 = 1 If PHCMPx−IN1 PHCMPx−IN2, PHCMPx−OUT switches to HIGH
PHCMP2 C1207 = 1 If PHCMPx−IN1 PHCMPx−IN2, PHCMPx−OUT switches to LOW
PHCMP3 C1272 = 1
PHCMP1 C0695 = 2 If | PHCMPx−IN1 | | PHCMPx−IN2 |, PHCMPx−OUT switches to HIGH Compares the
PHCMP2 C1207 = 2 If | PHCMPx−IN1 | | PHCMPx−IN2 |, PHCMPx−OUT switches to LOW absolute values of the
PHCMP3 C1272 = 2 inputs
PHCMPx-IN2
PHCMPx-IN1
PHCMPx-OUT
t
9300std004
Fig. 3−193 Diagram of the function

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Selective addition of a angle signal to the setpoint angle.
It is also possible to compare setpoint and actual angle signals.
P H D IF F 1
P H D IF F 1 -S E T P H D IF F 1 -O U T
C 1 2 3 2 /1
+ -
C 1 2 3 7 /1
P H D IF F 1 -A D D
C 1 2 3 2 /2
C 1 2 3 7 /2
C 1 2 3 0 /1
P H D IF F 1 -E N
C 1 2 3 5 /1
P H D IF F 1 -IN
C 1 2 3 1
C 1 2 3 6
P H D IF F 1 -R E S E T
C 1 2 3 0 /2
C 1 2 3 5 /2
Fig. 3−194 Actual angle integrator (PHDIFF1)
Signal Source Note

PHDIFF1−IN phd C1236 dec [rpm] C1231 4 −
PHDIFF1−SET ph C1237/1 dec [inc] C1232/1 3 −
PHDIFF1−ADD ph C1237/2 dec [inc] C1232/2 3 −
PHDIFF1−EN d C1235/1 bin C1230/1 2 −
PHDIFF1−RESET d C1235/2 bin C1230/2 2 HIGH = sets the actual angle integrator = 0
PHDIFF1−OUT ph − − − − Without limit
Function
C1230/1 = HIGH
l The angle signal at PHDIFF1−ADD is added to the integrated speed signal.
C1230/1 = LOW

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Power−of−two division or multiplication of angle signals.
±32767 PHDIV1
Revolution
PHDIV1-IN 1 PHDIV1-OUT
C0996 C0995
2
C0997
Fig. 3−195 Signal adaptation for angle signals (PHDIV1)
Signal Source Note

PHDIV1−IN ph C0997 dec [inc] C0996 3 1000
PHDIV1−OUT ph − − − − − 65536 inc = one encoder revolution
Function
l Arithmetic function:
PHDIV1−OUT + PHDIV1−IN
2 C0995
– Positive values in C0995 result in a division.

– Negative values in C0995 result in a multiplication.
l The output value is limited to ±(231−1) inc (corresponds to ±32767 encoder revolutions).
– If the limit is exceeded, the output is kept at the limit value.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.76 Angle integrator (PHINT1, PHINT2, PHINT3)

Integrates a speed or a velocity to a angle (distance).
The integrator can accept max. ±32000 encoder revolutions.
PHINT3 can recognise a relative distance.
P H IN T 1
C 0 9 9 0
± 3 2 0 0 0
C 0 9 9 1
C 0 9 9 3
Fig. 3−196 Angle integrator (PHINT1)
Signal Source Note

PHINT1−RESET d C0993 bin C0091 2 HIGH = sets the angle integrator to 0 and PHINT1−FAIL
= LOW
P H IN T 2
C 1 0 3 0
± 3 2 0 0 0
C 1 0 3 1
C 1 0 3 3
Signal Source Note

PHINT2−RESET d C1033 bin C1031 2 HIGH = sets the angle integrator to zero and
PHINT2−FAIL = LOW
C 1 1 5 0 P H IN T 3
C 1 1 5 1
P H IN T 3 -O U T
P H IN T 3 -IN
C 1 1 5 3 P H IN T 3 -S T A T U S
C 1 1 5 7
C 1 1 5 4 P H IN T 3 -L O A D
C 1 1 5 8
C 1 1 5 5 P H IN T 3 -S E T
C 1 1 5 9

Function library
Function blocks
Signal Source Note

PHINT3−LOAD d C1158 bin C1154 2 HIGH = sets the angle integrator to the input signal of
PHINT3−IN and PHINT3−STATUS = LOW
PHINT3−SET ph C1159 dec [inc] C1155 3
PHINT3−STATUS d − − − − HIGH = overflow or processing of distance completed
Function
l Constant input value (PHINT1, PHINT2 and PHINT3)
l Input value with change of sign (PHINT3)
l Scaling of PHINTx−OUT

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.76.1 Constant input value (PHINT1 and PHINT2)

P H IN T x -O U T
+ 3 2 7 6 7 re v .
+ 3 2 0 0 0
-3 2 0 0 0
-3 2 7 6 7 re v .
P H IN T x -F A IL
Fig. 3−199 Function of PHINTx with constant input value
l The FB integrates speed or velocity values at PHINTx−IN to a angle (distance).

l PHINTx−OUT outputs the counter content of the bipolar integrator.
– A positive value at PHINTx−IN increments the integrator (counter content is increased).
– A negative value at PHINTx−IN decrements the integrator (counter content is reduced).
l If the counter content exceeds the value of +32767 encoder revolutions (¢ +2147483647 inc)
– an overflow occurs. The counting is continued with the value −32768.
– PHINTx−FAIL switches to HIGH when the value w +32000 is reached.
l If the counter content falls below the value of −32768 encoder revolutions
(¢ −2147483648 inc)
– an overflow occurs. The counting starts at the value +32767.
– PHINTx−FAIL switches to HIGH when the value v −32000 is reached.
l PHINTX−RESET = HIGH
– sets the integrator to 0
– sets PHINTx−OUT = 0, as long as a HIGH level is applied to PHINTx−IN.
– sets PHINTx−FAIL = LOW.
3.2.76.2 Constant input value (PHINT3)

The FB PHINT3 has three modes which can be set under C1150.
Mode C1150 = 2 is described in chapter 3.2.76.3.

Function library
Function blocks
C1150 = 0 C1150 = 1
The input PHINT3−LOAD is state−triggered (HIGH level). The input PHINT3−LOAD is edge−triggered (LOW−HIGH edge).
PHINT3−LOAD = HIGH PHINT3−LOAD = LOW−HIGH edge
– The integrator is loaded with the input value at PHINT3−SET. – The integrator is loaded with the input value at PHINT3−SET
– Sets the output PHINT3−STATUS = LOW and starts adding from this point
– Sets the output PHINT3−STATUS = LOW
P H IN T 3 -O U T
+ 3 2 7 6 7 re v .
+ C 1 1 5 1
-C 1 1 5 1
-3 2 7 6 7 re v .
Fig. 3−200 Function of PHINT3 with constant input value when C1150 = 0 and C1150 = 1
l The FB integrates speed or velocity values at PHINT3−IN to a angle (distance).

l PHINT3−OUT outputs the counter content of the bipolar integrator.
– A positive value at PHINT3−IN increments the integrator (counter content is increased).
– A negative value at PHINT3−IN decrements the integrator (counter content is reduced).
l If the counter content exceeds the value of +32767 encoder revolutions (¢ +2147483647 inc)
– an overflow occurs. The counting is continued with the value −32768,
– PHINT3−STATUS switches to HIGH when the value (+) C1151 is reached
l If the counter content falls below the value of −32768 encoder revolutions
(¢ −2147483648 inc)
– an overflow occurs. The counting starts at the value +32767,
– PHINT3−STATUS switches to HIGH when the value (−) C1151 is reached

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.76.3 Input value with sign reversal (PHINT3)
C1150 = 2
The input PHINT3−LOAD is state−triggered (HIGH level).
l PHINT3−LOAD = HIGH
– The integrator is loaded with the input value at PHINT3−SET.
– Sets the output PHINT3−STATUS = LOW.
PHINT3-OUT
+C1151
Change of sign at the input
-C1151
PHINT3-STATUS
t
9300kur090
Fig. 3−201 Function of PHINT3 with sign reversal of the input value when C1150 = 2
l The FB integrates speed or velocity values at PHINT3−IN to a angle (distance).

l PHINT3−OUT outputs the counter content of the bipolar integrator.
– A positive value at PHINT3−IN increments the integrator (counter content is increased).
– A negative value at PHINT3−IN decrements the integrator (counter content is reduced).
l If the counter content exceeds the value of (+) C1151,
– the value of C1151 is subtracted from the counter content
– PHINT3−STATUS switches to HIGH for 1 ms.
l If the counter content falls below the value of (−) C1151,
– the value of C1151 is added to the counter content
– PHINT3−STATUS switches to HIGH for 1 ms.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.76.4 Scaling of PHINTx−OUT

Mathematic description of PHINTx−OUT:
PHINTx * OUT[inc] + PHINTx * IN[rpm] @ t[s] @ 65536[incńrev.]
t = integration time
Example:
You want to determine the counter content of the integrator at a certain speed at the input and a
certain integration time.
l Given values:
– PHINTx−IN = 1000 rpm
– t = 10 s
– Start value of the integrator = 0
l Solution:
– Conversion of PHINTx−IN:
1000rpm + 1000rev.
60s
– Calculation of PHINTx−OUT:
PHINTx * OUT + 1000rev. @ 10s @ 65536inc
rev. + 10922666inc
60s

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.77 Angle integrator (PHINT4)
3.2.77 Angle integrator (PHINT4)

The function block simulates the basic function of the integrator in the CDATA function block.
C 1 1 8 2 /1
P H IN T 4 -H -V A L U E P H IN T 4
C 1 1 8 3 /1
P H IN T 4 -R E S E T
C 1 1 8 0 /2
P H IN T 4 -H -S T A T
C 1 1 8 1 /2
P H IN T 4 -D F IN P H IN T 4 -O U T
C 1 1 8 4 /1
C 1 1 8 5 /1 P H IN T 4 -L -S T A T
P H IN T 4 -L O A D
C 1 1 8 0 /1
C 1 1 8 1 /1
P H IN T 4 -S E T
C 1 1 8 2 /3
C 1 1 8 3 /3
P H IN T 4 -L -V A L U E
C 1 1 8 2 /2
C 1 1 8 3 /2
Signal Source Note

Name Type DIS DIS format CFG
PHINT4−LOAD d C1181/1 bin C1180/1 A LOWHIGH edge loads the integrator with the value at PHINT4−SET,
then the integrator continues running immediately.
PHINT4−RESET d C1181/2 bin C1180/2 HIGH: Continuously loads the integrator with the value of input
PHINT4−SET. This input has priority
PHINT4−H−VALUE ph C1183/1 dec [inc] C1182/1 Upper value for the return
PHINT4−L−VALUE ph C1183/2 dec [inc] C1182/2 Lower value for the return
PHINT4−SET ph C1183/3 dec [inc] C1182/3 Starting value
PHINT4−DFIN phd C1185/1 dec [rpm] C1184/1 Master speed input
A positive value at PHINT4−DFIN increases the value at PHINT4−OUT
A negative value at PHINT4−DFIN decreases the value at PHINT4−OUT
PHINT4−H−STAT d 1. LOW−HIGH edge: Integrator value has reached PHINT4−H−VALUE; the
counting process is continued from PHINT4−L−VALUE
2. HIGH: Return is not possible, as PHINT4−H−VALUE is too low for the
speed at PHINT4−DFIN
PHINT4−L−STAT d 1. LOW−HIGH edge: Integrator value has reached PHINT4−L−VALUE; the
counting process is continued from PHINT4−H−VALUE
2. HIGH: Return is not possible, as PHINT4−L−VALUE is too low for the
speed at PHINT4−DFIN
PHINT4−OUT ph Output of the angle/position signal (65536 inc = 1 revolution)
P H IN T 4 -O U T
P H IN T 4 -H -V A L U E
P H IN T 4 -L -V A L U E
t
P H IN T 4 -H -S T A T
P H IN T 4 -L -S T A T
P H IN T 4 -D F IN
9300kur010
Fig. 3−203 Function of PHINT4

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.78 Phase integrator (PHINT5)

The PHINT5 function block is a master phase integrator without remainder considered and contains
an integrated mark synchronisation.
PHINT5-X-OFFSET PHINT5
C1182/7
C1183/7
PHINT5-H-VALUE
C1182/5
C1183/5
PHINT5-SET
C1182/4
C1183/4
PHINT5-LOAD
C1180/4
C1181/4
PHINT5-RESET
C1180/3
C1181/3
PHINT5-NUM
C1188/1
C1189/1
+ PHINT5-OUT
PHINT5-DFIN
C1184/2
- PHINT5-DFOUT
C1185/1
PHINT5-DFOUT-INIT
PHINT5-DENOM
C1188/2
PHINT5-X0
C1189/2 0 C1740
1
0
PHINT5-TP-SPEED-LIM 1
C1184/3
C1185/2
PHINT5-TP-SYNC-BUSY
PHINT5-TP-POS
C1182/6
C1183/6
PHINT5-TP-ENABLE
C1180/5
C1181/5
C0430/4 C1186 C1741/1

0
PHINT5-X-DIFF
X5/E4 1
PHINT5-TP-DIFF
0
C0430/5 1
0 TP-CTRL PHINT5-TP-DIST
X5/E5 1
C1186 PHINT5-TP-SYNC-BUSY
PHINT5-TP-EDGE-SELECT
C1180/6 PHINT5-TP-RECOGN
C1181/6
fb_phint5

Function library
Function blocks
Signal Source Note

Name Typ DIS DIS CFG List
e format
PHINT5−X−OFFSET ph C1183/7 dec [inc] C1182/7 3 Selection of an offset for the X direction
PHINT5−H−VALUE ph C1183/5 dec [inc] C1182/5 3 Upper limit value of the integrator
Only positive input values are permissible.
A check for negative values is not carried out.
PHINT5−X−SET ph C1183/4 dec [inc] C1182/4 3 Setpoint with which the integrator is to start.
PHINT5−LOAD d C1181/4 bin C1180/4 2 A LOW−HIGH edge loads the integrator with the value at PHINT5−X−SET,
then the integrator continues running immediately.
PHINT5−RESET d C1181/3 bin C1180/3 2 HIGH:
The integrator is reset to the value at PHINT5−X−SET.
The touch probe function is deactivated. Available touch probe
requirements are reset.
PHINT5−TP−SYNC−BUSY, PHINT5−X0, and PHINT5−TP−RECOGN are
set to LOW.
PHINT5−NUM a C1189/1 dec [%] C1188/1 1 Numerator for evaluation of the input signal at PHINT5−DFIN.
PHINT5−DFIN phd C1185/1 dec [rpm] C1184/2 4 Master speed input
A positive value at PHINT5−DFIN increases the value at PHINT5−OUT
A negative value at PHINT5−DFIN decreases the value at
PHINT5−OUT
PHINT5−DENOM a C1189/2 dec [%] C1188/2 1 Denominator for evaluation of the input signal at PHINT5−DFIN.
PHINT5−TP−SPEED−LIM phd C1185/2 dec [rpm] C1184/3 4 Selection of a compensation speed.
The input signal is active if PHINT5−TP−SYNC−BUSY = HIGH and
C1740 = 1.
It is impermissible to select constant values (e.g. via free codes
(FCODE)).
PHINT5−TP−POS ph C1183/6 dec [inc] C1182/6 3 Distance of the touch probe position to the zero point of the integrator.
PHINT5−TP−ENABLE d C1181/5 bin C1180/5 2 HIGH: The touch probe signal is evaluated.
LOW: The touch probe signal is not evaluated.
PHINT5−TP−EDGE−SELEC d C1181/6 bin C1180/6 2 LOW: The HIGH−LOW edge of the input signal at X5/E4 or X5/E5 is
T evaluated.
HIGH: The LOW−HIGH edge of the input signal at X5/E4 or X5/E5 is
evaluated.
PHINT5−OUT ph Integrator position + offset of PHINT5−X−Offset.
The output signal is placed between 0 (fixedly) and the specified limit
value at PHINT5−H−VALUE.
PHINT5−DFOUT phd Speed signal + offset of PHINT5−X−Offset.
PHINT5−DFOUT−INIT d HIGH: The output PHINT5−DFOUT is within the limitation ±29999 rpm
PHINT5−X0 d LOW−HIGH edge: Zero crossing of the integrator. The zero crossing is
only signalised for one cycle (1 ms).
PHINT5−X−DIFF ph Outputs the difference between the integrator and the signal at
PHINT5−TP−POS if a touch probe pulse occurs.
The output only is effected if PHINT5−ENABLE−TP is set = HIGH.
PHINT5−TP−DIFF ph Outputs the distance between 2 successive touch probe pulses (relating
to the integrator)
PHINT5−TP−DIST ph Outputs the distance of the touch probe pulse to the zero point of the
integrator
PHINT5−TP−SYNC−BUSY d Touch probe evaluation:
LOW: No deviation measured, or the deviation has already been
compensated
HIGH: There is a deviation between the integrator and the input signal
at PHINT5−TP−POS that has not been compensated. The compensation
speed at PHINT5−TP−SPEED−LIM is activated if C1740 is set to 1.
LOW−HIGH edge: compensation process completed
PHINT5−TP−RECOGN d Signalises a recognised touch probe pulse.
LOW−HIGH edge: Compensation process completed. The signal is
output for one cycle (1 ms).

Function library
Function blocks
Range of functions
l Select touch probe mode ( 3−251)
l Evaluate touch probe signal edge ( 3−251)
l Activate touch probe evaluation ( 3−252)
l Compensate for a detected deviation( 3−252)
l Example of a mark synchronisation ( 3−254)
) Note!
touch probe function with PHINT5−TP−ENABLE = LOW during homing. ( 3−263)
3.2.78.1 Select touch probe mode

l C1186 = 0: terminal E4
– The input for the touch probe signal is terminal X5/E4. The signal refers to the function block
output MCTRL−PHI−ACT.
– The compensation function is activated immediately.
l C1186 = 1: terminal E5
– The input for the touch probe signal is terminal X5/E5. The signal refers to the master angle
at X9 (DFIN function block).
– The compensation function is activated immediately.
l C1186 = 2: rotary knife
– The input for the touch probe signal is terminal X5/E5. The signal refers to the master angle
at X9 (DFIN function block).
– The compensation function is activated at zero crossing.
– Important: For this function, you have to connect the input PHINT5−DFIN to the output
DFIN−OUT.
– Select this mode for applications with a rotary cutter.
) Note!
Save the settings with C0003 = 1 and switch the mains voltage off and on again.
l When the mark synchronisation is parameterised, the function block
automatically changes to the "Modulo" or "Limited traversing range" mode. Only
by mains switching the touch probe function is initialised with the mode selected.
3.2.78.2 Evaluate touch probe signal edge

Via the input PHINT5−TP−EDGE−SELECT you can set the edge evaluation for the terminals X5/E4 and
X5/E5.
l PHINT5−TP−EDGE−SELECT = LOW
– Only the HIGH−LOW edges of the touch probe signal are evaluated.
l PHINT5−TP−EDGE−SELECT = HIGH
– Only the LOW−HIGH edges of the touch probe signal are evaluated.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.78.3 Activate touch probe evaluation

Via the input PHINT5−ENABLE−TP you can activate or inhibit the evaluation of the touch probe
signals.
l PHINT5−ENABLE−TP = HIGH
– The touch probe signal is evaluated.
– The evaluated signal is output at PHINT5−TP−DIFF, PHINT5−TP−DIST and PHINT5−X−DIFF.
l PHINT5−ENABLE−TP = LOW
– The touch probe signal is not evaluated.
– The output signals at PHINT5−TP−DIFF, PHINT5−TP−DIST and PHINT5−X−DIFF are not
updated. The signal evaluated last is output.
3.2.78.4 Compensation of a recognised deviation

If a touch probe signal arrives, the deviation between the current value of the integrator and the signal
is determined at PHINT5−TP−POS and is output at PHINT5−X−DIFF. In C1740 you can set the source
for the compensation speed.
l C1740 = 0: code 1741/1
– Deviations that are recognised are compensated directly and immediately with the speed
defined in C1741/1.
– Value in C1741/1 = 0: no compensation of deviations.
– Via PHINT5−X−OFFSET you can apply an offset to the output signal at PHINT5−OUT.
l C1740 = 1: input PHINT5−TP−SPEED−LIM
– Deviations that are recognised are compensated with the defined speed at
– Signal at PHINT5−TP−SPEED−LIM = 0: no compensation of deviations.
– The input only is active if PHINT5−TP−SYNC−BUSY = High.
– The input signal solely takes effect on the integrator.
– Via PHINT5−X−OFFSET you can apply an offset to the output signal at PHINT5−OUT.
) Note!
l By separation of the functions "Measure the deviation" and "Compensate the
deviation", you can for instance measure material lengths.
l The compensation process can be controlled by selecting a profile at
l The PHINT5 function block does not contain a profile generator. The profiles have
to be generated via additional function blocks (e.g. RFGPH2 or RFGPH3). See
also example in fig. 3−205.
– Do not specify constant values at PHINT5−TP−SPEED−LIM (e.g. via free codes
(FCODE)).

Function library
Function blocks
RFGPH function block as profile generator for the compensation speed

PHINT5
DFIN-OUT DFIN OUT
FIXED100% NUM TP-DIFF
FIXED100% DENOM TP-DIST
SET X-DIFF
CDATA-ACTLEN H-VALUE DFOUT
FCODE C1476/1 TP-POS TP-SYNC-BUSY
X-OFFSET TP-RECOGN
RESET X0
RFGPH2, RFGPH3 LOAD DFOUT-INIT
RESET RFG-I=0 FIXED1 TP-ENABLE
0 STOP PHOUT TP-EDGE-SELECT
RFG-0 NOUT TP-SPEED-LIM
REL-SEL
SET
ACT
fb_phint5_2
Fig. 3−205 RFGPH function block as profile generator for the compensation speed
l The deviation determined between the integrator and the defined touch probe position (input
PHINT−TP−POS) is output as the shortest path at PHINT5−X−DIFF and is compensated via the
RFGPH2 (or RFGPH3) function block.
l Apply the value to be compensated to the input RFGPHx−ACT and activate the profile
generator by means of a HIGH−LOW edge at the input RFGPHx−STOP.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.78.5 Example of a mark synchronisation
3 AC / PE / xxx V / xx HZ
L L
i2 i3
i1
v2 d2 v3 d3
d1 v1
1
a2 a3
fb_phint5_1
Fig. 3−206 Principle of the mark synchronisation

Transmission of the master angle via system bus (CAN) or digital frequency
Register
v1 Speed of the material path
v2, v3 Speed of the material path ± correction
d1, d2, d3 Roller diameters
a2, a3 Distance of the touch probe sensor to the zero point
i1, i2, i3 Gearbox
l At input PHINT5−TP−POS the distance of the touch probe sensor to the zero point of the
integrator has to be set (a2, a3)
– The value has to be between 0 and the value at PHINT5−H−VALUE.
l When the touch probe signal occurs, the deviation between the value of the integrator and the
value at PHINT5−TP−POS is determined, is output at PHINT5−X−DIFF, and is compensated via
the mode set in C1740.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.79 Position memory (PSAVE)

One function block (PSAVE1) is available.
Purpose
Storage (mains−failure protected) of positions (master value and/or actual value) and comparison to
the actual values. After mains connection it can be checked whether the master value position or the
actual value position have changed. This is however only reasonable when using absolute value
encoders (resolvers or SinCos encoders).
C 1 4 3 0 /1
C 1 4 3 0 /2 P S A V E 1
C 1 4 3 1
P S A V E -O N P S A V E -M -H I
C 1 4 3 4 /1
C 1 4 3 5 /1 P S A V E -M -L O
C T R L
P S A V E -S A V E P S A V E -M -D IF F
C 1 4 3 4 /2
C 1 4 3 5 /2 P S A V E -M -S A V E
P S A V E -A C T -H I
C 1 4 3 6 /1 P S A V E -M P O S
P S A V E -A C T -L O
C 1 4 3 7 /1
P S A V E -A C T P O S P S A V E -A C T -D IF F
C 1 4 3 6 /2
P S A V E -A C T -S A V E
C 1 4 3 7 /2
Signal Source Note

PSAVE1−ON d 1435/1 bin 1434/1 2 HIGH = Comparison of inputs MPOS/ACTPOS with values saved and
output of difference
PSAVE1−SAVE d 1435/2 bin 1434/2 2 HIGH =
PSAVE−MPOS ph 1437/1 dec[inc] 1436/1 3 Input for master position
PSAVE−ACTPOS ph 1437/2 dec[inc] 1436/2 3 Input for actual position (e.g. rotor position)
PSAVE−M−HI d − − − HIGH = Input value > stored position
PSAVE−M−LO d − − − HIGH = Input value < stored position
PSAVE−ACT−HI d − − − HIGH = Input value > stored position
PSAVE−ACT−LO d − − − HIGH = Input value < stored position
PSAVE−M−DIFF ph − − − Position difference = Stored position − input
PSAVE−M−SAVE ph − − − Stored position of master drive
PSAVE−ACT−DIFF ph − − − Position difference = Stored position − input
PSAVE−ACT−SAVE ph − − − Stored position of cam drive
Function
l Store position value
l Compare actual position with values stored
3.2.79.1 Store position value

l With PSAVE−SAVE = HIGH data from the inputs PSAVE−MPOS and PSAVE−ACTPOS is
accepted and output at PSAVE−M−SAVE and PSAVE−ACT−SAVE. The reading and writing
processes are repeated cyclically (1000 1s ).
l The input data is stored if a H ³ L edge occurs at PSAVE−SAVE, i.e. they are available even if
the controller has been disconnected from the mains.
l When the mains is switched on again, the data is transferred to the main memory of the
controller and output at PSAVE−M−SAVE and PSAVE−ACT−SAVE.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.79.2 Compare actual position with values stored

l PSAVE−ON = HIGH:
– The inputs PSAVE−MPOS and PSAVE−ACTPOS are compared with the stored values. The
deviations are output at PSAVE−M−DIFF or PSAVE−ACT−DIFF.
PSAVE−M−DIFF + stored value * { PSAVE−MPOS }
PSAVE−ACT−DIFF + stored value * { PSAVE−ACTPOS }
– The evaluation of one of the channels can be suppressed by means of a code. In this case,
PSAVE−DIFF = 0
l PSAVE−ON = LOW:
– The outputs PSAVE−DIFF = 0.

The digital outputs are set according to the difference calculated (PSAVE−DIFF) if PSAVE−ON = HIGH.
l A hysteresis can be set via code:
– for MPOS C1430/1 in m−units
– for ACTPOS C1430/2 in s−units
l As long as −DIFF < ±C1430/x:
– −M−HI = LOW
– −M−LO = LOW
– ACT−HI = LOW
– ACT−LO = LOW
l If −DIFF pos. and > +C1430/x
– −M−LO = HIGH and/or
– ACT−LO = HIGH
l If −DIFF neg. and < −C1430/x
– −M−HI = HIGH and/or
– ACT−HI = HIGH
l If one channel is suppressed through code C1431, the outputs of the corresponding channel
are set to LOW.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
Filtering and delaying of analog signals.
C0640 PT1-1
PT1-1-IN PT1-1-OUT
C0641
C0642
Signal Source Note

PT1−1−IN a C0642 dec [%] C0641 1 1000 −
PT1−1−OUT a − − − − − −
Function
l The delay time T is set under C0640.
l The proportional coefficient is fixed at K = 1.
K=1
T t
Fig. 3−208 Delay time T of the first order delay element

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
The function block filters and smoothes speed signals. This serves to e.g. filter the digital frequency.
C0643 PT1-2
C0646/1
C0646/2
PT1-2-DFOUT
PT1-2-DFIN
C0644/1 PT1-2-DIFF
C0645/1
PT1-2-LIM
PT1-2-MEM
PT1-2-DISABLEFILTER
C0647/1
C0648/1
PT1-2-RESET
C0647/2
C0648/2
fb_pt1−2
Signal Source Note

PT1−2−DFIN phd C0645/1 dec [rpm] C0644/1 4 1000 −
PT1−2−DISABLEFILTER d C0648/1 bin C0647/1 2 1000 LOW = filter is on
HIGH = filter is off
PT1−2−RESET d C0648/2 bin C0647/2 2 1000 HIGH = overflow buffer is cleared. PT1−2−DFOUT is
immediately set to 0. The position gets lost.
PT1−2−DFOUT phd − − − − − Signal is limited to ±29999 rpm
PT1−2−DIFF ph − − − − − Outputs the phase displacement between input and
output signal.
PT1−2−LIM d − − − − − HIGH = signal at PT1−2−DFOUT is limited
PT1−2−MEM d − − − − − HIGH = overflow buffer still contains values.
A query is sensible if
PT1−2−DISABLEFILTER = HIGH.
Function
Jumps and variations of the input signal are smoothed via the PT1 behaviour without pulse/position
losses. An overflow buffer ensures that all increments of the input signal are output again at the
output.
) Note!
The overflow buffer behaves according to the cycle of numbers (32 bits).

Function library
Function blocks
Setting the filter time constant

C0643 serves to set the filter time constant T (delay time). The proportional coefficient is predefined
as K = 1.
Setting information
l The higher the value set, the greater the filter effect.
l The higher the value set, the greater the phase displacement between input and output signal.
K=1
T t
Fig. 3−210 Delay T of the first order delay element
Switching off filter and compensating phase displacement

The filter is switched on and off via the input PT1−2−DISABLEFILTER.
l PT1−2−DISABLEFILTER = LOW
– The filter is switched on.
l PT1−2−DISABLEFILTER = HIGH
– The filter is switched off. All increments in the filter and overflow buffer are still output.
– The input signal is directly output at the output.
) Note!
Always set the input PT1−2−DISABLEFILTER = HIGH
l when the controller is inhibited,
l during acceleration phases.
Compensation of the phase displacement when filter is on

C0646/1 serves to set the compensation of the phase displacement (compensating speed).
l Setting information
– The higher the value set, the greater the dynamics.
– The higher the value set, the worse the filter effect.
– If C0646/1 = 0, the position will be lost.
Compensation of the phase displacement when filter is off

C0646/2 serves to set a compensating speed to compensate the phase displacement between input
and output signal. The output phase displacement at PT1−2−DIFF is compensated "smoothly".
l Setting information
– The smaller the value set, the slower the compensation of the phase displacement.
– If C0646/2 = 0, the position will be lost.

Function library
Function blocks

Purpose
The FB provides a fail−safe connection for the selection of a rotation direction and the QSP function.
C0889/1 R/L/Q
R/L/Q-R R/L/Q-QSP
C0885
R/L/Q-L R/L/Q-R/L
C0886
C0889/2
Fig. 3−211 CW/CCW/QSP linking (R/L/Q)
Signal Source Note

R/L/Q−R d C0889/1 bin C0885 2 51 −
R/L/Q−L d C0889/2 bin C0886 2 52 −
R/L/Q−QSP d − − − − − −
R/L/Q−R/L d − − − − − −
Function
l After mains connection and simultaneous HIGH level at both inputs, the outputs are set as
follows:
Inputs Outputs
1 1 0 1
l The following truth table results if one of the inputs is set to LOW once after mains connection:
Inputs Outputs
0 0 0 1
1 0 0 0
0 1 1 0
1 1 unchanged unchanged
l If both inputs are set to HIGH during operation, the values at both outputs remain unchanged.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.83 Homing function (REFC)
Purpose
The homing function is used to bring the drive shaft to a specific position.
) Note!
First, select a predefined configuration in C0005 which already includes the REFC
function block. This ensures that all important signal connections are created
automatically. After this, adapt the configuration to your application.
C 0 9 2 5
R E F C -A C T P O S -IN
C 0 9 3 3
R E F C
C 0 9 2 6 /1 C 0 9 3 2 C 0 9 3 4
R E F C -P O S -L O A D C 0 9 3 0 C 0 9 3 5
C 0 9 2 4 C 0 9 3 1 C 0 9 3 6
C 0 9 2 7 /3
C 0 9 2 6 /3
R E F C -M A R K C 0 9 2 6 /4
C 0 9 2 1 C T R L R E F C -O K
C 0 9 2 7 /2
R E F C -B U S Y
R E F C -O N
C 0 9 2 0
C 0 9 2 7 /1
R E F C -N -S E T
R E F C -N -IN
C 0 9 2 3
C 0 9 2 9
R E F C -P S E T
R E F C -P H I-IN
C 0 9 2 2
C 0 9 2 8
R E F C -D F O U T
R E F C -D F IN
C 0 9 3 7 /1
C 0 9 3 8 /1
Fig. 3−212 Homing function (REFC)
Signal Source Note

REFC−ACTPOS−IN ph C0926/1 dec [inc] C0925 3 Loading value for the current position
(REFC−ACTPOS)
REFC−DFIN phd C0938/1 dec [rpm] C0937/ 4 Speed input
1
REFC−MARK d C0927/2 bin C0921 2 Homing switch
REFC−N−IN a C0929 dec [%] C0923 1 Speed setpoint in [%] of nmax C0011
REFC−ON d C0927/1 bin C0920 2 HIGH = start homing
REFC−PHI−IN ph C0928 dec [inc] C0922 3 Phase setpoint (contouring error for phase controller in FB
C0926/2 MCTRL)
REFC−POS−LOAD d C0927/3 bin C0924 2 LOW−HIGH edge = angle at the REFC−ACTPOS−IN input is
loaded in REFC−ACTPOS (starting value)
REFC−PSET ph − − − − Phase setpoint (contouring error for phase controller in FB
MCTRL)
REFC−BUSY d − − − − HIGH = homing function active
REFC−DFOUT phd − − − 4 Speed output
REFC−N−SET a − − − − Speed setpoint for n−controller
REFC−OK d − − − − HIGH = homing completed/homing known
Range of functions
l Homing
l Homing modes
l Control via input signals
l Speed/digital frequency input and output

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.83.1 Homing
l "Setting the reference once" is carried out for commissioning. For this, you enter the current
distance [s−units] of the tool to the machine zero point in C1367/1. This proecedure is
reasonable for machines with risk of collision).
– The function is carried out via the CCTRL or CCTRL2 function blocks. ( 3−71 or 3−79)
l A homing usually is carried out once after mains connection. By this, the home position of the
drive is found automatically. A homing is carried out via
– the REFC function block
– the CCTRL or CCTRL2 function blocks with the function "Set reference dynamically".
( 3−69 or 3−77)
Profile generator
The homing speed profile can be adapted to the application.
v Referenzpunkt-Offset C0934
C0935 C0936
C0936
t
REF-MARK Nullimpuls Referenzpunkt
Fig. 3−213 Homing speed profile
Code Meaning Note

C0930 Encoder−gearbox factor numerator (motor speed) Setting is required only if the actual value encoder is not
C0931 Encoder−gearbox factor denominator (encoder speed) mounted to the motor
C0933 Selection of the edge of the touch probe signal at X5/E4 Regarding the homing modes with touch probe functionality,
the TP edge is the reference point for the home position offset
C0934 Homing point offset = number of increments after the zero This reference applies: 65536 inc = 1 revolution. Selection up
pulse to 2140000000 inc possible
C0935 Homing speed Entry in [%] of nmax (C0011)
C0936 Homing acceleration/deceleration time Linear ramps
C0926/3 REFC−ACTPOS, current actual position Read only
C0926/4 REFC−TARGET, current target position Read only
The profile generator calculates the speed profile from the set profile parameters.
l Parameter changes are possible during homing.
– C0935 and C0936 become effective if REFC−ON = LOW.
l The drive should not be operated at the torque limit (MCTRL−MMAX = HIGH), otherwise the
drive cannot follow the speed profile.
– Increase acceleration / deceleration time C0936 until MCTRL−MMAX is no longer activated.
l The phase controller in the MCTRL function block must be switched active.

Function library
Function blocks
3.2.83.2 Reference run modes

The home position is defined by:
l the homing mode C0932
l the signal edge of the zero pulse or touch probe signal C0933
l the home position offset C0934
) Note!
For position feedback via resolver, the zero position (depending on the rotor
attached to the motor) applies instead of the zero pulse, and, accordingly, the touch
probe phase for homing via touch probe.
Precondition for an error−free homing function
) Note!
Parameterising the signal edge via C0933 only is effective if the touch probe
function of the PHINT5 and CCTRL or CCTRL2 function blocks is deactivated.
Otherwise the signal edge for homing is not defined via C0933, but via the setting on
the activated function blocks.
l The touch probe function is deactivated if PHINT5−TP−ENABLE and
CCTRL−TPIN/E4, or CCTRL2−TPIN/E4 are set to LOW.
l Fig. 3−214 shows a connection example for deactivating the touch probe function
during homing.
CCTRL2
REFC
NOT
PHINT5
fb_refc_1
Fig. 3−214 Connection example for deactivating the touch probe function during homing

Function library
Function blocks
Homing with homing switch to zero pulse/zero position

Behind the negative edge of the homing switch REFC−MARK, the home position is at the next zero
pulse/zero position plus the home position offset:
l Mode 0 (C0932 = 0):
– Enter positive homing offset C0934.
C0934
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
REF-MARK
Fahrtstrecke
Fahrtrichtung
Fig. 3−215 Homing with zero pulse/zero position: mMve to the home position in CW rotation.
l Mode 1 (C0932 = 1):

– Enter negative homing offset C0934.
C0934
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
REF-MARK
Fahrtstrecke
Fahrtrichtung Startpunkt
Referenzpunkt
Fig. 3−216 Homing with zero pulse/zero position: mMve to the home position in CCW rotation.

Function library
Function blocks
Homing with home switch and touch probe (TP)

Behind the negative edge of the homing switch REFC−MARK, the home position is at the touch probe
signal (terminal X5/E4) plus the home position offset:
l Mode 6 (C0932 = 6):
C0934
X5/E4
REF-MARK
Fahrtstrecke
Fahrtrichtung
Fig. 3−217 Homing with touch probe: Move to the home position in CW rotation.
l Mode 7 (C0932 = 7):

Homing with touch probe (TP)

The home position is at the next touch probe signal (terminal X5/E4) plus the home position offset.
l Mode 8 (C0932 = 8):
l Mode 9 (C0932 = 9):

Function library
Function blocks
Direct homing
The home position is on the home position offset.
l Mode 20 (C0932 = 20):
– The drive moves from the actual position (REF−ACTPOS) to the home position immediately
after the activation (REFC−ON = HIGH).
– The actual position (REFC−ACTPOS) can previously be loaded with the input value
REFC−ACTPOS−IN.
– The travel path and the direction of travel result from the actual position (REFC−ACTPOS)
and the set home position offset (C0934).
Referenzpunktoffset (C0934)
REF-ACTPOS Fahrtstrecke
Fahrtstrecke
0 Startpunkt Fahrtrichtung Referenzpunkt
Fig. 3−218 Direct homing; move to the home position in CW rotation
l Mode 21 (C0932 = 21) as mode 20, but in addition:

– The actual position (REFC−ACTPOS) is saved during mains disconnection and is loaded
again at mains connection.
3.2.83.3 Control via input signals

l REFC−ON = LOW−HIGH edge starts homing
– The input must remain on HIGH until the end of the homing mode. Homing is aborted when
the input is set to LOW before reaching the home position.
l REFC−ON = LOW interrupts homing
– The drive is decelerated to zero speed along the ramp set under C0936.
– The inputs REFC−N−IN and REFC−PHI−IN are set for the outputs REFC−N−SET and
REFC−

90 001 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

90 001 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

90 001 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EDKVS93−01

9300 0.37 ... 11 kW

EVS9321−xx ... EVS9326−xx

Connections and interfaces

1 About this documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

4 Troubleshooting and fault elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

1 About this documentation

1.1 Document history

What is new / what has changed?

1.2 Target group

This documentation is directed at qualified skilled personnel according to IEC 60364.

1.3 Validity information

... 9300 servo controllers as of nameplate data:

Type no. / rated power

9321 = 0.37 kW 0.37 kW

9322 = 0.75 kW 0.75 kW

9323 = 1.5 kW 1.5 kW

9324 = 3.0 kW 3.0 kW

9325 = 5.5 kW 5.5 kW

P= Servo position controller

T= Servo PLC technology

V100 = For IT mains

V104 = With "safe standstill" function and for IT mains

1.4 Conventions used

This documentation uses the following conventions to distinguish between different

1.5 Notes used

Pictograph and signal word Meaning

Note! Important note to ensure troublefree operation

Tip! Useful tip for simple handling

 Reference to another documentation

Special safety instructions and application notes for UL and UR

2.1 General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers

(in accordance with Low−Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC)

For your personal safety

Maintenance and servicing

2.2 Thermal motor monitoring

2.2.1 Forced ventilated or naturally ventilated motors

Calculate release time and I2 x t load

ȡ ȣ IMot Actual motor current (C0054)

Formulae for I2 x t load Information

Read release time in the diagram

2.2.2 Self−ventilated motors

Effect of code C0129/x

Fig. 2−2 Working point in the range of characteristic lowering

Calculate release time and I2 x t load

Formulae for I2 x t load Information

2.3 Residual hazards

Protection of the machine/system

2.4 Safety instructions for the installation according to UL

3.1 Parameter setting with the XT EMZ9371BC keypad

Plugging in the keypad

3.1.1 General data and operating conditions

3.1.2 Installation and commissioning

3.1.3 Display elements and function keys

3.1.4 Changing and saving parameters

Step Key Action

Step Key Action

3.1.5 Loading a parameter set

Step Key Action

Reference to another documentation

Note! Important note to ensure troublefree operation